Eternity V8 System Manual

ETERNITY
System Manual
ETERNITY
Integrated Enterprise Voice Switch
with Universal Connectivity
System Manual
Documentation Disclaimer
Matrix Telecom reserves the right to make changes in the design or components of the product as engineering
and manufacturing may warrant. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This is a general documentation for all models of the product. The product may not support all the features and
facilities described in the documentation.
Information in this documentation may change from time to time. Matrix Telecom reserves the right to revise
information in this publication for any reason without prior notice. Matrix Telecom makes no warranties with
respect to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties. While every precaution has been taken in
the preparation of this system manual, Matrix Telecom assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither
is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
Neither Matrix Telecom nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for
damages, losses, costs or expenses incurred by the purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident, misuse or
abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs or alterations to this product or failure to strictly
comply with Matrix Telecom's operating and maintenance instructions.
Copyright
All rights reserved. No part of this system manual may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means
without the prior written consent of Matrix Telecom.
Version 8
Release date: December 16, 2009
Contents
Section 1: Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 9
Welcome........................................................................................................................................................... 11
Know Your ETERNITY...................................................................................................................................... 15
Installing ETERNITY......................................................................................................................................... 35
Installing ETERNITY GE................................................................................................................................... 46
Installing ETERNITY ME................................................................................................................................. 104
Installing ETERNITY PE................................................................................................................................. 175
Section 2: Features and Facilities .................................................................................................................... 219
Abbreviated Dialing......................................................................................................................................... 221
Access Codes................................................................................................................................................. 225
Account Codes................................................................................................................................................ 243
Alarms............................................................................................................................................................. 245
Alternate Number Dialing................................................................................................................................ 254
Answer Signaling on SLT................................................................................................................................ 257
Answer Supervision on TWT .......................................................................................................................... 258
Auto Answer.................................................................................................................................................... 260
Auto Call Back (ACB)...................................................................................................................................... 261
Auto Redial ..................................................................................................................................................... 262
Automated Control Applications...................................................................................................................... 264
Automatic Number Translation ....................................................................................................................... 267
Background Music (BGM)............................................................................................................................... 269
Backup-SMDR................................................................................................................................................ 271
Backup-System Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 276
Backup-System Software................................................................................................................................ 280
Barge-In.......................................................................................................................................................... 284
Behind the PBX Applications .......................................................................................................................... 285
Call Back on Mobile Port................................................................................................................................. 287
Call Budget ..................................................................................................................................................... 290
Call Budget on Trunk ...................................................................................................................................... 292
Call Chaining................................................................................................................................................... 299
Call Cost Calculation (CCC) ........................................................................................................................... 300
Call Cost Display............................................................................................................................................. 322
Call Disconnection Tone Detection................................................................................................................. 323
Call Duration Control (CDC) ........................................................................................................................... 326
Call Duration Display ...................................................................................................................................... 330
Call Forward.................................................................................................................................................... 331
Call Forward-Remote...................................................................................................................................... 335
Call Hold ......................................................................................................................................................... 336
Call Park ......................................................................................................................................................... 339
Call Pick Up .................................................................................................................................................... 341
Call Progress Tones ....................................................................................................................................... 343
Call Splitting.................................................................................................................................................... 350
Call Taping...................................................................................................................................................... 351
Call Transfer ................................................................................................................................................... 352
Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) ........................................................................................ 356
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) ........................................................................................................... 357
Cancel All Station Features ............................................................................................................................ 359
Central Ringer................................................................................................................................................. 360
Class of Service (COS)................................................................................................................................... 361
CLI Based Routing.......................................................................................................................................... 366
Clock Synchronization .................................................................................................................................... 368
Closed User Group (CUG).............................................................................................................................. 370
Closed User Group-With Exchange ID........................................................................................................... 374
Communication Ports...................................................................................................................................... 377
Conference-3 Party......................................................................................................................................... 381
Conference Dial-In.......................................................................................................................................... 384
Conference-Multiparty..................................................................................................................................... 387
Conflict Dialing ................................................................................................................................................ 393
Continued Dialing............................................................................................................................................ 394
Conversation Recording.................................................................................................................................. 395
Customer Emergency Services Identification Dialing ..................................................................................... 396
Customer Name.............................................................................................................................................. 397
Daylight Saving Time (DST)............................................................................................................................ 398
DDI Routing Table........................................................................................................................................... 403
Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port ................................................................................................................... 405
Default Settings............................................................................................................................................... 407
Department Call .............................................................................................................................................. 412
Dialed Number Directory................................................................................................................................. 415
Digest Authentication ...................................................................................................................................... 416
Digital Input Port (DIP) .................................................................................................................................... 418
Digital Key Phone-Operation........................................................................................................................... 420
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming .................................................................................................... 432
Digital Output Port (DOP)................................................................................................................................ 447
Direct Dialing-In (DDI) ..................................................................................................................................... 449
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ............................................................................................................................. 451
Direct Inward System Access (DISA).............................................................................................................. 456
Direct Station Selection Console..................................................................................................................... 461
Directory Dialing by Name .............................................................................................................................. 466
Disconnect Information on TWT...................................................................................................................... 467
Disconnect Signaling on SLT.......................................................................................................................... 469
Distinctive Rings.............................................................................................................................................. 470
Do Not Disturb (DND) ..................................................................................................................................... 472
DS1 Trunks ..................................................................................................................................................... 475
Dynamic Lock.................................................................................................................................................. 512
E&M Connectivity............................................................................................................................................ 514
E&M Features ................................................................................................................................................. 517
E&M Feature Template................................................................................................................................... 523
E1 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 526
Emergency Detection and Reporting .............................................................................................................. 530
Emergency Dialing.......................................................................................................................................... 531
External List .................................................................................................................................................... 534
External Music................................................................................................................................................. 537
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)............................................................................................................................ 538
Flash Timer ..................................................................................................................................................... 539
Flashing on Trunks.......................................................................................................................................... 540
Flexible Numbers ............................................................................................................................................ 541
Floor Service................................................................................................................................................... 543
Follow Me........................................................................................................................................................ 545
Forced Answer ................................................................................................................................................ 546
Forced Call Disconnection .............................................................................................................................. 547
Gateway Application-Answer Signaling .......................................................................................................... 548
GPAX Application............................................................................................................................................ 550
GPAX Billing.................................................................................................................................................... 553
GPAX Flexible Numbers ................................................................................................................................. 554
Help Desk........................................................................................................................................................ 555
Hold................................................................................................................................................................. 556
Hot Desking..................................................................................................................................................... 558
Hotline............................................................................................................................................................. 559
IC Reference Table......................................................................................................................................... 561
Incoming Call Management ............................................................................................................................ 563
Internal Call Restriction................................................................................................................................... 565
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) ............................................................................................... 567
Interrupt Request (IR) ..................................................................................................................................... 568
ISDN-An Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 569
ISDN-BRI ........................................................................................................................................................ 573
ISDN-PRI ........................................................................................................................................................ 586
Jeeves............................................................................................................................................................. 589
Key Board Macro ............................................................................................................................................ 598
Last Caller Recall ............................................................................................................................................ 600
Last Number Redial ........................................................................................................................................ 601
Least Cost Routing-An Introduction................................................................................................................ 602
Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection....................................................................................................... 604
Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based........................................................................................... 605
Least Cost Routing-Number Based ................................................................................................................ 608
Least Cost Routing-SP to SP.......................................................................................................................... 610
Least Cost Routing-Time Based..................................................................................................................... 612
Live Call Screening......................................................................................................................................... 614
Live Call Supervision ...................................................................................................................................... 615
Logical Partition .............................................................................................................................................. 616
MAC Address Cloning..................................................................................................................................... 619
Magneto Trunk Port ........................................................................................................................................ 621
Master Time Zone........................................................................................................................................... 624
Meet Me Paging.............................................................................................................................................. 625
Message Wait ................................................................................................................................................. 626
Missed Calls.................................................................................................................................................... 629
Mobile Port...................................................................................................................................................... 630
Multi-Stage Dialing.......................................................................................................................................... 635
Music on Hold (MOH) ..................................................................................................................................... 639
Mute................................................................................................................................................................ 641
Name Programming........................................................................................................................................ 642
Network Selection for Mobile Port................................................................................................................... 646
OFF-Hook Alert............................................................................................................................................... 648
OG Reference Table....................................................................................................................................... 649
OG Trunk Bundle............................................................................................................................................ 651
OG Trunk Bundle Group................................................................................................................................. 653
Operator.......................................................................................................................................................... 658
Paging............................................................................................................................................................. 660
Peer-to-Peer Calling ....................................................................................................................................... 663
PLCC-An Introduction..................................................................................................................................... 668
Printer Port...................................................................................................................................................... 675
Priority............................................................................................................................................................. 676
Privacy ............................................................................................................................................................ 679
Programming the System............................................................................................................................... 682
Programming Using a Computer .................................................................................................................... 685
QSIG............................................................................................................................................................... 687
Quick Dial........................................................................................................................................................ 695
Raid................................................................................................................................................................. 696
RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller) ............................................................................................................ 697
Real Time Clock (RTC)................................................................................................................................... 701
Region Code................................................................................................................................................... 705
Reminder ........................................................................................................................................................ 709
Remote Programming..................................................................................................................................... 718
Room Monitor ................................................................................................................................................. 720
Routing Group................................................................................................................................................. 721
RTC Synchronization...................................................................................................................................... 725
Security Dialing and Reporting ....................................................................................................................... 726
Selective Port Access ..................................................................................................................................... 731
Self Ring Test ................................................................................................................................................. 732
SIM PIN........................................................................................................................................................... 733
SIP Trunk Parameters .................................................................................................................................... 734
SIP Trunk Status............................................................................................................................................. 745
SLT Hardware Template................................................................................................................................. 746
Static Routing Table........................................................................................................................................ 752
Software Port and Hardware ID...................................................................................................................... 755
Station Advanced Feature Template .............................................................................................................. 759
Station Basic Feature Template...................................................................................................................... 764
Station Group.................................................................................................................................................. 767
Station Message Detail Recording-Online ...................................................................................................... 769
Station Message Detail Recording.................................................................................................................. 781
Station Message Detail Recording-Posting..................................................................................................... 782
Station Message Detail Recording-Report ...................................................................................................... 814
Station Message Detail Recording-Storage.................................................................................................... 825
System Activity Log......................................................................................................................................... 829
System Activity Log Display ............................................................................................................................ 833
System Administrator (SA) Mode.................................................................................................................... 834
System Debug................................................................................................................................................. 835
System Engineer (SE) Mode........................................................................................................................... 838
System Fault Log ............................................................................................................................................ 839
System Fault Log Display ............................................................................................................................... 842
System Parameters......................................................................................................................................... 843
System Security .............................................................................................................................................. 850
T1 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 852
T1 RBS Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 858
Telnet .............................................................................................................................................................. 866
Time Tables .................................................................................................................................................... 870
Time Zone Display .......................................................................................................................................... 876
Toll Control ...................................................................................................................................................... 877
Trunk Access Group (TAG)............................................................................................................................. 879
Trunk Auto Answer.......................................................................................................................................... 880
Trunk Feature Template.................................................................................................................................. 882
Trunk Landing Group (TLG)............................................................................................................................ 886
Trunk Reservation........................................................................................................................................... 888
TWT Hardware Template................................................................................................................................ 889
User Absent/Present ....................................................................................................................................... 901
User Password................................................................................................................................................ 902
Video Call ........................................................................................................................................................ 903
Virtual Station.................................................................................................................................................. 904
VLAN Tagging................................................................................................................................................. 905
Voice Help....................................................................................................................................................... 907
Voice Mail Integration...................................................................................................................................... 908
Voice Message Applications ........................................................................................................................... 911
VoIP Calling .................................................................................................................................................... 917
VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters....................................................................................................................... 918
VoIP Ethernet Port Status............................................................................................................................... 927
Walk-In Class of Service................................................................................................................................. 928
Section 3: Appendices....................................................................................................................................... 929
Appendix A: Technical Specification............................................................................................................... 931
Appendix B: Packing List ................................................................................................................................ 939
Appendix C: How to Make the Telecom Earth ................................................................................................ 948
Appendix D: Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................................... 950
Appendix E: Features at a Glance .................................................................................................................. 952
Appendix F: System Commands..................................................................................................................... 957
Appendix G: Regulatory Information............................................................................................................... 984
Appendix H: Open Source Licensing Terms and Conditions .......................................................................... 995
Appendix I: Acronyms ................................................................................................................................... 1002
Appendix J: Warranty Statement .................................................................................................................. 1005
Index............................................................................................................................................................. 1007
Section 1: Introduction
Matrix
ETERNITY V8 System Manual 11
Welcome
Thank you for choosing the Matrix ETERNITY! We hope you will make optimum use of this intelligent, integrated Voice
Switch. Please read this document carefully to get acquainted with the product before installing and operating it.
About this System Manual
This system manual provides detailed information and instructions for installing and operating the PBX, ETERNITY.
Those who require instructions for quick installation and operation of this system, may refer to the ETERNITY Quick Start
and the ETERNITY User Card shipped with the system.
You may also refer the User Cards for the proprietary digital key phone Eon (Eon42 and Eon48) shipped with the system,
for instructions on using the features of the ETERNITY.
This is a common documentation for all models of ETERNITY - ETERNITY ME, GE and PE and their variants.
This document is primarily for the Enterprise Application of the ETERNITY.
A separate System Manual is provided for the Hospitality Application of the ETERNITY.
This manual includes sufficient information to install and operate the Voice Mail System Card and to integrate the
external Voice Mail System. For more details about the installation, configuration and operation, refer the separate
Manual provided with the VMS Card.
Intended Audience
This System Manual is aimed at:
System Engineers, who will install, maintain and support the ETERNITY. System Engineers are persons who
customize the system configuration to meet the requirements of the organization/users. It is assumed that they are
experienced in installing PBX, are familiar with telecom wiring technology, how it works, and the various technical
terms and functions associated with it. The SE must have undergone training in the programming of the ETERNITY.
No one, other than the System Engineer is permitted to make any alterations to the configuration of the ETERNITY.
System Administrators, who are persons who will operate the ETERNITY. Generally an operator/receptionist in an
organization, or the staff manning the reception or front desk area of the establishment are selected as System
Administrators.
It is assumed that the System Administrators have some previous experience in operating a PBX and its consoles - a
digital key phone and Direct Station Selection Consoles. The System Administrators are not expected to install and
program the PBX, but only the routine jobs and features that are specific to them like generating SMDR reports,
Setting report filters, programming the features, Setting Alarms, reminders, etc.
Users, persons/organizations who will use the extensions/stations of the ETERNITY. They may be executives,
include personnel of small and medium businesses, large enterprises, front desk and service staff of Hotels/Motels,
hospitals, and other commercial and public organizations/institutions.
Organization of this Document
This System Manual contains 3 Sections:
Section 1: Introduction
This section contains the following topics:
Welcome - gives an overview of this document, its purpose, intended audience, organization, terms and
conventions used to present information and instructions.
Matrix
12 ETERNITY V8 System Manual
Know Your ETERNITY - describes the system and its design, application scenarios, the available models, the
interfaces, and the hardware.
Installing ETERNITY - gives step-by-step instructions for preparing for and installing the ETERNITY in general,
like setting up the main distribution frames for the wiring, the safety measures for protecting the system and
persons handling the installation and maintenance.
Installing ETERNITY ME - gives step-by-step instructions for installing the ETERNITY ME and its variants,
inserting the cards, connecting the cables lines and powering ON the system.
Installing ETERNITY GE - provides instructions for installing the ETERNITY GE and its variants, inserting the
cards, connecting the cables lines and powering ON the system.
Installing ETERNITY PE - describes the installation of the ETERNITY PE and its variants, inserting the cards,
connecting the cables lines and powering ON the system.
Section 2: Features and Facilities
This Section describes in detail, each feature and facility offered by the ETERNITY. This includes a description of the
feature/facility, how it works, and how to program the feature/facility.
The feature description is arranged alphabetically by Feature Name to make it easy for you to locate the description you
want to look up.
Section 3: Appendix
This section contains additional information related to the document: Technical Specifications of the Product, Packing
List, System Commands, Feature Access Codes at a Glance, Troubleshooting FAQs, Acronyms, Regulatory information,
and the Product Warranty Statement, and others.
How to Read this System Manual
This document is organized in a manner to help you get familiar with the PBX, learn how to install it, connect it to the
various networks and interfaces, and external devices, and start the system and use the features.
This System Manual is presented in a manner that will help you find the information you need easily and quickly.
You may use the table of contents and the Index to navigate through this document to the relevant topic or information
you want to look up.
Instructions
The instructions in this document are written in a numbered, step-by-step format, as follows. Each step, its outcome
and indication/notification, wherever they occur, have been described.
Access Codes
Access codes are strings of digits dialed by a station to
Call another station, Department Group,
Grab a trunk line
Turn On/OFF a Digital Analog Port
Use a Feature, e.g. Call Block, Call Forward
The Access Codes provided in the instructions throughout this document, are default access codes. It is possible to
change the Access Codes according to user requirement and preferences. Verify with the Installer/System Engineer,
if the default Access Codes have been changed, and use the codes programmed by the System Engineer. For more
information, read the topic "Access Codes" in this document.
Matrix
Notices
The following symbols have been used for notices to draw your attention to important items.
Important: to indicate something that requires your special attention or to remind you of something you
might need to do when you are using the system.
Caution: to indicate an action or condition that is likely to result in malfunction or damage to the system or
your property.
Warning: to indicate a hazard or an action that will cause damage to the system and or cause bodily harm to
the user.
Tip: to indicate a helpful hint giving you an alternative way to operate the system or carry out a procedure, or
use a feature more efficiently.
Important Point
Under this sub-heading, you are provided important information related to the feature/facility, feature interaction,
configuration, etc. that requires your special attention.
Relevant Topics
Under this sub-heading provided in each feature/facility description, you will find references to topics that a related to
that feature/facility, that you are currently referring to.
Terminology used in this System Manual
The technical terms and Acronyms used in this Manual are standard terms, commonly used in the telecommunications
and data communications industry. Considering the broad group of intended users of this manual, wherever possible,
use of jargon has been avoided.
Acronyms have been defined in the text and a list of the same is appended.
Some of the terms specific to this Manual that you will encounter are defined below:
The words 'ETERNITY', 'System', 'PBX' are used interchangeably and synonymously to mean all models of ETERNITY.
Wherever necessary, the model and variant names are used.

Called party/Callee: the person to whom the call is made from any extension of the ETERNITY.
Calling party/Caller: the person who makes a call to any extension of the ETERNITY.
CO Network/CO Lines: The public telephone exchange.
Digital Key Phone (DKP): it is the proprietary digital key phone of Matrix, Eon, supplied with the ETERNITY. The
term 'Digital Key Phone' refers to all models of EON.
DS1: this term refers to the T1E1PRI Port of the ETERNITY and is used interchangeably.
Enterprise Application/Features - pertaining to the general and special telephone and call management features
required by business establishments, public and private organizations.
Extension: it is the port of the PBX to which a telephone instrument is connected.
External Calls: calls made from any extension of the ETERNITY to numbers outside the Hotel (PBX network) and
calls received on any extension from outside numbers. These may be calls within the local area, long distance or
international calls.
External Numbers: numbers of parties/individuals outside the PBX or PBX network.
Matrix
Hospitality Application/Features: pertaining to the special telephone and guest/patient management features
required by accommodation establishments like hotels and hospitals.
Internal Calls: calls made from and received by one extension to another extension of the ETERNITY.
Internal numbers: same as extension/station numbers.
Port: the physical interfaces on the cards for trunk lines and stations lines.
Service Provider: the providers of telecom network lines - POTS, PSTN, GSM, ISDN PRI and ISDN BRI.
Single Line Telephone (SLT): any standard two-wire telephone attached as extensions of the ETERNITY.
Station: an extension of the ETERNITY, it may be a Digital Key Phone or an SLT.
System Administrator Commands/SA Commands: number strings dialed from the System Administrator access/
mode to operate features or set/cancel features for other extensions.
System Commands/SE Commands: number strings dialed from the System Engineer access/mode to program the
system features/functions.
TWT trunks: Two-wire trunks, i.e. analog trunk lines from the POTS network.
Using this Manual, we hope, you will be able to set up, operate and make optimum use of this feature packed PBX.
If you encounter any technical problems, please contact your Dealer/reseller or Matrix Support team.
Matrix
Know Your ETERNITY
Introduction
The Matrix ETERNITY is an Integrated Enterprise Voice Switch expandable up to 516 user ports. It is a unique
convergence of innovative switching technology and intelligent software features.
The system is built on PCM/TDM, 100 percent non-blocking, digital technology, providing high density switching, and is
powered by a 32-bit RISC processor and distributed processing. Ensuring reliable, efficient, and unrestricted
simultaneous communication (incoming and outgoing) by all users.
Universal Connectivity
ETERNITY offers Universal Connectivity, working with all major telecom networks: POTS, ISDN BRI/PRI, T1/E1, GSM/
CDMA, VoIP, E&M, and Magneto. So, you have access to multiple telecom networks on a single platform. The system's
intelligent Least Cost Routing logic diverts your calls through the appropriate network, ensuring least possible call cost.
Besides Operator consoles (Digital Key phones, Direct Station Selection consoles) and standard telephones, you can
interface ETERNITY with different types of external devices such as a Fax machine, an external Voice Mail System, an
external music source, a public address system.
You can operate security devices with the ETERNITY. Any sensor device such as a smoke detector, an object sensor, a
glass break detector, can be connected to the ETERNITY to instigate a hooter, siren connected to the ETERNITY.
You can also operate several automated control applications such as a door lock, lights glow signboards, bells, water
pump, and the like.
ETERNITY supports video conferencing and data connectivity. You can interface any standard video phone conference
unit with suitable ISDN Interface with ETERNITY ISDN T1E1PRI and BRI cards.
Flexibility and Scalability
ETERNITY is designed to support both homogenous and Hybrid Mix Port cards on its Universal Slots. The Hybrid cards
offer all possible communication interface options to match exactly your communication requirement.
The system is also designed to provide high level of flexibility and scalability to meet your future communication needs.
The Universal Slot platform and the modular design of the cards allow you to start with the minimum required
configuration and expand the system capacity later, by adding more cards to the universal slots. So, you can invest
progressively in scaling up the system as the communication needs of your organization grow.
Cost Saving and Productivity Enhancing Features
Key features like Multi-party Conference, Auto Attendant, Digital Input Port, Digital Output Port, Analog Input Port,
Analog Output Port, Remote programming, SMDR Buffer with a large capacity, that normally warrant additional
investment in most other brands, are built into the system.
Intelligent features like Auto Attendant, CLI based Routing and Dial by Name ensure efficient call management and
prompt response to callers.
Least Cost Routing and Call Budgeting help reduce communication cost and enhance productivity.
ETERNITY can route a VoIP call on to GSM or T1E1PRI. In the same way, a call can be routed either on VoIP, GSM or
POTS ports. Further, you can select Fixed or Least Cost Routing to route outgoing calls. ETERNITY can handle calls on
all ports simultaneously, allowing full traffic on all ports.
ETERNITY can work as an adjunct to your existing telephony infrastructure, as a Gateway, saving you the cost of
equipment replacement, wiring and installation, while giving you Universal Connectivity and a host of intelligent features.
Matrix
Redundancy
To reduce down time and provide uninterrupted communication, the ETERNITY ME supports redundancy option in the
ETERNITY ME10SR variant for the three cards that are critical to its functioning: The Power Supply Card
1
, the Master
Card and the Switch Card. There are two cards of each on the ETERNITY ME10SR. When the active card fails, the
standby card takes over the control.
Hot Swap
With the Hot Swap feature
2
you can remove a card and insert it back without switching off the system. So, you can
replace a faulty card with a functional one without affecting the functioning of the system.
Key Features
Account Codes
Toll Control
Auto Attendant
Automatic Call Distribution
Class of Service
CLI Based Routing
Closed User Group
Conference- 21-Party (ETERNITY ME),
Conference- 15-Party in (ETERNITY GE and ETERNITY PE6SP)
Conference- 6-Party (ETERNITY PE3SS, PE3SP)
Emergency Call Detection and Reporting
External Music Port
Hospitality features (for Hotels and Hospitals)
Hot Desking
Hot-Swap
Least Cost Routing
PAS Port
PMS Interface
CAS Interface
Priority
Redundancy (optional)
Relay Port
RS232C Port
Security Dialer
SMDR Reports
System Activity Log
System Fault Log
Universal Slots
Video Conferencing
Voice Applications
Voice Mail
Web-based Programming
Also refer Appendix A for a complete list of Hardware and Software features and technical specifications.
Easy Installation and Operation
ETERNITY is easy to install and operate. The universal slot architecture allows easy installation and removal of cards.
The built-in web server Jeeves allows you to configure the system parameters and features on site and also from a
remote location using any Internet browser.
1. Redundancy is supported only for the PS48V Power Supply card! It is not supported for the PS UNI Power Supply Card. Refer the
topic Power Supply Card to know more. ETERNITY GE and PE do not support Redundancy.
2. The Hot Swap feature is supported for all cards except Power Supply card in both ETERNITY ME10S and ME16S. The ETERNITY
GE and PE variants do not support Hot Swap.
Matrix
Applications of ETERNITY
The Matrix ETERNITY can be deployed in small to large enterprises and institutions: manufacturing units, corporate
offices, banking and financial institutions, software firms, shopping malls, hospitals, hotels-motels, in power line carrier
communication of electric and other utilities, call centers, in institutions and, as group PBX (GPAX).
The ETERNITY can work as a Gateway with the existing telephony infrastructure - TDM PBX, IP PBX - as Universal
Gateway for Calling Card Operators, Internet Telephony Service Providers (ITSP).
Illustrated in the following are various scenarios where the ETERNITY finds application.
Enterprise Application
Hotel Application
Matrix
Closed User Group Application
Matrix
Power Line Carrier Communication Application
Universal Gateway Application
Matrix
Matrix

Models of ETERNITY
The Matrix ETERNITY in available in three models: ETERNITY ME, ETERNITY GE and ETERNITY PE. Each model has
variants with different configurations.
ETERNITY ME - For medium and large organizations
ETERNITY ME16S
16 universal slots
516 user ports
ETERNITY ME10S
10 universal slots
324 user ports
ETERNITY ME10SR
10 universal slots
324 user ports
Redundancy option
Available as ETERNITY ME 16SAC with
AC power supply and ETERNITY ME
16SDC with DC power supply.
Available as ETERNITY ME 10SAC with
AC power supply and ETERNITY ME
10SDC with DC power supply.
Matrix
ETERNITY GE - For small and medium organizations
ETERNITY PE - For small and growing organizations
Hardware Overview
ETERNITY ME
The Enclosure
The enclosure of ETERNITY ME consists of 'fixed' and universal slots. The fixed slots are occupied by specific cards -
Power Supply Card, Master Card, Switch Card - and cannot be changed, whereas in the universal slots, you can install
any of the various cards.
The slot connectors are located on the motherboard on the backplane of the enclosure. Each slot has guide rails for
inserting the cards.
Given below are design of the enclosure and the position of the slots on each model of ETERNITY ME.
ETERNITY GE12S
12 universal slots
240 user ports
ETERNITY GE6S
6 universal slots
120 user ports
ETERNITY GE 3S
3 universal slots
60 user ports
ETERNITY PE6SP
6 universal slots
48 user ports
ETERNITY PE3SP
3 universal slots
24 user ports
ETERNITY PE3SS
3 universal slots
24 user ports
Matrix
ETERNITY ME16S
In the ETERNITY ME16S, the extreme left slot is reserved for the Power Supply card, the extreme right is reserved for
the Master card, and the second last slot is reserved for the Switch Card. The slots between these fixed slots are the 16
universal slots to fit the other cards.
ETERNITY ME10S
In the ETERNITY ME10S, the first three slots from extreme left slot are reserved for the Power Supply card, the Master
Card and the Switch Card respectively. The remaining slots are the 10 universal slots.
ETERNITY ME10SR (with Redundancy Option)
The ETERNITY ME10SR, which offers the redundancy option, has the same organization of the fixed and universal slots
as the ME10S variant, starting with the Power Supply Card on the extreme left. Only, the number of slots exceeds on
account of the second Power Supply Card, Master Card, and Switch Card, provided in this variant to support the
Redundancy feature.
Power
Supply
Card
Master
Card
Switch Card
16 Universal Slots
01 16
Power
Supply
Card
Master
Card
Switch
Card
10 Universal Slots
01 10
Primary Master Card
10 Universal Slots
01 10
Secondary Master Card
Primary Power
Supply Card
Secondary Power
Supply Card
Primary Switch Card
Secondary Switch Card
Matrix
The Cards
ETERNITY ME houses the following Cards:
1. Master Card
2. Switch Card
3. Power Supply Cards: PSUNI and PS48V
4. SLT Card
5. TWT+SLT Card
6. DKP
7. E&M Card
8. VMS Card
9. BRI Card
10. T1E1PRI Card
11. GSM/CDMA Card
12. VoIP Card
13. Magneto Card
ETERNITY GE
The Enclosure
The enclosure of ETERNITY GE has 'fixed' and universal slots. The fixed slots are occupied by specific cards - Power
Card and the CPU Card - and cannot be changed, whereas on the universal slots you can install any of the various cards.
Inside the enclosure of ETERNITY GE are slot connectors located on the motherboard on the backplane of the
enclosure. Each slot has guide rails for inserting the cards.
Illustrated below are the design of the enclosures and the position of the slots in each model of ETERNITY GE.
ETERNITY GE12S
The first two slots from the extreme left are reserved for the Power Supply Card and the CPU card respectively.
ETERNITY GE6S
Power
Supply
Card
CPU
Card
12 Universal Slots
01
12
Power
Supply
Card
CPU
Card
1 6
6 Universal Slots
Matrix
ETERNITY GE3S
The Cards
The ETERNITY GE houses the following types of cards:
1. Power Supply Card - PSUNI Card (90-265V, 47-63Hz Mains as Input AC voltage power supply).
2. CPU Card
3. SLT Card
4. TWT+SLT Card
5. DKP Card
6. DKP+SLT Card
7. E&M Card
8. VMS Card
9. BRI Card
10. T1E1PRI Card
11. GSM/CDMA Card
12. VoIP Card
ETERNITY PE
The Enclosure
The ETERNITY PE has a different design. The enclosure of ETERNITY PE consists of a top plate, which functions as the
cover and can be removed.
The Power Supply unit and the CPU are in-built, and fixed on the bottom plane of the ETERNITY PE.
The CPU card also replaces the motherboard, and is fixed on the bottom plate of the enclosure, with the connectors for
the universal slot cards facing up.
Illustrated below are the design of the enclosures and the position of the slots in each model of ETERNITY PE.

ETERNITY PE6SP
Universal slots are located on the CPU. The connectors of the slots are located on the CPU.
Unlike on the ME and GE models, on which cards are inserted, here cards are mounted on the CPU, and secured on the
three studs labeled as H1, H2, H3 on the CPU, with the screws are provided for this purpose.
Power
Supply
Card
CPU
Card
3 Universal
Slots
1 3 2
Matrix
ETERNITY PE3SP
ETERNITY PE3SP is similar to PE6S, except has it has only 3 universal slots.
ETERNITY PE3SS
ETERNITY PE3SS has 3 universal slots and an Ethernet Port.
There is no Communication (COM) Port, no USB port, no Analog Input Port and no Analog Output port in this variant.
The Cards
The ETERNITY PE houses the following Cards:
1. SLT Card
2. DKP Card
3. TWT Card
4. DKP+ SLT Card
5. TWT + SLT Card
6. DKP + TWT Card
7. DKP + TWT + SLT Card
8. BRI Card (only ETERNITY PE6SP and PE3SP)
9. T1E1PRI Card (only ETERNITY PE6SP and PE3SP)
10. GSM Card
11. VoIP Card
12. VMS Card
13. Multifunction Card
3
3. Check Availibility.
Matrix
Cards of ETERNITY at a Glance
# Built-in SMPS; # # Built-in CPU;
* Check availability
The TWT, SLT, DKP, E&M, VMS, T1E1PRI, BRI, GSM/CDMA, VoIP, Magneto cards are available in different
configurations for the different models of ETERNITY. For an at-a-glance view of the configurations in which these cards
are available for ETERNITY ME, GE and PE, refer Appendix A Technical Specifications.
The Interfaces
The ETERNITY supports the following interfaces for connecting to different telecom networks, digital key phones,
standard telephones and other external devices.
The TWT Interface
The TWT Interface enables the ETERNITY to be connected to the POTS Network. The POTS Networks across the world
support various standards and differ in features. For example, some networks support Caller ID Presentation using
DTMF signaling, while some support Caller ID Presentation using FSK signaling; some networks offer 600 Ohms
Impedance, while others offer complex impedance.
Card Name ME16S ME10S GE12S GE6S GE3S PE6SP PE3SP PE3SS
PSUNI Power Supply Card # # #
48 VDC Power Supply Card # # #
Master Card -- -- -- -- -- --
Switch Card -- -- -- -- -- --
CPU Card # # # # # #
SLT Card
TWT Card -- -- --
TWT+SLT Card
DKP Card
DKP+SLT Card -- --
DKP+TWT Card -- -- -- -- --
DKP+TWT+SLT Card -- -- -- -- --
E&M Card -- -- --
VMS Card
BRI Card --
TIE1PRI Card --
GSM/CDMA Card
VoIP Card
Magneto Card -- -- -- -- -- --
Multifunction Card* -- -- -- -- --
Matrix
ETERNITY's versatile architecture allows it to be connected to such networks differing in their characteristics. The TWT
Interface supports following features:
Programmable AC Impedance - 600 Ohms, 900 Ohms and various complex impedances.
Selectable Answer Supervision - Polarity Reversal, Metering Pulse
Selectable Disconnect Supervision - Polarity Reversal, Open Loop Disconnect
Selectable Caller ID Presentation - DTMF, FSK
Programmable Dialing method - Pulse/Tone (with programmable Pulse Ratio/DTMF On-Off period)
Programmable Speech Tx Gain
Programmable Speech Rx Gain
Programmable Disconnect Tone Sensing
Programmable Flash Timer
Programmable Loop Current
The ISDN PRI Interface
The ISDN PRI Interface enables ETERNITY to be connected to ISDN PRI over T1
4
and E1
5
carrier lines.
On T1 carrier lines, the Interface supports the following signaling types:
PRI
Robbed Bit Signaling (RBS)
Q-Signaling (QSIG)
E&M
On E1 carrier lines, ETERNITY supports the following signaling types:
PRI
Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)
Q-Signaling (QSIG)
E&M
The ISDN PRI Interface supports the following features:
Terminal (TE) mode and Network (NT) Mode
Video conferencing and data connectivity
ISDN BRI
The ISDN BRI Interface enables ETERNITY to be connected to ISDN BRI Lines and connect ISDN BRI compatible
devices with the ETERNITY.
The ISDN BRI Interface has the following features:
Signaling types - 2B+D Signaling
Terminal (TE) mode
Terminal (TE) mode
Video conferencing and data connectivity
Depending on the requirement, each BRI Port can be configured in the TE/NT mode.
It is possible to feed power from the ETERNITY to the terminal equipments connected to the ETERNITY (on its BRI port
configured as NT).
4. T1 PRI (T-Carrier) works on 23 Bearer Channels and a single Data Channel (23B+D). It is used in North America, Japan and Korea.
5. E1 PRI (E-Carrier) works on 30 Bearer Channels and a single Data Channel (30B+D). It is used in all countries, except North America,
Japan and Korea.
Matrix
The Mobile Interface
The Mobile Interface enables the ETERNITY to be connected to GSM/CDMA Networks, providing all the functioning
required by GSM/CDMA Network Operators worldwide. For example, the Frequency Band supported by the GSM
networks varies across countries. In some countries, the network operators may use 850MHz while network operators in
some countries may use 1900MHz, in some countries network operators may use both frequency bands.
ETERNITY's Mobile Interface supports full Quad-Band Operation (GSM850, 900, 1800, 1900MHz) for world-wide use,
for Global, Inter and Intra country roaming.
The Mobile Interface supports the following features:
2G, 3G and CDMA support
Selectable GSM Frequency Bands - 900, 1800, 1900, 850 + 1900, 900+1800 MHz.
Selectable CDMA Frequency Bands - Any CDMA, Cellular A, Cellular B, Cellular A & B.
Programmable Network Selection - Manual and Automatic.
Programmable Network Operator Codes in order of priority (from 1 to 9) in case of Manual Network Selection.
Programmable Speech Tx Gain
Programmable Speech Rx Gain
Selectable Incoming Call Modes - Allow, Ignore, Reject.
SIM Card protection with a Personal Identification Number (PIN) and Personal Unlock Keyword (PUK).
Single Rooftop (RT) antenna for 'High Gain'
The ETERNITY Mobile Interface does not support GPRS features, Fax and Data services.
The VoIP Interface
The Voice-over-IP (VoIP) Interface routes over the Internet, all the outgoing and incoming calls made or received by the
extensions of the ETERNITY and extensions of other PBXs that are networked with the ETERNITY.
The VoIP Interface supports SIP (Session Initiation Protocol), the industry standard VoIP. It supports adaptive jitter buffer
for reducing delay and improving speech quality. The key features of the VoIP Interface are:
32 SIP Trunks (SIP Accounts)
6
, allowing subscription to 32 different VoIP providers/ITSPs.
Simultaneous VoIP Calls
Selectable Network Assignment (Connection Type) - Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE.
Selectable DNS - Automatic and Static
STUN
TCP and UDP NAT Keep Alive
VLAN Tagging option
Symmetric RTP Selection
MAC Address Cloning option
Fax over IP - T.38 (UDPTL), T.38 (RTP) and Pass Through.
Send CLI Option for outgoing calls
Selectable DTMF - RTP (RFC 2833), SIP Info, InBand
Broad Voice Codec Selection - G.723-L, G.723-H, G.279AB, GSM FR, iLBC-10ms, iLBC-20 ms, G.711-Law, G.711 A-
Law
Quality of Service - SIP DiffServe/ToS, RTP DiffServe/ToS
The E&M Interface
The E&M Interface of the ETERNITY supports analog trunking to connect various communication equipment telephone
switches, Routers, Leased Lines, etc. using Tie-Lines.
Generally, E&M connectivity is used to expand the PBX capacity (by connecting a second PBX with the main PBX) or to
connect two or more remotely located PBXs, forming a network of PBXs.
6. A SIP Account is an account you would get from your VoIP/Internet Telephony Service provider much like you would get an email
account from your Internet Service Provider.
Matrix
The E&M Interface can be used for the following applications:
Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC) Networks, where several EPAXs are connected with each other through
E&M tie lines. Refer PLCC-An Introduction to know more.
Closed User Groups, where several PBXs are connected with each other through E&M tie lines
7
.
PBX expansion, where two PBXs are connected with each other with E&M tie lines.
Connecting remote PBXs over E&M tie lines
Also, refer the topics E&M Connectivity and E&M Features to know more.
The E&M Interface can be programmed to provide Trunk Interface, a Subscriber (Station) Interface or both, i.e. as a Tie
Line with the dual personality of a Trunk and a Subscriber.
The E&M Interface of the ETERNITY has the following features:
Programmable Orientation Type - trunk, station, tie-line.
Selectable E&M Interface Types - IV and V.
Selectable Speech Interface (Audio Interface)
8
- Two-wire and four-wire.
Selectable E&M Trunk Seizure Type
9
- Immediate, Immediate + Wink, Seizure Pulse, Seizure Pulse + Wink, Express,
and Compander Control Signal.
Selectable Address Signaling - Pulse dial (Pulse 10PPS, Pulse 20PPS) and Tone Dial (DTMF).
The Magneto Interface
The Magneto Interface is used for connecting Magneto Telephones
10
to the ETERNITY. Magneto telephones are widely
used by the military as field phones in front lines, and by other establishments such as railroad companies (signaling
emergencies, crossings, etc.), electric utilities, pipeline companies, who need to have their networks at places that are
too remote to be serviced by public telephone networks.
ETERNITY can land calls from magneto field telephones on the extensions (SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminal) of the ETERNITY
and place calls from the extensions of the ETERNITY on magneto telephones.
To know more about how the Magneto Card works, refer the topic Magneto Trunk Port.
The Digital Key Phone Interface
The Digital Key Phone Interface of the ETERNITY is for the purpose of connecting the proprietary Digital Key Phones of
Matrix Telecom, namely EON, the PC-based phone EONSOFT and the proprietary Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Consoles with the ETERNITY.
The Digital Key Phone Interface has the following features:
Programmable Call Capacity - up to 10 Call Appearances/Call Loops on a single DKP.
Selectable Headset and Speaker (Handsfree) modes.
Selectable Auto Answer mode.
Programmable Headset Speech Tx and Rx Gains.
Programmable Handsfree (Speaker) Speech Tx and Rx Gains.
Programmable Key Click Volume levels.
Programmable Key Maps for Operator, Executive, Hotel Attendant and Guests.
4-Level Adjustable Backlight and Contrast Controls
Programmable Personal Directory of 25 external numbers.
Selectable Ring Types.
9-Level Ringer Volume Control.
7. The PBXs in a Closed User Group can be connected over ISDN T1/E1 Lines. Refer the topic Closed User Groups to know more.
8. The number of wires used to transmit audio signals.
9. This is the line protocol that defines how the equipment seizes the E&M trunk. Also, referred to as Start Dial Supervision Signaling
Protocol.
10. A magneto telephone is a local battery telephone set, in which signaling current is provided by a magneto hand generator, usually a
magneto. The hand generator, commonly referred to as 'crank', is located on the right hand side of the telephone set and is turned to
produce energy to ring other phones or to signal the CO. The magneto, also called the generator, is used to convert the mechanical
motion via the crank to produce sufficient energy to ring other phones or to signal the CO.
Matrix
Programmable Ringer Modes - Ring Immediately, Ring if Idle, Ring after Delay, Ring Off.
Ring On Speakerphone and Ring on Headset options.
Programmable Priority.
Programmable Station Type - Administration or Guest.
Language Support - English, French, German, Portuguese, Spanish.
The Single Line Telephone Interface
The Single Line Telephone (SLT) Interface allows any standard, two-wire, analog single line telephone instrument -
rotary, pulse-tone, cordless, feature phones with or without Calling Line Identification - to be connected to the ETERNITY
as extension phone.
The SLT Interface has the following features:
Selectable Caller ID Presentation - DTMF, FSK
Programmable Digit Pad Count (0-9).
Programmable Ring Type - Trapezoidal, Sinusoidal, Low Trapezoidal, Low Sinusoidal.
Programmable AC Impedance - 600, 900, 350 + (100 || 0.21uF), 220 + (820 || 120nF).
Selectable Answer Signaling.
Selectable Disconnect Signaling - Polarity Reversal, Open Loop Disconnect.
Programmable Speech Rx Gain.
Programmable Speech Tx Gain.
Programmable Open Loop Disconnect.
Programmable Flash Timer.
Programmable Loop Current.
External Voicemail System connectivity.
Fax machine connectivity.
Voicemail System (VMS)
ETERNITY provides a full-fledged, 'in-skin' Voicemail System with a capacity of up to 512 mailboxes. Thus, every
extension of the ETERNITY can be assigned a mailbox.
The key auto attendant and voicemail features supported by ETERNITY's Voicemail System are:
Programmable Mailbox Size.
Programmable Message Length.
Welcome greetings according to the time of the day.
Different voice greetings for different time zones.
Special greetings for holidays.
Five call transfer types: none, blind, wait for ring, wait for answer, and screened.
Dial by extension.
Dial by name.
Personalized greetings for each mailbox.
Individual mailbox size.
Call forward to voice mail.
Message forwarding.
Distribution lists.
Broadcast message.
Message Wait Notification.
Redirecting messages.
ETERNITY's Voicemail System also forms the basis of other features like:
Conversation Recording
Call Taping
Voice-guided Wake-up Calls and Reminders
Message Wait Notification (Hospitality Feature)
Call Transfer to Mailbox (Hospitality Feature)
Call Forward to Voice Mail (Hospitality Feature)
Matrix
Refer the ETERNITY VMS Card System Manual to know more.
Computer
You can connect a standalone computer with the ETERNITY over the RS232 serial Communication Port of the system.
You can also connect ETERNITY to a standalone computer or to a LAN Switch over the Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY.
PC connectivity is required to
access the web-based programming tool Jeeves.
set up and run software applications such as Property Management Software (PMS)
Call Accounting Software (CAS) in the Hotel Application.
to run the Front Desk User Wizard of the Hotel Application.
capture and download Station Message Detail Records (SMDR): SMDR reports, SMDR Online and SMDR Posting,
capture and download System Activity Log and System Fault Log, and Hotel Motel Activity Log in the Hotel
Application.
External Music Source
You can connect any external music source like a CD Player, a Cassette Player, FM radio, etc. to the Analog Input Port of
the ETERNITY.
The Analog Input Port can handle unamplified, isolated, analog speech signal from an external music source.
Music from this external source can be played as Music On Hold to callers and as Background Music to extension users.
Public Address System
You can connect a public address system to the Analog Output Port of the ETERNITY. Any extension of the ETERNITY
can make announcements on the external speakers of the public address system.
Security Devices
Any type of sensor device like glass break sensor, smoke detector, object sensor, etc. can be connected to the Digital
Input Port of the ETERNITY.
You can connect a Siren or a Hooter to the Digital Output Port of the ETERNITY which can be activated to indicate
emergencies.
The sensor device connected to the Digital Input Port can be used to instigate the hooter or siren connected to the Digital
Output Port.
Automated Control Applications
In addition to the security devices, you also run different automated control applications such as a door lock, a school
bell, a water pump, sprinklers, automated illuminations (office lights, porch and terrace lights, glow signboards, street
lights, etc.) by connecting such devices to the Digital Output Port of the ETERNITY.
The devices can be operated by dialing a command or can be programmed to automatically switch on and off at
particular times.
What's more, these devices can also work on instigation from a sensor connected to the Digital Input Port of the
ETERNITY and can be operated from a remote location using the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) provided by
ETERNITY.
Door Phone
You can connect any standard 4-wire door phones to the Door Phone ports of the ETERNITY. The door phones can be
operated in conjunction with a Door Lock connected to the Digital Output Port of the ETERNITY.
The Door Phone interface is supported only on ETERNITY PE.
Matrix
For an at-a-glance view of the maximum trunks and ports available for each of the aforementioned Interface options on
the various models of ETERNITY, refer System Capacity and Resources in Appendix A - Technical Specifications.
Interfacing Modules
Operator Consoles
Matrix provides proprietary digital key phones and direct station selection consoles for the Operator/Attendants. These
are:
EON: the proprietary digital key phone (DKP) provides access to all features and functions of the ETERNITY.
EON is available as EON48, EON42 and EON45, differing in the number of keys and LCD display capacity.
EON is not exclusively an Operator console. It is also meant for use by extension users, and is hence provided with
Key Maps for the Operator and the Executive, supporting a distinct set of features for each.
When the system is used in the Hospitality Application, Key Maps are provided for the Front Desk and the Guests.
The number of DKPs you can attach to the ETERNITY depends on system capacity (maximum DKP ports supported)
of the model you are using. Refer System Capacity and Resources in Appendix A - Technical Specifications for
information on the maximum number of DKPs supported by each model of ETERNITY and its variants.
DSS Consoles: these are devices that function as extensional buttons for the Operator Console, EON, to providing
more buttons to the Operator for greater efficiency in call management. The DSS Consoles provide one-touch access
to dialing and feature access.
DSS Consoles are available as DSS64 (64 keys) and DSS72 (72 keys), and have different appearance to match the
style of each model of EON.
You can attach two DSS Consoles to a single DKP. Each DSS Console occupies a Digital Key Phone Port. For
example, if you attach two DSS consoles to a single DKP, three DKP ports would be occupied.
EONSOFT: a PC-based variant of the EON DKP series. This Soft Phone is provided with handset and headset
connectivity for ease of operation. PC-based DSS Consoles can be attached to EONSOFT.
EONSOFT is connected to the COM Port of the PC and occupies a single DKP Port on the ETERNITY, even when
two DSS Consoles are attached.
Refer the topics Digital Key Phone-Operation and Direct Station Selection Consoles (DSS) for more information.
Single Line Telephone
Matrix offers NEO10, the proprietary analog Caller ID Speaker Phone for extensions.
You can also attach any standard, conventional telephone instrument as extension phone to the SLT Interface of
ETERNITY.
Float Cum Boost Charger (FCBC)
When the PS 48V Card is installed in the ETERNITY as the Power Supply Card, a Float Cum Boost Charger (FCBC) is
required to feed the 48VDC Input power to the card.
Any standard FCBC may be connected to the PS 48V Card of the ETERNITY.
Battery Back-Up
Battery Back-Up is necessary to counter interruptions in communication during power failures.
Matrix
When the PS UNI Card is installed in the ETERNITY as the Power Supply Card, battery back-up is recommended to
keep the system alive during power outages.
You are recommended to connect a standard UPS for battery back-up with the PS UNI Card installed in the system.
When the PS 48V card is installed in the ETERNITY as the Power Supply Card, the FCBC (see above) connected to the
card is to be connected with 48V/26 Ah batteries.
Primary Protection Module
To protect the ETERNITY from damages caused by heavy voltages from the Trunk Lines and for overhead and off-
premise stations
11
Matrix provides Primary Protection Module (PPM) with four PPM circuits. Referred to as PPM4, the
device contains GDTs and fuses.
The primary protection module is recommended to be installed on the system Main Distribution Frame (MDF), as the
MDF cables from the CO network are terminated on the MDF.
Refer the topic Installing Primary Protection Module for more information on how this device works and installation
instructions.
Interfaces of ETERNITY at a Glance
The figure below shows the different interfaces and interfacing modules of ETERNITY and the ports to which these
interfaces can be connected.
11. Likely causes: Heavy voltage line falling on the CO line or on the overhead stations cable; thunderbolts; short-circuit of trunk lines or
overhead station cables with electric cables.
Matrix
Installing ETERNITY
Before You Start
Before you begin the installation of the ETERNITY ME/GE/PE, make sure that the required telecom wiring has been
done.
The number of extensions (stations) you require and their location will determine the type of cabling to the done on your
premises.
We recommend that you plan the wiring and the installation of the ETERNITY according to your current and expected
future requirements.
Before you begin to install and set up the hardware of ETERNITY, make sure you have the following items:
A Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
A suitable location to install the Main Distribution Frame and the ETERNITY hardware.
Cables for trunk lines and stations.
The Cards and interfacing modules of ETERNITY.
One or more Single Line Telephone or Digital Key Phones for testing.
Power supply.
One or more active Two-wire trunk lines for test calls.
A modem for the ISDN T1/E1/PRI line, if applicable.
An NT1 termination device for the ISDN BRI line, if applicable.
Appropriate cables and connectors to set up and test the Ethernet interface of the ETERNITY and the LAN
connection, if applicable.
A standalone PC or a PC connected in a LAN that can PING the ETERNITY.
A SIM card to test mobile network connectivity, if applicable.
A SIP Account to test VoIP connectivity, if applicable.
Well begun is half done; plan your hardware installation well.
The Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
The MDF connects telephone lines coming from outside, i.e. the local exchange, on one side and the internal (PBX) lines
on the other.
In simple form, the MDF is a special metallic frame designed and constructed with columns of receptacles to firmly hold
the termination modules for the trunk and extension cables.
The cables or trunk lines to/from the Public Telephone Exchange terminate on the line side and cross connections
(jumpers) run to the opposite (PBX) side of the MDF. From those terminals, a multi-core cable runs from a second set of
terminals into the PBX.
A multi-core cable runs from the PBX into the MDF. From the distribution frame, the smaller cables run into each
individual extension telephone outlet or socket (RJ11 or RJ45).
In a multi-storied building or on a widely spread out premises, it is common to have more than one distribution frame,
called the intermediate distribution frame (IDF) on each floor, to provide the connection between the MDF and the
individual telephone wiring. IDFs function as wiring points to gather and distribute wiring. IDFs are useful when a large
number of stations are to be connected and the wire runs extend over hundreds of feet; hence the distance is too great to
economically terminate every station run individually to the MDF.
Select a suitable MDF (and IDF, if required) with the standard lead-in cable termination KRONE modules.
Ensure that the MDF complies with the local building telecom wiring Guidelines, Rules and Regulations.
Select an appropriate site to install the MDF.
Matrix
Location of the MDF
The MDF is normally installed inside the building in a location and position which is free from the ingress of dust and
moisture, and which is not subject to damp or humid conditions.
This also applies to MDF installed outside the building. It must be protected from exposure to weather conditions,
dust, dampness and humidity
Do not install the MDF in any of the following locations:
In washing or toilet facilities, boiler/plant/machine rooms or any area subject to corrosive fumes and fluids;
In fire escape stairways;
Within a cupboard containing a fire hose reel;
Near fountains, sprinklers, unless the MDF is provided with a shield to prevent water falling on it or all sprinkler-
heads that could project water onto the MDF have suitable deflectors.
Near a bath, shower or other fixed water container;
Near a swimming pool, paddling pool, spa pool or tub;
In any room or enclosure containing a sauna heater;
Within any refrigeration room;
Any area, where hosing-down operations are carried out;
Near any other water feature or water body.
In a high voltage electrical switch room or near a heavy voltage transformer.
The MDF should be robust and securely attached to a permanent building element such as a wall, floor or column. Do
not mount the MDF on movable elements such as hinged panels or wheeled trolleys.
Provide adequate lighting in the place where the MDF is located.
Provide adequate space around the MDF where any person is required to pass to enable safe and convenient access
to the MDF and ready escape from the vicinity under emergency conditions.
Any room containing the MDF must not require the use of a tool, key, card, number pad or the like to exit the room.
Ensure a quick hurdle-free exit from such a room.
The MDF or the enclosure in which it is located should have the provision for securing with a key, lock or tool. External
MDF should be adequately secured against vandalism and access by children or unauthorized persons.
The MDF enclosure should be designed so as to prevent access to live parts by unqualified persons and should be
free or exposed sharp edges.
The MDF enclosure should be protected from insects and rodents.
Read Protecting ETERNITY and Yourself.
Selecting the Installation Site for ETERNITY
The ETERNITY maybe be mounted on a table or wall. Refer to the mechanical dimensions of the model you have, when
selecting the site for installation, and deciding whether to mount the system on a table top, or on the wall, or on a rack.
Select an appropriate site to install the ETERNITY taking into consideration the following recommendations and
precautions:
The site of installation should be well-ventilated, moisture and dust free, and not exposed to direct sunlight, heat,
excessive cold or humidity.

The site should be equidistant from all the extensions to simplify cabling network and reduce cabling costs.
The system should be installed at a height of at least 3.5 feet from the ground. Installation at this height makes
preventive or corrective maintenance tasks easy.
Matrix
The system should be installed away from any source of electromagnetic noise such as any radio equipment, heavy
transformers, faulty electric chokes of tube-lights, any device having faulty coil, etc.
Read Protecting ETERNITY and Yourself.
Selecting Cables
Select standard good quality telephone cables with 0.5 mm conductor diameter for the internal as well as over-head
cabling.
Use twisted pair wires to reduce interference.
Use separate cable conduits for electrical and telephone cables.
The length of the cables must not be too long. They must have minimum number of joints. This will help you detect
cable faults easily.
Maintain cable records so that cables and cross-connections on the MDF can be correctly identified and connected.
The records should be in a clear, legible and updateable format.
Selecting Extension Telephones
Select appropriate telephone instruments to be connected as extension phones. You may connect:
any of the models of the proprietary Digital Key Phone (DKP) of the EON series (EON45, EON42, EON48)
the Single Line Telephone NEO10 offered by Matrix.
OR
Any standard telephone instrument like rotary phone, Pulse/tone switchable push-button phone, Feature phone or
Cordless phone. So, you can also use your existing telephone instruments.
You are recommended to connect DKPs of the EON series for Operator/Receptionist/ Front Desk extensions
(stations).
Providing Power Supply Source
The ETERNITY ME, GE and PE work with input voltages ranging between 90-265VAC.
Arrange for a separate power point and switch, close to the system.
Power supply for the system must be separate from other heavy electrical loads like Air-conditioners, heaters,
welding machines, electrical motors, etc.
Terminating Trunk and Station Cables on the MDF
Terminate the TWT Trunk Line cables from the CO (public telephone exchange) and E&M cables into the 'Trunk
Lines' side of the MDF using the punch tool for Krone modules.
Terminate all the station cables (connected to the wall sockets/outlets) into the 'Station Lines' side of the MDF using
the punch tool for Krone modules.
Label the trunk and station line cables for easy identification and keep a record of the trunk and station lines in an
updatable format.
Matrix
Where multiple wiring cabinets/distribution frames are used, label each frame and reference its number on the
corresponding outlet, e.g.: Outlet number 1/013 is terminated on Cabinet 1, outlet Number 20/120 is terminated on
Cabinet 2.
Install Primary Protection modules with Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT) and fuses on entry points for all trunk lines. This
is to protect the system from heavy voltages from trunk lines and overhead stations.
The product warranty does not cover damages resulting from lack of primary protection on trunk lines.
It is recommended that you also install Primary Protection modules with GDT and fuses on all Station lines,
particularly off-premise extensions, and E&M ports.
For this, you are recommended to use the Primary Protection Module (PPM4) supplied by Matrix.

A typical connection between a PBX and the MDF is illustrated in the figure below.
If you are using a smaller configuration of the ETERNITY, like ETERNITY PE3SS, 3SP or 6SP, you may refer the
following diagram to connect the PBX and the MDF.
Matrix
You are recommended to use the Primary Protection Module - PPM4 supplied by Matrix.
Connecting Primary Protection Modules to Trunk and Overhead/Off-Premises Lines
It is necessary to protect the ETERNITY from heavy voltages entering the system from the Trunk Lines and overhead
stations.
The protection can be in the form of surge suppressor devices like Gas Discharge Tubes (GDT), MOVs, Fuses, etc.
Input Protection Modules (IPM)
Install IPM on the Krone Modules of the MDF. Input protection modules are for analog input channels to protect against
over-voltages that may be applied between any two input connectors or between an input connector and the ground.
Power Protection Module - PPM4
Matrix provides Power Protection Modules (PPM) consisting of four PPM circuits. The PPM4 contains Gas Discharge
Tubes and Fuses.
The Gas Discharge Tube is an over voltage protection device. It has three terminals. It is connected parallel to the CO
Line or the overhead station cable. The third terminal is connected to a telecom earth. When the voltage between any of
the two terminals exceeds the permissible limit (generally 150V), the gas in the device begins to conduct.
This shorts either terminal with the earth terminal. Heavy voltage passes to the earth instead of entering the system,
thereby protecting the system.
The Fuses in the PPM4 are an over current protection device. Whenever the current builds up beyond the permissible
limit, (generally 100mA), the fuse opens to protect the circuit ahead.
PPM4 must be properly earthed to work well. It is recommended that PPM4 be connected to a separate telecom earth
(ground).
Telecom earth is a dedicated earth (ground) only for the PBX. A dedicated earth greatly reduces the risk of back voltage.
Matrix
Installing PPPM4
Refer the block diagram above for the location of the PPM4.
1. Unpack the PPM and check the package contents.
2. Select an appropriate location for the PPM4. Refer the block diagram above when deciding where to place the PPM4.
Also, take into consideration the length of the cables of the PPM4.
3. Use the Mounting Template supplied with the PPM4 to drill holes on the wall to fix the PPM in the selected location.
Fix the screws supplied with the PPM4 into the drilled holes, with their heads protruding from the wall.
4. You may mount the PPM4 first and connect the cables OR you may connect the cables first and then mount the
PPM4.
5. To connect cables, press the snap fits on both sides of the PPM4 to release the cover. Remove the cover.
6. Connect the Earth wire (green wire) to the Telecom Earth.
7. Now connect the TWT Trunk wires from the CO side into the PPM4 port connectors marked as P1, P2, P3 and P4.
8. To do so, strip off about half a centimeter of the insulation of the wire ends of the first pair of TWT Trunk you want to
connect to the PPM4.
9. Push back the (orange-color) levers of the connector of port P1, using a blunt pin or a small flat screw driver or your
thumbnail.
10. Insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with one wire in each
opening.
11. Release pressure on the levers. Both wires will be held in place by spring clamp action.
To remove the wires,
push back the levers.
pull out the wires gently.
release pressure on the levers.
12. Repeat the above steps to connect the other TWT Trunk wires from the CO side into the connectors of the ports P2,
P3, and P4.
13. Now, terminate the wire pairs emerging from the PPM4 multi-pair cable into the 'Trunk Lines' side of the MDF using
the punch tool for Krone Modules.
Matrix
Refer the following table for connection details of the wires:
14. Replace the cover of the PPM4 by pressing back the snap fits on both sides.
15. Mount the PPM, if not done already.
Protecting ETERNITY and Yourself
The ETERNITY is an electronic device. When you handle any electrical or electronic equipment, you are in a situation
that could cause you bodily harm, besides damage to the product. When handling any electronic equipment, you must be
aware of the safety hazards involved in electrical circuitry and the standard practices for accident prevention.
When using any telephone equipment, take every safety precaution to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to
persons. Read and understand the precautions, dos and don'ts of handling this product listed below.
These instructions are by no means exhaustive. So, take all the necessary precautions for handling electronic and
electrical appliances. Your safety and that of the others lies in your hands.
Location
Do not place this product in any of the following locations:
near a water source like a wash bowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, near a swimming pool, or in a wet basement.
In places where dust, oil, corrosive fumes may come in contact with the system.
Any area where it is exposed to direct sunlight, heat, excessive cold or humidity.
On moveable or unstable surfaces, which may cause the product to fall and get damaged.
Any area where shocks or vibration are frequent or strong.
Near High-Frequency generating devices such as Electric Welder, Sewing Machine or and Microwave Oven.
Do not leave cables exposed on the ground where they may be trampled upon, or get damaged by entangling with
feet or pressure from other heavy objects.
Power Supply
This product should be operated with proper supply voltage. If you are not sure about supply voltage, contact the
authorized dealer. Always supply properly, stabilized power.
The ETERNITY does not work in isolation from the environment. Power is fed to the system for it to function. Being a
PBX system, it has several interfaces like trunk lines and extensions, external music, Public Address System, Printer
interface, PC interface, etc. So there are chances of heavy voltages entering the system through these interfaces.
Also, static charges could find their way through the system components.
Protect the system from heavy voltages from the mains
The ETERNITY ME, GE and PE are designed to work with input voltages ranging between 90-265VAC. The
ETERNITY ME, GE and PE Power Cards have a 'switch mode' design to support such a wide range of operating
voltage. However, it is necessary to protect the system from abrupt changes in the input voltage. For this, use a
Constant Voltage Transformer (CVT).
Protect the system from heavy voltages on the trunk lines and the overhead stations
The ETERNITY may be damaged by heavy voltages entering the system from trunk lines or from overhead stations.
These heavy voltages may enter the trunk lines and from overhead stations due to:
Heavy voltage line falling on the CO line or on the overhead stations cable. A dangerous surge can occur if a
telephone line comes in contact with a power line.
PPM4 Port Colour
P1 Blue and White
P2 Orange and White
P3 Green and White
P4 Brown and White
Matrix
Lightning/Thunderbolts.
Short-circuit of trunk lines or overhead station cables with electric cables.
To protect ETERNITY from these voltages, use Primary Protection/Surge Protectors on the trunk and long distance
extension lines to protect the system from lightning and electrical surges.
The best place for the installation of the primary protection is the cable entry point of the building, shelter or equipment
housing. This is not always possible, but every attempt should be made to place the primary protection as close as
possible to the entry point of the cables into the building, shelter or equipment housing.
Install any standard Input Protection (punch down protection) on the Krone Modules of the MDF or the Primary
Protection Modules - PPM4 supplied by Matrix at entry points for all CO trunks lines and all overhead stations. The
product Warranty does not cover damages resulting from heavy voltage on CO lines and overhead stations!
It is recommended that you install the PPM on the MDF, as MDF cables from the CO are terminated on the System
MDF.
Protect the system from Lightning
To protect ETERNITY from extremely high voltage currents associated with lightning strikes, install a lightning
protector on an outside (CO) line.
Protect the system from static charges
Every person carries a static charge in their body depending upon body composition and the environment around
them. Most of the times, this charge finds its way to the earth when the person touches any object which is grounded,
or when the person is barefoot.
Generally, persons installing or handling electronic and electrical equipment take precaution to wear appropriate
footwear to get protection from electric shocks. Doing so, the static charge accumulates in their bodies and does not
find its way to the ground. But when such a person touches any of the electronic cards, the static charge finds its way
through the electronic components thereby causing damage to the cards.
So, the person installing or servicing the system must provide a path to the static charges, by wearing an antistatic
belt, which is properly earthed.
Protect the system from heavy voltage on the communication cable
The Communication Port (COM Port) is provided on the ETERNITY for connecting a PC.
If an electrical wire carrying heavy voltage accidentally shorts with this cable, heavy voltages can damage the
communication port.
It is recommended that the communication cable (connecting ETERNITY and the PC) be run through the conduit
carrying telephone cables or through a separate conduit.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the Analog Input Port
The Analog Input Port of the ETERNITY should be protected from:
Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the external music source due to shorting with any electrical
wire.
An audio signal, not complying with the specifications of this port, is fed to this port.
Refer the technical specifications of the AIP before connecting any external music device to it.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the Analog Output Port
The Analog Output Port of the ETERNITY should be protected from:
Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the amplifier/speaker due to shorting with any electrical wire.
Matrix
Faulty Amplifier.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the Digital Output Port
The Digital Output Port (DOP) of the system should be protected from:
Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the relay device/contactor connected to the DOP.
Faulty or overrated contactor/equipment/door lock.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the Digital Input Port
The Digital Input Port (DIP) of the system should be protected from:
Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the sensor device or panic switch connected to the DIP.
Faulty or overrated sensor device.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the printer cable
The ETERNITY ME provides a printer port to which a printer can be connected. The printer port should be protected from
heavy voltages on the cable connecting the printer with the system due to shorting with any electrical wire. To prevent
this,
Check the supply to the printer.
Ensure that the printer is properly earthed.
Also, check the printer cable for any short or open.
Telecom Earth (Ground)
The Earth (Ground) is the most important safety procedure to prevent electrical shocks and fires. It protects from
lightning strikes, electrical transients, static discharges, electromagnetic interference and electrical hazards.
Ensure that a proper electrical earth and a telecom earth are in place for the safety of people and the system.
Telecom earth is a dedicated earth for the PBX/any other telecom equipment.
Provide a separate Telecom Earth (Ground) to the system installation. Providing a separate earth to the telecom
equipment eliminates the possibility of any back-voltage on the earth.
Refer Appendix - How to make a perfect Earth for instructions on making the earth (ground).
Shock and Fire Hazard
Always wear a properly earthed, electrostatic discharge preventive wrist strap/belt while handling the system and its
cards to prevent damage to the system and harm to yourself.
Do not open the system in power ON condition.
Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect the system from
overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered.
Never insert or push objects of any kind into this product through the cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous
voltage points or short out parts which may result in fire or electric shock.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be trampled upon or
get entangled.
Matrix
This product is equipped with a plug having a third (ground) pin, which fits only into a grounding-type outlet. This is a
safety feature. So, if the existing outlet is not a three-pin and or if you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, have
the outlet replaced by the electrician.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
Do not disassemble this product. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks.
Incorrect reassembly may cause electric shock when the appliance is used. Take the product to a qualified technician
when service or repair work is required.
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during a storm, to prevent electric shock from lightning.
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak so as to prevent the risk of fire.
External Devices
When you connect external devices like headset, external music source (PC, Cassette Player, CD Player), relay
devices (door lock, door lock release), sensors, public address or paging devices, telephone instruments, cables,
connectors, etc., ensure that they are of standard make and good quality, so that the functioning of the system is not
affected.
Matrix does not guarantee the performance of external devices that are not supplied by it.
Cleaning and maintenance
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning.
Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
Use a dry cloth for cleaning.
Service and Repair
Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to a qualified service person under the following
conditions:
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
If liquid has been spilled into the product.
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
If the product does not function normally when you are following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls,
which are covered by the operating instructions, because improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage
and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
Disposal
This product must be disposed according to the national laws and regulations prevailing in the country where it is
installed.
Matrix
Warning for RF Safety:
The product complies with the RF exposure guidelines as per standard FCC 47 CFR part 2. However, please observe
the following precautions:
Make sure that the RF Antenna is installed at least 20 cm away from other electronic and radio transmission devices.
Make sure that the RF antenna is installed at a place at least 20 cm away from people's vicinity.
Do not place magnetic storage media near the product.
People carrying medical implants like cardiac pacemakers are advised to maintain appropriate distance from the
system. They are also advised to avoid being in the vicinity of the product for a long time.
Matrix
Installing ETERNITY GE
The Matrix ETERNITY is to be installed by person/s trained and experienced in telecom wiring.
The person installing the ETERNITY must be familiar with trunks, physical wiring of the MDF on both the
exchange (PBX) side and the line side (CO).
When installing any equipment, make sure that you take all the necessary precautions for handling electronic
and electrical appliances. Follow proper procedures for static electricity, while handling the system and its
Use a grounding mat and wear an anti-static strap/belt. Read the dos and don'ts listed in 'Protecting the
System and Yourself'.
If you have complied with the requirements and instructions described in 'Before You Start', you may now
begin the installation of your ETERNITY GE.
The Matrix ETERNITY GE is shipped factory fitted with the Power supply card, CPU Card in their respective fixed slots
(refer the section "Know your ETERNITY").
The cards - BRI, T1E1PRI, GSM/CDMA, VoIP, DKP, TWT, SLT, VMS, E&M - are shipped separately as per the order
placed by individual customers. These cards are installed in any of the Universal slots, at customer end.
Illustrated below is the position of the fixed and universal slots in each variant of ETERNITY GE.
ETERNITY GE12S
ETERNITY GE6S
Matrix
ETERNITY GE3S
Follow the installation instructions for cards described here also when you expand the system (add more cards) or
remove or swap cards for maintenance and repair.
1. Unpack the box. Check the package contents (see Packing List). Contact your Dealer/Distributor if any of the items is
missing, faulty or damaged. Do not discard the packaging material.
Mounting the System
2. Decide where to mount the ETERNITY - on a table or wall - taking into consideration the mechanical dimensions and
weight of the model you have. If mounting the system on a wall, you may refer the mechanical dimensions and the
Mounting Template for drilling holes at appropriate places on the wall.
3. When installing the system in a rack, allow adequate space between the system and other units for air circulation.
4. Mount the system at the selected site. Make sure that the system is place such that you have full access to the front
and back panels. The holes in the panels are provided for ventilation; Make sure that these are not blocked, to
prevent overheating.
Connecting Input Power Supply
5. Ensure that a proper electrical earth and telecom earth are in place.
6. Check the voltage at the power point from where the supply is to be given to the system. It should be as per the
specifications. Earth the system properly.
Inserting Cards
7. Make sure that the power supply to the ETERNITY power is turned off and the power cord is unplugged.
8. Select a free slot from the universal slots.
9. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket that covers the card-slot opening of the slot you intend to use.
10. Hold the card with the connectors facing you. Do not grab the card from both ends.
Matrix
11. Slide the card into the slot, along the guide rails provided for each slot at the top and bottom planes.
12. Ensure that the cards are inserted deep enough for all the connector pins on the cards make complete contact with
those of the motherboard on the backplane.
Do not force the card into the slot. Doing so can damage the card or the slot connector.
13. When the card is firmly seated in the connector, push down the levers on the card mounting bracket and secure the
card with the screw provided
14. Tighten the screws on either side of the bracket.
15. Following the above steps, install each card into the universal slots.
Detailed installing instructions are provided for each card - DKP, SLT, TWT, ISDN BRI, ISDN T1E1PRI, GSM/CDMA,
VoIP, E&M - later in this section. Refer to them when installing each card type.
16. To remove a card:
Switch off power supply, unplug the power cord.
Disconnect any cables connected to the card.
Remove the screws from the card-mounting bracket.
Lift the levers on the mounting bracket to release the card.
The card will emerge out of the slot.
Grasp the card by its mounting bracket, and ease it out of its slot.
If you are removing the card permanently or for a certain period of time, install a filler bracket over the empty
card opening in the chassis.
Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to protect the system from dust, dirt,
insects and damage.
17. Using the cable/s supplied with each card, and terminate the cables in the Main Distribution Frame (SLT, DKP, TWT,
and E&M lines), the NT1 device (ISDN BRI lines), ISDN Modem (ISDN PRI Lines), as applicable.
Matrix
For cards with multiple RJ45 connectors, the cables are bunched together, but each cable is identified by a distinct
color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation edge of the cable.
The color markings make it easy for you to identify the connector on the card into which the cable is plugged in, and
the hardware ports on that connector. For example, the cable marked with blue on the Boot and Insulation edge is
connected to the first port of the card, containing the hardware ports 01-04.
Lead the cables neatly and tangle-free into the MDF.
18. After you have completed inserting and connecting the cards, power ON the system and observe the Reset cycle and
the LED pattern of each card, where applicable.
The Power Supply Card
Two types of Power Supply Cards are supported by the Matrix ETERNITY GE models:
PS UNI Card with 90-265VAC, 47-63Hz Mains as Input AC Voltage Power Supply.
This card is designed on the SMPS scheme. As this card does not have any provision for battery backup, it is
recommended that a UPS be connected to keep the system powered during outages.
There are four LEDs, a Mains Switch, and a Socket assembly for connecting the mains cord.
PS48V Card with 48VDC as Input DC Power Supply Voltage. A Float cum Boost Charger (FCBC) is required to feed
48VDC power to the card. The FCBC works on input AC mains.
The card has four LEDs, an MCB Switch, a power ON/OFF Switch, and a 3-way termination block for connecting the
power cord.
Both, the PS UNI card and the PS48V Card provide DC output voltages as: +3.5V, +5.0V, -27V and -85V. These are
indicated by LEDs.
Installing the Power Supply Card
The Power Supply Card is located in a fixed slot. No other card can be inserted in this slot.
The Power Supply Card is delivered factory fitted, when you buy the system. However, if you want to remove the card for
the purpose of maintenance or replace it with a new one, please follow the instructions below:
1. Unpack the Power Supply Card and verify the package contents.
If already installed, switch OFF power supply, unplug the power cord. Remove the screws securing the card. Lift the
levers on the mounting bracket to release the card. As the card emerges from the slot, ease it out of the slot.
2. Insert the Power Supply card into the guide rails of the first slot on the extreme left, designated for the Power Supply
Card. Make sure that the card is inserted deep enough to make perfect contact with the connectors on the
motherboard at the backplane.
3. Now, press down the levers on the card mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot.
Installation Edge Boot Edge
Matrix
4. Secure the card in the slot by screwing the bracket on both ends.
5. If installing the PSUNI card, connect the three-pin power cord into the socket of the PS UNI card and plug in the cord
into the mains supply.
6. If installing the PS48V card, connect the Float cum Boost Charger (FCBC). Terminate the power cord from the FCBC
output into the 3-way termination block on the PS48V card.
Polarity is critical. Ensure that the wires are connected with the correct polarity. Follow the standard color codes used
by FCBC manufacturers:
It is recommended that you measure the voltage before connecting the power cable to the power supply card. MAke
sure that the earth is connected.
Protect the ETERNITY from abrupt changes in input voltage using CVT.
Connecting an FCBC to the ETERNITY GE
7. Connect the Battery Backup.
Battery backup time depends upon the total load. The total load is the sum of system's load and load of active stations.
The power consumed by the variants of ETERNITY GE is given in the table below:
Colour Signal
Red +48VDC
Black GND
Green Earth
Model Power Consumption(Typical)
ETERNITY GE3S 25 watts
230VAC +/-
10%@50Hz
FCBC
10A
41 to 56V
ETERNITY GE
Card PS48VDC
-85VDC (LED L1)
-27VDC (LED L2)
+5VDC (LED L3)
+3.5VDC (LED L4)
48V Battery
Matrix
The Battery back up time depends on the 'Ah' rating of the battery connected to the FCBC. If 48V/26Ah batteries are
connected to the FCBC for the ETERNITY GE system then backup time of 2.5 to 3 hrs can be ensured. The FCBC
uses the constant voltage charging method. So, the batteries get charged faster if less power is consumed by the
system when in mains mode.
If you have installed the PSUNI power card, you would require a UPS to which to connect the card. The UPS may be
connected to a battery.
If you are using the PS48V Card, connect the Float cum Boost Charger (FCBC)
12
to the card. Now connect the FCBC
with the 48V/26Ah batteries (see illustration for Step 6). These batteries provide a backup time of 2.5-3 hours,
provided they are fully charged and the system traffic is normal.
8. Switch on power supply, after completing all other installation tasks.
The CPU Card
The CPU card is designed for the Eternity GE models as a combination of the Master Card and Switch Card of
ETERNITY ME. The CPU card has the functions of both cards; it manages the entire system, controls all other cards
(SLT, DLC, TWT+SLT, DLC+SLT, E&M, BRI, VMS, T1E1PRI, GSM/CDMA, VoIP). All configuration and programming
information is stored on this card.
The CPU card occupies a fixed slot, second from the left, with a unique arrangement of connectors. So no other card can
be inserted in the slot of the CPU card.
The CPU card has a Communication Port, a Digital Input Port (DIP), a Digital Output Port (DOP), an Analog Input Port
(AIP), an Analog Output Port (AOP), and a USB Port on the front panel.
Communication Port
This is a single asynchronous, serial, full duplex RS232C communication port, labeled as COM1. The COM Port has a
DB-9 connector. The COM port is meant for connecting a PC to the ETERNITY GE. With a PC connected to the
ETERNITY GE you can install and operate from the COM Port the following software and features:
Property Management Software (PMS)
Call Accounting Software (CAS)
Station Message Recording (SMDR) reports
System reports (activity and fault logs)
Hotel reports
As the ETERNITY GE assumes the role of a Data Terminal Equipment, a crossed cable is required for
connecting a computer with the system.
Digital Input Port
The Digital Input Port (DIP) on the CPU card allows you to connect a panic switch or a sensor to the ETERNITY GE.
Ensure that the device connected to the DIP complies with the technical specifications of this port.
Refer the topic Digital Input Port to know more.
12. When the batteries are drained, the FCBC goes into the charge mode and begins to charge the batteries at higher
current. When the batteries reach a preset voltage level (typically set to 56.0 volts), the FCBC goes to float mode. In the
float mode the FCBC keeps charging the battery but at lower current. The FCBC monitors the voltage level of the
batteries. As soon as the battery voltage goes below preset voltage (typically set to 50.4 volts), FCBC goes from float
mode to charge mode. The change over from mains to battery and vice-versa is automatic. The advantage of using an
FCBC is that batteries get charged faster, since the batteries are charged with higher current initially.
Matrix
Digital Output Port
The Digital Output Port (DOP) on the CPU card allows you to connect and operate automated control applications like a
hooter, buzzer, a siren, door lock, etc. The device connected to the DOP must comply with the technical specifications of
the port.
Refer the topic "Digital Output Port (DOP)" for more information.
Analog Input Port
The Analog Input Port (AIP) handles un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signals. It is used for connecting an external
music device, which may be any audio output like a PC, a CD player, or a Cassette Player. The music device must
comply with the technical specifications of this port.
The music from the external source can be played as 'Music-on-Hold' to internal as well as external callers. Refer the
topics "Installing External Devices" and "Music-on-Hold".
Analog Output Port
The Analog Output Port (AOP) outputs un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signals, which can be amplified by an
external amplifier connected to the port. The port is meant for connecting a Public Address System for Paging.
When you connect an external paging device to the AOP, ensure that it complies with the technical specifications of the
port.
Ports and Connectors on the CPU Card at a Glance
LED
The CPU card has two dual color (Green and Red) LEDs.
LED 1 - L1 works as a Heart Bit of CPU Card. In Normal Condition, L1 will be turned ON Green for 1 sec and OFF for
1 sec.
LED 2 - L2 indicates the Layer Application status. In Normal condition, L2 will be turned on Orange and will blink very
fast.
Both L1 and L2 also indicate Application status.
Case 1: L1 is steady GREEN/OFF and LED2 is OFF. This means the Application has got hanged and there is some
problem at Application side code.
Case 2: LED1 is steady GREEN/OFF and LED2 is GREEN/RED/ORANGE. This means the Layer has got hanged
and there is some problem with the Layer side code.
Port Name Connector Location Function
USB port (Device Port) USB Fascia To download data on to the Eternity through a PC.
Communication (COM Port) DB-9 female Fascia To connect a PC (to run various software; download system
activity reports).
Digital Input Port Push-type Fascia To connect a sensor device/panic switch
Digital Output Port Push-type Fascia To connect an automated application devices: hooter, siren, door
lock, fire alarm, bell, water pump, lights, etc.
Analog Input Port Push-type Fascia To connect an external music source
Analog Output Port Push-type Fascia To connect a public address system
Matrix
Jumpers
The position and function of the Jumpers on the CPU Card are:
ETERNITY GE does not support Redundancy or Hot Swap.
Installing the CPU Card
Like the Power Supply Cards and the CPU too is delivered factory-fitted in the system. If you want to remove the card for
1. Unpack the CPU Card and verify the Package Contents.
If the card is already installed, switch off power supply, unplug the power cord. Remove the screws securing the card.
Lift the levers on the mounting bracket to release the card. As the card emerges from the slot, ease it out of the slot.
2. Insert the CPU Card into the guide rails of the slot designated for the card. On all variants of ETERNITY GE, the
second slot from the left (next to the Power Supply Card) is designated for the CPU Card.
Ensure that the card makes perfect contact with the connectors on the backplane of the motherboard. Press down the
levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot with the screws.
Connect the ETERNITY GE to a Standalone PC
There are two ways to do it, depending on the type application you are going to use:
3. Connect the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY with the Ethernet Port of the stand-alone PC using the Ethernet cable
supplied with ETERNITY.
To use the web-based programming Tool Jeeves, to run the Front Desk User Wizard of the Hotel Application, you
need to connect to the PC via the Ethernet port.
OR
4. Connect the Communication Port of ETERNITY with the Communication Port of the stand-alone PC using any
standard Communication Cable.
To program the system using a PC and to run a PMS Interface, you must connect the ETERNITY to a standalone PC
over the COM Port.
You may connect to the PC via either the COM Port or the Ethernet Port, if you intend to use the standalone PC for
the following applications:
capturing SMDR reports, SMDR Online and SMDR Posting
capturing System Activity Log and System Fault Log, Hotel Motel Activity Log
running PMS Interface or CAS Interface in the Hotel Application
13
,
Jumper Number Position Function
J7
AB (default)
BC
External Boot.
Internal Boot.
J12
AB
BC (default)
Reset SE Password.
Don't reset SE Password.
J13
AB (default)
BC
Embedded ICE.
JTAG Mode.
13. Refer the ETERNITY Hospitality System Manual to know more.
Matrix
Connecting to the Local Area Network
5. Connect the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY GE with the LAN switch using the RJ45 Ethernet cable supplied with the
system.
With the ETERNITY connected to a LAN, you can:
access the web-based programming tool Jeeves from any PC on the LAN.
set up and run software applications such as PMS and CAS on any PC on the LAN.
generate Station Message Detail Record (SMDR) Reports on any PC on the LAN.
When you connect the ETERNITY GE to a to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that
The IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY GE and the Ethernet Port of the PC do not clash,
i.e. are not the same.
The Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY GE and the Ethernet Port of the PC are in the same Subnet.
Changing IP Address and Subnet Mask of the Master Ethernet Port
The default IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY GE is 192.168.1.101 and the Subnet Mask is
255.255.255.0
6. Ascertain the IP Address and Subnet of the standalone PC.
If the system is connected to a LAN PC, ask the LAN Administrator to assign an IP Address and a Subnet Mask to the
ETERNITY GE
14
.
7. Switch ON the system.
8. Change the IP Address and the Subnet Mask of the Ethernet Port
15
by dialing the following commands from a station
of the ETERNITY GE.
Dial 1#91-1234 (to enter programming mode. 1234 is the default SE Password)
You get programming tone.
To change IP Address
Dial 2110-IP Address
E.g.: to change the IP Address to 192.168.50.10 dial 2110-192168050010
You get confirmation tone.
Dial 2111-Subnet Mask
E.g.: to change the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0 dial 2111-255255255000
Dial 00 to exit from the programming mode.

If there is a DHCP server on the LAN to which the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY GE is connected,
there is no need to change the IP Address or Subnet Mask, as these will be provided automatically by the
DHCP server.
You must only enable the DHCP flag of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY GE.
To enable DHCP flag
Dial 2117-1
14. This will not be necessary, if there is a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server on the LAN.
15. If the ETERNITY is connected to a LAN (without a DHCP server), use the IP Address and Subnet Mask given by your
LAN Administrator as the new IP Address, Subnet Mask.
Matrix
9. Switch off power supply and continue with other installation tasks.
Connecting a Sensor device to the Digital Input Port (DIP)
10. Refer the technical specifications of the DIP and select a compatible device. The DIP has a two-wire, push-in (spring
clamp action) connector to attach the sensor device.
Technical Specifications of the DIP
Use 0.5mm, non-stranded cables to connect the sensor device to the DIP.
To connect the sensor device to the DIP,
strip off about half a centimeter of the insulation off the wire ends of the sensor device.
using a blunt pin or a small flat screw driver, push back the (orange-color) levers of the connector.
insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with one wire in
each opening.
ensure that both wires fit neatly into the opening.
release pressure on the levers. Both wires will be held in place by spring clamp action.
Connecting a Gadget to the Digital Output Port (DOP)
11. Refer the technical specifications of the DOP and select a compatible device.
A DC contactor (60VDC max.) is connected to the DOP. Any external relay based device can be interfaced with
the DOP via this DC contactor.
The DOP has a two-wire, push-in (spring clamp action) connector to attach the relay device.
Use 0.5mm, non-stranded cables to connect the gadget to the DOP.
Technical Specifications of the DOP
Type Loop Open/Loop Close Sensing
Minimum Required Loop (open/close) Sensing Current 1 mA
Maximum Permissible Loop (open/close) Sensing Current 7 mA
Relay Type Solid State (CMOS) Relay
Contact Arrangement 1 Normally Open, 1-Form-A
Contact Rating (Resistive Load) 60VDC Max. @ 0.15 Amp
Operation Time 5 ms
Matrix
To connect the device to the DOP,
strip off about half a centimeter of the insulation off the wire ends of the gadget.
insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with one wire in each
opening.
ensure that both wires fit snugly into the openings.
Connecting a Public Address System
12. Refer the technical specifications of the Analog Output Port and select a compatible Public Address System (PAS)
device.
Connect a good quality external amplifier and matching speakers to the port.
Technical Specifications of the AOP
Use shielded cable for connecting the amplifier with the speakers.
Also refer the topic External Paging under Paging.
To connect the amplifier and speakers,
strip off about half a centimeter the wire-pair of the amplifier.
using a blunt pin or a small flat screw driver, push back the (orange-color) levers of the AOP connector.
opening.
Specification Value
Interface Type Audio Signal
Frequency 300Hz to 3400Hz
Maximum Voltage 0.707Vrms across 600
Matrix
Connecting an External Music Source
13. Refer the technical specifications of the Analog Input Port and select a compatible external music source - Cassette
Player, FM Radio, CD Player, etc.
Analog Input Port Technical Specifications
To connect the music source,
strip off about half a centimeter of insulation of the wire-pair of the external music device.
using a blunt pin or a small flat screw driver, push back the (orange-color) levers of the AIP connector.
insert the stripped ends of the two wires into the two (green-color) openings of the connector, with one wire in
each opening.
Also refer the topics Music-On-Hold, Background Music, External Music.
The volume of the external music source must be set to a level such that the music on the trunks is neither very
low nor very high. The volume of the signal coming from this device must never increase beyond the specified
limits - 0.707Vrms across 600.
Do not apply electrical signal of higher volume than the specified limit to this port, as it may cause permanent
damage to the system. Matrix Warranty does not cover damages resulting from improper use.

The Single Line Telephone Card
The Single Line Telephone (SLT) Card provides the interface to connect as extension phones, any standard, two-wire,
analog single line telephone instrument - rotary, pulse-tone, cordless, feature phones with or without Calling Line
Identification.
The SLT Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY GE. SLT interface also is available
in combination with Two-wire trunk and digital key phone interfaces on a single card.
SLT Cards for ETERNITY GE
Specification Value
DC Bias Not more than 10V DC
Isolation Internal Transformer
Source Impedance required 600
Termination provided 600
Card Name Configuration and Application
ETERNITY GE Card SLT20 20-port card to connect 20 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card SLT8 8-port card to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card DKP4+SLT16 Combination card, with 4-ports to connect to 4 Digital Key Phones and 16
ports to connect 16 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16 Combination card, with 2 ports to connect 2 Two-wire Trunk lines, 2 ports to
connect 2 Digital Key Phones, and 16 ports to connect 16 Single Line
Telephones
Matrix
The maximum number of SLT ports supported by the variants of ETERNITY GE are:
ETERNITY GE3S: 60 SLT ports
ETERNITY GE6S:120 SLT ports
ETERNITY GE12S: 240 SLT ports
Connectors
The SLT Cards have RJ45 connectors, with each connector having 4 SLT ports. A multi-pair, MDF cable is supplied for
each connector.
LEDs
The Card SLT8 has 2 LEDs, while SLT20 has no LED:
The LEDs indicate the health of the card during the "Reset Cycle"
the status of any one of the station ports during normal functioning of the system.
You can monitor any of the SLT Station ports by assigning the LED to that port
16
.
LED Pattern of SLT Card
LED 2 (L2)
* The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is received from the application on the SLT Port.
For example, if the current LED state is Green/Red ON, on the next command received, the LED will be turned OFF. It
will remain OFF until the next command is received. When the next command is received it will be turned Green/Red ON
again. This process continues.
Installing Single Line Telephones
To be able to connect Single Line Telephones as Stations (i.e. Extensions) to your ETERNITY GE, you must install at
least one of the aforementioned SLT cards in the System.
1. Decide the number of SLT extensions required and arrange for as many telephone instruments.
You may use NEO10, the SLT offered by Matrix or any standard telephone instrument like a rotary phone, a pulse-
tone switchable push-button phone, a feature phone or a cordless phone.
Use SLTs equipped with a 'Flash' key, as several of the features and facilities of the ETERNITY require you to
press Flash. If any of the SLTs you have selected does not have a Flash key, tap the Hook switch of the phone to
dial Flash.
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT8 Combination card, with 2 ports to connect 2 Two-wire Trunk lines, 2 ports to
connect 2 Digital Key Phones, and 8 ports to connect 8 Single Line
Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8+SLT8 Combination card with 8 ports to connect 8 Two-wire Trunk lines, and 8
ETERNITY GE Card TWT4+SLT16 Combination card with 4 ports to connect 4 Two-wire Trunk lines, and 16
16. To do this, enter SE mode, enter the programming mode from any station connected to the ETERNITY, by dialing 1#91-
1234. Dial the command 5323-Slot-Port, where Slot is the number of the universal slot in which the card is installed and
Port is the port on the card to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its functioning. Exit programming mode by
dialing '00'.
PORT Status LED Colour LED Cadence
Commands from Application to SLT Port. GREEN Toggle at each command*
Events to Application from SLT Port. RED Toggle at each event*
Matrix
2. Unpack the SLT card and check the package contents. Ensure that the power supply is switched off, before you begin
the installation of the card. Always wear an electrostatic discharge prevention wrist strap/belt and use a grounding
mat.
3. Unscrew and remove the filler card mount bracket of any of the free (empty) Universal Slots. Do not discard the filler
bracket! You may require it at a later stage.
4. Insert the SLT Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card.
Make sure that the connectors on the card make perfect contact with those on the motherboard on the backplane.
5. Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Now, secure the mounting bracket with
the two screws provided.
If you are installing more than one SLT card, you can install the second card in any other free slot. It is not
necessary to install the second/third card in the subsequent slots.
6. Use the cables supplied with the SLT card to connect the SLT wires with the Main Distribution Frame.
For each connector on the SLT Card, there is a separate 4-pair CAT5e cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free
at the other end.
The cables are bunched together, but each cable is identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot edge and the
Insulation edge of the cable.
The color markings make it easy to identify the connector in which the cable is plugged in and the ports on the
connector.
Refer the illustrations below to help you identify which cable to plug into each connector and the ports on each
connector.
ETERNITY GE Card SLT20
Matrix
For the cable details of other combination cards with SLT ports, click on the hyperlinked topics in the following.
ETERNITY GE Card DKP4+SLT16
Refer the topic Installing the Digital Key Phone Card.
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16
Refer the topic Installing the Two-wire Trunk Card.
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8+SLT8
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the MDF cables supplied with the card into the respective connectors with the help of the
color markings on the cables as illustrated above for each SLT Card type.
8. Terminate the open end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for 'Station Lines'
in the "Main Distribution Frame (MDF)".
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY SLT Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone Connector, while the
wire-pair of the extension line to be connected to this port must be terminated on the top of the Krone connector.
Refer the topic "Main Distribution Frame (MDF)" for illustration.
Matrix
9. Repeat the same steps to install another SLT card.
Connecting SLT instruments
10. Connect the SLT instruments you have arranged for. Plug in the SLTs into the wall socket/outlets.
If you are installing Matrix NEO10, unpack the box and verify the package contents.
Mount NEO10 on a desk at the desired location.
You can also mount NEO10 on a wall with the help of the mounting template (refer the User Guide shipped with
the phone).
When you mount the phone on a wall, turn the Wall Mounting Hook near the handset cradle to 180 degrees. This
allows you to replace the handset when the phone is mounted on a wall.
Connect the long straightened end of the Spring cord supplied with the phone into the jack at the bottom of the
handset.
Connect the short straightened end of the Spring cord into the Handset Jack marked with the symbol on the right
panel of the phone body.
Plug in the extension wire from the wall into the Line Cord Jack of NEO10.
For the purpose of testing, you may connect one or two Single Line Telephone instruments by plugging in the
phone cables into the RJ45 connectors on the card.
When you plug the RJ11 connector of SLT into an RJ45 connector on the SLT card, the SLT will be connected
on the first port on the connector.

The Digital Key Phone Card
The Digital Key Phone (DKP) Card provides the interface to connect the proprietary digital key phones, EON, the PC-
based phone EONSOFT and the Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles with the ETERNITY.
The DKP Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY GE.
DKP Cards for ETERNITY GE
The maximum number of DKP Ports supported by each variant of ETERNITY GE is:
ETERNITY GE3S: 48 DKP ports
ETERNITY GE DKP16 16-port card to connect 16 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY GE DKP8 8-port card to connect 8 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY GE Card DKP4+SLT16 Combination card, with 4-ports to connect to 4 Digital Key Phones and 16
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16 Combination card, with 2 ports to connect 2 Two-wire Trunk lines, 2 ports
to connect 2 Digital Key Phones, and 16 ports to connect 16 Single Line
Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT8 Combination card, with 2 ports to connect 2 Two-wire Trunk lines, 2 ports
to connect 2 Digital Key Phones, and 8 ports to connect 8 Single Line
Telephones
Matrix
Connectors
The DKP Cards have RJ45 connectors, with each connector having 4 DKP ports. A multi-pair CAT5e MDF cable is
supplied for each connector on the card.
LEDs
The DKP16 and DKP8 cards have two dual colour LEDs:
LED1 indicates the health of the card during the Reset Cycle.
LED2 monitors the status of any one of the station ports during normal functioning of the system.
LED 2 can be assigned to any DKP port to monitor the status of that port
17
.
LED Pattern DKP Card
LED 2 (L2)
* The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is received from the application on the DKP Port.
Installing Digital Key Phone Card
To install the proprietary digital key phone EON and the DSS Consoles and the PC-based EON SOFT, you must have at
least one of the abovementioned DKP Cards installed in the system.
1. Decide the number of DKP extensions and DSS Consoles required and arrange for as many EON, EONSOFT and
DSS Consoles.
2. Unpack the DKP card and check the package contents. Make sure that power supply is switched off and you are
wearing an antistatic-wrist strap/belt and have a grounding mat, before handling the card.
bracket, keep for future use to cover empty slots.
4. Insert the DKP card into the guide rails of the free slot you have selected for the card. All the pins on the connector of
the card should make perfect contact with those on the connector of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
5. Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Now, fix the card in its slot with the two
screws provided.
If you are installing more than one DKP card, it is not necessary to install the next card/s in the subsequent slots.
6. Using the MDF Cables supplied with the DKP card connect the DKP wire pairs to the Main Distribution Frame.
For each connector on the DKP card, there is a separate cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free wire on the
other end. The cables are bunched together. Each cable is identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot Edge and
the Insulation edge of the cable.
The color markings make it easy to identify the connector and the ports to which the cable is connected.
17. You can do this from the SE mode, by dialing the SE Command 5323-Slot-Port, where Slot is the number of universal
slot in which the card is installed and Port is the port on the card to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its
functioning.
Commands from Application to DKP Port. GREEN Toggle*
Events to Application from DKP Port. RED Toggle*
Matrix
Refer the illustrations below to help you identify which cable to plug into each connector and the ports on each connector.
ETERNITY GE Card DKP16
Matrix
For the cable details of other combination cards with DKP ports, click on the hyperlinked topics in the following.
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the DKP cables into the respective connectors guided by the color markings on the cables as
illustrated above for each DKP Card Type.
8. Terminate the free end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for 'Station Lines' in
the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY GE DKP Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone Connector, while the
Installing EON
1. Unpack the box and verify the package contents.
2. Mount the phone on a desk or wall at a convenient location.
Matrix
EON42
To mount EON42 on a wall, detach the Foot Stand on the bottom of the phone, by pressing the snap fits of the foot
stand backwards, and lifting it from its anchorage in the mounting holes.
Now, insert the snap fits of the foot stand into the Wall Mount bracket slots on the bottom of the phone in the " wall
up" direction.
Fix two screws of appropriate diameter on the wall, ensuring that they are aligned with the Keyhole Slots 1 and 2 of
EON42. The screws should protrude from the wall to fit into the Keyhole Slots.
Now, mount the phone with the screws fitting into the keyhole slots.
Connect the handset of the EON42 to the phone body using the spring cord.
To use a Headset (not supplied with the phone), plug any standard stereo headset with 2.5mm single connector into
the headset jack on the left side panel of the phone.
EON48
To mount EON48 on a wall, detach the Foot Stand on the bottom of the phone, as illustrated below.
Power
(DC Jack)
MIC
Foot Stand
(Functions as
Wall Mount Bracket)
Wall Mount
Bracket Slot
Wall Mount
Bracket Slot
WALL
U P
W A L L
UP
DESK
Keyhole
Slot 1
Keyhole
Slot 2
Keyhole
Slot 2
Keyhole
Slot 1
4P4C Spring
Cord
Foot
Stand
Line
Headset Port
Matrix
When you mount EON48 on a desk, you can attach the Foot Stand in two ways as illustrated below.
You can also plug in a headset with RJ11 connector into the Headset port at the bottom of the phone.
3. Plug one end of the RJ45 cable supplied with the phone into the RJ45 connector and the other end into the wall jack.
The cable in the wall jack originates from the DKP card through the MDF.
4. When the ETERNITY is powered ON, the EON will get reset. The EON communicates with the ETERNITY. The
handshaking lasts for 5-6 seconds. The EON model, version and revision number, along with the message 'Please
wait' appear on the LCD display.
5. After successful handshaking and reset cycle, if the DKP Parameters have been programmed, the LCD display of the
EON will show the station number and the station name in a line. The day, date and time, time zone in the other line.
6. You may adjust the LCD for brightness, contrast and backlight. Refer the topic, "Digital Key Phone - Operation".
For the purpose of testing, you may connect one or two DKPs directly to the connectors of the ETERNITY DKP
card.
Installing DSS Consoles
Once you have installed EON with ETERNITY, installing DSS Consoles can be done in a few simple steps, very much
similar to those involved in the installation of EON.

MATRI X EON48- S V2R2
PLEASE WAI T . . .
202 Recept i on
Mon 24 AUG 12: 00
Matrix
2. Place the DSS Console next to the DKP, EON, to which it is to be attached.
You can install two DSS consoles to a DKP. Refer "Direct Station Selection Consoles" for possible combinations for
installing the various models of DSS Consoles.
3. Decide which DKP Ports on the DKP Card are to be assigned to the DSS Consoles. You may select any free
(unused) port on the card for DSS Consoles. It is not necessary for the DSS Console ports to be in a sequence with
the DKP ports to which they are attached.
For example: you have connected DKP1 to Port 1 on the first RJ45 connector of the DKP8 card. You want to attach
two DSS Consoles to DKP1. The two DSS Consoles may be connected to any port on the second connector of the
card, not necessarily to Port 2 and Port 3 on the first connector.
4. The wire-pairs from the DKP Ports designated for DSS Consoles should be terminated into the bottom of the Krone
Connector (of 'Station Lines' on the MDF).
5. The wire-pairs of the DSS Consoles should be terminated into the top of the Krone Connector (of 'Station Lines' on
the MDF).
6. Now, all you need to do is program the DSS console as an attachment of the DKP.
Installing EONSOFT
To install EONSOFT, you must have a computer with Windows as the operating system. The EONSOFT is compatible
with the following Operating Systems of Windows:
Windows 98
Windows XP
Windows NT
Windows 2003
Windows Vista
2. Connect the Handset to the dongle in the handset jack. If using a headset, connect the microphone and the speaker
connectors into the dongle.
3. Connect one end of the Communication cable to the COM port of the dongle. Connect the other end of the
communication cable into the COM port of the computer.
4. Connect a wire-pair of a DKP port of the ETERNITY to the RJ11 port marked 'DKP' on the dongle.
Matrix
5. Switch ON the computer. The computer must have Windows Operating System installed on it.
6. Now insert the EONSOFT CD-ROM supplied with this PC-based DKP into the CD drive of your Computer. The
EONSOFT has a self-executing program and will automatically install itself on your PC.
7. If the software does not perform auto install on your PC, browse to CD-ROM.
8. The software program will appear, with the Matrix Icon and labeled as 'Matrix-EONSOFT'.
9. Click on the Matrix EONSOFT Icon to execute installation of the program.
10. After the program has been installed and run, a shortcut will be automatically created and appear on your desktop.
11. Click on the shortcut to open the program. The EONSOFT window will open:
12. Click on 'Options' at the top left of the window. A drop down menu will appear.
Matrix
13. Click on the option 'COM Port'.
14. Select the COM Port to which the communication cable is connected.
15. This dialog box will be displayed:
Matrix
This screen will appear only if the DKP port to which the EONSOFT is connected has been programmed for
parameters like Name, Station number, Date and Time.
If this dialog box does not appear on the screen in response to the click on the COM Port Option, test the COM
Port for data transfer.
If the wrong COM port has been selected, a dialog box will pop up on your screen with the message: "COMx is
invalid or busy, please select another COM Port". Select the correct COM Port.
Testing the COM Port
From the drop down menu of 'Options', select the 'COM Port' to which you have connected the communication cable.
The COM Port Settings dialog box will open.
Connect the communication cable to the COM Port of the PC.
Short pin2 and pin3 of the DB-9 connector at the free end of the cable.
Click on the button labeled 'Start Test' in the COM Port Settings dialog box.
After clicking this button, observe the Test Result section on the dialog box.
The 'Error Count' value shows zero, if both the communication cable and the COM port are working.
The above screen shows that the COM Port/communication cable is working.
If the 'Error Count' shows a value other than zero, it means that either the communication cable or the COM port of
the PC is faulty.
Above screen shows the faulty COM Port/Communication Cable.
Remove the communication cable from the COM Port of the PC.
Matrix
Short pin2 and pin3 of the communication port of the computer and click on 'Start Test' in the COM Port Settings
dialog box.
Now, if the error count is zero, please check the Communication Cable.
If the error count is not a zero, the COM Port of the PC is faulty. Try another communication port.
Test the functioning of the COM Port of the PC and the communication cable, before you install the EONSOFT.

The Two-Wire Trunk Card
The Two-Wire Trunk (TWT) Card provides the interface to connect the ETERNITY with the POTS Network. The TWT
Card supports the different standards and features of POTS Networks across the world.
The TWT Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY GE. TWT interface is also
available in combination with SLT and DKP ports on a single card.
TWT Cards for ETERNITY GE
The maximum TWT Trunk Ports supported by the variants of ETERNITY GE is:
ETERNITY GE 3S: 48
ETERNITY GE6S: 96
ETERNITY GE12S: 128
Connectors
The TWT Card has RJ45 connectors, with 4 TWT ports on each connector. A multi-pair, CAT5e MDF cable is supplied for
each connector on the card.
LED
The TWT16 and TWT8 Cards have two LEDs to indicate:
the health of the card during the Reset Cycle.
the status of a selected Trunk port during normal functioning of the system.
You can assign the LED to any TWT port on the card which you want to monitor
18
.
ETERNITY GE Card TWT16 16-port card to connect 16 Two-wire Trunk lines from the CO network
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8 8-port card to connect 8 Two-wire Trunk lines from the CO network
ETERNITY GE Card TWT8+SLT8 Combination card, with 8 TWT ports to connect 8 TWT analog trunk lines
and 8 SLT ports to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card TWT4+SLT16 Combination card, with 4 TWT ports to connect 4 TWT analog trunk lines
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16 Combination card, with 2 TWT ports to connect 2 Two-wire Trunk lines, 2
DKP ports to connect 2 Digital Key Phones, and 16 SLT ports to connect
16 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT8 Combination card, with 2 TWT ports to connect 2 Two-wire Trunk lines, 2
DKP ports to connect 2 Digital Key Phones, and 8 SLT ports to connect 8
Single Line Telephones
18. To assign the LED to a selected port for monitoring its functioning, you must enter SE mode and dial the SE Command
5323-Slot-Port, where Slot is the number of universal slot in which the card is installed and Port is the port on the card
to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its functioning.
Matrix
Among the combination cards TWT2+DKP2+SLT16, TWT2+DKP2+SLT8, TWT4+TWT16 have no LEDs. The
combination card TWT8+SLT8 has two LEDs.

LED Pattern of TWT Card
LED 2 (L2)
* The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is received from the application on the TWT Port.
Installing the TWT Card
For TWT connectivity, you must install at least one of the abovementioned TWT Cards in the system.
1. Take all the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards and electronic equipment. Make sure that power
supply is turned off before you begin the installation of the card. Put on an electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist
strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the TWT card and check the package contents.
3. Select any free (empty) slot from the Universal Slots. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket of the empty slot.
Preserve the filler bracket for future use!
4. Insert the TWT Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. The connectors on the card should
make perfect contact with those of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
5. Press down the lever on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the mounting bracket in place
with the two screws provided.
If installing more than one TWT Card, it is not necessary to insert the other cards in subsequent slots. Any card
can be inserted in any of the Universal Slots.
6. Use the CAT5e cables supplied for each connector on the TWT card to connect the Trunk Lines with the Main
Distribution Frame.
The cable for each connector is identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation edge of the
cable. This is to help you identify the connector and the ports to which the cable is connected.
You may refer the illustrations below to identify which cable to plug into each connector with the help of the color
markings on the cable.

Commands from Application to TWT Port. GREEN Toggle*
Events to Application from TWT Port. RED Toggle*
Matrix
ETERNITY GE Card TWT16
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the Trunk Card cables into the respective connectors referring to the color markings on the
cables as illustrated above for each TWT Card type.
8. Terminate the free end of the TWT Card cable into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for 'Trunk
Lines' on the Main Distribution Frame.
Trunk cables from the ETERNITY are to be connected with the Trunk Lines from the PSTN/CO terminated on the
MDF. Each wire-pair form the ETERNITY GE TWT Port must be terminated on the bottom of the Krone Connector,
while the wire-pair of the trunk line from the CO Network to be connected to this port must be terminated on the top of
the Krone Connector.
Refer the topics Main Distribution Frame and Terminating Trunk and Station Cables on the MDF.
9. Repeat these steps to install other TWT cards, if applicable.

The BRI Card
The BRI card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY with ISDN BRI Lines. The BRI lines may be from a public
ISDN exchange, a private ISDN exchange.
The BRI Card is available in the following configuration for the variants of ETERNITY GE.
BRI Cards of ETERNITY GE
The maximum number of BRI lines supported by each variant of ETERNITY GE are:
ETERNITY GE3S: 12 BRI lines.
ETERNITY GE6S: 24 BRI lines
ETERNITY GE12S: 32 BRI lines
Connectors
The BRI card has 4 RJ45 Connectors. A separate cable is supplied for each connector.
ISDN BRI - Installation Scenarios
Most ISDN Service Providers also provide the NT1 device/s along with the BRI line/s. The BRI Line from the ISDN central
office is terminated on the NT1 on the Customer's Premises, as illustrated below.
Where,
U Interface = between the NT1 equipment and the ISDN central office.
S/T Interface = between the ISDN user equipment, in this case, ETERNITY and the Network Interface Equipment
(NT1).
The BRI line is terminated on the NT1. The S/T interface of the NT1 is connected to BRI port of the ETERNITY.
ETERNITY GE Card BRI4 4-Port card to connect 4 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
ISDN
Network
NT 1
Power
U-Interface
(2-wire)
S/T
Interface
BRI Port
ETERNITY
Customer Premises
Matrix
TE and NT Modes
In this illustration, the BRI line from ISDN Service Provider is directly connected to BRI port of the ETERNITY via the NT1
device. Here, the ETERNITY is the Terminal Equipment, so the BRI Port must be programmed to work in the TE mode.
Similarly, an ISDN Phone or BRI port of another ISDN PBX can be connected to the BRI port of the ETERNITY. In such a
configuration, the ISDN Phone/BRI port of the other ISDN PBX would be the 'Terminal' and the BRI Port of the
ETERNITY to which they are connected would be the 'Network'. So, the BRI Port of the ETERNITY must be programmed
to work in the NT mode.
Also refer the topic ISDN-BRI to know more.
Types of BRI Configuration
There are two types of configurations in BRI: Point-to-Point Configuration and Point-to-Multipoint Configuration. Each of
these is discussed below.
Point-to-Point Configuration
he maximum distance between the NT (Network Termination, NT1 or NT2) and a single Terminal Equipment, in this case
ETERNITY, can be upto 1 kilometer.
Point-to-Multipoint Configuration
A maximum of 8 ISDN equipments can be connected on a single BRI Bus line in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration.
Further, two configurations are possible in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration:
1. Short Passive Bus Configuration
2. Extended Passive Bus Configuration
Short Passive Bus Configuration
Where,
TE = Terminal Equipment or ISDN device (End user device)
NT = Network Termination provided by the ISDN Service Provider
d = distance from NT to the last TE equipment.
ISDN
Network
NT BRI Port
(TE Mode)
ETERNITY
(UP to 1 Km.)
BRI Line
ISDN
Network
BRI Port
(TE Mode)
ETERNITY
NT
ISDN Phone ISDN Phone ISDN Phone
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Terminal 3 Terminal 8
Terminal
Resistance 100
Terminal
Resistance 100
BRI Bus Bar
d < 200 meters
Matrix
In a Short Passive Bus Configuration,
A maximum of 8 TEs or ISDN devices can be connected to a single NT on a bus up to 200 meters from the NT.
100 Terminal Resistance is required to be inserted at the NT side as well as the last TE Equipment as shown in the
figure.
Using this configuration, any subscriber from ETERNITY can access a BRI line and can make outgoing calls. At the
same time, another subscriber from ETERNITY or any ISDN phone shown in the figure can make outgoing call from
the same BRI. In the same way, incoming calls are possible on the same BRI.
Only two simultaneous speech paths can be established, as BRI supports 2 voice channels only.
This configuration is useful on the smaller premises, where a single BRI line and multiple ISDN devices are used.
Extended Passive Bus Configuration
Where,
TE = Terminal equipment of any ISDN Equipment
NT = Network Termination provided by Service Provider
TR Terminal Resistance 100
d = distance from NT to the last TE Equipment
d1 = the total distance from first TE equipment and the last TE equipment.
In an Extended Passive Bus Configuration,
You can connect only 3 Terminal Equipment or ISDN devices. These devices are grouped together at one end of the
bus, with may extend to a distance of up to 1 kilometer from the NT.
However, all the 3 Terminal Equipment/ISDN devices must be located within a range of 30 meters, as shown in the
figure.
Using this configuration, any subscriber from ETERNITY can access the BRI line and make outgoing calls. At the
same time, another subscriber from the ETERNITY or any ISDN phone shown in the figure can make outgoing calls
from the same BRI. In the same way, incoming calls are possible on the same BRI.
This configuration is useful on large premises where a limited number of ISDN devices (maximum 3) are to be used
within a range of 30 meters.
Installing the BRI Card
1. Take all the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards and electronic equipment: turn off power supply,
always wear an electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the BRI card and check the package contents.
ISDN
Network
BRI Port
(TE Mode)
ETERNITY
NT
ISDN Phone ISDN Phone
Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Terminal 3
Terminal
Resistance 100
Terminal
Resistance 100
BRI Bus Bar
d < 1 Km
d1 < 30 meters
Matrix
3. Select any free (empty) slot from the Universal Slots. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket of the empty slot. Do not
discard the filler bracket! Preserve it for future use!
Setting Orientation Type of BRI Port
4. The BRI Port can be configured in the TE mode and the NT mode, by changing the position of related jumpers of
each port. Refer the table below.
By default all the BRI ports are configured in the TE mode so, all Jumpers are set in AB position.
If the BRI Port is to be configured in the NT mode, all the related Jumpers of each port should be set in BC
position.
Inserting Termination Resistance
5. Termination of 100 should be inserted in the following cases:
When the BRI port is configured in the TE mode and connected in a Point-to-Point configuration as shown below.
When the BRI port is configured in the TE mode in a Point-to-Multipoint configuration as shown below. 100
Termination is required on the last Terminal connected on the S0 bus to terminate calls properly.
In a Point-to-Multipoint configuration, 100 termination can be provided on either of the following:
Last TE equipment
Last point of the bus bar where the last TE equipment is connected.
When BRI port is configured in the NT mode.
Mode
Jumper Position for Port1 Jumper Position for Port2
J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J7 J8 J9
NT BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
TE AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
Mode
Jumper Position for Port3 Jumper Position for Port4
J10 J16 J17 J18 J14 J15 J19 J20
ISDN
Network
NT
BRI TE
ETERNITY
BRI Line
ISDN
Network
NT
BRI TE
ETERNITY
BRI Line
BRI TE BRI TE
Other ISDN
Equipment
Other ISDN
Equipment
Matrix
If the S0 bus itself supports Terminating resistors, Termination Resistance need not be inserted when
BRI Port is configured as TE and connected in a Point-to-Point Configuration as illustrated above.
BRI Port is configured as NT.
Termination need not be inserted if the BRI port of ETERNITY (configured in TE mode) is connected as any
terminal other than the last terminal on the S0 bus (in a Multi-point configuration).
Termination in TE Equipment (BRI Port)
6. To set the 100 termination on the BRI port set the Jumpers J3 and J4 provided on the BRI module of each port in AB
position. Refer the table below.
By default, Termination Resistance of 100 is set on the BRI port (Jumpers J3 and J4 are in AB position)
7. To remove the 100 termination from the BRI port set the Jumpers J3 and J4 (provided on the BRI module) in BC
position.
Termination in the Bus Bar
8. 100 termination resister can be connected between TX and RX, i.e. between pin number 3-4 and 5-6 in the RJ45
connector as illustrated below.
As shown in the application diagrams for Point-to-Multipoint connectivity, each ISDN TE device is connected in a Bus
Bar, which may be Short Passive Bus Bar configuration or an Extended Passive Bus Bar configuration.
Function
Jumper Position for BRI Port1 Jumper Position for BRI Port 2
J3 J4 J3 J4
To insert 100 termination resistance AB AB AB AB
To remove 100 termination resistance BC BC BC BC
Function
Jumper Position for BRI Port3 Jumper Position for BRI Port4
J3 J4 J3 J4
1
Tx 3
Rx 4
Rx 5
Tx 6
8
100
100
RJ45 Connector on
Bus Bar at the Last
TE ISDN Equipment
Matrix
Illustrated below is the connection diagram of two ports connected with each other on the same BRI bus bar.
The above figure shows the connection details of two ports on the BRI Bus Bar. Similarly, you can connect 8 ports on
the Bus Bar, keeping in mind the Termination Resister for the NT and the Last TE on the Bus bar.
Pin number 3, 4, 5 and 6 of the RJ45 connector are used for connectivity.
Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Transmit (Tx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Receive (Rx) from the ISDN TE
side.
Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Receive (Rx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Transmit (Tx) from the NT side.
Feeding Power to the Terminal
9. When the BRI Port of the ETERNITY is used as BRI-NT, you can feed power to the terminal equipments connected to
the BRI-NT Port from the ETERNITY.
To do this, you must change the position of the Jumpers J1 and J2 on the BRI modules (daughterboard), of the BRI
Card.
By default, the jumpers J1 and J2 are in AB position to feed power on Tx and Rx wires.
The number of ISDN Terminals that can be connected on the BRI port configured in the NT mode depends on
the power consumed by the ISDN terminals.
Function
Jumper Position
BRI Port1 BRI Port2 BRI Port3 BRI Port4
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
To feed power on Tx and Rx wires (Phantom Power) AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
To feed power on separate pair of wires BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
No power to be fed to the terminal equipment Open Open Open Open Open Open Open Open
1
3
4
5
6
8
RJ45 Connector
ports on BRI Bus
Bar to which the
ISDN TE
Equipment is
connected
1
3
4
5
6
8
Matrix
The maximum power that can be fed to a single BRI port is 50mA. However, from signaling point of view,
maximum 8 terminal equipments can be connected on the BRI port configured in the NT mode.
So, only if the terminal equipments do not consume power from the BRI port (configured in NT mode) of the
ETERNITY, can a maximum of 8 terminals be connected to it.
10. Insert the BRI Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. The connectors on the card should
11. Press down the lever on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the mounting bracket in place
If installing more than one BRI Card, it is not necessary to insert the other cards in subsequent slots. Any card
Connecting to ISDN BRI Lines
12. Use the cable supplied for each connector on the BRI card to connect the BRI Ports to the NT1 device supplied by
your ISDN service provider.
The following diagram shows how to connect a BRI Line to the ETERNITY GE BRI port (in the TE mode).
The Tx and Rx of the BRI port should be connected with the Rx and Tx of the NT1 respectively. Ascertain the
pin details of the NT1 from your Service Provider. If required, cross connect the cables.
V- and V+ are used when a TE is connected to BRI port (in this case the port functions as network or NT).
13. To connect the BRI Lines to the BRI ports, refer the configuration and pinout details given below for guidance.
Configuration details of the U interface (RJ-45) at NT1
Configuration details of the S/T interface (RJ-45) on NT1
Pin Number Pin Details
4 Tx
5 Rx
3 Rx1
4 Tx1
5 Tx2
6 Rx2
ISDN
Network
Power
4
5
3
4
5
6
NT-1
U-Interface
(2-wire)
S/T Interface
(4-wire)
Tx
Rx
Rx1
Tx1
Tx2
Rx2
TxA
RxA
RxB
TxB
V-
V+
NC
NC
ETERNITY
A BRI port of
ETERNITY
Matrix
Pinout and Cable Details of BRI4 Port in TE Mode
Pinout and Cable Details of BRI4 Port in NT Mode
14. If you have completed all other installation tasks, you may turn ON the system and observe the Reset Cycle and the
LED pattern of the BRI Card.
LED Pattern of the BRI Card
The BRI4 Card has an LED for each port: L1, L2, L3, L4.
The LEDs show the Status of the Ports as summarized in the table below:

The T1E1PRI Card
The ETERNITY T1E1PRI Card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY GE to ISDN PRI Network.

When connected to T1 carrier lines, the Card supports the following signaling types:
PRI
Robbed Bit Signaling
Q-Signaling (QSIG)
E&M
When connected to E1 carrier lines, the card supports the following signaling types:
PRI
Q-Signaling (QSIG)
E&M
Pin Colour Connection
1 Orange-White Not connected
2 Orange Not connected
3 Green-White TxA
4 Blue RxA
5 Blue-White RxB
6 Green TxB
7 Brown-White V-
8 Brown V+
Pin Colour Connection
1 Orange-White Not connected
2 Orange Not connected
3 Green-White RxA
4 Blue TxA
5 Blue-White TxB
6 Green RxB
7 Brown-White V-
8 Brown V+
Port Status LED Colour LED Cadence
Port is not active RED Continuously ON
Port is active GREEN Continuously ON
Matrix
The T1E1PRI Card is available in the following configuration for ETERNITY GE:
T1E1PRI Card for ETERNITY GE
The maximum number of PRI Lines supported by each variant of ETERNITY GE is:
ETERNITY GE3S: 3 PRI lines
Connectors
The T1E1PRI card has an RJ45 Connector. A Cat5e cable with RJ45 plugs on both ends is supplied for the connector.
LEDs
The ETERNITY GE T1E1PRI Card has 2 LEDs - L1 and L2 - for indicating the port states.
Installing the T1E1PRI Card
1. Before installing the card, take the necessary precautions prescribed for handling the cards. Always wear an
electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist strap and use a grounding mat. Make sure the power supply is turned off.
2. Unpack the T1E1PRI card and check the package contents.
discard the filler bracket.
Setting Line Termination Resistor
4. To set the Line Termination Resistor for the PRI Port for T1 or E1 Connectivity, you must change the position of the
jumper J5. Refer the table below.
By default J5 is set to BC position to provide 120 termination resistance for E1 connectivity.
To set 100 termination resistance for T1 connectivity, set jumper J5 to AB position.
5. Insert the T1E1PRI Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. Make sure that the connectors
on the card make perfect contact with those of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
6. Now, press down the levers on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the card in place with the
two screws provided.
Connecting ISDN T1/E1 PRI Lines
7. Use the cable supplied with the T1E1PRI Card to connect the ETERNITY to the T1/E1 PRI network interface
equipment (modem), which is usually supplied by your ISDN Service Provider along with the PRI line.
ETERNITY GE Card T1E1PRI Single 1-Port card with QSIG support to connect 1 ISDN T1/E1 PRI Line or ISDN
Compatible Device
Jumper Position Meaning
J5 AB To set termination resistance of 120 for E1 connectivity
J5 BC To set termination resistance of 100 for T1 connectivity
Matrix
The diagram below illustrates this.
Most Service Providers insist on connecting an ISDN modem at both the ends of the PRI line, i.e. one at the Local
Exchange and other at the Customer's Premises.
At the Customer's Premises, the PRI line is terminated on the HDSL interface of the modem.
The DTE interface of the modem is to be connected to the PRI port (RJ-45 connector on the Matrix ETERNITY GE
T1E1PRI Card).
8. Plug in one end of the RJ45 cable supplied with the card into the card's connector. Plug the other end of the RJ45
cable into the Network Termination Unit.
9. Refer the following pin details for connecting the Network Termination Unit with the ETERNITY.
Pin details of HDSL Interface of the G.703 Modem. (HDSL Network Termination Unit)
Pin details of DTE Interface of G.703 Modem. (HDSL Network Interface Unit)
The pinout details of the HDSL interface and DTE interface are of a stand-alone HDSL Network Termination
Unit: the Model HTU-E from RAD Data Communication.
Most of the HDSL Network Termination Unit manufacturers use these connectors. But you are advised to read
the installation guide of the HDSL Network Termination Unit being used by you.
1 Line A
2 Line A
3 Not used
4 Line B
5 Line B
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
1 TX1 (Tip)
2 TX2 (Ring)
3 Not used
4 RX1 (Ring)
5 RX2 (Tip)
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
ISDN
Network
HDSL
(RJ-45 Connector)
G.703
Modem
G.703
Modem
DTE
(RJ-45 Connector)
Power
Customer Premises
4-wire 4-wire
PRI Port
ETERNITY
Matrix
Pin details of ETERNITY T1E1PR1 Port
The T1E1PRI Port of the ETERNITY terminates in an 8-pin RJ45, female connector and is wired according to the table
below.
The cable wires may have to be crossed depending on the pinout of the DTE Interface of the modem.
10. Repeat the same steps to install another card. It is not necessary to install the other T1E1PRI card/s in a sequence.
Any card can be installed in any of the slots.
11. If you have completed all other installation tasks. Power the system. After the Reset Cycle, observe the LED patterns
of the T1E1PRI Card.
LED Patterns
The ETERNITY GE T1E1PRI Card has 2 LEDs: L1 and L2. Given below are the LED Patterns defined for each port state
in the different signaling types supported by the ETERNITY GE.
1. Port Active Mode
Signaling Type: E1-PRI
LED1 Pattern:
LED2 Pattern:
Port Status Colour Cadence
Layer 1 established successfully GREEN Continuous ON
CRC4 Alarm GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
BFA Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
RAI Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
AIS or LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
Rx1 (Ring)
Rx2 (Tip)
NC
Tx1 (Ring) Tx2 (Tip)
NC
NC
NC
Matrix
Signaling Type: E1-CAS
LED1 Pattern:
LED2 Pattern:
Signaling Type: T1-RBS or T1-PRI
LED1 Pattern:
LED2 Pattern:
2. Port Maintenance Mode
LED1 Pattern:
LED2 Pattern:
MFA Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
Y-Bit Alarm GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
AIS16 Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
No Alarm GREEN Continuous ON
TFA Alarm or MFA Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
AIS Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
RAI or LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
Maintenance Mode RED -GREEN 500 ms RED-500 ms GREEN
Near end loop back wait Before activate RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
Near end loop active RED Continuous ON
Near end loop back wait Before deactivate RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
Far end loop back wait after activate GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
Far end loop active GREEN Continuous ON
Far end loop back wait after deactivate GREEN 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
Matrix
3. Port Disable Mode
LED1 Pattern:
LED2 Pattern:

The Mobile Card
The Mobile Card interfaces the ETERNITY with GSM/CDMA networks. It routes calls made and received over GSM/
CDMA networks, like a Mobile handset.
The card does not support GPRS features, Fax and Data services.
The Mobile card is available in the following configuration for ETERNITY GE.
The Mobile Card for ETERNITY GE
Just like Mobile handsets, each Mobile Port has a unique IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) number, pasted
on the Mobile engine.
The maximum Mobile ports supported by the variants of ETERNITY GE are:
ETERNITY GE3S: 12
ETERNITY GE6S: 24
ETERNITY GE12S: 32
Antenna
There is a single antenna for the four ports. A splitter connects all the four ports on the card into a single antenna. An
antenna cable is also provided, giving you the flexibility to move the antenna to another position (in case of weak signal).
Personal Identification Number (PIN)
The SIM cards can be protected from unauthorized use by programming a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the
SIM. If the wrong SIM PIN is entered thrice in a row, by a user, the SIM Card suspects the user and asks for the Personal
Unlock Keyword (PUK).
Disable PIN protection in the RUIM before inserting it in the CDMA card. The Mobile port will not function if PIN
is enabled in the RUIM!.
Installing the Mobile Card
To be able to connect ETERNITY to GSM/CDMA networks, you must have one of the above Mobile Card types installed
in the system.
Port Disable RED Continuous ON
Port Disabled OFF OFF
ETERNITY GE Card GSM4 4-port card to connect to 4 GSM networks (4 SIM Cards can be installed)
ETERNITY GE Card GSM4 3G 4-port card to connect to 4 GSM networks with 3G support (4 SIM Cards can be
installed)
ETERNITY GE Card CDMA4 4-port card to connect to 4 CDMA networks (4 RUIM Cards can be installed)
Matrix
1. To install the Mobile Card,
If using a GSM card, get the SIM Card from the GSM service provider of your choice ready. Use SIM PIN
protection, if required.
Disable Call Waiting in the SIM, if using GSM4 3G Card.
If using a CDMA card, get the RUIM Card from the service provider of your choice ready. Do not use pin
protection!
2. Make sure that the ETERNITY is installed at a location where sufficient network coverage is available. The power
supply should be turned off, and you must be wearing an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist strap and a have a
grounding mat, before you begin handling the card.
3. Unpack the Mobile Card and verify the package contents.
4. If using a CDMA Card, skip to Step 6.
ETERNITY GE Card GSM4
Enabling PIN Protection on SIM
5. For the GSM Card, enable SIM PIN protection before installing the SIM card in the system.

insert the SIM into a mobile handset first.
enable PIN Protection from the mobile handset.
change the SIM PIN to 1234 (this is the default PIN for all SIM cards used in the system). Changing the SIM PIN
to '1234' enables you to change the SIM PIN from the ETERNITY later (Refer SIM PIN for instructions).
disable Call Waiting in the SIM.
remove the SIM from the mobile handset.
If you do not want to use PIN protection, insert the SIM in the mobile handset and disable PIN protection.
Remove the SIM Card from the mobile handset.
Matrix
6. Insert the RUIM/ SIM card (with PIN changed to 1234, and call waiting disabled), with its connector side down into the
RUIM/SIM holder on the Mobile card. You can insert multiple RUIM/SIM cards of the same service provider or of
different service providers.
7. Insert the Mobile Card into the guide rails of the Universal Slot you have selected for this card. Make sure that the
card is inserted deep enough to make perfect contact with the connectors in the backplane. Now, press down the
levers on the card mount bracket to secure the card in its slot.
8. Connect the antenna provided with the card on the splitter connector on the front panel of the card. You may also use
the antenna cable to place the antenna at another position.
9. Repeat the same steps to insert another Mobile Card.
10. If you have completed all installations tasks, power the system.
11. Wait for the system to register with the mobile network. By default, the Mobile ports are set to select and register with
the mobile networks) automatically. Now, observe the LED Patterns of the Mobile Ports.
At every power up of the system, it takes about 3 minutes for the Mobile ports to get registered with the
network. Once registration with the mobile network is completed, the mobile port can be used.
Each time the Mobile Port sends a request (e.g. Registration Request), the system waits for the duration of the
Network Response Timer. This Timer signifies the time for which the Mobile Port waits for a response from the
mobile network. It is fixed for 150 seconds for all Mobile ports.

The VoIP Card
The VoIP Card enables the stations of ETERNITY to connect to the IP network. The VoIP card is based on SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol), the industry standard VoIP. It supports adaptive jitter buffer for reducing delay and improving speech
quality.
The VoIP card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY GE
VoIP Card for ETERNITY GE
ETERNITY GE Card VoIP8 Card with 8 VoIP (SIP) channels, to connect to the IP Network for making VoIP Calls.
Matrix
VoIP Ethernet Port
The VoIP card has a single 'VoIP Ethernet Port' to connect the ETERNITY with the IP network.

Voice Channels
There are 8 full-duplex, Voice Channels on a single VoIP card, enabling you to make and receive 8 simultaneous calls.
You can increase the number of voice channels available to you by installing multiple VoIP cards in the system. For
example, if you have installed 3 VoIP cards, 24 (8x3) Voice channels will be available to you, from which you can make
and receive 24 simultaneous VoIP calls.
SIP Trunks
SIP Trunks are the same as SIP Accounts
19
. SIP Accounts are referred to in this document as SIP Trunks. The
ETERNITY GE VoIP8 Card supports a maximum of 32 SIP Trunks, allowing you to subscribe to as many as 32 different
Internet Telephony Service Providers (ITSP).
It is possible to program all 32 SIP trunks on a single VoIP card or program them in a distributed manner, when installing
multiple VoIP cards.
In countries, where the provision and use of Internet telephony services and products is prohibited and or subject
to laws, regulations or licenses, the User is advised to comply with such laws and regulations when installing and
using this product.
Installing VoIP Card
To install the VoIP card and connect it to the IP network, you may require the following items/information, depending on
your application:
A Broadband Internet Connection to make/receive calls through the Public Internet. If you wish to make calls within
your network (LAN), you do not need an Internet connection.
A SIP Account with an Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP). If you want to make only "Peer-to-Peer" calls (i.e.
calls made without the intervention of a SIP Server or Proxy Server) you do not need the service of an ITSP.
Network Information. Get the following information:
IP Address of the VoIP Card, i.e. the Ethernet Port (Default: 192.168.001.116)
20

Subnet Mask of your LAN network
Gateway Address
DNS Address
DNS Domain Name (optional)
IP Addressing Scheme of your LAN; whether the Connection Type is DHCP, Static, PPPoE
You may ask your LAN administrator/Internet Service Provider for the above information.
If you have subscribed for SIP Account(s) to make SIP calls, ask your Internet Telephony Service Provider (ITSP) for
the following information:
SIP ID/User ID
Authentication User ID (in most cases same as the SIP ID)
Authentication Password
SIP Registrar Server Address
SIP Registrar Server Port
1. Observe all prescribed safety precautions when inserting or removing cards. Make sure the Power Supply is switched
off, and you are wearing an antistatic wrist strap/belt and have a grounding mat.
19. A SIP Account is an account you would get from your VoIP/Internet Telephony Service provider much like you would
get an email account from your Internet Service Provider.
20. The current IP Address of VoIP Port may be viewed on the 'VoIP Ethernet Port Status' page under VoIP Parameters on
Jeeves.
Matrix
2. Unpack the VoIP card and verify the package contents.
3. Select any of the free Universal Slots to insert the VoIP Card. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket of the slot by
pressing up the levers. Preserve the filler bracket for future use.
4. Insert the card into the guide rails of slot. The card should be inserted deep enough to make perfect contact with the
connectors on the backplane.
5. Now, secure the card in its slot by pressing down the levers of the mounting bracket and fixing it in place with the two
screws provided.
6. Using the RJ45 Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card, connect the ETERNITY to the to the IP network, which
may be a LAN or a Public Internet.
You can connect ETERNITY GE VoIP Card to the IP network using a SIP Proxy (SIP Server).
OR
Connect ETERNITY GE VoIP Card to another VoIP product, without going through any proxy. This type of installation
is called Peer-to-Peer Calling.
7. Plug one end of the RJ45 Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card into the Ethernet Port of the VoIP Card.
Connecting the VoIP Ethernet Port to a Broadband Router/Modem
8. If using Public Internet, plug the other end of the cable into the Broadband Router/Modem.

Figure-: VoIP Ethernet Port connected to a Broadband Router/Modem
Connecting VoIP Ethernet Port to a LAN Switch/Hub
9. If connecting to a LAN, plug the other end of the cable into the LAN Switch/Hub.
IP
POTS
VoIP Port
ETERNITY
DKP
Broadband
Modem/Router
Matrix
Figure-: VoIP Ethernet Port connected to a LAN Switch/Hub
When connecting the VoIP Card to a LAN, you may have to change the IP Address and the Subnet Mask of
the card's Ethernet Port, before connecting it to the LAN. This would not be required, if there is a DHCP server
on the LAN.
The IP Address of the Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY GE and the Ethernet Port of the LAN PC must not clash,
i.e. should not be the same.
The Ethernet Port of VoIP Card and Ethernet Port of the LAN PC should be in the same Subnet.
Changing IP Address and Subnet Mask of the VoIP Ethernet Port
The default IP Address of VoIP Ethernet Port is 192.168.001.116.
The default Subnet Mask of the VoIP Ethernet Port is 255.255.255.0
10. Ask your LAN administrator for the IP Address and Subnet Mask of the LAN Switch.
If there is a DHCP server on the LAN, IP Address and the Subnet Mask will be assigned automatically to the
VoIP Ethernet Port. All you need to do is select the Connection Type for the VoIP Ethernet Port. Skip to Step 12.
11. Change the IP Address and the Subnet Mask of the VoIP Ethernet Port by dialing the following commands from a
station of the ETERNITY GE.
Dial 7754-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-IP Address
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is the software port number, from 01 to 16.
E.g.: to change the IP Address of VoIP Ethernet Port with Software Port number 03 to 192.168.10.11 dial 7754-1-
03-192168010011.
To change Subnet Mask
Dial 7755-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Subnet Mask
Broadband
Modem/Router
IP
POTS
VoIP Port
ETERNITY
DKP
Matrix
Where,
E.g.: to change the Subnet Mask of VoIP Ethernet Port with Software Port number 03 to 255.255.255.0 dial 7755-
1-03-255255255000
Selecting DHCP Server as Connection Type
12. If there is a DHCP server on the LAN, select the Connection Type for the VoIP Ethernet Port. To do this,
Dial 7751-1-VoIP Ethernet Port
Where,
E.g.: to select DHCP Connection type for VoIP Ethernet Port with Software Port number 01 dial 7751-1-01.
Connecting the VoIP Ethernet Port to a SIP Proxy
13. If using a SIP Proxy (SIP Server), plug one end of the RJ45 cable into the VoIP Ethernet Port and the other end of the
cable into the Router.
Figure-: VoIP Ethernet Port connected to a SIP Proxy
14. If using a connecting in a Peer-to-Peer application (without SIP Proxy), plug one end of the RJ45 cable into the VoIP
Ethernet Port and the other end of the cable into the LAN Switch.
Figure-: VoIP Ethernet Port connected in a Peer-to-Peer Application (without Proxy)
ITSP
POTS
VoIP Ethernet Port
ETERNITY
DKP
Broadband
Modem/Router
Matrix
15. Repeat the above steps to insert and connect additional VoIP cards to the LAN Switch/Broadband Router/Modem.
16. If you have completed all other installation tasks, you may switch on power supply and observe the 'Reset Cycle' and
the LED Pattern of the VoIP Card.
LED Pattern of the VoIP Card
LED1 Indication - VoIP Card Status Indication
LED2 Indication - SIP Trunk Status Indication
SIP Trunk Status will be indicated by LED2 only after you have programmed the SIP Trunk Parameters.

The E&M Card
The E&M Card of the ETERNITY provides the interface for analog trunking to connect various communication equipment
telephone switches, Routers, Leased Lines, etc. using Tie-Lines.
The E&M Card is required for the following applications:
21
.
Refer the topics E&M Connectivity and E&M Features to know more.
An E&M Port can be programmed to behave as a Trunk Interface, a Subscriber (Station) Interface or both, i.e. as a Tie
The E&M Card supports
E&M Interface - Types IV and V
Speech Interface - Two-wire and four-wire.

VoIP Card Status LED Cadence
VoIP Program Download failed Red Continuous ON
Stack Construct failed - PPPoE Authentication failed Red ON 500ms - OFF 2 sec
Stack Construct failed-IP Address Invalid Red ON 200ms - OFF 200ms-ON 200ms - OFF 2 Sec
Booting Up Green Continuous
Stack Construction in progress Green ON 200ms - OFF 200ms- ON 200ms - OFF 2 sec
Stack Construction successful Green ON 500ms - OFF 2 sec
SIP Trunk Status LED Cadence
SIP Trunk-Disabled Red Continuous ON
Registration failed-Authentication Password invalid Red ON 500ms-OFF 2 sec. (Continuous)
Registration failed-Configuration Parameter invalid Red ON 200ms-OFF 200ms-ON 200ms-OFF 2 sec.
(Continuous)
Registration in Progress Green ON 500ms - OFF 2 sec.(Continuous)
Registration successful Green Continuous ON
21. The PBXs in a Closed User Group can be connected over ISDN T1/E1 Lines. Refer the topic Closed User Groups to
know more.
Matrix
E&M Trunk Seizure Type
22
- Immediate, Immediate + Wink, Seizure Pulse, Seizure Pulse + Wink, Express, and
Compander Control Signal.
Address Signaling: Pulse dial (Pulse 10PPS, Pulse 20PPS) and Tone Dial (DTMF).
The ETERNITY E&M Card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY GE
E&M Card for ETERNITY GE
The number of E&M lines that you can interface with the ETERNITY using the E&M Card varies according to number of
E&M ports supported by the each variant of ETERNITY GE.
The maximum number of E&M ports supported by each variant of ETERNITY are:
ETERNITY GE3S: 12
ETERNITY GE6S: 24
ETERNITY GE12S: 48
Connectors
The E&M card has an Amphenol Connector with 4 ports. A separate MDF cable is supplied for each connector.
LEDs
The ETERNITY GE E&M4 Card has 4 LEDs to indicate the functioning of the ports.
Installing the E&M Card
An E&M port of ETERNITY can be programmed to take on the function of:
a Station - works like a station interface, receiving incoming calls.
OR
a Trunk - works like a trunk interface when any of the stations of the PBX makes an outgoing call through it.
OR
a Tie Line - takes on a dual personality: functioning as both a station and a trunk. The E&M port works like a station
interface for incoming calls. It works like a trunk interface when any station makes an outgoing call through it.
This dual function is used in PBXs that are used as Transit Exchanges as in a PLCC Network. Read PLCC-An
Introduction to know more.
You cannot connect a trunk line or an SLT or a DKP to an E&M port.
1. Have the necessary wiring for the E&M Analog trunk in place. Take the necessary safety precautions before you
begin handling the card; switch off power supply and always wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the E&M card and check the package contents.
3. The E&M Card supports E&M Interface Type IV and Type V connection. To select the appropriate Interface Type out
of the two, you need to change the Jumper Settings.
22. This is the line protocol that defines how the equipment seizes the E&M trunk. Also referred to as Start Dial Supervision
Signaling Protocol.
ETERNITY GE Card E&M4 4-port card to connect 4 E&M Tie Lines
Matrix
Refer the table below to select the desired Interface Type and Speech Interface.
By default all the E&M Ports are set to support Type-IV.
To select the Type-V connection for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J1 and J2 (given on E&M module) in BC Position.
4. Select the speech interface - 2-wire speech or 4-wire speech - as required, by changing the jumper settings. Refer the
table below.
By default all the E&M Ports are set to support 2-wire Speech Interface.
To select 2-wire speech interface for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J3 and J4 (given on E&M module) to BC Position.
To select 4-wire speech interface for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J3 and J4 on E&M module to AB Position.
5. Now, select a free slot for the E&M card. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket by pushing up the levers on the
bracket. Preserve the filler bracket for future use.
6. Insert the E&M Card into guide rails of the empty slot. Make sure the connectors on the card make perfect contact
with those on the backplane motherboard. Secure the card by pressing down the levers and fix the bracket with the
screws provided with the card.
7. Connect the cables supplied with the E&M card into the Amphenol connectors on the E&M Card.
8. Connect the other end of the cable into the E&M Ports of the other PBX/Router/Tie Line equipment by appropriate
crossing of the wires.
Refer the following pin-out details for each E&M Card Type and for each E&M Type and Speech Interface Type.
Pinout details of ETERNITY GE Card E&M4
JI and J2 AB Type IV E&M Interface
BC Type V E&M Interface
J3 and J4 AB 4-wire speech interface
BC 2-wire speech interface
Matrix
2 Wire, Type IV E&M Connection
2 Wire, Type V E&M Connection
Matrix
9. If you are connecting two PLCC EPAX in a Power Line Carrier Communication Network Compander Control Signal
(CCS) Connection should be made as illustrated in the block diagram below for any of the four combinations of E&M
and Speech Interfaces illustrated in the previous step.
Compander Control Signal (CCS) is a special type of signal used by Power Line Carrier Communication Networks
to improve quality of speech transmission. The PLCC network expects this signal from the PBX when speech is
established. The E&M Card supports this facility. The Eternity sends CCS signal to the PLCC panel
When the E&M port is used as an Endpoint; the system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while making an
outgoing call through the E&M port or when a call is received at the E&M port.
When the E&M port is used for Transit Exchange; the system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while there is a
Incoming/Outgoing Transit call through the E&M port.
10. If you have completed all installation tasks, power ON the system, observe the Reset Cycle and the LED pattern of
the E&M Card.
LED Pattern of E&M Card
The Voicemail System Card
The VMS Card provides a full fledged, 'in-skin' Voice Mail System with auto attendant and voice mail features. It is
designed to provide a variety of voice applications that are commonly supported by any external Voice Mail System.
The key auto attendant and voice mail features supported by the card are:
Welcome greetings depending on the time of the day.
Different voice greetings for different time zones
Special greetings for holidays
Stage LED Colour LED Cadence
At Power ON LED OFF
After 30-60 seconds LED OFF
After 60-90 seconds RED L1, L2, L3, L4 lON 500ms - L1, L2, L3, L4 OFF
GREEN L1, L2, L3, L4 ON 500ms - L1, L2, L3, L4 OFF
After 65-95 seconds RED L1, L2 L3, L4 ON 500ms - L1, L2, L3, L4 OFF
GREEN L1, L2 L3, L4 ON 500ms - L1, L2, L3, L4 OFF
Normal (Port Event)
M-Wire High Green LED of the Port continuously ON
M-Wire Low LED of the Port continuously OFF
E-Wire High Red LED of the Port continuously ON
E-Wire Low LED of the Port continuously OFF
E-Wire and M-Wire High Orange LED of the Port continuously ON
Matrix
Dial by extension
Dial by name
Personalized greetings for each mailbox
Individual mailbox size
Call forward to voice mail
Message forwarding
Distribution lists
Broadcast Message
Message wait indication
Redirecting Messages
Other ETERNITY Features that require a VMS card to be installed in the system are:
Call Taping
Voice-guided Wake-up Calls and Reminders (Hospitality Feature)
Call Transfer to Mailbox
Call Forward to Voice Mail
Refer the VMS Card System Manual to know more about the VMS Card, its functions and features.
VMS Card for ETERNITY GE
The card has a capacity of 512 mailboxes. Each Mailbox has the capacity of storing 254 Messages. The size of each
Mailbox is set by default to 5 minutes. The maximum message length for each mailbox is set by default to 15 seconds
23
.
The VMS card utilizes a USB memory stick as its storage medium. Matrix provides a 1GB Pen Drive with the VMS card.
The Pen Drive supports 18 hours of recording.
The VMS Card has an Ethernet Port, a communication port, a USB port, and four LEDs.
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet Port is used to connect the VMS card to a computer (standalone or in a LAN) for web-based programming.
The Jeeves for programming the VMS Card is different from the ETERNITY Jeeves; it contains exclusively the Voice Mail
System parameters.
Communication (COM) Port
The VMS Card contains an RS232 communication port is used to connect a computer to the VMS Card for generation of
the Configuration Reports and Debug Reports.
USB Port
The USB port is an internal port, located on the main board of the card. The USB port is used for connecting the USB
stick (Flash drive, pen drive) to the VMS Card. All the voice messages, mailbox messages, greetings and other
messages and prompts are stored in USB stick.
LEDs
The ETERNITY GE VMS16 has two LEDs: L1 and L2.
The L1 shows the 'Status'.
ETERNITY GE Card VMS16 16-channel Voice Mail System with 512 mailboxes to provide voice mail facility to all
PBX extensions.
23. When the ETERNITY is installed in the Hospitality Application (Hotel Mode), the default Mailbox size would be 300
minutes and the default length of Messages is 999 seconds.
Matrix
Installing the VMS Card
1. Equip yourself with an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist belt and a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the card and check the package contents with the packing list.
3. Switch OFF Power supply and unplug the power cable of the ETERNITY.
4. Remove the filler bracket of the empty slot you have selected for installing the VMS card, by removing the screws and
pressing up the levers of the filler bracket.
5. Insert the VMS card into the guide rails of the slot. Make sure its connectors fit perfectly into those on the backplane.
6. Secure the card in its slot by pushing down the levers of the mounting bracket and fixing the card with the two screws
provided.
Connecting to a Computer
7. Now, connect the card to a standalone PC/LAN.
Plug in one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the card into the Ethernet Port of the VMS Card.
Plug the other end of the cable into the Ethernet port of a standalone PC or into a LAN Switch.
When you connect the VMS Card to a to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that
The IP Address of the Ethernet Port of the VMS Card and the Ethernet Port of the PC do not clash, i.e. are not
the same.
The Ethernet Port of the VMS Card and the Ethernet Port of the PC are in the same Subnet
8. If you have completed other installation tasks, replace the cover of the ETERNITY PE and switch ON the system.
Changing IP Address and Subnet Mask of VMS Ethernet Port
The default IP Address of the Ethernet Port of the VMS Card is 192.168.1.131 and the Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0
If the VMS Card is connected to a LAN PC, ask the LAN Administrator to assign an IP Address and a Subnet Mask to
the VMS Card.
10. Change the IP Address and the Subnet Mask of the VMS Ethernet Port by dialing the following commands from a
station of the ETERNITY.
To change the IP Address
Dial 3931 (default Access Code of VMS Group).
The VMS will answer the call and greet you with a Welcome message.
Dial *19-1234 (the default SE Command and Password of VMS) as the Welcome message is played.
The VMS will prompt you to 'Enter the Programming Command'.
Dial 1501-IP Address-#*
For example: if you want to change the IP Address of the VMS Ethernet Port to 192.168.1.182, then dial 1501-
192168001182-#*
The VMS Card will Restart.
To assign a Subnet Mask
Dial 3931.
Dial *19-1234 as the VMS Welcome message is played.
Matrix
VMS will prompt you to 'Enter the Programming Command'.
Dial 1502-Subnet Mask-#*
For example: if you want to assign Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0, then dial 1502-2552552550-#*
When there is a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server on the LAN, IP address, Subnet Mask,
Gateway Address are automatically allocated to the devices connected to the LAN.
If the LAN to which the Ethernet Port of VMS connected is connected has a DHCP server, you do not need to
change the IP Address, Subnet Mask; they will be assigned automatically by the DHCP server. For this, you
must select DHCP as the Connection Type.
To select DHCP as Connection Type
Dial 3931.
Dial *19-1234 as the VMS Welcome message is played.
Dial 1504-1- #*
11. If you need to generate configuration and debug reports, connect the COM Port of the VMS Card with that of a PC
using the communication cable supplied with the card.
12. If you have completed all installation tasks, switch ON the ETERNITY and observe the Reset Cycle.
LED Pattern of the VMS Card
At power on
All LEDS are OFF.
L1 LED glows green as soon as initialization process starts. Initialization process starts after approximately 100
seconds.
After approximately 80 seconds of glowing of L1, LEDs will follow the sequence as under:
Glow Green-500ms - Glow Red -500ms - Glow Orange 500 ms - LEDs turned OFF.
In normal condition
LED L1 will behave in the following manner:
13. Refer the VMS Card System Manual for further instructions.
Starting Up ETERNITY GE
Power ON
1. If you have completed all the installation tasks, switch on power supply.
For PSUNI card installed in the system, connect the three-prong plug of the power cord from the ETERNITY into
the AC outlet, and switch on power supply.
For PS48V card installed in the system, keep the MCB Switch ON and power the FCBC.
Condition Colour Cadence
Normal Green 1 sec ON- 1 sec OFF
File System Error RED 1 sec ON- 1 sec OFF
Pen Drive Error-Pen Drive Full RED Five times 100ms ON-100ms OFF (for 1 sec) - 1 sec OFF
Matrix
2. Observe the Reset Cycle.
Reset Cycle
Reset Cycle (Power-ON Self Test) takes about 2 minutes to finish.
All the LEDs of the system, the cards and the keys of the DKP attached to the System are turned on.
Interpreting LEDs
The functioning of the LEDs of the system and the various cards and their meaning are summarized at the end of the
installation instructions for each Card Type.
Refer to the LED Patterns described for each Card Type to verify if the system is operating properly and locate faults,
where they occur.
When the reset cycle is successful, the default Station Access Codes loaded by the system and the date and time of the
Real Time Clock of the system will appear on the LCD display of the DKPs you have connected with the system.
Matrix
Installing ETERNITY ME
The Matrix ETERNITY is to be installed by person/s trained and experienced in telecom wiring.
The person installing the ETERNITY must be familiar with trunks, physical wiring of the MDF on both the
exchange (PBX) side and the line side (CO).
When installing any equipment, make sure that you take all the necessary precautions for handling electronic
and electrical appliances. Follow proper procedures for static electricity, while handling the system and its
Use a grounding mat and wear an anti-static strap/belt. Read the dos and don'ts listed in 'Protecting the
begin the installation of your ETERNITY ME.
The Matrix ETERNITY ME is shipped factory fitted with the Power supply card, the Master and Switch Card in their
respective fixed slots (refer the section "Know your ETERNITY").
The cards - BRI, T1E1PRI, GSM/CDMA, VoIP, DKP, TWT, SLT, VMS, E&M, Magneto - are shipped separately as per the
order placed by individual customers. These cards are installed in any of the Universal slots. These cards are installed at
customer end.
Illustrated below is the position of the fixed and universal slots in each variant of ETERNITY ME.
ETERNITY ME16S
In the ETERNITY ME16S, the extreme left slot is reserved for the Power Supply card, the extreme right is reserved for
the Master card, and the second last slot is reserved for the Switch Card. The slots between these fixed slots are the 16
universal slots to fit the other cards.
P
o
w
e
r

S
u
p
p
l
y

C
a
r
d
S
L
O
T
#
0
1
S
L
O
T
#
1
6
S
w
i
t
c
h

C
a
r
d
M
a
s
t
e
r

C
a
r
d
16 Universal Slots
Matrix
ETERNITY ME10S
In the ETERNITY ME10S, the first three slots from extreme left slot are reserved for the Power Supply card, the Master
Card and the Switch Card respectively. The remaining slots are the 10 universal slots.
ETERNITY ME10SR (with Redundancy Option)
The ETERNITY ME10SR, which offers the redundancy option, has the same organization of the fixed and universal slots
as the ME10S variant, starting with the Power Supply Card on the extreme left. Only, the number of slots exceeds on
account of the second Power Supply Card, Master Card, and Switch Card, provided in this variant to support the
Redundancy feature.
Follow the installation instructions for cards described here also when you expand the system (add more cards) or
remove or swap cards for maintenance and repair.
1. Unpack the box. Check the package contents (see Packaging List). Contact your Dealer/Distributor if any of the items
is missing, faulty or damaged. Do not discard the packaging material.
Mounting the System
2. Decide where to mount the ETERNITY - on a table or wall - taking into consideration the mechanical dimensions and
weight of the model you have. If mounting the system on a wall, you may refer the mechanical dimensions and the
Mounting Template for drilling holes at appropriate places on the wall.
3. When installing the system in a rack, allow adequate space between the system and other units for air circulation.
P
o
w
e
r

S
u
p
p
l
y

C
a
r
d
S
L
O
T
#
1
0
S
L
O
T
#
0
1
10 Universal Slots
M
a
s
t
e
r

C
a
r
d
S
w
i
t
c
h

C
a
r
d
P
o
w
e
r

S
u
p
p
l
y

C
a
r
d
S
L
O
T
#
1
0
S
L
O
T
#
0
1
M
a
s
t
e
r

C
a
r
d
10 Universal Slots
P
o
w
e
r

S
u
p
p
l
y

C
a
r
d
M
a
s
t
e
r

C
a
r
d
S
w
i
t
c
h

C
a
r
d
S
w
i
t
c
h

C
a
r
d
Matrix
4. Mount the system at the selected site. Make sure that the system is place such that you have full access to the front
and back panels. The holes in the panels are provided for ventilation; Make sure that these are not blocked, to
Inserting Cards
7. Make sure that the power supply to the ETERNITY is turned off and the power cord is unplugged.
8. Open the slot covers of the enclosure by pressing down the snap lugs.
10. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket that covers the card-slot opening of the slot you intend to use.
11. Hold the card with the connectors facing you. Do not grab the card from both ends.
12. Slide the card into the slot, along the guide rails provided for each slot at the top and bottom planes.
13. Ensure that the cards are inserted deep enough for all the connector pins on the card make complete contact with
those of the motherboard on the backplane.
Do not force the card into the slot. Doing so can damage the card or the slot connector.
Matrix
14. When the card is firmly seated in the connector, push down the levers on the card mounting bracket and secure the
card with the screw provided.
15. Tighten the screws on either side of the bracket.
Detailed installing instructions are provided for each card - Power Supply Card, Switch Card, DKP, SLT, TWT, ISDN
BRI, ISDN T1/E1/PRI, GSM/CDMA, VoIP, E&M, etc. - later in this section. Refer to them when installing each card
type.
Remove the screws from the card-mounting bracket.
Lift the levers on the mounting bracket to release the card.
The card will emerge out of the slot.
Grasp the card by its mounting bracket, and ease it out of its slot.
If you are removing the card permanently or for a certain period of time, install a filler bracket over the empty
card opening in the chassis.
Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to protect the system from dust, dirt,
insects and damage.
18. Use the cables supplied with the cards to connect the wires with the Main Distribution Frame (SLT, DKP, TWT, E&M,
Magneto Card), NT1 Device (BRI Card), ISDN Modem (PRI Card), IP Network, as applicable.
There is a separate cable for each connector on the cards. The cables are bunched together, but each cable is
identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation edge of the cable.
The color markings make it easy to identify the connector and the ports to which the cable is connected.
19. Connect the cables supplied with the cards and lead the cables through the cable guides provided below the slots in
the enclosure. This will ensure neat, and tangle-free cabling.
20. After you have completed inserting and connecting the cards, power ON the system and observe the Reset cycle and
the LED pattern of each card, where applicable.
Matrix
21. Close the enclosure cover, pressing down the snap lug as you push each part of the cover in its place.

The Power Supply Card
Two types of Power Supply Cards are supported by the Matrix ETERNITY ME models:
PS UNI Card with 90-265VAC, 47-63Hz Mains as Input AC Voltage Power Supply.
This card is designed on the SMPS scheme. As this card does not have any provision for battery backup, it is
recommended that a UPS be connected to keep the system powered during outages.
There are four LEDs, a Mains Switch, and a Socket assembly for connecting the mains cord.
PS48V Card with 48VDC as Input DC Power Supply Voltage. A Float cum Boost Charger (FCBC) is required to feed
48VDC power to the card. The FCBC works on input AC mains.
The card has four LEDs, an MCB Switch, a power ON/OFF Switch, and a 3-way termination block for connecting the
power cord.

Both, the PS UNI card and the PS48V Card provide DC output voltages as: +3.5V, +5.0V, -27V and -85V. These are
indicated by LEDs.
The ETERNITY provides Redundancy option for the Power Supply card only in the ETERNITY ME10S variant
and for the PS48V card only.
The ETERNITY ME10S model supports two PS48V power supply cards. Whenever there is a fault in one, the
other takes over the control, providing uninterrupted communication.
You cannot 'Hot Swap' the Power Supply Card.
The maximum number of ports supported by the GSM/CDMA, SLT and DKP Cards may vary according to the type of
Power Supply used. Refer the following table for maximum ports supported with Universal Power (PSUNI) and DC
Power Supply.

ETERNITY ME - Universal Power Supply (PSUNI)
Analog SLT ports supported for Short Loop with Loop Current programmed
ETERNITY ME DC to DC 400W Power Supply
Type of Port Maximum Number of Ports Supported
Mobile 32 ports in Talk mode
SLT 128 ports in Talk mode for short loop
10 extensions talk mode for long loop
320 extensions permanently connected
DKP 96 ports maximum
Loop Current Programmed 20mA 25mA 30mA 35mA 40mA
Number of ports supported in talk mode (OFF-Hook short loop)
according to loop current programmed
250 200 172 150 128
Mobile 112 ports in Talk mode
SLT
256 ports in Talk mode for short loop
DKP 128 ports
Matrix
Installing the Power Supply Card
The Power Supply Card is located in a fixed slot. No other card can be inserted in this slot.
The Power Supply Card is delivered factory fitted, when you buy the system. However, if you want to remove the card for
1. Unpack the Power Supply Card and verify the package contents.
If already installed, switch OFF power supply, unplug the power cord. Remove the screws securing the card. Lift the
levers on the mounting bracket to release the card. As the card emerges from the slot, ease it out of the slot.
2. Insert the Power Supply card into the guide rails of the first slot on the extreme left, designated for the Power Supply
Card. Make sure that the card is inserted deep enough to make perfect contact with the connectors on the
motherboard at the backplane.
3. Now, press down the levers on the card mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot.
4. Secure the card in the slot by screwing the bracket on both ends.
To install a second PS48V card on the ETERNITY ME10S for redundancy, insert the second card on the next
slot. Also refer the topic Hardware Overview in Know Your ETERNITY.
5. If installing the PSUNI card, connect the three-pin power cord into the socket of the PS UNI card and plug in the cord
into the mains supply.
6. If installing the PS48V card, connect the Float cum Boost Charger (FCBC). Terminate the power cord from the FCBC
output into the 3-way termination block on the PS48V card.
Polarity is critical. Make sure that the wires are connected with the correct polarity. Follow the standard color codes
used by FCBC manufacturers:
It is recommended that you measure the voltage before connecting the power cable to the power supply card. Make
sure that the earth is connected.
Protect the ETERNITY from abrupt changes in input voltage using CVT.
Connecting an FCBC to the ETERNITY ME
Colour Signal
Red +48VDC
Black GND
Green Earth
Matrix
If two PS48V cards are installed for redundancy (possible in ETERNITY ME10S only), each must be connected
to a separate FCBC and each FCBC must be connected to a separate source of power supply.
7. Connect the Battery Back up
Battery backups time depends upon the total load. The total load is the sum of system's load and load of active
stations. The power consumed by the variants of ETERNITY ME is given in the table below:
The Battery back up time depends on the 'Ah' rating of the battery connected to the FCBC. If 48V/26Ah batteries are
connected to the FCBC for the ETERNITY ME 10S system then backup time of 2.5 to 3 hrs can be ensured. The
FCBC uses the constant voltage charging method. So, the batteries get charged faster if less power is consumed by
the system when in mains mode.
If you have installed the PSUNI power card, you would require a UPS to which to connect the card. The UPS may be
connected to a battery.
If you are using the PS48V Card, connect the Float cum Boost Charger (FCBC)
24
to the card. Now connect the FCBC
with the 48V/26Ah batteries (see illustration for Step 6). These batteries provide a backup time of 2.5-3 hours,
provided they are fully charged and the system traffic is normal.

8. Switch on power supply, after completing all other installation.
The Master Card
As the main card in the ETERNITY ME, the Master card manages the entire system. Equipped with a primary and a
secondary controller (also called the Communication Manager), the Master card controls all the slave cards of the
ETERNITY ME: the Switch card, DKP card, SLT card, TWT+SLT card, E&M card, ISDN T1E1PRI card, ISDN BRI card,
VMS card, etc. All the configuration and programming information is stored on this card.
The Master Card occupies a fixed slot in the ETERNITY ME. As the slot designated for the Master Card has a unique
arrangement of connectors, no other card can be inserted into this slot.
The Master card is equipped two Communication Ports, a Digital Input Port, a Digital Output Port, Ethernet Port, a Printer
Port, and three dual colour LEDs, on the front panel. Each of these is described briefly below.
Model Power Consumption (Typical)
ETERNITY ME10S 70 watts
ETERNITY ME16S 100 watts
24. When the batteries are drained, the FCBC goes into the charge mode and begins to charge the batteries at higher
current. When the batteries reach a preset voltage level (typically set to 56.0 volts), the FCBC goes into float mode. In
the float mode the FCBC keeps charging the battery but at lower current. The FCBC monitors the voltage level of the
batteries. As soon as the battery voltage goes below preset voltage (typically set to 50.4 volts), FCBC goes from float
mode to charge mode. The change over from mains to battery and vice-versa is automatic. The advantage of using an
FCBC is that batteries get charged faster, since the batteries are charged with higher current initially.
230VAC +/-
10%@50Hz
FCBC
10A
41 to 56V
ETERNITY ME
Card PS48VDC
-85VDC (LED L1)
-27VDC (LED L2)
+5VDC (LED L3)
+3.5VDC (LED L4)
48V Battery
Matrix
Communication Ports
There are two asynchronous, serial, full-duplex RS-232C Communication (COM) Ports, labeled as COM1 and COM2.
The COM Ports have two identical DB-9 connectors.
The COM port allows you to connect a PC to the ETERNITY, so that you can install and operate the following software
and features:
Property Management Software (PMS)
Call Accounting Software (CAS)
Downloading Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Reports
Downloading System Activity, System Fault Log, etc.
Hotel Reports
As the ETERNITY ME assumes the role of a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE), a crossed cable is required to
connect a computer with the ETERNITY ME.
Ethernet Port
25
The Ethernet Port on the fascia of the Master Card is provided to connect ETERNITY to a PC or a LAN to operate the
web-based programming software Jeeves and the Property Management Software (PMS) for Hotel Application. The
Ethernet Port is supplied with a Cat5e cable with a standard RJ45 connector.
Printer Port
The Printer port on the fascia of the Master Card is an industry standard Centronics port with a DB-25 female connector.
Digital Input Port
The Master Card of the ETERNITY ME has a Digital Input Port, to which an emergency/ a panic switch or a sensor -
smoke detector, glass break sensor - can be connected. The device that you connect to this port must comply with the
technical specifications of the DIP port.
Refer the topic "Digital Input Port" to know more.
Digital Output Port
The Digital Output Port (DOP) on the Master Card of the ETERNITY ME allows you to connect and operate automated
control applications such as: a hooter, a siren, a door lock, a fire alarm, a bell, a water pump, and several types of
illuminations (office, terrace, porch lights and signboards).
Ensure that the devices connected to the DOP comply with the technical specifications. Refer the topic "Digital Output
Port" to know more.
Ports and Connectors of the Master Card at a Glance
25. The Ethernet port is supported on Master Cards with PCB version V3R0 onwards.
Printer DB-25 female Fascia To connect a printer to the ETERNITY,
USB port (Host Port) USB Fascia To connect an external device like a
computer, printer.
Communication (COM Port) DB-9 female Fascia To connect a PC (to run various
software, download system activity
reports).
Communication (COM Port) DB-9 female Fascia To connect a PC (to run various
software, download system activity
reports).
Matrix
LEDs
The three LEDs located on the Master Card indicate the health of the card during the reset cycle and the health of the
system during its normal functioning. The LED pattern of the Master card is summarized in the table below.
Jumpers
The position and the function of the Jumpers on the Master Card are summarized in the table below:
Redundancy for the Master Card is supported only in the ETERNITY ME 10S model. Two Master Cards can be
installed in ETERNITY ME10S. When the active card fails, the standby card takes over control. As the system
restarts during the take over, all existing calls get disconnected. When the standby card becomes the active
card, the system re-boots automatically, restoring communication, all within a few minutes (2-3 minutes).
You can 'Hot Swap' the Master Card, i.e. remove and insert the card without switching OFF the system in both
ETERNITY ME10S and ME16S models. A faulty Master Card can be removed and replaced with a working
card without affecting the entire system.
Installing the Master Card
The Master Card is delivered factory fitted with the system. However, if you want to remove the card for the purpose of
maintenance or replace it with a new one, please follow the instructions below:
1. Unpack the Master Card and verify the "Package Contents".
2. Insert the Master Card into the guide rails of the slot designated for the card.
Ethernet Port RJ45 Fascia To connect ETERNITY to a PC/LAN
(to run the programming software
Jeeves and Property Management
Software).
Digital Input Port Loop Sensing-Open/Close, 5mA,
Push-type Connector.
Fascia To connect Emergency/Panic Switch
or Sensor.
Digital Output Port VDC Max.=60VDC, IDC Max.=
0.15A, Push-type Connector.
Fascia To connect automated application
devices: hooter, siren, door lock, fire
alarm, bell, water pump, lights.
Stage L1 L2 L3
During initialization process ORANGE ON ORANGE ON ORANGE ON
After initialization process OFF OFF OFF
In normal condition GREEN Toggle OFF OFF
In stand-by RED Toggle OFF OFF
J8
AB (default)
BC
External Boot.
Internal Boot.
J9
AB
BC (default)
Reset SE Password.
Don't reset SE Password.
J10
AB (default)
BC
Embedded ICE.
JTAG Mode.
J12
AB (default)
BC
Enable: Tx debug from COM Port 2 (debug/1st boot).
Disable: Tx debug.
J13
AB (default)
BC
Enable: Rx debug from COM Port 2 (debug/1st boot).
Disable: Rx debug.
Matrix
On the ETERNITY ME10S model, the third and fourth slots from the left are fixed for the Master Card. (Refer the slot
illustrations at the beginning of this topic)
On the ETERNITY ME16S model, the last slot on the right side is designated to the Master Card. (Refer the slot
illustrations at the beginning of this topic)
levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot.
3. If installing a second Master Card on the ETERNITY ME10S for redundancy, insert the second card on the fourth slot
from the left, i.e. next to the first Master Card.
4. You can connect the following external devices to the appropriate ports on the ETERNITY Master Card:
A Printer to the Printer Port
A Door Lock, a hooter, a siren, and other such gadgets to the Digital Output Port.
A sensor device, like a smoke detector, a glass break detector, a break-in detector, etc. to the Digital Input Port.
A PC to the Communication Port.
A PC/LAN Switch to the Ethernet Port
Connecting a Printer
5. You can connect any standard printer to the Printer Port (25-pin connector).
Connecting a Sensor device to the Digital Input Port (DIP)
6. Refer the technical specifications of the DIP and select a compatible device. The DIP has a two-wire, push-in (spring
clamp action) connector to attach the sensor device.
Use 0.5mm, non-stranded cables to connect the sensor device to the DIP.
To connect the sensor device to the DIP,
strip off about half a centimeter of the insulation off the wire ends of the sensor device.
opening.
ensure that both wires fit neatly into the opening.
If you are using ETERNITY ME10S with Redundancy Option, connect the DIP on the Active and the Standby
Master Cards as illustrated below.
Type Loop Open/Loop Close Sensing
Minimum Required Loop (open/close) Sensing Current 1 mA
Maximum Permissible Loop (open/close) Sensing Current 7 mA
Matrix
Connecting Digital Input Ports (DIP) of ETERNITY ME10S with Redundancy Option
Connecting a Gadget to the Digital Output Port (DOP)
7. Refer the technical specifications of the DOP and select a compatible device.
A DC contactor (60VDC max.) is connected to the DOP. Any external relay based device can be interfaced with the
DOP via this DC contactor.
The DOP has a two-wire, push-in (spring clamp action) connector to attach the relay device.
Use 0.5mm, non-stranded cables to connect the gadget to the DOP.
Technical Specifications of the DOP
To connect the device to the DOP,
strip off about half a centimeter of the insulation off the wire ends of the gadget.
opening.
If you are using ETERNITY ME10S with Redundancy Option, connect the DOP on the Active and the Standby
Master Cards as illustrated below.
Contact Rating (Resistive Load) 60VDC Max. @ 0.15 Amp
Operation Time 5 ms
Matrix
Connecting Digital Output Ports (DOP) of ETERNITY ME10S with Redundancy Option
Connecting to the Local Area Network
8. Connect the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY ME with the LAN switch using the RJ45 Ethernet cable supplied with the
system.
The Ethernet Port is located on the Master Card on ETERNITY ME. With the ETERNITY connected to a LAN, you
can:
Connect the ETERNITY to a Standalone PC
There are two ways to do it, depending on the type application you are going to use:
9. Connect the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY with the Ethernet Port of the stand-alone PC using the Ethernet cable
To use the web-based programming Tool Jeeves, to run the Front Desk User Wizard of the Hotel Application, you
need to connect to the PC via the Ethernet port.
OR
10. Connect the Communication Port of ETERNITY with the Communication Port of the stand-alone PC using any
To program the system using a PC and to run a PMS Interface, you must connect the ETERNITY to a standalone PC
over the COM Port.
You may connect to the PC via either the COM Port or the Ethernet Port, if you intend to use the standalone PC for
the following applications:
capturing SMDR reports, SMDR Online and SMDR Posting
capturing System Activity Log and System Fault Log, Hotel Motel Activity Log
running PMS Interface or CAS Interface in the Hotel Application
26
.
When you connect the ETERNITY ME to a to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that
The IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY ME and the Ethernet Port of the PC do not
clash, i.e. are not the same.
The Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY ME and the Ethernet Port of the PC are in the same Subnet.
Matrix
The default IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY ME is 192.168.1.101 and the Subnet Mask is
255.255.255.0
ETERNITY ME
27
. Use the IP Address and Subnet provided by the LAN Administrator when changing the IP Address
and Subnet mask of ETERNITY.
13. Change the IP Address and the Subnet Mask of the Ethernet Port by dialing the following commands from a station of
the ETERNITY ME.
E.g.: to change the IP Address to 192.168.50.10 dial 2110-192168050010.
E.g.: to change the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0 dial 2111-255255255000.
If there is a DHCP server on the LAN to which the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY ME is connected,
there is no need to change the IP Address or Subnet Mask, as these will be provided automatically by the
DHCP server.
You must only enable the DHCP flag of the Master Ethernet Port of ETERNITY ME.
To enable DHCP flag
Dial 2117-1
14. Switch off power supply and continue with other installation tasks. If you have completed all installation tasks, start the
system and observe the Reset Cycle.
If you have Redundancy option in the Master Card on your ETERNITY ME10S, all configuration settings must be
updated on both the Master Cards by the System Engineer via "Jeeves", so that when the standby card takes
over, the system will function with the same configuration settings as the first card. Thus ensuring smooth take
over by the redundant (second) card.

The Switch Card
The Switch Card supports the Master Card in performing the functions of speech and data connections, Call Progress
Tone Generation (dial tone, ring back tone, busy tone, etc.), and music generation.
The Switch Card too occupies a fixed slot with a unique arrangement of connectors, so that no other card can be inserted
in this slot.
Matrix
In the ETERNITY ME16S model, the Switch Card slot is the second last slot on the right. In the ETERNITY ME10S
model, the fifth slot is reserved for the Switch Card. (Refer the slot illustration at the beginning of this topic)
The card has an Analog Input Port, an Analog Output Port, four Digital Key Phone (DKP) ports. All these ports are
connected via a single Amphenol connector (24-Way, 10-Pair) and an MDF cable is supplied with the card.
The two LEDs on the Switch Card indicate the health of the card during the reset cycle and the status of the DKP ports
during normal functioning of the system.
Analog Input Port (AIP)
The Analog Input Port (AIP) is meant for connecting an external music source. The AIP can handle un-amplified,
isolated, analog speech signals from an external music source, which may be any audio output from a PC, a CD player,
a Cassette Player, etc.
Music from the external source can be played as Music-on-Hold to internal as well as external callers. Refer the topics
"Background Music" and "Music-on-Hold".
Ensure that the external music source you connect to the AIP complies with its technical specifications.
Analog Output Port (AOP)
The Analog Output Port (AOP) on the Switch card provides un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signal, which can be
amplified by an external amplifier connected to it. A Public Address System (PAS) can be connected to the AOP for
Paging.
When you connect an external paging device to the AOP, ensure that it complies with the technical specifications/
requirements of the port.
Ports and Connectors of the Switch Card at a Glance
Switch Card Redundancy option is supported only in the ETERNITY ME 10S model. An additional Switch Card
can be installed for redundancy.
If the main Switch Card fails, the other card takes over. During this period, all existing calls get disconnected
and the standby card becomes active. The system reboots automatically, restoring communication within 2-3
minutes.
You can 'Hot Swap' the Switch Card in ETERNITY ME 10S and 16S.
If your ME10S has Switch Card Redundancy and you have connected Digital Key Phones to the DKP ports on
the main card Switch Card, you must have the requisite wiring in place to ensure that the digital key phones
continue to work when the redundant Switch card takes control.
Switch Card - Master Card Firmware Version Compatibility
Notes for selecting Master card and Switch card type:
If you are using a new Switch Card (1000 ports) of firmware version V5Rx, use a Master Card with software
version less than or equal to 'V6R10' only.
If you are using old Switch card (512 ports) of firmware V4Rx, you can use a Master Card with any software
version. (However, in 7th slot, use the cards with configuration of less than 16 ports).
If you are using a DSP based Switch card it is better to use the firmware version of 'V5R1' to avoid
compatibility issues with software version of Master Card in use. (If you are using firmware version of Switch
Port Name Connector Location Description
Analog Input Port Amphenol (24 pin) 0.7Vmrs, Isolated Fascia To connect an External Music Source
Analog Output Port Amphenol (24 pin) 0.7Vmrs, Isolated Fascia To connect a Public Address System.
DKP Ports (1-4) Amphenol (24 pin) Fascia To connect digital key phones
Matrix
card less than 'V4Rx', the cards in the 7th and 8th slot will not work. However, in 7th slot, you can use the cards
with configuration, less than 16 ports).
For example, if you are using Switch card with software version 'V4R2', change it to 'V5R1'.
Installing the Switch Card
Like the Power Supply Cards and the Master Card, the Switch Card too is delivered factory-fitted in the system. If you
want to remove the card for the purpose of maintenance or replace it with a new one, please follow the instructions
below:
1. Unpack the Switch Card and verify the Package Contents.
2. Insert the Switch Card into the guide rails of the slot designated for the card. On the ETERNITY ME10S model, the
fifth and the sixth slots from the left are reserved for the Switch Card. On the ETERNITY ME16S model, the second
last slot on the right side is designated to the Switch Card.
levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot.
3. If installing a second Switch Card on the ETERNITY ME10S for redundancy, insert the second card on the sixth slot
from the left.
4. Use the 24 Way-10 Pair (Amphenol connector) MDF cable supplied with the Switch Card to connect the following
devices to the Switch Card:
Digital key phones (DKP) to the DKP Port.
An External Music Source to the Analog Input Port.
Public Address System to the Analog Output Port.
Refer the illustration below for the pinout details to help you identify the ports.
Connecting Digital Key Phones
5. You can connect up to 4 Digital Key Phones (DKP) on the DKP ports provided on the Switch Card.
The cable pinout details for the DKP Ports on the Switch Card are shown in the above figure.
Matrix
Terminate the free end of the wires of the DKP Ports into the Main Distribution Frame. Crimping each wire into the
punch down block of the Krone module. Also, refer "Main Distribution Frame", "Installing Digital Key Phones".
6. Refer the technical specifications of the Analog Output Port and select a compatible Public Address System (PAS)
device.
Connect a good quality external amplifier and matching speakers to the port.
To connect the amplifier and speakers,
strip off about half a centimeter the wire-pair of the amplifier.
join the stripped end of the amplifier wires with the free end of the wires of the Analog Output Port - the Blue-Red
wire pair - in the Switch Card cable.
Connect speakers with the output of the Amplifier.
Use shielded cable for connecting the amplifier with the speakers.
Connecting an External Music Source
7. Refer the technical specifications of the Analog Input Port and select a compatible external music source - Cassette
To connect the music source,
strip off about half a centimeter of insulation of the wire-pair of the external music device.
join the stripped ends of the device wires with the free end of the wires of the Analog Input Port - the Grey-White
wire pair - emerging from the Switch Card cable.
Specification Value
Specification Value
Matrix
damage to the system. Matrix Warranty does not cover damages resulting from improper use.
8. If you have finished all installation tasks, switch on power supply and observe the Reset Cycle and the LED pattern of
the Switch Card.
LED Pattern of the Switch Card
The Switch Card has two LEDs - L1 and L2.
L1 is used for monitoring the status of the four DKP ports.
L2 is used for monitoring the status of the Switch Card.
LED1 (L1) Pattern: DKP Port Status
LED2 (L2) Pattern: Switch Card Status
* The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is received from the application on the DKP
Port. For example, if the current LED state is Green/Red ON, on the next command received, the LED will be turned
OFF. It will remain OFF until the next command is received. When the next command is received it will be turned
Green/Red ON again. This process continues.
Identification.
The SLT Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY ME. SLT interface also is available
in combination with TWT Trunks on a single card.
SLT Cards for ETERNITY ME
The maximum number of SLT ports supported by the variants of ETERNITY ME are:
320 SLT Ports in ETERNITY ME10S
512 SLT Ports in ETERNITY ME16S
PORT Status Colour Cadence
DKP FSM is not Active. RED 1 sec ON - 1 sec OFF
Command from Application to DKP Port. GREEN Toggle*
Event to Application from DKP Port RED Toggle*
PORT Status Colour Cadence
Switch Card is stand-by RED 1 sec ON - 1 sec OFF
Switch Card is active (up but idle) GREEN Continuous ON
Command from Application to Switch Card GREEN Toggle*
Event to Application from Switch Card RED Toggle*
ETERNITY ME Card SLT32 32-port card to connect 32 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8+SLT24 Combination card, with 8-ports to connect to 8 Two-wire Analog trunk lines
and 24 Single Line Telephones
Matrix
Connectors
The SLT Cards have RJ45 connectors, with each connector having 4 SLT ports. A multi-pair, MDF cable is supplied for
each connector.
LEDs
The SLT cards for ETERNITY ME models have a single, tri-color LED to indicate:
the health of the card during the "Reset Cycle"
the status of any one of the station ports during normal functioning of the system.
You may monitor any of the SLT Station ports by assigning the LED to that port
28
.
To be able to connect Single Line Telephones as Stations (i.e. Extensions) to your ETERNITY ME, you must install at
press Flash. If any of the SLTs you have selected does not have a Flash key, tap the Hook switch of the phone to
dial Flash.
2. Unpack the SLT card and check the package contents. Ensure that the power supply is switched off, before you begin
the installation of the card. Always wear an electrostatic discharge prevention wrist strap/belt and use a grounding
mat.
bracket! You may require it at a later stage.
4. Insert the SLT Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card.
Make sure that the connectors on the card make perfect contact with those on the motherboard on the backplane.
5. Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Now, secure the mounting bracket with
the two screws provided.
If you are installing more than one SLT card, you can install the second card in any other free slot. It is not
necessary to install the second/third card in the subsequent slots.
6. Use the cables supplied with the SLT card to connect the SLT wires with the Main Distribution Frame.
For each connector on the SLT Card, there is a separate 4-pair CAT5e cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free
at the other end.
The cables are bunched together, but each cable is identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot edge and the
Insulation edge of the cable.
The color markings make it easy to identify the connector to which the cable is connected. Refer the illustrations
below to help you identify which cable (colour) to plug into each connector and the ports on each connector.
28. To do this, enter SE mode, and dial the SE Command 5323-Slot-Port , where Slot is the number of the universal slot in
which the card is installed and Port is the port on the card to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its functioning.
Matrix
ETERNITY ME Card SLT32
Matrix
Matrix
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8+SLT24
Refer the topic Installing the TWT Card.
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the MDF cables supplied with the card into the respective connectors with the help of the
color markings on the cables as illustrated above for each SLT Card type.
8. Terminate the open end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for 'Station Lines'
in the "Main Distribution Frame (MDF)".
9. Repeat the same steps to install another SLT card. Connect the SLT instruments, as described in the next step. If you
have completed all installation tasks, power ON the system, observe the Reset Cycle and the LED Pattern of the SLT
Card/s.
LED Pattern of the SLT Card
Stage LED Colour Cadence
Auto Upgradation*
Card waiting for application RED ON-200ms-OFF 200ms
Card is up, loaded with new application GREEN ON-200ms-OFF 200ms
Matrix
* Done by the Boot Loader Application.
Status of Selected SLT Port
* The current LED state will remain the same until the next command is received from the application on the SLT Port.

10. Connect the SLT instruments you have arranged for. Plug in the SLTs into the wall socket/outlets.
If you are installing Matrix Neo10, unpack the box and verify the package contents.
the phone).
handset.
Connect the short straightened end of the Spring cord into the Handset Jack marked with the symbol ( on the right
Plug in the extension wire from the wall socket/outlets into the Line Cord Jack of NEO10.

to the first port on the connector.

based phone EONSOFT and the Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles with the ETERNITY.
The DKP Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY ME.
Initialization
RED ON 500ms-OFF 500ms
GREEN ON 500ms - OFF 500ms
ORANGE ON 500ms - OFF 500ms
Stand-by task ORANGE ON 1 sec - OFF-1 sec
Errors
Flash Failure None None
RAM Failure None None
Selected SLT's data transmitted to Master Card RED Toggle*
Selected SLT's data received from Master Card RED Toggle*
Matrix
DKP Cards for ETERNITY ME
Select a DKP Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for DKP Ports. Also consider the maximum DKP
Port capacity of the system you are installing.
Both ETERNITY ME 10S and ME16S support a maximum of 128 DKP Ports.

Four DKP Ports are built into the Switch Card.
If you have used up the four in-built DKP ports on the Switch Card, you can connect a maximum of 124 DKPs.
Connectors
The DKP Cards have RJ45 connectors, with each connector having 4 DKP ports. A multi-pair Cat5e MDF cable is
supplied for each connector on the card.
LEDs
The DKP card has two dual colour LEDs:
LED1 indicates the health of the card during the Reset Cycle.
LED2 monitors the status of any one of the station ports during normal functioning of the system.
LED 2 can be assigned to any DKP port to monitor the status of that port
29
.
Installing Digital Key Phone Card
To install the proprietary digital key phone EON and the DSS Consoles and the PC-based EONSOFT, you must have at
least one of the abovementioned DKP Cards installed in the system.
1. Decide the number of DKP extensions and DSS Consoles required and arrange for as many EON, EONSOFT and
DSS Consoles.
2. Unpack the DKP card and check the package contents. Make sure that power supply is switched off and you are
wearing an antistatic-wrist strap/belt and have a grounding mat, before handling the card.
bracket, keep for future use to cover empty slots.
4. Insert the DKP card into the guide rails of the free slot you have selected for the card. All the pins on the connector of
the card should make perfect contact with those on the connector of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
5. Press down the levers on the mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Now, fix the card in its slot with the two
screws provided.
If you are installing more than one DKP card, it is not necessary to install the next card/s in the subsequent
slots.
6. Using the MDF Cables supplied with the DKP card connect the DKP wire pairs to the Main Distribution Frame.
For each connector on the DKP card, there is a separate cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free wire on the
other end.
ETERNITY ME DKP32 32-port card to connect 32 DKP/DSS Consoles
29. You can do this from the SE mode, by dialing the SE Command 5323-Slot-Port, where Slot is the number of universal
slot in which the card is installed and Port is the port on the card to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its
functioning.
Matrix
The cables are bunched together. Each cable is identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot Edge and the
Insulation edge of the cable. The color markings make it easy to identify the connector and the ports to which the
cable is connected.
Refer the illustrations below to help you identify which cable (colour) to plug into each connector and the ports on
each connector.
ETERNITY ME Card DKP32
Matrix
Matrix
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the DKP cables into the respective connectors guided by the color markings on the cables as
illustrated above for each DKP Card Type.
8. Terminate the free end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for 'Station Lines'
in the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY ME DKP Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone Connector, while the
9. Connect the Digital Key Phone to the DKP Ports as described in the next step. If you have completed all installation
tasks, power on the system and observe the Reset Cycle and the LED Pattern of the DKP Card.
LED Pattern of the DKP Card
Auto Upgradation
Initialization
Matrix
Status of Selected DKP Port
* The current LED state will remain the same until the next event is received from the application on the DKP Port. For
example, if the current LED state is Green/Red ON, on the next event, the LED will be turned OFF. It will remain OFF until
the next event occurs. When the next event is received it will be turned Green/Red ON again. This process continues.
Installing EON
EON42
Now, insert the snap fits of the foot stand into the Wall Mount bracket slots on the bottom of the phone in the " wall up"
direction.
Errors
Selected DKP's data are transmitted to Master Card RED Toggle* on each event
Selected DKP's data are received from Master Card RED Toggle* on each request from Master
Power
(DC Jack)
MIC
Foot Stand
(Functions as
Wall Mount Bracket)
Wall Mount
Bracket Slot
Wall Mount
Bracket Slot
WALL
U P
W A L L
UP
DESK
Keyhole
Slot 1
Keyhole
Slot 2
Matrix
EON48
Keyhole
Slot 2
Keyhole
Slot 1
4P4C Spring
Cord
Foot
Stand
Line
Headset Port
Matrix
card.

3. Decide which DKP Ports on the DKP Card are to be assigned to the DSS Consoles. You may select any free (unused)
port on the card for DSS Consoles. It is not necessary for the DSS Console ports to be in a sequence with the DKP
ports to which they are attached.
the MDF).
PLEASE WAI T . . .
202 Recept i on
Mon 24 AUG 12: 00
Matrix
Installing EONSOFT
Windows 98
Windows XP
Windows NT
Windows 2003
Windows Vista
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
This screen will appear only if the DKP port to which the EONSOFT is connected has been programmed for parameters
like Name, Station number, Date and Time.
Matrix
The 'Error Count' value shows zero, if both the communication cable and the COM port are working.
the PC is faulty.
The above screen shows the faulty COM Port/Communication Cable.
dialog box.

The Two-Wire Trunk Card
The TWT Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY ME. TWT interface is also
available in combination with SLT ports on a single card.
Matrix
TWT Cards for ETERNITY ME
Choose a TWT Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for TWT trunk ports, keeping in mind the
maximum TWT Trunk Port capacity of the system you are installing.
ETERNITY ME 10S and ME16S both support a maximum of 128 TWT Ports.
Connectors
The TWT Card has RJ45 connectors, with 4 TWT ports on each connector. A multi-pair, Cat5e MDF cable is supplied for
LED
The TWT Cards have a single tri-colour LED to indicate:
the health of the card during the Reset Cycle
the status of a selected Trunk port during normal functioning of the system.
You can assign the LED to any TWT port on the card which you want to monitor
30
.
supply is turned off before you begin the installation of the card. Put on an electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist
strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
4. Insert the TWT Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. The connectors on the card should
5. Press down the levers on the card mounting bracket to secure the card in its slot. Fix the mounting bracket in place
If installing more than one TWT Card, it is not necessary to insert the other cards in subsequent slots. Any card
6. Use the Cat5e cables supplied for each connector on the TWT card to connect the Trunk Lines with the Main
Distribution Frame.
The cable for each connector is identified by a distinct color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation edge of the
cable. This is to help you identify the connector and the ports to which the cable is connected.
You may refer the illustrations below to identify which cable to plug into each connector with the help of the color
markings on the cable.
ETERNITY ME Card TWT16 16-port card to connect 16 Two-wire Trunk lines from the CO network
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8 8-port card to connect 8 Two-wire Trunk lines from the CO network
ETERNITY ME Card TWT8+SLT24 Combination card, with 8 TWT ports to connect 8 TWT analog trunk lines
30. To assign the LED to a selected port for monitoring its functioning, you must enter SE mode and dial the SE Command
5323-Slot-Port, where Slot is the number of universal slot in which the card is installed and Port is the port on the card
to which the LED is to be assigned to monitor its functioning.
Matrix
ETERNITY ME Card TWT16
Matrix
Matrix
7. Plug in the RJ45 end of the Trunk Card cables into the respective connectors referring to the color markings on the
cables as illustrated above for each TWT Card type.
8. Terminate the free end of the TWT Card cable into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for 'Trunk
Lines' on the Main Distribution Frame.
Trunk cables from the ETERNITY are to be connected with the Trunk Lines from the PSTN/CO terminated on the
MDF.
Refer the topics Main Distribution Frame and Terminating Trunk and Station Cables on the MDF.
9. Repeat these steps to install other TWT cards, if applicable.
10. If you have completed all other installation tasks, power ON the system,
LED Pattern of the TWT Card
Auto Upgradation*
Initialization
Matrix
* Done by the boot loader application.
Status of Selected TWT Port
* The current LED state will remain the same until the next event is received from the application on the TWT Port.
For example, if the current LED state is Green/Red ON, on the next event, the LED will be turned OFF. It will remain
OFF until the next event occurs. When the next event is received it will be turned Green/Red ON again. This process
continues.
The BRI Card
The BRI card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY with ISDN BRI Lines. The BRI lines may be from a public
ISDN exchange, a private ISDN exchange.
The BRI Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY ME.
BRI Cards of ETERNITY ME
Both ETERNITY ME10S and ME16S support upto 32 BRI lines.
Connectors
The BRI cards have Amphenol Connectors. The ETERNITY ME BRI8 card has two Amphenol connectors with 4 BRI
ports on each.
The ETERNITY ME BRI4 card has a single Amphenol connector with BRI 4 ports.
LEDs
The ETERNITY ME BRI8 has 8 LEDs and BRI4 has 4 LEDs.
Jumpers
ETERNITY ME Card BRI4: J5 in AB position and J6 in BC position.
ETERNITY ME Card BRI8: J5 in BC position and J6 in BC position.
Do not change the position of these jumpers!
Errors
Selected TWT's data are transmitted to Master Card RED Toggle* on each event
Selected TWT's data are received from Master Card RED Toggle* on each request from Master
ETERNITY ME Card BRI8 8-Port card to connect 8 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
ETERNITY ME Card BRI4 4-Port card to connect 4 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
Matrix
To be able to connect ETERNITY to BRI Lines, any one of the above cards must be installed in the system.
discard the filler bracket! Preserve it for future use.
4. Insert the BRI Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. The connectors on the card should
5. Press down the levers on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the mounting bracket in place
If installing more than one BRI Card, it is not necessary to insert the other cards in subsequent slots. Any card
Connecting ISDN BRI Lines
Most ISDN Service Providers also provide the NT1 device/s along with the BRI line/s. The BRI Line from the ISDN
central office is terminated on the NT1 on the Customer's Premises, as illustrated below.
Where,
S/T Interface = between the ISDN user equipment, i.e. ETERNITY and the Network Interface Equipment (NT1).
TE and NT Modes
ISDN
Network
NT 1
Power
U-Interface
(2-wire)
S/T
Interface
BRI Port
ETERNITY
Customer Premises
Matrix
The maximum distance between the NT (Network Termination, NT1 or NT2) and a single Terminal Equipment, in this
case ETERNITY, can be upto 1 kilometer.
1. Short Passive Bus Configuration
2. Extended Passive Bus Configuration
Where,
figure.
ISDN
Network
NT BRI Port
(TE Mode)
ETERNITY
(UP to 1 Km.)
BRI Line
ISDN
Network
BRI Port
(TE Mode)
ETERNITY
NT
Terminal
Resistance 100
Terminal
Resistance 100
BRI Bus Bar
d < 200 meters
Matrix
Where,
TR = Terminal Resistance 100
figure.
6. Use the cable supplied for each Amphenol connector on the BRI card to connect the BRI Ports to the NT1 device
supplied by your ISDN service provider.
7. To connect the BRI Lines to the BRI ports, refer the configuration and pinout details given below for guidance
4 Tx
5 Rx
3 Rx1
4 Tx1
5 Tx2
6 Rx2
ISDN
Network
BRI Port
(TE Mode)
ETERNITY
NT
Terminal
Resistance 100
Terminal
Resistance 100
BRI Bus Bar
d < 1 Km
d1 < 30 meters
Matrix
Pinout details of the ETERNITY ME Card BRI8
Pinout details of the ETERNITY ME Card BRI4
Matrix
The following diagram shows how to connect a BRI Line to the ETERNITY ME BRI port in the TE mode.
The Tx and Rx of the BRI port should be connected with the Rx and Tx of the NT1 respectively. Ascertain the
pin details of the NT1 from your Service Provider. If required, cross connect the cables.
8. By default the Orientation Type of the BRI ports of ETERNITY are set as 'Terminals'. So, you may skip to the next
step.
When the BRI Port is to be used in the NT mode,
the Tx and Rx cable of BRI port shall be crossed with the Rx and Tx cables of the terminal respectively.
the BRI Port of the ETERNITY must be configured as a Network by changing the Orientation Type of the port
using SE Commands or Jeeves. Refer the topic ISDN-BRI for SE commands.
ISDN
Network
Power
4
5
3
4
5
6
NT-1
U-Interface
(2-wire)
S/T Interface
(4-wire)
Tx
Rx
Rx1
Tx1
Tx2
Rx2
TxA
RxA
RxB
TxB
V-
V+
NC
NC
ETERNITY
A BRI port of
ETERNITY
ISDN
Network
NT
BRI TE
ETERNITY
BRI Line
ISDN
Network
NT
BRI TE
ETERNITY
BRI Line
BRI TE BRI TE
Other ISDN
Equipment
Other ISDN
Equipment
Matrix
Last TE equipment
If the S0 bus itself supports Terminating resistors, Termination Resistance need not be inserted when
position.
By default, Termination Resistance of 100 is set on the BRI port (Jumpers J3 and J4 are in AB position).
To remove 100 termination set Jumpers J3 and J4 on the BRI module to BC position.
1
Tx 3
Rx 4
Rx 5
Tx 6
8
100
100
RJ45 Connector on
Bus Bar at the Last
TE ISDN Equipment
1
3
4
5
6
8
RJ45 Connector
ports on BRI Bus
Bar to which the
ISDN TE
Equipment is
connected
1
3
4
5
6
8
Matrix
12. should be inserted in the following cases:
The above figure shows the connection details of two ports on the BRI Bus Bar. Similarly, you can connect 8 ports
on the Bus Bar, keeping in mind the Termination Resister for the NT and the Last TE on the Bus bar.
Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Transmit (Tx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Receive (Rx) from the ISDN
TE side.
Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Receive (Rx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Transmit (Tx) from the NT
side.
To do this, you must change the position of the Jumpers J1 and J2 on the BRI modules (daughterboard) of the BRI
Card.
14. If you have completed all other installation tasks, you may turn ON the system and observe the Reset Cycle, and the
LED pattern of the BRI Card.
LED Pattern of the BRI Card
The BRI Card has an LED for each port.
The BRI8 Card has 8 LEDs: L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7, L8.
The BRI4 Card has 4 LEDs: L1, L2, L3, L4.
Function Jumper Position
J1 J2
To feed power on Tx and Rx wires (Phantom Power) AB AB
To feed power on separate pair of wires BC BC
No power to be fed to the terminal equipment Open Open
Matrix
The LEDs show the Status of the Ports as summarized in the table below:
The T1E1PRI Card
The ETERNITY T1E1PRI Card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY to ISDN Network.

PRI
Q-Signaling (QSIG)
E&M
PRI
Q-Signaling (QSIG)
E&M
The T1E1PRI Card is available in the following configurations for ETERNITY ME:
T1E1PRI Cards for ETERNITY ME
Both ETERNITY ME10S and ME16S support a maximum of 8 PRI lines.
Connectors
The T1E1PRI card has an RJ45 Connector for each port. The ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Dual card has 2 RJ45
Connectors for the two ports, while the ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Single card has a single RJ45 Connector.
A Cat5e cable with RJ45 plugs on both ends is supplied for each connector.
LEDs
The ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Dual Card has four LEDs: L1, L2, L3 and L4.
The ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Single Card has two LEDs L1 and L2.
Jumpers
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Dual: J5 in AB position.
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Single: J5 in BC position.
Do not change this Jumper setting
Port Status LED Colour LED Cadence
Port is not active RED Continuously ON
Port is active GREEN Continuously ON
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Dual 2-Port card with QSIG support to connect 2 ISDN T1/E1 PRI Lines or ISDN
Compatible Devices
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Single 1-Port card with QSIG support to connect 1 ISDN T1/E1 PRI Line or ISDN
Compatible Device
Matrix
To be able to connect ETERNITY to PRI Lines, any one of the above cards must be installed in the system.
Setting Line Termination Resistance
4. The default positions of SW3, SW4, SW6, SW7 should be as follows:
Do Not Change the positions of any of these switches!
5. By default, termination resistance of PRI port is set as 120, which is for E1 connectivity.
To use the PRI Port for T1 connectivity, termination resistance must be changed to 100.
Use DIP Switch SW5 to change the Termination Resistance of PRI Port 1. Set the Pins of SW5 as shown below:
If using the ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Dual Card, use DIP Switch SW2 to change the Termination Resistance of
PRI Port 2. Set the Pins of SW2 as shown below:
6. Insert the T1E1PRI Card into the guide rails of the free slot you selected for the card. Make sure that the connectors
on the card make perfect contact with those of the slot on the backplane motherboard.
7. Press down the levers on the card mounting brackets to secure the card in its slot. Fix the mounting bracket in place
If you are installing more than one T1E1PRI Card, it is not necessary to insert the other cards in subsequent
slots. Any card can be inserted in any of the Universal Slots.
equipment (modem), which is generally supplied by your ISDN Service Provider along with the PRI line/s.
Pin1 Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Termination Resistance (Ohms)
OFF OFF OFF ON 0 (Default)
Pin-1 Pin-2 Pin-3 Pin-4 Resistance
OFF OFF ON OFF 120 Ohms (for E1)
OFF ON OFF OFF 100 Ohms (for T1)
Pin-1 Pin-2 Pin-3 Pin-4 Resistance
OFF OFF ON OFF 120 Ohms (for E1)
OFF ON OFF OFF 100 Ohms (for T1)
Matrix
The diagram below illustrates this.
The DTE interface of the modem is be connected to the PRI port (RJ-45 connector on the Matrix ETERNITY ME
T1E1PRI Dual/Single Card).
The pinout details of the HDSL interface and DTE interface are of a stand-alone HDSL Network Termination
Unit: the Model HTU-E from RAD Data Communication.
the instrument guide of the HDSL Network Termination Unit being used by you.
1 Line A
2 Line A
3 Not used
4 Line B
5 Line B
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
1 TX1 (Tip)
2 TX2 (Ring)
3 Not used
4 RX1 (Ring)
5 RX2 (Tip)
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
ISDN
Network
HDSL
(RJ-45 Connector)
G.703
Modem
G.703
Modem
DTE
(RJ-45 Connector)
Power
Customer Premises
4-wire 4-wire
PRI Port
ETERNITY
Matrix
The T1E1PRI Port of the ETERNITY terminates in an 8-pin RJ45, female connector and is wired according to the table
below.
10. If you have completed all other installation tasks. Power the system. After the Reset Cycle is completed, observe the
LED patterns of the T1E1PRI Card.
LED Pattern of the T1E1PRI Card
The ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Dual Card has four LEDs: L1, L2, L3 and L4.
L1 and L2 are assigned to PRI Port 1 (PRI#1)
L3 and L4 are assigned to PRI Port 2 (PR1#2)
L1 shows Card Heart Bit as well as status of Port 1.
The ETERNITY ME T1E1PRI Single Card has two LEDs: L1 and L2.
Given below are the LED Patterns defined for indicating port states in the signaling types supported by the ETERNITY
ME.
1. Port Active Mode
Signaling Type: E1-PRI
LED1/LED3 Pattern:
LED2/LED4 Pattern:
Layer 1 establishedsuccessfully GREEN Continuous ON
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
Rx1 (Ring)
Rx2 (Tip)
NC
NC
NC
NC
Matrix
Signaling Type: E1-CAS
LED1/LED3 Pattern:
LED2/LED4 Pattern:
Signaling Type: T1-RBS or T1-PRI
LED1/LED3 Pattern:
LED2/LED4 Pattern:
2. Port Maintenance Mode
LED1/LED3 Pattern:
LED2/LED4 Pattern:
MFA Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
BFA Alarm RED 500ms ON-500ms OFF
Y-Bit Alarm GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
AIS16 Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
No Alarm GREEN Continuous ON
TFA Alarm or MFA Alarm RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
AIS Alarm RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
RAI or LOS Alarm RED Continuous ON
Maintenance Mode RED -GREEN 500 ms RED-500 ms GREEN
Near end loop back waitbefore activate RED 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
Near end loop active RED Continuous ON
Near end loop back waitbefore deactivate RED 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
Far end loop back waitafter activate GREEN 100ms ON-100 ms OFF
Far end loop active GREEN Continuous ON
Far end loop back waitafter deactivate GREEN 500ms ON-500 ms OFF
Matrix
3. Port Disable Mode
LED1/LED3 Pattern:
LED2/LED4 Pattern:
The Mobile Card
The Mobile Card interfaces the ETERNITY with GSM/CDMA networks. It routes calls made and received over GSM/
CDMA networks, like a Mobile handset.
The Mobile card is available in the following configurations for ETERNITY ME.
The Mobile Card for ETERNITY ME
Just like Mobile handsets, each Mobile Port has a unique IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) number, pasted
on the mobile engine.
Both ETERNITY ME10S and ME16S support up to 32 Mobile ports.
Antenna
There is a single rooftop (RT) antenna for the four Mobile ports. A splitter connects all the four ports on the card into a
single antenna. An antenna cable is also provided, giving you the flexibility to move the antenna to another position (in
case of weak signal).
LEDs
There is a tri-colour LED for each mobile port on the card to indicate the functioning of the card and the status of the
ports.
Jumpers
The Mobile cards have the following Jumper settings. Please do not attempt to change them!
ETERNITY ME Card GSM4/GSM4 3G/CDMA4: J1 in AB Position
ETERNITY ME Card GSM8/GSM8 3G/CDMA8: J1 in BC Position
Port Disable RED Continuous ON
Port Disabled OFF OFF
ETERNITY ME Card GSM8 8-port card to connect to 8 GSM networks (8 SIM Cards can be installed)
ETERNITY ME Card GSM4 4-port card to connect to 4 GSM networks (4 SIM Cards can be installed)
ETERNITY ME Card GSM8 3G 8-port card to connect to 8 GSM networks with 3G support (8 SIM Cards can be
installed)
ETERNITY ME Card GSM4 3G 4-port card to connect to 4 GSM networks with 3G support (4 SIM Cards can be
installed)
ETERNITY ME Card CDMA8 8-port card to connect to 8 CDMA networks (8 RUIM Cards can be installed)
ETERNITY ME Card CDMA4 4-port card to connect to 4 CDMA networks (4 RUIM Cards can be installed)
Matrix
Disable PIN protection in the RUIM before inserting it in the CDMA card. The Mobile port will not function if PIN
is enabled in the RUIM!.
To be able to connect ETERNITY to GSM/CDMA networks, you must have one of the above Mobile Card types installed
in the system.
1. To install the Mobile Card,
If using a GSM card, get the SIM Card from the GSM service provider of your choice ready. Use SIM PIN
protection, if required.
Disable Call Waiting in the SIM, if using GSM4 3G/GSM8 3G Card.
If using a CDMA card, get the RUIM Card from the service provider of your choice ready. Do not use pin
protection!
2. Make sure that the ETERNITY is installed at a location where sufficient network coverage is available. The power
supply should be turned off, and you must be wearing an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist strap and a have a
grounding mat, before you begin handling the card.
3. Unpack the Mobile Card and verify the package contents.
4. If using a CDMA Card, skip to Step 6.
Enabling PIN Protection on SIM
5. For the GSM Card, enable SIM PIN protection before installing the SIM card in the system.

insert the SIM into a mobile handset first.
enable PIN Protection from the mobile handset.
disable Call Waiting in the SIM.
6. Insert the RUIM/ SIM card (with PIN changed to 1234, and call waiting disabled), with its connector side down into the
RUIM/SIM holder on the Mobile card. You can insert multiple RUIM/SIM cards of the same service provider or of
different service providers.
Matrix
ETERNITY ME Card GSM4/GSM4 3G/CDMA4
ETERNITY ME Card GSM8/GSM8 3G/CDMA8
7. Insert the Mobile Card into the guide rails of the Universal Slot you have selected for this card. Make sure that the
card is inserted deep enough to make perfect contact with the connectors in the backplane. Now, press down the
levers on the card mount bracket to secure the card in its slot.
8. Connect the antenna provided with the card on the splitter connector on the front panel of the card. You may also use
the antenna cable to place the antenna at another position.
9. Repeat the same steps to insert another Mobile Card.
10. If you have completed all installations tasks, power the system.
11. Wait for the system to register with the mobile network. By default, the Mobile ports are set to select and register with
the mobile networks) automatically. Now, observe the LED Patterns of the Mobile Ports.
Matrix
network. Once registration with the mobile network is completed, the mobile port can be used.
mobile network. It is fixed for 150 seconds for all Mobile ports.
LED Pattern of Mobile Ports
The number of tri-colour LEDs on the GSM/CDMA card corresponds with the number of mobile ports on the card.
At Power On: All LEDs will blink 1 second ON and 1 second OFF in the color sequence: Red-Green-Orange until the
Reset cycle is complete.

In the Stand-by state: All LEDs will glow Orange for a second and turn Green for a second, repeatedly.
During normal functioning: The LEDs will various events on the Mobile port in the color and cadence described in the
table below:
The VoIP Card
The VoIP Card enables the stations of ETERNITY to connect to the IP network.
The VoIP card is based on SIP (Session Initiation Protocol), the industry standard VoIP. It supports adaptive jitter buffer
for reducing delay and improving speech quality.
The VoIP card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY ME

VoIP Card for ETERNITY ME
VoIP Ethernet Port

Event Colour Cadence in msec (1 cadence is of 3000 msec)
Port disabled - LED OFF
Port idle - LED OFF
Port Active (All States other
than Ring and Speech)
Red Continuous ON
Ring Event Green 400ms ON-200ms OFF400ms ON-200ms OFF
Speech Green Continuous ON
GSM/CDMA initialization Orange 200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms
OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-1200ms OFF (5 blinks)
PUK required Orange 200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms
OFF-200ms ON-1600ms OFF-
SIM PIN faulty Orange 200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-
2000ms OFF (3 blinks)
SIM/RUIM Absent Orange 200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-2400ms OFF (2 blinks)
Network Link Down
(Absence of Network)
Orange 200ms ON-2800ms OFF
ETERNITY ME Card VoIP8 Card with 8 VoIP (SIP) channels, to connect to the IP Network for making VoIP Calls.
Matrix
Voice Channels
SIP Trunks
31
ETERNITY ME VoIP8 Card supports a maximum of 32 SIP Trunks, allowing you to subscribe to as many as 32 different
In countries, where the provision and use of Internet telephony services and products is prohibited and or
subject to laws, regulations or licenses, the User is advised to comply with such laws and regulations when
installing and using this product.
your application:
32

Gateway Address
DNS Address
SIP ID/User ID
Jeeves.
Matrix
3. Select any of the free Universal Slots to insert the VoIP Card. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket of the slot by
pressing up the levers. Preserve the filler bracket for future use.
4. Insert the card into the guide rails of slot. The card should be inserted deep enough to make perfect contact with the
connectors on the backplane.
5. Now, secure the card in its slot by pressing down the levers of the mounting bracket and fixing it in place with the two
screws provided.
You can connect ETERNITY ME VoIP Card to the IP network using a SIP Proxy (SIP Server).
OR
Connect ETERNITY ME VoIP Card to another VoIP product, without going through any proxy. This type of installation
is called Peer-to-Peer Calling.
7. Plug one end of the RJ45 Ethernet cable supplied with the VoIP card into the Ethernet Port of the VoIP Card.
Connecting the VoIP Ethernet Port to a Broadband Router/Modem
Figure-: VoIP Ethernet Port connected to a Broadband Router/Modem
Connecting VoIP Ethernet Port to a LAN Switch/Hub
IP
POTS
VoIP Port
ETERNITY
DKP
Broadband
Modem/Router
Matrix
Figure-: VoIP Ethernet Port connected to a LAN Switch/Hub
on the LAN.
The IP Address of the Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY ME and the Ethernet Port of the LAN PC must not clash,
10. Ask your LAN administrator for the IP Address and Subnet Mask of the LAN Switch.
If there is a DHCP server on the LAN, IP Address and the Subnet Mask will be assinged automatically to the
VoIP Ethernet Port. All you need to do is select the Connection Type for the VoIP Ethernet Port. Skip to Step 12.
station of the ETERNITY ME.
Where,
03-192168010011.
Where,
Broadband
Modem/Router
IP
POTS
VoIP Port
ETERNITY
DKP
Matrix
1-03-255255255000.
12. If there is a DHCP server on the LAN, select the Connection Type for the VoIP Ethernet Port. To do this,
Where,
Figure-: VoIP Ethernet Port connected to a SIP Proxy
Figure-: VoIP Ethernet Port connected in a Peer-to-Peer Application (without Proxy)
ITSP
POTS
VoIP Ethernet Port
ETERNITY
DKP
Broadband
Modem/Router
Matrix
15. Repeat the above steps to insert and connect additional VoIP cards to the LAN Switch/Broadband Router/Modem.
16. If you have completed all other installation tasks, you may switch on power supply and observe the 'Reset Cycle' and
the LED Pattern of the VoIP Card.
LED Pattern
LED1 Indication - VoIP Card Status Indication
LED2 Indication - SIP Trunk Status Indication
SIP Trunk Status will be indicated by LED2 only after you have programmed the SIP Trunk Parameters.
The E&M Card
The E&M Card of the ETERNITY provides the interface for analog trunking to connect various communication equipment
telephone switches, Routers, Leased Lines, etc. using Tie-Lines.
The E&M Card is required for the following applications:
33
.
Refer the topics E&M Connectivity and E&M Features to know more.
An E&M Port can be programmed to behave as a Trunk Interface, a Subscriber (Station) Interface or both, i.e. as a Tie
The E&M Card supports
E&M Interface - Types IV and V
Speech Interface - Two-wire and four-wire.
E&M Trunk Seizure Type
34
: Immediate, Immediate + Wink, Seizure Pulse, Seizure Pulse + Wink, Express, and
Compander Control Signal.
Address Signaling: Pulse dial (Pulse 10PPS, Pulse 20PPS) and Tone Dial (DTMF).
VoIP Card Status LED Cadence
Booting Up Green Continuous
Stack Construction in progress Green 200ms ON-200ms OFF 200ms ON-200ms OFF
Stack Construction successful Green 1 Sec ON-1 Sec OFF
VoIP Program Download failed Red Continuous ON
Stack Construct failed - PPPoE Authentication failed Red 200ms ON-1 Sec OFF
Stack Construct failed-IP Address Invalid Red 200ms ON-1 Sec OFF200ms ON-1 Sec OFF
SIP Trunk Status LED Cadence
SIP Trunk-Disabled Red Continuous ON
Registration failed-Authentication Password invalid Red 200ms ON-1 Sec. OFF (Continuous)
Registration failed-Configuration Parameter invalid Red 200ms ON-200ms OFF 200ms ON-1 Sec. OFF (Continuous)
Registration in Progress Green 200ms ON-1 Sec. OFF(Continuous)
Registration successful Green Continuous ON
33. The PBXs in a Closed User Group can be connected over ISDN T1/E1 Lines. Refer the topic Closed User Groups to
know more.
34. This is the line protocol that defines how the equipment seizes the E&M trunk. Also referred to as Start Dial Supervision
Signaling Protocol.
Matrix
The ETERNITY E&M Card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY ME
E&M Cards for ETERNITY ME
Connectors
The E&M cards have Amphenol Connectors. The ETERNITY ME E&M8 card has two Amphenol connectors (36-Way, 20
Pair). 4 E&M ports (E&M1 to E&M4) are located on the lower MDF connector whereas remaining four E&M ports (E&M5
to E&M8) are located on the upper MDF connector. The ETERNITY ME E&M4 card has a single Amphenol connector
with 4 ports. A separate MDF cable is supplied for each connector.
LEDs
The ETERNITY ME Card E&M8 has eight tri-colour LEDs, whereas the ETERNITY ME Card E&M4 has 4 LEDs, to
indicate the functioning of the ports.
Installing the E&M Card
The number of E&M lines that you can interface with the ETERNITY using the E&M Card varies according to number of
E&M ports supported by the each variant of ETERNITY ME.
The maximum number of E&M ports supported by
ETERNITY ME10S is 80
ETERNITY ME16S is 128
An E&M port of ETERNITY can be programmed to take on the function of:
a Station - works like a station interface, receiving incoming calls.
OR
a Trunk - works like a trunk interface when any of the stations of the PBX makes an outgoing call through it.
OR
a Tie Line - takes on a dual personality: functioning as both a station and a trunk. The E&M port works like a station
interface for incoming calls. It works like a trunk interface when any station makes an outgoing call through it.
This dual function is used in PBXs that are used as Transit Exchanges as in a PLCC Network. Read PLCC-An
Introduction to know more.
You cannot connect a trunk line or an SLT or a DKP to an E&M port.
1. Have the necessary wiring for the E&M Analog trunk in place. Take the necessary safety precautions before you
begin handling the card; switch off power supply and always wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the E&M card and check the package contents.
3. The E&M Card supports E&M Interface Type IV and Type V connection. To select the appropriate Interface Type out
of the two, you need to change the Jumper Settings.
ETERNITY ME Card E&M8 8-port card to connect 8 E&M Tie Lines
ETERNITY ME Card E&M4 4-port card to connect 4 E&M Tie Lines
Matrix
Refer the table below to select the desired Interface Type and Speech Interface.
By default all the E&M Ports are set to support Type-IV.
To select the Type-V connection for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J1 and J2 (given on E&M module) in BC Position.
4. Select the speech interface - 2-wire speech or 4-wire speech - as required, by changing the jumper settings. Refer the
table below.
By default all the E&M Ports are set to support 2-wire Speech Interface.
To select 2-wire speech interface for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J3 and J4 (given on E&M module) to BC Position.
To select 4-wire speech interface for the E&M Port, set Jumpers J3 and J4 on E&M module to AB Position.
5. Now, select a free slot for the E&M card. Unscrew and remove the filler bracket by pushing up the levers on the
bracket. Preserve the filler bracket for future use.
6. Insert the E&M Card into guide rails of the empty slot. Make sure the connectors on the card make perfect contact
with those on the backplane motherboard. Secure the card by pressing down the levers and fix the bracket with the
screws provided with the card.
7. Connect the cables supplied with the E&M card into the Amphenol connectors on the E&M Card.
8. Connect the other end of the cable into the E&M Ports of the other PBX/Router/Tie Line equipment by appropriate
crossing of the wires.
Refer the following pin-out details for each E&M Card Type and for each E&M Type and Speech Interface Type.
JI and J2 AB Type IV E&M Interface
BC Type V E&M Interface
J3 and J4 AB 4-wire speech interface
BC 2-wire speech interface
Matrix
Pinout details of ETERNITY ME Card E&M8
Pinout details of ETERNITY ME Card E&M4
Matrix
Matrix
9. If you are connecting two PLCC EPAX in a Power Line Carrier Communication Network Compander Control Signal
(CCS) Connection should be made as illustrated in the block diagram below for any of the four combinations of E&M
and Speech Interfaces illustrated in the previous step.
Compander Control Signal (CCS) is a special type of signal used by Power Line Carrier Communication Networks
to improve quality of speech transmission. The PLCC network expects this signal from the PBX when speech is
established. The E&M Card supports this facility. The Eternity sends CCS signal to the PLCC panel
When the E&M port is used as an Endpoint; the system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while making an
outgoing call through the E&M port or when a call is received at the E&M port.
When the E&M port is used for Transit Exchange; the system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while there is a
10. If you have finished all installation tasks, power ON the system, observe the Reset Cycle and the LED Pattern of the
E&M Card.
LED Pattern of the E&M Card
Initialization
At Power ON RED L1 to L8 glow one after the other in a sequence,
ON 100ms -OFF.
L1 ON 100ms-OFF,
L2 100ms ON-OFF,
L3 100ms ON-OFF,
L4 100ms ON-OFFL8 100ms ON-OFF
GREEN L1 to L8 glow one after the other in a sequence,
ON 100ms -OFF.
L1 ON 100ms-OFF,
L2 100ms ON-OFF,
L3 100ms ON-OFF,
L4 100ms ON-OFFL8 100ms ON-OFF
Stand-By* GREEN, ORANGE L1 toggles GREEN ON 1 sec, ORANGE ON 1
sec
Normal (Port Event)
M-Wire High GREEN LED of the Port continuously ON
E-Wire High RED LED of the Port continuously ON
E-Wire and M-Wire High ORANGE LED of the Port continuously ON
Errors
Controller RAM failure ORANGE All LEDs Toggle at 1 sec
External RAM failure ORANGE All LEDs Toggle at 2 sec
Eprom failure ORANGE All LEDs Toggle at 3 sec
Matrix
* Waiting to be detected by Master Card.

The Magneto Card
The Magneto Card is used for connecting the ETERNITY to Magneto Telephones
35
, which are widely used by the military
as field phones in front lines, and by other establishments such as railroad companies (signaling emergencies, crossings,
etc.), electric utilities, pipeline companies, who need to have their networks at places that are too remote to be serviced
by public telephone networks.
The Magneto Card of ETERNITY lands calls from magneto field telephones on the Stations of the ETERNITY and the
places calls from the Stations of the ETERNITY on magneto telephones.
To know more about how the Magneto Card works, refer the topic Magneto Trunk Port.
The Magneto card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY ME.
Magneto Card for ETERNITY ME
The maximum number of Magneto Trunk Ports supported by each variant of ETERNITY ME are:
ETERNITY ME10S: 80 Magneto Trunk Ports
ETERNITY ME16S: 128 Magneto Trunk Ports.
Connectors
The Magneto Card has RJ45 connectors, with 4 ports on each connector. A multi-pair Cat5e cable is provided for each
connector.
LED
The ETERNITY Magneto8 has 8 LEDs for each magneto trunk port supported by the card.
The LEDs indicate the health of the cards during the "Reset Cycle" and the status of the trunk ports during the normal
functioning of the system.
Installing the Magneto Card
1. Have the necessary wiring for the Magneto Trunk Ports in place.
You may install an MDF to connect the Magneto Trunk Ports with the Field Telephone wires.
OR
You may connect the wires from the Magneto Field Telephones directly to the Magneto Trunk Port.
If you are using a common MDF for terminating all types of Trunks, you are advised to use a separate set of Krone
Modules for connecting the Magneto Trunk Lines and Magneto Field Telephones.
Invalid Slot detected ORANGE All LEDs Toggle at 6 sec
35. A magneto telephone is a local battery telephone set, in which signaling current is provided by a magneto hand
generator, usually a magneto. The hand generator, commonly referred to as 'crank', is located on the right hand side of
the telephone set and is turned to produce energy to ring other phones or to signal the CO. The magneto, also called
the generator, is used to convert the mechanical motion via the crank to produce sufficient energy to ring other phones
or to signal the CO.
ETERNITY ME Card Magneto8 8-port card to connect 8 Magneto Phones
Matrix
2. Prepare for the card installation by switching off power supply and wearing an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist
strap and use a grounding mat.
3. Unpack the Magneto Card and check the package contents.
4. Select any universal slot to insert the card. Unscrew the filler bracket and remove it by pushing up the levers on the
bracket.
5. Insert the Magneto card into the guide rails of the free slot. The card's connectors must make perfect contact with the
connectors on the backplane motherboard. Press down the levers of the mounting bracket to secure the card in its
slot and fix the two screws provided with the card on the mounting bracket.
6. Now, plug in the cable/s supplied with the Magneto Card into the RJ45 connectors on the card. Terminate the free
ends of the cable/s into the MDF, if applicable.
Refer to the following block diagram for terminating the cables from the Magneto Card and the wires from the Magneto
Field Telephones.
Connecting Magneto Telephones to the Magneto Card
7. Connect the pairs of wires from the Magneto Field Phones to the appropriate pairs emerging from the Magneto Card
of the ETERNITY on the MDF. Refer the cable diagram for the Magneto Card.
Matrix
8. Repeat the same steps to install the other Magneto Cards.
9. If you do not have any other Card to insert and have completed the installation procedures, plug in the power cord,
switch ON power supply from the mains, switch on the Power supply of the ETERNITY and observe the Reset Cycle
and the LED Pattern of the Magneto Card.
LED Pattern of the Magneto Card
* Waiting to be detected by Master Card

Dial by extension
Dial by name
Message forwarding
Distribution lists
Broadcast message
Redirecting messages, etc.
Call Taping
Initialization
At Power ON RED L1 to L8 turned ON for 500ms, turned OFF simultaneously.
GREEN L1 to L8 turned ON for 500ms, turned OFF simultaneously.
Stand-By* GREEN, RED L1 toggles 1 sec GREEN and RED
Normal (Port Event)
Ring (incoming/outgoing call) RED LED of the Port continuously ON
Port Disabled LED of the Port continuously OFF
OFF-Hook (in Speech) GREEN LED of the Port continuously ON
Port Idle LED of the Port continuously OFF
Ring and OFF-Hook ORANGE LED of the Port continuously ON
Errors
Invalid Card Configuration Jumper ORANGE All LEDs Flash (250ms ON-250ms OFF) twice, OFF 3 sec.
Controller Xram Failure ORANGE LEDs Flash (250ms ON-250ms OFF) four times, OFF 3 sec.
Controller Eprom Failure ORANGE LEDs Flash (250ms ON-250ms OFF) 5 times, OFF 3 sec.
Invalid Slot detection* ORANGE LEDs Flash (250ms ON-250ms OFF) 6 times, OFF 3 sec.
Matrix
VMS Card for ETERNITY ME
The card has a capacity of 512 mailboxes. Each Mailbox has the capacity of storing 254 messages. The size of each
36
.
The VMS Card has an Ethernet Port, a communication port, a USB port, and four LEDs.
Ethernet Port
System parameters.
Communication (COM) Port
The VMS Card contains an RS232 communication port is used to connect a computer to the VMS Card for generation of
the Configuration Reports and Debug Reports.
USB Port
stick (Flash drive, pen drive) to the VMS Card. All the voice messages, mailbox messages, greetings and other
messages and prompts are stored in USB stick.
LEDs
The ETERNITY ME VMS16 has four LEDs: L1, L2, L3 and L4.
The L1 shows the 'Status'.
1. Equip yourself with an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist belt and a grounding mat.
2. Unpack the card and check the package contents with the packing list.
3. Switch OFF Power supply and unplug the power cable of the ETERNITY.
4. Remove the filler bracket of the empty slot you have selected for installing the VMS card, by removing the screws and
pressing up the levers of the filler bracket.
5. Insert the VMS card into the guide rails of the slot. Make sure its connectors fit perfectly into those on the backplane.
6. Secure the card in its slot by pushing down the levers of the mounting bracket and fixing the card with the two screws
provided.
ETERNITY ME Card VMS16 16-channel Voice Mail System with 512 mailboxes to provide voice mail facility to all
PBX extensions.
36. When the ETERNITY is installed in the Hospitality Application (Hotel Mode), the default Mailbox size would be 300
minutes and the default length of messages is 999 seconds.
Matrix
When you connect the VMS Card to a to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that:
the same.

the VMS Card
37
.
The VMS will answer the call and greet you with a Welcome Message.
Dial *19-1234 (the default SE Command and Password of VMS) as the Welcome Message is played.
192168001182-#*
Dial 3931.
Dial *19-1234 as the VMS Welcome Message is played.
change the IP Address, Subnet Mask; they will be assigned automatically by the DHCP server. For this, you must
select DHCP as the Connection Type.
Dial 3931.
Dial 1504-1- #*
11. Switch off the system and continue with other installation tasks.
37. This would not be required if there is a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server on the LAN.
Matrix
12. If you need to generate configuration and debug reports, connect the COM Port of the VMS Card with that of a PC
using the communication cable supplied with the card.
13. If you have completed all installation tasks, switch ON the ETERNITY and observe the Reset Cycle and the LED
pattern of the VMS Card.
LED Pattern of the VMS Card
At power on
All LEDS are OFF.
L1 LED glows green as soon as initialization process starts. Initialization process starts after approximately 100
seconds.
After approximately 80 seconds of glowing of L1, LEDs will follow the sequence as under:
Glow Green-500ms - Glow Red -500ms - Glow Orange 500 ms - LEDs turned OFF.
In normal condition
LED L1 will behave in the following manner:
Refer the VMS Card System Manual for further configuration and programming instructions.
Starting Up ETERNITY ME
Power ON
1. If you have completed all the installation tasks, switch on power supply.
For PSUNI card installed in the system, connect the three-prong plug of the power cord from the ETERNITY into
the AC outlet, and switch on power supply.
For PS48V card installed in the system, keep the MCB Switch ON and power the FCBC.
Reset Cycle
All the LEDs of the system, the cards and the keys of the DKP attached to the System are turned on.
Interpreting LEDs
The functioning of the LEDs of the the various cards and their meaning are summarized in the installation of each
card type. Refer to the LED patterns described for each card type of verify if the system is operating properly and
locate faults, where they occur.
When the reset cycle is successful, the default Station Access Codes loaded by the system and the date and time of
the Real Time Clock of the system will appear on the LCD display of the DKPs you have connected with the system.

3. Now, close the enclosure cover of ETERNITY, pressing down the snap lug as you push each part of the cover in its
place.
Condition Colour Cadence
Normal Green 1 sec ON- 1 sec OFF
File System Error RED 1 sec ON- 1 sec OFF
Pen Drive Error - Pen Drive Full RED Five times 100ms ON-100ms OFF (for 1 sec) - 1 sec OFF
Matrix
Installing ETERNITY PE
The Matrix ETERNITY is to be installed by person/s who are trained and experienced in telecom wiring;
familiar with trunks, physical wiring of the MDF on both the PBX side and the line side (CO).
Take all the necessary precautions for handling electronic and electrical appliances. Follow prescribed
procedures for preventing electrostatic discharges, to prevent damage to the cards and harm to yourself.
Wear an anti-static wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat. Read the dos and don'ts listed in 'Protecting the
begin the installation of your ETERNITY PE.
The Matrix ETERNITY PE is shipped factory fitted with the Power supply unit and the CPU Card (refer the section "Know
your ETERNITY").
The cards - SLT, DKP, TWT, BRI, T1E1PRI, GSM, VoIP, VMS, and the Multifunction Card - are shipped separately as per
the order placed by individual customers. These cards are installed at the customer end.
Illustrated below are the position of the slots in each variant of ETERNITY PE.
ETERNITY PE6SP
Universal slots are located on the CPU. The connectors of the slots are located on the CPU.
Unlike on the ME and GE models, on which cards are inserted, here cards are mounted on the CPU, and secured on the
three studs on the CPU, with the screws provided.
The ETERNITY PE 6S has an Ethernet port, a Communication Port, an Analog Input Port and an analog Output Port.
Matrix
ETERNITY PE3SP
ETERNITY PE3SP is similar to PE6S, except has it has only 3 universal slots.
ETERNITY PE3SS
ETERNITY PE3SS has 3 universal slots and an Ethernet Port.
There is no Communication (COM) Port, no USB port, no Analog Input Port and no Analog Output port.
Instructions are provided in the following for installation of the cards. These instructions are to be followed also when you
expand the system (add more cards) or remove or swap cards for maintenance and repair.
1. Have all the necessary wiring ready. Read the topic "Main Distribution Frame" for guidance on how to set up the MDF
and connect the system with the MDF, and install Primary Protection against heavy voltages.
2. Unpack the box. Check the package contents (see Packaging List). Contact your Dealer/Distributor if any of the items
is missing, faulty or damaged. Do not discard the packaging material.
Matrix
Mounting the System
3. You can mount the system on a table, a wall. ETERNITY PE6SP can be installed in a rack.
If you have decided to mount the ETERNITY PE on a wall, use the Mounting Template for drilling the holes at
appropriate distances on the wall.
4. Mount the system at the selected site. Make sure that the system is placed such that you have full access to the front
and back panels. The holes in the side panels are provided for ventilation; Make sure that these are not blocked, to
When installing the system in a rack
38
allow adequate space between the system and other units for air circulation.
Inserting Cards
7. Make sure the power supply is turned off and the power cord is unplugged, before you begin inserting the cards.
8. Unpack the card and check the package contents.
9. Unscrew the top cover of the ETERNITY PE and remove it by sliding it out. Keep the cover and the screws aside.
38. The rack mount option is available in ETERNITY 6SP only.
Matrix
11. Grasp the card by its sides or corners. Fit the card into connectors of the selected slot. Ensure that the card is seated
perfectly for all the connector pins on the cards make complete contact with those on the CPU (motherboard) on the
bottom plane.
12. When the card is firmly seated in the connector, use the three screws provided with the card to secure it on the studs
labeled as H1, H2 and H3.
Detailed installing instructions are provided for each card - DKP, SLT, TWT, ISDN BRI, ISDN T1/E1/PRI, GSM, VoIP,
VMS - later in this section. Refer to them when installing each card type.
14. Using the cables supplied with the cards, connect the card interfaces with the MDF (for SLT, DKP and TWT,
Magneto), the NT1 termination device (for BRI lines), the ISDN modem (for T1/E1 PRI lines), the IP network, a
Computer as applicable for each card.
For cards with multiple RJ45 connectors, the cables are bunched together, but each cable is identified by a distinct
color marked at the Boot edge and the Insulation edge of the cable.
The color markings make it easy for you to identify the connector on the card into which the cable is plugged into, and
the hardware ports on that connector. For example, the cable marked with blue on the Boot and Insulation edge is
connected to the first port of the card, containing the hardware ports 01-04.

15. Lead the cables out of the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the enclosure.
Lead the cables neatly and tangle-free into the MDF.
Matrix
16. When you have completed inserting the cards and connecting the cables, replace the top cover by sliding it in place.
Secure the cover with the two screws you removed.
Since the connectors of the cards will not be visible after the cover has been replaced, you are advised to label
the cables appropriately to facilitate identification.
Remove the screws from the studs H1, H2 and H3.
Grasp the card by corners; gently rock the card to ease it out of its slot connectors.
The Power Supply Unit
The Power Supply in the ETERNITY PE is an in-built universal SMPS, with 90-265VAC, 47-63Hz Mains as Input AC
Voltage Power Supply.

There is no provision for battery backup. So, you are recommended to provide Battery Backup of 24 VDC, 7-10A.H. by
connecting a UPS to keep the system powered during outages.
Typical power consumption of the variants of ETERNITY PE is given below:
The Power Supply Unit is factory-fitted. It must be removed and refitted by trained technicians only, and only for
the purpose of fault repair or replacement.
The CPU
The CPU is designed for the ETERNITY PE variants as a combination of the CPU Card and the Motherboard.
The CPU of ETERNITY PE manages the entire system, controls all other cards (SLT, DKP, TWT, DKP+SLT, TWT+SLT,
DKP+TWT, BRI, T1E1PRI Single, GSM, VoIP, etc.). All configuration and programming information is stored on this card.
The CPU is factory-fitted on the bottom plane of the ETERNITY PE.
The CPU may be removed and reinstalled solely for the purpose of fault repair or replacement, and by trained
technicians only.
Connectors
As the CPU of ETERNITY PE functions also as the motherboard, the connectors of the universal slots of ETERNITY PE
are located on the CPU. So, the cards of ETERNITY PE must be mounted on the connectors on the CPU.
The CPU card has an Ethernet Port, a USB Port, a Communication Port, an Analog Input Port (AIP) and an Analog
Output Port (AOP), and a USB Port.
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet port is meant for connecting ETERNITY PE to a PC or to a LAN to operate the web-based programming
software Jeeves, Property Management Software (PMS), and Call Accounting Software (CAS). The Ethernet Port is
supplied with a Cat5e cable with a standard RJ45 plug on both ends.
Variant Power Consumption(Typical)
ETERNITY PE3SS 75W
ETERNITY PE3SP 75W
ETERNITY PE6SP 75W
Matrix
USB Port
The USB port functions as the Device port for downloading data on to the ETERNITY PE using a PC.
The USB port is not available on the ETERNITY PE3SS.
Communication Port
This is a single asynchronous, serial, full duplex RS232C communication port, labeled as COM 10101. The COM Port
has a DB-9 connector. The COM port is meant for connecting a PC to the ETERNITY PE to install and operate Property
Management Software (PMS), Call Accounting Software (CAS), and download Station Message Recording (SMDR)
reports and System reports, and Hotel Reports.
COM Port is not available in ETERNITY PE3SS.
As the ETERNITY PE assumes the role of a Data Terminal Equipment, a crossed cable is required for
connecting a computer with the ETERNITY PE3SP and PE6SP.
Analog Input Port
The Analog Input Port (AIP) handles un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signals. It is used for connecting an external
music source, which may be any audio output like a PC, a CD player, or a Cassette Player. The external device must
comply with the technical specifications of this port.
AIP is not available in ETERNITY PE3SS.
Analog Output Port
The Analog Output Port (AOP) outputs un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signals, which can be amplified by an
external amplifier connected to the port. The port is meant for connecting a Public Address System/Paging System
device.
AOP is not available in ETERNITY PE3SS.
Ports and Connectors on the CPU Card - ETERNITY PE at a Glance
* Available on ETERNITY PE6SP and PE3SP only.
LED
The CPU has two dual color - Green and Red - LEDs labeled L1 and L2.
L1 - indicates the health of the card during the normal functioning of the system.
L2 - indicates the health of the card during the reset cycle. After power ON, when the system becomes stable LED
blinks Green for 1 second ON and OFF.
Port Name Connector Function
Ethernet Port (TCP/IP) RJ45 To connect to a PC or LAN (to run various software).
Communication (COM Port) DB-9 female To connect a PC (to run various software; download system
activity reports).
USB port (Device Port)* USB To download data on to the ETERNITY through a PC.
Analog Input Port* Standard audio jack To connect audio input device like an external music source.
Analog Output Port* Standard audio jack To audio output device - Public Address/Paging System.
Matrix
Jumpers
The position and function of the Jumpers on the CPU Card are:
ETERNITY PE does not support Redundancy and Hot Swap.
Providing Battery Backup
Provide Battery Backup of 24 VDC, 7-10A.H. by connecting the system with a UPS.
Connecting ETERNITY PE to the Local Area Network
Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with the system into the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY PE and plug the
other end into the LAN switch.
With the ETERNITY PE connected to a LAN, you can:
Connect the ETERNITY to a Standalone PC
You can connect ETERNITY PE to a standalone PC either through the Ethernet Port or through the COM Port,
depending on the type of application you want to use.
Connect the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY with the Ethernet Port of the stand-alone PC using the Ethernet cable
When ETERNITY is connected to the PC over its Ethernet Port, you can use the web-based programming Tool
Jeeves, to run the Front Desk User Wizard of the Hotel Application, you need to connect to the PC via the Ethernet
port.
OR
Connect the Communication Port of ETERNITY with the Communication Port of the stand-alone PC using any
When you connect ETERNITY with a PC over its COM Port, you can program the system using the PC and run a
PMS Interface.
If you intend to use the standalone PC to capture SMDR reports, SMDR Online and SMDR Posting, System Activity
Log and System Fault Log, or capture Hotel Motel Activity Log, run PMS Interface or CAS Interface in the Hotel
Application
39
, you may connect to the PC via either the COM Port or the Ethernet Port.
Jumper Number
Position Function
ETERNITY
PE3SS
ETERNITY
PE3SP
ETERNITY
PE6SP
J5 J5 J11 AB (default)
BC
External Boot. Internal Boot.
J10 J10 J13 AB
BC (default)
Reset SE Password. Don't reset SE Password.
J6 J6 J7 AB (default)
BC
Embedded ICE. JTAG Mode
Matrix
When you connect the ETERNITY PE to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that
The IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY PE and the Ethernet Port of the PC do not clash,
i.e. are not the same.
The Ethernet Port of ETERNITY PE and the Ethernet Port of the PC are in the same Subnet.
The default IP Address of the Master Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY PE is 192.168.1.101 and the Subnet Mask is
255.255.255.0.
Ascertain the IP Address and Subnet of the standalone PC.
ETERNITY PE
40
.
Replace the cover of the ETERNITY PE and switch ON the system.
Change the IP Address and the Subnet Mask of the Ethernet Port by dialing the following commands from a station of
the ETERNITY PE.
E.g.: to change the IP Address to 192.168.50.10 dial 2110-192168050010.
E.g.: to change the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0 dial 2111-255255255000.
If there is a DHCP server on the LAN to which the Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY PE is connected, there is no
need to change the IP Address or Subnet Mask, as these will be provided automatically by the DHCP server.
You must only enable the DHCP flag of the Ethernet Port of ETERNITY PE.
To enable DHCP flag
Dial 2117-1
Refer the technical specifications of the Analog Output Port (AOP) and select a compatible Public Address System
device.
Connect a good quality external amplifier and matching speakers to the port. You may use a combination of 10W
amplifier and a 4W speaker.
Matrix
Plug in the audio jack into the AOP connector.
Connecting an External Music Device
Refer the technical specifications of the Analog Input Port and select a compatible external music source - Cassette
Plug in the audio jack of the device into the AIP connector.
damage to the system. Matrix Warranty does not cover damages as a result of improper use.

Identification.
The SLT Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY PE. The SLT interface is available
in combination with Digital Key Phone ports and Two-wire Trunk ports on a single card.
SLT Cards for ETERNITY PE
Specification Value
Physical Connector 3.5mm audio jack
Specification Value
Physical Connector 3.5mm audio jack
ETERNITY PE Card SLT8 8-port card to connect 8 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card
DKP4+SLT4
Combination card, with 4 ports to connect to 4 Digital Key Phones and 4 Single Line
Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card
TWT4+SLT4
Combination card, with 4 ports to connect to 4 Two-wire Analog trunk lines and 4
Single Line Telephones
Matrix
Choose an SLT Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for SLT ports. Also consider the maximum SLT
The maximum number of SLT ports supported by the variants of ETERNITY PE are:
ETERNITY PE3SS: 24 SLT Ports
ETERNITY PE3SP: 24 SLT Ports
ETERNITY PE6SP: 48 SLT Ports
Connectors
The SLT Cards have RJ45 connectors. A multi-pair, CAT5e cable is supplied for each connector on the card.
To be able to connect Single Line Telephones as Stations (i.e. extensions) to your ETERNITY PE, you must install at
press Flash. If any of the SLTs you have selected does not have a Flash key, tap the Hook switch of the phone
to dial Flash.
2. Unpack the SLT card and check the package contents.
3. Make sure that the power supply is switched off, before you begin the installation of the card. Always wear an
electrostatic discharge prevention wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
4. Unscrew the top cover of the ETERNITY PE and slide it out. Keep the cover and the screws aside.
5. Select any of the free slots from the universal slots.
6. Grasping the card by its sides or corners fit it onto the connectors of the selected slot. The card should be seated such
that its connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU (motherboard) on the bottom plane.
7. Secure the card on the studs labeled H1, H2 and H3 with the three screws provided.
8. Repeat the same steps to install another SLT card. It is not necessary to install the other SLT cards in subsequent
slots. You may install the other SLT card/s in any of the universal slots.
9. Now, use the CAT5e cables supplied with the SLT card to connect the SLT wires with the Main Distribution Frame.
For each connector on the SLT Card, there is a separate cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free at the other
end.
The color markings serve the purpose of identifying which cable is to be plugged into each connector, and the wire-
pairs for each port on the connector.
ETERNITY PE Card
TWT2+DKP2+SLT4
Combination card, with 2 ports to connect to 2 Two-wire Analog trunk lines, 2 Digital
Key Phones, and 4 Single Line Telephones
Matrix
ETERNITY PE Card SLT8
For pinout details of the following combination cards, refer the hyperlinked topics.
ETERNITY PE Card DKP4+SLT4
Refer Installing the Digital Key Phone Card.
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+SLT4
Refer Installing the Two-wire Trunk Card.
ETERNITY PE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT4
Refer Installing the Two-wire Trunk Card.
10. Plug in the RJ45 end of the SLT cables into the respective connectors with the help of the color markings on the
cables as illustrated for each SLT Card type.
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY PE SLT Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone Connector, while the
13. If you have completed installing all cards, replace the top cover by sliding it in place. Secure the cover with the two
screws you removed.
14.Connect the SLT instruments you have arranged for. Plug in the SLTs into the wall socket/outlets.
If you are installing Matrix NEO10, unpack the box and verify the package contents.
the phone).
handset.
RJ45-1 Blue - (Blue & White)
Orange - (Orange & White)
Brown - (Brown & White)
RJ45-2
(Orange)
RJ45-3
(Green)
(Blue) 02
Green - (Green & White) 03
04
Blue - (Blue & White) 05
Orange - (Orange & White) 06
SLT 01
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
SLT
Connector Color Connection H/w port Offset
Matrix
Connect the short straightened end of the Spring cord into the Handset Jack marked with the symbol on the right
Plug in the extension wire from the wall into the Line Cord Jack of NEO10.
to the first port on the connector.

based phone EONSOFT and the Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles with the ETERNITY PE.
The DKP Card is available in the following configurations for the models of ETERNITY PE.
DKP Cards for ETERNITY PE
Select a DKP Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for DKP Ports. Also consider the maximum DKP
The maximum number of DKP ports supported by each variant of ETERNITY PE is:
ETERNITY PE3SS: 24 DKP ports
ETERNITY PE3SP: 24 DKP ports
ETERNITY PE6SP: 48 DKP ports

Installing Digital Key Phones
To be able to connect the Matrix proprietary DKP - EON and its DSS Consoles, and the PC-based EONSOFT as Stations
(i.e. Extensions) to your ETERNITY PE, you must install at least one of the aforementioned DKP cards in the System.
1. Decide the number of DKP extensions and DSS consoles required and arrange for as many instruments.
2. Take all the necessary precautions for installing cards - wear an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist strap and use
a grounding mat. Make sure power supply is turned off and the power cord is unplugged.
3. Unpack the DKP card and check the package contents.
4. Unscrew and remove the top cover of the ETERNITY PE, and keep it aside with the screws.
6. Grasping the DKP card by its sides or corners fit it onto the connectors of the selected slot. The card should be seated
such that its connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU (motherboard) on the bottom plane.
8. Repeat the same steps to install another DKP card. You may install the other DPK card/s in any of the slots, not
necessarily in a sequence.
ETERNITY PE Card DKP8 8-port card to connect 8 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY PE Card
DKP4+SLT4
Combination card, with 4 ports to connect to 4 Digital Key Phones and 4 Single Line
Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card
TWT4+DKP4
Combination card, with 4 ports to connect to 4 Two-wire Analog trunk lines and 4
ports to connect 4 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY PE Card
TWT2+DKP2+SLT4
Combination card, with 2 ports to connect to 2 Two-wire Analog trunk lines, 2 ports to
connect 2 DKP/DSS Consoles, and 4 ports to connect 4 Single Line Telephones
Matrix
9. Now, use the CAT5e cables supplied with the DKP card to connect the DKP wire-pairs with the Main Distribution
Frame.
For each connector on the DKP Card, there is a separate cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free at the other
end.
ETERNITY PE Card DKP8
ETERNITY PE Card DKP4+SLT4
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+DKP4
For pinout details refer Installing the Two-wire Trunk Card.
For pinout details refer Installing the Two-wire Trunk Card.
10. Plug in the RJ45 end of the DKP cables into the respective connectors with the help of the color markings on the
cables as illustrated for each DKP Card type.
RJ45-2
(Orange)
RJ45-3
(Green)
(Blue) DKP 02
Green - (Green & White) DKP 03
DKP 04
Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 05
Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 06
Blue - (Blue & White) DKP 07
Orange - (Orange & White) DKP 08
DKP 01
RJ45-2
(Orange)
RJ45-3
(Green)
(Blue) 02
04
SLT 01
SLT
SLT
SLT
DKP
DKP
DKP
DKP
Matrix
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY PE DKP Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone Connector, while the
screws you removed.
Installing EON
EON42
Now, insert the snap fits of the foot stand into the Wall Mount bracket slots on the bottom of the phone in the wall up"
direction.
Power
(DC Jack)
MIC
Foot Stand
(Functions as
Wall Mount Bracket)
Wall Mount
Bracket Slot
Wall Mount
Bracket Slot
WALL
U P
W A L L
UP
DESK
Keyhole
Slot 1
Keyhole
Slot 2
Matrix
EON48
Keyhole
Slot 2
Keyhole
Slot 1
4P4C Spring
Cord
Foot
Stand
Line
Headset Port
Matrix
card.

3. Decide which DKP Ports on the DKP Card are to be assigned to the DSS Consoles. You may select any free (unused)
port on the card for DSS Consoles. It is not necessary for the DSS Console ports to be in a sequence with the DKP
ports to which they are attached.
the MDF).
PLEASE WAI T . . .
202 Recept i on
Mon 24 AUG 12: 00
Matrix
Installing EONSOFT
Windows 98
Windows XP
Windows NT
Windows 2003
Windows Vista
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
This screen will appear only if the DKP port to which the EONSOFT is connected has been programmed for parameters
like Name, Station number, Date and Time.
The 'Error Count' value shows zero as value, if both the communication cable and the COM port are working.
the PC is faulty.
The above screen shows the faulty COM Port/Communication Cable.
Matrix
dialog box.

The Two-wire Trunk Card
The TWT Card is available in the following configurations for the variants of ETERNITY PE. TWT interface is also
available in combination with SLT ports on a single card.
TWT Cards for ETERNITY PE
Choose a TWT Card with the configuration that meets your requirement for TWT trunk ports, keeping in mind the
maximum TWT Trunk Port capacity of the system you are installing.
ETERNITY PE3SS: 24 TWT ports
ETERNITY PE3SP: 24 TWT ports
ETERNITY PE6SP: 48 TWT ports
Connectors
The TWT Card has RJ45 connectors, with 4 TWT ports on each connector. A multi-pair, CAT5e MDF cable is supplied for
supply is turned off, and the power cord is unplugged before you begin the installation of the card. Put on an
electrostatic-discharge preventive wrist strap/belt and use a grounding mat.
5. Seat the card onto the connectors of the selected slot. The connector pins of the card should make perfect contact
with those on the CPU (motherboard) on the bottom plane.
ETERNITY PE Card TWT8 8-port card to connect 8 Two-wire analog Trunk lines from the CO network
ETERNITY PE Card
TWT4+SLT4
Combination card, with 4 TWT ports to connect 4 Two-wire analog Trunk lines from the
CO network, and 4 SLT ports to connect 4 Single Line Telephones
ETERNITY PE Card
TWT4+DKP4
Combination card, with 4 TWT ports to connect 4 Two-wire analog trunk lines and 4
DKP ports to connect 4 DKP/DSS Consoles
ETERNITY PE Card
TWT2+DKP2+SLT4
Combination card, with 2 ports to connect to 2 Two-wire Analog trunk lines, 2 ports to
connect 2 DKP/DSS Consoles, and 4 ports to connect 4 Single Line Telephones
Matrix
7. Repeat the same steps to install another TWT card. You may install the other TWT card/s in any of the universal slots,
but not necessarily in a sequence.
8. Now, use the CAT5e cables supplied with the TWT card to connect the TWT ports with the Main Distribution Frame.
For each connector on the TWT Card, there is a separate cable with an RJ45 jack on one end and free at the other
end.
9. Plug in the RJ45 end of the TWT cables into the respective connectors with the help of the color markings on the
cables as illustrated below for each TWT Card type.
ETERNITY PE Card TWT8
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+SLT4
RJ45-2
(Orange)
RJ45-3
(Green)
TWT 01
(Blue) TWT 02
Green - (Green & White) TWT 03
TWT 04
Blue - (Blue & White) TWT 05
Orange - (Orange & White) TWT 06
RJ45-2
(Orange)
RJ45-3
(Green)
SLT 01
(Blue) SLT 02
Green - (Green & White) SLT 03
SLT 04
Matrix
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+DKP4
11. Terminate the free end of the cables into the punch down blocks of the Krone modules designated for 'Trunk Lines' in
the "Main Distribution Frame (MDF)".
Each wire-pair from the ETERNITY PE TWT Port must be terminated to the bottom of the Krone Connector, while the
wire-pair of the trunk line from the CO Network to be connected to this port must be terminated on the top of the
Krone connector.
Refer the topics "Main Distribution Frame" and Terminating Trunk and Station Cables on the MDF.
screws you removed.

The Mobile Card
The Mobile Card interfaces the ETERNITY with GSM networks. It routes calls made and received over GSM networks,
like a GSM mobile handset.
The Mobile card is available in the following configuration for ETERNITY PE:
RJ45-2
(Orange)
RJ45-3
(Green)
(Blue) 02
04
TWT 01
TWT
TWT
TWT
DKP
DKP
DKP
DKP
RJ45-2
(Orange)
RJ45-3
(Green)
(Blue) 02
04
SLT 01
SLT
SLT
SLT
TWT
TWT
DKP
DKP
Matrix
Mobile Card for ETERNITY PE
The mobile card has 4 ports. You can subscribe to 4 different GSM networks with this card.
Just like mobile handsets, each Mobile Port has a unique IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) number, pasted
on the GSM engine.
The maximum number of Mobile ports trunks supported by each variant of ETERNITY PE are:
ETERNITY PE3SS: 12 GSM Ports
ETERNITY PE3SP: 12 GSM Ports
ETERNITY PE6SP: 24 GSM Ports
Antenna
For all four mobile ports, there is a single antenna with a male connector on the card. A splitter connects all the four ports
on the card into a single antenna. An antenna cable is provided.
1. Before you install the Mobile Card, make sure that
the ETERNITY is installed at a location where sufficient network coverage is available.
the power supply is turned off
you are wearing an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist strap and have a grounding mat, before you begin
handling the card.
2. Get the SIM Card from the GSM service provider of your choice ready. Use SIM PIN protection, if required.
3. Unpack the Mobile card and verify the package contents.
SIM PIN Protection
4. Enable SIM PIN to protect your SIM card. Before installing the SIM card in the system, insert the SIM into a mobile
handset first. From the mobile handset,
enable PIN Protection.
5. Now, insert the SIM card (PIN changed to 1234), with its connector side down into the SIM holder on the Mobile card.
You can insert multiple SIM cards of the same GSM service provider or of different service providers.
ETERNITY PE Card GSM4 4-port card to connect to 4 GSM networks (4 SIM Cards can be installed)
Matrix
ETERNITY PE Card GSM4
6. Remove the top cover of the ETERNITY PE, if not opened already. Keep the cover and the screws aside.
7. Select any of the free universal slots. Grasping the card by its sides or corners fit it onto the connectors of the
selected slot.
The card should be seated such that its connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU (motherboard) on
the bottom plane.
9. Repeat the same steps to install another Mobile card, in another free slot. It is not necessary to install the Mobile
cards in subsequent slots.
10. Connect the antenna cable provided with the card on the splitter connector on the card.
11. Lead the antenna cable out of the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the enclosure. Now,
place the antenna at an appropriate location.
screws you removed.
network. Once registration with the GSM network is completed, the mobile port can be used.
GSM network. It is fixed for 150 seconds for all Mobile ports.
The VoIP Card
The VoIP Card enables the stations fo ETERNITY to connect to the IP network.
The VoIP card is based on SIP (Session Initiation Protocol), the industry standard VoIP. It supports adaptive jitter buffer
for reducing delay and improving speech quality.
The VoIP card is available in the following configuration for the ETERNITY PE.

VoIP Card for ETERNITY PE
ETERNITY PE Card VoIP8 Card with 8 VoIP (SIP) channels, to connect to the IP Network for making VoIP Calls.
Splitter
GSM Module 2 GSM Module 1
Mobile 1
Mobile 2
Mobile 3
Mobile 4
Antenna Connector
Matrix
VoIP Ethernet Port

Voice Channels
SIP Trunks
41
ETERNITY PE VoIP8 Card supports a maximum of 32 SIP Trunks, allowing you to subscribe to as many as 32 different
In countries, where the provision and use of Internet telephony services and products is prohibited and or subject
to laws, regulations or licenses, the User is advised to comply with such laws and regulations when installing and
using this product.
your application:
42

Gateway Address
DNS Address
SIP ID/User ID
3. Remove the top cover of the ETERNITY PE, if not opened already. Keep the cover and the screws aside.
Jeeves.
Matrix
4. Select any of the free universal slots. Grasping the card by its sides or corners fit it onto the connectors of the
selected slot.
The card should be seated such that its connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU (motherboard) on
the bottom plane.
6. Repeat the same steps to install another VoIP card, in another free slot. It is not necessary to install the VoIP cards in
subsequent slots.
You can connect ETERNITY PE to the IP network using a SIP Proxy (SIP Server).
OR
Connect ETERNITY PE to another VoIP Product, without going through any proxy. This type of installation is called
Peer-to-Peer Calling.
8. Plug one end of the RJ45 Ethernet cable supplied with the card into the Ethernet Port of the VoIP Card.
9. Lead the Ethernet cable out of the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the enclosure.
Connecting VoIP Ethernet Port to a Broadband Router/Modem
Figure-: Connecting the VoIP Ethernet Port to a Broadband Router/Modem
Connecting the VoIP Ethernet Port to a LAN Switch/Hub
IP
POTS
VoIP Port
ETERNITY
DKP
Broadband
Modem/Router
Matrix
Figure-: Connecting VoIP Ethernet Port to a LAN Switch/Hub
on the LAN.
The IP Address of the Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY PE and the Ethernet Port of the LAN PC must not clash,
station of the ETERNITY PE.
Where,
03-192168010011.
Where,
1-03-255255255000
Broadband
Modem/Router
IP
POTS
VoIP Port
ETERNITY
DKP
Matrix
If there is a DHCP server on the LAN, all you must do is to select the Connection Type for the VoIP Ethernet Port. To do
this,
Where,
Figure-: Connecting the VoIP Ethernet Port to a SIP Proxy
Connecting the VoIP Ethernet Port in a Peer-to-Peer Application
Figure-: Connecting the VoIP Ethernet Port in a Peer-to-Peer Application (without Proxy)
15. Repeat the above steps to insert and connect the other VoIP cards to the LAN Switch/Broadband Router/Modem.
ITSP
POTS
VoIP Ethernet Port
ETERNITY
DKP
Broadband
Modem/Router
IP Network
Broadband
Modem/Router
Broadband
Modem/Router
VoIP Port
ETERNITY PE
VoIP Port
ETERNITY PE
Site 1 Site 2
Matrix
screws you removed.
The BRI Card
The BRI card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY PE with ISDN BRI Network. The ISDN Network may be a
public or a private ISDN exchange.
The BRI Card is available in the following configuration for the variants of ETERNITY PE.
BRI Card of ETERNITY PE
The maximum number of BRI lines supported by each variant of ETERNITY PE are:
ETERNITY PE6SP: 12 BRI lines
ETERNITY PE3SP: 6 BRI lines
ETERNITY PE3SS does not support ISDN BRI connectivity.
Connectors
The BRI card has 2 RJ45 Connectors. A separate cable is supplied for each connector.
To be able to connect ETERNITY to BRI Lines, any one of the above cards must be installed in the system.
5. Seat the card onto the connectors of the selected slot. The connector pins of the card should make perfect contact
with those on the CPU (motherboard) on the bottom plane.
7. Repeat the same steps to install another BRI card. You may install the other BRI card/s in any of the universal slots,
but not necessarily in a sequence.
ETERNITY PE Card BRI2 2-Port card to connect 2 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
Matrix
Connecting ISDN BRI Lines
Most ISDN Service Providers also provide the NT1 device/s along with the BRI line/s. The BRI Line from the ISDN
central office is terminated on the NT1 on the Customer's Premises, as illustrated below.
Where,
S/T Interface = between the ISDN user equipment, in this case, ETERNITY and the Network Interface Equipment
(NT1).
TE and NT Modes
The maximum distance between the NT (Network Termination, NT1 or NT2) and a single Terminal Equipment, in this
case ETERNITY, can be upto 1 kilometer.
ISDN
Network
NT 1
Power
U-Interface
(2-wire)
S/T
Interface
BRI Port
ETERNITY
Customer Premises
ISDN
Network
NT BRI Port
(TE Mode)
ETERNITY
(UP to 1 Km.)
BRI Line
Matrix
Where,
figure.
Where,
TR = Terminal Resistance 100
ISDN
Network
BRI Port
(TE Mode)
ETERNITY
NT
Terminal
Resistance 100
Terminal
Resistance 100
BRI Bus Bar
d < 200 meters
ISDN
Network
BRI Port
(TE Mode)
ETERNITY
NT
Terminal
Resistance 100
Terminal
Resistance 100
BRI Bus Bar
d < 1 Km
d1 < 30 meters
Matrix
figure.
8. Use the cable supplied for each connector on the BRI card to connect the BRI Ports to the NT1 device supplied by
your ISDN service provider.
9. To connect the BRI Lines to the BRI ports, refer the configuration and pinout details given below for guidance
Pinout and cable details of the BRI Port in TE Mode
Port 1:
Port 2:
4 Tx
5 Rx
3 Rx1
4 Tx1
5 Tx2
6 Rx2
Pin Connection Colour
1 NC Orange-White
2 NC Orange
3 Tx0A Green-White
4 Rx0A Blue
5 Rx0B Blue-White
6 Tx0B Green
7 VOut 0- Brown-White
8 VOut 0+ Brown
1 NC Orange-White
2 NC Orange
3 Tx1A Green-White
4 Rx1A Blue
5 Rx1B Blue-White
Matrix
Pinout details of the BRI Port in NT Mode
Port 1:
Port 2:
The following diagram shows how to connect a BRI Line to the ETERNITY PE BRI port in the TE mode.
For using the BRI port in the TE mode, the cable connections need not be crossed.
When the BRI Port is to be used in the NT mode, the Tx and Rx cable of BRI port shall be crossed with the Rx
and Tx cables of the terminal respectively.
10. In all the BRI configuration types illustrated here, the BRI port must be configured as TE.
By default the Orientation Type of the BRI ports of ETERNITY are set as 'Terminals' (TE mode). So, you may skip to
the next step.
6 Tx1B Green
8 VOut 1+ Brown
1 NC Orange-White
2 NC Orange
3 Rx0A Green-White
4 Tx0A Blue
5 Tx0B Blue-White
6 Rx0B Green
8 VOut 0+ Brown
1 NC Orange-White
2 NC Orange
3 Rx1A Green-White
4 Tx1A Blue
5 Tx1B Blue-White
6 Rx1B Green
8 VOut 1+ Brown
ISDN
Network
Power
4
5
3
4
5
6
NT-1
U-Interface
(2-wire)
S/T Interface
(4-wire)
Tx
Rx
Rx1
Tx1
Tx2
Rx2
TxA
RxA
RxB
TxB
V-
V+
NC
NC
ETERNITY
A BRI port of
ETERNITY
Matrix
If the BRI Port is to be configured in the NT mode, all the related Jumpers should be set in BC position. Refer the
table below.
Last TE equipment
If the S0 bus itself supports Terminating resistors, Termination Resistance need not be inserted when:
position. Refer the table below.
Mode
Jumper Position for BRI Port1 Jumper Position for BRI Port2
J1 J2 J4 J5 J7 J8 J10 J11
Function
Jumper Position for BRI Port1 Jumper Position for BRI Port 2
J3 J4 J3 J4
ISDN
Network
NT
BRI TE
ETERNITY
BRI Line
ISDN
Network
NT
BRI TE
ETERNITY
BRI Line
BRI TE BRI TE
Other ISDN
Equipment
Other ISDN
Equipment
Matrix
By default, Termination Resistance of 100? is set on the BRI port (Jumpers J3 and J4 are in AB position)
The above figure shows the connection details of two ports on the BRI Bus Bar. Similarly, you can connect 8 ports on
the Bus Bar, keeping in mind the Termination Resister for the NT and the Last TE on the Bus bar.
1
Tx 3
Rx 4
Rx 5
Tx 6
8
100
100
RJ45 Connector on
Bus Bar at the Last
TE ISDN Equipment
1
3
4
5
6
8
RJ45 Connector
ports on BRI Bus
Bar to which the
ISDN TE
Equipment is
connected
1
3
4
5
6
8
Matrix
Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Transmit (Tx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Receive (Rx) from the ISDN TE
side.
Pin number 3 and 6 are used for Receive (Rx) and pin number 4 and 5 are used for Transmit (Tx) from the NT side.
To do this, you must change the position of the Jumpers J1 and J2 on the BRI modules (daughterboard), of the BRI
Card.

15. If you have completed all other installation tasks, you may turn ON the system and observe the Reset Cycle.
The T1E1PRI Card
The ETERNITY PE T1E1PRI Card provides the interface to connect ETERNITY PE to ISDN Network.

PRI
Q-Signaling (QSIG)
E&M
Function Jumper Position
J1 J2
To feed power on Tx and Rx wires (Phantom Power) AB AB
To feed power on separate pair of wires BC BC
No power to be fed to the terminal equipment Open Open
Matrix
PRI
Q-Signaling (QSIG)
E&M
The T1E1PRI Card is available in the following configuration for ETERNITY PE:
T1E1PRI Card for ETERNITY PE
The maximum number of ISDN PRI lines supported by the variants of ETERNITY PE are:
ETERNITY PE3SP: 3 T1/E1 PRI Lines
ETERNITY PE6SP: 6 T1/E1 PRI Lines.
ETERNITY PE3SS does not support ISDN PRI connectivity.
Connectors
The T1E1PRI card has an RJ45 Connector. A Cat5e cable with RJ45 plugs on both ends is supplied with the card.
3. Unscrew and remove the top cover of the ETERNITY PE (if not opened already). Keep the cover and the screws
aside.
4. Select any free slot from the Universal Slots.
5. Grasp the card by its sides or corners. Fit the card's connectors into the connectors of the selected slot. Ensure that
the card's connector pins make perfect contact with those on the CPU on the bottom plane.
7. Repeat the same steps to install another T1E1PRI card. You may install the other T1E1PRI card/s in any of the
universal slots, but not necessarily in a sequence. Any card can be inserted in any of the universal slots.
equipment (modem), which is usually supplied by your ISDN Service Provider along with the PRI line.
ETERNITY PE Card T1E1PRI Single 1-port card with QSIG support to connect 1 ISDN T1/E1 PRI Line or ISDN
Compatible Device
Matrix
The block diagram illustrates this.
The DTE interface of the modem is to be connected to the PRI port (RJ45 connector on the Matrix ETERNITY PE
T1E1PRI Single Card).
9. Plug in one end of the RJ45 cable supplied with the card into the card's connector. Lead the cable out of the
enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the enclosure.
10. Plug the other end of the RJ45 cable into the Network Termination Unit.
The pinout details of the HDSL interface and DTE interface given above are of a stand-alone HDSL Network
Termination Unit: the Model HTU-E from RAD Data Communication.
the installation guide of the HDSL Network Termination Unit being used by you.
1 Line A
2 Line A
3 Not used
4 Line B
5 Line B
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
1 TX1 (Tip)
2 TX2 (Ring)
3 Not used
4 RX1 (Ring)
5 RX2 (Tip)
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
ISDN
Network
HDSL
(RJ-45 Connector)
G.703
Modem
G.703
Modem
DTE
(RJ-45 Connector)
Power
Customer Premises
4-wire 4-wire
PRI
Port
Matrix
The T1E1PRI Port of the ETERNITY PE terminates in an 8-pin RJ45, female connector and is wired according to the
figure below.
Setting Line Termination Resistor
12. Termination Resistance of the PRI Port for T1 or E1 Connectivity is set by changing the position of the Jumper J2 as
given in the table below:
By default the jumper J5 is in BC position to provide 120 for E1 connectivity.
To use the PRI Port for T1 connectivity, termination resistance must be changed to 100, by changing the position
of jumper J2 to AB position.
13. Repeat the same steps to connect another PRI card, if installed.
14. If you have no other card to install, replace the top cover, by sliding it in place. Secure the cover with the two screws
you removed.
15. If you have completed all other installation tasks. Power the system and observe the Reset Cycle.

Dial by extension
Dial by name
Jumper Position Meaning
J2 BC To set termination resistance of 120 for E1 connectivity
J2 AB To set termination resistance of 100 for T1 connectivity
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
Rx1 (Ring)
Rx2 (Tip)
NC
NC
NC
NC
Matrix
Message forwarding
Distribution lists
Broadcast message
Redirecting messages, etc.
Call Taping
VMS Card for ETERNITY PE
The card has a capacity of 512 mailboxes. Each Mailbox has the capacity of storing 254 messages. The size of each
43
.
The VMS Card has an Ethernet Port and a USB port.
Ethernet Port
System parameters.
USB Port
Pen Drive to the VMS Card. The pen drive is supplied by Matrix and contains all the voice messages, mailbox messages,
greetings and other messages and prompts.
The Pen Drive is factory fitted and shipped with the card.
1. Equip yourself with an electrostatic discharge preventive wrist belt and a grounding mat. Ensure that power supply to
the ETERNITY is turned off, and the power cord is unplugged.
2. Unpack the VMS card and check the package contents with the packing list.
3. Remove the top cover of the ETERNITY, if not opened already. Keep the cover and the screws aside.
4. Select from any of the free universal slots to install the VMS Card.
ETERNITY PE Card VMS16 16-channel Voice Mail System with 512 mailboxes to provide voice mail facility to all
PBX extensions.
43. When the ETERNITY is installed in the Hospitality Application (Hotel Mode), the default Mailbox size would be 300 min-
utes and the default length of messages is 999 seconds.
Matrix
5. Hold the card by its sides and seat the card on the connectors of the slot on the CPU. Make sure that the card's
connector pins fit perfectly into those on the CPU.
Lead the Ethernet cable out of the enclosure through any of the two cable outlets on either side of the enclosure.
When you connect the VMS Card to a to a standalone/LAN PC, you need to make sure that
the same.
the VMS Card
44
.
9. Replace the cover of the ETERNITY PE and switch ON the system.
The VMS will answer the call and greet you with a Welcome Message.
Dial *19-1234 (the default SE Command and Password of VMS) as the Welcome Message is played.
192168001182-#*
Dial 3931.
change the IP Address, Subnet Mask. You must only select DHCP as the Connection Type.
44. When there is a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server on the LAN, IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway
Address are automatically allocated to the devices connected to the LAN. If the LAN to which the Ethernet Port of VMS
is connected has a DHCP server, you do not need to change the IP Address, Subnet Mask; they will be assigned
automatically by the DHCP server.
Matrix
Dial 3931.
Dial 1504-1-#*
11. If you have completed all installation tasks, switch ON the ETERNITY observe the Reset Cycle of the System.

Starting Up ETERNITY PE
Power ON
1. If you have completed all the installation tasks, connect the three-prong plug of the power cord from the ETERNITY
into the AC outlet, and switch on power supply.
Reset Cycle
The LEDs L1 and L2 are turned on, and glow Orange for a minute.
The LEDs of the keys of the Digital Key Phones attached to the system are turned on sequentially.
When the system becomes stable after Power-ON,
L1 glows Orange and remains steady ON.
L2 blinks Green - 1 sec. ON and 1 sec OFF.
When the Reset Cycle is successful, the default Station Access Codes loaded by the system and the date and time of the
Real Time Clock of the system will appear on the LCD display of the Digital Key Phones have connected with the system.
Matrix
Section 2: Features and Facilities
Matrix
Abbreviated Dialing
Whats this?
The numbers which are used for frequently calling can be stored in the system memory. These numbers can be
dialed using specific codes. This saves time while dialing such frequently used numbers. It is also known as Memory
Dialing.
An abbreviated number is accessed through its directory index.
The ETERNITY offers flexibility to call these numbers by dialing their name from the DKP. Please refer Directory
Dialing by Name for more details. It also supports special digits like #* for programming as number. Refer chapter
Flash Timer for this.
The ETERNITY offers two types of abbreviated dialing:
Personal Abbreviated Dialing
Global Abbreviated Dialing
Personal Abbreviated Dialing
The numbers used for personal abbreviated dialing are stored in a memory area called personal memory.
The personal memory of the system is divided in 50 groups (PM Group) is called personal directory.
Each group can hold 25 numbers. The location codes for personal memory are 001 to 025.
One such group is assigned to a station.
The numbers in the personal directory are programmed by the SE.
The system checks OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) and Toll Control Level of Allowed List and Denied List before
dialing the personal abbreviated number. Hence for Personal Abbreviated Dialing; OG Trunk Bundle Group, Toll
Control Level of Allowed List, Toll Control Level of Denied List and Class of Service should be programmed properly.
The table will look as shown below:
How to use Personal Memory Group?
How to program Personal Memory Group?
Step 1
Take a piece of paper and a pen and make a list of telephone numbers.
Step 2
Use the following command to program a telephone number in a personal directory:
1902-PM Group-Location Code-Number-#*
Where,
PM Group is from 01 to 50.
Location Code is from 001 to 025.
Number is the telephone number (Maximum 16 digits).
PM Group Location Code OGTBG Number Name
01 001
:
025
1
:
1
Blank
:
Blank
Blank
:
Blank
02 001
:
025
1
:
1
Blank
:
Blank
Blank
:
Blank
: : : : :
50 001
:
025
1
:
1
Blank
:
Blank
Blank
:
Blank
1 Lift the Handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 8-Location Code. Number dialed out.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix
By default, the numbers in personal directory are blank.
Use the following command to clear a telephone number from a location in a PM Group:
1902-PM Group-Location Code-#*
Step 3
Use the following command to program a name in PM Group:
1903-PM Group-Location Code-Name-#*/<press Hold>
Where,
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters (Max. 12 char.)
By default, no name is programmed in PM Group.
Use the following command to clear a name from a location in a PM Group:
1903-PM Group-Location Code-#*/<Press Hold>
Step 4
Use the following command to assign PM Group to a SLT:
1905-1-SLT-PM Group
1905-2-SLT-SLT-PM Group
1905-*-PM Group
Where,
By default, 00 is the PM Group assigned to all SLTs.
Use the following command to clear the PM Group assigned to a SLT:
1905-1-SLT-00
1905-2-SLT-SLT-00
1905-*
Use the following command to assign PM Group to a DKP:
1906-1-DKP-PM Group
1906-2-DKP-DKP-PM Group
1906-*-PM Group
Where,
DKP is from 001 to 128.
By default, 00 is the PM Group assigned to all DKPs.
Use the following command to clear the PM Group assigned to a DKP:
1906-1-DKP-00
1906-2-DKP-DKP-00
1906-*
Step 5
Use the following command to program the TAC Index for PM Group:
1904-PM Group-Location Code-TAC Index
Where,
TAC Index is 1 to 6.
By default, the TAC Index 1 is assigned to PM Group.
Step 6
Use the following command to clear a PM Group:
1901-1-PM Group
1901-2-PM Group-PM Group
1901-*
Where,
Matrix
How to program number in personal memory?
From SLT:
TAC are 0, 5, 61-64 (Selective Trunk Access is not allowed).
Number is the telephone number, which is to be abbreviated.
From DKP:
Please refer EON User Card for more details.
Note:
The Trunk Access Code (TAC), if programmed is displayed on the DKP and can be changed also.
Global Abbreviated Dialing
The numbers used for global abbreviated dialing are stored in a memory area called global memory (global directory).
The memory space in which the telephone numbers are stored is called global directory.
Global directory can be programmed from the SE mode.
The global directory is common for all the users.
Maximum 900 numbers can be stored in the global directory. Location Codes for global directory are from 100 to 999.
Global directory is divided into three parts i.e. Global Directory Part 1, Global Directory Part 2 and Global Directory
Part 3.
When an user dials a number from global directory part 2 and part 3, the system checks for COS and Call Budget.
A user can dial numbers in global memory part 1 irrespective of his Toll Control and OGTBG. However these numbers
can be dialed only if the user is allowed this feature from Class of Service.
Telephone numbers of fire, police, branch offices or such other places can be stored in this memory so that any user
can access this facility.
The default table will look as shown below:
How to use Global Directory?
How to program Global Directory?
Step 1
Take a piece of paper and a pen and make a list of telephone numbers.
Step 2
Use following command to program a telephone number in global directory:
1801-Location Code-Number-#*/Press <hold>
Where,
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 1071-Location Code-Number-#*-TAC. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Location Code OGTBG Number Name Alternate No. Group
Global Directory Part I
100 01 Blank Blank 000
: : : : :
Global Directory Part II
: : : : :
Global Directory Part III
: : : : :
1 Lift the Handset Dial tone
2 Dial 8-Location Code Number dialed out
Matrix
Number is the telephone number (maximum 16 digits).
Use following command to clear a telephone number from a location in the global directory:
1801-Location Code-#*
By default, the numbers are blank.
Step 3
Use following command to program a name in global directory:
1802-Location Code-Name-#*/Press <hold>
Where,
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters. (Max. 12 char.)
Use following command to clear a name from a location in the global directory:
1802-Location Code-#*/Press <hold>
By default, the name in global directory is blank.
Step 4
Use the COS command to assign global directory part 1/part 2/part 3 to SLT or DKP.
Step 5
Use following command to program the OGTBG for global directory:
1803-1-Location Code-OGTBG
1803-2-Location Code-Location Code-OGTBG
1803-*-OGTBG
Where,
OGTBG is from 01 to 32.
By default, the OGTBG assigned is 01.
Step 6
Use following command to clear a location code in the global directory:
1800-1-Location Code
1800-2-Location Code-Location Code
1800-*
Where,
Example:
To program telephone number of police i.e. 100 at location code 100 using OG Trunk Bundle Group 01, dial
1801-100-100-#*
1803-1-100-01
To call police, station user should dial 8100.
The ETERNITY automatically inserts a pause after grabbing the trunk (TWT) and dialing the first digit on the trunk line.
This is known as Pause Timer and is programmable for each trunk. Refer Trunk Feature Template topic for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 361
2. Directory Dialing by Name 466
3. Trunk Feature Template 882
4. Alternate Number Dialing 254
5. Flash Timer 539
=X=X=
Matrix
Access Codes
What's this?
Access code is a string of digits dialed by a station to:
Call another Station, Department Group.
Grab a trunk line.
Turn on/off a Digital/Analog Port.
Use a feature.
Access codes can be classified broadly into three categories:
Station Codes: Codes used to access stations viz. SLTs like 2001, 2002, etc., DKPs like 3001, 3002, etc. Analog
Output Ports (For example, PAS) like 3921, 3922, etc.
Logical Group Codes: Codes assigned to call logical groups like Department Numbers-3901, 3902, etc. and access
trunk groups-61, 62, etc.
Feature Codes like '2' for Auto Call Back, '5' for Raid, etc.
ETERNITY allows changing these codes to codes of your choice. For example, by default to call operator, one has to dial
'9'. It is possible to change this code to '0'. Also, to dial on a trunk in group 1, one has to dial '61'. It is possible to change
this code to '5'.
If you try to assign a number string that is already used to access a station or use a feature then the system would not
accept the command and shall give error tone. In such an event, one has to take the printout of access codes, delete the
conflicting access code and then assign the desired access code.
How it works?
Since no function is possible when the telephone is idle, it is obvious that no access code can be dialed from idle
phase.
Different access codes are making sense during different phases of a call. For example, call forward feature code
makes sense from the dial tone, whereas, Auto Call Back (on busy) feature is meaningful from busy tone.
Please note that each access code in a single call phase must be unique. For example, it is not possible to have
same access code for features like Call Forward and Redial since both these feature codes are used at dial tone.
However same access codes can be used for different features used during different phases, For example, one can
have same access code say '8' for Memory Dialing and Barge-in since both these feature codes are used during
different phases of a call viz. Dial phase and Blocked phase.
An access code can be of maximum 6 digits.
A typical call passes through different phases or stages as shown below:
In one phase, different access codes can be of different length. But all of them must be unique. For example, in
blocked phase we can have following codes:
Feature Code
Auto Call Back 2
Interrupt Request 31
Barge-In 311
Raid 411
Idle
Dialing
Routing
Blocked
Placed Matured Denied
Idle Dial
Dial Tone
Routing Blocked
Busy Tone
Placed
Ring
Matured
Speech
Denied
Error Tone
Matrix
Please note that station user cannot dial any code once he reaches the denied phase.
Refer Access Code Table at the end of topic, relevance of different features in different phases. Since no codes can
be dialed from idle phase and denied phase, these are not shown in the table.
Station Codes
SLT Station Numbers
SLT station numbers are the codes dialed from dial phase to call another station. Each SLT station number must be
unique and should not match with any of the features available from the dial phase. For more details, please refer topic
Flexible Numbers.
DKP Station Numbers
DKP station numbers are the codes dialed from the dial phase by a station to call a DKP station. Each DKP station
number must be unique and should not match with any of the features available from the dial phase. For more details,
please refer topic Flexible Numbers. For example, these codes are different then, Access codes for Digital Output Port
(DOP). Please refer Digital Output Port (DOP) for more details.
Logical Group Codes
Department Numbers
ETERNITY offers a facility of forming groups of stations and assigning a common access code called Department
Number to this group. For more details, please refer topic Flexible Numbers.
OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG)
These are the codes dialed by a station user to grab a trunk line. Each of these codes relates to a group of trunks, which
can be set differently for each station. For more details, please refer topic OG Trunk Bundle Group.
Trunk Access-Selective
This is a code dialed by a station user to grab a particular trunk line. For more details, please refer topic OG Trunk Bundle
Group.
Features Codes
ETERNITY supports programmable access codes for all the features. The feature codes are divided depending upon the
phase during which these codes are dialed viz. Dial Phase feature code, Routing Phase feature code, etc.
Dial Phase feature codes
Following features are allowed from dial phase (Non-programmable).
Routing Phase feature code
Please note that only Emergency Number dialing is from the routing phase.
Block Phase feature codes
Placed Phase feature code
Please note that since only one feature is available from the placed phase, we can use any digit of our choice as access
code for this feature.
Feature Name Feature Number Access Code
Enter SE Mode 01 1#91
Enter SA Mode 02 1#92
Auto Call Back 08 2
Interrupt Request 21 3
Barge-In 22 4
Raid 23 5
Auto Call Back 08 2
Matrix
Matured Phase feature codes
Following features are allowed from dial phase (Non-programmable).
How to program?
Use following command to program the access code for the feature:
3111-1-Feature Number-Access Code-#*
3111-2-Feature No.-Feature No.-Access Code-#*
3111-*-Access Code-#*
Where,
Feature Number is from 01 to 72.
Access Code is a string of maximum 6 digits
How to default Access Codes?
Use the following command to default a feature codes:
3161-1-Feature Number
3161-2-Feature Number-Feature Number
3161-*
Where,
Note for Access Code Tables:
For countries for which Access Codes are not given, use India's Access Code as default value, except for Emergency
Number.
Access Code Table (For India):
Enter SE Mode 01 1#91
Enter SA Mode 02 1#92
Feature
Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Dial Routing Blocked placed
Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Enter SE Mode 01 1#91 Y Y
Enter SA Mode 02 1#92 Y Y
Call Pick Up-General 03 4 Y Y
Call Pick Up-Selective 04 12 Y Y
Auto Call Back 05 2 Y Y
Cancel Auto Call Back 06 102 Y Y
Redial 07 7 Y Y
Auto Redial 08 17 Y Y
Cancel Auto Redial 09 1070 Y Y
Personal Directory Programming 10 1071 Y Y
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 11 8 Y Y
Operator Dialing 12 9 Y Y Y
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 Y Y
Dynamic Lock 14 14 Y Y
Hot Line 15 15 Y Y
Alarm 16 161 Y Y
Do Not Disturb 17 18 Y Y
Interrupt Request 18 3 Y
Barge-In 19 4 Y
Matrix
Raid 20 5 Y
Trunk Reservation 21 6 Y
Call Toggle 22 1 Y
Conference- 3 Party 23 0 Y
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer 24 # Y
Conference-Multi Party 25 19 Y Y
Call Park 26 115 Y Y
Retrieve Parked Call 27 116 Y Y
Room Monitor 28 1073 Y Y
Last Caller Recall 29 1092 Y Y
Voice Help 30 1090 Y Y
Walk-In Class Of Service 31 111 Y Y
Change User Password 32 114 Y Y
Page Zone 33 1074 Y Y
DISA Log In Code 34 1079 Y Y
Trunk Release Code (Trunk-to-Trunk
Speech)
35 ## Y Y
Cancel All Feature 36 1051 Y Y
Selective Port Access Code 37 69 Y Y
Flashing on Trunk 38 * Y Y
Change User Status 39 104 Y Y
Account Code by Number 40 1058 Y Y
Account Code by Name 41 1059 Y Y
Back Ground Music 42 1099 Y Y
Meet Me Paging 43 1093 Y Y
Hot Desk 44 1091 Y Y
DND Override 45 4 Y
Missed Calls 46 1097 Y Y
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF
Request
47 1094 Y Y
VMS Conversation Recording 48 1095 Y Y
Forced Release 49 #* Y
Hold 50 Flash Y
Live Call Supervision 51 1098 Y Y Y
Forced Answer 52 5 Y
Maid In 53 1054 Y Y
RCOC in DISA Mode 54
**
Y
Minibar Details 55 1056 Y Y
Mute 56 1052 Y Y
Change Time Zone 57 1053 Y Y
Self Ring Test 58 1057 Y
Set Chain Party 59 1050 Y
SA Command 60 1072 Y Y
Second Trunk Access Code 61 # Y
Floor Service 62 38 Y Y
Keypad Lock DKP 63 Y
CLIR 64 103 Y
Call Cost Display 65 1075 Y
Feature
Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
Reminder 66 162 Y Y
Voice Guided Alarm 67 163 Y Y
Voice Guided Reminder 68 164 Y Y
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 69 1078 Y
Message Wait Set 70 1076 Y
Message Wait Retrieval 71 1077 Y
Use Definable Fields 72 1096 Y Y
Emergency Number 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y
SA Commands
Check-In 1 1072-901 Y Y
Check-Out 2 1072-902 Y Y
Guest Name 3 1072-903 Y Y
Guest Group 4 1072-904 Y Y
Guest-In/Out 5 1072-905 Y Y
Guest Title 6 1072-906 Y Y
Change Check-In Profile of Room 7 1072-907 Y Y
Change Room Occupancy Status 8 1072-908 Y Y
Change Room Clean Status 9 1072-909 Y Y
Room Shift 10 1072-910 Y Y
Reprint Check Out Report 11 1072-911 Y Y
Print Room Status Report 12 1072-912 Y Y
Print Alarm Status Report 13 1072-913 Y Y
Delete Checked Out calls 14 1072-914 Y Y
Set DND-Remote 15 1072-001 Y Y
Set Dynamic Lock settings - Remote 16 1072-002 Y Y
Set Alarm -Remote 17 1072-003 Y Y
Assign Call Budget to a station 18 1072-004 Y Y
-Assign/De-assign Mailbox to a Station -
Remote
19 1072-005
Set Call Forward - Remote 20 1072-006 Y Y
Set Call forward for all stations-Remote 21 1072-007 Y Y
Assign Station User Greeting Message 22 1072-008 Y Y
Display & Acknowledge System Activity 23 1072-009 Y Y
Display & Acknowledge System Fault 24 1072-010 Y Y
Station Budget Display 25 1072-011 Y Y
Change User password of a Station 26 1072-012 Y Y
Lock/unlock DKP''s Keypad 27 1072-013 Y Y
User Absent / Present 28 1072-014 Y Y
Change SA password 29 1072-015 Y Y
Feature
Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
Change SA mode timer 30 1072-016 Y Y
Display Registered GSM Network ID 31 1072-017 Y
Set Master Time Zone 32 1072-018 Y
Switch OFF DOP manually 33 1072-019 Y Y
Switch ON DOP manually 34 1072-020 Y Y
Terminate Security dialing 35 1072-021 Y Y
Clear System Activity Log 36 1072-022 Y Y
Start/Abort SAL in Offline mode 37 1072-023 Y Y
Start/Abort SAL in Online mode 38 1072-024 Y Y
Change Time zone of a Port 39 1072-025 Y Y
Cancel Dial in Conference 40 1072-026 Y Y
Start/Abort SFL in Offline mode 41 1072-027 Y Y
Start/Abort SFL in Online mode 42 1072-028 Y Y
Display Port Parameters 43 1072-029 Y Y
Start/Abort Online OG Report 44 1072-101 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from station/s 45 1072-102 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from TWT 46 1072-103 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from BRI 47 1072-104 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from DS1 48 1072-105 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from E&M 49 1072-106 Y Y
Set filter to print calls from Mobile 50 1072-107 Y Y
Set filter to print calls from SIP 51 1072-108 Y Y
Set filter to print calls Department Bill
Group wise
52 1072-109 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made on date/s 53 1072-110 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made at time/s 54 1072-111 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made to numbers
matching
the numbers in the List assigned
55 1072-112 Y Y
Set filter to print calls of Duration more
than this time
56 1072-113 Y Y
Set filter to print calls of Units more than
the units programmed
57 1072-114 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made to account
code
58 1072-115 Y Y
Assign default OG filters 59 1072-120 Y Y
Start/Abort offline report 60 1072-121 Y Y
Enable/ Disable OG Schedule Reports 61 1072-122 Y Y
Program Time for Daily OG Scheduled
Reports
62 1072-123 Y Y
Program Day and Time for OG Weekly
Scheduled Reports
63 1072-124 Y Y
Program Date and Time for OG Monthly
Scheduled Reports
64 1072-125 Y Y
Delete calls made by station/s 65 1072-131 Y Y
Delete calls made on/from date 66 1072-132 Y Y
To clear SMDR OG buffer 67 1072-133 Y Y
Start/Abort Internal calls Report 68 1072-136 Y Y
Set filter to print Internal calls Report 69 1072-137 Y Y
Feature
Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
Set filter to print internal calls with duration
greater than that given here
70 1072-138 Y Y
Start/Abort Offline Internal Call Report 71 1072-141 Y Y
Enable/ Disable Internal Scheduled
Reports
72 1072-142 Y Y
Program Time for Internal Daily Scheduled
Reports
73 1072-143 Y Y
Program Day and Time for Internal Weekly
Scheduled Reports
74 1072-144 Y Y
Program Date and Time for Internal
Monthly Scheduled Reports
75 1072-145 Y Y
To Clear SMDR Internal Buffer 76 1072-150 Y Y
Start/Abort Online - IC Report 77 1072-151 Y Y
Set filter to print all Normal calls 78 1072-152 Y Y
Set filter to print all DID calls 79 1072-153 Y Y
Set filter to print all Unanswered calls 80 1072-154 Y Y
Set filter to print all DID Unanswered calls 81 1072-155 Y Y
Set filter to print all DISA calls 82 1072-156 Y Y
Set filter to print all calls with speech
duration More than timer
83 1072-157 Y Y
Set filter to print all calls unanswered for
duration More than timer
84 1072-158 Y Y
Set filter to print all calls kept on hold for
duration more than timer
85 1072-159 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls received by the
station
86 1072-160 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On the
TWT
87 1072-161 Y Y
BRI
88 1072-162 Y Y
DS1
89 1072-163 Y Y
E&M
90 1072-164 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls from Mobile 91 1072-165 Y Y
Set filter to print calls from SIP 92 1072-166 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On/from
date
93 1072-167 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. At/from-
to Time
94 1072-168 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. From
nos. matching the External Number List
95 1072-169 Y Y
Default IC Print filters 96 1072-170 Y Y
Abort/Start IC Offline Report 97 1072-171 Y Y
Enable/ Disable IC Scheduled Report 98 1072-172 Y Y
Program Time for IC Daily Scheduled
Reports
99 1072-173 Y Y
Program Day and Time for IC Weekly
Scheduled Reports
100 1072-174 Y Y
Program Date and Time for IC Monthly
Scheduled Reports
101 1072-175 Y Y
Feature
Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
Clear SMDR-IC buffer 102 1072-180 Y Y
Start/Abort Printing of Online DS1
Performance Report
103 1072-030 Y Y
Start/Abort Offline DS1 Performance
Report
104 1072-031 Y Y
Signal Strength of Mobile Port 105 1072-032 Y Y
Enable/Disable Call Cost Display for a
Station
106 1072-181 Y Y
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log in
Offline mode
107 1072-176 Y Y
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log in
Online mode
108 1072-177 Y Y
Display and Acknowledge Hotel/Motel
Activity
109 1072-178 Y Y
Change Guest VIP Status of Station 110 1072-915 Y Y
Change Phone Ringing Pattern of Room 111 1072-916
Print Reminder Status Report 112 1072-917
Remote Reminder 113 1072-033 Y Y
Remote Voice Guided Alarm 114 1072-034 Y Y
Remote Voice Guided Reminder 115 1072-035 Y Y
Set filter to print calls received on Magneto 116 1072-116 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from Magneto 117 1072-179 Y Y
Enable/Disable Scheduled Alarm Report 118 1072-036 Y Y
Program Time for Scheduled Alarm
Report
119 1072-037 Y Y
Enable/Disable Scheduled Reminder
Report
120 1072-038 Y Y
Program Time for Scheduled Reminder
Report
121 1072-039 Y Y
Request Database Synchronization to
PMS
122 1072-040 Y Y
Enable/Disable Scheduled Room Status
Report
123 1072-041 Y Y
Program Time for Schedule Room Status
Report
124 1072-042 Y Y
Enable/Disable Scheduled Change of
Room Clean Status
125 1072-043 Y Y
Program Time for Schedule Change of
Room Clean Status
126 1072-044 Y Y
Reserved For Future Use 127 1072-182
Enable/Disable Internal Call Block For
Guest Phones
128 1072-045 Y Y
Software Version Revision Display of
Master Card
129 1072-191 Y Y
User Definable fields 130 1072-920 Y Y
To set filter to print calls originated on TWT 131 1072-183 Y Y
To set filter to print calls originated on BRI 132 1072-184 Y Y
To set filter to print calls originated on DS1 133 1072-185 Y Y
To set filter to print calls originated on E&M 134 1072-186 Y Y
To set filter to print calls originated on
Mobile
135 1072-187 Y Y
Feature
Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
Access Code Table (for other Countries):
To set filter to print calls originated on SIP 136 1072-188 Y Y
To set filter to print calls originated on
Magneto
137 1072-189 Y Y
Feature Australia Bangladesh Belgium Bhutan Canada China Germany
Enter SE Mode 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91
Enter SA Mode 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92
Call Pick Up-General 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Call Pick Up-Selective 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Auto Call Back 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Cancel Auto Call Back 102 102 102 102 102 102 102
Redial 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Auto Redial 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
Cancel Auto Redial 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070
Personal Directory Programming 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 8 8 8 8 6 8 8
Operator Dialing 9 9 0 9 0 0 9
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Dynamic Lock 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Hot Line 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Alarm 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Do Not Disturb 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Interrupt Request 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Barge-In 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Raid 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Trunk Reservation 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Call Toggle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Conference- 3 Party 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer # # # # # # #
Conference-Multi Party 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
Call Park 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
Retrieve Parked Call 116 116 116 116 116 116 116
Room Monitor 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073
Last Caller Recall 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092
Voice Help 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
Walk-In Class Of Service 111 111 111 111 111 111 111
Change User Password 114 114 114 114 114 114 114
Page Zone 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074
DISA Log In Code 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079
Speech)
## ## ## ## ## ## ##
Cancel All Feature 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051
Selective Port Access Code 69 69 69 69 69 69 69
Flashing on Trunk * * * * * * *
Change User Status 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
Account Code by Number 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058
Account Code by Name 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059
Feature
Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
Back Ground Music 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099
Meet Me Paging 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093
Hot Desk 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091
DND Override 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Missed Calls 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF Request 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094
VMS Conversation Recording 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095
Forced Release #* #* #* #* #* #* #*
Hold Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash
Live Call Supervision 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098
Forced Answer 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Maid In 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054
RCOC in DISA Mode
** ** ** ** ** ** **
Minibar Details 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056
Mute 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052
Change Time Zone 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053
Self Ring Test 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057
Set Chain Party 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
SA Command 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072
Second Trunk Access Code # # # # # # #
Floor Service 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Keypad Lock DKP
CLIR 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Call Cost Display 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075
Reminder 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
Voice Guided Alarm 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Voice Guided Reminder 164 164 164 164 164 164 164
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078
Message Wait Set 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076
Message Wait Retrieval 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077
User Definable Fields 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096
Emergency Number 1 000 999 101 110 100 110 110
Emergency Number 2 106 100 112 101 120 112
Emergency Number 3 112 112 113 108 119
Emergency Number 4 112
Emergency Number 5
Emergency Number 6
Emergency Number 7
Emergency Number 8
Emergency Number 9
Emergency Number 10
Feature India Indonesia Italy Jordan Kazakhstan Kenya Kuwait Malaysia
Enter SE Mode 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91
Enter SA Mode 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92
Call Pick Up-General 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Call Pick Up-Selective 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Auto Call Back 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Feature Australia Bangladesh Belgium Bhutan Canada China Germany
Matrix
Cancel Auto Call Back 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102
Redial 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Auto Redial 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
Cancel Auto Redial 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070
Personal Directory Programming 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 6
Operator Dialing 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Dynamic Lock 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Hot Line 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Alarm 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Do Not Disturb 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Interrupt Request 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Barge-In 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Raid 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Trunk Reservation 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Call Toggle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Conference- 3 Party 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer # # # # # # # #
Conference-Multi Party 19 19 19 110 19 19 19 19
Call Park 115 115 110 115 115 115 115 115
Retrieve Parked Call 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116
Room Monitor 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073
Last Caller Recall 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092
Voice Help 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
Walk-In Class Of Service 111 111 111 111 111 111 111 111
Change User Password 114 114 114 114 114 114 114 114
Page Zone 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074
DISA Log In Code 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079
Speech)
## ## ## ## ## ## ## ##
Cancel All Feature 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051
Selective Port Access Code 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69
Flashing on Trunk * * * * * * * *
Change User Status 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
Account Code by Number 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058
Account Code by Name 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059
Back Ground Music 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099
Meet Me Paging 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093
Hot Desk 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091
Missed Calls 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097
DND Override 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Request
1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094
VMS Conversation Recording 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095
Forced Release #* #* #* #* #* #* #* #*
Hold Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash
Live Call Supervision 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098
Forced Answer 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Matrix
Maid In 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054
RCOC in DISA Mode
** ** ** ** ** ** ** **
Minibar Details 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056
Mute 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052
Change Time Zone 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053
Self Ring Test 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057
Set Chain Party 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
SA Command 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072
Second Trunk Access Code # # # # # # # #
Floor Service 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Keypad Lock DKP
CLIR 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Call Cost Display 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075
Reminder 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
Voice Guided Alarm 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Voice Guided Reminder 164 164 164 164 164 164 164 164
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078
Message Wait Set 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076
Message Wait Retrieval 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077
User Definable Fields 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096
Emergency Number 1 100 110 113 191 03 999 777 999
Emergency Number 3 108 119 115
Feature Maldives Mauritius Mexico Namibia Nepal New
Zealand
Oman Pakistan
Enter SE Mode 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91
Enter SA Mode 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92
Redial 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Auto Redial 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
Dynamic Lock 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Hot Line 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Alarm 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Do Not Disturb 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Barge-In 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Raid 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Matrix
Call Toggle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Call Park 115 110 115 115 115 115 115 115
Room Monitor 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073
Voice Help 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
Page Zone 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074
DISA Log In Code 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079
Speech)
## ## ## ## ## ## ## ##
Meet Me Paging 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093
Hot Desk 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091
DND Override 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Missed Calls 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097
Request
1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094
Forced Release #* #* #* #* #* #* #* #*
Maid In 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054
RCOC in DISA Mode
** ** ** ** ** ** ** **
Minibar Details 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056
Mute 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052
Change Time Zone 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053
Self Ring Test 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057
Set Chain Party 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
SA Command 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072
Floor Service 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Keypad Lock DKP
CLIR 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Reminder 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
Zealand
Oman Pakistan
Matrix
Message Wait Set 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076
Emergency Number 2 108 115 112 115
Emergency Number 4 08 911
Emergency Number 6
Emergency Number 7
Emergency Number 8
Emergency Number 9
Emergency Number 10
Feature Philippines Poland Russia Singapore South
Africa
Spain Sri
Lanka
Sudan
Enter SE Mode 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91
Enter SA Mode 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92
Redial 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Auto Redial 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
Dynamic Lock 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Hot Line 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Alarm 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Do Not Disturb 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Barge-In 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Raid 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Call Toggle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Call Park 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
Room Monitor 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073
Zealand
Oman Pakistan
Matrix
Voice Help 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
Page Zone 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074
DISA Log In Code 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079
Speech)
## ## ## ## ## ## ## ##
Meet Me Paging 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093
Hot Desk 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091
DND Override 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Missed Calls 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097
Request
1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094
Forced Release #* #* #* #* #* #* #* #*
Maid In 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054
RCOC in DISA Mode
** ** ** ** ** ** ** **
Minibar Details 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056
Mute 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052
Change Time Zone 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053
Self Ring Test 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057
Set Chain Party 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
SA Command 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072
Floor Service 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Keypad Lock DKP
CLIR 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Reminder 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
Message Wait Set 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076
Africa
Spain Sri
Lanka
Sudan
Matrix
Emergency Number 6
Emergency Number 7
Emergency Number 8
Emergency Number 9
Emergency Number 10
Feature Sweden Taiwan Thailand Turkey UAE UK USA
Enter SE Mode 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91
Enter SA Mode 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92
Call Pick Up-General 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Call Pick Up-Selective 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Auto Call Back 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Cancel Auto Call Back 102 102 102 102 102 102 102
Redial 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Auto Redial 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
Cancel Auto Redial 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070
Personal Directory Programming 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 8 8 8 8 8 8 6
Operator Dialing 9 0 9 9 9 9 0
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Dynamic Lock 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Hot Line 15 15 15 106 15 15 15
Alarm 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Do Not Disturb 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Interrupt Request 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Barge-In 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Raid 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Trunk Reservation 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Call Toggle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Conference- 3 Party 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer # # # # # # #
Conference-Multi Party 19 19 110 19 19 19 19
Call Park 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
Retrieve Parked Call 116 116 116 116 116 116 116
Room Monitor 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073
Last Caller Recall 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092
Voice Help 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
Walk-In Class Of Service 111 111 111 111 111 111 111
Change User Password 114 114 114 114 114 114 114
Page Zone 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074
DISA Log In Code 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079
Trunk Release Code (Trunk-to-Trunk Speech) ## ## ## ## ## ## ##
Cancel All Feature 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051
Selective Port Access Code 69 69 69 69 69 69 69
Africa
Spain Sri
Lanka
Sudan
Matrix
Flashing on Trunk * * * * * * *
Change User Status 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
Account Code by Number 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058
Account Code by Name 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059
Back Ground Music 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099
Meet Me Paging 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093
Hot Desk 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091
DND Override 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Missed Calls 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF Request 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094
VMS Conversation Recording 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095
Forced Release #* #* #* #* #* #* #*
Hold Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash
Live Call Supervision 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098
Forced Answer 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Maid In 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054
RCOC in DISA Mode
** ** ** ** ** ** **
Minibar Details 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056
Mute 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052
Change Time Zone 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053
Self Ring Test 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057
Set Chain Party 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
SA Command 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072
Second Trunk Access Code # # # # # # #
Floor Service 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Keypad Lock DKP
CLIR 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Call Cost Display 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075
Reminder 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
Voice Guided Alarm 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Voice Guided Reminder 164 164 164 164 164 164 164
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078
Message Wait Set 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076
Message Wait Retrieval 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077
User Definable Fields 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096
Emergency Number 1 112 110 191 155 999 999 911
Emergency Number 2 119 1669 112 998 112 112
Emergency Number 5
Emergency Number 6
Emergency Number 7
Emergency Number 8
Emergency Number 9
Emergency Number 10
Feature Sweden Taiwan Thailand Turkey UAE UK USA
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
1. OG Trunk Bundle Group 653
2. Emergency Dialing 531
3. Default Settings 407
4. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 432
5. Flexible Numbers 541
6. Digital Output Port (DOP) 447
7. QSIG 687
8. Call Budget on Trunk 292
=X=X=
Matrix
Account Codes
What is this?
Account Code is a unique number. This code can be assigned individually to each client, to know the call details for
that client.
Maximum 999 Account Codes are possible.
Suppose an advertising firm is using ETERNITY. The firm has 50 clients. Firm makes 100 calls in a day, majority of
which are for their clients only. These calls include calls made to other parties for accomplishing the job of clients as
well as to clients themselves. The firm wishes to find how many calls it has made for or to Client X, Client Y and
Client Z. ETERNITY helps the firm in analyzing this.
Each Account Code can have a name. Account name is not compulsory.
When the user dials trunk access code, the first name programmed in the Account code directory is displayed.
User can enter directly the Account code or navigate the directory and make a selection.
How to use it?
Take a Paper Pad.
Draw a table having two columns.
Write down the names of all your clients in the first column and assign an account code to each of them in the second
column. This code is of three digits (001-999).
This list should be circulated to everybody in the organizations making outgoing calls for their clients. The table would
look like:
Now when any user makes a call for client X or to client X, he should dial the account code for client X once he is in
speech with client X. This is explained in steps given below:
Where,
Account Code is from 001 to 999.
Enter Account Name as explain in steps given below:
Account Name is of maximum 12 characters, terminate with #*.
If the caller has dialed a wrong account code, he can repeat the procedure to correct it. The system overwrites the
last account code.
Client Name Client A/c Code
ABC Co. Ltd.
XYZ Co. Ltd.
:
001
122
:
02 Dial the outside Number. Speech with called party.
03 Dial Flash. Called party gets on hold. Caller gets feature tone.
04 Dial 1058-Account Code. Speech with called party.
02 Dial the outside Number. Speech with called party.
03 Dial Flash. Called party gets on hold. Caller gets feature tone.
04 Dial 1059-Account Name. Speech with called party.
ETERNITY
Calling
Party
Called
Party
Set Account Code
Set Account Name
During Speech dial,
Flash-1058-A/c Code
During Speech dial,
Flash-1059-A/c Name
Client Name Client A/c Code
ABC Co. Ltd. 001
XYZ Co. Ltd. 122
TUV Pvt. Ltd. 105
: :
PSTN
Matrix
How to program?
Use the following command to program the Account Name for the Account Code:
4851-1-Account Code-Account Name
4851-2-Account Code-Account Code-Account Name
4851-*-Account Name
Where,
Account Code is from 001 to 999.
Account Name is of 12 characters. Terminate Account Name with #*.
The user can take the printout (SMDR Report) of the calls made for a particular client using this account code. The
user should use filter command to get the report.
Important Points:
Account Code shall be asked only if Forced Account Code Flag is enabled in topics Station Advanced Feature
Template and Trunk Feature Template.
In other cases Account Code need not be forced.
Account Code will not be asked while making internal call or using a feature.
Account code is asked only in case of external calls.
Account Code if enabled on both station and trunk, will be asked irrespective of dialing method viz. Global
Abbreviated dialing, Personal abbreviated dialing, LCR or selective trunk access. However, if the number is dialed
using selective trunk access and if Forced Account Code flag is enabled on the selected trunk, the system will dial
the number using Store and Forward dialing.
In case of abbreviated dialing or direct dialing, etc. if it is known at any stage that the number cannot be dialed
because the user has not dialed Account Code, an error message is displayed.
Relevant Topics:
1. Station Message Detail Recording 781
2. Station Advanced Feature Template 759
=X=X=
Matrix
Alarms
What's this?
The ETERNITY is installed at various places like Hospitals, Hotels, Motels and other Corporate and Medium scale
offices. The Alarm feature is an important feature widely used by most of the customers. Using this feature you can
ask ETERNITY to remind you at some specific time.
Refer chapter System Parameters for setting the mode of ETERNITY and refer separate manual for more details
about Hotel/Motel features.
However, for all types of reports, it is mentioned 'Hotel/Motel reports', same commands are applicable to assign
destination port and get alarm reports for other applications also. Refer separate manual for Hotel/Motel Applications
for more details on how to get reports.
Various features supported by ETERNITY are mentioned below:
Alarm setting
Voice guided alarm
Remote alarm - Personalized/Automated
Remote Voice guided alarm
Alarm Status report
Scheduled Alarm Report
Alarm/Reminder Snooze
Alarms/Reminder Notification Type
Alarm Setting
You can set following Alarm Types for the specific time:
Once Only
Daily
Set the Alarm Type as 'Once Only' when you want to use the alarm call only for one time, at the set time. The alarm
will be deleted from the ETERNITY when you acknowledge it.
Set the Alarm Type as 'Daily', when you want to use the alarm call, everyday at the set time. Doing this, you need not
to configure the 'time' daily. The alarm will be deleted from the ETERNITY only when you (Guest/Station user) cancel
it using the suitable command.
At the set time, your station starts ringing. In case you do not reply the alarm call because of any reason, the station
will ring for maximum of three attempts (if number of attempts is programmed as '3'). However after three attempts, if
you could not reply the alarm call, the ETERNITY will place the alarm call on the 'Operator station' so that the
Operator can inform the guest about the alarm call. The number of alarm attempts and interval between alarms are
programmable. This type of flexibility would be very much useful in the event, if the guest could not attend the alarm
call as he was in washroom.
Dial the digits of command before expiry of 'Inter Digit Wait Timer'. Else you will get 'error tone'. The ETERNITY
supports maximum of '960' Alarms.
Alarm settings will be retained even during power down of the ETERNITY.
Alarm settings will be retained even during system upgrades of the ETERNITY.
The alarm calls will be stored in the Hotel-Motel Activity Log. Refer separate Manual for Hotel Applications to know
how to refer the log.
Multiple Alarms: You can use the alarm setting command repeatedly to set different alarms.
Using DKP:
Using DSS Key/Menu:
To set Once Only/Daily Alarm Call:
Press the DSS key for 'Alarm'.
Enter Time in HH:MM
Select 'Once Only' or 'Daily'.
Press 'Enter' key.
You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
To cancel Alarm Calls:
Press 'Alarm' Key.
Select 'Cancel All'.
Press Enter Key.
Matrix
Using Commands:
To set Alarm call:
Pick up the handset.
Dial 161.
Enter Time in HH:MM (24-hours format)
Dial 1 for Once Only or Dial 2 for Daily.
Press 'Enter' key.
Replace Handset on the cradle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
To cancel Alarm:
Dial 161
Dial #
Using SLT:
To set Alarm Call:
Dial 161.
Dial HH:MM
Dial 1 for Once Only or Dial 2 for Daily.
Replace the Handset on the cradle.
Default = Once Only.
To cancel Alarm Calls:
Dial 161
Dial #
Replace the handset.
Where,
HH = 00-23 hours and MM= 00-59 minutes
Thus, Dial 161-HHMM-1 for setting 'Once Only' alarm, Dial 161-HHMM-2 for setting 'Daily' alarm
Example:
From SLT:
Dial 161-1630-1 to set Alarm as 'Once Only' alarm. The alarm will be cancelled after the alarm is served.
Dial 161-1630-2 to set Alarm as 'Daily' alarm. The alarm call will be place daily at 16.30 hours. It will be cancelled only if
the Operator cancels it.
Voice Guided Alarm
You can set the Alarm by following the appropriate voice prompts to set or cancel the Voice Guided Alarms. Refer chapter
Voice Message Applications for using and recording voice messages. For this feature to work, the software should
support it for the VMS card installed in the ETERNITY.
Using DKP:
Using DSS Key/Menu:
To set Voice Guided Alarm:
Press DSS Key assigned to Voice Guided Alarm call.
Follow the Voice Mail System prompts to set/cancel Voice Guided Alarm.
To set/cancel Voice Guided Alarm calls:
Dial 163
Follow Voice Mail System Prompts.
Replace Handset.
Matrix
Using Commands:
To set/cancel Voice Guided Alarm calls:
Dial 163
Replace Handset.
Thus, Dial 163-Follow VMS Prompts
Using SLT:
To set/cancel Voice Guided Alarm Call:
Pick up the handset
Dial 163
Remote Alarm-Personalized/Automated
The System Administrator can program the alarm on the station of the guest or user. This is called Remote alarm/
Wake-up alarm.
The alarm can be set for specific room number.
The time is entered as 'Hours-Minutes' as HHMM (HH = Hours and MM = Minutes).
The alarm type can be selected as 'Once only/daily' as required by the user of the station.
The alarm category can be set as 'Personal or Automated' as explained below:
Personalized Alarm: If the Alarm is set for this category, the Alarm call will be placed, on the 'Operator' station and
operator station will ring for 'Alarm/Reminder ring timer'. Now following options are possible:
If the operator does not answer the Alarm call, the call will be repeated for programmed number of Alarm/
Reminder Call Attempts at the interval of 'Alarm/Reminder attempt interval'. If still the operator does not reply the
call, the system will place the call, directly on the guest station and the guest station will ring for 'Alarm Ring
Timer'. If the guest station does not answer the call after expiry of ' Alarm/Reminder call attempts' , the system will
notify to the operator about 'No Reply' event only 'Once'. The operator station will ring for 'Alarm Ring Timer'.
If the 'Operator' station answers the Alarm call, the guest station will ring for 'Alarm Ring Timer' and when guest
answers the call, the operator can greet the guest and inform him/her about the wakeup call. But if the guest
station does not answer the call till expiry of Alarm Ring Timer, the operator station will get error tone and the
operator personnel will try for waking up the guest by sending some one to the guest room.
Automated Alarm: If the Alarm is set for this category, the Alarm call is placed on the Guest station and the guest
station will ring at the set time for Alarm/Reminder Ring timer. Now following options will be considered:
If the Snooze is 'Disable' and the guest answers the call, further call processing will be as per 'Alarm Notification
Type' programmed for the guest extension. (Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template for assigning
Alarm Notification Type). If the guest does not answer the call till 'Number of call attempts' is exhausted, the
system will notify to 'Operator' only 'Once' and the call is placed on the 'Operator' station. The Operator station will
ring for 'Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer'.
If the Snooze is 'Enable' and the guest answers the call and acknowledges the call by pressing digit '0', further call
processing will be as per 'Alarm Notification Type' programmed for the guest extension. (Refer chapter Station
Advanced Feature Template for assigning Alarm Notification Type). If the guest does not answer the call and does
not acknowledge the call by pressing digit '0', till 'Number of call attempts' is exhausted, the system will notify to
'Operator' only 'Once' and the call is placed on the 'Operator' station. The Operator station will ring for 'Alarm/
Reminder Ring Timer'. (For details of Snooze parameters, refer topic 'Alarm/Reminder Snooze' in this chapter).
Thus, the parameters Number of Alarm Attempts and Alarm Attempt Interval are applicable for both Alarm Types;
'Personalized' and 'Automated'.
After setting the alarm, the display on the user station will be as per the Mode of ETERNITY configured: Hotel Mode
or Enterprise Mode. Refer chapter System Parameters to select the 'Mode'.
The DSS key with LED, can also be assigned to this feature. On pressing the DSS key, LED will be turned 'ON' and
on pressing again it will be turned 'OFF'. Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for assigning the
DSS key.
The ETERNITY supports maximum of 960 remote alarms.
Notes:
The alarm feature with the Personal Alarm category will work even if the DND is set on the station.
The alarm feature with the Personal Alarm category will work even if the Call Forward is set on the station.
Matrix
Using DKP:
Using DSS key/Menu:
To set Remote Alarm:
Press the 'Remote Alarm' key.
Enter the Room Number.
Enter Time in HH:MM
Select 'Once Only' or 'Daily'.
Press 'Enter' key.
Select 'Personalized' or 'Automated'.
Press 'Enter' key to set Remote Alarm'
You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the room number for which the alarm is set.
To cancel Remote Alarm:
Press 'Remote Alarm' Key.
Enter Room Number.
Press Enter Key.
Using Commands:
To set Remote Alarm for the guest:
Dial 1072-003.
Enter the Room Number Number.
Enter Time in HH:MM
Dial 1 for Once Only or Dial 2 for Daily
Dial 1 for Personalized or Dial 2 for Automated.
Press 'Enter' key to set Remote Alarm.
You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the room number for which the remote alarm is set.
For example,
To set 'Daily' alarm at 16.30 hours as Automated alarm on Station '3103', SA will dial:
1072-003-3103-1630-2-2
To cancel Remote Alarm:
Dial 1072-003
Enter the Room Number.
Dial #
You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the room number for which the remote alarm is canceled.
Thus,
Dial 1072-003-Room No.-# (To cancel the Remote Alarm)
Using SLT:
Same as mentioned in above topic 'Using Commands'.
Note for Display of Remote alarm:
After setting suitable alarm type and alarm category, the DKP gives Confirmation tone. The display includes, '*' if 'Daily'
option is selected and includes '+' if 'Personalized' option is selected. If options 'Once Only' or 'Automated' is selected, '*'
or '+' will not be displayed. For example, display on EON42/48 for ETERNITY, will be as:
Alarm Set XXXX HH:MM (if 'Once Only' and 'Automated' type Remote Alarm is set on the station XXXX).
Alarm* Set XXXX HH:MM (if 'Daily' type Remote Alarm is set on the station XXXX).
Alarm+ Set XXXX HH:MM (if 'Personalized' category for Remote Alarm is set on the station XXXX).
Alarm*+ Set XXXX HH:MM (if Personalized and Daily type for Remote Alarm is set on the station XXXX).
Thus,
Dial 1072-003-Room No.-HHMM-1-1 (for Once Only and Personalized)
Dial 1072-003-Room No.-HHMM-1-2 (for Once Only and Automated)
Dial 1072-003-Room No.-HHMM-2-1 (for Daily and Personalized)
Dial 1072-003-Room No.-HHMM-2-2 (for Daily and Automated)
Matrix
How to program?
Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer: This is a time for which the station (extension or operator) will get alarm/reminder ring
when alarm/reminder call is placed on the station.
Use following command to program the Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer:
2201-Seconds
Where,
Seconds = 001-255 seconds.
Default = 045 seconds.
Number of Alarm Attempts: This parameter signifies the number of times the Alarm call will be placed on the station
before notifying the operator. SE should program this parameter if default value need to be changed.
Use following command to program the Number of Alarm Attempts:
2202-Number of Alarm Attempts
Where,
Number of Alarm attempts = 1 to 9.
Default = 3.
Alarm Attempt Interval: This parameter signifies the time between subsequent Alarm attempts. SE should program this
parameter if default value need to be changed.
Use following command to program the Alarm Attempt Interval:
2203- Alarm Attempt Interval
Where,
Alarm Attempt Interval = 1 to 9.
Default = 5 Minutes.
Note:
'Number of Alarm Attempts' and 'Alarm Attempt Interval' will also be applicable when Alarm category is programmed
as 'Personalized'.
Remote Voice Guided Alarm:
System Administrator (SA) can set/cancel the Remote Voice Guided Alarm on the User station by following the
appropriate voice prompts. This is called 'Remote voice guided alarm'. Refer chapter Voice Message Applications for
prompts.
on pressing again it will be turned 'OFF'. Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for assigning the
DSS key.
How to use it?
Using DSSkey/Menu:
To set/cancel Remote Voice Guided Alarm:
Press DSS Key assigned to Remote Voice Guided Alarm.
Follow the Voice Mail System prompts to set/cancel alarm.
Using Commands:
To set/cancel Remote Voice Guided Alarm:
Dial 1072-034
Replace Handset.
Thus,
Dial 1072-034-Follow VMS Prompts.
Using SLT:
Matrix
Alarm Status Report
The SA can get the report of alarms set on the stations by issuing SA command from DKP/SLT..
The DSS key (without LED) assigned for this feature can also be used to get the alarm status report. Refer chapter
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for assigning the LED.
For getting the report SE will be required to assign destination port to the Report.
How to use it?
SE should assign destination port for the 'Hotel/Motel Report' using the command:
Use following command to assign destination port for the 'Hotel/Motel Report':
3701-Flag
Where,
Default = None.
SA Commands for Alarm status report:
Using DKP:
Pick up the handset
Dial 1072-913
SA will get display about printing event of Alarm Status Report. Refer Notes below
Notes:
The * is printed if Daily Alarm is set and + is printed if Personal Alarm is set for the station/room.
For multiple alarms, the report will be printed in increasing order of room number with increasing order of time.
Refer the report at the end of chapter.

Using SLT:
When the SA issues the SA command for this feature from SLT, Alarm Status Report will be printed on the destination
port assigned.
Scheduled Alarm Report
The SA can get the alarm report at a fixed programmed time everyday. This feature is called Scheduled Alarm Report.
This feature is frequently used for where the alarm report will be printed regularly even if the administrator or
receptionist is busy with other assignments at the time of report.
The SA can enable this feature using SA command from DKP and program the scheduled time for the report. SE
should first assign the port for Hotel Reports using the command.
On enabling this feature, the ETERNITY will print Alarm Report on the destination port assigned for Hotel Reports.
SA can also use the DSS key assigned by SE, to enable the report and to program the scheduled time. Refer chapter
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for more details. (Feature number = 118 and 119).
How to use it?
SE should assign destination port for the 'Hotel/Motel Report' using the command:
Use following command to assign destination port for the 'Hotel/Motel Report':
3701-Flag
Where,
Default = None
SA Commands for Scheduled Alarm Report:
Flag Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer
Flag Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer
Matrix
Enable/Disable scheduled alarm report
If SA has enabled this parameter, the system will print Alarm Report on the destination port assigned for Hotel Reports at
the scheduled time.
Using DSS key/Menu:
To Enable/Disable scheduled Alarm report:
Pick up the hand set.
Dial DSS key for 'scheduled Alarm report'
Select the option 'Enable/Disable'
Press Enter key
Scheduled Alarm report feature will be 'ON' or 'OFF'
Using Commands:
To Enable/Disable scheduled Alarm report:
Dial 1072-036
On getting feature tone, Dial '1' to 'Enable' or '0' to 'Disable'
Press Enter key
Scheduled Alarm report feature will be 'ON' or 'OFF'
User can get or not get the Alarm report at scheduled time on destination port.
Using SLT:
To enable Scheduled Alarm Report using SLT:
Go OFF-Hook.
Dial 1072-036.
On getting feature tone Dial '1'.
User can get the Alarm report at scheduled time on destination port.
To disable Scheduled Alarm Report using SLT:
Go OFF-Hook.
Dial 1072-038.
User can not get the Alarm report.
Thus,
Dial 1072-036-1 (To enable the Scheduled Alarm Report)
Dial 1072-036-0 (To disable the Scheduled Alarm Report)
Default = Disable.
Scheduled Time for Alarm Report
SA should enable the Scheduled Alarm report to use this feature. This parameter signifies the time at which the
ETERNITY will print Alarm Report daily.
Using DSS key/Menu:
To program Time for scheduled Alarm report:
Pick the handset.
Press DSS key for scheduled time for Alarm report
Enter the scheduled time in HHMM.
Replace handset. Scheduled Time will be programmed for Alarm Report.
Using Commands:
Pick the handset.
Dial 1072-037 for scheduled time for Alarm report
Enter the scheduled time in HHMM (from 00:00 to 23:59 hours, default = 00:00).
Scheduled Time will be programmed for Alarm Report.
Replace handset. Scheduled Time will be programmed for Alarm Report.
Using SLT:
Thus,
Matrix
Dial 1072-037-Scheduled time for Alarm report
Where,
Scheduled time for Alarm report = 00:00 to 23:59 Hours.
Default =00:00
Snooze Alarm/Reminder is an Alarm/Reminder that is repeated many times. The ETERNITY supports this feature
which is very much useful for Hotel/Motels, Hospitals and Offices.
SE should enable/disable the Snooze Alarm/Reminder for the system. The feature cannot be set individually for each
station. Thus if SE has enabled the Snooze, the Alarm/Reminder call will be placed as Snooze Alarm/Reminder on
the station.
If Snooze Alarm/Reminder is enabled, the system gives Alarm/Reminder ring to the station as many times as the
'Number of Alarm Attempts' programmed.
The time interval between two Alarm/Reminder calls of the snooze, called 'Alarm Attempt Interval' is programmable.
A station gets Alarm/Reminder ring for 'Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer' which is programmable. If a station user does not
answer the Alarm/Reminder ring even after the 'Number of Alarm Attempts' is reduced to zero, the system gives ring
to the operator station. The operator station rings for 'Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer'.
Acknowledging Snooze Alarm/Reminder
If snooze Alarm/Reminder is enabled, the station user should acknowledge the Alarm/Reminder call by going OFF-
Hook and following message on LCD display of the DKP for pressing '0'. If the Snooze Alarm/Reminder call is not
acknowledged, the Alarm/Reminder call will be placed on the same station as many times as the 'Number of Alarm
Attempts', programmed. If the station does not acknowledge Alarm/Reminder call till expiry of 'Number of Alarm
Attempts', the Alarm/Reminder call will be placed on operator's group assigned to the station.
Note for SE/Installing person:
It is recommended to SE that, while installing the ETERNITY, refer chapter Voice Message Applications to include the
phrase "Please press 0 to acknowledge the Alarm/Reminder' as voice prompt. This is used to acknowledge the
Alarm/Reminder call, placed on the station as a Snooze Alarm/Reminder.
How to program?
SE should configure following parameters for Snooze Alarm/Reminder calls:
Enable/disable Snooze Alarm/Reminder:
Use the following command to enable/disable the Snooze Alarm/Reminder:
2204-Code
Where,
By default, Snooze Alarm/Reminder is disabled.
Snooze Attempts:
The command for parameter 'Number of Alarm Attempts - 2202' programmed is also applicable for number of Snooze
attempts.
Snooze attempt interval;
The command for parameter 'Alarm Attempt Interval - 2203' is also applicable for Snooze attempt interval.
Alarm/Reminder Notification Type:
When the user answers the Alarm/Reminder ring, he gets Music on Hold or Voice messages or External Music (AOP).
Alarm/Reminder call can also be placed on the Department Group.
Alarm/Reminder Response depends upon the programming of 'Alarm/Reminder Notification Type' in Station Advance
Feature Template. Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template for more details.
By placing the call on the department group (stations), the user (guest) can be greeted differently. One guest can be
played back greetings followed by date and time, the other can be played back greetings, date and time, humidity,
temperature, etc. Thus each station can be assigned different routing group as per the requirement. This is
programmed as 'Alarm/Reminder Notification Routing Group' in Station Advanced Feature Template. If all the stations
of the Routing Group are busy then MoH is played, provided Alarm/Reminder call is not routable due to any other
reason e.g. Group empty etc. (MoH can be internal music or through AOP).
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
SE can program the routing group number (01-33) in the Alarm/Reminder Notification Routing Group.
While the Alarm/Reminder is served, if the station is 'Busy' or is in 'Standby' mode, the Alarm Reminder call will be
placed as per the flag set for the command for "Alarm/Reminder notification to Operator when Station is stand-by" in
chapter System Parameters as mentioned below:
If this flag is enabled, the call will be placed on operator.
If the flag is disabled, the call will be placed on the station after the station goes in idle state after waiting for
'XXXX' to be 'Idle'.
When the call is placed on 'Operator' the Alarm/Reminder call will be logged in the Hotel-Motel Activity Log. Refer
separate Manual for Hotel Applications to know how to refer the log.
Important Points:
As a summary, while using the Alarm and Snooze features, take care of following points:
Snooze is applicable only for automated alarm calls. For personalized reminder calls, snooze will not apply even if
enabled.
Alarm Notification Type is applicable only for Automated Alarm and Automated Reminder calls. (Alarm Notification
type determines further call routing once call is answered by the station user. It is assigned to station via station
advance feature template)
Number of alarm attempt and Alarm Attempt Interval are applicable for automated alarms and personalized alarm.
When all the Alarm attempts are exhausted, the system will notify to the Operator, of non-acknowledgement of Alarm
call
The Alarm calls will be printed in the 'Hotel-Motel Activity Logs'.
Refer chapter System Parameters for command to set Hotel Mode or Enterprise Mode of ETERNITY.
Please refer separate manual for more details about Hotel Applications.
Relevant Topics:
1. Voice Message Applications 911
3. Real Time Clock (RTC) 701
4. Reminder 709
5. System Parameters 843

Wakeup/Alarm Report AS ON 02-03-2009(Mon) AT 11:40
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Room# Phone# Wakeup D P Room# Phone# Wakeup D P
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3991 3001 06:00 + 3991 3002 06:30
3992 3003 06:10 * + 3992 3004 06:05 *
3993 3006 07:00 3994 3007 10:00 *
3994 3008 09:00 + 3995 3009 09:10
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* indicates Daily Alarm and + indicates Personal Alarm Page : 1
---End of Report---
=X=X=
Matrix
Alternate Number Dialing
Whats this?
The ETERNITY tries alternate numbers if the dialed number is busy.
We need not keep dialing the alternate numbers. Instead we simply need to Redial the number or set Auto-redial for
the number. Doing so, the system tries alternate numbers. If Auto-Redial is requested, the system gives you the ring
when the number goes through.
How to use it?
The Station user simply has to Redial or Auto-Redial the last number. The system automatically tries Alternate numbers.
How it works?
Global Directory is used to accomplish this feature.
An Alternate group number should be assigned to a number in the Global Directory.
An Alternate group number can be from 000 to 255.
Suppose two numbers programmed at index 100 and 101 are to be used as Alternate numbers then both the
numbers should be programmed as one group.
Doing so, when a station user dials an external number, the system checks for it in the global directory. If the number
is busy and if the user tries Redial then the system automatically opts for Alternate Number dialing. It tries next
number available in the Alternate group. If this number is also busy, it tries next number in the group. All the numbers
are tried in this way. This continues as long as the user tries redial.
If the user tries Auto-Redial, the system tries for all the numbers in the group one by one. If any of the number is
through, it gives the ring to the caller. If all the numbers are busy in the group then the system sets Auto-Redial for
the last number dialed and waits for RBT from the called end. It informs the caller when the call is through by giving a
ring.
For example, ABC Ltd. has four telephone numbers viz. 2640459, 2631235, 2635589 and 2565590 and all are to be
used as Alternate Numbers then these four numbers should be programmed in the global directory from index 110 to 113.
All these numbers should be assigned one Alternate group say 001. Doing so, all these numbers act as an Alternate
Numbers for each other. Whenever a user dials any of these numbers and tries Redial or Auto-Redial, Alternate Number
dialing logic gets activated i.e. when a user dials 2640459 and if it is busy and if the user tries redial then the system
automatically dials 2631235. This is repeated every time a redial is tried.
If no alternate number is available for a main number in the global directory then the system redials the last dialed
number while trying redial feature or Auto Redial feature.
How to program?
Step 1
List down the Numbers to be programmed in an Alternate group on a piece of paper.
ETERNITY
(Busy)
(B
u
s
y
) Calling Party
2630555
2630556
2630557
Matrix
Step 2
Use following command to assign Alternate group number to a location code:
1804-1-Location Code-Alternate Group Number
1804-2-Location Code-Location Code-Alternate Group Number
1804-*-Alternate Group Number
Where,
Alternate Group Number is from 000 to 255.
The Global Directory after assigning Alternate Group Number looks as shown below:
By default, Alternate Number Group is 000.
For OGTBG refer chapter OG Trunk Bundle Group.
Use the following command to clear the alternate number group of a location code:
1804-1-Location Code-000
1804-2-Location Code-Location Code-000
1804-*-000
Where,
Location code is from 100 to 999.
Example:
Program the system for following constraints:
ABC Ltd. has five telephone numbers viz. 2640075, 2640076, 2640077, 2635151 and 2635173.
XYZ Ltd. has three telephone numbers viz. 2788856, 2788896, 2788857.
For ABC Ltd. Make a table as shown below:
(If the global directory is not programmed then please program the global directory as explained in the topic
Abbreviated Dialing).
Use following command to program Alternate Group number:
1804-1-100-001
1804-1-101-001
1804-1-102-001
1804-1-103-001
1804-1-104-001
1804-1-105-005
1804-1-106-005
1804-1-107-005
Important Points:
Alternate Numbers are used during Redial and Auto-redial. Hence all the timers related to these features should be
programmed properly.
Location Code Number OGTBG Alternate Number Group
100 022281110001 01 002
101 011234567890 03 002
102 022281110002 00 002
: : : :
999 033298765432 04 001
Location Code Number OGTBG Alternate Number Group
100 2640075 01 001
101 2640076 01 001
102 2640071 01 001
103 2635151 01 001
104 2635173 01 001
105 2788856 01 005
106 2788896 01 005
107 2788857 01 005
Matrix
If Auto-Redial is set for a number having Alternate numbers, the system tries all the Alternate numbers first and then
sets the Auto-Redial for the last number dialed.
One number can have one or more than one Alternate number.
Alternate number works even when abbreviated dialing is used. Suppose user dials 8100 and if the dialed out number
is busy then on trying Redial system tries alternate number group related to number at index 100.
Alternate number is allowed to all the stations.
Stations not having access to Global Directory can also use Alternate Number Dialing.
Relevant Topics:
1. Abbreviated Dialing 221
2. Last Number Redial 601
3. Auto Redial 262
=X=X=
Matrix
Answer Signaling on SLT
Whats this?
As general application, telecom equipment like PCO machine is connected to the SLT port of the system. Now
whenever the called party (remote party) answers i.e. goes OFF-Hook, it is required to inform the SLT port so that the
PCO machine can consider the call as matured and start billing. In absence of this signal, the call is never considered
as matured and hence no billing will be generated.
To avoid such problems the system supports Answer Signalling. It is a signal which will be generated on SLT port,
which indicates that the called party has answered and the call is matured. This helps in accurate billing, avoids
billing of unanswered and unsuccessful call attempts.
During an OG call from SLT to any other port for e.g. TWT/Mobile/SIP/T1E1PRI/BRI whenever called party answers,
they provide an answer signal which can be generated on the SLT port to support any Billing equipment or PCO
machine or PBX, if connected to the SLT port for considering the call to be matured.
It is generated in the form of:
None
Polarity Reversal or Battery Reversal
How it works?
It is applicable only for OG calls made by SLT.
When call is made from SLT port to any other port, system will wait for the call to get matured.
When the call gets matured, the system will check the Answer Signal programmed in the SLT Hardware Template
assigned to the SLT, from where call has been made. The options are as explained below:
None: If this option is set, the system will not generate any answer signaling on the SLT port.
Battery Reversal: The Battery polarity of the SLT port will get reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the
SLT port is +ve for TIP and -ve for RING in speech condition then after call maturity, TIP will become -ve and Ring
+ve.
How to program?
Refer chapter SLT Hardware Template to program type of answer signaling on the SLT port.
Relevant Topics:
1. Disconnect Signaling on SLT 469
2. SLT Hardware Template 746
=X=X=
Matrix
Answer Supervision on TWT
Whats this?
As a general application the telecom equipment like PCO machine will be connected to the SLT port of the system.
Now whenever the called party (remote party) goes OFF-Hook, the caller should know about this, so that the PCO
machine can consider the call as matured and start billing. In absence of this signal, the call will never be considered
as matured and this will result in no billing.
To solve such problems, the system supports Answer Supervision on TWT ports. This helps in considering calls to
be matured, accurate billing, and avoids billing of unanswered and unsuccessful call attempts.
It can be programmed from following options:
None
Polarity Reversal
12/16 KHz Pulse
How it works?
It is a signal which is provided from CO to the calling party, which indicates that the called party has answered and
the call is matured.
This signal is for each TWT port when it is a destination port of the system. It is applicable only for OG calls.
It is in form of None, 12/16KHz or Battery Reversal as explained below. By default, Answer Supervision is set to
None for each TWT port.
None: It is used when no signalling is available from the CO. If this option is selected, the call will be considered
as matured on expiry of Forced Maturity Timer which is fixed 20 seconds irrespective of whether the call actually
gets matured or not. After this, call duration timer is started. Finally system will start detecting Disconnect
Supervision signal programmed for that port.
Polarity Reversal: It is used as maturity signal when answer supervision is signaled in the form of Polarity
Reversal. For example, if the battery polarity of the line is -ve for TIP and +ve for RING then after answering the
call, by the called party, CO network will reverse the battery polarity i.e. TIP becomes +ve and Ring ve. After this,
call duration timer is started. Finally system will start detecting disconnect Supervision signal programmed for that
port.
12 KHz/16 KHz: It is used when answer supervision is signalled in the form of 12/16 KHz metering pulse. When
called party answers the call, CO network generates a 12/16 KHz pulse. Finally system will start detecting
Disconnect Supervision signal programmed for that port.
How to program?
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template to program type of Answer Supervision and Pseudo Maturity Timer.
Important Points:
It is advisable to set the same Answer Supervision signal as provided by the CO for the TWT port because:
If CO supports no answer supervision signal and if Reversal or 12/16 KHz is selected in the system, the call will
never get matured and thus will not be stored in the SMDR buffer.
If CO supports Polarity Reversal as answer supervision signal and if 12/16KHz is selected in the system or vice-
versa, the call will never get matured and thus will not be stored in the SMDR buffer.
If no Answer supervision signal is supported than only program answer supervision signal as None.
Please note that:
If None option is selected, measured call duration will not match exactly with the actual duration because
maturity timer has no relation with the actual maturity.
If Pseudo Maturity Timer is less, the call which is not answered will also be considered as matured.
If Pseudo Maturity Timer is more, the short matured call will not be considered as matured call.
SE should take care following condition while programming:
It is advisable to set the same Answer Supervision signal as provided by the CO network for the TWT port. This is
explained with following case.
Suppose CO network supports Polarity Reversal signal as Answer and Disconnect supervision.
Answer supervision signal is set as None in the system and Disconnect supervision for the same port is set as
Polarity Reversal in the system.
Thus, when call is made through this TWT port, call will get matured after Pseudo Maturity Timer.
The system will start detecting Disconnect supervision signal programmed for that port.
Now when called party answers the call, CO generates answer supervision signal Polarity Reversal on the port.
As disconnect supervision signal is programmed as Polarity reversal, system would detect this answer supervision
signal as disconnect supervision signal and the call will be disconnected.
Thus, SE will take care while programming Answer Supervision signal which should be same as supported by CO.
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
1. Disconnect Information on TWT 467
2. TWT Hardware Template 889
=X=X=
Matrix
Auto Answer
What is this?
The calls are answered automatically by the station going OFF-Hook; after a set time. This feature is called Auto
Answer.
This feature is very useful for Operators. Since the calls are answered automatically, the Operator is not required to
pick up the handset or press speaker key again and again to answer the calls. If a headset is used, this feature
becomes extremely helpful, because incoming speech audio can be heard directly.
The operator gets a beep (of 1 sec.) indicating him the arrival of the call. After this the call is answered automatically.
How to use it?
User select On/Off Auto Answer from Menu of DKP.
User can also set Auto Answer Time from Menu of the DKP.
Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Operation for more details.
Important Points:
This feature is applicable only for DKP users.
The timer starts from the moment the DKP is in idle condition. If the DKP is already in speech when a new call arrives,
the Auto Answer timer will not start.
It is recommended to have an Auto Answer timer of atleast 2 seconds.
=X=X=
No need to pickup the
receiver just start talking
Matrix
Auto Call Back (ACB)
User would like that if the called user is not replying or busy, then the system should put his call in queue and should
call when the called user becomes free. This is called Auto Call Back (ACB).
The ETERNITY offers two types of Auto Call Back viz. Auto Call Back-on Busy, Auto Call Back-on No Reply.
Auto Call Back-On Busy/On No-Reply
Whats this?
You need not keep dialing the station number if it is busy or if is not replying. You can set ACB by dialing '2' when you
get a station as busy or not replying. If it is DKP, you will get LED of DSS key for ACB, as turned ON.
Once you have set ACB, you can cancel it by dialing '102' after getting dial tone.
When both stations get free, you (who had requested ACB) will get ring first and will ring for the ACB Ring Timer. If
you go off-hook (accept the ACB call), the other station (destination station) on which ACB was set, will ring for the
ACB Ring Timer if it is free. If the destination is trunk port, the originating station will be connected with trunk and thus
the ACB will be served.
This ACB request you have made will be applicable for the 60 minutes (service duration) only. If the request (made
from originating station) doesn't get served within 60 minutes it will be cancelled automatically and the DSS Key LED
of the ACB key will be turned OFF if it is DKP.
Different users can request the ACB. The ETERNITY supports a list of maximum 300 requests with database of
originating station access codes, destination station/trunk and service duration.
Each station can set only one ACB at a time. If one request is pending for the station, the other request made by
station will overwrite the first request.
Each entry will get deleted when the ACB is successfully served or the timer gets expired.
How to use it?
If you dont answer the Auto Call Back ring, it stops after 30 seconds and Auto Call Back request gets cleared. This is
called Auto Call Back Ring Timer and is programmable.
Cancel Auto Call Back-On Busy
Example:
Station 317 is busy. To enable Auto Call Back, dial 2. If you want to cancel Auto Call Back, dial 102 to cancel it.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Auto Call Back-On No Reply to a user.
Timer of Relevance:
Auto Call Back Ring Timer-Time after which the Auto Call Back ring on the station stops.
Command: 3801-Seconds
Default: 030 seconds.
Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.
Relevant Topics:
2. QSIG 687
=X=X=
2 Dial Number. Busy tone
3 Dial 2. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Auto Redial
Whats this?
You need not keep trying busy external number repeatedly. You can ask the ETERNITY to keep trying the number.
You will get ring when the remote party number becomes free. This is called 'Auto Redial' feature.
On applying access code for auto redial, the ETERNITY keeps dialing the number you were trying to call, by grabbing
the trunk. SE should program number of trials and interval between redialing if default values needed to change.
How it works?
Two types of auto redial are possible: Auto Redial Normal and Auto Redial Priority.
Generally the system should be programmed in such a manner that in Normal type the number of trials made by the
system (count) is less and the time gap between two trials (timer) is more.
Whereas, in Priority type the number of trials (count) is more and the time gap between two trials (timer) is less.
Multiple numbers can be requested for Auto Redial at a time from one station.
More than one station can attempt auto redial simultaneously.
If the system detects busy tone it releases the trunk and redials the number automatically after some time.
If the system does not detect ring back tone for 60 seconds, it releases the trunk and tries after some time. This is
known as Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer and is programmable.
If the system detects ring back tone, it gives ring on your station. When you lift the handset, you get connected with
the desired party.
The system uses the same OG Trunk Bundle Group you used. If you dialed the number on group code 60, the system
takes one of the free trunks from group code 60 for auto redial.
If the number was dialed using selective trunk access at the first time then system will use the same trunk while
executing Auto Redial.
Auto Redial will be suspended if there is any activity (ringing/speech/dialing) on your station. It resumes as soon as
your station becomes free.
If the station is programmed for 'dynamic lock', and user makes use 'Auto Redial' feature, the system will check the
Toll control as per dynamic lock level.
CAUTION!
Auto Redial may not work properly on TWT lines.

How to use?
Example:
You want to dial a number 02652630555, but after grabbing the line TWT-001 from your DKP-3001, you get 'Busy'
tone frequently.
Hence, you disconnect the call by going on hook and ensure that 'Auto Redial' feature is allowed from COS.
Now, you dial the Access Code-17 for Redial to avoid again dialing of the TAC and the number.
Because of 'Redial' feature, the system will grab TWT-001 and out dial the number. 02652630555.
To cancel Auto Redial
2 Dial Trunk Access Code. Trunk dial tone
4
Disconnect by going on-hook, irrespective
of expiry of trunk inter digit wait timer.
7 Replace the Handset.
3 Replace the Handset.
Matrix
Example:
Dialed number 0265-630555 was busy. Auto Redial was requested. Meanwhile, the person for whom you set Auto Redial
calls you. Now you do not want to talk to him again. Dial 1070 from your station to cancel 'Auto Redial'.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Auto Redial to a user. It is possible to assign Normal or Priority
to the user.
Auto Redial Normal
Use following command to program time duration between two trials for low priority:
1704-Seconds
Note:
The time duration between two trials should be set to more than '5' seconds for Australia.
Use following command to program the number of trials for low priority:
1705-Count
Default: 005.
Valid Range: 000 to 255.
Auto Redial Priority
Use following command to program time duration between two trials for high priority:
1706-Seconds
Note:
The time duration between two trials should be set to more than '5' seconds for Australia.
Use following command to program the number of trials for high priority:
1707-Count
Default: 020.
Valid Range: 000 to 255.
Note:
The number of trials should be set to less than '15', for Australia.
Timers of Relevance:
Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer-Time for which ETERNITY waits to sense the dial tone from the PSTN.
Valid Range: 000 to 255 seconds. It is recommended to program 2 sec. minimum.
Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer-Time for which ETERNITY waits to sense RBT from the PSTN after dialing the requested
number.
Auto Redial Ring Timer-Time for which the station that has requested Auto Redial rings in case of Auto redial call.
Relevant Topics:
2. Dynamic Lock 512
=X=X=
Matrix
Whats this?
The ETERNITY allows you to run a variety of control applications by connecting relay-based devices to its Digital Output
Port (DOP). There can be 12 different modes in which the DOP can be operated. These modes and their applications are
given in the table below:
How to program?
Step 1
Use the following command to choose the mode:
5003-1-DOP-Mode
Where,
DOP is 1.
Mode is from 00 to 11 as per the table.
Mode
Switch
ON
Switch OFF Meaning Typical Applications
00 Deactivated No Action. DOP is deactivated.
01 Manual Manual The DOP will be switched ON and OFF
by issuing a command.
The gadget connected to the DOP can be
operated at any time as per the
requirement. Typical application would be
operating Office lights.
02 Manual Automatic The DOP will be switched ON by
issuing a command and switched OFF
on expiry of the timer.
Door Lock is opened manually and is
expected to be lock automatically after
some time.
03 Automatic Manual The DOP will be switched ON after
fixed time from issuing the ON
command and switched OFF manually.
A command can be issued to shut the door
lock from within the room itself before
leaving the room. Doing, so the door would
be locked when the person goes out of the
room.
04 Automatic Automatic The DOP will be switched ON after
programmed time from issuing the ON
command and switched OFF after
programmed command.
Terrace lights can be operated.
05 Manual Scheduled The DOP will be switched ON by
issuing a command and switched OFF
as per the programmed scheduled.
Glow Sign boards. These are switched
OFF irrespective of when they are switched
ON.
06 Scheduled Manual The DOP will be switched ON as per
the scheduled and switched OFF by
issuing a command.
Porch Light. These can be switched ON at
the set time and can be switched OFF
when required.
07 Scheduled Scheduled The DOP will be switched ON and OFF
as per the programmed scheduled.
School Bell. A school bell can be operated
24 times in a day.
08 Instigation Instigation The DOP will be switched ON on
receiving a signal from the DIP and
switched OFF again on receiving a
signal from DIP.
A Water Pump. A control circuit attached to
the DOP can be switched ON/OFF
depending on the sensors. The water pump
can be turned ON when the tank goes
empty and can be turned OFF when the
tank gets full.
09 Instigation Manual The DOP will be switched ON on
switched OFF by issuing a command.
A hooter is connected to the DOP can be
switched on receiving a signal from the DIP
to which a sensor like fire-alarm, smoke
sensor, etc. is connected can be switched
OFF when required.
10 Instigation Automatic The DOP will be switched ON on
switched OFF after programmed time.
An Emergency Siren in a factory. The
instigation is from DIP to which a panic
switch can be connected.
11 Instigation Acknowledge
Command
The DOP will be switched ON
occurrence of a system fault and turns
OFF on acknowledgement command.
A situation where the health of the system
needs to continuously monitored.
Matrix
By default, the mode is No action (Deactivated).
Step 2
Use the following command to program the scheduled ON time at an index for a DOP:
5004-1-DOP-Index-Scheduled ON Time
Where,
DOP is 1.Index is from 01 to 24.
Scheduled ON Time is in HH-MM-SS, 24-hour format.
By default, Scheduled ON time is 000000.
Step 3
Use the following command to program the scheduled OFF time at an index for a DOP:
5005-1-DOP-Index-Scheduled OFF Time
Where,
DOP is 1.Index is from 01 to 24.
Scheduled OFF Time is in HH-MM-SS, 24-hour format.
By default, Scheduled OFF time is 000000.
Note:
Scheduled OFF time should be greater than scheduled ON time. Also the system makes each entry in ascending
order of time i.e. morning time should be programmed before evening time.
Step 4
Use the following command to program the Turn DOP ON Response Timer for a DOP:
5006-1-DOP-Turn DOP ON Response Timer
Where,
DOP is 1.
Turn DOP On Response Timer is in seconds from 000 to 255.
By default, Turn DOP ON Response Timer is 005 seconds.
This is the time after which the DOP turns ON automatically on issuing the ON command.
Step 5
Set the following command to program the Turn DOP OFF Duration Timer for a DOP:
5007-1-DOP-Turn DOP OFF Response Timer
Where,
DOP is 1.
Turn DOP OFF Response Timer is in seconds from 000 to 255.
By default, Turn DOP OFF Response Timer is 010 seconds.
This is the time after which the DOP turns OFF automatically on issuing the OFF command.
Step 6
Use the following command to associate a DIP port with the DOP port:
5008-1-DOP-DIP
Where,
DOP is 1.
DIP is 1.
This is applicable only when the mode of operation of the DOP (ON/OFF) is by instigation of the DIP. (i.e. If DOP mode is
selected from 08-11).
By default, no DIP port is associated.
From SA mode
Use the following command to Switch OFF DOP manually:
1072-019-DOP
Where,
DOP is 1.
Use the following command to Switch ON DOP manually:
1072-020-DOP
Where,
DOP is 1.
Matrix
Types of Automated control applications you can run with ETERNITY
Important Points:
DOP can be operated remotely (manual mode) using DISA.
When the DOP is programmed to be switched ON/OFF by the instigation from the DIP, the trigger time (the time taken
for the DOP to react to the instigation) of the DOP is the same as the event sense timer of the DIP.
Please refer to Digital Input Port (DIP) for more details.
For simulating instigation, DIP signal wires can be shorted for a short time.
Relevant Topics:
2. Digital Input Port (DIP) 418
=X=X=
Automated
Control
Application
Manual
Manual
Mode
Manual
Automatic
Mode
Automatic
Manual
Mode
Automatic
Automatic
Mode
Manual
Scheduled
Mode
Scheduled
Manual
Mode
Scheduled
Scheduled
Mode
Instigation
Instigation
Mode
Instigation
Manual
Mode
Inst igation
Aut omatic
Mode
Operating Office
Lights
Door Lock
Application
Automatic
Door Lock
Terrace
Light
Glow Si gn
Board
Poarch
Light
School
Bell
Water
Pump
Fire Alarm,
Smoke
Sensor
An Emergency
Siren
Terminal
Matrix
Automatic Number Translation
Whats this?
User can dial a specific number digit which in turn is translated to the destination number dialed by the system. This
feature is called Automatic Number Translation (ANT).
ETERNITY supports ANT. It makes use of two types of Number Strings for programming the ANT Table, as
mentioned below:
Dialed Number strings are programmed for the Numbers, which the user has to dial.
Substitute Number strings are programmed for the Numbers, which are to be dialed out by the system for the
number of corresponding index of dialed number string.
After programming the ANT Table, ANT feature is enabled and the specific 'ANT Table' is assigned to the specific
trunk port. Refer chapter OG Trunk Bundle for more details.
Applications:
This feature can be used for translating land line number to compatible mobile number, to dial from mobile port.
The 'ANT' feature can also be used for the application as Phone Book and multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter Multi-
Stage Dialing for more details of the application.
How it works?
You can program 8 ANT Tables. Each table can be programmed with maximum of 32 number strings.
If the number string at Index-X is dialed by the user, the system will dial out the substitute number string which is
programmed in Index-X.
To use ANT feature, it should be enabled for the trunk, by selecting code value in OG Trunk Bundle table and the
specific ANT Table number is to be assigned to the same trunk port.
For example,
As shown in table (ANT Table-1), 95 is programmed as Dialed number string and 91 is programmed as Substitute
number string for same Index-01 of ANT Table-1. The ANT Table-1 is assigned to the Mobile trunk port MOB-01.
Now, if you dial '952652630555', the system will replace '95' by '91' and dial out the number '912652630555' from the
Mobile port.
ANT Table-1:
How to program?
Step 1
Dialed Number string
Use following command to program Dialed Number String for the Index of the ANT Table:
4751-1-ANT Table No.-Index-Dialed Number String-#*
Where,
ANT Table No. = 1 to 8.
Index = 01 to 32
Dialed Number String is maximum of 16 digits using (0 - 9), # , *, A, B, C, D, F., P, + , W and dot ('.'). Use following table
to program special digits:
Index Dialed Number String Substitute Number String
01 95 91
02
03
04
05
06
:
32
Special Digits Code for Programming through Command
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
Matrix
Step 2
Substitute Number string
Use following command to program Substitute Number String for the Index of the ANT Table:
4752-1-ANT Table No.-Index-Substitute Number String-#*
Where,
ANT Table No. = 1 to 8.
Index = 01 to 32.
Substitute Number String is maximum of 40 digits using (0 - 9), # , *, A, B, C, D, F., P, + , W and dot ('.'). Use following
table to program special digits:
Note for programming Number String for Multi-Stage dialing feature:
It is recommended to SE, to not to program Pause character "P" before "W" character for the number string to be out
dialed from Mobile port. Else, the GSM Module may get restart while out dialing the DTMF digits without call maturity
signal. Refer chapter Multi-Stage Dialing for more details.
Step 3
Default ANT Table
Use following command to default the ANT Table
4750-1-ANT Table No.
Where,
ANT Table No. = 1 to 8
By default, all Index are Blank in the ANT Table.
Important Point:
For programming '.' use '#9' when SLT or DKP is used. But for dialing a number with '.' use '*'.
Relevant Topics:
1. OG Trunk Bundle 651
2. Multi-Stage Dialing 635
=X=X=
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
. (dot) #9
# ##
* **
W *1
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
. (dot) #9
# ##
* **
W *1
Matrix
Background Music (BGM)
Whats this?
The SLT/DKP station users can listen to sweet background music when the station is idle.
The stations having access of BGM (In COS Group assigned to it) can only use this feature.
BGM on DKP
How to use it?
To deactivate Back Ground Music
How it works?
The volume of back ground music can be controlled using the Volume key of the DKP.
Internal Music or External Music to be played, can be selected.
When an incoming call comes on the station the background music automatically stops and the DKP rings.
While making an outgoing call, when the user presses speaker key or goes OFF-Hook the background music stops
and the user gets system dial tone.
When any activity is done on the DKP the Back Ground Music stops. When the station user goes ON-Hook, the Back
Ground Music starts again.
BGM on SLT
How to use it?
SLT user wants to listen BGM.
How it works?
SLT user gets a Call (IC, Internal, Alarm, ACB, etc.)
When the SLT user is listening to BGM, if he receives a call then he will get Ring Back Tone (RBT).
Now if user goes ON-Hook, he will get a ring for incoming call.
If he goes OFF-Hook, speech is established.
2 Go Idle. Background Music Starts.
Action Response
Station user presses speaker key (interpreted as OFF-Hook). Dial tone
Station user dials 1099 (Start BGM Code). Confirmation tone
Go Idle. Station user presses speaker key again (Interpreted as
OFF-Hook).
Dial tone. After expiry of First Digit Wait
Timer, Start BGM.
Station user again presses speaker key (interpreted as ON-Hook). BGM Stop.
Station user presses speaker key (interpreted as OFF-Hook). Dial tone
Station user dials 1099 (Stop BGM Code). Confirmation tone
Soft Music
Matrix
Once the call is over he can go ON-Hook. This is a normal condition and all the IC calls will be treated as usual.
Now if the SLT user goes OFF-Hook the BGM starts again. He can cancel BGM by dialing 1099.
BGM on SLT, starts after dial tone time is expired.
SLT user wants to make Call (OG or Internal) or wants to use a feature.
If SLT user can dial the feature access code/station number/external number during dial tone, before BGM starts, the
system responds normally to the dialed codes.
How to program?
Refer Music on Hold (MOH) for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Music on Hold (MOH) 639
2. External Music 537
=X=X=
Matrix
Backup-SMDR
Whats this?
In ETERNITY there is an embedded FTP server which can be used for Backup of SMDR call records.
There are two ways to backup-SMDR call records through FTP:
Basic Configuration.
Advanced Configuration.
How to use it?
Basic Configuration:
Click on Start Programs Internet Explorer. Enter the IP address in Address bar. Let us say IP address
192.168.1.103 is entered at Address bar on opening page of Microsoft Internet Explorer.
You will get three options for log-in:
Log in as SE
Log in as SA
Log in as Front Desk User
ETERNITY Jeeves displays Welcome page.
Click on option to 'Log in as SE', if you are a System Engineer. Feature Menu is displayed on the left side of
Welcome page.
Click on 'Upload/Download Call Records-SMDR Files'. No need to enter User Password for this process.
Matrix
User gets 'Login As' Window on screen. Enter the user name (se) and Password (1234) in 'User Name' and
'Password' filed. Click on 'Login' button.
On successfully login following display appears on the screen.
Matrix
Select all files and right click of using mouse button. Click on 'Copy to Folder' option.
Select a path where you want to keep backup files on your system. Click OK button.
SMDR Backup are on progress as per your path selection.

Matrix
Advanced Configuration:
Click on Start Programs Run. In the Run Window enter ftp and Click on OK button.
After clicking the OK button user gets following Window on the screen.
User can make changes in the system as per his requirement from remote location. After changes are over, enter
'bye' to log out from the system from remote location.
Matrix
Note:
Uploading a SMDR files in the system. First remove current file present in the system. Then copy the new file from
computer (backup source) to system.
Important Point:
The ETERNITY will store the Call Records (SMDR) in the text format so that the file can be readable when
downloaded using Jeeves.
Relevant Topic:
1. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) 538
=X=X=
Matrix
Backup-System Configuration
Whats this?
In ETERNITY there is an embedded FTP server which can be used for Backup of System Configuration files.
There are two ways to backup-system configuration through FTP:
How to use it?
Click on Start Programs Internet Explorer. Enter the IP address in Address bar. Let us say IP address
Log in as SE
Log in as SA
Click on option to 'Log in as SE', if you are a System Engineer. Feature Menu is displayed on the left side of
Welcome page.
Click on 'Upload/Download System Configuration Files'. No need to enter User Password for this process.
Matrix
User gets 'Login As' Window on screen. Enter the user name (SE) and password (1234) in 'User Name' and
Matrix
Select a path where you want to save backup files on your system. Click OK button.
System Configuration files Backup are on progress is displayed as shown below:
Matrix
Note:
Uploading a system configuration files in the system. First remove current file present in the system. Then copy the
new file from computer (backup source) to system.
Please refer Backup-SMDR topic for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Backup-SMDR 271
=X=X=
Matrix
Backup-System Software
Whats this?
In ETERNITY there is an embedded FTP server which can be used for Backup of System Software files.
There are two ways to backup-system software through FTP:
How to use it?
Click on Start g Programs g Internet Explorer. Enter the IP address in Address bar. Let us say IP address
Log in as SE
Log in as SA
Click on option to 'Log in as SE', if you are a System Engineer. Feature Menu is displayed on the left side of Welcome
page.
Click on 'System Software'. No need to enter User Password for this process.
Matrix
User gets 'Login As' Window on screen. Enter the user name (SE) and password (1234) in 'User Name' and
Matrix
Select a path where you backup files on your system. Click OK button.
Software Backup are on progress as per your path selection.
Note:
Uploading a software file in the system. First remove current file present in the system. Then copy the new file from
computer (backup source) to system.
Matrix
Please refer Backup-SMDR topic for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Backup-SMDR 271
=X=X=
Matrix
Barge-In
Whats this?
When your call is urgent and you cannot wait for the called person to become free, you can land in his conversation
after intimating him. This is called Barge-In.
While landing, you get ring back tone and the called person gets barge-in beeps for Barge-In Timer. This timer is
called Barge-In timer. This timer is programmable. When a station is barged-in, calling partys number (external/
internal) is also displayed on the LCD of DKP.
During the beeps, the called person can dial Flash to answer your call.
If the called party does not respond during these 10 seconds, caller forcefully gets connected with the called person.
The third party is put on hold, gets music and hence cannot listen to your conversation.
Disconnect once your talk is over. This will automatically restore the original talk of the called person with the held-up
party.
The caller need not have higher priority level then other partys priority level.
How to use it?
Important Points:
Barge-In is ineffective if the called person is having privacy against Barge-In.
Barge-In can be used only if it is allowed in the users Class of Service.
Barge-In works even when the called party is talking on the trunk line.
Barge-In works if the called person is in 2-way, normal speech.
Barge-In can also be used after putting one party on hold. An important trunk call can be transferred to a busy station
after putting the calling party on hold and barging-in on the busy destination to inform him about his call.
This is most advantageous feature for the operator while transferring calls.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Barge-In to a user and how to allow Privacy against Barge-In.
Timer of Relevance:
Barge-In Timer-Time after which the caller gets connected to the called party.
Relevant Topics:
2. Privacy 679
=X=X=
3 Dial 4. Ring Back Tone. The called person gets beeps.
4 The system connects you to the destination after 10 seconds.
5 Replace the handset on completion of talk.
Matrix
Behind the PBX Applications
Whats this?
Many times, small and medium range PBX systems are connected behind some bigger PBX systems. Such applications
are used mainly to expand the existing capacity of the big PBX already in use. Stations (SLT) coming from the big PBX
are used as trunks (TWT) of the small PBX. There could also be some PSTN trunks coming directly on the smaller PBX.
Such configurations are known as Behind the PBX application.
In such situations, it is not easy to implement toll control restrictions.
Consider a simple event
Station 21 of PBX B in the figure above is not given long distance dialing facility. It has access to all the trunks (TWT).
Now when he wants to use T4, T5 or T6, which are directly coming from PSTN, he dials 0. He gets PSTN dial tone and
dials the number.
But when he does similar procedure on T1, T2 or T3, he gets error tone. Because, in this case when station 21 grabs T1
by dialing a code, he gets dial tone of the PBX A. Now when he again dials 0 to grab PSTN dial tone, PBX understands
it to be a long distance call and since station 21 is not allowed long distance calls, the system rejects dialing on trunk and
gives error tone to station 21.
Hence if station 21 of PBX B is to be allowed external dialing through T1, T2 and T3, he should be given long distance
dialing access.
The ETERNITY solves this problem by providing programmable PBX Expansion count for each trunk. This count is the
number of digits to be ignored before toll control check is began. The PBX Expansion count is same as the number of
PBX connected between the main PBX and the last subscriber.
In the figure shown, the PBX Expansion count of T1, T2 and T3 should be kept 1 and for T4, T5 and T6, it should
be kept 0.
CAUTION!
For all normal applications, keep this PBX Expansion count to 0 for all the trunks. Otherwise,
outside dialing may be hampered. LCR and SMDR will also be affected.
The ETERNITY supports PBX Expansion count for each trunk.
Trunk Port PBX Expansion Count
001 0
002 0
003 0
: :
128 0
27
26
21
23
28
Matrix
How to program?
Please refer the topic TWT Hardware Template for more programming details.
Important Point:
PBX Expansion Count is also called as Pre PSTN Digit Count.
=X=X=
Matrix
Call Back on Mobile Port
What's this?
Matrix ETERNITY supports 'Call Back' feature on all the mobile ports. This feature is used to respond to the specific
Incoming call on the mobile port which was disconnected by the caller.
The system will initiate the call back on the same CLI number from which IC call was received on the mobile port.
When the called party attends the call, the call will be established as per the option selected viz. DID call or DISA call
(PIN Auth.- Multiple Calls or CLI Auth- Multiple Calls or CLI Auth - Single Call - Answer Sig.) or call routed to the
Operator.
Thus, using this feature, the user will not miss the important Incoming calls on his mobile port.
If this feature is not enabled for the mobile port, the system will route the IC call on that port with normal IC call logic
for call routing. Refer chapter Mobile Port to configure other parameters on the Mobile Port.
How it works?
To use this feature, 'Call Back' should be enabled for the mobile port.
Caution!
Ensure that 'IC call mode' is configured as 'Allow', for the mobile port for the 'Call Back' feature to work. Refer chapter
Mobile Port to configure IC call mode.
When the IC call on the mobile port is disconnected by the caller during period, 'Call Back Timer' configured in the
system, the system will initiate the call back if the caller's CLI is matching with the prefix configured in the 'Trusted
Caller List' or 'White Listed Caller List'.
SE will configure this list with specific number strings of the callers or specific 'Prefix' as per user's requirement. Refer
chapter External List to configure the Trusted Caller List.
If the CLI of the caller is not matching with Trusted Caller List, the 'Call Back' feature is not applicable and the IC call
is processed as per normal IC call logic.
Now if the call back is initiated and the call is attended by the remote end, following types of call will be established
as per the option configured:
DID call
PIN Auth.- Multiple Calls
CLI Auth- Multiple Calls
CLI Auth - Single Call - Answer Sig.
Call routing to Operator
When Call Back Mode is programmed as "PIN Auth- Multiple Calls", the party to which ETERNITY has made call due
to call back, gets dial tone. Now, the call made by that party will be routed as per logic of DISA "PIN Auth.- Multiple
Calls". Refer chapter 'Direct Inward System Access (DISA)' for more details.
When call back mode is "CLI Auth- Single Call - Answer Sig." and after the call back is initiated by the ETERNITY, if
the number used to make call back is same as configured in the 'DISA - CLI Authentication Table', then only the party
will be successfully logged-in and can make the call only once. Refer chapter 'Direct Inward System Access (DISA)'
for more details.
If the number used to make call back is not same as configured in the 'DISA - CLI Authentication Table', call will be
routed as per the programming of the Trunk Feature Template assigned to the Mobile Port. Refer chapter 'Trunk
Feature Template'.
When call back mode is "CLI Auth- Multiple Call", and after the call back is initiated by the ETERNITY, if the number
used to make call back is same as configured in the 'DISA - CLI Authentication Table', then only the party will be
successfully logged-in. However, in this case after one call, the caller can again make the call using same logic. Refer
chapter 'Direct Inward System Access (DISA)' for more details.
If the number used to make call back is not same as configured in the 'DISA - CLI Authentication Table', call will be
routed as per the programming of the Trunk Feature Template assigned to the Mobile Port. Refer chapter 'Trunk
Feature Template'.
The 'Operator' is the station which is assigned to the mobile port in the trunk feature template. Refer chapterTrunk
Feature Template for more details.
How to program?
Matrix
Enable/Disable Call Back Mode
Use following command to Enable/Disable Call Back Mode for the Mobile Port:
8010-1-Mobile-Code
8010-2-Mobile-Mobile-Code
8010-*-Code
Where,
Mobile Port is from 01 to 32.
By default, Call Back Mode is disabled for all Mobile ports.
Program Call Back Timer
Use following command to program Call Back Timer for the Mobile Port:
8011 - 1 - Mobile - Call Back Timer
8011 - 2 - Mobile - Mobile - Call Back Timer
8011 - * - Call Back Timer
Where,
Mobile Port is from 01 to 32
Call Back Timer is from 01 to 99 Sec.
By default, Call Back Timer is 10 Seconds for all Mobile ports
Program Call Back Mode
Use following command to program Call Back Mode for the Mobile Port:
8012 - 1 - Mobile - Call Back Mode
8012 - 2 - Mobile - Mobile - Call Back Mode
8012 - * - Call Back Mode
Where,
If the call initiated by 'Call Back' feature is matured, the IC call will be routed in the ETERNITY by any of the call logic
selected by the command. Refer chapters Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Direct Inward System Access (DISA) and
Operator for more details about respective call logic.
By default, Call Back Mode is 'Operator' for all Mobile ports
Assign trusted caller list to Mobile Port
Use following to assign Trusted Caller List to the Mobile Port:
8013-1-Mobile-Trusted Caller List Number
8013-2-Mobile-Mobile-Trusted Caller List Number
8013-*-Trusted Caller List Number
Where,
Trusted Caller List Number is from 01 to 24
By default, Trusted Caller List Number is '01' for all Mobile ports
Note:
SE will configure this list with specific numbers of the callers or specific 'Prefix' as per user's requirement. E.g. If '+91'
is configured in Trusted Caller List and '+91XXXXXXXXXX' is the CLI of the caller, then system will allow 'Call Back'
feature. But if '+91' is configured in Trusted Caller List and '919925033046' is the CLI of the caller, then system will not
allow the 'Call Back' feature. Refer chapter External List to configure the Trusted Caller List.
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Call Back Mode Meaning
1 DID
2 PIN Auth.-Multiple Calls
3 CLI Auth.-Multiple Calls
4 CLI Auth.-Single Call-Ans. Sig.
5 Operator
Matrix
Important Point:
ETERNITY supports only one call back request at a time, for one Mobile port. The second IC call on that mobile port
will be processed as per normal IC call routing by the system.
Relevant Topics:
1. Mobile Port 630
3. External List 534
4. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 451
5. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 456
6. Operator 658
=X=X=
Matrix
Call Budget
Whats this?
The total cost of calls made by a station can be controlled using this facility. To prevent misuse of long distance dialing
facility, ETERNITY provides Toll Control facility and COS programming for different time zones. But, sometimes you
cannot simply deny long distance dialing for people who need to make such calls as part of their job. It makes more
sense to limit their bill to a certain fixed limit. It is desirable that this limit is in terms of amount. The system allows the user
to make calls freely as long as he does not cross his limit. Once he crosses his limit, his station is locked by the system.
This facility is called Call Budget (CB).
How it works?
The flow chart given below explains the Call Budget logic.
How to program?
Step 1
Refer Class of Service (COS) chapter to enable call budget on a station.
Step 2
Use following command to assign Call Budget to a station: (From SA Mode)
1072-004-Flexible Number-Amount
Where,
Flexible Number is 1, 2, 3, 4 digits and unique.
Amount is the Call Budget in rupees. Amount can be from 000000 to 999999.
By default, amount is 999999.
Start
Station makes an
outgoing calls
Is call budgeting
enabled on the
station ?
System goes on
the next process
End
Is current call budget
amount of the station greater
then or equal to alloted call
budget amount for the at
station
No
Yes
System allows the station to make
calls as per the call budget allowed
and denied lists assigned to it
End
System allows the station to
make calls as per the toll
control allowed and denied list
On completion of the call
system adds the call amount to
the station's account
End
No
Yes
Matrix
Notes:
To change the call budget amount to less than 6 digits, use leading zero.
For example, to program call budget amount as Rs.10, enter '000010' as Call Budget amount. The system will
consider it as Rs.10.
Default value of Call Budget is programmable. Refer chapter System Parameters for command to program Default
Call Budget Amount.
Step 3
Please refer Station Basic Feature Template for more details on assigning Allowed and Denied Lists for stations.
How to Display Call Budget from SA mode?
The ETERNITY helps the System Administrator to know the budget assigned for the OG calls to be made from that
station (DKP).
On issuing a command, the system displays the assigned amount (A) and the used amount by a station (U). The display
is retained till the station remains OFF-Hook.
Important Points:
Call Budget can be enabled on all the stations as well as on selected stations.
Each station can be assigned different amount depending on the requirement.
The assigned budget is for one month. It is to be reloaded for every month.
If the budget exceeds anytime during the month, the system locks the station till month end.
Once locked, the station can make calls depending on the external lists assigned as allowed and denied lists for Call
Budget-locked state. Please refer the Station Basic Feature Template for mode details.
From the 1
st
of the next month, the system allows the station user to make calls.
It is also possible to increase the budget amount before the amount is exceeded. Now, new calls will be allowed till
fresh budget gets exhausted.
Call Budget facility is based on cost of each call. Hence the system must be programmed properly with all the SMDR
parameters and long distance codes. Errors in calculation of call cost can lead to malfunction of Call Budget.
A current call does not get disconnected if the budget gets exhausted during the call. However, station user cannot
make calls there after.
The cost of the call is added to the stations account on completion of the call.
The call budget can be set only from SA mode.
Relevant Topics:
4. Station Basic Feature Template 764
5. Call Cost Calculation (CCC) 300
6. Call Cost Display 322
=X=X=
Lift the handset. Dial tone
Dial 1072-011-Station. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Call Budget on Trunk
Some times, the Mobile service providers offer different schemes to enhance their business, e.g. customer can make
free calls for first 1000 minutes, every month. To avail such facility, some customers prefer that ETERNITY should
allow OG calls only for the duration of free minutes, provided by the Service Provider and when free minutes are
exhausted the respective Mobile port should not allow OG calls. Similarly, after programmed amount is used, the
respective port should not allow OG calls.
For such requirements, ETERNITY supports, a feature 'Call Budget on Trunk'. To implement this feature,
ETERNITY supports Amount and Free minutes based budgeting on TWT, DS1, BRI, MOBILE and SIP trunks.
SE can select the type of Call Budget, from options: disable, Amount, Minutes which can be enabled on the trunk port.
The Call Budget amount and minutes can also be programmed in the system.
The statistics for consumed call budget can be reset manually or automatically.
ETERNITY can maintain 'cost', for each trunk port on which Call Budget Type- Amount is enabled.
Similarly, ETERNITY can maintain 'total minutes' usage, for each trunk port on which call budget type-Minutes is
used.
Cost and Minutes consumed on each trunk can be cleared by; manually or automatically on specified date of every
month, to value '000000'.
Call Budget Amount: When Cost based budget is enabled for the trunk port, and total cost occurred from the port is
more than or equal to assigned budget, the ETERNITY will consider that trunk port as 'Disable' and will not allow
further OG calls.
Free Minutes: When Minutes based budget is enabled for the trunk port, the trunk port will be considered as disabled
for OG call when total minutes occurred from the port is more than or equal to assigned budget (free minutes).
When either 'cost' or 'minutes' - budget assigned to trunk is exhausted:
ETERNITY will print 'system activity log'.
ETERNITY will not allow OG calls from such trunks.
User will get error tone if tries to select such trunks using Selective Trunk Access. However IC calls will be allowed
on these trunks.
In case budget type-Minutes, SE should program the total minutes for which calls will be allowed from that ports. On
end of each call ETERNITY will calculate the consumed minute for each call, as explained by example, below:
Example to calculate cost of a call:
Suppose following programming is done in ETERNITY:
For the dialed number, pulse rate = 02
Pulse rate= 02 for duration of first unit (60 seconds) and duration of subsequent units (30 seconds).
If Duration of the call made by user is ? 60 seconds, ETERNITY will consider the minutes used for this call = 1:00
If Duration of the call made by user is between 61 to 90 seconds, ETERNITY will consider the minutes used for
this call = 1:30
If Duration of the call made by user is = 91 seconds, ETERNITY will consider the minutes used for this call = 2:00
If Duration of the call made by user is = 125 seconds, ETERNITY will consider the minutes used for this call =
2:30
How to program?
Commands for configuring the feature 'Call budget on Trunk' can be issued by SE command as well as SA commands.
Using SE Commands:
For TWT trunk
Call Budget Type:
Use following command to program Call Budget Type on TWT:
3301-1-TWT-Budget Type
3301-2-TWT-TWT-Budget Type
3301-*-Budget Type
Where,
TWT trunk is from 001 to 128.
Matrix
Budget Type is from 0 to 2.
By default, Budget Type is None.
Call Budget Amount:
Use following command to program Call Budget Amount on TWT:
3302-1-TWT-Budget Amount
3302-2-TWT-TWT-Budget Amount
3302-*-Budget Amount
Where,
Budget Amount is of 6 digits maximum. Use leading zeros if amount to be programmed is less than 6 digits.
By default Budget Amount is 999999
Free Minutes:
Use following command to program Free minutes on TWT:
3303-1-TWT-Minutes
3303-2-TWT-TWT-Minutes
3303-*-Minutes
Where,
'Minutes' is of 6 digits maximum. Use leading zeros if Minutes to be programmed is less than 6 digits.
By default, Minutes is 999999.
Call Budget Reset Mode:
Use following command to program Call Budget Reset Mode for TWT:
3304-1-TWT-Call Budget Reset Mode
3304-2-TWT-TWT-Call Budget Reset Mode
3304-*-Call Budget Reset Mode
Where,
Call Budget Reset Mode is from 1 to 2.
By default, Call Budget Reset Mode is Scheduled.
Call Budget consumed statistics Reset Date:
This command is used when Call Budget Reset Mode is programmed as Scheduled.
Use following command to program the date on which every month the call budget consumed statistics should get reset:
3305-1-TWT-Date
3305-2-TWT-TWT-Date
3305-*-Date
Where,
Date is 01 to 31.
By default, call budget consumed statistics reset date is 1st. of every month.
Reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes
This command is used when Call Budget Reset Mode is programmed as Manual.
Use following command to reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for TWT manually:
3306-1-TWT
3306-2-TWT-TWT
3306-*
Where,
Budget Type Meaning
0 None
1 Amount
2 Minutes
Call Budget Reset Mode Meaning
1 Manual
2 Scheduled
Matrix
For DS1 Ports
Budget Type:
Use following command to program Budget Type on DS1 Port:
6122-1-DS1-Budget Type
6122-2-DS1-DS1-Budget Type
6122-*-Budget Type
Where,
DS1 trunk is from 1 to 8.
Budget Amount:
Use following command to program Budget Amount on DS1 Port:
6123-1-DS1-Budget Amount
6123-2-DS1-DS1-Budget Amount
Where,
By default, Budget Amount is 999999.

Free Minutes:
Use following command to program Free Minutes on DS1 Port:
6124-1-DS1-Minutes
6124-2-DS1-DS1-Minutes
6124-*-Minutes
Where,
By default, Free Minutes is 999999.
Use following command to program Call Budget Reset Mode for DS1:
6138-1-DS1-Call Budget Reset Mode
6138-2-DS1-DS1-Call Budget Reset Mode
Where,
Use following command to program the date on which every month the call budget consumed statistics should get reset
on DS1:
6139-1-DS1-Date
6139-2-DS1-DS1-Date
6139-*-Date
Where,
Budget Type Meaning
0 None
1 Amount
2 Minutes
1 Manual
2 Scheduled
Matrix
Date is 01 to 31.
Reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes:
Use following command to reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for DS1 manually:
6140-1-DS1
6140-2-DS1-DS1
6140-*
Where,
For SIP Trunk
Budget Type:
Use following command to program Budget Type on SIP:
7733-1-SIP-Budget Type
7733-2-SIP-SIP-Budget Type
7733-*-Budget Type
Where,
SIP trunk is from 01 to 32
Budget Type is from 0 to 2
Budget Amount:
Use following command to program Budget Amount on SIP:
7734-1-SIP-Budget Amount
7734-2-SIP-SIP-Budget Amount
Where,
SIP trunk is from 01 to 32.
Free Minutes:
Use following command to program Free Minutes on SIP:
7735-1-SIP-Minutes
7735-2-SIP-SIP-Minutes
7735-*-Minutes
Where,
Use following command to program Call Budget Reset Mode for SIP:
7736-1-SIP-Call Budget Reset Mode
7736-2-SIP-SIP-Call Budget Reset Mode
Where,
Budget Type Meaning
0 None
1 Amount
2 Minutes
1 Manual
2 Scheduled
Matrix
on SIP:
7737-1-SIP-Date
7737-2-SIP-SIP-Date
7737-*-Date
Where,
Date is 01 to 31.
Use following command to reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for SIP Trunk manually:
7738-1-SIP
7738-2-SIP-SIP
7738-*
Where,
For Mobile Ports
Budget Type:
Use following command to program Budget Type on Mobile:
8019-1-Mobile-Budget Type
8019-2-Mobile-Mobile-Budget Type
8019-*-Budget Type
Where,
Mobile is from 01 to 32.
Budget Amount:
Use following command to program Budget Amount on Mobile:
8020-1-Mobile-Budget Amount
8020-2-Mobile-Mobile-Budget Amount
Where,
Free Minutes:
Use following command to program Free Minutes on Mobile
8021-1-Mobile-Minutes
8021-2-Mobile-Mobile-Minutes
8021-*-Minutes
Where,
Use following command to program Call Budget Reset Mode for Mobile:
Budget Type Meaning
0 None
1 Amount
2 Minutes
Matrix
8022-1-Mobile-Call Budget Reset Mode
8022-2-Mobile-Mobile-Call Budget Reset Mode
Where,
on Mobile
8023-1-Mobile-Date
8023-2-Mobile-Mobile-Date
8023-*-Date
Where,
Date is 01 to 31.
Use following command to reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for Mobile port manually:
8024-1-Mobile
8024-2-Mobile-Mobile
8024-*
Where,
For BRI Ports
Budget Type:
Use following command to program Budget Type on BRI
6214-1-BRI-Budget Type
6214-2-BRI-BRI-Budget Type
6214-*-Budget Type
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32.
Budget Amount:
Use following command to program Budget Amount on BRI
6215-1-BRI-Budget Amount
6215-2-BRI-BRI-Budget Amount
Where,
1 Manual
2 Scheduled
Budget Type Meaning
0 None
1 Amount
2 Minutes
Matrix
Free Minutes:
Use following command to program Free Minutes on BRI
6216-1-BRI-Minutes
6216-2-BRI-BRI-Minutes
6216-*-Minutes
Where,
Use following command to program Call Budget Reset Mode for BRI
6217-1-BRI-Reset Mode
6217-2-BRI-BRI-Reset Mode
6217-*-Reset Mode
Where,
on BRI:
6218-1-BRI-Date
6218-2-BRI-BRI-Date
6218-*-Date
Where,
Date is 01 to 31.
Use following command to reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for BRI Trunk manually
6219-1-BRI
6219-2-BRI-BRI
6219-*
Where,
Related Topics:
1. Call Budget 290
3. Access Codes 225
4. System Administrator (SA) Mode 834
5. Mobile Port 630
6. DS1 Trunks 475
7. ISDN-BRI 573
9. SIP Trunk Parameters 734
=X=X=
1 Manual
2 Scheduled
Matrix
Call Chaining
Whats this?
The call transferred by an Operator to Station A, comes back to Operator automatically instead of getting
disconnected after the calling party has completed the speech with Station A. This is called Call Chaining.
Call chaining is useful in following situation: A marketing executive calls the office from the field to consult a technical
problem with his boss. The Operator who receives his call realizes that, she has to inform the marketing executive
about the ticket status for his travel in the next week. She needs to inform the boss to transfer the call back to her
which she finds very embarrassing. Call chaining saves her from dilemma. When the speech between marketing
executive and the boss is complete, the call comes back to the Operator. The Operator can now communicate about
the ticket status to the marketing executive.
How to use it?
Set Call Chaining
Call Transfer during Call Chaining
Step 3 to 5 perform the normal call transfer.
If the Station B disconnects, the call comes back to Station A. If Station A is free, speech is established between the
calling party and Station A. If Station A is busy, Calling party gets music and the call is released after the Call Park
Release Timer gets exhausted. In case calling party disconnects, the call is released.
Important Points:
Call chaining can be executed from DKP only.
A DSS key must be programmed to perform call chaining.
Call chaining can be performed when call is transferred from a DKP to DKP, SLT or Trunk.
Call chaining can be performed even for internal calls.
Call chaining can be performed for multiple calls.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Transfer 352
3. Call Park 339
=X=X=
User is in speech with other station/trunk call.
Dial Flash-1050. Feature is set. Display will be as Called Party in Chaining.
1 Lift the handset. Speech with the Calling Party. The calling party requests for Station B.
2
Press the DSS key assigned
for call chaining
The LED of the DSS key glows with red colour.
3 Dial Hold. Calling party gets music.
4 Dial Station B. Ring Back Tone. Speech with B.
5 Dial trf. Calling Party and Station B in speech.
Caller
Operator
Station A
Station B
Station C
Matrix
Call Cost Calculation (CCC)
Whats this?
The ETERNITY can calculate the cost in amount for the calls made by the station. The cost calculation is done at the time
of printing of reports.
How it works?
Few parameters are programmed to calculate the cost of the call. The cost of a call depends on:
Trunk Port (Service Provider) used for making OG call.
Number dialed i.e. local, long distance, international, etc.
Time and day when the call was made i.e. daytime, nighttime, holiday, etc.
Duration of the call.
The ETERNITY will calculate the 'call cost' by using following steps:
When the call is made, the 'Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option' is checked for the specific trunk, based on the
'Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule' for the OG call. The pulse rate option (from 1 to 4), is as assigned in Trunk
Feature Template. Refer chapter 'Trunk Feature Template.'
The 'Number' dialed will be matched with 'Area Code Table' programmed in ETERNITY. For the matched area code
and, the 'Pulse rate type' programmed for the 'Pulse rate option' is obtained.
This 'Pulse Rate type' obtained from 'Area Code Table' will be checked in 'Pulse Rate table' (The Table may be for
'Normal' or 'Holiday', depending on the day of call) to obtain corresponding 'duration' and 'cost' to be applied for the
call duration.
The 'pulse rate type' applied (duration and cost) is divided into two parts for each time zone:
First unit.
Additional units.
The duration of the call is interpreted in terms of number of units and the number of units depends on the pulse rate.
If the duration of the call is less or equal to one unit.
Cost of Call = Cost of First Unit + Service Charge
If the duration of the call is more than one unit then,
Cost of Call = [Cost of First Unit + (Number of Additional units x Cost for Additional units)] + Service Charge
If the call answer supervision type is 12/16KHz then,
Cost of Call = (Unit Charge x Total Call units) + Service Charge. The cost of first unit and additional unit depends
on the pulse rates.
ETERNITY will use the 'cost of the call' for SMDR and also to deduct it from the call budget, if allotted to trunk.
Example:
The logic for call cost calculation is explained by following example:
Suppose, OG call is made on trunk, TWT-001 which is assigned Trunk Feature Template number '01'.
Trunk Feature Template-01, is configured for CCC as given below:
CCC Time Schedule T1 = start time: 00:00, End time: 22:00
CCC Time Schedule T2 = start time: 22:01, End time: 23:59
CCC Pulse Rate Option = 1
Area code table is programmed as shown below:
Index
Area
Code
Name
Ignore
Digit
Count
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 1
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 2
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 3
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 4
001 26 Local 03 06 09 10
002 09 Mobile 05 03 07 08
Matrix
Pulse Rate Table is programmed as shown below:
The call cost will be calculated as explained below:
Suppose OG call is made by the station user, to number "2630555" through the trunk, TWT-001 at 20:10 hours. The
ETERNITY will check trunk feature template assigned to TWT-001 and determine Time Zone as per time of the call.
The corresponding Pulse Rate Option configured in Trunk feature template will be checked.
In this example, Time Zone for TWT-001 at 20:10 Hours would be T1.
Pulse Rate Option is = 1.
The ETERNITY will match the dialed number "2630555" in Area Code table, in which, the entry programmed at index
001 is found as best match.
Hence, as per Area Code Table, pulse rate type = 03, programmed in "Pulse Rate Option -1" for matching entry
(Index 001).
(However, if TWT would have been assigned Pulse Rate Option=2, in trunk feature template, the pulse Rate type 06
would have been selected as shown in Area Code Table)
Finally, for Pulse Rate Type = 03, ETERNITY will consider Cost for First Unit as 1.00 (Rs. or $ as per applicable
currency) for duration of 30 seconds and for additional unit also cost will be considered as 1.00 for duration of 30
seconds. (As shown in Pulse Rate Table). This data will be used for calculating total cost of call based on the total
duration.
How to program CCC parameters?
Step 1
Unit Charge
When call cost is to be calculated on the basis of 16 KHz metering pulses, user can select different unit charge for first
unit and different unit charge for the additional units.
Use following command to program the unit charge for first unit when 16 KHz metering is used:
2600-Unit Charge for First Unit
Where,
Unit charge is the amount in XX.XX format in any currency.
By default, unit charge for first unit is Rs.1.10.
Use following command to program the unit charge for additional units when 12/16 KHz metering is used:
2601-Unit Charge for Additional Unit
Where,
Unit charge is the amount in XX.XX format in any currency.
By default, Unit charge for additional unit is Rs.1.10.
Example1:
Let us program unit change for first unit to Rs. 1.50.
2600-0150
Pulse Rate Type
Time Zone T1 Time Zone T2 Time Zone T3 Time Zone T4
First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit
01
Duration(sec) 180 180 60 30 90 30 120 60
Cost 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00 02.00
02
Duration(sec) 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
Cost 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00
03
Duration(sec) 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
Cost 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00
04
Duration(sec) 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
Cost 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00 01.00
05
Duration(sec) 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180
Cost 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00 03.00
:
Duration(sec) : : : : : : : :
Cost : : : : : : : :
32 Duration(sec)
Cost
Matrix
Example2:
Let us program unit charge for additional unit to US$0.75.
2601-0075
Step 2
Service Charge
There are three options for service charges:
Fixed Service Charge: A fixed amount is added as service charge to every call regardless of the cost of that call.
This service charge amount is programmable.
Unit Wise Service Charge: Service charge is added to each unit of the call. Suppose a call worth 10 units was made
then the service charge will also be charged for 10 units instead of once as it is done in case of fixed service charge.
Percentage Wise Service Charge: A percent of the cost of the call is added as a service charge for that call. This
percent is programmable.
Use following command to select service charge type:
2602-Service Charge Type
Where,
By default, the service charge type is fixed.
Step 3
Use following command to program service charge:
2603-Service Charge
Where,
Service Charge is the amount in XX.XX format in any currency.
By default, Service Charge is Rs.02.00.
Example 1:
Let us program the service charge to Rs.2.00.
2603-0200
Example 2:
Let us program the service charge to US$1.75.
2603-0175
Step 4
Use following command to set the percentage if the service charge is selected based on the percentage:
2604-Percentage
Where,
Percentage is from 000 to 100.
By default, percentage is 005.
Example:
Let us set the percentage to 10% of the cost of each call.
2604-010
Number of Units
Number of Units is derived from the pulse rate at the time of the call and duration of the call. System acquires the pulse
rate type and call duration with the help of in-built RTC.
Total Units = First Unit + Additional Unit.
If the call duration is less than the pulse rate of the first unit then additional unit is zero and total units. Call units when call
answer supervision type is 12/16KHz metering.
Call Units = (Call duration in seconds)/(Pulse rate in seconds).
Step 5
Assign parameters; 'CCC Pulse Rate Option' and program 'CCC Time Schedule' for the Trunk Feature Template which is
assigned to the specific trunk used for OG calls.
Assign 'CCC Pulse Rate Option' from 1 to 4.
Service Charge Type Meaning
0 Fixed Service Charge
1 Unit wise Service Charge
2 Percentage wise Service Charge
Matrix
Program four 'CCC Time Schedule', T1, T2,T3 and T4. Program Start Time and End Time for each.
Refer chapter Trunk Feature Template for more details.
Step 6
Pulse Rate Types
Pulse rate can differ for normal and holidays. Maximum 32 entries can be made in the pulse rate type. Each pulse rate
type can have different rate and different cost for first and additional unit. The table below shows the format of pulse rate
for normal day.
Use following command to program duration of first unit for a pulse rate type on normal days:
2607-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of First Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Duration of First Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Step 7
Use following command to load default normal pulse rate type:
2606
Step 8
Use following command to program duration of additional unit for a pulse rate type on normal days:
2608-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of Additional Unit
Where,
Duration of Additional Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Pulse Rate
Type
Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone 3 Time Zone 4
01
Duration 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
02
Duration : : : : : : : :
Cost : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : : :
32
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Pulse Rate
Type
01
Duration 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
02
Duration 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
03
Duration 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
04
Duration 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
05
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
06
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
07
Duration 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
08
Duration 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Matrix
Step 9
Use following command to program the cost of first unit of a pulse rate type for normal days:
2609-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of first Unit
Where,
Cost of first Unit is from XX.XX.
Step 10
Use following command to program the cost of additional unit of a pulse rate type for normal days:
2610-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of Additional Unit
Where,
Cost of Additional Unit is from XX.XX.
Holiday Pulse Rate Table
Separate pulse rate table is used for holidays. This allows total Flexibility of rates for holidays.
Step 11
Use following command to load default holiday pulse rate type:
2611
09
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
10
Duration 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
11
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
12
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
:
Duration : : : : : : : :
Cost : : : : : : : :
32
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
CCC Pulse
Rate Type
01
Duration 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
02
Duration 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
03
Duration 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
04
Duration 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
05
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
06
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
07
Duration 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Pulse Rate
Type
Matrix
Step 12
Use following command to program duration for a first unit of a pulse rate type on holidays:
Pulse rate type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone from 1 to 4.
Duration of First Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Step 13
Use following command to program duration for additional unit for a pulse rate type on holidays:
2613-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of Additional Unit
Where,
Pulse rate type is from 01 to 32.
Time Zone from 1 to 4.
Duration of Additional Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Step 14
Use following command to program the cost of first unit of a pulse rate type for holidays:
2614-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of First Unit
Where,
Cost of First Unit is from XX.XX.
Step 15
Use following command to program the cost of additional unit of a pulse rate type for holidays:
2615-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of Additional Unit
Where,
Cost of Additional Unit is from XX.XX.
Area Code Table
The pulse rate of a call depends on the destination number dialed. Generally, pulse rate varies depending on the
distance. Different destination locations can have different pulse rates depending on the distance from the caller. Hence
pulses rates can vary with different area codes. The Area Code Table in ETERNITY will be programmed with parameters
shown below:
08
Duration 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
09
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
10
Duration 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
11
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
12
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
:
Duration : : : : : : : :
Cost : : : : : : : :
16
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Index
Area
Code
Name
Ignore
Digit
Count
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 1
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 2
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 3
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 4
001
CCC Pulse
Rate Type
Matrix
For example, pulse rate type for different area codes can be programmed as:
Maximum 999 entries are provided in the area code table.
In case the dialed number does not match with any of the area code table entries, pulse rate type 01 is used as a default.
The 'pulse rate type' is retained even during power failure conditions. The Area Code table can be printed or can be
downloaded on a computer for reference. Refer 'Default Area Code Table for USA' at the end of chapter.
How to compress Area codes?
To program the area code table, we need all the area codes with applicable pulse rates. This information can be obtained
from the local PSTN service provider. Many telephone directions also publish this information. Once you have all the area
codes with pulse rates, follow given steps to compress this information so that it fits the area code table provided in the
system:
Sort the area codes in increasing order. Write applicable rate codes against each area code.
Select area codes having common digits (2, 3, 4 or more) with same pulse rate.
Select this group of codes and find out maximum common digits.
Use this truncated area code as a common area code for all the area codes in the group.
Program this common area code with the common pulse rate for the whole group.
Repeat this procedure to find out other such groups with common pulse rates.
The codes, which do not belong to any group, should be entered individually as separate entries.
Usually, area codes of places in the remote area from your city can be compressed in one common code.
Example 1
Assume following entries in the stored, uncompressed area code table.
002
003
004
:
999
Destination Location Area Code Pulse Rate Type for Pulse Rate Option-1
USA 001 15
Japan 0071 14
Singapore 0065 13
Sri Lanka 0094 12
Kolkata and Eastern Region 03 08
New Delhi 011 08
Southern Region 04 08
Mumbai 022 06
Rajkot 0281 05
Waghodia 952668 04
Halol 95 03
Surat 95261 04
Ahmedabad 9579 00
Index Area Code Pulse Rate Type
01 0111 03
02 0112 03
03 0113 03
04 0114 03
05 0115 03
06 0116 03
07 0117 03
Index
Area
Code
Name
Ignore
Digit
Count
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 1
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 2
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 3
Pulse Rate Type
for Pulse Rate
Option - 4
Matrix
Note that all the above area codes have same pulse rates. Hence it is possible to compress them to one code: 011. You
can program this code with the common pulse rate 03. Thus, one entry in the system area code table will cover 10
entries.
The compressed area code table would look as shown below:
Example 2
In the above table, two pulse rates are different from others. You can program a common entry for area code 013. And
the exceptions can be entered separately as under:
Note: Refer Default Area Code Table for Region USA at the end of chapter.
Step 16
How to program Area codes?
Use following command to program an area code:
2620-Area Code Index-Area Code-#*
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999.
Area Code is a number string of maximum of 4 digits.
Use the following command to clear the area code for an index:
2620-Area Code Index-#*
Example:
Program area code 022 for Mumbai at area code index 001.
2620-001-022-#*
Step 17
Use following command to program Pulse Rate Type for Pulse Rate Option of area code index:
2621-Area Code Index-Pulse Rate Option-Pulse Rate Type
08 0118 03
09 0119 03
10 0110 03
Area Code Pulse Rate
1 0111
Index Area Code Pulse Rate
01 0131 03
02 0132 03
03 0133 03
04 0134 03
05 0135 03
06 0136 03
07 01372 03
08 01374 03
09 01376 03
10 0138 03
11 0139 03
Index Area Code Pulse Rate
01 013 03
02 0137 03
03 01372 03
Index Area Code Pulse Rate Type
Matrix
Where,
Pulse Rate Option is from 1 to 4.
Step 18
Use following command to delete the complete Area Code Table:
2622-Reverse SE Password
Example:
To delete the area code table use command:
2622-4321 (The SE password is assumed to be 1234).
Please note that there is no command to delete a single entry from the area code table. However, these can be
cleared or overwritten.
Step 19
Use following command to program ignore digit count when SP_SP LCR is to be used:
2623-Area Code Index-Ignore Digit Count
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999. Refer Default Area Code Table for USA at end of the chapter.
Ignore Digit Count is from 0 to 9.
By default, Ignore digit is 0.
Please refer topic Least Cost Routing-An Introduction for more details on SP-SP LCR Type and Ignore Digit Count.
Holidays
Step 20
Use following command to program a weekly off:
2630-Day-Code
Where,
If any week day is programmed as holiday then holiday pulse rates will be applicable.
By default, Sunday is programmed as holiday.
Example:
To program Tuesday is a holiday:
2630-3-1
To program Sunday as working day (not a holiday)
2630-1-0
Step 21
Use following command to program a holiday date:
2631-Holiday Date Index-Date-Month
Where,
Holiday Date Index is from 1 to 5 (Five dates can be programmed).
Date is from 01 to 31.
Month is from 01 to 12.
By default, holiday is shown below:
Holiday Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
Code Meaning
0 Not a Holiday
1 Holiday
Holiday Date Index Day
1 26-01
2 15-08
3 02-10
Matrix
Use the following command to clear a holiday date index:
2632-Holiday Date Index
Example:
To program 1
st
May as a holiday as use following command:
2631-1-01-5
Step 22
Use the following command to program Area code name:
2633-Area Code Index-Name
Where,
Name is character string is of maximum 12 characters.
Use following command to clear area code name:
2633-Area Code Index-#*
Default Area Code Table for the Region-USA:
4 Blank
5 Blank
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
1 1201 NJ 2 0
2 1202 DC 2 0
3 1203 CT 2 0
4 1204 Manitoba 2 0
5 1205 AL 2 0
6 1206 WA 2 0
7 1207 ME 2 0
8 1208 ID 2 0
9 1209 CA 2 0
10 1210 TX 2 0
11 1212 NY 2 0
12 1213 CA 2 0
13 1214 TX 2 0
14 1215 PA 2 0
15 1216 OH 2 0
16 1217 IL 2 0
17 1218 MN 2 0
18 1219 IN 2 0
19 1224 IL 2 0
20 1225 LA 2 0
21 1226 Ontario 2 0
22 1228 MS 2 0
23 1229 GA 2 0
24 1231 MI 2 0
25 1234 OH 2 0
26 1239 FL 2 0
27 1240 MD 2 0
28 1242 Bahamas 2 0
Holiday Date Index Day
Matrix
29 1246 Barbados 2 0
30 1248 MI 2 0
31 1250 BC 2 0
32 1251 AL 2 0
33 1252 NC 2 0
34 1253 WA 2 0
35 1254 TX 2 0
36 1256 AL 2 0
37 1260 IN 2 0
38 1262 WI 2 0
39 1264 Anguilla 2 0
40 1267 PA 2 0
41 1268 Antigua 2 0
42 1269 MI 2 0
43 1270 KY 2 0
44 1276 VA 2 0
45 1281 TX 2 0
46 1284 BVI 2 0
47 1289 Ontario 2 0
48 1301 MD 2 0
49 1302 DE 2 0
50 1303 CO 2 0
51 1304 WV 2 0
52 1305 FL 2 0
53 1306 Saskatchewan 2 0
54 1307 WY 2 0
55 1308 NE 2 0
56 1309 IL 2 0
57 1310 CA 2 0
58 1312 IL 2 0
59 1313 MI 2 0
60 1314 MO 2 0
61 1315 NY 2 0
62 1316 KS 2 0
63 1317 IN 2 0
64 1318 LA 2 0
65 1319 IA 2 0
66 1320 MN 2 0
67 1321 FL 2 0
68 1323 CA 2 0
69 1325 TX 2 0
70 1330 OH 2 0
71 1331 IL 2 0
72 1334 AL 2 0
73 1336 NC 2 0
Matrix
74 1337 LA 2 0
75 1339 MA 2 0
76 1340 USVI 2 0
77 1345 Cayman 2 0
78 1347 NY 2 0
79 1351 MA 2 0
80 1352 FL 2 0
81 1360 WA 2 0
82 1361 TX 2 0
83 1386 FL 2 0
84 1401 RI 2 0
85 1402 NE 2 0
86 1403 Alberta 2 0
87 1404 GA 2 0
88 1405 OK 2 0
89 1406 MT 2 0
90 1407 FL 2 0
91 1408 CA 2 0
92 1409 TX 2 0
93 1410 MD 2 0
94 1412 PA 2 0
95 1413 MA 2 0
96 1414 WI 2 0
97 1415 CA 2 0
98 1416 Ontario 2 0
99 1417 MO 2 0
100 1418 Quebec 2 0
101 1419 OH 2 0
102 1423 TN 2 0
103 1424 CA 2 0
104 1425 WA 2 0
105 1430 TX 2 0
106 1432 TX 2 0
107 1434 VA 2 0
108 1435 UT 2 0
109 1438 Quebec 2 0
110 1440 OH 2 0
111 1441 Bermuda 2 0
112 1443 MD 2 0
113 1450 Quebec 2 0
114 1456 NANParea 2 0
115 1469 TX 2 0
116 1473 Grenada 2 0
117 1478 GA 2 0
118 1479 AR 2 0
Matrix
119 1480 AZ 2 0
120 1484 PA 2 0
121 1500 NANParea 2 0
122 1501 AR 2 0
123 1502 KY 2 0
124 1503 OR 2 0
125 1504 LA 2 0
126 1505 NM 2 0
127 1506 NewBrunswick 2 0
128 1507 MN 2 0
129 1508 MA 2 0
130 1509 WA 2 0
131 1510 CA 2 0
132 1512 TX 2 0
133 1513 OH 2 0
134 1514 Quebec 2 0
135 1515 IA 2 0
136 1516 NY 2 0
137 1517 MI 2 0
138 1518 NY 2 0
139 1519 Ontario 2 0
140 1520 AZ 2 0
141 1530 CA 2 0
142 1540 VA 2 0
143 1541 OR 2 0
144 1551 NJ 2 0
145 1559 CA 2 0
146 1561 FL 2 0
147 1562 CA 2 0
148 1563 IA 2 0
149 1567 OH 2 0
150 1570 PA 2 0
151 1571 VA 2 0
152 1573 MO 2 0
153 1574 IN 2 0
154 1575 NM 2 0
155 1580 OK 2 0
156 1585 NY 2 0
157 1586 MI 2 0
158 1600 Canada 2 0
159 1601 MS 2 0
160 1602 AZ 2 0
161 1603 NH 2 0
162 1604 BC 2 0
163 1605 SD 2 0
Matrix
164 1606 KY 2 0
165 1607 NY 2 0
166 1608 WI 2 0
167 1609 NJ 2 0
168 1610 PA 2 0
169 1612 MN 2 0
170 1613 Ontario 2 0
171 1614 OH 2 0
172 1615 TN 2 0
173 1616 MI 2 0
174 1617 MA 2 0
175 1618 IL 2 0
176 1619 CA 2 0
177 1620 KS 2 0
178 1623 AZ 2 0
179 1626 CA 2 0
180 1630 IL 2 0
181 1631 NY 2 0
182 1636 MO 2 0
183 1641 IA 2 0
184 1646 NY 2 0
185 1647 Ontario 2 0
186 1649 T&CIsland 2 0
187 1650 CA 2 0
188 1651 MN 2 0
189 1660 MO 2 0
190 1661 CA 2 0
191 1662 MS 2 0
192 1664 Montsrat 2 0
193 1670 CNMI 2 0
194 1671 GU 2 0
195 1678 GA 2 0
196 1682 TX 2 0
197 1684 AS 2 0
198 1700 NANParea 2 0
199 1701 ND 2 0
200 1702 NV 2 0
201 1703 VA 2 0
202 1704 NC 2 0
203 1705 Ontario 2 0
204 1706 GA 2 0
205 1707 CA 2 0
206 1708 IL 2 0
207 1709 Newfoundland 2 0
208 1710 US 2 0
Matrix
209 1712 IA 2 0
210 1713 TX 2 0
211 1714 CA 2 0
212 1715 WI 2 0
213 1716 NY 2 0
214 1717 PA 2 0
215 1718 NY 2 0
216 1719 CO 2 0
217 1720 CO 2 0
218 1724 PA 2 0
219 1727 FL 2 0
220 1731 TN 2 0
221 1732 NJ 2 0
222 1734 MI 2 0
223 1740 OH 2 0
224 1754 FL 2 0
225 1757 VA 2 0
226 1758 St.Lucia 2 0
227 1760 CA 2 0
228 1762 GA 2 0
229 1763 MN 2 0
230 1765 IN 2 0
231 1767 Dominica 2 0
232 1769 MS 2 0
233 1770 GA 2 0
234 1772 FL 2 0
235 1773 IL 2 0
236 1774 MA 2 0
237 1775 NV 2 0
238 1778 BC 2 0
239 1779 IL 2 0
240 1780 Alberta 2 0
241 1781 MA 2 0
242 1784 St. V&G 2 0
243 1785 KS 2 0
244 1786 FL 2 0
245 1787 PrtoRico 2 0
246 1800 NANParea 2 0
247 1801 UT 2 0
248 1802 VT 2 0
249 1803 SC 2 0
250 1804 VA 2 0
251 1805 CA 2 0
252 1806 TX 2 0
253 1807 Ontario 2 0
Matrix
254 1808 HI 2 0
255 1809 DomRepub 2 0
256 1810 MI 2 0
257 1812 IN 2 0
258 1813 FL 2 0
259 1814 PA 2 0
260 1815 IL 2 0
261 1816 MO 2 0
262 1817 TX 2 0
263 1818 CA 2 0
264 1819 Quebec 2 0
265 1828 NC 2 0
266 1829 DomRepub 2 0
267 1830 TX 2 0
268 1831 CA 2 0
269 1832 TX 2 0
270 1843 SC 2 0
271 1845 NY 2 0
272 1847 IL 2 0
273 1848 NJ 2 0
274 1850 FL 2 0
275 1856 NJ 2 0
276 1857 MA 2 0
277 1858 CA 2 0
278 1859 KY 2 0
279 1860 CT 2 0
280 1862 NJ 2 0
281 1863 FL 2 0
282 1864 SC 2 0
283 1865 TN 2 0
284 1866 NANParea 2 0
285 1867 Yukon 2 0
286 1868 Tri&Tob 2 0
287 1869 St. K&N 2 0
288 1870 AR 2 0
289 1876 Jamaica 2 0
290 1877 NANParea 2 0
291 1878 PA 2 0
292 1888 NANParea 2 0
293 1900 NANParea 2 0
294 1901 TN 2 0
295 1902 N Scotia 2 0
296 1903 TX 2 0
297 1904 FL 2 0
298 1905 Ontario 2 0
Matrix
299 1906 MI 2 0
300 1907 AK 2 0
301 1908 NJ 2 0
302 1909 CA 2 0
303 1910 NC 2 0
304 1912 GA 2 0
305 1913 KS 2 0
306 1914 NY 2 0
307 1915 TX 2 0
308 1916 CA 2 0
309 1917 NY 2 0
310 1918 OK 2 0
311 1919 NC 2 0
312 1920 WI 2 0
313 1925 CA 2 0
314 1928 AZ 2 0
315 1931 TN 2 0
316 1936 TX 2 0
317 1937 OH 2 0
318 1939 PrtoRico 2 0
319 1940 TX 2 0
320 1941 FL 2 0
321 1947 MI 2 0
322 1949 CA 2 0
323 1951 CA 2 0
324 1952 MN 2 0
325 1954 FL 2 0
326 1956 TX 2 0
327 1970 CO 2 0
328 1971 OR 2 0
329 1972 TX 2 0
330 1973 NJ 2 0
331 1978 MA 2 0
332 1979 TX 2 0
333 1980 NC 2 0
334 1985 LA 2 0
335 1989 MI 2 0
336 0117 Kazkstan 2
337 01120 Egypt 2
338 01127 South Africa 2
339 01130 Greece 2
340 01131 Netherlands 2
341 01132 Belgium 2
342 01133 France 2
343 01134 Spain 2
Matrix
344 01136 Hungary 2
345 01139 VaticanCity 2
346 01140 Romania 2
347 01141 Switzerland 2
348 01143 Austria 2
349 01144 UK 2
350 01145 Denmark 2
351 01146 Sweden 2
352 01147 Norway 2
353 01148 Poland 2
354 01149 Germany 2
355 01151 Peru 2
356 01152 Mexico 2
357 01153 Cuba 2
358 01154 Argentine 2
359 01155 Brazil 2
360 01156 Chile 2
361 01157 Colombia 2
362 01158 Venezuela 2
363 01160 Malaysia 2
364 01161 Australia 2
365 01162 Indonesia 2
366 01163 Philippines 2
367 01164 NZ 2
368 01165 Singapore 2
369 01166 Thailand 2
370 01181 Japan 2
371 01182 Korea 2
372 01184 VietNam 2
373 01186 China 2
374 01190 Turkey 2
375 01191 India 2
376 01192 Pakistan 2
377 01193 Afghanistan 2
378 01194 Sri Lanka 2
379 01195 Myanmar 2
380 01198 Iran 2
381 011212 Morocco 2
382 011213 Algeria 2
383 011216 Tunisia 2
384 011218 Libya 2
385 011220 Gambia 2
386 011221 Senegal 2
387 011222 Mauritania 2
388 011223 Mali 2
Matrix
389 011224 Guinea 2
390 011225 IvoryCoast 2
391 011226 BurkinaFaso 2
392 011227 Niger 2
393 011228 Togolese 2
394 011229 Benin 2
395 011230 Mauritius 2
396 011231 Liberia 2
397 011232 SierraLeone 2
398 011233 Ghana 2
399 011234 Nigeria 2
400 011235 Chad 2
401 011236 CenAfrica 2
402 011237 Cameroon 2
403 011238 CapeVerde 2
404 011239 SaoTome 2
405 011240 Equtl_Guinea 2
406 011241 Gabonese 2
407 011242 Congo 2
408 011243 CongoDem 2
409 011244 Angola 2
410 011245 GuineaBissa 2
411 011246 DiegoGarcia 2
412 011247 Ascension 2
413 011248 Seychelles 2
414 011249 Sudan 2
415 011250 Rwandese 2
416 011251 Ethiopia 2
417 011252 SomalianRep 2
418 011253 Djibouti 2
419 011254 Kenya 2
420 011255 Tanzania 2
421 011256 Uganda 2
422 011257 Burundi 2
423 011258 Mozambiqu 2
424 011260 Zambia 2
425 011261 Madagascar 2
426 011262 Reunion 2
427 011263 Zimbabwe 2
428 011264 Namibia 2
429 011265 Malawi 2
430 011266 Lesotho 2
431 011267 Botswana 2
432 011268 Swaziland 2
433 011269 Comoros 2
Matrix
434 011290 StHelena 2
435 011291 Eritrea 2
436 011297 Aruba 2
437 011298 FaroeIsland 2
438 011299 Greenland 2
439 011350 Gibraltar 2
440 011351 Portugal 2
441 011352 Luxembourg 2
442 011353 Ireland 2
443 011354 Iceland 2
444 011355 Albania 2
445 011356 Malta 2
446 011357 Cyprus 2
447 011358 Finland 2
448 011359 Bulgaria 2
449 011370 Lithuania 2
450 011371 Latvia 2
451 011372 Estonia 2
452 011373 Moldova 2
453 011374 Armenia 2
454 011375 Belarus 2
455 011376 Andorra 2
456 011377 Monaco 2
457 011378 SanMarino 2
458 011379 VaticanCity 2
459 011380 Ukraine 2
460 011381 Yugoslavia 2
461 011385 Croatia 2
462 011386 Slovenia 2
463 011387 Bosnia 2
464 011389 Macedonia 2
465 011420 Czech Repub 2
466 011421 Slovakia 2
467 011423 Liechtensten 2
468 011500 Falkland 2
469 011501 Belize 2
470 011502 Guatemala 2
471 011503 El Salvador 2
472 011504 Honduras 2
473 011505 Nicaragua 2
474 011506 CostaRica 2
475 011507 Panama 2
476 011508 St.Pierre 2
477 011509 Haiti 2
478 011590 Guadeloupe 2
Matrix
479 011591 Bolivia 2
480 011592 Guyana 2
481 011593 Ecuador 2
482 011594 FrenchGuiana 2
483 011595 Paraguay 2
484 011596 Martinique 2
485 011597 Suriname 2
486 011598 Uruguay 2
487 011599 NethAntilles 2
488 011670 East Timor 2
489 011672 Antarctic 2
490 011673 Brunei 2
491 011674 Nauru 2
492 011675 PapuaNewGuin 2
493 011676 Tonga 2
494 011677 SolomonIslnd 2
495 011678 Vanuatu 2
496 011679 Fiji 2
497 011680 Palau 2
498 011681 Wallis Island 2
499 011682 Cook Islands 2
500 011683 Niuel Island 2
501 011684 AmerSamoa 2
502 011685 WSamoa 2
503 011686 Kiribati 2
504 011687 NewCaledonia 2
505 011688 Tuvalu 2
506 011689 FrenchPolyne 2
507 011690 Tokelau 2
508 011691 Micronesia 2
509 011692 MarshalIslnd 2
510 011850 Korea North 2
511 011852 Hongkong 2
512 011853 Macau 2
513 011855 Cambodia 2
514 011856 Laos 2
515 011870 SatIndlOcn 2
516 011871 SatEastAtl 2
517 011872 SatPacific 2
518 011873 SatIndianOcn 2
519 011874 SatWestAtl 2
520 011880 Bangladesh 2
521 011960 Maldives 2
522 011961 Lebanon 2
523 011962 Jordan 2
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Cost Display 322
2. Call Budget 290
3. QSIG 687
4. Least Cost Routing-An Introduction 602
=X=X=
524 011963 SyrianArab 2
525 011964 Iraq 2
526 011965 Kuwait 2
527 011966 SaudiArabia 2
528 011967 Yemen 2
529 011968 Oman 2
530 011971 UAE 2
531 011972 Israel 2
532 011973 Bahrain 2
533 011974 Qatar 2
534 011975 Bhutan 2
535 011976 Mongolia 2
536 011977 Nepal 2
537 011992 Tajikistan 2
538 011993 Turkmenistan 2
539 011994 Azerbaijani 2
540 011995 Georgia 2
541 011996 Kyrgyzstan 2
542 011998 Uzbekistan 2
543 2
544 2
545 2
546 2
547 2
: 2
998 2
999 2
Matrix
Call Cost Display
Whats this?
The ETERNITY supports to check the 'Cost' and the corresponding 'Dialed Number' for the last 10 calls made from the
DKP. This feature is called 'Call Cost Display' (CCD). The last 10 calls can be for the numbers dialed from the Trunk port
and on the Tie line network. The DSS key can also be assigned for this feature.
How to enable/disable Call Cost Display from SA mode?
Use following command to enable/disable 'Call Cost Display' for the station (DKP):
1072-181-Station-Flag
Where,
By Default, the CCD is enabled. You can navigate the up/down key to get the display of cost of last 10 calls.
How to display the Call Cost using Access Code?
The display is retained till the station remains OFF-Hook. The display will be for Cost and the Dialed Number.
For Example:
If the call charge is in 'Cent/Paise' (75 Paise), for the dialed number 02652630555, then the display will be as:
<02652630555 0.75> with the Date and Time of the call.
Relevant Topics:
2. Call Budget 290
3. QSIG 687
=X=X=
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Lift the handset Dial tone
Dial 1075. The Cost and Dialed Number will be displayed on the DKP.
Matrix
Call Disconnection Tone Detection
Whats this?
When the called party disconnects, the PSTN sends a Tone after some time to the calling party. On detecting this
tone pattern the system releases the TWT port. This tone is called Disconnection Tone.
The disconnect tone detection is supported for TWT port.
The CDT works as described below with Flow Chart.
In TWT hardware template two fields are to be programmed to enable/disable CDT detection at DID No Dial State
and DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer.
DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer is of significance only if the CDT detection is enabled at DID No Dial State
and caller doesnt dial any digit during DID Greeting message/Dial beep timer.
DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer will start after No Dial message (if assigned) or on expiry of the DID Dial Beep
Timer (i.e. there is no input from caller).
If the CDT detection is enabled in DID No Dial State and caller doesnt dial any digit during DID Dial tone timer, then
the system will start new timer DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer. During this time ETERNITY will check for the
CDT. If the caller is connected with the call he will get silence for this period of time.
If CDT is detected in this state, TWT port will get released.
If CDT is not detected during this timer, the call will be processed normally (route to programmed destination) but the
ETERNITY will look for the Call disconnect Tone detection, if it is enabled for the All Call states other than DID No
dial state.
Calls-Other than DID No dial State:
Enabling this will enable tone detection during OG Call, Non-DID IC Calls and DID IC calls after answering of station
user.
Calls-In DID No Dial State:
Enabling this will enable tone detection during DID. IC call in which caller disconnects without dialing any digit. In
such case, this option will prevent routing of this type of DID calls and the previous call will not be generated, by the
system.
For example: (refer below figure).
If during a call from FXS (party X) to TWT, after the conversation if the station user goes ON-Hook, the TWT gets
released, but if the called party (Party Y) disconnects and the station user (party X) doesnt go ON-Hook properly, the
TWT port of calling partys PBX, remains OFF-Hook. Hence it is desirable to release the TWT port as soon as the
called party disconnects.
Refer flowcharts on next page for more details.
How it works?
Both the options mentioned above can be programmed as enable/disable.
Disconnect tones frequency is not programmable. TWT port of the PBX, will detect any frequency from 275 to 655Hz.
The cadence of Disconnect Tone ON-OFF time is programmable.
Tone with frequency within 275 to 655Hz and having cadence matching with programmed ON time and OFF time will
be considered as disconnect tone and the TWT port will be released.
How to program?
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template.
Program Disconnection tone detection for IC calls as; Enabled/Disable.
ETERNITY
PSTN
Called
Party (Y)
Calling
Party (X)
Matrix
Program ON Time and OFF Time.
Range of ON Time is from: 0001 to 9999 milliseconds. Default: 750 ms.
Range of OFF Time is from: 0001 to 9999 milliseconds. Default: 750 ms.
Important Points:
Disconnect Tones Frequency and ON Time and OFF Time (Cadence) can be known from PSTN Exchange from
which trunk line is subscribed.
This feature is not applicable for the T1E1PRI, Mobile, SIP and BRI trunk because their protocols support specific
messages for the call disconnection, and so the ports get released because of proper disconnection signaling.
Relevant Topics:
2. Disconnect Signaling on SLT 469
Call comes on TWT port
Is DID activated
on the TWT?
System answers the call by
making TWT off-hook
Is voice message
greeting programmed for
this trunk and current time
zone ?
System routes the call on the
programmed destination station
No
Yes
System plays the greeting message
System plays
the music
No
Yes
System gives beeps to the caller prompting him to
dial the desired station/Dial message and beeps
B
Station user answers the call
CDT detection
for All Call states other
than DID No Dial
state?
Valid CDT
detected?
System release TWT port
Enable
Disable
Yes
No
System start CDT Detection
End
System will not
detect CDT
End
A
System will start DTMF detection
Station user
on-hook?
System release
TWT Port
End
No
Yes
C
Start
Matrix
=X=X=
B
Has the
caller dialed any
digit/digits ?
Has the
DID beeps timer
expired?
Ssytem will play DID no
dial message if assigned
Is digit /
digits dialed valid
station
number ?
Is the
station free?
System transfers the call
to the dialed station.
System will play the DID error
message or give error tone
A
System will play DID busy
message or give busy tone
A
Caller is connected
with the station
End
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
CDT detection
for DID No Dial
State?
System will start CDT detection
and DID/DISA CDT Detection
timer
Enable
Disable
DID CDT
detection timer
expired?
No
Yes
System will continue
CDT detection
Valid CDT
detected?
System will release
TWT port
End
Yes
No
System will route call to
programmed destination.
Give RBT to caller
System will give
RBT to caller
CDT detection
for all call states other
than DID No Dial
state?
System will start CDT
detection Note
Enable
Disable
Note:
During CDT detection if Valid CDT is
detected
Yes
System will play DID No Reply Msg
(if assigned) or Give Dialing beeps
End
System will play DID no dial
message if assigned
System will stop DTMF
Detection
System will start
DID Ring Timer
System will stop DTMF
Detection
System will start DID
Inactivity Timer
Station user
Answers ?
System will stop DID
Inactivity Timer
Yes
DID Inactivity
Timer Expired?
System will release
TWT Port
End
No
Yes
No
System will stop
Ringing Station
Call Answered
within DID Ring
Timer?
System will start DTMF
Detection Mode
System will stop CDT
Detection if started
C
Matrix
Call Duration Control (CDC)
Whats this?
Call Duration Control (CDC) helps the customer to restrict the duration of the calls whether internal, incoming or outgoing
external calls. This feature disconnects internal, incoming or outgoing external calls after a set time. People tend to talk
about sports, movies, politics and such other subjects over telephone. Now, these topics are generally not related to
business. Moreover, such topics tend to take more time than the business talk for which the call was originally made. If
duration of each call can be restricted, people will talk to the point and not drift to other unproductive talk.
There are many advantages:
Reduction in telephone bills.
Trunks will be easily available for other outgoing calls. More business calls can be made during working hours leading
to more business.
Your trunks remain free for incoming calls. More customers can call.
People spend more time on the actual job on hand rather than on telephone. This means increased productivity.
How it works?
ETERNITY uses Allowed Lists and Denied Lists to support this feature.
When a call is made, the ETERNITY compares each digit of the dialed number string with the number strings in
Allowed List and Denied List.
If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in allowed list, the ETERNITY treats CDC
to be OFF and does not disconnect the call.
If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in denied list, the ETERNITY treats CDC
to be ON and disconnects the call after CDC timer (Provided CDC Disconnection flag is enabled).
If the dialed number matches with a number string that is available in both allowed and denied list then allowed list is
given priority and ETERNITY treats CDC to be OFF.
The above logic is followed for incoming calls also.
If the CDC for internal call is ON then CDC is applicable to all internal calls.
The ETERNITY gives warning beep to the user on expiry of the CDC timer. The call continues for another 20 seconds
after the beep and gets disconnected if the disconnection flag is enabled. This timer is fixed.
If the disconnection flag is disabled then the system does not disconnect the call but reloads the CDC timer again.
For Inter PINX or Intra PINX calls (QSIG Calls), the CDC feature will work only if it is enabled on the source port
(Calling station) irrespective of CDC is enabled or disabled on the called station.
The system gives warning beeps every time the CDC timer is matured. This helps the user to know the duration for
which he has been talking.
How to use it?
Call Duration Control can be set for each station.
Call Duration Control for Internal calls can be enabled/disabled.
Call Duration Control for Incoming calls can be enabled/disabled.
ETERNITY
Calling Party
Called Party
Call Disconnect
after 3 Minutes
Warning Beep
CDC Warn Timer CDC Good-Bye Timer
Total time after which call will be disconnected
Matrix
Call Duration Control for External Outgoing calls can be enabled/disabled.
Maximum of 64 CDC processes are available.
At a time, 64 calls can be restricted by ETERNITY for call duration.
Enabling CDC for different types of calls, defining the CDC timer, assigning External List, etc. forms a table called
CDC Table.
Each CDC Table looks like:
Maximum eight CDC tables can be programmed.
One such table can be assigned to the SLT/DKP user.
Eight CDC tables are available by default, which satisfies most of the requirements. Hence these tables can be
directly assigned to the stations.
By default, CDC Table.
By default, all stations are assigned CDC table 1.
However for special types of requirements, customized Allowed Lists and Denied Lists should be programmed and
should be assigned to a CDC table. Then after this CDC table should be assigned to a station. Please refer External
List for more details.
For example, to disconnect all calls starting with '0' except those starting with '022', program with string '022' and with
string '0' and assign these lists as allowed list and denied in the CDC table.
How to program?
Step 1
Take a pen and a paper pad. Decide the type of calls viz. Outgoing, Incoming or Internal for which CDC is to be enabled.
Step 2
Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template for more details.
Step 3
Use following command to enable CDC for Outgoing Call:
4202-1-CDC Table-Code
4202-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Code
4202-*-Code
Where,
Parameter Value
Internal Call Control Yes/No
Incoming Call Control Yes/No
Outgoing Call Control Yes/No
Calls Allowed List Number from 01 to 24
Calls Denied List Number from 01 to 24
CDC Timer 001-999 Seconds
CDC Disconnection Flag Yes/No
CDC Table No. Int. CDC IC CDC OG CDC CDC Apply on CDC Don't Apply CDC Timer CDC Dis. Flag
1 No No No Ext. list 07 Ext. list 08 160 Sec. Disable
2 No No Yes Ext. list 07 Ext. list 08 160 Sec. Disable
Matrix
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Use following command to enable CDC for Incoming Call:
4203-*-Code
Where,
Use following command to enable CDC for internal call:
4204-*-Code
Where,
Use following command to assign an external number to a table (Allowed Numbers):
4205-1-CDC Table-External List
4205-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-External List
4205-*-External List
Where,
External List is from 01 to 24.
By default, External List (Allowed) number = 07.
Use following command to assign an external number to a table (Denied Numbers):
4206-1-CDC Table-External Number
4206-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-External Number
4206-*-External Number
Where,
External List is from 01 to 24.
By default, External List (Denied) Number = 08.
Use following command to assign CDC timer to a CDC table:
4207-1-CDC Table-CDC Timer
4207-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-CDC Timer
4207-*-CDC Timer
Where,
CDC Timer is from 001 to 999 seconds.
Use following command to assign disconnection flag to a CDC table:
4208-1-CDC Table-Disconnection Flag
4208-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Disconnection Flag
4208-*-Disconnection Flag
Where,
Step 4
(To default the CDC table)
Code Meaning
1 CDC Enabled
0 CDC Disabled
Code Meaning
1 CDC Enabled
0 CDC Disabled
Code Meaning
1 CDC Enabled
0 CDC Disabled
Matrix
For the default values please refer the default values of different parameter in different table explained earlier.
Use the following command to default a CDC table:
4201-1-CDC Table
4201-2-CDC Table-CDC Table
4201-*
Where,
CDC Table is 1 to 8.
Example 1:
Program SLT 202 (software port number 001) for following constraints:
Disconnect all calls starting with '0' after 240 seconds except calls starting with '022'.
Solution:
As observed this type of requirement cannot be met by default CDC table. Also it is not advisable to disturb any default
CDC table because these might be assigned to other stations. Hence customize any CDC table and assign it to station
201.
Let us customize CDC table 5.
Enable CDC for Outgoing call
4202-1-5-1
Program the number '0' in External List 04 and '022' in External List 05. (This step is necessary because default External
List does not contain such an option whereby 022 is available in allowed list and 0 is available in denied list).
Please refer External List for more details on programming above requirements.
Assign External List 04 as allowed list and External List 05 as denied list in table 5.
4205-1-5-04
4206-1-5-05
Assign CDC timer of 240 seconds
4207-1-5-240
Enable CDC disconnection flag in CDC table 5
4208-1-5-1
Assign CDC table 5 to SLT 202.
Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template for more details.
Important Points:
In case of transferred call, the CDC timer gets reset and starts again afresh on the transferred station.
It is possible to disconnect specific outgoing calls. For example it is possible to disconnect all calls to 022-8765432
after 180 seconds.
In case of Conference and Park state, CDC is treated OFF.
In case of Interrupt Request, Barge-In or Raid CDC is ON.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Duration Display 330
=X=X=
Matrix
Call Duration Display
Whats this?
The ETERNITY helps the user to know the duration of the current outgoing call instantly. The system displays the
duration of the call on the LCD of the Digital Key Phone.
How it works?
When the DKP user goes OFF-Hook, dials an external number, the system waits for inter digit timer after the last digit
dialed. The external number is dialed out. DKP displays dialed external number with duration (in the format of
MM:SS), when the call is matured.
Important Point:
Only DKP users can use this feature.
Relevant Topic:
1. Call Duration Control (CDC) 326
=X=X=
Matrix
Call Forward
Whats this?
In an organisation people move from one place to another place during typical workday. They do not sit at fixed
places. A manager might go on the production floor or remain in conference room for few hours. In such situation, he
cannot afford to miss his calls. He would like to fulfill this requirement. ETERNITY offers a facility called Call
Forward. Many times the user shuttles between two places frequently. In such case it is cumbersome to forward the
call, cancel it and repeat this activity frequently. ETERNITY offers flexibility to allow the user to attend the call at either
place also. Access to Call forward is programmable. Calls can be forwarded to an external number or VMS also.
The Call Forward-Dual ring is not supported by QSIG signaling.
How it works?
The following flow chart explains the logic:
The calls of a station can be forwarded to another station, to an External Number/Department Group or the VMS group.
The calls of a station can be forwarded when the station is busy, when the station does not reply and when the station is
busy or does not reply. ETERNITY allows the user to forward his calls, yet program that both the stations ring. The user
can answer the call from either station. Please refer the topics Routing Group, Department Call and Voice Mail
Integration for more details on Department Group and VMS Group.
How to use it?
1. Call Forward-All calls to another Station
One can forward all the calls to his station to another station where he might be temporarily shifted.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to Station 24, he should dial 131-24.
2 Dial 131-Station/Department Group/VMS Group. Confirmation tone
Start
Station A calls station B
Has station
B forwarded his
calls?
System routes the call to new
station where calls are forwarded
Is the
new station
free?
System places the call on new station. New
station get ring. Station A gets ring back tone.
End
System checks for other features
End
System blocks the call.
Station A gets busy tone.
End
No
Yes
No
Yes
Matrix
2. Call Forward-All calls to external number
One can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to his residence using TAC 61, he should dial 131-61-2630555-#*.
3. Call Forward-If Busy
One can forward all the calls to his station if he is busy with some other station when the call arrives.
Example:
If station 23 wants to forward all his calls to station 24 when he is busy, he should dial 132-24.
4. Call Forward-If Busy-All calls to external number
One can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61 when he is busy, he should dial
132-61-2630555-#*.
5. Call Forward-If No Reply
Each station can set different 'Time' after which the call gets forwarded for feature, Call Forward-No Reply. The default
time is 30 seconds. This time is programmable for each station. Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template. This
timer is called 'Call Forward Ring Timer'.
Example:
Station 23 wants that if he does not answer the calls within 30 seconds the calls should go to Station 24 (his
colleague), he should dial 133-24.
6. Call Forward-If No Reply-All calls to external number
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61 if he does not answer the call
within 30 secs., he should dial 133-61-2630555-#*.
7. Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply
2 Dial 131-Trunk Access Code-Destination Number-#*. Confirmation tone
Matrix
8. Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply-All calls to external number
One can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number if he is busy or does not answer the call.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61 when he is busy or does not reply,
he should dial 134-61-2630555-#*.
9. Cancel Call Forward
10. Call Forward-Dual Ring
This feature enables the user to attend the call on either station viz. users station or the forwarded station.
Note: The Call Forward-Dual ring is not supported by QSIG signaling.
On enabling this command:
If the user uses Call Forward-If No Reply then the station on which the call is forwarded will ring for 'Call Forward Ring
Timer', Transfer on no-reply and then after both the stations will ring. Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to Station 24, he should dial 131-24. If the user also dials 1361 then both the
stations 23 and 24 will ring simultaneously and the user can answer the call from either station.
11. Disable Call Forward-Dual Ring
How to program?
Call forward is a programmable feature and it can be allowed or denied for a station. Please refer Class of Service (COS)
for more details.
Call Forward Ring Timer: Each station can set different 'Time' after which the call gets forwarded for feature, Call
Forward-No Reply. For this, the station should be assigned the suitable Station Advance Feature template. Refer chapter
Station Advanced Feature Template to assign the template.
Important Points:
If Station A forwards his calls to Station B, then Station C can forward his calls to Station A.
If Station A forward his calls to Station B, Station B can now forward his calls to Station C. All the calls for Station A
now land on Station B only, but the calls of Station B land on Station C.
Only one type of call forward can be set from a station every new call forward set overwrites the previously set call
forward.
In case, a station forwards calls to an external number, the internal calls to the station are not forwarded to the
external number.
Matrix
Station A (24) belonging to a department group (for e.g. 3901) forwards his calls (on Busy or No Reply or If Busy + No
Reply) to Station B. Now when Station C calls Station A directly, the calls are forwarded to Station B. If Station C calls
the department group, the calls land in sequence on all the stations of the department group. When it is the turn of
Station A, the calls are not forwarded to station B but Station A rings instead.
When Call Forward-No Reply is to a Department Group, please ensure that the RBT timer of the caller is greater than
the Ring Timer of the department.
When the calls are forwarded the user normally gets the feature tone on lifting the handset. This is normally an
indication to the user that the calls of his station are forwarded.
DND is given priority over Call Forward, when both are set.

Relevant Topics:
2. Department Call 412
4. Voice Mail Integration 908
5. Routing Group 721
6. Call Progress Tones 343
7. Trunk Landing Group (TLG) 886
9. Do Not Disturb (DND) 472
10. QSIG 687
=X=X=
Matrix
Call Forward-Remote
Whats this?
The ETERNITY allows a feature Call Forward-Remote. This is possible only from SA mode.
With this a station user can set Call Forward for a remote station from his/her station.
This feature is very useful for Enterprises where the operator or receptionist can forward the calls for Manager and
other users to the destinations where they will be available.
Notes:
The Call Forward-Remote is not supported by QSIG signaling.
Refer separate Manual for Hotel Applications of this feature.
How to use it?
From SA Mode
To set Call Forward-Remote (From SLT/DKP)
To set Call Forward of all the stations (From SLT/DKP)
Where,
Source station could be a SLT (001-512) or DKP (001-128)
Destination can be SLT, DKP, a Department Group, VMS Group or External Number.
How to program?
Access to Call Forward-Remote is programmable. Please refer Class of Service (COS) for more details. Station users
with 'Allow SA Settings' enabled in their COS can execute this feature.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Forward 331
3. Programming the System 682
=X=X=
1 Dial 1072-006-Flexible Number-Call Forward Type-Destination. Confirmation tone
1 Dial 1072-007-Call Forward Type-Destination. Confirmation tone
Call Forward Type Meaning
0 Cancel
1 All Calls
2 If Busy
3 If No Reply
4 If Busy or No Reply
5 Dual Ring
Matrix
Call Hold
What's this?
Call Hold enables you to put an on-going conversation (with an internal or external number) on hold, and call another
person or receive a call from another person. You can retrieve the call you put on hold, after the conversation with the
other party has ended or in the middle of the conversation with the other party.
Call Hold is a feature of the DKP. ETERNITY enables two types of Call Hold on the DKP: Exclusive Hold and Global Hold.
Exclusive Hold
The call placed on Exclusive hold can be retrieved only from the DKP which put it on hold. The call remains connected to
the DKP which placed it on hold.
When a call is put on Exclusive hold, the ETERNITY starts the Call Park Timer and Call Park Release Timer.
The call remains on hold for the duration of the Call Park Timer (programmable; default: 45 seconds). If this call is not
retrieved before the Call Park Timer expires, the call is parked in the Personal Orbit for the duration of the Call Park
Release Timer (programmable; default: 3 minutes). If the DKP becomes idle within this Timer, the call is returned to the
DKP and the DKP gets Ring Back Tone.
If the DKP is busy, the system waits for the duration of the Call Park Release Timer for the DKP to go idle or retrieve the
call. If the DKP goes idle within this Timer, the call is returned to the DKP and the DKP gets Ring Back Tone.
The call is disconnected if the DKP is still not free or does not retrieve the call before the Call Park Release Timer
expires.
A call placed on Exclusive Hold can be retrieved in the following ways:
Pressing the Hold key again (when the DKP is idle).
Pressing the Key of the Call Appearance of the call put on hold (before it gets parked).
Pressing DSS key assigned to the Trunk/extension you put on hold.
Answering the call, when it returns at the end of the Call Park Timer.
Global Hold
The call placed on Global hold can be picked up from any DKP extension of ETERNITY. The call remains connected in
the system. The call remains on hold for the duration of the Call Hold Retrieval Timer (programmable; default: 60
seconds). If this call is not retrieved before the expiry of the Timer, the call is returned to the DKP which put it on hold.
To be able to place calls on Global Hold, you must enable 'Global Hold' in the System Parameters of ETERNITY. The
DKP (which picks up the call) must have a DSS Key to access the Trunk or the Extension which is put on hold.
When Global Hold is enabled in the System Parameters, all DKPs connected to the ETERNITY can pick up calls put on
hold by another DKP by:
Pressing DSS key assigned to the Trunk put on Global Hold.
Pressing the DSS key assigned to the extension put on Global Hold.
The call on Global Hold must be picked up before the Call Hold Retrieval Timer expires.
ETERNITY provides the flexibility to use Exclusive Hold and Global Hold at the same time. You can put calls on
Exclusive Hold even when Global Hold is enabled in the system.
How to program
For this feature to work, you must program the following parameters:
Class of Service: Call Hold must be enabled in the Class of Service of the DKPs you want to allow this feature. Refer
the topics Class of Service (COS) and Station Basic Feature Template for programming instructions.
Global Hold: Enable this flag in the System Parameters if you want Calls on Hold to be picked up by any DKP
extension.
Matrix
DSS Keys: Program DSS Keys for Trunks and Stations on the DKPs which are allowed to retrieve calls on Global
Hold. Refer the topic Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for instructions.
Call Hold Retrieval Timer: Change the default setting this timer to the desired duration, if required.
Call Park Timer: Change the default setting this timer to the desired duration, if required.
Call Park Release Timer: Change the default setting this timer to the desired duration, if required.

You can program these parameters using Jeeves or a Telephone.
Programming Call Hold Parameters using Jeeves
Login to Jeeves as System Engineer.
Enter Full Programming Access mode.
Click on 'System Parameters' to open the page.
Click on the check box to enable the 'Global Hold' flag.
Click on 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your changes.
Click on 'System Timers and Counts' to open the page.
Go to 'Call Hold Retrieval Timer'. Set the Timer to the desired duration.
Go to 'Call Park Timer'. Set the Timer to the desired duration.
Go to 'Call Park Release Timer'. Set the Timer to the desired duration.
Click on 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save your changes.
Log out of Jeeves.
Programming Call Hold Parameters using a Telephone
Enter SE mode.
To enable/disable Global Hold flag, dial
5318-Code
Where,
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To change Call Hold Retrieval Timer, dial:
3805-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001-999 Seconds.
To change Call Park Timer, dial:
3809-Seconds
Where,
To change Call Park Release Timer, dial:
3810-Minutes
Where,
Default: 10 minutes.
Exit SE mode.
How to use
Exclusive Hold
To put a call on Exclusive Hold, when Global Hold is disabled:
You are in speech with on a Trunk/with an extension.
Matrix
Press Hold key, go idle.
Call with Trunk/extension is put on 'Exclusive Hold'.
To retrieve the call,
press Call Appearance key of your DKP
press DSS Key of the Trunk/extension you put on hold from your DKP.
To put a call on Exclusive Hold, when Global Hold is enabled:
Press Hold key twice in quick succession within 1 second.
Go idle.
Call with Trunk/extension is put on 'Exclusive Hold'.
To retrieve the call,
press Call Appearance key of your DKP
press DSS Key of the Trunk/extension you put on hold from your DKP.
Global Hold
To put a call on Global Hold:
To put on Global Hold, press 'Hold' key.
Go idle.
To retrieve a call on Global Hold:
From any DKP,
Press the DSS Key of the Trunk/extension put on Global hold, which is blinking slowly 'Blue' (on EON48) or
'Green' (on EON42) color.
Relevant Topics:
6. Call Park 339
Matrix
Call Park
What is this?
The station user can use 'Call Park' feature only if "Call Park" is enabled in COS of the requesting station. Refer
chapter Class of Service (COS).
Current call can be parked and the station user can attend to other calls.
The parked person gets music.
Once the call is parked the station user can use other system features like Call Pick Up, External Call, etc.
The parked call can be retrieved on completion of the current call.
The System hunts the station that has parked the call on expiry of the Call Park Timer. If the station is free, it rings and
the caller now gets Ring Back Tone. If the station is not free then the call remains parked and again hunts on expiry
of the call park timer.
The system keeps hunting the station till the expiry of the Call Park Release Timer. On expiry of the call park release
timer, the call is disconnected.
The ETERNITY offers two types of Call Park facility viz. Call Park-General Orbit and Call Park-Personal Orbit. The
Station user can park the call either in the General Orbit or the Personal Orbit as per the requirement.
General Orbit:
The ETERNITY has 8 general orbits. A station can park his call in any of these orbits. Any station user can pick up
the call from anywhere by dialing the code of Retrieve Call Park code followed by the Orbit Number. For retrieving
the parked call, Class of Service is not checked, hence any station user can retrieve the parked call.
Personal Orbit:
Each SLT and DKP has one Personal Orbit. Calls Parked in personal orbit can be picked up only from where the
call is parked. So no other person can pick up this call. In personal orbit multiple calls can be parked at a time. No
programming is required for this.
How to use it?
To Park a call
To retrieve the Parked call
Orbit Number is from 1 to 9.
1 is the Personal Orbit Number.
2-9 is the General Orbit Number.
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for more details on how to allow Call Park to a user.
Timers of Relevance:
Call Park Timer-Time after which the call comes back to the station that has parked the call.
Range: 002 to 255 seconds.
Call Park Release Timer-Time after which the call gets disconnected.
Command: 3810-Minutes
Default: 003 minutes.
Range: 001 to 255 minutes.
Important Points:
If you dont retrieve the call within 45 seconds, the call comes back to you automatically. If your station is free, it starts
ringing. This timer is called Call Park Timer and is programmable.
If station is busy then the call again gets parked. The system again checks your station after 45 seconds.
The call gets released after 3 minutes if the parked call is not answered. This timer is called Call Park Release Timer.
1 Speech with trunk (or Station)
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial 115-Orbit Number. Call Parked.
2 Dial 116-Orbit Number. Speech established.
Matrix
Only one call can be parked in each general orbit. However, multiple calls can be parked simultaneously in the
personal orbit.
If multiple calls are parked in the personal orbit then they can be retrieved one by one. However the call retrieval does
not follow any particular sequence like FIFO or LIFO.
The LED of the parked station keeps on flickering on the DKP of the user who has parked the call thereby giving
visual indication of call park status. Pressing the DSS key assigned for Call Park feature can retrieve the parked call.
In fact, this key works as toggle key. The same key can be used to park a call and retrieve the parked call.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Matrix
Call Pick Up
ETERNITY offers two types of call pick up facility viz. Call Pick Up-group and Call Pick Up-selective.
Call Pick Up-Group
Whats this?
You can answer calls of your colleague or co-worker without physically going to his station. You can use this feature to
answer even trunk calls ringing on other stations.
CPU group is assigned to SLT, DKP and ISDN Terminal.
How to use it?
How to program?
Step 1
Take a pen and a piece of paper and list the stations to be grouped in one Call Pick Up Group. Make such groups as per
the need.
Step 2
Use the following command to program Call Pick Group for SLT:
3901-1-SLT-Call Pickup Group
3901-2-SLT-SLT-Call Pickup Group
3901-*-Call Pickup Group
Where,
SLT is from 001 to 512.
Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 99.
Use following command to de-assign Call Pickup Group for SLT:
3901-1-SLT-00
3901-2-SLT-SLT-00
3901-*
Step 3
Use the following command to program Call Pick Group for DKP:
3902-1-DKP-Call Pickup Group
3902-2-DKP-DKP-Call Pickup Group
Where,
Use following command to de-assign Call Pickup Group for DKP:
3902-1-DKP-00
3902-2-DKP-DKP-00
3902-*
Step 4
Use following command to assign call pickup group to ISDN Terminal:
3903-1-ISDN Terminal-Call Pickup Group
3903-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Call Pickup Group
Where,
ISDN Terminal is from 01 to 64.
2 Dial 4. Speech.
Matrix
Call Pickup Group 00 is used to de assign call pick up group to ISDN Terminal
By default, Call Pickup Group to ISDN Terminal is 01.
Step 5
Use the following command to program Call Pick Group for DOP:
3904-1-DOP-Call Pickup Group
Where,
DOP is 1.
By default, Call Pick Up Group is 01.
Use the following command to de-assign the Call Pick Up Group from a DOP:
3904-1-DOP-00
Call Pick Up-Selective
Whats this?
Answer call of a particular ringing station.
Useful when more than one stations are ringing and you want to answer one of them selectively.
How to use it?
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for more details on how to allow Call Pickup-Selective to a user.
Important Points:
To pick up a call, using Call Pickup-Group the ringing stations should be in the same Pick Up Group.
In case of more stations ringing, the station with the least port number will be picked up first.
To pick up selective calls, the ringing station need not be in the same Call Pick Up Group.
The call pick up groups can be only 01 to 99, because assigning 00 as the call pick up group is equivalent to clearing
the Call Pick Up Group.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
2 Dial 12-Number of Ringing Station. Speech.
Matrix
Call Progress Tones
Whats this?
The ETERNITY gives various tones in different situations. This is how the ETERNITY responds to dialing of codes
and commands. The call progress generation type (frequency and timings) is programmable. The Call Progress Tone
Generation (CPTG) type requirements of the various region markets are different. Hence, the ETERNITY gives
flexibility of choosing the required CPTG.
If an user, on selecting a Region Code for region 'xyz' and defaulting the system, the system is loaded with values to
suit the Region XYZ. CPTG is as per the CPTG type number as per the table below.
CPTG Type:
ETERNITY supports different CPTG types, stored in the 'ETERNITY ME Card Switch'. By default, CPTG Type is
assigned for all the region code, as per default table given below.
During following events, ETERNITY ME Card Master sends the CPTG Type Number to the 'ETERNITY ME Card
Switch'.
On Power ON of the system.
When region code is changed by SE.
When CPTG Type Number is changed by the SE.
Use the following command to select the CPTG type:
3501-CPTG Type Number
Where,
Type
Number
Region Dial tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Ring Back Tone Busy Tone
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence (sec)
1 ETERNITY
Type1
440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 350+440 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
440 0.75on 0.75off
2 ETERNITY
Type2
400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 0.6on 0.2off
0.2on 2.0off
400 0.5on 0.5off
3 ETERNITY
Type3
350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
4 Argentina 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0 off 425 0.3on 0.2off
5 Australia 425*25 Continuous 425*25 Continuous 400*25 .4on .2off .4on
2.0off
425 0.375on 0.375off
6 Brazil 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0 off 425 0.25on 0.25off
7 Canada 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
8 China 450 Continuous 450 Continuous 450 1.0on 4.0off 450 0.35 on 0.36off
9 Egypt 425*50 Continuous 425*50 Continuous 425*50 2.0on 1.0off 425*50 1.0on 4.0off
10 France 440 Continuous 440 Continuous 440 1.5on 3.5off 440 0.5on 0.5off
11 Germany 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.48on 0.48off
12 Greece 425 0.2on 0.3off
0.7on 0.8off
425 0.2on 0.3off
0.7on 0.8off
425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.3on 0.3off
13 India2 400*25 Continuous 400*25 Continuous 400*25 .4on .2off .4on
2.0off
400 0.75on 0.75off
14 Indonesia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
15 Iran 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
16 Iraq 400 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 1.5off
400 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 1.5off
400 Continuous 400 1.0on 1.0off
17 Israel 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 1.0on 3.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
18 Italy 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
19 Japan 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400*25 1.0on 2.0off 400 .5on .5off
20 Kenya 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.67on 3.0off
1.5on 5.0off
425 0.2on 0.6off
0.2on 0.6off
21 Korea 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 1.0on 2.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
22 Malaysia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
425 0.5on 0.5off
23 Mexico 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.25on 0.25off
24 New Zealand 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
400 0.5on 0.5off
Matrix

25 Phillippines 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425+480 1.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
26 Poland 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
27 Portugal 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 5.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
28 Russia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.8on 3.2off 425 0.4on 0.4off
29 Saudi Arabia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.2on 4.6off 425 0.5on 0.5off
30 Singapore 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425*24 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
425 .75on .75off
31 South Africa 400*33 Continuous 400*33 Continuous 400*33 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
400 .5on .5off
32 Spain 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.5on 3.0off 425 0.2on 0.2off
33 Thailand 400*50 Continuous 400*50 Continuous 400 1.0on 4.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
34 Turkey 450 Continuous 450 Continuous 450 2.0on 4.0off 450 0.5on 0.5off
35 UAE 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
400 0.375on 0.375off
36 UK 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
400 0.375on 0.375off
37 USA 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
38 VisUltra Italy 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 1.0on 2.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
39 Belgium 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 0.25off 425 1.0on 3.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
40 VisUltra India 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 350+440 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
400 0.75on 0.75off
Type
Number
Region Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT
Freq. Cadence (sec) Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
1 ETERNITY
Type1
440 0.25on 0.25 off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
350+
440
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
440 0.1on 2.9off
2 ETERNITY
Type2
400 0.25on 0.25 off 400 0.1on
0.1off
400 1.5on
0.1off
400 0.2on 4.8off 400 0.2on 4.8off
3 ETERNITY
Type3
440 0.25on 0.25 off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
440+
480
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
440 0.1on 2.9off
4 Argentina 425 0.3on 0.4off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.3on
10.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
5 Australia 425 0.375on 0.375off 425*25 0.1on
0.1off
425*
25
0.1on
0.9off
425 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on 4.4off
425 Continuous
6 Brazil 425 0.25on 0.25 off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.05on
1.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
7 Canada 480+620 0.25on 0.25off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
440 0.3on
10.0off
480+
620
0.5on 0.5off
8 China 450 0.7on 0.7off 450 0.1on
0.1off
450 0.1on
0.9off
450 0.4 on 4.0off 450 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on 0.6off
9 Egypt 450 0.5on 0.5off 425*50 0.1on
0.1off
425*
50
0.1on
0.9off
425*
50
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
450 0.5on 0.5off
10 France 440 0.25on 0.25off 440 0.1on
0.1off
440 0.1on
0.9off
440 0.3on
10.0off
440 0.1on 2.9off
11 Germany 425 0.24on 0.24off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.2on .2off
.2on 5.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
12 Greece 425 0.15on 0.15off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.3on
10.0off
0.3on
10.0off
425 0.15on
0.25off
0.15on
1.45off
13 India2 400 0.25on 0.25off 400 1.0on
4.0off
400*
25
0.1on
0.9off
400 0.2on 0.1off
0.2on 7.5off
400 0.15on
4.85off
14 Indonesia 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.15on
0.15off
0.15on
10.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
Type
Number
Region Dial tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Ring Back Tone Busy Tone
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence (sec)
Matrix
15 Iran 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on
10.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
16 Iraq 400 0.25on 0.25off 400 0.1on
0.1off
400 0.1on
0.9off
400 0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
400 0.1on 2.9off
17 Israel 400 0.25on 0.25off 400 0.17on
0.14off
0.34on
5.0off
400 0.1on
0.9off
400 0.5on
10.0off
400 0.1on 2.9off
18 Italy 425 0.2on 0.2off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.4on 0.1off
0.25on
0.1off
0.15on
5.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
19 Japan 400 0.25on
0.25off
400 0.1on
0.1off
400 0.1on
0.9off
400*
25
0.5on 2.0off
0.05on
0.45off
0.05on
3.45off
400*
25
0.1on 2.9off
20 Kenya 425 0.2on 0.6off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
425 0.1on 2.9off
21 Korea 480+620 0.3on 0.2off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
350+
440
0.25on
0.25off
0.25on
3.25off
350+
440
0.1on 2.9off
22 Malaysia 425 2.5on 0.5off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on 5.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
23 Mexico 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
425 0.1on 2.9off
24 New Zealand 400 0.25on 0.25off 400 0.1on
0.1off
400 0.1on
0.9off
400 0.2on 3.0off
0.2on 5.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
25 Phillippines 480+620 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
440 0.3on
10.0off
440 0.1on 2.9off
26 Poland 425 0.5on 0.5off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.15on
0.15off
0.15on
4.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
27 Portugal 450 0.33on 1.0off 425 1.0on
0.2off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on 5.0off
425 0.2on 1.4off
28 Russia 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
950 0.333on
1.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
29 Saudi Arabia 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.15on
0.2off
0.15on
10.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
30 Singapore 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.125on
0.125off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.3on 0.2off
0.3on 3.2off
425 0.25on
2.0off
31 South Africa 400 0.25on 0.25off 400*33 0.1on
0.1off
400*
33
0.1on
0.9off
400*
33
0.4on 4.0off 400 0.15on
0.25off
0.15on
1.45off
32 Spain 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.175on
0.175off
0.175on
3.5off
425 0.1on 2.9off
33 Thailand 400 0.3on 0.3off 400*50 0.1on
0.1off
400*
50
0.1on
0.9off
400 0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
400 0.1on 2.9off
34 Turkey 450 0.2on 0.2off .6on
.2off
450 0.04on
0.04off
450 0.1on
0.9off
450 .2on .6off
.2on 8.0off
450 0.1on 2.9off
35 UAE 400 0.4on 0.35off
0.225on 0.525off
350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
350+
440
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
350+
440
0.1on 2.9off
Type
Number
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Matrix
By default, CPTG Type are as under:
Notes:
Data is considered from ITU standard.
Many countries use different frequencies/cadences for the same tone e.g., U.S. use five different frequency/cadence
for dial tone. For such cases, only one frequency/cadence among the group, is considered.
Error tone is considered as Congestion/Refusal tone as given by ITU.
Confirmation tone is considered as Acceptance tone as given by ITU.
Internal Call Waiting Tone (ICWT) is considered as Intrusion tone.
External Call Waiting Tone (CCWT) is considered as Call Waiting Tone.
The meaning of frequency notation is as follows:
f1*f2: f1 is modulated by f2.
f1+f2: The juxtaposition of two frequencies f1 and f2 without modulation.
36 UK 400 0.4on 0.35off
0.225on 0.525off
350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
350+
440
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
400 0.2on 4.8off
37 USA 480+620 0.25on 0.25off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
440 0.3on
10.0off
480+
620
0.5on 0.5off
38 VisUltra Italy 400 0.25on 0.25 off 400 0.1on
0.1off
400 1.75on
0.1off
400 0.2on 2.5off 400 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on 2.5off
39 Belgium 425 0.167on 0.167
off
425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
1400 0.175on
0.175off
0.175on
3.5off
440 0.1on 2.9off
40 VisUltra India 400 0.25on 0.25 off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
350+
440
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
350+
440
0.5on 0.5off
1.0on 5.0off
Type
Number
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Re gi on
Code
Me a ni ng
CPTG
Type No.
Re gi on
Code
Me a ni ng
CPTG
Type No.
Regi on
Code
Me a ni ng
CPTG
Type No.
001 Afghanist an 036 Greece 12 071 Oman
002 Algeria 037 Guyana 072 Pakist an
003 Ant igua and Barbuda 038 Holland 073 Paraguay
004 Argent ina 04 039 Hong kong 074 Peru
005 Aust ralia 05 040 Hungary 075 Philippines 25
006 Aust ria 041 India 01 076 Poland 26
007 Bahamas 042 Indonesia 14 077 Port ugal 27
008 Bahrain 043 Iran 15 078 Qat ar
009 Bangladesh 044 Iraq 16 079 Romania
010 Belarus 045 Ireland 080 Russia 28
011 Belgium 046 Israel 17 081 Singapore 30
012 Bhut an 047 It aly 18 082 Slovakia
013 Bolivia 048 Japan 19 083 Sout h Africa 31
014 Bosnia 049 Jordan 084 Spain 32
015 Bot swana 050 Kazakhst an 085 Sri Lanka
016 Brunei 051 Kenya 20 086 Sudan
017 Brazil 06 052 Korea-North 21 087 Sweden
018 Bulgaria 053 Korea-Sout h 21 088 Swit zerland
019 Cambodia 054 Kuwait 089 Syria
020 Cameroon 055 Kyrgyzst an 090 Taiwan
021 Canada 03 056 Lebanon 091 Tajikist an
022 Chile 057 Libya 092 Thailand 33
023 China 08 058 Malaysia 22 093 Turkey 34
024 Colombia 059 Maldives 094 Uganda
025 Cost a Rica 060 Maurit ius 095 Ukraine
026 Croat ia 061 Mexico 03 096 Unit ed Arab Emirat es 35
027 Cuba 062 Mongolia 097 Unit ed Kingdom 02
028 Cyprus 063 Mozambique 098 Unit ed St at es 03
029 Czech Republic 064 Myanmar 099 Uzbekist an
030 Denmark 065 Namibia 03 100 Venezuela
031 Egypt 09 066 Nepal 101 Viet nam
032 Fiji 067 Net herlands 102 Yemen
033 Finland 068 New Zealand 24 103 Yugoslavia
034 France 10 069 Nigeria 104 Zambia
035 Germany 11 070 Norway 105 Zimbabwe
Matrix
Dial Tone
When you lift the handset you get dial tone. Dial tone stays for 7 seconds. This Dial Tone Timer is programmable. After
that error tone starts.
Sound: Toooooooooooo
Use following command to program the Dial Tone Timer:
3502-Seconds
Valid Range = 002 to 255 seconds.
Ring Back Tone
When you dial internal number and if that number is free, you will get the Ring Back Tone (RBT). The ring back tone
continues for 45 seconds. This Ring Back Tone Timer is programmable.
Sound: Turroo... Turrroo
Use following command to program the Ring Back Tone Timer:
3503-Seconds
Busy Tone (Engage Tone)
High pitch beeps with equal ON and OFF periods. When you dial any station that is busy, you get busy tone. Busy tone
continues for 7 seconds. This Busy Tone Timer is programmable.
Sound: Tooooooo.........Toooooooo
Use following command to program the Busy Tone Timer:
3504-Seconds
Error Tone
The Error Tone is made of fast beeps. When you perform some wrong operation or try using a feature without access,
you get error tone.
Sound: TooTooTooToo
Use following command to program the Error Tone timer:
3505-Seconds
Internal Call Waiting Tone
Short beep followed by longer OFF duration repeated every second. This is also known as intrusion tone. Busy user gets
this tone over his speech when some other station attempts interrupt request/barge-in.
Sound: Beep.Beep
The user gets this tone till the Interrupt request timer or the barge in timer.
External Call Waiting Tone
This tone is of two ticks followed by a longer off time of approximately 3 seconds. Busy programmed destination station
gets this tone when there is a fresh TELCO call.
Sound: Beep...Beep....Beep...Beep
This tone continues for transfer-On busy timer.
Hold Tone
Short beep followed by a longer OFF duration repeated every second. The hold tone is given when you put a person
on hold. Hold tone continues for 7 seconds. This timer is same as Dial Tone Timer.
Confirmation Tone
This tone is continuous, fast beeps. The ETERNITY confirms successful usage of features with this tone. The
confirmation tone remains for 7 seconds. This is called Confirmation Tone Timer and is programmable.
Sound: Beep... Beep... Beep
Matrix
Use following command to program the Confirmation Tone Timer:
3506-Seconds
Programming Tone
This is exactly same as the feature tone. Short beep followed by a longer off duration repeated every second. The
ETERNITY prompts you to enter fresh commands during programming with this tone. Programming tone remains
continuous till, you go ON-Hook or dial a command.
Sound: Beep.............Beep
Programming Confirmation Tone
This is exactly same as the feature confirmation tone. This tone is continuous, fast beeps. During programming, this tone
indicates that valid command is received by the system and it has taken necessary action. This tone remains for 3
seconds. This is called Programming Confirmation Tone Timer and is programmable.
Sound: Beep... Beep... Beep
Use following command to program the Programming Confirmation Tone Timer:
3509-Seconds
Programming Error Tone
This tone is exactly same as the Error Tone. This tone is given when some wrong programming command is dialed. This
tone remains for 3 seconds. This Programming Error Tone Timer is programmable.
Sound: TooTooTooToo
Use following command to program the Programming Error Tone Timer:
3508-Seconds
Use following command to select a Dial Tone:
5307-Flag
Where,
Demonstration of Tones
It is possible to demonstrate these tones. When a customer purchases a PBX, he feels to get acquainted with different
types of tones given by the system. Unless one is familiar with these tones, he would not understand their meaning.
Use following commands to demonstrate call progress tones:
3541-Code
Where,
Flag Meaning
1 Dial Tone1
2 Dial Tone 2
Code Meaning
01 Dial Tone 1
02 Dial Tone 2
03 Ring Back Tone
04 Busy Tone
05 Error Tone
06 Confirmation Tone
07 Feature Tone
08 Routing Tone
09 Programming Tone
10 Intrusion Tone (ICWT)
Matrix
It is advisable to use a hands free telephone instrument if a group of people wants to listen to these tones. For example,
when the command 3541-03 is executed the selected RBT is demonstrated.
Timer of Relevance:
Demonstration Timer-Time for which the system demonstrates the tone/ring to the user.
Relevant Topics:
1. Region Code 705
=X=X=
11 External Call Waiting Tone (CCWT)
Code Meaning
Matrix
Call Splitting
Whats this?
This feature enables you to talk to two persons alternately.
Call Splitting is also known as Hold-Consult or Hold-Toggle.
How to use it?
Call Splitting can be used in any of the following three combinations:
Two stations.
One station and one trunk.
Two trunks.
Call Splitting between two stations:
Call Splitting between a station and a trunk:
Call Splitting between two trunks:
Note:
The DKP user need not dial Second Trunk Access Code (#) before dialing TAC to access 2
nd
trunk. Hence the DKP
user while talking on trunk call if presses 'Hold' and dials Trunk Access code for making another call, the first call will
go on Hold and the user will be able to make another call.
Important Points:
Only one of the two persons will be in conversation with you at a time. The third person is on hold. He gets music and
cannot hear your conversation.
When in speech with a station and getting external call waiting tone, you can dial Flash to answer the trunk call.
The station is put on hold and gets music. Now, you can split between the two persons.
Interrupting station can also be answered very much in the same way as described above. Your current call is put on
hold and speech with the interrupting station is established. Once again, you can split between the two persons.
From SLT, 3-Party conference can be invoked to include both the parties by dialing Flash-0.
From DKP, 3-party conference can be invoked to include both the parties by pressing Conference key or Flash-0.
You can also transfer the active person (one who is in conversation with you) to the third person.
You can also park the current person.
Access to Call Splitting is programmable.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow call splitting to a user.
Relevant Topics:
1. Conference-3 Party 381
2. Call Park 339
=X=X=
1 Speech with Station/Trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature Tone
3 Dial another Station/Trunk. Ring Back Tone
4 Speech with the station/Trunk when the call is answered
5 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party and station/trunk will get MoH.
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature Tone, Trunk goes on hold.
3 Dial #. Feature Tone
4 Grab another trunk by dialing Trunk Access Code. Trunk dial tone
5 Dial Telephone Number. Ring Back Tone
6 Speech with called party when the call is answered.
7 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party and other station will get MoH.
Matrix
Call Taping
Whats this?
Calls made/received by a station to/from another station (internal) or any other external number (outgoing/incoming)
can be taped.
The call is taped in the designated mailbox of the VMS connected to the PBX.
How it works?
Whenever a station makes an external call (outgoing) system checks for Call Taping parameters. If the number dialed
matches with any number in the External List assigned for outgoing call taping the conversation is recorded in the
VMS.
Whenever a station receives an external call, the system checks for Call Taping parameters. If the calling number
matches with any number in the number list assigned for incoming call taping, the conversation is recorded in the
VMS.
If the Call Taping parameter Tape Call without CLI is enabled in the Station Advanced Feature Template, the system
will tape all calls without CLI.
Whenever the station makes/receives an internal call then the call taping parameters are checked. If the station's flag
is enabled for internal call taping, the conversation is recorded in the VMS.
The external numbers list assigned for incoming and outgoing calls can range from 01 to 24: Assigning 00 means the
call taping is not enabled.
Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template for programming call taping parameters for a station.
Use the following command to program the port in whose mailbox the call is to be taped:
4701-Station Type-Station
Where,
When call taping begins the system beeps. These beeps can be enabled/disabled.
Use the following command to enable/disable beeps during Call Taping:
5332-Code
Where,
Important Point:
If Call Taping and Conversation Recording both are enabled for a station, then priority is given to Conversation
Recording.
Caution!
Use this feature in accordance with the local privacy laws. Matrix Telecom is not responsible for any misuse of this
feature by users.
Relevant Topics:
1. Conversation Recording 395
=X=X=
Station Type Meaning Station
00 Null --
01 SLT 001-512
02 DKP 001-128
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Call Transfer
ETERNITY offers four types of call transfer:
Call transfer-Screened.
Call transfer-While ringing.
Call transfer-On busy.
Call transfer to VMS
Call transfer-Trunk-to-Trunk.
Call Transfer using Global Hold or Exclusive Hold feature
Call Transfer-Screened
What's this?
It is most widely used.
Operators can use this method to transfer incoming calls.
While waiting for the station to answer, you can abandon the transfer by dialing Flash. The ring on the station is
stopped and you get connected to the person on hold.
How to use it?
Call Transfer-While Ringing
What's this?
Transfer a call without waiting for the destination to answer.
An operator can use this feature when there are other calls pending and she cannot wait for the station to respond to
intimate the call.
This is also known as "Wait For Ring Transfer".
If the called station does not respond to the ring within 30 seconds, the call comes back to the station that transferred
the call. This is known as Transfer-While Ringing Timer and is programmable.
Use following command to program this timer:
3806-Seconds
How to use it?
Call Transfer-On Busy
What's this?
Transfer a call on a station already in speech with some other person.
Operators can transfer calls without even checking for the status of the destination station.
This is also known as "Blind Transfer".
The busy destination station gets intrusion tone.
He can speak to the calling person by dialing 'Flash'.
A call can be transferred on busy station only if he is not programmed with call privacy from intrusion tone.
If the called station does not respond to the intrusion tone within 30 seconds, the call comes back to you. This is
known as Transfer-On Busy Timer and is programmable.
Use following command to program this timer:
3807-Seconds
3 Dial Station. Ring Back Tone
4 Wait for the station to answer. Speech with ring answered.
5 Replace the handset. Call is transferred.
1 Speech with calling or called party
3 Dial Station. Ring Back Tone
Matrix
How to use it?
Blind Transfer to VMS:
What's this?
User can Blind transfer the call directly to the VMS of the station if the Mail Box is assigned to the station. Thus the
user need not use Call Forward feature on VMS. User can do the Blind transfer to VMS using the specific access
code. Refer chapter Access Codes for feature number and access code details.
If the mail box is not assigned, to the station the user will get error tone while transferring the call to the mail box of the
station.
Note:
Allow, Call Transfer feature from Class of Service, to use this feature.

If Blind transfer to mail box is successful, transferor will get confirmation tone and the held party will get connected to
VMS
How to use it?
Following SA command is used for Blind Transfer to VMS:
Speech-Flash-Access Code of Blind Transfer to VMS-Station on which call to be transferred
For example,
Suppose following parties are interfaced with ETERNITY:
Party A = Station user of ETERNITY
Party B = Station user of ETERNITY or External Party
Party C = Station user of ETERNITY to which mail box is assigned (2001)
Party A and B are in speech and 'B' wants to transfer the Call is to mail box of Party C (Station number 2001). For
this 'B' will follow the steps below:
Using SLT:
Party B dials Flash followed by Access Code of Blind Transfer to VMS and station number 2001 of 'C':
Speech-Flash-1078-2001
Using DKP:
Party B dials:
Speech-Flash-1078-2001
OR
Speech-Press DSS key assigned for Blind Transfer to VMS -2001
On successful call transfer, Party B will receive confirmation tone, and party A will get transferred to mail box of party
C, where he will get voice prompts from VMS.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) to allow Call Transfer feature.
Call Transfer: Trunk-to-Trunk
What's this?
An external call can be transferred on another trunk line.
The operator need not remain in speech. Two external persons can speak through the ETERNITY.
In case a colleague has not come to the office, his incoming calls can be transferred on his residence's phone line or
on his mobile.
In case a remote colleague is not having long distance or international dialing facility from his present location. He can
dial his office and request the operator to connect him to the desired number.
3 Dial Station. Busy Tone
4 Disconnect. Call will be transferred on the busy station and it will get intrusion tone.
Matrix
A warning tone is given after Trunk-to-Trunk inactivity timer. To extend the call, either of the persons has to dial a digit
in tone (DTMF). Dialing of '##' terminates the call and both the trunks are released.
The user can also use 'Trunk to Trunk transfer' using 'transfer' key on DKP.
How to use it?
Trunk to Trunk transfer using SLT/DKP:
The user can also use trunk to trunk transfer using 'Transfer' key or using access code for 'Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer' on
DKP. Refer chapter Class of Service (COS). Refer chapter Access Codes for the access code for 'trunk to trunk transfer'.
Note:
nd
Call Transfer using Global Hold or Exclusive Hold feature:
The DKP user can use Global hold or Exclusive hold for transferring the call as explained below. Refer chapter 'Hold' for
more details.
DKP User A is in speech with Party B.
DKP User A presses "HOLD' Key.
Call with Party B is on Global Hold.
DKP User A starts dialing number of Party C to which call of Party B is to be transferred
Call with Party B is now on Exclusive Hold (on receipt of digits after first HOLD event)
DKP user A can now perform Blind/Attended transfer to Party C.
On completion of transfer the Party B is no more on 'Exclusive hold' for Party A.
Timer of Relevance:
Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer-The system disconnects the call after this time.
Default: 090 Seconds.
Valid Range: 001 to 255 Seconds.
Important Points:
Internal station calls can also be transferred to some other station.
If the station that transferred the call is free at the time of call return, caller gets ring.
If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was an internal call transfer then the
caller gets busy tone.
If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was a trunk call transfer then the system
waits for the station to become free. The caller gets Ring Back Tone (RBT).
In case of call transfer, the ETERNITY provides a flexibility to display either the station number that is transferring the
call or the calling party's number. This is called CLIP-Hold Party. CLIP-Hold Party is also a programmable feature.
Relevant Topics:
2. Privacy 679
1 3-way mode as described in call splitting.
3 Dial #. Station disconnects. Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 remain in speech.
1 DKP - User 'A' is in speech with external party 'B', with
trunk-X.
'A' in speech with 'B'.
2 'A' puts 'B' on Hold. Feature Tone
3 User 'A' grabs the trunk-Y by dialing TAC and dials
number of 'C'.
User 'C' will get 'ring' for incoming call. 'A' will be in
speech with 'C'.
4 While in speech, User 'A' will press 'transfer' key (trf/fl
key) or using access code for 'Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer'
on DKP.
User 'B' will get transferred to user 'C'.
(speech between user 'B' and user 'C')
Matrix
5. Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) 356
7. QSIG 687
8. Access Codes 225
9. Hold 556
=X=X=
Matrix
Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)
Whats this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility to detect the calling number and present it to the station. This is called Calling Line
Identification and Presentation. The Calling number can be presented on a SLT, DKP and ISDN Terminal.
The ETERNITY supports the following signaling protocols for CLI viz. DTMF, FSK-ITU-T, FSK-Bellcore signaling on
trunk as well as on stations. Hence, any type of trunk line whether supporting DTMF or FSK signaling can be
interfaced with the ETERNITY. Likewise any type of telephone instrument whether supporting DTMF or FSK can be
connected to the SLT port.
How it works?
The CLIP can be enabled/disabled on a station or trunk.
If CLI is enabled on a trunk then the ETERNITY senses the digits/codes sent by PSTN. It sends this information to the
landing station/operator along with the ringing signal. In case of, Internal calls the calling stations name and number
both shall be presented to called station. When the operator transfers the call to a station, the system sends this
information to the transferred station. If CLIP is enabled on the station, the calling partys number is displayed. The
calling party could be a station or an external party.
The incoming telephone number is stored in the Incoming SMDR buffer also.
In case of Call transfer, the ETERNITY provides a flexibility to display either the station number that is transferring the
call or the calling partys number. This is called CLIP-Hold Party. CLIP-Hold Party is also a programmable feature.
Refer chapter Call Transfer.
How to program?
Please refer the Topics Station Advanced Feature Template and SLT Hardware Template for details on programming.
Important Point:
Please note that CLIP and CLIP-Hold would work only if CLIR is not enabled on the station that has transferred
the call. Please refer the topic Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR).
Relevant Topics:
3. Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) 357
5. QSIG 687
=X=X=
Matrix
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)
Whats this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility that allows the Station user to restrict his identity, when he calls other station. This
is known as Calling Line Identity Restriction. CLIR should be enabled in COS.
CLIR Override
The ETERNITY also supports a feature 'CLIR Override'. If the called station has 'CLIR Override' facility, the CLIP and
CNIP or COLP and CONP (as appropriate) to the called station will be presented on the display, irrespective of CLIR
activation of calling station.
CLIR Override feature should be allowed in COS 'CLIR Override'.
How it works?
The CLIR can be enabled/disabled on a station from Class of Service Group. CLIR enabled means that your station
number will not be displayed on the station to which you have called. CLIR disabled means that your station number
will be displayed on the station to which you have called.
When a CLIR enabled station transfers a call, the recipient station does not get the identity of the station or of the
external calling party.
If the calling station has 'CLIR Override' facility the COLP and CONP to the connected station will be presented to
calling station irrespective of CLIR activation of connected station.
How to use it?
Use following Access Code to enable/disable CLIR:
103-Code
Where,
Default: Disable
Notes:
Following Table explains the display on DKP when CLIR is disabled on the station and if the station user now presses
the DSS key assigned for CLIR/Presses the feature code of CLIR:
When CLIR is enabled on the station and the station user presses he CLIR key, the user will get CLIR Disabled
messages, displayed with confirmation tone.
How to program?
Please refer the topic Class of Service (COS) to enable the feature in the COS Group assigned to the station to be
used.
Please refer the topic 'Class of Service (COS)' to enable 'CLIR override' feature in the Class of Service group
assigned to the station to be used.
Important Points:
This is a feature of the PBX and not of PSTN. It is applicable for stations only.
Please note that CLIP and CLIP-Hold would work only if CLIR is not enabled on the station that has transferred the
call.
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Action (when CLIR is disabled) Display on EON42/45
Press DSS Key or dial the feature code
CLIR Enable
CLIR Disable
User selects 'CLIR Enable' by pressing
'Hold' Or Dials "1"
CLIR Enable
LED glows continuous Red
User selects 'CLIR Disable' by scrolling
and pressing 'Hold' Or Dials "0
CLIR Disabled
LED turns off
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
4. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
Matrix
Cancel All Station Features
Whats this?
The ETERNITY supports separate cancellation code for each feature. But it is desirable to have a master command
to cancel all the features with a single command.
How to use it?
After the above command is issued, features like:
Alarms
Auto Call Back
Auto Redial
Call Follow-Me
Call Forward
Do Not Disturb
Hot Line
Hot Outward Dialing
Walk-In Class of Service
Back Ground Music
Auto Answer
Trunk Reservation, are cancelled from the station
=X=X=
Matrix
Central Ringer
Whats this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility to divert the unattended calls on DOP. A ringer connected to the DOP starts ringing
when the call lands on the DOP. This feature is called Central Ringer.
How it works?
The DOP is programmed as one of the destinations in the trunk-landing group.
It is advisable to make DOP as the last destination in the trunk-landing group, thus ensuring the calls unattended by
other stations of the trunk-landing group are only diverted to the DOP.
The call landed on the DOP can be picked up by dialing 4 from any station belonging to the same call pick up group
or by dialing 12-DOP access code (e.g. 12-3961).
If a ringer is connected to a DOP, then any station can dial the DOP access code and inform about the emergency to
the person who answers the call.
How to program?
DOP is programmed as one of the destinations (preferably last destination of the group) of the trunk landing group.
Please refer Trunk Landing Group (TLG) for more details.
Important Point:
If a DOP is used for Central Ringer application, it cannot be used for any other purpose. The DOP mode must be
programmed to 00 (Deactivated mode).
Relevant Topics:
3. Automated Control Applications 264
4. Call Pick Up 341
=X=X=
Matrix
Class of Service (COS)
What's this?
All users in an organization are not equal. Some users are important and their time is more valuable. Further, their
nature of job also differs. Keeping this diversity in mind, it is imperative that the features they need from a system
differ from person to person.
The feature requirements can also vary from time to time. For example, the features required during working hours
and during lunch/non-working hours need not be the same.
It is the system's engineer responsibility to allow or deny a feature access to a user depending on his needs. The
system should support flexible allocation of features to different users. This accessibility of different features for a
user is known as his Class of Service (COS).
How it works?
The ETERNITY supports very flexible programming of COS for important features. Each user can be assigned different
COS depending on his and the organization's needs. All the features supported by the system are presented in the form
of a list.
Each feature in the list is identified with a 2-digits number called 'COS Feature Number'.
The COS Table for giving the lists all the features with feature number to be used during programming is shown at end of
chapter.
Following Table provides Default values of enable/disable status for the features in a specific COS Group.
Default COS Table:
(Y=Allowed (Enable), N=Not Allowed (Disable), COS Gp-No.= COS Group Number)
COS-
Feature
number
Feature
Name
COS
Gp-
No.1
COS
Gp-
No.2
COS
Gp-
No.3
COS
Gp-
No.4
COS
Gp-
No.5
COS
Gp-
No.6
COS
Gp-
No.7
COS
Gp-
No.8
COS
Gp-
No.9
COS
Gp-
No.10
COS
Gp-
No.11
COS
Gp-
No.12
COS
Gp-
No.13
COS
Gp-
No.14
COS
Gp-
No.15
COS
Gp-
No.16
01 Internal Call N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
02 Call Hold N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
03 Call Split N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
04 Call Transfer N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
05 Call Pickup N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
06 ACB Busy N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
07 ACB No
Reply
N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
08 Operator
Access
N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
09 Redial N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
10 Mute N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
11 Change
Time Zone
N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
12 Auto Redial N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
13 Auto Redial
Priority
N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
14 Forced
Answer
N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N
15 Global
Directory
Part#1
N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
16 Global
Directory
Part#2
N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
17 Global
Directory
Part#3
N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
18 Call Forward N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
19 Do Not
Disturb
N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
Matrix
20 Dynamic
Lock
N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
21 Department
Call
N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
22 Conference N N N N N Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
23 Interrupt
Request
N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
24 Barge-in N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N
25 Raid N N N N N Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N
26 Hotline N N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
27 Call Budget N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
28 Paging N N N N Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
29 DISA N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N Y N
30 DND-
Override
N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N
31 Call Park N N N Y Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
32 Conversation
Recording
N N N N N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
33 Privacy from
Interrupt
Request and
Barge-in
N N N N N N N Y Y Y N N N N N Y
34 Privacy from
Raid
N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N Y
35 Privacy from
DID
N N N N N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
36 Privacy from
Trunk
Landing
when in
speech
N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N N N N N N
37 Live Call
Screening
N N N N Y Y Y N Y Y N N N N N N
38 Trunk
Reservation
N N N N Y N N N Y Y N N N N Y N
39 Room
Monitor
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
40 Direct Port
Access
N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
41 Trunk-Trunk
Transfer
N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N Y N
42 Continued
Dialing
N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
43 Account
Code
N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N N
44 Hot Desking
Access
45 Message
Wait Set/
Cancel
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y N
46 Forced
Release
47 Live Call
Supervision
48 Help Desk N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N
COS-
Feature
number
Feature
Name
COS
Gp-
No.1
COS
Gp-
No.2
COS
Gp-
No.3
COS
Gp-
No.4
COS
Gp-
No.5
COS
Gp-
No.6
COS
Gp-
No.7
COS
Gp-
No.8
COS
Gp-
No.9
COS
Gp-
No.10
COS
Gp-
No.11
COS
Gp-
No.12
COS
Gp-
No.13
COS
Gp-
No.14
COS
Gp-
No.15
COS
Gp-
No.16
Matrix
Relevant features from the list of features can be Enabled or Disabled and put in a group. For example, one can make
few feature access groups depending upon the requirement. First group may contain none of the features. Second group
may contain very common features like Call Forward, Call Transfer, Internal Dialing etc. Third group may contain move
advanced features and so on. Fifth group may contain all the features.
Please refer the topic Station Advanced Feature Template for details on how to assign COS to station.
Now, these groups can be allocated to the users depending upon the hierarchy of the user in the organization. A user can
be assigned three different COS groups for three time zones. For example, Once these groups are assigned to users, the
user COS table looks like:
Following points are relevant:
Maximum 16 COS groups can be formed (01-16).
Each feature can be enabled or disabled in each group.
49 Change
Room Clean
Status (using
maid
command)
N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N Y
50 Mini Bar
details
N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N Y Y
51 SA Mode N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N
52 SA Station
(always in
SA mode)
53 Dynamic
Lock Internal
Flag
54 Back Ground
Music
N N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
55 CLIR N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
56 CLIR
Override
57 Privacy from
DND-
Override
Station Number COS Group for WH COS Group for BH COS Group for NWH
001 01 02 08
002 08 10 15
003 11 12 13
004 16 20 05
005 01 09 11
: : : :
COS-
Feature
number
Feature
Name
COS
Gp-
No.1
COS
Gp-
No.2
COS
Gp-
No.3
COS
Gp-
No.4
COS
Gp-
No.5
COS
Gp-
No.6
COS
Gp-
No.7
COS
Gp-
No.8
COS
Gp-
No.9
COS
Gp-
No.10
COS
Gp-
No.11
COS
Gp-
No.12
COS
Gp-
No.13
COS
Gp-
No.14
COS
Gp-
No.15
COS
Gp-
No.16
Matrix
The following flowchart elaborates this procedure.

How to program?
Step 1
Take a pen and a paper pad and decide the number of groups to be formed and what all features are to be assigned to
each group.
Step 2
Use following command to enable or disable a feature in a COS group:
1302-1-COS Group-Feature Number-Code
1302-2-COS Group-COS Group-Feature Number-Code
1302-*-Feature Number-Code
Where,
COS Group from 01 to 16.
Matrix
Feature Number from 01 to 57.
(Please note that default COS groups meet most of the requirements and hence this command is seldom used.)
Use the following command to default the COS group:
1301-1-COS Group
1301-2-COS Group-COS Group
1301-*-COS Group
Where,
COS Group is from 01 to 16.
By default, COS Groups are as shown in Default COS Table in How it Works? Topic, of this chapter.
Example:
Make a COS group '15' having features like internal dialing, call hold, call transfer, call pick up, DND, conference and call
park. Assign it to SLT 201 and 202 (ports 007 and 008 respectively) for all the time zones.
1302-1-15-01-1
1302-1-15-02-1
1302-1-15-04-1
1302-1-15-05-1
1302-1-15-19-1
1302-1-15-22-1
1302-1-15-31-1
Relevant Topics:
1. Time Tables 870
3. QSIG 687
=X=X=
Code Meaning
0 Feature Disabled
1 Feature Enabled
Matrix
CLI Based Routing
What is this?
The ETERNITY offers a facility to detect the calling partys number. This is known as Calling Line Identification. The
calling partys number is stored in the Incoming SMDR buffer of the system. This number can also be presented to the
stations if desired. If name of the calling person is programmed then the name is presented on the station in place of the
number. This makes the calling partys identification more easier. The ETERNITY also provides a facility to route
incoming calls based on CLI to particular stations. This is known as CLI Based Routing.
How it works?
On arrival of an incoming call, the system identifies the calling partys number and compares it with the numbers in the
CLI table. (The CLI table is constructed by the system internally when the programming is done). If the number is
present in the CLI table, the call is routed according to CLI programming else call is routed according to incoming call
management logic.
How to program?
All the incoming numbers will be stored in the incoming SMDR buffer and will be displayed on the Operator station/
landing destination if Calling Line Identification is enabled.
However if it is required to land the calls from a particular telephone number on a particular station or stations then the
system needs to be programmed. Also name of the caller can be programmed, if desired.
Step 1
Use following command to program the incoming telephone number in a CLI table:
4101-Index-Telephone Number-#*
Where,
Index is from 001 to 400.
Telephone Number is the calling partys telephone number (Max. 16 digits). Terminate the command with #*.
Use following command to clear a telephone number from the CLI table:
4101-Index-#*
Step 2
Use following command to program name of calling party (this corresponds to the calling partys telephone number):
4102-Index-Name-#*
Where,
Name can be maximum of 8 characters.
Director
Operator
IP
N/w
Calling Party
00
1
6
3
0
8
1
0
0
4
3
1
Matrix
Use following command to clear a name for an incoming telephone number:
4102-Index-#*
By default, all the names and numbers are blank.
Please note that it is compulsory to terminate the name by #*. If less than 8 characters.
Step 3
Use following command to assign the landing destination for the incoming telephone number in the CLI table: Using CLI
based routing, it will be possible to route the call on Station/DKP only.
4103-Index-Port Type-Port Number
Where,
By default, the port type is 00 (NULL).
On using these commands, the incoming calls will be routed according to the landing destinations programmed for the
number. On doing the above programming, a CLI table shown below is constructed by the system internally.
Step 4
Use following command to clear a location index in the CLI based routing table:
4104-1-Index
4104-2-Index-Index
4104-*
Where,
By using this command Telephone number, name and the Port type-Port number will be cleared.
Example:
Calls from Rakesh (033-5656565) should land on DKP 128 whereas calls from Mahesh (022-8787878) should land on
SLT 200.
Solution:
Since two incoming numbers have to be landed on specific stations, these two stations should be programmed along
with their names and landing groups.
4101-001-0335656565-#*
4101-002-0228787878-#*
4102-001-Rakesh-#*
4102-002-Mahesh-#*
4103-001-02-128
4103-002-01-200
Important Point:
Programming of + is also supported.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Port Type Meaning Port Number
00 Null 000
01 SLT 001-512
02 DKP 001-128
10 DOP 001
28 ISDN Terminal 01-64
Index Telephone Number Name Port Type Port Number
001 224356782 Raju 01 322
002 33123456 Rajni 02 98
: : : : :
400 824215467 Meera 07 28
Matrix
Clock Synchronization
What's this?
When data is transmitted from the ETERNITY to external lines or ETERNITY receives data from the external lines, it is
required that the transmitter and receiver are properly synchronized. If not clock slips can occur. A clock slip can
generate a loss or addition of data to the data stream.
How it works?
This can be done in three ways viz. using the data clock or using the external clock (clock is sent by the network on a
dedicated cable pair) or using the internal clock. ETERNITY does not support external clock. When the ETERNITY is
connected to the PSTN, then it is recommended to extract the clock from the incoming data whereas if the ETERNITY is
used to form a private network then it is recommended to use internal clock. For example if a private network is formed by
connecting three ETERNITY systems, then one system should be programmed as master clock whereas other two
should be programmed in the slave mode.
If two or more DS1 Ports are connected to the PSTN (or a Private Network) then in such case, clock will be extracted
from the first DS1 Software port whereas the transmit data on all other ports whether connected to PSTN or private
network will be clocked as per received.
How to program?
Clock Source for 'Master Clock Synchronization'.
The ETERNITY supports 4 clock sources which can be programmed for the specific port.
Use the following command to program the clock sources:
5341-Clock Source Index-Port Type-Port Offset
Where,
Port Offset is 01 to 32.
Clock Source Index is from 1 to 4.
Note: 0 is a valid port to follow internal clock.
Default Table for the clock source, programmed in the system
The system tries to find out a system clock master from this table. If none of the port is synchronized out of this table, the
system gives priority to internal clock. If any one port is synchronized, the system selects that port as a system clock
master. Here index is given priority, i.e. if 2nd port of this table is selected as clock master and suddenly first port is
synchronized then a system changes its master from 2nd port to first port. Now if first port has lost its synchronization
then in this case again 2nd port is selected as system clock master.
System Clock Synchronization
Use following command to select 'System Clock Synchronization':
5342-System Clock Synchronization
Where,
System Clock Synchronization is from 1 to 4
Port Type Meaning Port Offset
05 DS1 1-8
04 BRI 01-32
00 Null 000
Clock Source Index Port Type-Port Offset
1 DS1-1
2 DS1-2
3 DS1-3
4 DS1-4
System Clock Synchronization Meaning
1 8 KHz Derived
2 8 KHz
Matrix
By Default, 'System Clock Synchronization' is 2.048 MHz for India and other countries except USA.
For USA, default 'System Clock Synchronization' is 1.54 MHz.
Notes for using this command '5342':
This command is applicable only for 'ETERNITY GE', when Software version/revision 'V8R6' is used.
Selecting option 1('8 KHz Derived'): If you are using, the Software version/revision 'V8R6' onwards, with CPLD
version/revision 'V1R2 or lower version', the System Clock Synchronization will be done only at '8 KHz Derived'
option, irrespective of the selected 'System Clock Synchronization' option. If you are using the BRI/DS1 card with
CPLD version/revision 'V1R3 and onwards', the clock synchronization option will work as you have programmed the
option, using this command. To know the CPLD version/revision, open the cover of DS1 card of your system and
check the label on the CPLD device or contact your dealer for more information.
Selecting option 2('8 KHz'): By default, Master Clock Synchronization port number is given as DS1-1, DS1-2, DS1-3
and DS1-4. The options for Master clock synchronization allow selecting DS1 or BRI port or combination of thereof as
required. If any BRI port is selected in Master Clock Synchronization option (for any option from 1 to 4), SE should
select the System Clock Synchronization option 2 = 8 KHz.
Selecting option 3('2.048 MHz'): Select 'System Clock Synchronization' option 3 = 2.048 MHz, only for E1 DS1 line.
Selecting option 4('1.54 MHz'): Select 'System Clock Synchronization' option 4 = 1.54 MHz, only for T1 DS1 line.
PLL Locking Mode
This parameter is used to select the suitable speed of the PLL locking in the system.
Use following command to select the 'PLL Locking Mode':
5343-PLL Locking Mode
Where,
PLL Locking Mode is from 1 to 2.
By default, PLL Locking Mode is 'Slow'.
Relevant Topics:
1. RTC Synchronization 725
=X=X=
3 2.048 MHz
4 1.54 MHz
PLL Locking Mode Meaning
1 Fast
2 Slow
System Clock Synchronization Meaning
Matrix
Closed User Group (CUG)
Whats this?
To have private networks, few PBXs can be connected to each other using E&M, T1/E1, QSIG, etc. The requirement
demands that the PBXs connected to each other forming the network behave as a single group. The users need not dial
a separate code to access a station user of other PBX. The entire network should behave as a single unit. The station
user will not know whether he is dialing a station number of his own PBX or other PBX. This is called Closed User Group.
In the above figure, 3 PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
T1 to Tn are trunk lines from the local central office (CO).
S1 to Sn are stations.
E&M1 to E&M3 are E&M lines between the three PBX systems.
How it works?
For Closed User Group, it is mandatory to have unique station number in all the systems i.e. one cannot have station
number 2001 in PBX-A as well as in PBX-B or PBX-C.
Few new words have been used to explain this application, each of these words have been explained below:
Routing Table: This table has five parameters viz. Route Index, Route Code, OG Trunk Bundle Group, Strip Digit Count
and Self Route flag. The closed user group programming works according to this table.
Route Index: Maximum 250 different routes (001-250) can be programmed.
Route Code: Route code could be of maximum sixteen digits. Digits 0 to 9 are allowed. However, * and # are not
allowed. Generally route code will be a truncated number of the station numbers. For example in the figure given above,
route code for PBX-B can be defined as 3 and that for PBX-C can be defined as 4.
If PBX-B were having station numbers from 3100 to 3199 and PBX-C were having station numbers from 3200 to 3299
then route code for PBX-B can be defined as 31 and that for PBX-C can be defined as 32. If PBX-B were having station
numbers from 301 to 399 and 401 to 499 then two route codes can be defined for PBX-B viz. 3 and 4. Likewise for
PBX-C.
OG Trunk Bundle Group: An OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) is assigned to each route code. Whenever a call is to
be made on that route, a free trunk from the OGTBG is selected and the station number is dialed on it. The same logic of
Rotation On/Off for trunk selection from the OGTBG is used. If rotation is OFF then always the first trunk in the OGTBG is
selected. If it is busy then the next trunk in the group is selected. This helps to select an alternate route. Whereas if
Rotation is ON then the trunks in the OGTBG are selected in round robin fashion.
Route Index Route Code OGTBG Strip Digit Count Self Router Flag Max. Dialed Digits
001
:
250
PSTN PSTN
PBX-A PBX-B
PBX-C
T1
T2
Tn
E&M1
E&M2 E&M3
S1 S2 Sn S1 S2 Sn
2001 2002 2003 3001 3002 3003
S1 S2 Sn
4001 4002 4003
T1
T2
Tn
Matrix
Strip Digit Count: It has no significance for Closed User Group application. But it has to be programmed as 0.
Self-Route Flag: It has no significance for Closed User Group application. But it has to be programmed as 0.
Maximum dialed digits: When digits are dialed on the trunk, the system waits for inter digit timer after the last digit is
dialed. In order to avoid this timer and number of digits dialed to be routed without further delay, count for the number of
digits to be programmed in this field. If the number of digits received are equal to the parameters programmed then the
number is dialed out immediately without waiting for the inter digit timer. If the number of digits dialed by the user are not
equal to the digits programmed, the number is dialed after inter digit timer.
The ETERNITY has only one routing table. The same table is used for Closed User Group and Close User Group-
With Exchange ID applications. Hence the table has to be programmed keeping the application in mind.
How to program?
Step 1
Use following command to program route code:
4502-1-Route Index-Route Code-#*
4502-2-Route Index-Route Index-Route Code-#*
4502-*-Route Code-#*
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
Route Code is a sixteen digits string of numbers.
Use following command to clear a particular route code:
4502-1-Route Index-#*
4502-2-Route Index-Route Index-#*
4502-*-#*
Where,
By default, Program Route Code is Blank.
Step 2
Use following command to assign OG Trunk Bundle Group to the route code:
4503-1-Route Index-OG Trunk Bundle Group
4503-2-Route Index-Route Index-OGTBG
4503-*-OG Trunk Bundle Group
Where,
OG Trunk Bundle Group is from 01 to 32.
By default, OG Trunk Bundle Group is 01.
Step 3
Use following command to program strip digit count for a route:
4504-1-Route Index-Strip Digit Count
4504-2-Route Index-Route Index-Strip Digit Count
4504-*-Strip Digit Count
Where,
Router Index is from 001 to 250.
Strip Digit Count is from 0 to 9.
By default, Strip Digit Count is 0.
Step 4
Use following command to program self-route flag for a route:
4505-1-Route Index-Code
4505-2-Route Index-Route Index-Code
4505-*-Code
Matrix
Where,
By default, Self-route flag is disabled.
Step 5
Use following command to program maximum dialed digits to select router for a route code:
4506-1-Route Index-Maximum Dialed Digits
4506-2-Route Index-Route Index-Maximum Dialed Digits
4506-*-Maximum Dialed Digits
Where,
Maximum dialed digits is from 00 to 99.
Step 6
Use following command to clear an entry in a routing table:
4501-1-Route Index
4501-2-Route Index-Route Index
4501-*
Where,
Important Points:
ETERNITY offers few features associated with closed user group. Each of these are discussed below:
Alternate Route:
This feature provides flexibility of accessing a station of other exchange through alternate routes if the normally used
route (the shortest route) is not free. To achieve this, the trunks that offer shortest routes should be programmed first
in the OGTBG followed by the trunks that provide alternate routes. Also the rotation within the OGTBG should be
OFF. In figure the requirement is that if E&M1 is busy then E&M2 should be used to call 3001 from PBX-A. In this
case a OGTBG is to be so formed that it has E&M1 as first trunk and E&M2 as second trunk and should be assigned
to route code 3. However, the rotation within the OGTBG should be disabled. Similarly, if the call is to be made to
4001 then E&M2 should be used. Hence another OGTBG should be programmed with E&M2 as first trunk and E&M1
as second trunk and it should be assigned to route code 4. Also the round robin option for the OGTBG should be
selected.
Transit Barring:
This feature helps to bar the Transit calls through the exchange. Consider figure 1. It is required that a station user in
PBX-A can access station 3001 using alternate route through PBX-C but a station user in PBX-B cannot access
stations 2001 to 2010 using alternate route through PBX-C. This can be accomplished using Transit Barring. To
achieve this, a denied list containing 10 numbers viz. 2001 to 2010 should be assigned as Toll Control for the SLT
port programmed for the E&M2. Doing so when a station user from PBX-B dials 2001, if E&M1 is busy, the system
would try dialing through E&M2 but since E&M2 does not have requisite toll control, it will give error tone to station
user. Transit Barring adds value to the Alternate Route by allowing a selective access to the station with alternate
route.
Each system in the network has a routing table. By default, the routing is blank and hence E&M works as per normal
E&M connectivity. After programming the routing table as per the requirement, when the user dials a station number,
the system first searches for the dialed number in the same system by considering Self Route flag. If it is not
available in its own system, it checks for it in the routing table, finds the best fit, selects a free E&M path and reaches
the dialed port.
Please refer figure 1. When a station in PBX-A dials a station number 3001, the system searches for this number in
PBX-A. Since there is no station with flexible number 3001 in PBX-A, the system checks the E&M routing table. The
system follows the routing table, identifies that the dialed number is in PBX-B, selects a free E&M path and reaches
the dialed port.
As shown in figure 1, the shortest path to reach station 3001 from PBX-A is through E&M1. But if E&M1 is busy then
the network can be programmed to reach station 3001 through E&M2 and E&M3. For this both PBX-A and PBX-B
have to be programmed to accomplish this.
Forced Call Disconnection:
Please refer Forced Call Disconnection for more details.
Code Meaning
0 Disable Self-route Flag
1 Enable Self-route Flag
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
1. E&M Connectivity 514
2. Forced Call Disconnection 547
3. Closed User Group-With Exchange ID 374
=X=X=
Matrix
Closed User Group-With Exchange ID
Whats this?
To have private networks, few PBXs can be connected to each other using E&M, T1/E1, QSIG, etc. The requirement
demands that the PBXs connected to each other forming the network behave as a single group. The users need not
dial a separate code to access a station user of other PBX. The entire network should behave as a single unit. The
station user will not know whether he is dialing a station number of his own PBX or other PBX. This is called Closed
User Group. However, it is possible that the PBXs connected to form a network may have same station numbers.
Also, all the exchanges within the network may have their own identity (called Exchange ID). In such cases, the
routing scheme (the routing table) has to be programmed keeping the Exchange ID (EID) in mind. This is known as
Closed User Group-With Exchange ID.
This facility is generally used in PLCC Applications wherein new power stations (and hence PBXs) are added in the
network. It is not feasible to have unique station numbers throughout the network. In such cases, an Exchange ID is
assigned to the newly added PBX and a routing table is programmed in the exchange. Also, the routing tables of
other exchanges are modified to include the newly added exchange in the network.
Figure 1: Open User Group Application
In the below figure, 3 PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
E&M1 to E&M3 are E&M lines between the three PBX.
How it works?
In this application, it is possible to have same station number in two or more PBXs of the network. Few new words have
been used to explain Closed User Group-With Exchange ID application, each of these words have been explained
above.
and Self Route flag. The Closed User Group-With Exchange ID programming works according to this table.
Route Code: Route code could be of maximum six digits (XXXXXX). Digits 0 to 9 are allowed. Generally, route code will
be a unique number. The route code should not clash with any of the station numbers of same PBX. For example in the
figure given above, route code for PBX-A can be defined as 21, route code for PBX-B can be defined as 22 and that for
PBX-C can be defined as 23. This means that no station in PBX-A can start with 22 or 23. Similarly, no station in PBX-
B can start with 21 or 23 and no station in PBX-C start with 21 and 22.
001
:
250
PSTN PSTN
PBX-A PBX-B
PBX-C
T1
T2
Tn
E&M1
E&M2 E&M3
S1 S2 Sn S1 S2 Sn
2001 2002 2099
S1 S2 Sn
T1
T2
Tn
2001 2002 2099
2001 2002 2099
21
22
23
Matrix
rotation On/Off for trunk selection from the OGTBG is used. If rotation is OFF then always the first trunk in the OGTBG is
rotation is ON then the trunks in the OGTBG are selected in round robin fashion.
Strip Digit Count: This count signifies the number of digits to be striped of while dialing/decoding a number. To
elaborate: Consider figure 1. The requirement is that if station 2001 of PBX-B dials 212002 and if E&M 1 is busy then the
call should reach station 2002 of PBX-A through alternate route. In this case the strip digit count of PBX-A should be
programmed as 2 and that of PBX-B and PBX-C should be programmed as 0. Doing so, when station 2001 of PBX-B
dials 212002 and if E&M1 is busy then the call is routed through PBX-C. In this case, PBX-B dials 212002 on E&M3,
PBX-C receive this code and dials out the same code i.e. 212002 on E&M2 without striping of any digit. On receiving
212002, PBX-A strips of two digits as per the programming and routes the call to station 2002.
Self-Route Flag: This flag signifies that the digits being dialed are for the same PBX and are not to be dialed on the E&M
trunk.
Please note that the ETERNITY has only one routing table. The same table is used for Closed User Group and Closed
User Group-With Exchange ID. Hence the table has to be programmed keeping the application in mind.
How to program?
Please refer topic Closed User Group (CUG) for more details.
Important Points:
ETERNITY offers few features associated with Closed User Group-With Exchange ID. Each of these are discussed
below:
Alternate Route
Please refer Closed User Group (CUG) for more details.
Transit Barring
Please refer Closed User Group (CUG) for more details.
Strip Digit Count is of significance in a network in which few exchanges possess Exchange ID whereas others do
not. Refer figure 2. PBX-A and PBX-B are made to work as Closed User Group since they have unique stations. But
since PBX-C possess stations whose flexible number clashes with stations in PBX-A, it cannot be made a part of
Closed User Group. In such case Closed User Group-with Exchange ID can be used with the combination of PBX-A
+ PBX-B and PBX-C forming the network.
In this case, if 2001 of PBX-A wants to access 3001 through E&M1, he has to dial 3001. But if E&M1 is busy then
system will allot him E&M2 and since there would not be any programming done, it will give error tone to the caller. To
avoid this condition, the station user of PBX-A should be asked to call 3001 by dialing 223001. For this, the strip digit
count for the route index with route code 22 in the routing table of PBX-B should be programmed as 2 and the strip
digit count for the route index with route code 22 in the routing table of PBX-C should be programmed as 0. Doing
so, if the call to 3001 is made through E&M1, then PBX-B would strip of the first two digits on receiving 223001 and
make the caller reach 3001. If the call to 3001 is routed through E&M2, the PBX-C will not strip of any digit and would
dial out 223001 on E&M3. On receiving 223001, PBX-B as per the programming would strip of 22 and make the call
land on 3001.
Strip Digit Count is also of importance in following case:
For example in figure 1, if station 2001 of PBX-A dials 212002 then also the call should go to 2002 of PBX-A only. To
accomplish this, the strip digit count should be programmed as 2 and Self Route flag should be enabled. Doing so
when 2001 dials 212002, the system strips off first two digits and checks for the remaining digits, which in this case
would be 2002 and thereby the user reaches 2002 of the same PBX.
Forced Call Disconnection
Please refer Forced Call Disconnection for more details.
Prefix String Feature:
This feature is programmed only for few Exchanges like ET1, Genesis, or BPL which does not send 0 when user
dials a number to call an extension number of the exchange. For other Exchanges like ET2 it is not required to be
programmed as it sends 0 also if it is dialed.
Maximum of 4-characters can be programmed as Prefix String.
Matrix
Prefix String is a string of characters which is prefixed to the string, dialed by the user and then CUG Routing-Table
is applied.
Example:
Detailed application for Prefix String feature is explained by following steps:
If this feature is not programmed for Exchange of type: ET1 or BPL, and Prefix String is blank, then, only 2223 is
dialed by the Exchange when 02223 is dialed by the user, to call station 23.
Now when 2223 reaches Exchange B, since there is no entry in the CUG table, the feature-extension flexible number
table is checked. Now since a match starting from 22.. is found, the call is routed to station 22 instead of 23,
because station number 22 is present on the Extension.
To avoid this, an entry is made in the routing table containing 22 as the route code with strip digit count 2. But then
since the system checks CUG Routing-table first, the first two digits out of 2223 always get striped off and the call is
not routed to station 22. i.e. the other stations of Exchange B will never be able to call station 22.
To solve this problem Prefix String feature is programmed in the E&M Feature Template with 0 as prefix string, so
that string with prefix (022) is matched with the entries of CUG Routing Table (as shown in figure). When user dials
02223, first 3-digits are stripped off and the required Extension 23 can be called.
Please refer topic E&M Feature Template to program this feature.
Relevant Topics:
2. Forced Call Disconnection 547
3. Closed User Group (CUG) 370
5. E&M Feature Template 523
=X=X=
Matrix
Communication Ports
The ETERNITY supports two communication ports viz. COM1 and COM2. Each communication port is of serial,
asynchronous and RS232C type.
Both these communication ports are provided on the ETERNITY ME Card Master of the system. The connectors (DB-9
male) are provided on the front panel of the ETERNITY ME Card Master.
Following facilities of ETERNITY need a COM port:
SMDR-Posting
Programming using a PC
SMDR-Online
For more details on individual application, please refer respective chapter in this manual.
As there are two communication ports available at a time, two applications can be activated simultaneously.
A communication port has following programmable attributes:
Speed in bps.
Number of data bits.
Number of stop bits.
Parity.
These attributes of a COM port have to be set keeping in mind the application for which the communication port is used.
Each application can use its own settings.
How to program a Communication Port?
Use following command to set data transfer rate (speed) of a COM port:
3201-Port-Speed
Where,
By default, Speed is 115200bps.
Use following command to set data-bits of a COM port:
3202-Port-Data Bits
Where,
By default, Data Bits is 8.
Use following command to set the parity of a COM port:
3203-Port-Parity
Port Meaning
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
Speed Meaning
0 1200 bps
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
3 9600 bps
4 19200 bps
5 38400 bps
6 57600 bps
7 115200 bps
Data Bits Meaning
0 7 data bits
1 8 data bits
Matrix
Where,
By default, Parity is None.
Use following command to set stop-bits of a COM port:
3204-Port-Stop Bits
Where,
By default, Stop Bit is 1.
Use following command to set the flow control of a COM port:
3205-Port-Flow Control
Where,
By default, Flow Control is None.
Use following command to default parameters to a COM Port:
3210-Port
Where,
Example 1:
Let us program COM1 with following parameters:
Speed = 9600 bps.
Data Bits = 8 bits.
Parity = None.
Stop Bits = 1.
Flow Control = None.
Use following commands:
3201-1-3
3202-1-1
3203-1-0
3204-1-0
3205-1-0
Example 2:
Let us program COM2 with following parameters
Speed = 2400 bps
Data Bits = 7 bits.
Parity = Even.
Stop Bits = 2.
Flow Control = Hardware (RTS/CTS).
Parity Meaning
0 None
1 Odd
2 Even
3 Mark
4 Space
Stop Bits Meaning
0 1 stop bit
1 2 stop bit
Flow Control Meaning
0 None
1 Hardware (RTS/CTS)
2 Software (XON/XOFF)
Port Meaning
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
Matrix
3201-2-1
3202-2-0
3203-2-2
3204-2-1
3205-2-1
Following parameters for communication ports are recommended for computer connectivity or programming through
computer:
Speed = 9600 bps.
Data Bits = 8.
Parity = None.
Stop Bits = 1.
Flow Control = None.
How to Connect the ETERNITY with a Computer?
The ETERNITY is capable of interfacing itself with a computer through RS232C ports. All PCs have communication ports
called COM1 and COM2. The ETERNITY can communicate with the PC through COM1 or COM2. Matrix provides
optional communication cable for this purpose. Please contact Matrix dealer or the company for the same. This
communication cable is provided with DB-9 female connectors on both ends. You may connect any end to the
ETERNITY and the other end to PC. If the PC COM port is on USB connector, you have to use USB to DB-9 converter.
Such converters are easily available in the market. Following diagram shows how ETERNITY is connected to a
computer.
Following diagram shows how two communication port applications can work simultaneously on the same PC.
Following table gives the pin-out details of the COM ports.
Pin No. Signal Name
1 Data Carrier Detect (DTD)
2 Receive Data (RXD)
3 Transmit Data (TXD)
4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
5 Ground (GND)
COM 1
COM 2
ETERNITY
COM 1
Computer
RS-232
Communication
Cable
COM 1
COM 2
ETERNITY
COM 1
Computer
RS-232
Communication
Cable
COM 2
RS-232
Communication
Cable
Matrix
DSR sensing
ETERNITY offers a flexibility to monitor the physical connection between the ports. It allows us to enable/disable DSR
sensing. If DSR sensing is enabled the system continuously monitors the physical connection. If the physical connection
is inactive at any time, the system is informed and data transfer is stopped. If DSR is disabled the physical connection
between the ports is not monitored. Hence, even when the physical connection is down the data continuous and this data
is lost.
Use the following command to program the DSR sensing:
3206-Port-DSR Sensing
Where,
Port is 1 or 2.
By default, DSR Sensing is disabled.
Relevant Topics:
2. Programming Using a Computer 685
=X=X=
6 Data Set Ready (DSR)
7 Request To Send (RTS)
8 Clear To Send (CTS)
9 Ring Indicator (IR)
DSR Sensing Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Pin No. Signal Name
Matrix
Conference-3 Party
Whats this?
The ETERNITY allows three methods for conducting conferences:
3-Party Conference
Multiparty Conference
Dialing-In Conference
3-Party conference is an easier and faster way to set up a conference. It does not allow more than 3 parties to be
included in the conference. Whereas, multiparty conference allows 06 to 21 parties in a conference depending on the
model and variant of ETERNITY you are using. Please refer topic Conference-Multiparty for more details.
The ETERNITY ME supports a maximum of 7 simultaneous 3-party conference.
The ETERNITY GE supports a maximum of 5 simultaneous 3-party conference.
The ETERNITY PE 6S supports a maximum of 5 simultaneous 3-party conference.
The ETERNITY PE 3SS and PE 3SP support 2 simultaneous 3-party conference.
3-Party conference can be conducted at a spur of the moment without prior planning. If a user is talking to some one and
he feels he should include a third person in his current conversation and have a conference, he can do so without
disconnecting his current conversation. All he has to do is to put the person he is talking hold, dial the third person and
then dial the conference feature code.
How to use it?
the following are three combinations allowed in a 3-party conference:
All three stations
Two stations and one trunk
One station and two trunks
Note:
nd
1 Speech with Station.
3 Dial another Station. Ring Back Tone
4 Speech with the station when the call is answered.
5 Dial Flash-0. 3-way speech established (conference-3 party)
1 Speech with Trunk.
3 Dial another Station. Ring Back Tone
4 Speech with the station when the call is answered.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Trunk goes on hold.
3 Dial #. Feature tone
4 Dial 0 to grab another trunk. Trunk dial tone
7 Dial Flash-0. 3-way speech established (Conference-3 party).
Matrix
How it works?
Flow chart on the next page explains these steps.
It is possible to have Conference-Unsupervised
This feature enables the operator to connect two trunks through the system and getting him free from the discussion.
This feature is used quite often nowadays to connect two local lines which otherwise if try to talk would be charged at
long distance rates.
Suppose you are at city A. Other two colleagues are at city B and city C. City B and City C is charged at STD rates from
each other. City B and City C are charged at local rates from city A. Now using this feature, you being at City A can make
conference with City B and City C and once in conversation, if you disconnect then City B and City C can talk at local
rates.
Start
Station A is speaking to Station B
They need to include Station C in their talk.
Station A puts Station B on hold. Staion A
gets feature tone. Station B gets music
Station A dials Station C
Station C answers the call. Station A and
Station C are in speech. This is a normal
situation occuring during a call transfer.
Station A dials flash-0 to activate
3-party conference
Station A, Station B and Station
C are in speech
Any station
disconnects ?
Remaining two station in
normal 2-way speech
Once again they can conduct a
conference with a new station
End
Station A
dials flash ?
No
Yes
Station C goes on hold and gets music.
Station A and Station B remain in speech
Yes
No
This is normal situation occuring
during a call transfer
End
Matrix
How to use it?
How to program?
Access to Conference is programmable. So it can be allowed or denied to each user. Please refer topic Class of Service
(COS) for details on programming this feature.
When a new party joins the conference the existing users get beeps informing them of the new inclusion. You can enable
or disable the beep tone.
Use the following command to enable/disable beeps during conference:
5331-Code
Where,
Relevant Topics:
1. Conference-Multiparty 387
4. QSIG 687
=X=X=
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone, trunk goes on hold.
3 Dial #. Feature tone
4 Dial 0 to grab another trunk. Trunk dial tone
8 Dial Flash. One of the trunks goes on hold. Operator is in speech with other trunk.
9 Dial #. Trunk1-Trunk2 are in speech.
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Conference Dial-In
Whats this?
A Conference can be scheduled for a convenient time. The participants can be informed about the scheduling. The
participants can join the on-going conference by dialing a code without any assistance. The participant can be an internal
station or an external caller. For example: A group of executives in the field need to report to their boss in office and also
exchange feedback on field experiences with each other. Each one can individually report to the boss, and talk to
colleagues at their convenience. This may lead to repetition of certain information. There are also chances of non
communication of some important matter. To avoid this clumsy situation the group of people who need to communicate
can decide on a time that is convenient to all and Schedule a Dial-In Conference.
The ETERNITY ME supports a maximum of 7 simultaneous Dial-In Conferences. A maximum of 21 parties (persons)
can participate a single Dial-In Conference.
The ETERNITY GE supports a maximum of 5 simultaneous Dial-In Conferences. A maximum of 15 parties can join in
a single Dial-In Conference.
The ETERNITY PE6S supports a maximum of 5 simultaneous Dial-In Conferences. A maximum of 15 persons can
participate in each Dial-In Conference.
The ETERNITY PE3SS and PE3SP support 2 simultaneous Dial-In Conferences. A maximum of 6 persons can
participate in a single conference.
How it works?
Scheduling a Conference
Every Dial-In Conference has to the scheduled. The conference has to be scheduled by an internal station user (SLT/
DKP) or via DISA Login. The participants are informed of the scheduled conference and they join the conference without
any operator assistance. The participants can be a internal party or an external party.
Initiating a Conference
The conference can be initiated by anybody.
Joining a Conference
Once the conference is initiated, the other participants can join at their own convenience.
During the Conference
Any internal/external user can be included into the conference by any of participants in the middle of the conference.
Participants can also exclude themselves midway of the conference. The participants can release themselves by going
ON-Hook. If all the participants release themselves one-by-one, the system starts the Release Conference if idle for
more than (minutes) Timer. This timer is programmbale and it set by default to 002 minutes. On the expiry of this Timer,
the Dial-In Conference is released and the resource occupied by this Conference in the conferencing circuit is freed.
However, any participant can join the conference before the Timer expires.
Cancelling a Conference
The conference is cancelled by dialing the cancellation code from the dial tone. All the participants are released from the
conference (if the conference is going on) and the resources are freed for a new conference. The participants get error
tone. The conference can be cancelled when the conference is in program or after its completion.
How to use it?
Schedule a Conference
Initiate a Conference
To include a Station in the mid of the Conference.
2 Dial 194-Conference Number-Conference Password. Confirmation tone
2 Dial 195-Conference Number-Conference Password. Confirmation tone
1 All in Speech.
2 Go ON-Hook. Go OFF-Hook. Dial tone
3 Dial Station. Ring Back Tone, speech.
Matrix
Cancel a Conference
Note:
Dialing 196-Conference Number-Conference Password clears the conference number and password, but does not
free the resource occupied by the Conference in the conferencing circuit.
Dialing 190 frees the conferencing circuit but does not clear the conference number and password.
Dial both commands to clear conference number and password and to free resource occupied in the conferencing
circuit.
If you want to free resource but retain the same conference number and password for use at a later date, dial only
190.
Conference can be cancelled from SA mode also (From SLT/DKP).
1072-026-Conference Number
This is useful when the participants forget the password and cannot join the conference or cannot initiate the conference.
Join a Conference
CONFERENCE NUMBER
The Conference Number must correspond with the number of simultaneous Dial-In conferences supported by the
model and variant of ETERNITY in use. For example, ETERNITY ME supports 7 Dial-In Conference, so the,
Conference number to he dialed by its users would be from 1 to 7. Similarly, the ETERNITY PE 6S supports 5
simultaneous Dial-In Conferences, so the Conference number to the dialed by its users would be from 1 to 5. The
ETERNITY PE3SS/3SP supports only 2 simultaneous Dial-In conferences, so the Conference Number to be dialed
by its users should be 1 and 2. If a user dials a conference number that is beyond the system capacity (i.e. number of
simultaneous Dial-In Conferences) the system will play an error tone.
How to program?
Access to Dial-In Conference is programmable. Hence this feature can be allowed or denied to each user. Refer topic
Class of Service (COS) for details on programming of this feature.
To program the Release Conference if Idle Timer, use the following command:
5355-Minutes
Where,
Minutes is from 001 to 255.
By default, duration of the Timer is 002 minutes.
Important Points:
Any participant (internal) in conference can exclude himself simply by disconnecting the telephone.
It is possible to schedule or join a Dial-In Conference through DISA. All you have to do is:
Dial a DISA enabled trunk.
Dial DISA login code i.e 1079-Station Number-User Password.
After you get the DISA login beeps you dial the code for Scheduling the conference or Joining the conference.
During your conversation use the following wherever required.
Go on-hook (Dial #0).
Go off-hook (Dial #1).
To release yourself (Dial #0#0).
You can include any party midway.
4 Dial Flash. Feature tone, station gets music.
5 Dial 191. Confirmation tone. Party included in conference.
6 Dial 191. You are included in conference.
1 All participants in Speech.
3 Dial 196-Conference Number-Conference Password. Conference Cancelled.
4 Dial 190. Conference resource freed.
2 Dial 195-Conference Number-Conference Password. Join the conference if the conference activated.
Matrix
Please take care not to dial Flash to put the participant on hold else the call will get disconnected since you are in
DISA mode. Keep dialing any digit to continue the conference since you are in DISA mode.
If Station A has held Station B and dials the code for joining the conference, Station B joins the conference. Now if
Station A wishes to join the conference it has to dial the Conference joining code again.
If Station A is a participant in a Conference he cannot participate in any other conference till the conference is
released. A participant of one conference can release himself from the conference and join a second conference. At
any instance of time the participant is participating only in one conference. If he wishes to join back the first
conference he has to release himself from the current and dial the join in code for the first conference.
To release himself the user has to dial 193. Just going ON-Hook does not permit him to join another conference.
1111 cannot be made the conference password.
When an external user is included in conference, then the external user gets DISA beeps (for DISA Inactivity Timer)
and is expected to dial digits before the DISA Inactivity timer elapses.
Relevant Topics:
2. Conference-Multiparty 387
4. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
Matrix
Conference-Multiparty
Whats this?
Telephonic conference is a useful facility because it saves time. It allows internal and external users to meet over the
telephone without physically traveling to remote areas.
There are total 7 conferencing circuits in the system. The ETERNITY supports between 6 to 21 parties in a conference
depending on the model you are using. As it employs digital conferencing circuits, the number of parties involved in a
conference does not affect the speech level.
Multiparty Conference in ETERNITY ME
Multiparty Conference in ETERNITY GE
Multiparty Conference in ETERNITY PE
Maximum conference participants 21
Maximum simultaneous conferences (If all the conferences involve 3 parties) 7
Maximum parties included in a conference (If all parties are in a single conference) 21
Maximum conference participants 15
Maximum simultaneous conferences (If all the conferences involve 3 parties) 5
Maximum parties included in a conference (If all parties are in a single conference) 15
PE 6S PE 3SP PE 3SS
Maximum conference participants 15 6 6
Maximum simultaneous conferences (If all the conferences involve 3 parties) 5 2 2
Maximum parties included in a conference (If all parties are in a single conference) 15 6 6
Matrix
Following flow chart illustrates the conference logic:
Start
Any station decides to
hold a tele-conference
He prepares a list of all the participants to
be included in the conference
He contacts the participants
He informs the participants
about the planned conference
He dials flash. Participant gets music
He dials conference inclusion code.
He gets confirmation tone
He goes on hook(idle) and then off hook
or waits for completion of confirmation
tone. He gets dial tone.
Any more
participants to be
included ?
Yes
No
He dials conference
inclusion code again
He joins the conference. All
participants can converse.
any participant decides to
involve a new participant.
A
Conference
Initiation
Conference
Activation
Matrix
A
He goes on-hook(idle).
The participant contacts the new participant
He informs the participant
about the conference
He dials Flash. New
participant also gets music.
He dials conference inclusion code. He gets
confirmation tone. The new participant is included.
He dials conference inclusion
code again to include yourself.
He decides to disconnect a participant
He goes on-hook(idle).
He dials the conference
disconnection code followed by the
internal participant's number
The two parties are connected. You can
ask the particular participant to go onhook
and disconnect the phone
He dials conference inclusion code. You
are in included in the conference again.
Include
a new
participant
Disconneting
a participant
Conference
Terminatio
Any paticipant can dial
conference termination code
End
Matrix
How to use it?
To Initiate conference between Station A, Station B, Station C and Station D:
Above same steps are followed to include to a participant at midway of a conference.
To exclude, station C in the middle of the conference (From DKP Only):
To terminate a conference:
Note:
If all participants of a multiparty conference have released themselves from the conference, one-by-one, but the
station user has not dialed the feature command to terminate the conference (190), the system will start the Release
Conference if idle for more than (Minutes) Timer. This Timer is programmable, and by default it is set to 002 Minutes.
On the expiry of this Timer, the system will free the resource occupied by the conference on the conferencing circuit.
To program the Release Conference if Idle Timer, use the following command:
5355-Minutes
Where,
Minutes is from 001 to 255.
By default, duration of the Timer is 002 minutes.
A Few possible cases:
Multiparty conference among few stations.
1 Lift the handset (from Station A). Dial tone
2 Dial Station B. Ring Back Tone, Speech.
3 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Station B gets music.
4 Dial 191. Dial tone
5 Dial Station C. Ring Back Tone, Speech.
6 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Station C gets music.
8 Dial Station D. Ring Back Tone, Speech.
9 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Station D gets music.
11 Dial 191. All in Speech.
Go ON-Hook. Go OFF-Hook. Dial tone
Dial 192. Press Up/Down key.
Station will display name and number of station B, C and D
one by one.
Select Station C by pressing Hold when
station C name and number are displayed.
Station C will be excluded from the conference. Station C will
get error tone. User will get confirmation tone.
2 Dial 190. Confirmation tone. Participants get error tone.
PSTN
ETERNITY
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
A, B, C and D are in Conference
A
C
E
D
B
Matrix
Several Multi Party conferences among few Stations simultaneously.
Multiple conferences between a few trunks and a few stations.
Multiparty conferences between one trunk and a few stations
Multiparty conference between a few trunks and a one station
PSTN
ETERNITY
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
A, B, C, D and E are in Conference1
W, X, Y and Z are in Conference2
F, G and H are in Conference3
A
C
E
D
B
W
Y
F
Z
X
H
G
PSTN
ETERNITY
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
A
C
E
D
B
F
H
I
G
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
PSTN
ETERNITY
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
A
C
E
D
B
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
PSTN
ETERNITY
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
A
C
E
D
B
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
Matrix
Multiparty conference between a few trunks and a few stations only simultaneously.
How to program?
Access to Multiparty Conference is programmable. Hence this feature can be allowed or denied to each user in their
Class of Service. Refer the topic Class of Service (COS) for details on programming of this feature.
When a new party joins the conference the existing users get beeps to inform them of the new inclusion, this is
programmable. Please refer chapter Conference-3 Party for more details.
Important Points:
The feature codes of Conference are programmable. Please refer Access Codes for more details.
Any participant in conference can exclude himself simply by disconnecting the telephone.
It is possible to have Multiparty conference from a remote location also. Suppose you want to have conference with
your colleagues at Mumbai and Delhi but since it is Sunday the office is closed. All you have to do is:
Dial your office on a DISA enabled trunk. Call your Mumbai colleagues. Put him on hold by dialing #-1.
Please note that you do not dial Flash to put the participant on hold, else the call will get disconnected since you
are in DISA mode. Mumbai participant gets music. Dial conference inclusion code. You get confirmation tone.
Go on-hook (Dial #0).
Go off-hook (Dial #1).
Call your Delhi colleagues and include him in conference mode. Dial inclusion code. All can converse. Keep
dialing any digit to continue the conference since you are in DISA mode.
When an external user is included in conference, then the external user gets DISA beeps (for DISA Inactivity Timer)
and is expected to dial digits before the DISA Inactivity timer elapses.
When external party dials #0, #9, he will get disconnected from the DISA call and the DISA call is terminated.
Relevant Topics:
3. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
PSTN
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
A
C
E
D
B
F
G
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
ETERNITY
Matrix
Conflict Dialing
Whats this?
ETERNITY allows overlapping among feature codes and station flexible numbers i.e one access code can be a part
of (subset) another access code viz. 4, 41, 412, etc. or the flexible number of stations can be 201, 2011 etc.
When an access code that is a subset of any other access code is dialed, the system waits for some time for the user
to dial the next digit. In case the user does not dial any digit within that time, the system interprets it as the smaller
access code.
The time for which the system waits for the next digit to be dialed before resolving the access codes is called Conflict
Dialing Timer.
For Example, Let the access code of Call Pick Up be 4 and access code for Alarms be 41 and Auto Call Back be
412. Now when the user dials 4, the system waits for time=conflict dialing timer before resolving the digit dialed. If
no other digit is dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer expires, the system interprets the code as 4. If 1 is
dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer elapses the system interprets it as 41. Now the system again waits for the
next digit again for time=conflict dialing wait timer. If no other digit is dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer
expires, the system interprets the code as 41. If 2 is dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer expires the system
interprets the code as 412 (if there are no access codes like 4121 or 4123 etc. If any such access code exists the
system waits for another time=conflict dialing wait timer for another digit). Once the access code is resolved the
system responds accordingly.
This allows faster response to features having sub set access codes.
How to program?
Use the following command to program conflict dialing timer:
Important Points:
This is different from Trunk Digit-Digit Wait Timer and Internal Digit-Digit Wait Timer.
If the value is very large could be a delay in the systems response to the feature. If the value is too small there are
chances of misinterpreting the access codes. So the value programmed must be optimum.
Relevant Topics:
2. Emergency Detection and Reporting 530
3. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
Matrix
Continued Dialing
Whats this?
Continued Dialing allows a station to dial the desired digits even after the speech has been established on a trunk.
This helps users to access services like Auto Attendant, Voice Mail and Interactive Voice Response Systems.
Continued Dialing is allowed to all users on all trunks by default.
Relevant Topic:
1. Flashing on Trunks 540
=X=X=
Matrix
Whats this?
ETERNITY provides a facility to the station user to record his conversation with the opposite party.
The Conversation is recorded in the mailbox of the station user.
This feature works only if a Matrix VMS (e.g. Cadence) is interfaced with the ETERNITY.
How to use it?
How it works?
When the station user dials the command for Conversation Recording, the ETERNITY sends a string of digits to the
VMS to initiate Conversation Recording. The conversation gets recorded in the mailbox of the user that issued the
Conversation Recording command.
When conversation recording begins the system beeps. These beeps can be enabled/disabled.
Use the following command to enable/disable beeps during conversation recording:
5332-Code
Where,
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Conversation Recording to a user.
Important Point:
The station user must possess a mailbox in VMS if Conversation Recording is to be used.
Caution!
Use this feature in accordance with the local privacy laws. Matrix Telecom is not responsible for any misuse of this
feature by users.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
1 You are in speech with the opposite party.
3 Dial 1095. You get Ring Back Tone
4 Return in speech with the opposite party.
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
ETERNITY
Recording
Calling Party
Called Party
Matrix
Customer Emergency Services Identification Dialing
Whats this?
Whenever, an emergency number is dialed, the PBX dials out the programmed information of the subscriber to the
network. The network in turn sends it to the called party (may be Police Head Quarter, Fire Brigade). The called party
gets complete information of the subscriber who has dialed the emergency number.
This is supported for the calls made on BRI/T1E1PRI lines only.
If the emergency number is dialed on BRI/T1E1PRI line, then the DDI number are also sent, irrespective of whether
the DDI OG flag is enabled on the station from where the emergency number is dialed.
This feature is very helpful to get complete information of the party that needs emergency help.
=X=X=
Matrix
Customer Name
What's this?
Customer's name can be programmed. Once it is programmed, it gets printed as a header in various print reports. i.e.
SMDR Incoming, outgoing and Internal reports, T1E1PRI Performance reports, Alarm Status reports etc.
Customer Name is also shown in status bar of web page. This helps identifying customer system when SE program
more that one system simultaneously.
A customer's name can be of maximum 80 characters consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks and
spaces.
How to program?
Customer name can be programmed from the DKP or using the Jeeves.
Use following command to program the customer name:
5401-Customer Name-#*
Where,
Customer name is a string of alphanumeric characters (maximum 80).
By default, Customer Name is Blank.
The method of entering customer name is same as typing short messages in mobile. Terminate the string with #*. For
example, to enter 'SUMER', Press '7' four times. Wait for the cursor to go to next position. Now press '8' two times. Wait
for next cursor to go to next position. Likewise enter all the alphabets and then press '#*'. The DKP would show 'OK!' on
the LCD.
Example:
Program the customer name 'Holiday Inn'.
5401-Holiday Inn-#*
Use following command to clear the customer name:
5401-#*
=X=X=
Matrix
Daylight Saving Time (DST)
What's this?
It is the new local time a region is assigned for a portion of the year, usually an hour forward from its standard official
time.
The clocks are advanced at the beginning of the daylight saving time and delayed at the end of the daylight saving
time. For this, ETERNITY supports a feature 'Daylight Savings Time Adjustment'.
How it works?
DST Mode can be programmed by following options:
Disable
Manual
Scheduled
DST Mode: Disabled
DST Mode is disabled for the countries, where it is not applicable.
When DST mode is disabled, DST settings will not be effective even if they are programmed.
DST Mode: Manual
When DST Mode is programmed as 'Manual' it can be selected from options:
DST Forward Time Adjustments
DST Backward Time Adjustments
DST will be programmed for both DST Forward Time and DST Backward Time for the country, if it is applicable.
Following options can be programmed for "DST Forward" and "DST Backward" types:
Disabled
Day-Month
Date-Month
The option 'Disabled' is selected, if the country does not support DST. For India, the option will be 'None'.

If Forward Time Adjustment is selected as "Day-Month wise" the DST will be effective on the programmed
Ordinal number day of the month every year for a country. 'Ordinal number' can be set from '1' to '5'. For example, it
will be set to '1' for the DST of first Sunday of the month and to '3' for the third Sunday of the month.
On the programmed time of 'DST start day', the system will change its current time with the programmed "Forward
Time".
If Forward Time Adjustment is selected as "Date-Month wise" the DST will be effective on the programmed date
of the month every year for a country.
On the programmed time of 'DST start day' the system will change its current time with the programmed "Forward
Time".
If Backward Time Adjustment is selected as "Day-Month wise" the DST will be effective on the programmed
Ordinal number day of the month every year for a country. 'Ordinal number' can be set from '1' to '5'. For example, it
will be set to '1' for the DST of first Sunday of the month and to '3' for the third Sunday of the month.
On the programmed time of 'DST end day', the system will change its current time with the programmed "Backward
Time".
If Backward Time Adjustment is selected as "Date-Month wise" the DST will be effective on the programmed
date of the month every year for a country.
On the programmed time of 'DST end day' the system will change its current time with the programmed "Backward
Time".
DST Mode: Scheduled
When DST mode is programmed as scheduled, ETERNITY will apply DST as 'scheduled' for the selected region.
In this mode, the DST Time will get advance and backward automatically as scheduled for that country or region. The
scheduled start time and scheduled end time is programmed in ETERNITY, for some countries.
How to program?
Step 1: To Set RTC DST Mode using command 1010.
Step 2: To select DST Forward Time Adjustment Type using command 1011.
Step 3: To set time for DST Forward Type 'Date-Month wise' option using command 1012.
Step 4: To set time for DST Forward type 'Day-Month wise' option using command 1013.
Step 5: To select DST Backward Time Adjustment Type using command 1014.
Step 6: To set time for DST Backward Type 'Date-Month wise' option using command 1015.
Matrix
Step 7: To set time for DST Backward type 'Day-Month wise' option using command 1016.
Step 8: To Select the Region for Scheduled DST using command 1017.
Step 1
Use following command to ser RTC DST Mode:
1010-DST Mode
Where,
By default, DST Mode will be as per country, selected.
Step 2
Use following command to select DST Forward Type:
1011-DST Forward Type
Where,
By default, DST Forward Time Adjustment Type is 0.
Step 3
Use following command to program DST Forward parameters for 'Date-Month wise' option:
1012-Date-Month-Current Time-Advance Time
Where,
Date is from 01 to 31, Month is from 01 to 12,
Current Time and Advance Time is in HH-MM
Hour HH is from 00 to 23, Minute MM is from 00 to 59.
By default, Date-Month-Current Time-Advance Time for 'Date-Month wise' option is 01-01-00-00-00-00.
For e.g. In Cuba, the DST starts on 1st April of every year. The clock changes from 01:00 to 02:00. Following command
should be issued by the SE to affect DST.
1012-01-04-01-00-02-00
For e.g. In Syria, the DST starts on 1st April of every year. The clock changes from 00:00 to 01:00. Following command
should be issued by the SE to affect DST.
1012-01-04-00-00-01-00
Step 4
Use following command to program DST Forward parameters for 'Day-Month wise' option:
1013-Ordinal-Day-Month-Current Time-Advance Time
Where,
Ordinal Number is from 1 to 5. (1= First, 2=Second, 3=Third, 4=Fourth and 5=Fifth).
Day is from 1 to 7 (Sunday is Day1 and Saturday is Day7).
Hour HH is from 00 to 23.
Minute MM is from 00 to 59.
Current Time is for current settings whereas the Advanced Time is for time to which the clock should be forwarded to.
By default, Ordinal-Day-Month-Current Time-Advance Time for 'Day-Month wise' option is 1-1-01-00-00-00-00.
For e.g. In New Zealand, the DST starts on Last Sunday of October. The clock changes from 02:00 to 03:00.
Following programming should be done to affect DST in New Zealand.
1013-5-1-10-02-00-03-00
DST Mode Meaning
0 Disable
1 Manual
2 Scheduled
DST Forward Time Adjustment Meaning
0 None
1 Date-Month wise
2 Day-Month wise
Matrix
Note:
For last Sunday (or other day) of the month, always set Ordinal Number = 5. For e.g. If the month has 4 Sundays in a
particular Calendar year then the last Sunday would be automatically the fourth one and if the month has 5 Sundays in a
particular month of the Calendar year then the last Sunday would be automatically the fifth one, and while programming it
shall not be known that in a given year, the last Sunday would be fourth or fifth one. Hence program the Ordinal Number
= 5 for such cases.
Step 5
Use following command to select DST Backward Type:
1014-DST Backward Type
Where,
By default, DST Backward Type is 0.
Step 6
Use following command to program DST Backward parameters for 'Date-Month wise' option:
1015-Date-Month-Current Time-Backward Time
Where,
Date is from 01 to 31, Month is from 01 to 12, Hour is from 00 to 23, Minute is from 00 to 59.
By default, Date-Month-Current Time-Backward Time for 'Date-Month wise' option, is 01-01-00-00-00-00.
For e.g. In Syria, the DST ends on 1st October of every year. The clock changes from 23:59 (00:00 midnight of 1st
October) to 23:00. This means that DST should be changed on 30th Sept. at 23:59 to 23:00.
Following command should be issued by the SE to effect DST.
1015-30-09-23-59-22-59
Step 7
Use following command to program DST Backward parameters for 'Day-Month wise' option:
1016-Ordinal-Day-Month-Current Time-Backward Time
Where,
Ordinal Number is from 1 to 5. (1=First, 2=Second, 3=Third, 4=Fourth and 5=Fifth), Refer Note for the command '112'.
Day is from 1 to 7 (Sunday is Day1 and Saturday is Day7)
Hour is from 00 to 23.
Minute is from 00 to 59.
Current Time is for current settings whereas the Advanced Time is for time to which the clock should be backwarded to.
By default, Ordinal-Day-Month-Current Time-Advance Time for 'Day-Month wise' option is 1-1-01-00-00-00-00.
For e.g. In New Zealand, the DST ends on Third Sunday of March. The clock changes from 03:00 to 02:00. Following
command should be issued to affect DST in New Zealand.
1016-3-1-03-03-00-02-00
For e.g. In Cuba, the DST ends on last Sunday of October every year. The clock changes from 23:59 (in fact 00:00
midnight) to 23:00.
Following command should be issued by the SE to affect DST.
1016-5-1-10-23-59-22-59
Notes for programming DST parameters:
Note that the day does not get changed by the system automatically while forwarding the clock or reverting back to
normal. Hence the SE has to enter the current time and the forward and backward time keeping this aspect in mind.
For e.g. In Chile, DST is advanced on Second Saturday of October from 00:00 to 01:00. This means that on Second
Saturday of October at 00:00, the clock should be advanced to 01:00. To effect this in the system, the SE should use
following command:
1013-2-7-10-0000-0100
DST Backward Type Meaning
0 None
1 Date-Month wise
2 Day-Month wise
Matrix
For e.g. In Chile, DST is reverted back to normal on Second Sunday of March at 00:00 to Second Saturday of March
23:00. To effect this, SE should use following command:
1016-2-7-03-23:59-22:59
Step 8
Scheduled DST:
Use following command to select the Region for Scheduled DST
1017-Region
Where,
Region is from 01 to 18
By default, the 'Scheduled DST Type' (Start Time and End Time), is grouped in 01-18 for the regions (Countries)
with the 'Region Code' from 01 to 48.
Hence, SE should refer following Table to know the 'DST Scheduled Type' (01 to 18), corresponding to the 'Region' in
which ETETNITY is installed.
Also refer Table2, to get the information about DST Start Time and DST End Time for the selected region.
'Table1' for selecting Region for which Scheduled DST is desired:
Region
Code
Region
Default DST
Schedule Type
01 Australia (Perth, ) 2
02 Australia (Adelaide) 2
03 Austria 1
04 Bahrain 3
05 Belgium 2
06 Brazil (Brasilia, Rio de Janeiro, Sao Paulo) 4
07 Canada (St. John's) 5
08 Canada (Halifax) 5
09 Canada (Montreal, Ottawa, Toronto) 5
10 Canada (Winnipeg) 5
11 Canada (Calgary) 5
12 Canada (Vancouver) 5
13 Chile 6
14 Cuba 18
15 Denmark 7
16 Egypt 11
17 Finland 8
18 France 2
19 Germany 2
20 Greece 2
21 Hungary 2
22 Iraq 9
23 Ireland 7
24 Italy 2
25 Kyrgyzstan 10
26 Lebanon 12
27 Mexico (Mexico City) 3
28 Mexico (Chihuahua) 3
29 Mexico (Tijuana) 3
30 Namibia 13
31 New Zealand 14
32 Norway 15
33 Paraguay 16
Matrix
For the above regions, the applicable scheduled DST timing will be as shown in Table2, below:
'Table2' for DST Timings for 'DST Schedule Type':
In ETERNITY, the default settings of DST are coupled with the Country selected. For default DST settings for each
country refer chapter Default Settings.
Relevant Topics:
3. Region Code 705
=X=X=
34 Poland 1
35 Portugal 7
36 Russia (Moscow, St. Petersburg) 1
37 Russia (Novosibirsk) 1
38 Russia (Vladivostok) 1
39 Spain 1
40 Sweden 2
41 Switzerland 2
42 Syria 17
43 United Kingdom 7
44
United States (Atlanta, Augusta, Boston, Charlotte, Columbus, Detroit, Indiapolis, Miami, NY,
Philadelphia, Washington)
3
45
United States (Chicago, Dallas, Des Moines, Memphis, Minneapolis, New Orleans,
Oklahoma, Omaha, St. Louis)
3
46 United States (Albuquerque, Boise, Cheyenne, Denver, Salt Lake City) 3
47 United States (Las Vegas, Los Angeles, Phoenix, San Francisco, Seattle) 3
48 United States (Juneau) 3
DST
Type
DST Timings
Start Time (From and To) End Time (From and To)
01 Last Sun MAR 01:59 03:00 Last Sun OCT 02:59 02:00
02 Last Sun OCT 01:59 03:00 Last Sun MAR 02:59 02:00
03 Second Sun MAR 01:59 03:00 First Sun NOV 01:59 01:00
04 First Sun NOV 23:59 01:00 Third Sun FEB 23:59 23:00
05 Second Sun MAR 01:59 03:00 First Sun NOV 01:59 01:00
06 Second Sat OCT 23:59 01:00 Second Sat MAR 23:59 23:00
09 First APR 02:59 04:00 First OCT 03:59 03:00
11 Last Fri APR 23:59 01:00 Last Thu SEP 23:59 23:00
13 First Sun SEP 01:59 03:00 First Sun APR 01:59 01:00
14 First Sun OCT 01:59 03:00 Third Sun MAR 02:59 02:00
16 First Sun OCT 23:59 01:00 First Sun APR 23:59 23:00
17 First APR 23:59 01:00 First OCT 23:59 23:00
18 First APR 23:59 01:00 Last Sun OCT 23:59 23:00
Region
Code
Region
Default DST
Schedule Type
Matrix
DDI Routing Table
What's this?
The DDI Routing Table is a set of general features that define the complete logic of identifying the flexible numbers and
DDI equivalent numbers when there is an incoming or outgoing call on a BRI/T1E1PRIand SIP trunk. The ETERNITY
offers 128 such tables each of which can be programmed as per the requirement.
How it works?
The DDI Routing Table is made up of Parameters like:
DDI Routing Reference ID-This is the reference number acts as an identifier to the mapping logic programmed in the
DDI Routing Table. Any number of table can have the same reference number. A Reference ID is assigned to both IC
reference tables and OG reference tables of the trunks. For more details on call resolving, please refer the topics
Direct Dialing-In (DDI), IC Reference Table and OG Reference Table.
Start DDI Number-This is the First DDI Number for the ISDN Installation Number (MSN).
Total DDI Numbers-The total number of DDI numbers supported for an ISDN Installation Number. Suppose an ISDN
Trunk supports 200 DDI numbers, then total DDI Number is 200.
DDI Number of Digit-The number of digits in a DDI number. Suppose 200 DDI numbers are supported on an ISDN
Trunk, then the Number of Digits for that Trunk should be programmed as 3. Suppose 10 DDI numbers are supported
on another ISDN Trunk, then the Number of Digits for that Trunk should be programmed as 2.
Port Type-This parameter is to be programmed as listed in the parameter value in the DDI Routing Table.
Port Number-Number of port, range of which depends upon selected port type. Refer parameter value given in the
DDI Routing Table. This field is of no significance if port type is selected as 'Flexible Number'.
Start Flexible Number-If port type is 'Flexible Number' you can program station number of the first DDI Number for
the Index. Once this is programmed based on the start DDI number the rest of the flexible number of stations to which
DDI Number is assigned is calculated. 'Start Flexible Number' field is of significance only if the port type is 'Flexible
Number'.
How to program?
Use the following command to program the feature in a DDI Routing Table:
6322-1-DDI Routing Table Index-Parameter Number-Value
6322-2-DDI Routing Table Index-DDI Routing Table Index-Parameter Number-Value
6322-*-Parameter Number-Value
Where,
DDI Routing Table Index is from 001 to 128.
Parameter Number is from 01 to 06.
Code takes different values that vary from parameter to parameter. Please refer default table, which provides all the
values that can be assigned to various parameters.
Use following command to default a DDI Routing Table:
6321-1-DDI Routing Table Index
6321-2-DDI Routing Table Index-DDI Routing Table Index
6321-*
Where,
DDI Routing Table Index is from 001 to 128.
Matrix
Following table shows default DDI Routing Table
Parameter Value:
Refer to above table. Whenever the port type is selected as Flexible number, the range concept of Start flexible
number becomes relevant. In all other cases, range concept is not relevant.
When a call is placed on SLT/DKP port, the calling party number is displayed on the terminal.
When the call is placed on BRI-NT or PRI-NT, the calling party number and the called party number both are sent to
the NT port. Doing so, the PBX connected to the NT port can resolve the DDI number and place the call on the
programmed station.
Relevant Topics:
1. Direct Dialing-In (DDI) 449
2. ISDN-BRI 573
3. DS1 Trunks 475
4. IC Reference Table 561
5. OG Reference Table 649
=X=X=
Para. No./
Table Index
01 02 03 04 05 06
DDI Routing
Ref. ID
Start DDI
Numbers
Total DDI
Numbers
DDI Number
of Digit
Port Type
Port
Number
Start Flexible
Number
001 00 000000 000000 0 Null Blank Blank
002 00 000000 000000 0 Null Blank Blank
003-127 Same as 128
128 00 000000 000000 0 Null Blank Blank
Code
00 00-99
000001-
999999
000000-
999999
0-4 Null -- Max. 6-digits
04 BRI 01-32
05 T1E1PRI 1-8
06 E&M 001-128
08 AOP 1
10 DOP 1
11 Dept Grp 01-16
12 Quick Dial 100-999
20 RG 01-32
21 VMS Grp. 1
25 Mobile 01-32
26 SIP 01-32
27 Flex. No. 4-digits
Matrix
Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port
What's this?
Matrix ETERNITY supports a feature by which SE can view the system debugs on the server over IP network. This is
done by 'Syslog Client' in the ETERNITY which supports multiple debug levels.
Each debug message includes the MAC Address of syslog client who is sending debug messages in 'syslog' format.
How it works?
The debug can be enable/disable.
If Debug flag is 'Disable', syslog client will not send any debug to 'syslog server address'.
If Debug flag is 'Enable', syslog client will send debug to 'syslog server address' and the 'Debug Level' which is
enabled, can be viewed on the syslog server. The Server will use the MAC address data to filter the debug of the
specific gateway.
The Server address and port number are used as programmed values.
Following different DEBUG levels are supported:
APPL
CONFIG
SYS
SIP
CALL
VoPP
CHNL
REG
STACK
NAT
STUN
SNTP
As per the level selected, debug log will be generated. For example: if debug log of Call is required, enable 'CALL'
level and disable all other debug levels.
How to program?
Enable/disable Debug
Use following command to enable/disable Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7791-1-VoIP Ethernet Port -Debug
7791-2-VoIP Ethernet Port -VoIP Ethernet Port-Debug
7791-*-Debug
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is from 01 to 16.
By default: Disable.
Syslog Server Address
Use following command to program Syslog Server Address on which Debug parameter is to be sent for the VoIP
Ethernet Port:
7792-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Syslog Server Address
7792-*-Syslog Server Address
Where,
VoIP Ethernet port is from 01 to 16
Syslog Server Address is of 15 digits maximum.
By default, Blank.
Debug Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Syslog Port Address
Use following command to program Server Port Address on which Debug parameter is to be sent for the VoIP Ethernet
Port:
7793-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Server Port Address
7793-*-Server Port Address
Where,
Server Port Address is from 1024 to 65535 and 514.
By default: 514.
Note:
If Debug flag is Enable and Syslog Server IP address is Blank, debug log will be generated on Console port i.e COM
port. The Baud rate on Hyper terminal should be set to 115200.
Debug Level
Use following command to enable debug level for the VoIP Ethernet port:
7794-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Index-Code
7794-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-Index-Code
7794-*-Index-Code
Where,
By default, Enable for all indices.
Relevant Topics:
1. VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters 918
2. System Debug 835
3. Communication Ports 377
=X=X=
Index Meaning
01 CALL
02 REGISTER
03 SIP
04 RTP
05 VoPP
06 STACK
07 NAT
08 STUN
09 APPLICATION
10 SERIAL
11 OTHER
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Default Settings
Whats this?
Every system comes with pre-defined set of variable like station's flexible numbers, timers and other parameters.
These pre-defined settings are called default settings. The default value of each programmable parameter is
mentioned in the respective section. If the default setting suits your requirement then, you may not even require to
program the system and the system will work with the default settings.
If you use the command to default the system, all the programmable parameters except Network Port Parameters
(viz. IP Address, Subnet Mask, Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, Host Name, Domain Name, DHCP Server) and the
region code will get default values.
When to use it?
Many times it happens that due to some programming error, the system goes haywire and you are unable to analyses
the problem. During such a situation, it is advisable to default the system. However, software default of the system can be
done from the programming mode and hence programming password should be known. If you forget the password
default cannot be done and in that case hardware default of the SE Password should be done.
How to use it?
The ETERNITY offers default values to suit the customers worldwide. By default, the values programmed are relevant to
suit the Indian Users. The other users can load the default parameters to suit their requirements. Firstly the user has to
select the suitable region code. Please refer Region Code for more details. After choosing the region the user has to
default the system to load the suitable default parameters.
Use the following command to load the default parameters:
5302-Reverse SE Password
On giving this command, all the programmable parameters except Network Port Parameters and the region code will be
set to default values. The default values depend on the region code programmed in the system.
Note:
To default Network port parameters, click on 'Default' link in the "Master Ethernet Port Parameters" page.
The following table lists the default values of various parameters. Refer chapter Access Codes for TAC and Emergency
Number for various countries:
Country
Code
Country
Name
Default
Time
Zone
Default
DST
Mode
Default
DST
Schedule
Type
CPTG
Default
DKP
Language
TWT
H/w
Template
SLT
H/w
Template
Distinctive
Ring
Opr. TAC
Abbr.
Dialing
001 Afghanistan GMT+04:30 English
002 Algeria GMT+01:00 English
003 Antigua and
Barbuda
GMT-04:00 English
004 Argentina GMT-03:00 04 Spanish 09
005 Australia
(Perth)
GMT+08:00 Scheduled 2 05 English 09 12 9
006 Australia
(Note2)
(Adelaide)
GMT+09:30 Scheduled 2 05 English 09 12 9
007 Australia
(Brisbane,
Canberra,
Melbourne,
Sydney)
GMT+10:00 05 English 09 12 9
008 Austria GMT+01:00 Scheduled 1 German 9
009 Bahamas GMT-05:00 English 9
010 Bahrain GMT+03:00 Scheduled 3 English 9
011 Bangladesh GMT+06:00 English
012 Belarus GMT+02:00 English
013 Belgium GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 French 0
014 Bhutan GMT+06:00 English
015 Bolivia GMT-04:00 Spanish
Matrix
016 Bosnia and
Herzegovina
GMT+01:00 English
017 Botswana GMT+02:00 English
018 Brunei GMT+08:00 English
019 Brazil
(Fernando
De Noronha)
GMT-02:00 06 Portuguese 0
020 Brazil
(Brasilia, Rio
de Janeiro,
Sao Paulo)
GMT-03:00 Scheduled 4 06 Portuguese 0
021 Brazil
(Manaus)
GMT-04:00 06 Portuguese 0
022 Brazil (Acre) GMT-05:00 06 Portuguese 0
023 Bulgaria GMT+02:00 English
024 Cambodia GMT+07:00 English
025 Cameroon GMT+01:00 English
026 Canada (St.
John's)
GMT-03:30 Scheduled 5 03 English 06 06 T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
027 Canada
(Halifax)
028 Canada
(Montreal,
Ottawa,
Toronto)
029 Canada
(Winnipeg)
030 Canada
(Calgary)
031 Canada
(Vancouver)
032 Chile GMT-04:00 Scheduled 6 Spanish 0
033 China GMT+08:00 08 English 0
034 Colombia GMT-05:00 Spanish
035 Costa Rica GMT-06:00 Spanish
036 Croatia GMT+01:00 English
037 Cuba GMT-05:00 Scheduled 18 Spanish 0
038 Cyprus GMT+02:00 English
039 Czech
Republic
GMT+01:00 English
040 Denmark GMT+01:00 Scheduled 7 English 0
041 Egypt GMT+02:00 Scheduled 11 09 English 9
042 Fiji GMT+12:00 English
043 Finland GMT+02:00 Scheduled 8 English 9
044 France GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 10 French 9
045 Germany GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 11 German 9
046 Greece GMT+02:00 Scheduled 2 12 English 9
047 Guyana GMT-04:00 English
048 Hong Kong GMT+08:00 English 9
049 Hungary GMT+02:00 Scheduled 2 English 9
050 India GMT+05:30 01 English 01 01 T1 9 69-T-XXX 8
051 Indonesia GMT+07:00 14 English
052 Iran GMT+03:30 15 English 9
053 Iraq GMT+03:00 Scheduled 9 16 English 9
054 Ireland GMT Scheduled 7 English 9
055 Israel GMT+02:00 17 English
056 Italy GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 18 Italian 9
057 Japan GMT+09:00 19 English
Country
Code
Country
Name
Default
Time
Zone
Default
DST
Mode
Default
DST
Schedule
Type
CPTG
Default
DKP
Language
TWT
H/w
Template
SLT
H/w
Template
Distinctive
Ring
Opr. TAC
Abbr.
Dialing
Matrix
058 Jordan GMT+02:00 English
059 Kazakhstan GMT+06:00 English
060 Kenya GMT+03:00 20 English
061 Korea -
North
GMT+09:00 21 English
062 Korea -
South
GMT+09:00 English
063 Kuwait GMT+03:00 English
064 Kyrgyzstan GMT+06:00 Scheduled 10 English 9
065 Lebanon GMT+02:00 Scheduled 12 English 9
066 Libya GMT+02:00 English
067 Malaysia
(Note1)
GMT+08:00 22 English 01 01 0 6
068 Maldives GMT+05:00 English
069 Mauritius GMT+04:00 English
070 Mexico
(Mexico
City)
GMT-06:00 Scheduled 3 03 Spanish 06 06 T3 0 89-T-XXX 6
071 Mexico
(Chihuahua)
072 Mexico
(Tijuana)
073 Mongolia GMT+08:00 English
074 Mozambique GMT+02:00 Portuguese
075 Myanmar GMT+06:30 English
076 Namibia GMT+01:00 Scheduled 13 03 English 06 06 T3 9 89-T-XXX 6
077 Nepal GMT+05:45 English
078 Netherlands GMT+01:00 English
079 New
Zealand
GMT+12:00 Scheduled 14 24 English 9
080 Nigeria GMT+01:00 English
081 Norway GMT+01:00 Scheduled 15 English 9
082 Oman GMT+04:00 English
083 Pakistan GMT+05:00 English
084 Paraguay GMT-04:00 Scheduled 16 Spanish 9
085 Peru GMT-05:00 Spanish
086 Philippines GMT+08:00 25 English 08
087 Poland GMT+01:00 Scheduled 1 26 English 9
088 Portugal GMT Scheduled 7 27 Portuguese 9
089 Qatar GMT+03:00 English
090 Romania GMT+02:00 English
091 Russia
(Moscow, St.
Petersburg)
092 Russia
(Novosibirsk
)
093 Russia
(Vladivostok)
094 Singapore GMT+08:00 30 English 9
095 Slovakia GMT+01:00 English
096 South Africa GMT+02:00 31 English
097 Spain GMT+01:00 Scheduled 1 32 Spanish 9
098 Sri Lanka GMT+05:30 English
099 Sudan GMT+03:00 English
100 Sweden GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 English 9
101 Switzerland GMT+01:00 Scheduled 2 German 9
Country
Code
Country
Name
Default
Time
Zone
Default
DST
Mode
Default
DST
Schedule
Type
CPTG
Default
DKP
Language
TWT
H/w
Template
SLT
H/w
Template
Distinctive
Ring
Opr. TAC
Abbr.
Dialing
Matrix
102 Syria GMT+02:00 Scheduled 17 English 9
103 Taiwan GMT+08:00 English 0
104 Tajikistan GMT+05:00 English
105 Thailand GMT+07:00 33 English
106 Turkey GMT+02:00 34 English 9
107 Uganda GMT+03:00 English
108 Ukraine GMT+02:00 English
109 United Arab
Emirates
GMT+04:00 35 English 9
110 United
Kingdom
GMT Scheduled 7 02 English 05 11 T2 9 69-T-XXX 8
111 United
States
(Atlanta,
Augusta,
Boston,
Charlotte,
Columbus,
Detroit,
Indiapolis,
Miami, NY,
Philadelphia,
Washington)
GMT-05:00 Scheduled 3 02 English Bell 01 T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
112 United
States
(Chicago,
Dallas, Des
Moines,
Memphis,
Minneapolis,
New
Orleans,
Oklahoma,
Omaha, St.
Louis)
113 United
States
(Albuquerqu
e, Boise,
Cheyenne,
Denver, Salt
Lake City)
114 United
States (Las
Vegas, Los
Angeles,
Phoenix,
San
Francisco,
Seattle)
115 United
States
(Juneau)
116 United
States
(Hawaii)
GMT-10:00 02 English Bell 01 T3 0 81-T-XXX 6
117 Uzbekistan GMT+05:00 English
118 Venezuela GMT-04:30 Spanish
119 Vietnam GMT+07:00 English
120 Yemen GMT+03:00 English
121 Yugoslavia GMT+02:00 English
122 Zambia GMT+02:00 English
123 Zimbabwe GMT+02:00 English
Country
Code
Country
Name
Default
Time
Zone
Default
DST
Mode
Default
DST
Schedule
Type
CPTG
Default
DKP
Language
TWT
H/w
Template
SLT
H/w
Template
Distinctive
Ring
Opr. TAC
Abbr.
Dialing
Matrix
Note1:
For Malaysia, defaults are as mentioned below:
TAC0=9, TAC1=81, TAC2=82, TAC3=83, TAC4=84
Station Advanced Feature Template = 01
Distinctive Rings for Malaysia are as explained below:
For Internal Call: Ring Type 06, which has Cadence of 1000 ms On - 4000 ms off.
For external call (incoming call): Ring Type 08 which has cadence 400ms On - 200 ms Off - 400 ms On - 2000
ms off.
For Other call types: Same as for Country-India. Refer chapter Distinctive Rings for ring types.

Note2:
For Australia, default Station Advanced Feature Template = 01.
To load default timers, refer chapter System Parameters.
Important Points:
When the default command is issued the parameters are loaded to suit the region code of the system at that time.
Default command does not default the region code. (The region code has to be changed explicitly).
The user has to select his region code and then default the system to load the default parameters to suit the region.
i.e By default, the region code is Indian and the default values of programmable parameters are to suit the Indian
market. Now when the system is shipped to Canada, the user has to first set the region code to Canada and then
default the system to load the Canadian default values. If the same unit is shipped back to India, the user has to again
set the region code to India and then default the system to load Indian defaults.
Relevant Topics:
2. System Security 850
4. Region Code 705
7. Distinctive Rings 470
=X=X=
Matrix
Department Call
Whats this?
Many times it is required to call any one of the persons in a department. It is not important to talk to a particular person.
The caller just wants any member from the Department. ETERNITY offers flexibility to group stations belonging to a
particular department. The call made to this group using a code is called Department Call. The access code used to
make such call is called Department Number. Hence now the caller has to dial the Department Number to access the
Department. However the caller can access individual station of the group also by dialing the station number.
Department Call is allowed through DID call also. Hence if the caller is making a call to you for the first time and wants
some information about your company then he may dial the Information Department instead of dialing any particular
station or waiting for the operator.
How it works?
Maximum 16 department groups can be formed.
16 stations can be grouped in a Department Group.
The stations can be a SLT, DKP, DOP or ISDN Terminal.
The time for which each station rings can be programmed.
The sequence in which various stations in the group should ring can be arranged.
The number of stations that should ring at a time can be programmed.
Once a station receives a ring, it can be set to ring continuously till the call matures. Such a station continues ringing
even when other stations of the group are hunted. This is called "Continuous" ringing and can be programmed for
each station.
If the call is not answered even after hunting the last station, the system will loop back and start from the first station
once again.
A fresh call can start hunting either from the first station or from the final station of the previous call. This method is
called Rotation Method and can be set for each group. If rotation method is enabled, the fresh call will land on the
destination next to the one, which received the last call. This would enable equal distribution of incoming calls to all
the destinations within the group. If the rotation method is disabled, the fresh call will always land on first station of the
department group.
Any station in the Group can answer the call.
Association Of the Department Call with Routing Group.
ETERNITY allows to program related stations into groups known as Routing Groups. Please refer the topic Routing
Group for more details. We can program the stations that fall under one department in a Routing Group. This Routing
Group can be programmed as a Department Group. An Access Code can be assigned to the Department Group. This
Access Code is known as the Department Number and the Group of stations can be accessed with this Number.
Association of Department Group and ISDN Terminal:
If more than two 'ISDN terminals' associated with same BRI port are programmed as member of the Department group
and if call is made using department group access code, only two ISDN terminals of the associated BRI port will ring.
This limitation is because of the BRI protocol.
How to use it?
How to program?
Step 1
Please refer the topic Routing Group.
2
Dial Department Number
(3901-3916).
Ring Back Tone (The call lands on the programmed
station within the department group).
Matrix
Step 2
Use following command to assign routing group to the department group:
2001-1-Department Group Index-Routing Group
2001-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-Routing Group
2001-*-Routing Group
Where,
Department Group Index is from 01 to 16.
Routing Group is from 00 to 42.
By default, 01 is assigned as routing group.
Use the following command to clear the routing group assigned to department group:
2001-1-Department Group Index-00
2001-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-00
2001-*-00
Step 3
How to assign an access code of your choice to Department Group?
Department number is an access code dialed from the dial phase to call a Department Group. There are maximum 16
Department Groups. Each department group access code must be unique and should not match with either SLT station
number or DKP station number or any of the features available from the dial phase.
Use following command to program the access code for a department number:
3113-1-Department Group Index-Access Code-#*
3113-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-Access Code-#*
Where,
Department Group Index is from 01 to 16.
Access Code is maximum of 6 digits.
How to default the Access Codes?
By default, every department group has a default access code. The default access codes for different department groups
are:
Use following command to default the access code for a department group:
3163-1-Department Group Index
3163-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index
3163-*
It is recommended to use default codes.
How to clear the Access Codes?
Use following command to clear the access code for a department group:
Department Group Index Default Code
01 3901
02 3902
03 3903
04 3904
05 3905
06 3906
07 3907
08 3908
09 3909
10 3910
11 3911
12 3912
13 3913
14 3914
15 3915
16 3916
Matrix
3113-1-Department Group Index-#*
3113-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-#*
3113-*-#*
Example:
Program the system for following constraints.
Marketing department in a company has four stations viz. 201, 202, 203 and 204 (S/w ports (001, 002 and 003, 004).
201 and 202 are SLTs whereas 203 and 204 are DKPs.
The stations should ring in a sequence viz. 201, 202, 203, 204.
First 201 should ring for 20 seconds.
If no reply, 201 should continue and 202 should ring for 10 seconds.
If still no reply, 201 should continue and 203 should ring for 15 seconds.
If still no reply, 201 should continue and 204 should ring for 20 seconds.
Call traffic should be distributed equally on all four destinations.
Assign Access Code 51 to access this group.
Program the four stations in the Routing Group 01.
6502-1-01-1-01-001
6502-1-01-2-01-002
6502-1-01-3-02-003
6502-1-01-4-02-004
Program the Ring Timer for the individual stations of the Routing Group.
6503-1-01-1-020
6503-1-01-2-010
6503-1-01-3-015
6503-1-01-4-020
Program the Continuous Ring on the stations of the Routing Group.
6504-1-01-1-1
6504-1-01-2-0
6504-1-01-3-0
6504-1-01-4-0
Turn Rotation ON for the Routing Group.
6505-1-01-1
Program the Routing Group as a Department Group.
2001-1-01-01
Assign an Access Code for the Department Group.
3113-1-01-51-#*
Relevant Topics:
2. Security Dialing and Reporting 726
4. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
Matrix
Dialed Number Directory
Whats this?
ETERNITY retains the list of dialed out numbers (16 numbers) in a directory for every DKP user.
The numbers include the numbers dialed out using Abbreviated Dialing, Quick Dial, Redial or a simple call.
Numbers dialed out from Walk-In Mode are also noted in the directory.
How to use it?
Important Points:
The trunk access code used by the system to dialout the number is same as the trunk access code used the first time.
Toll control is not applied while dialing number using abbreviated dialing.
Number dialed using abbreviated dialing also gets stored in this dialed number directory.
When dialing out the same number stored in dialed number directory, the toll control applies.
Relevant Topics:
2. Quick Dial 695
=X=X=
Action Response
Dial 7. Last Number stored in the dialed number directory is dialed out.
Matrix
Digest Authentication
What's this?
Using this feature, incoming calls on SIP Account of the ETERNITY (with VoIP Ethernet Port) can be restricted for
specific callers. The caller has to first prove his authentication before successfully calling to ETERNITY-VoIP Ethernet
Port, using his credentials. These credentials are 'User ID' and 'User Password'.
Refer chapter SIP Trunk Parameters to enable/disable the feature on the SIP trunk.
Above figure shows only two ETERNITY-Gateways connected in different networks.
Like this, for some other application, suppose the Company has four branch offices in Mumbai, Kolkata , Chennai and
New Delhi.
Now, Mumbai office wants to receive calls on SIP Account only from the branch offices in Kolkata, Chennai and New
Delhi. All IC calls from other branch offices should automatically be rejected. At the same time, the Mumbai office
should be able to make IP calls across the network.
For such applications, Digest authentication will be useful by suitable configuration of 'User ID' and 'User Password' in
the Digest Authentication table in the called ETERNITY. In above example, these parameters for ETERNITY or other
IP devices at Kolkata, Chennai and New Delhi, will be same as configured for them in the Digest Authentication Table
of the called ETERNITY at Mumbai office.
If the 'User ID' and 'User Password' encrypted by the IP device of the caller, has the perfect match with the
corresponding parameters programmed in the 'Digest Authentication Table' of the called ETERNITY, then only the
incoming call from that caller will be processed further.
The feature can be enabled/disabled for each SIP Account but the authentication parameters are common for all the
SIP Accounts.
How it works?
Enable the 'Digest Authentication' feature on SIP Account by configuring the command 7729 in chapter page 'SIP Trunk
Parameters'.
The default parameters configured in the 'Digest Authentication Table' will be as shown below:
Digest Authentication:
When there is Incoming call from the caller IP device, on SIP Account number of the called ETERNITY, the
ETERNITY will decrypt the 'User ID' and 'User Password'. If these credentials match perfectly, with the parameters
configured in its 'Digest Authentication Table', then the call will be processed further.
The called ETERNITY will challenge the invalid credentials only once. After this attempt, the ETERNITY will reject the
call.
Index User ID User Password
01
02
:
99
IP
R1
A
B
C
Router Router
Network 1 Network 2
A
B
C
R2
ETERNITY Gateway
VoIP Ethernet
Port
Matrix
How to program?
Step 1
Enable Digest Authentication on a SIP trunk
Refer command 7729 in chapter 'SIP Trunk Parameters' to enable Digest Authentication on a SIP trunk. Refer chapter
SIP Trunk Parameters.
Step 2
Program SIP-Id
Use following command to program SIP-Id in the Digest Authentication Table:
4118-Index-User ID
Where,
Index = 01 to 99.
User ID can be of maximum 40 ASCII Characters. If it is less than 40 characters, terminate with #* if using SLT or press
'Enter' key if using DKP.
Default = Blank.
Step 3
Program User Password
Use following command to program User Password in the Digest Authentication Table:
4119-Index-User Password
Where,
Index = 01 to 99.
User Password can be of maximum 16 ASCII Char, if less than 16 characters terminate with #* if using SLT or press
'Enter' key if using DKP
Default = Blank.
Important Point:
The parameters of Digest Authentication Table are common for all SIP trunks for which the Digest Authentication
feature is enabled.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Matrix
Digital Input Port (DIP)
Whats this?
The ETERNITY provides a highly reliable, solid-state Digital Input Port (DIP) for various control applications.
An external device like fire alarm sensor, smoke sensor, glass breaking detector etc. which conforms to the
specifications of the DIP can be connected to it.
ETERNITY ME, GE and PE support a single DIP port only.
How it works?
When the sensor connected to the DIP instigates the DIP, the system works as per the programming. Suppose the
system is programmed to make an external call on receiving instigation from DIP then on receiving a signal from the
sensor connected to the DIP the system makes an external call to a programmed destination.
The DIP can be programmed as Active high or Active Low depending upon the application.
Active High state signifies that the DIP is normally open.
Active Low state signifies that the DIP is normally close.
How to connect the external device to the DIP?
Note:
For step-by-step instructions, refer Installing ETERNITY ME, Installing ETERNITY GE.
How to program?
Step 1
Use the following command to enable/disable the DIP:
4902-1-DIP-Code
Where,
DIP is 1
By default, DIP is disabled.
Step 2
Use the following command to program the DIP as Active High/Active Low:
4903-1-DIP-Code
Where,
DIP is 1.
By default, DIP is programmed as Active High.
Type Loop Open/Close Sensing
Loop Current Supplied 10mA (Max.)
Code Meaning
0 Disable DIP
1 Enable DIP
Code Meaning
0 Program DIP as Active Low
1 Program DIP as Active High
Sensor
Matrix
Step 3
Use the following command to program the Event Sense Timer for the DIP:
4904-1-DIP-Event Sense Timer
Where,
Event Sense Timer is from 000 to 255 seconds.
This time signifies the time for which the instigation signal should remain present on DIP for it to be identified as a
genuine signal and for the DIP to respond.
DIP is 1.
By default, Event sense timer is 000 seconds.
How to default the DIP?
Use the following command to assign default values to the DIP:
4901-1-DIP
Where,
DIP is 1.
On issuing any of the above commands, following parameters are assigned default values.
DIP is disabled.
DIP is programmed as Active High.
Event sense timer for the DIP is set to 000 seconds.
Relevant Topics:
4. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
Matrix
Digital Key Phone-Operation
Whats this?
Matrix offers EON45/EON42/EON48, a digital key phone (DKP). The key of specific locations on the DKP, are also
programmable for the required functions.
Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for more details.
EON45
EON45 is a feature-rich, easy to use station with following characteristics:
2-line x 16 character LCD.
Total 45 Keys.
Total 26 programmable keys.
Dual Color LEDs to show status of ports. Green LED gives the status for called station ringing (Green LED blinks), in
speech with station or incoming call (Green LED continuous ON). Red LED indicates various status like going OFF-
Hook, internal dialing, dialing on trunk, on hold, other two stations in speech, etc.
Hands free operation.
Adjustable ringer tune and level.
Adjustable speech levels.
Photograph of EON45
DKP being a more powerful station, it supports many additional features, which are not supported by a SLT. Few of them
are:
LCD Messages.
Status of other ports.
Feature keys.
Ringer tune selection.
Speech level controls.
Paging.
Hence, DKP features are superset of SLT features as shown in the following diagram.
How to use it?
Maximum 128 DKPs can be connected to the ETERNITY. The ETERNITY supports 4 built-in DKP ports viz. DKP1,
DKP2, DKP3 and DKP4. These ports are located on the ETERNITY ME Card Switch and the connection for these ports
are available from the Amphenol connector of the ETERNITY ME Card Switch the ETERNITY supports three
configurations of ETERNITY ME Card DKP viz ETERNITY ME Card DKP8 and ETERNITY ME Card DKP16. The user
DKP
SLT
Matrix
can use these cards to meet his requirement of DKP's. If fewer number of DKPs are to be connected then one may use
the In-built DKP ports only. Please note that if four In-built ports are used then maximum of 124 DKPs can be connected
using ETERNITY ME Card DKP.
EON42
The ETERNITY support two type of EON42 phones:
EON42S (2X24 LCD Display)-Standard model with 2-line, 24 character display.
EON42P (6X24 LCD Display)-Premium model with 6-line, 24-character display.
You can detach EON45 and attach EON42S or EON42P on the same DKP Port. The ETERNITY will identify the
attached type of DKP itself. There is no user command to distinguish type of DKP attached to DKP port. By default, all
the DKP's are assumed to be EON45.
Messages related to events are different for EON45 and EON42.
The ETERNITY will show relevant messages for EON45 or EON42, on its LCD.
Key map of EON45 and EON42 is shown on the next page.
In EON45, keys from 01 to 26 are programmable whereas in EON42, DSS keys from 01 to 25 are programmable.
Each DSS key has in built LED which is of dual colour.
DSS Key's LED status is common for both EON45 and EON42.
In EON42, there is a Ringer LED on the top of Right side. The ringer LED cadence is same as loop key LED cadence
(ring cadence) when there is an incoming call on that port.
There is no 'func' key in EON42. The job of 'func' key is done by 'Enter' key in EON42. Hence, while in idle state when
the user presses 'Enter' (P) key, you will enter to 'Menu'.
Up and down arrow keys are used for navigating the Menu.
Left arrow key is used to go to previous Menu.
The job done by 'Hold' key (i.e. making selection) in EON45 is also done by 'Enter'(P) key.
Following table explains functions associated with keys in EON42.
LCD Back Light Function for EON42:
EON42 supports this feature for power saving. If no activity is performed on/by EON42 within defined time, back light of
the EON42 LCD display will get turned OFF.
Following parameters can be programmed for Display settings. These parameters can be programmed from EON42 from
Menu (Display Settings) and from SE commands.
LCD Contrast: It is programmable from minimum contrast to maximum contrast.
LCD Back Light Intensity Level: It is programmable from minimum intensity to maximum intensity.
LCD Back Light OFF Timer: It signifies time period after which the LCD back light will get turned off if no activity is
performed by/on EON42 within the configured time. The back light will remain continuously ON irrespective of LCD
Back Light OFF Timer, when user is in speech.
The LCD Back Light will remain ON for programmed "LCD Back Light OFF Timer".
The LCD backlight will be turned ON, in following conditions:
Incoming call comes on the EON42.
User goes OFF-Hook.
Any key pressed from the EON42 in any state EON42 user goes ON-Hook.
The LCD back light will NOT be turned ON, in following conditions:
If EON42 is being monitored (Room Monitoring is performed by another station user on the EON42).
While updating RTC-Date and Time on EON42.
If LCD Back light level is set to '0'.
The Enter Key;
To enter the Menu;
To make a selection in the Menu or to complete an action.
The Up Key;
To scroll upwards when navigating the Menu/sub-menu.
The Down Key;
To scroll downwards when navigating the Menu/sub-menu.
The Forward Key;
To increase the volume of the Ringer and Speech.
The Back Key;
To decrease the volume of the Ringer and Speech.
Matrix
EON42SR:
EON42SR is similar to EON42 DKP supported by Matrix. However, EON42SR supports only 2 line 24 characters
LCD.
It does not support setting of contrast levels. The handset, hands free and headset speech volume levels can be
adjusted from 0 to 9.
The DTMF Tx level can be adjusted from 0 to 9 instead of 1 to 4 which is for EON42.
Priority feature for EON42/EON48:
Case-1: When more than one call is waiting at the EON42/EON48, the user will get ICWT, irrespective of the priority
of internal calling station.
Case-2: When trunk call is waiting on the EON42/EON48, the user will get trunk call warning beep form of CCWT, if
the trunk call has higher priority than the other waiting call.
In both Case-1 and Case-2, when the EON42/EON48 user goes on-hook, the priority will be considered and the user
will get first the call with higher priority.
Keys Map for EON45:
Key Map for EON42:
Key Map for EON42SR:
1 2 3 redial
spd 6 5 4
7 8 9 trf/fl
hold 0
Fun
01
06
11
16
21
02
07
12
17
22
03
08
13
18
23
04
09
14
19
24
05
10
15
20
25
* #
Vol 26
Fixed
Keys
Programmable
Keys (01-25)
Programmable Key
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
13
14
15
16
17
18
08
09
10
11
12
Key Key
Fixed
Keys
Programmable
Keys
Ringer LED
* 0 #
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Programmable
Keys
19
20
21
22
23
24
25 Programmable Key
Matrix
Refer Key Map for EON42
EON48
Matrix supports the Digital Key Phone, which is identical to 'EON42'. It is called 'EON48' phone.
It supports: 29 programmable keys, 12 keypad keys, 1 'menu' key, 1 'Speaker' key, navigation keys, up/down keys,
and +/- keys.
LCD messages for different call events, for the EON48-S are same as that for EON42-S.
LCD messages for different call events for the EON48-P are same as that for EON42-P.
The DKP port of ETERNITY ME/GE can be connected with any of the following types of Matrix Digital Key Phone:
EON42-S
EON42-P
EON42SR
EON45
EON48-S
EON48-P
There is no user command to distinguish type of DKP attached to DKP port. While switching 'ON' the ETERNITY ME/
GE will automatically identify the DKP connected.
Types of 'EON48':
The 'EON48' is available in two variants:
EON48-S (2X24 LCD Display), 2-line, 24-characters.
EON48-P (6X24 LCD Display), 6-line, 24-characters.
Keys explanation:
'Menu' feature can be accessed by pressing 'P' key.
The up (^) key and down (v) key are used to navigate the 'menu' options up and down, i.e. scrolling up and down
The left key (<) and right key (>) are used to navigate menu backward and forward direction respectively.
The 'P' key also acts as selection key for required feature, after scrolling the options for 'Menu' (Same as
implemented in the EON42).
The (+) key is used to increase the ringer volume if the phone is in ringing state, or if the phone is OFF-Hook (working
in Speaker mode), will be used to increase the volume level during speech.
The (-) key is used to decrease the ringer volume if the phone is in ringing state, or if the phone is OFF-Hook, will be
used to decrease the volume level.
The Key map for the 'EON48' digital key phone is shown below:
Matrix
Key Map for EON48
Keys which support LED are shown with 'dot'. Rest of all DSS keys does not support built-in LEDs.
The key functions for the 'Operator' functionality can be programmed by assigning the keys to the functions as
required.
Language Selection:
EON42 and EON48 support English, Spanish, Portuguese, French languages. This feature will be useful for the countries
like Spain, Germany and Portugal where English is not popular. EON45 supports only 'English' language. The SE can
select the language using specific command.
How to program?
Step 1
Please refer the topic Software Port and Hardware ID for more details.
Step 2
Please refer Flexible Numbers to know how to assign a Flexible number to the DKP.
Step 3
Headset Connectivity
Use following command to enable Headset connectivity on a DKP port:
1213-1-DKP-Headset Connectivity
1213-2-DKP-DKP-Headset Connectivity
1213-*-Headset Connectivity
Where,
DKP is the software port from 001 to 128.
By default, Headset Connectivity is disabled.
Step 4
Loop Count
Headset Connectivity Meaning
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
*
#
abc def
ghi jkl mno
pqrs tuv wxyz
Forward
Call Back Cancel
DND
Voice Mail
Names
Mute Conference Transfer
Hold Release Redial
DKP001
TWT004
TWT003
TWT002
TWT001
CA03
CA02
CA01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18
19
20 21
22
23
24 25
28 27 26
CA04
SLT001
SLT002
SLT003
SLT004
DKP002
DKP003
DKP004
29
Matrix
The ETERNITY offers a feature viz. Loop Count (Call Capacity) which allows the station user to attend more than one
party at a time or hold more than one party at a time.
This feature is very helpful to the Operator who has to handle more number of calls at a time.
This feature is also helpful to executives who need to talk to more than one person keeping one or more persons on
hold to solve problems, discuss important issues, etc.
The station user can have minimum two loops and a maximum of ten loops.
Two loops significantly mean that the station user can hold one person and converse with the second. Three loops
means that the station user can hold two persons at a time and converse with the third.
Following two conditions elaborate the application of loop count:
If the user of DKP is an important person like a 'Manager', he needs only 2 loops. The executive calls a station,
talks to him, holds him and calls other person. Now he can toggle between the two stations. However, the
executive cannot hold both the persons and call third person. Such DKPs will be programmed for only 3 loops.
But, if the user of DKP is an Operator, she needs as many as 6 loops. The Operator can attend 6 calls at a time.
This is very helpful in conditions when the operator tries to transfer a call to a person who keeps moving in the
office. In such cases, if the Operator could not locate the person, she can hold the calling party and attend another
caller. On completing all the activities, the Operator can attend the held party and transfer him to the desired
station. Such DKPs will be programmed for 6 loops.
Each loop should be assigned a DSS key.
The DSS keys assigned for loops helps the Operator to locate a particular held party among many held parties.
Holding a party and Retrieving a party
The Station user can hold a party using any of the following methods:
Pressing Flash key.
Pressing Hold key.
Pressing the DSS key programmed for the station in speech.
Pressing the loop key for the current party in speech.
Using hook key.
The Station user can retrieve a particular held party (selective retrieve) using any of the following method:
Pressing the loop key of the held party.
Using hook key (the held parties are retrieved at random).
Using hold key (the held parties are retrieved at random).
Using flash key (the held parties are retrieved at random).
The Station user can retrieve a particular held party (selective retrieve) using following method:
Pressing the loop key of the held party.
The calls remain in the respective loops till:
The call is released.
The caller disconnects.
Only the DKP users can be assigned Call loops.
LED logic for loop keys is explained in the table. This will be same for ringer key LED also for the Incoming call.
Use the following command to assign number of loops to a DKP:
1201-1-DKP-Loopcount
1201-2-DKP-DKP-Loopcount
1201-*-Loopcount
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001-128.
Loopcount is from 02 to 10.
By default, Loopcount is 02.
Step 5
Ringer Tune
The ETERNITY supports programmable ringer tunes. Each DKP user can select ringer tune of his choice.
Indication LED Continuously ON Slow Blink Fast Blink
Green LED When you are in
speech with station
When you have put a
on hold
When any station
is calling
Orange LED When you are in
speech with trunk
When you have put a
trunk on hold
When any trunk
is calling
Matrix
Use following commands to set the ringer tune to a DKP:
1202-1-DKP-Ringer Tune
1202-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Tune
1202-*-Ringer Tune
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001-128.
Ringer Tune is 0-9 (EON45) and 1-8 (EON42/EON48).
Assigning 0 to ringer tune means, ringer is OFF.
By default, Ringer Tune is 1.
Ringer Volume
The ETERNITY supports programmable ringer volume. Each DKP user can select ringer volume of his choice. There are
9 different ringer volume levels to choose from. When you press the key to increase/decrease volume level, the
corresponding count of '>' symbol is displayed on LCD for EON42/EON48. For example, [ > > > >] will be displayed for
maximum of 4 steps.
Use following commands to set the ringer volume to a DKP:
1203-1-DKP-Ringer Volume
1203-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Volume
1203-*-Ringer Volume
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
Ringer Volume Level from 0-9 (EON45) 1-9 (EON42/EON48).
Assigning 0 to Ringer Volume means, Volume is OFF.
By default, Ringer Volume is 5.
Ringer Mode
The ETERNITY supports programmable ringer mode. This mode decides when the ring on the DKP should start. There
are four options:
Ring immediately as soon as a fresh calls lands on the DKP.
Ring only if the DKP is idle and not doing some activity.
Ring after a delay if the call is still not answered.
Ring always off (Silence mode).
Each DKP user can select ringer mode of his choice.
Use following commands to program the ringer mode to a DKP:
1204-1-DKP-Ringer Mode
1204-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Mode
1204-*-Ringer Mode
Where,
By default, Ringer Mode is 1.
Ringer Delay Timer
If delayed ringer mode is selected for a DKP, the ETERNITY supports programmable timer. This is called Ringer Delay
Timer. Each DKP user can select the timer value of his choice.
Use following commands to program the Ringer Delay Timer to a DKP:
1205-1-DKP-Ringer Delay Timer
1205-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Timer
1205-*-Ringer Delay Timer
Where,
Ring Delay Timer from 01 to 99 seconds.
Ringer Mode Meaning
1 Ring Immediately
2 Ring if Idle
3 Ring After Delay
4 Ring OFF
Matrix
By default, The ringer delay timer value is 10 seconds.
Ringer Auto Acknowledge
The ETERNITY supports programmable Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode. This mode decides when the ring on the DKP
should stop. There are two options:
Stop only when the call is answered or manually acknowledged.
Stop after delay.
Each DKP user can select Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode of his choice.
Use following commands to program the Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode to a DKP:
1206-1-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode
1206-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode
1206-*-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode
Where,
By default, Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode is OFF.
Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer
If Ringer Auto Acknowledge mode is selected for a DKP, the ETERNITY supports programmable timer. This is called
Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer. Each DKP user can select the timer value of his choice. This timer is programmable in
the range from 01 to 99 seconds.
Use following commands to program the Ringer Auto Ack Timer to a DKP:
1207-1-DKP-Ringer Auto Ack Timer
1207-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Auto Ack Timer
1207-*-Ringer Auto Ack Timer
Where,
Ringer Auto Ack Timer from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, the Ringer Auto Ack Timer is 00. Assigning 00 means acknowledgment is Off.
Step 6
Handset MIC Volume
It is possible to vary the Handset MIC Volume.
Use following command to set the Handset MIC Volume to a DKP:
1208-1-DKP-Handset MIC Volume
1208-2-DKP-DKP-Handset MIC Volume
1208-*-Handset MIC Volume
Where,
Handset MIC Volume is 0-9 (EON45) and 1-4 (EON42/EON48).
By default, Handset MIC Volume is 5 (EON45) and 2 (EON42/EON48). Assigning 0 means volume is OFF.
Handset Speaker Volume
Use following command to set the handset speaker volume to a DKP:
1209-1-DKP-Handset Speaker Volume
1209-2-DKP-DKP-Handset Speaker Volume
1209-*-Handset Speaker Volume
Where,
Handset Speaker Volume is 0-9 (EON45) and 1-4 (EON42/EON48).
By default, Handset Speaker Volume is 5 (EON45) and 2 (EON42/EON48). Assigning 0 means Volume is OFF.
Step 7
Speaker Phone MIC Volume
Mode Meaning
0 Ringer Auto Acknowledge OFF
1 Ringer Auto Acknowledge ON
Matrix
It is possible to change the speaker phone MIC volume.
Use following command to set speaker phone MIC volume to a DKP:
1210-1-DKP-Speaker Phone MIC Volume
1210-2-DKP-DKP-Speaker Phone MIC Volume
1210-*-Speaker Phone MIC Volume
Where,
Speaker Phone MIC Volume is 1-9 (EON45) and 1-4 (EON42/EON48).
By default, Speaker Phone MIC Volume is 5 and 2 (EON42/EON48). Assigning 0 means volume is OFF.
Speaker Phone Speaker Volume
Use following command to set the speaker phone speaker volume to a DKP:
1211-1-DKP-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume
1211-2-DKP-DKP-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume
1211-*-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume
Where,
Speaker Phone Speaker Volume is 0-9 (EON45) and 1-4 (EON42/EON48).
By default, Speaker Phone Speaker Volume is 5 (EON45) and 2 (EON42/EON48).
Step 8
Key Click Volume
It is possible to set the Key Click Volume (Key DTMF Side tone).
Use following command to set the key click volume to a DKP:
1212-1-DKP-Key Click Volume
1212-2-DKP-DKP-Key Click Volume
1212-*-Key Click Volume
Where,
Key Click Volume is from 1 to 9 (EON45), 1-4 (EON42/EON48). 0 is for Volume OFF.
By default, Key Click Volume is 5 (EON45).
Step 9
Auto Call Answer Mode
Use following command to program auto call answer mode of a DKP:
1214-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode
1214-2-DKP-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode
1214-*-Auto Call Answer Mode
Where,
By default, Auto Call Answer Mode is 0.
Step 10
Auto Call Answer Timer
Use following command to program auto call answer timer for auto answer mode set for a DKP:
1215-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer
1215-2-DKP-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer
1215-*-Auto Call Answer Timer
Where,
Auto Call Answer Timer is from 1 to 9 seconds.
By default, Auto Call Answer Timer is 1 second, when Auto Answer Timer is ON.
Step 11
LCD Backlight Level
Auto Call Answer Mode Meaning
0 OFF (Manual)
1 ON (Auto)
Matrix
Use following command to adjust the LCD Backlight Level of EON42:
1216-1-DKP-LCD Backlight Level
1216-2-DKP-DKP-LCD Backlight Level
1216-*-LCD Backlight Level
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station from 001 to 128
Brightness = 0 to 4.
0=Backlight OFF, 1=Minimum Intensity, 4=Maximum Intensity
Intensity will increase in steps from 0 towards 4. This intensity will get controlled by the Back light given on LCD.
Step 12
LCD Contrast Level
Use following command to adjust the LCD Contrast Level of the characters on the LCD of EON42:
1217-1-DKP-LCD Contrast Level
1217-2-DKP-DKP-LCD Contrast Level
1217-*-LCD Contrast Level
Where,
LCD Contrast Level = 1 to 4.
1 =minimum and 4 = Maximum.
Contrast will increase in steps from 1 towards 4.
Step 13
DTMF Transmit Level
Use following command to adjust DTMF Transmit Level of DKP:
1218-1-DKP-DTMF Transmit Level
1218-2-DKP-DKP-DTMF Transmit Level
1218-*-DTMF Transmit Level
Where,
DKP is from 001 to 128
DTMF Transmit Level is 0 to 9 for EON45 and 1 to 4 for EON42/EON48.
Step 14
LCD Backlight OFF Timer
Use following command to program 'LCD Backlight OFF Timer' for EON42:
1219-1-DKP-LCD Back Light OFF Timer
Where,
Back light off timer = 000-999 seconds.
000 = Back light will remain continuously ON.
999 = Back light will remain on for 999 seconds.
By default = 010 seconds.
Step 15
Ringer Selection
User can select the 'destination' to play the ring for ring event on the EON42/EON48 as per two options: Ring on
Speaker Phone and Ring on Headset.
Note that the speech path of the 'headset' and 'handset' are common. If the Headset is not connected and the user
has set the option to play ring on the Headset, the ring will get played on the speaker of the handset.
Use following command for setting the destination to play ring on EON42 and EON48:
1220-1-DKP-Ring Destination
1220-2-DKP-DKP-Ring Destination
1220-*-Ring Destination
Where,
Default = Play Ring on Speaker of Speaker Phone.
Ring Destination Meaning
1 Play Ring on Speaker of Speaker Phone
2 Play Ring on Speaker of Headset/Handset
3 Play Ring on Speaker of Headset and Speaker Phone
Matrix
Note:
In EON45, only speaker of speaker phone will ring during ring event, even if the DKP port it is configured to play ring
on handset/headset.
Step 16
Headset Rx Volume Level (Headset Speaker Volume level)
Use following command to set Rx level of Headset for DKP (Headset Speaker Volume level)
1222-1-DKP-Headset Rx Level
1222-2-DKP-DKP-Headset Rx Level
1222-*-Headset Rx Level
Where,
Headset Rx level is from 1 to 9 (only for EON42SR)
By default, Headset Rx Level is 5
Headset Tx Volume Level (Headset MIC Volume level)
Use following command to set Tx level of Headset for DKP (Headset MIC Volume Level)
1223-1-DKP-Headset Tx Level
1223-2-DKP-DKP-Headset Tx Level
1223-*-Headset Tx Level
Where,
Headset Tx level is from 1 to 9 (only for EON42SR)
By default, Headset Tx Level is 5.
Step 17
DTMF Generation Control
Use following command to enable/disable DTMF generation flag to a DKP:
1241-1-DKP-DTMF Generation
1241-2-DKP-DKP-DTMF Generation
1241-*-DTMF Generation
Where,
By default, DTMF Control is Enabled.
Step 18
DKP Personal Settings
To Change DKP personal settings, you need to navigate through the menu. Three keys are used for navigation.
'Func' key is used to go one-step back. It is analogous to 'ESC' of the computer keyboard (EON45).
'Vol' key has two in-built keys. Left side of the key is used to decrement values (we call it 'Dec') and right side of the
key is used to increment values (we call it 'inc'). It is analogous to 'down arrow' and 'up arrow' key of the computer
keyboard.
'Hold' key is used to enter a submenu. It is analogous to enter key of computer keyboard.
You need not press 'Enter' key when 4 digit password is entered to access the phone settings menu for DKP.
Navigation is protected by user password. Hence only authorized person can change the DKP personal settings.
Step19
Language Selection
This parameter is only for EON42 and EON48.
EON42 and EON48 support English, Spanish, Portuguese, French languages. This feature will be useful for the
countries like Spain, Germany and Portugal where English is not popular. EON45 supports only 'English' language.
The SE can select the language using specific command.
Text messages on the EON42 and EON48 DKP are shown in language, as configured for the DKP Port.
Text messages on the EON45 are shown in English, irrespective of the language programmed for the DKP Port on
which EON45 is connected.
Use following command to select the language for DKP:
1224-1-DKP-Language
DTMF Generation Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
1224-2-DKP-DKP-Language
1224-*-Language
Where,
DKP = EON42 or EON48.
Default language is 'Country dependant' as shown in Table below:
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Language Meaning
1 English
2 French
3 German
4 Spanish
5 Portuguese
Country Language
India English
Germany German
Spain Spanish
France French
Portugal Portuguese
Other countries English
Matrix
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming
Whats this?
It is possible to program the nature of the function that the DSS keys can perform. The ETERNITY supports programming
of DSS key of any DKP (EON45/EON42/EON42SR/EON48). It is possible that on pressing a key a particular station is
accessed or a particular trunk is accessed or a feature is activated, etc. Each DSS key possesses a LED, which glows
when a station/trunk is accessed or a feature is activated. However, LED does not glow for few features like while doing
Raid/Interrupt Request/Barge-In, Last Caller Recall, etc. Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Operation for more details.
Soft Keys (Programmable keys on EON45/EON42/EON42SR/EON48)
The keys of specific location on the DKP are programmable. A location is made up of two entities viz. a DSS key and a
LED. DSS key can be programmed to perform any function. If LED is relevant for the function then the LED glows on
executing the function else it remains inactive. For example, a DSS key can be assigned for Call Pick Up feature but
since LED is not relevant for this function, LED remains inactive for this function. Likewise, a DSS key can be assigned
for Auto Redial feature and since LED is relevant for this feature, it glows on setting Auto-Redial feature.
The flexibility of assigning any function to a DSS key is useful in following situations:
Different users can program these keys to access different stations of their choice.
Desirable and frequently used features can be accessed at a single touch.
A Key can be programmed to perform any function. There are two attributes of a key:
Physical location where the key is situated.
Function the key should perform.
The function which can be programmed by the key, depends on the programming of function type or feature name.
'Headset' and 'Speaker' keys:
User can program any programmable key of EON42 as 'Speaker' key or 'Headset' key after enabling Headset
connectivity using specific command.
EON45 doesn't support headset feature.
EON48 does not require command to enable Headset connectivity because it can sense the connectivity as soon as
Headset is connected.
If the user is communicating using the speaker phone, then he can shift the call on headset by pressing the 'Headset'
key.
Similarly, while communicating from headset, if the user wants to shift the call to speaker phone's speaker and MIC,
he can do so by pressing the 'Speaker' key.
The LED on the key will glow when pressed. If the key is again pressed, the call will be released and LED will be
turned OFF.
'Cancel' Key
Cancel key is a Special Key (Function Type = 24). There is no LED associated with Cancel Key.
You can assign the Cancel key for EON45, EON42, and EON48 (all types of DKP supported by ETERNITY)
When you are in Menu mode, it shall be possible to come out of Menu and go to the previous state (if any) by pressing
Cancel Key.
If you have any held call and while in 'Menu', pressing the Cancel key, you will come out of Menu mode and get
feature tone as if you have just put a call on hold.
If you have no held call and when you are in Menu from Speaker Phone mode or headset mode, on pressing Cancel
key the DKP will go in idle mode.
If you have no held call and when you are in Menu from Hand set mode, by pressing cancel key, you will come out of
Menu mode and get dial tone or feature tone (if the call forward is activated).
While you are not in Menu state Cancel key will be redundant. You will not get error tone when you press Cancel key
in state other than menu. In such case event will be ignored.
'Answer' Function
DKP supports the Answer function by which, pressing only one key the incoming calls will get answered.
SE can assign Answer feature to any programmable key of DKP. This is a special function key option, from the Table
of Function Type 24.
Matrix
DKP Key Templates and key maps
Depending upon different class of users, DKP function keys are programmed for four categories: Operator, Executive,
Hotel Attendant and Guest. To avoid one by one programming for all keys of all types of DKP using the key maps,
ETERNITY supports specific 'Key Template' for each type of DKP (EON45, EON42, EON48). Four such templates
are supported depending upon various functions required for each category. Thus SE can just select the Template
Number and DKP type for the category of a user.
The ETERNITY also provides the flexibility to assign Default key template (Default key map) to the DKP if the
assigned Key Template is 'None'-type.
How to program?
Using Key Map:
Various functions can be assigned to specific key on the DKP, by referring Key Map to locate the key number, using
following command:

Use following command to assign a function to a DKP key:
1252-1-DKP-Key Location-Function Type-Port
1252-2-DKP-DKP-Key Location-Function Type-Port
1252-*-Key Location-Function Type-Port
Where,
Port = DKP Software Port Number is from 001 to 128.
Key Location is as per Key Map given for the type of DKP used.
Function Type and Port are as listed in the table given in topic 'Function'.
For example, to program Answer key for DKP-001 at key no. 01 dial following command from SE mode.
1252-1-001-01-24-016
Note:
This command is not applicable if the DKP is assigned the DKP Key Template (from 1 to 4). However it will be applicable
if the DKP Key Template is assigned as 'None' - type. Refer command '1221' in this chapter for assigning DKP Key
Template.
The Key Location can be selected by using following key Maps for DKPs:
Keys Map for EON45: (Used for Key Location)
1 2 3 redial
spd 6 5 4
7 8 9 trf/fl
hold 0
Fun
01
06
11
16
21
02
07
12
17
22
03
08
13
18
23
04
09
14
19
24
05
10
15
20
25
* #
Vol 26
Fixed
Keys
Programmable
Keys (01-25)
Programmable Key
Matrix
Key Map for EON42: (Used for Key Location)
Key Map for EON42SR:
Refer Key Map for EON42
Key Map for EON48: (Used for Key Location)
Using DKP Key Template:
Different sets of functions can be assigned to specific keys on the DKP using the SE command. These functions can be
selected by configuring the DKP-Key Templates for the specific users, using following commands:
Step 1
Use following command to program the DKP Key Template:
1261-1-DKP Key Template-EON Terminal Type-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number
Where,
DKP Key Template is from 0 to 4. You can not program the Template '0' as the Key Template '0' ('None' - type) is the pre-
programmed with specific values for the DKP type. Refer the 'None' type default key map, at the end of chapter for all
DKP types.
EON Terminal Type Meaning
1 EON45/EONSOFT
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
13
14
15
16
17
18
08
09
10
11
12
Key Key
Fixed
Keys
Programmable
Keys
Ringer LED
* 0 #
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Programmable
Keys
19
20
21
22
23
24
25 Programmable Key
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
*
#
abc def
ghi jkl mno
pqrs tuv wxyz
Forward
Call Back Cancel
DND
Voice Mail
Names
Mute Conference Transfer
Hold Release Redial
DKP001
TWT004
TWT003
TWT002
TWT001
CA03
CA02
CA01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18
19
20 21
22
23
24 25
28 27 26
CA04
SLT001
SLT002
SLT003
SLT004
DKP002
DKP003
DKP004
29
Matrix
Key Number is 1 to 25 for EON45/EONSOFT, 1 to 25 for EON42S/P and 1 to 29 for EON48S/P.
Function Type and Function Number are as per Tables mentioned in this chapter, except Function Numbers; 55, 56 and
57.
Notes for using the command for programming the Template:
While configuring the key template, if change is made in any DKP key template from 1 to 4, the same is applied on
DKPs which are assigned this template. For example, if DKP001 to DKP010 (EON48) are assigned DKP key
template-1, and programming of key template-1 of EON48 is changed the same change is applied on DKP001 to 010.
For this, the user is not required to switch off and on the ETERNITY.
If the SE selects EON Terminal Type = EON45 and enters Key number = 29, then on execution of this command, SE
will get Error tone rather than confirmation tone.
EON45 has 26 programmable keys including the speaker key but to keep compatibility with EONSOFT also, program
the number of keys only up to 25. Range and * commands are not supported for this command.
Step 2
Use following command to program the name of the DKP-Key Template:
1262-1-DKP Key Template-DKP Key Template Name
Where,
DKP Key Template is from 0 to 4 (Template 0 is 'None' - type template, pre-programmed with specific values).
DKP Key Template Name is of 24 characters.
By default, the DKP-Key Template Names are
Note1:
Range and * commands are not supported for this command.
Step 3
Use following command to assign DKP Key template to a DKP:
1221-1-DKP-DKP Key Template
1221-2-DKP-DKP-DKP Key Template
1221-*-DKP Key Template
Where,
DKP Key Template is from 0 to 4 (Template '0' is 'None' - type template, pre-programmed with specific values)
Notes for using the command for assigning the Template:
In Enterprise mode, all DKPs (of station type Admin and Guest) are assigned Key template-1. Refer chapter System
Parameters for details of Station Type and Enterprise/Hotel Mode.
When SE has assigned any key template (other than type 'None'-type) to the DKP, DSS keys will automatically get
assigned functions as per the programming of the assigned DKP template. Hence the system does not allow feature
programming of the DSS key for the DKP using the command.
When SE has assigned 'None'- type key template to the DKP, DSS keys are programmable for the specific features.
This programming will be retained after power on/off, of the DKP.
However, when SE has assigned 'None'-type key template to the DKP and if DKP type is changed than the default
'None'-type key map for the new DKP type will be applicable. For example, if the DKP is changed from Eon42/45 to
Eon48 for the DKP port, the default key map (non programmable) defined for Customized Eon48 will be applied.
2 EON42S/P
3 EON48S/P
DKP Key Template Meaning
0 None
1 Operator
2 Executive
3 Hotel Attendant
4 Guest
EON Terminal Type Meaning
Matrix
Default 'DKP Key Templates (1 to 4) for each EON Terminal type for using in above command syntex:
EON45
EON42 (key template 1 to 4)
Key#
Key Temp.1
(Operator)
Key Temp.2
(Executive)
Key Temp.3 (Hotel Attendant)- Refer
separate manual for
HotelApplications
Key Temp.4 (Guest)- Refer separate
manual for Hotel Applications
01 SLT001 SLT001 Remote Voice Guided Alarm Operator
02 SLT002 SLT002 Remote- Call Forward Floor Service
03 SLT003 SLT003 Remote-DND Voice Guided Alarm
04 SLT004 SLT004 Remote - Call Budget Reservation Desk (Macro4)
05 Flash Flash Set Message Wait Retrieve Message
06 DKP001 DKP001 Floor Service Voice Mail (VMS Group)
07 DKP002 DKP002 DKP001 DND
08 DKP003 DKP003 DKP002 Voice Help
09 DKP004 DKP004 Voice Mail (VMS Group) Mute
10 Conference Conference Conference Conference
11 TWT001 TWT001 Retrieve Message Wait DKP001
12 TWT002 TWT002 Prnt Rm Sts DKP002
13 TWT003 TWT003 Prnt Alrm Rprt SLT001
14 TWT004 TWT004 Remote -Change Room Clean Status SLT002
15 Call Forward Call Forward Call Forward Call Forward
16 TWT005 TWT005 TWT001 TWT001
18 TWT007 TWT007 Call Block Missed Calls
19 TWT008 TWT008 Auto Redial BGM
20 Auto Call Back Auto Call Back Auto Call Back Auto Call Back
21 CA1 CA1 CA1 CA1
22 CA2 CA2 CA2 CA2
23 CA3 CA3 CA3 Last Caller Recall
24 CA4 CA4 CA4 Release
25 Auto Redial Auto Redial Transfer to VMS (mailbox) Auto-Redial
26 Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker
Key#
Key Temp.1
(Operator)
Key Temp.2
(Executive)
separate manual for Hotel
Applications
01 DKP004 DKP004 Remote Voice Guided Alarm Operator
02 DKP003 DKP003 Floor Service Floor Service
03 DKP002 DKP002 Set message wait Reservation Desk (Macro4)
04 DKP001 DKP001 Remote-Call Frwd Voice Mail (VMS Group)
05 TWT004 TWT004 Remote-DND Voice Help
06 TWT003 TWT003 Remote - Call Budget SLT001
07 TWT002 TWT002 Call Block DKP002
08 TWT001 TWT001 Voice Mail (VMS Group) DKP001
09 CA04 CA04 Retrieve Message Wait TWT002
10 CA03 CA03 TWT001 TWT001
11 CA02 CA02 CA02 CA02
12 CA01 CA01 CA01 CA01
13 SLT003 SLT003 Prnt Rm Sts Voice Guided Alarm
Matrix
EON48 (key template 1 to 4)
14 SLT002 SLT002 Prnt Alrm Rprt Retrieve Message Wait
15 SLT001 SLT001 Remote- Change Room Clean Status Missed Calls
16 ACB ACB ACB DND
17 Conf Conf Conf ACB
18 Frwd Frwd Frwd Conf
19 Dial by Name Dial by Name Dial by Name Frwd
20 Auto Redial Auto Redial Redial Dial by Name
21 Redial Redial Release Redial
22 Release Release Transfer to VMS (mailbox) Release
23 Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer
24 Hold Hold Hold Hold
25 Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker
Key#
Key Temp.1
(Operator)
Key Temp.2
(Executive)
Key Temp.3 (Hotel Attendant)-
Refer separate manual for Hotel
Applications
Key Temp.4 (Guest)- Refer
Applications
01 DKP004 DKP004 Remote Voice Guided Alarm Operator
02 DKP003 DKP003 Floor Service Floor Service
03 DKP002 DKP002 Remote Call Frwd Reservation Desk (Macro4)
04 DKP001 DKP001 Remote DND Voice Mail (VMS Group)
05 TWT004 TWT004 Remote Call Budget Missed Calls
06 TWT003 TWT003 Call Block Voice Help
07 TWT002 TWT002 Set message wait TWT002
09 SLT004 SLT004 Transfer to VMS (mailbox) Voice Guided Alarm
10 SLT003 SLT003 Prnt Rm Sts BGM
11 SLT002 SLT002 Prnt Alrm Rprt SLT002
12 SLT001 SLT001
Remote - Change Room Clean
Status
SLT001
13 CA04 CA04 Voice Mail (VMS Group) DKP002
14 CA03 CA03 CA03 DKP001
15 CA02 CA02 CA02 CA02
16 CA01 CA01 CA01 CA01
17 Retrieve Message Retrieve Message Retrieve Message Retrieve Message
18 ACB ACB ACB ACB
19 Cancel Cancel Cancel Cancel
20 Frwd Frwd Frwd Frwd
21 DND DND DND DND
22 Dial by Name Dial by Name Dial by Name Dial by Name
23 Mute Mute Mute Mute
24 Conf Conf Conf Conf
25 Xfer Xfer Xfer Xfer
26 Redial Redial Redial Redial
27 Release Release Release Release
28 Hold Hold Hold Hold
29 Spk Spk Spk Spk
Key#
Key Temp.1
(Operator)
Key Temp.2
(Executive)
Applications
Matrix
'Function Type' and 'Port/Function Number' for using in above command syntex:
A function can be assigned to these Keys, which they should perform. Different type of functions, can be assigned to a
key as per user's requirement. Refer chapter Key Board Macro for more details about Function Type, 'Macros'.
Each function that can be assigned to a key is given unique number. Following table lists all the function types supported
by ETERNITY:
Function Type:
Function Type 18: Features
Function Type Meaning Port/Function Number
00 Null --
01 SLT Ports 001 to 512
02 DKP Ports 001 to 128
03 TWT Trunks 001 to 128
04 BRI Trunks 001 to 032
05 DS1 Trunks 001 to 008
06 E&M Trunks 001 to 128
07 AIP 001
08 AOP 001
09 DIP 001
10 DOP 001
11 Department Groups 001 to 016
12 Quick Dial 001 to 025, 100 to 999
13 Loop 001 to 010
14 Macros 001 to 025
15 Trunk Access Codes 001 to 006
16 OG Trunk Bundle Groups 001 to 025
17 Closed User Group NA
18 Features (Access Code) 01 to 72
19 DISA NA
20 Route Group NA
21 VMS Port 1
22 SA Commands 001 to 167
23 System Port NA
24 DKP Special keys 001 to 015
25 Mobile Trunks 01 to 32
26 SIP Trunks 01 to 32
27 Flexible Number Ports 01 to 64
28 ISDN Terminals 01 to 64
29 Magneto Trunks 001 to 128
Feature Name
Access Code
Feature Number
DSS LED
Enter SE Mode 01
Enter SA Mode 02 Yes
Call Pick Up-General 03
Call Pick Up-Selective 04
Auto Call Back 05 Yes
Cancel Auto Call Back 06
Redial 07
Auto Redial 08 Yes
Matrix
Cancel Auto Redial 09
Personal Directory Programming 10
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 11
Operator Dialing 12
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 Yes
Dynamic Lock 14 Yes
Hot Line 15 Yes
Alarm 16 Yes
Do Not Disturb 17 Yes
Interrupt Request 18
Barge-In 19
Raid 20
Trunk Reservation 21
Call Toggle 22
Conference- 3 Party 23
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer 24
Conference-Multi Party 25 Yes
Call Park 26
Retrieve Parked Call 27
Room Monitor 28
Last Caller Recall 29
Voice Help 30
Walk-In Class Of Service 31
Change User Password 32
Page Zone 33
DISA Log In Code 34
Trunk Release Code (Trunk-to-Trunk Speech) 35
Cancel All Feature 36
Selective Port Access Code 37
Flashing on Trunk 38
Change User Status 39
Account Code by Number 40
Account Code by Name 41
Back Ground Music 42 Yes
Meet Me Paging 43
Hot Desk 44
DND Override 45
Missed Calls 46 Yes
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF Request 47 Yes
VMS Conversation Recording 48 Yes
Forced Release 49
Hold 50
Live Call Supervision 51
Forced Answer 52
Maid In 53
Minibar Details 55
Mute 56
Feature Name
Access Code
Feature Number
DSS LED
Matrix
Function Type 22: SA Commands
Change Time Zone 57 Yes
Self Ring Test 58
Set Chain Party 59
SA Command 60 Yes
Second Trunk Access Code 61
Floor Service 62
Keypad Lock DKP 63 Yes
CLIR 64
Call Cost Display 65
Reminder 66
Voice Guided Alarm 67
Voice Guided Reminder 68
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 69
Message Wait Set 70
Message Wait Retrieval 71
Use Definable Fields 72
Feature Name
SA Command
Feature Number
DSS LED
Check In 001
Check Out 002
Guest Name 003
Assign Guest Group 004
Guest In/Guest Out 005
Guest Title 006
Change Check-In Profile of Room 007
Change Room Occupancy Status 008
Change Room Clean Status 009
Room Shift 010
Reprint Checkout Report 011
Print Room Status Report 012
Print Alarm Status Report 013
Delete Checkout Calls 014
Set DND-Remote 015
Set Dynamic Lock Setting-Remote 016
Set Alarm-Remote 017
Assign Call Budget to a Station 018
Assign/De-assign Mailbox to a Station - Remote 019
Set Call Forward-Remote 020
Set Call Forward-Remote for all Stations 021
Assign Station User Greeting Message 022
Display and Acknowledge System Activity 023 Yes
Display and Acknowledge System Fault 024 Yes
Station Budget Display 025
Change User Password of a Station 026
Lock/Unlock the Station's Keypad (DKP Only) 027
Feature Name
Access Code
Feature Number
DSS LED
Matrix
Station Absent/Present 028
Change SA Password 029
Change SA Mode Timer 030
Display Registered Network ID 031
Set Master Time Zone 032
Switch OFF DOP Manually 033
Switch ON DOP Manually 034
Terminate Security Dialing 035
Clear the System Activity Log 036
Start/Abort commands for SAL on offline mode 037
Start/Abort commands for SAL on online mode 038
Change Time Zone of a Port 039
Cancel Dial in Conference 040
Start/Abort commands for SFL on offline mode 041
Start/Abort commands for SFL on online mode 042
Display Port Parameters 043
Start/Abort OG Online Report 044
Set filter to print calls originated on station/s 045
To set filter to print all calls terminated on TWT 046
To set filter to print all calls terminated on BRI 047
To set filter to print all calls terminated on T1E1PRI 048
To set filter to print all calls terminated on E&M 049
To set filter to print all calls terminated on Mobile 050
To set filter to print outgoing calls terminated on SIP 051
To set filter to print outgoing calls for department billing group 052
Set Filter to Print Calls Made on Date/s 053
Set Filter to Print Calls Made from at Time/s 054
Set Filter to Print Calls Made to Numbers Matching the Number in the List Assigned 055
Set Filter to Print Calls of Duration more than this time 056
Set Filter to Print Calls of Duration more than the Units Programmed 057
To set filter to print all calls made using Account Code 058
Assign Default OG Filters 059
Start/Abort Offline Report 060
Enable/Disable Daily/Weekly/Monthly Report 061
Program Time for Daily Report 062
Program Day and Time for Weekly Report 063
Program Date and Time for Monthly Report 064
Delete Calls Made by Station/s 065
Delete Call Made on/from Date 066
To Clear SMDR OG Buffer 067
Start/Abort Internal Calls Report 068
Set Filter to Print Internal Calls Report 069
Set Filter to Print Internal Calls with Duration Greater than that Given Here 070
Start/Abort Offline Internal Call Report 071
Enable/Disable Daily/Weekly/Monthly Report 072
Program Time for Daily Report 073
Program Day and Time for Weekly Report 074
Feature Name
SA Command
Feature Number
DSS LED
Matrix
Program Date and Time for Monthly Report 075
To Clear SMDR Internal Buffer 076
Start/Abort Online-IC Report 077
Set Filter to Print All Normal Calls 078
Set Filter to Print all DID Calls 079
Set Filter to Print all Unanswered Calls 080
Set Filter to Print all DID Unanswered Calls 081
Set Filter to Print all DISA Calls 082
Set Filter to Print all Calls with Speech Duration More than Timer 083
Set Filter to Print all Calls Unanswered for Duration More than Timer 084
Set Filter to Print all Calls Kept on Hold for Duration More than Timer 085
Set Filter to Print All IC Calls Received by the Station 086
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received on TWT 087
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received on BRI 088
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received on T1E1PRI 089
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received on E&M 090
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls From Mobile 091
Set Filter to Print calls from SIP 092
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received on/from Date 093
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received at/from to Time 094
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received from numbers matching the external number list 095
Assign default IC Filters 096
Abort/Start the IC Offline Report 097
Enable/Disable Daily/Weekly/Monthly Reports 098
Program Time for Daily Reports 099
Program Day and Time for Weekly Reports 100
Program Date and Time for Monthly Reports 101
Clear SMDR-IC Buffer 102
Start/Abort Printing of Online T1E1PRI Performance report 103
Start/Abort Printing of Offline T1E1PRI Performance report 104
To Check Signal Strength of Mobile Port 105
To enable/disable Call Cost Display 106
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log in Offline Mode 107
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log in Offline Mode 108
Display and Acknowledge Hotel/Motel Activity 109
Change Guest VIP Status of Station 110
Change Phone Ringing Pattern of Room 111
Print Reminder Status Report 112
Remote Reminder 113
Remote Voice Guided alarm 114 Yes
Remote Voice Guided Reminder 115
Set filter to print all IC calls received on Magneto 116
To set filter to print all calls terminated on Magneto 117
Enable/Disable Scheduled Alarm Report 118
Program Time for Scheduled Alarm Report 119
Enable/Disable Scheduled Reminder Report 120
Program Time for Scheduled Reminder Report 121
Feature Name
SA Command
Feature Number
DSS LED
Matrix
Request Database Synchronization to PMS 122
Enable/Disable Scheduled Room Status Report 123
Program Time for Schedule Room Status Report 124
Enable/Disable Scheduled Change of Room Clean Status 125
Program Time for Schedule Change of Room Clean Status 126
Reserved For Future 127
Enable/Disable Internal Call Block For Guest Phones 128
Software Version Revision Display of Master Card 129 Y
User Definable fields 130
To set filter to print calls originated on TWT 131
To set filter to print calls originated on BRI 132
To set filter to print calls originated on DS1 133
To set filter to print calls originated on E&M 134
To set filter to print calls originated on Mobile 135
To set filter to print calls originated on SIP 136
To set filter to print calls originated on Magneto 137
Set Budget Type for TWT Port 138
Program Budget Amount for TWT 139
Program Free Minutes on TWT 140
Set Budget Type for DS1 Port 141
Program Budget Amount for DS1 142
Program Free Minutes on DS1 143
Set Budget Type for BRI Port 144
Program Budget Amount for BRI 145
Program Free Minutes on BRI 146
Set Budget Type for SIP 147
Program Budget Amount for SIP 148
Program Free Minutes on SIP 149
Set Budget Type for Mobile 150
Program Budget Amount for Mobile 151
Program Free Minutes on Mobile 152
Call Budget Reset Mode for TWT 153
Scheduled Date to Rest Call Budget Statistics on TWT 154
Reset consumed Budget Amount /minutes on TWT manually 155
Call Budget Reset Mode for DS1 156
Scheduled Date to Rest Call Budget Statistics on DS1 157
Reset consumed Budget Amount /minutes on DS1 manually 158
Call Budget Reset Mode for BRI 159
Scheduled Date to Rest Call Budget Statistics on BRI 160
Reset consumed Budget Amount /minutes on BRI manually 161
Call Budget Reset Mode for SIP 162
Scheduled Date to Rest Call Budget Statistics on SIP 163
Reset consumed Budget Amount /minutes on SIP manually 164
Call Budget Reset Mode for Mobile 165
Scheduled Date to Rest Call Budget Statistics on Mobile 166
Reset consumed Budget Amount /minutes on Mobile manually 167
Feature Name
SA Command
Feature Number
DSS LED
Matrix
Function Type 24: Special Keys
Default Key Functions for DKP: (Default None Key Template)
At Power ON, the DKP keys will be set for following functions as shown below: (for all DKP Ports)
Default key functions - EON45: (Default None-type Key Template)
Special Key Name Number DSS LED
Flash 001 No
Pause 002 No
Digit 'A '003 No
Digit 'B '004 No
Digit 'C '005 No
Digit 'D '006 No
Release 007 No
Ring Acknowledge 008 No
Enter 009 No
Dial By Name 010 No
Call Transfer 011 No
Speaker 012 Yes
Headset 013 Yes
Cancel 014 No
Answer 015 No
SLT001 SLT002 SLT003 SLT004 Flash
DKP001 DKP002 DKP003 DKP004 Conference
TWT001 TWT002 TWT003 TWT004 Call Forward
TWT005 TWT006 TWT007 TWT008 Auto Call Back
Loop01 Loop02 Loop03 Loop04 Auto Redial
1 2 3 Redial
4 5 6 Memory Dial
7 8 9 Transfer
* 0 # Hold
Function Volume Speaker
Matrix
Note: Symbol '.' (dot) indicates the Key with LED
Command to copy entire key map from one DKP to another DKP:
Use the following command to copy entire key map of one DKP to another DKP:
1255-Source DKP-Destination DKP
Where,
Source DKP is 001 to 128.
Destination DKP is from 001 to 128.
Please note that on issuing copy commands, the key map of DSS64 (if attached) also gets copied.
Important Point:
Following table shows the relationship between the colour of the LED and various events. Three different colors are
used to indicate various events (1) Green LED indicates the state of the station you are involved with (2) Red LED
indicates the state of the other station/trunk (3) Orange LED indicates the state of the trunk you are involved with.
LED Color LED status-Continuously ON LED status-Slow Blink LED status-Fast Blink
Green LED The key assigned for the station
you are in speech.
The key assigned for the
station you have kept on hold.
The key assigned for the station
you are calling or you are being
called.
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
1. Digital Key Phone-Operation 420
2. Access Codes 225
3. Key Board Macro 598
=X=X=
Red LED The key assigned for the station
that is now busy with another
station/trunk.
The key assigned for the
station which has held a
station/trunk.
The key assigned for the station/
trunk that is called or being called
by another station/trunk.
Orange LED You are talking on a trunk. You have held a trunk. You have an incoming call on the
trunk.
LED Color LED status-Continuously ON LED status-Slow Blink LED status-Fast Blink
Matrix
Digital Output Port (DOP)
Whats this?
The solid state Digital Output Port (DOP) is used for various control applications.
A DC contactor (60VDC Max.) will be connected to the DOP. All external devices are interfaced to the DOP via this
DC contactor. Please ensure the external devices adhere to the specifications of the DC contactor.
ETERNITY remembers the state of DOP during power failure. Suppose, a water pump is being controlled using this
feature and if while it is running, power failure occurs then the operator need not turn on the water pump again on
power restoration. ETERNITY will retain the last state and will switch ON the water pump on power restoration.
The DOP can be operated from DISA also.
How it works?
The DOP can be programmed as active high or active low depending upon the application.
Active high state signifies that the relay port is normally open (NO).
Active low state signifies that the relay port is normally closed (NC).
By default, the DOP is programmed as active high or Normally Open.
Technical Specifications of the DOP.
How to connect the external devices to the DOP?
Note:
For step-by-step instructions, refer Installing ETERNITY ME, Installing ETERNITY GE.
How to program?
Step 1
Use the following command to program the DOP as Normally Open/Normally Close:
5002-1-DOP-Code
Where,
DOP is 1.
By default, DOP is programmed as Normally Open.
Step 2
How to assign an access code to DOP?
Use the following command to program the access code for a DOP.
3104-1-DOP-Access Code-#*
Where,
DOP is 1.
Contact Rating(Resistive Load) 60VDC Max. @0.15 Amp.
Operation Time 5ms
Code Meaning
0 DOP as Normally Open
1 DOP as Normally Closed
R Y B N
R Y B N
AC Mains
Load
Contactor 1-Phase/
3-Phase
depending on load
Battery
24VDC
Matrix
Terminate the access code with #* if access code is of less than 4 digits.
By default, Access Code for DOP is 3961.
Use following command to clear the access code of a DOP:
3104-1-DOP-#*
Where,
DOP is 1.
Use following command to assign default the access code of a DOPs:
3154-1-DOP
Where,
DOP is 1.
By default, Access code is 3961.
Step 3
Use following command to default the DOP Parameters:
5001-1-DOP
Where,
DOP is 1.
Relevant Topics:
3. Central Ringer 360
4. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
Matrix
Direct Dialing-In (DDI)
Whats this?
DDI is an ISDN Service which allows the caller to call the user on an ISDN compatible PBX or private network directly
without operator intervention.
Using the DDI feature of ISDN, the calls can be made to land directly on the desired stations.
The T1E1PRI and BRI trunks must be assigned a IC ReferenceNumber and OG Reference Number which in turn
definesthe translation logic to handle an IC/OG. For more details refer DDI Routing Table, IC Reference Table and OG
Reference Table corresponding topics.
Each ISDN Trunk is given an Installation Number by the SP. This is the combination of Main Number (MSN No.) and
the DDI Number. The Number is of max.16 digits. This is also known as ISDN Installation Number.
The MSN number is given by the SP whereas the Directory Numbers can be selected by the User. However the
number of digits to be used for the Directory Number should be informed to the SP.
Each station is assigned a unique directory number.
Please refer the topics DDI Routing Table, DS1 Trunks and ISDN-BRI for details on programming.
How it works?
Incoming Call
When the call lands on the ISDN trunk of the PBX, the PBX checks if CLI based routing is enabled on the trunk. If
Yes, the call is routed accordingly. If CLI based routing is not enabled, then the PBX checks the IC Reference
Number assigned to the Trunk.
If the IC Reference Number assigned to the trunk is 00, then the system further follows the logic of Incoming Call
management. For more details please refer the topic Incoming Call Management.
If any other number is assigned as IC Reference Number to the trunk, the PBX searches the different IC reference
tables for a match. When a match is found, the system matches channel number of the trunk with the channels of the
table. If it does not match then the next table with the same IC reference number is searched.
When the channel number matches, the system uses the DDI Flexible Reference No. of the table to identify the DDI
Flexible Number table. This table helps the system to route the call to the target station. The system first compares
the received DDI number (called party number) with the DDI numbers programmed in the DDI Flexible Number table.
If a match (DDI Number) is found, the system goes ahead with further interpreting the translation logic in the IC
reference table else the system searches the next matching DDI Flexible Number table and repeats the above
procedure.
If the number does not match with any number in the DDI Flexible Number tables assigned to the trunk, it routes the
call to the TLG assigned to the trunk.
Once a perfect match is found, the system checks for the DDI routing flag on first station in the IC reference table. If it
is enabled, the system routes the call to the first station in the DDI Flexible Number Table else identifies the station
according to the DDI logic.
Once the station is identified the system checks the DDI IC routing flag of the station (Please refer the topic Station
Advanced Feature Template for more details) on which the call is to be routed. If the flag is enabled the call lands on
the station else the call is routed to the TLG assigned to the Trunk.
When the call lands on the DDI station, the caller gets the Ring Back Tone. The station rings for time=DDI Timer, If the
call is not answered the system checks for the Route when No reply flag in the IC reference Table. If it is enabled the
call is routed to the TLG programmed in the IC Reference Table (Trunk Template) else the call is disconnected.
When DDI station being called is busy, the caller gets the busy tone. The system checks for the Route when busy flag
in the IC Reference Table. If it is enabled the call is routed to the TLG programmed else the call is disconnected.
When the call is answered the system checks for DDI OG flag. If the flag is disabled the system does not send the
answering party number to the network. If the flag is enabled the system prepares the OG number (Answering party
number) and sends it to the ISDN Network.
Outgoing Call (Reverse DDI)
The station user dials the trunk access Code.
A Channel is assigned to the user (Based on availability and LCR).
Depending on the Channel Number and the port grabbed, the OG reference number assigned to the port is identified.
After the OG reference number is identified, the ISDN installation no. is identified from the OG reference table.
The DDI Flexible reference number is also identified from the OG reference table and this helps in identifying the
flexible number of the calling station. The equivalent DDI number is found out from the flexible number. The DDI
number replaces the last digits (Number of DDI digits parameter in the DDI Flexible Number table) of the ISDN
installation number. This forms the answering/calling party number. This is sent to the ISDN network.
When an OG is made by a DDI station, the MSN Number + DDI number of the station is sent in the calling party field.
When an outgoing call is made by a Non-DDI station, the MSN Number + the first DDI number of the ISDN =Trunk is
sent in the calling party field.
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
1. DDI Routing Table 403
2. ISDN-BRI 573
4. DS1 Trunks 475
5. OG Reference Table 649
6. IC Reference Table 561
=X=X=
Matrix
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Whats this?
The system can perform the task of an operator by greeting the external caller and transferring the call to the desired
station. This facility is called Auto Attendant or Direct Inward Dialing (DID).
By using this facility, frequent callers can reach desired stations by dialing the station numbers from their phone. There
are following advantages:
Reduced traffic burden on the operator.
Calls are transferred faster and hence save the callers time.
Useful even during non-working hours and holidays.
Professional image of the Company.
ETERNITY also supports 'Delayed DID' feature. Using this feature, it is possible to get the incoming call landed on the
auto attendant if the user could not answer the call within certain time. This time is programmable as 'DID Delayed
Time'.
Thus user has following options to select in the Trunk Feature Template, for using DID feature:
OFF: User can select this option if DID feature is to be disabled for the Time Zone
ON: User can select this option to enable DID after expiry of 'DID Answer Wait Timer'. For this, user should
program suitable timer for the Time Zone.
Delayed DID: User can select this option for DID feature to work after expiry of 'DID Delayed Timer' for specific
Time Zone. For this, user should program suitable timer. Note that when Delayed DID is enabled, DID Answer
Wait Timer will not be applicable. Refer the flowchart for more details.
How it works?
Flow charts on the next pages depict the logic the system follows for DID call. First flow chart gives an over all view of it
whereas second flow chart gives the detailed logical structure.
DID Feature Flow Chart:
DID Detailed Flow Chart:
Start
Caller makes a call
System detects the incoming ring
and answers the call
System plays appropriate voice
greeting to the caller and prompts
him to dial station number
Caller dials the desired
numbers in tone (DTMF)
The system transfers the call
End
Matrix
Start
Caller makes a call
Is DID activated
on the trunk?
System answers the call by
going off-hook
Is voice message
greeting programmed for
this trunk and current time
zone ?
System routes the call on the
programmed destination station
End
No
Yes
System plays the greeting message System plays the music
No
Yes
System gives beeps to the caller prompting him to
dial the desired station/Dial message and beeps
A
Has the
caller dialed any
digit/digits ?
Has the
DID beeps timer
matured
Play DID no dial
message or route to
programmed destination
End
Is digit /
digits dialed valid
station
number ?
Is the
station free?
System transfers the call to the dialed
station. The caller gets ring back tone
Play the DID error message
or give error tone
A
Play DID busy message
or give busy tone
A
Is the call
answered within
DID ring timer ?
Play the DID no reply message
or give routing tone
A
System connects caller to the
dialed station
End
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Matrix
Recording of Voice Messages Flow Chart:
Delayed DID Flow Chart:
Start
Activate DID on required trunks
as per the time table
Program and record messages
for the time zones
Record other DID voice messages
for error, busy and no reply cases
Set privacy for station for DID calls,
if required.
End
Start
Incoming call on Trunk Line
DID option
Ring Stations of TLG for
Delayed DID Timer
Speech with Answering Station
Delayed DID
Timer expired?
Call Answered
by any Station?
Delayed DID
DID OFF
DID ON
Answer call after DID
Answer Wait Timer
Apply Logic and Timers
set for DID.
End
End
Route call to TLG as
programmed
End
Yes
No
No
Yes
Matrix
How to program DID on Trunks?
Step 1
Please refer Trunk Feature Template for more details.
Step 2
Use following commands to set the various timers:
Significance of Timers
DID Inactivity Timer is the time after which the ETERNITY releases the trunk if no digit has been dialed during this
time.
DID Answer Timer is the time after which the ETERNITY answers a DID call.
DID Music Timer is the time for which the ETERNITY plays music after answering the DID call.
DID Beeps Timer is the time for which the ETERNITY gives beeps to the caller prompting him to dial the desired
station number.
DID Ring timer is the time for which the ETERNITY rings the non-responding station.
DID Busy tone Timer is the time for which the ETERNITY hunts the busy station.
DID Error tone Timer is the time for which the ETERNITY gives error tone to the caller if he has dialed an invalid code.
Significance of Flags
Disconnect DID Call when Caller Doesn't Dial any Digit': when this flag is enabled, the system will disconnect the
DID call if the caller fails to dial a digit within the First Digit Wait Timer. The DID call will not be routed to the Operator/
Stations in the Trunk Landing Group.
'Disconnect DID on No Reply': this flag enables the system to disconnect the DID call if there is no reply from the
landing station. The DID call will not be routed to the Operator/Stations in the Trunk Landing Group.
'Disconnect DID on Busy': this flag enables the system to disconnect the DID call if the landing station is busy. The
DID call will not be routed to the Operator/Stations in the Trunk Landing Group.
These flags are applied on all trunk types. The flags are helpful for Hotels that provide 'Limited Services' and do not want
to receive unanswered/busy calls on the guest phones.
Use the following commands to enable/disable the flags:
To enable/disable the Disconnect when Caller Doesn't Dial a Digit' flag:
5338-Code
Where, Code is
0 = Disable.
1 = Enable
Default = Disable.
To enable/disable the Disconnect DID call when Dialed Number Busy:
5336-Code
Where,
0 = Disable.
1 = Enable
Default = Disable.
To enable/disable Disconnect DID Call, when Dialed Number does Not Reply:
5337-Code
Where,
0 = Disable.
1 = Enable
Timer Name Command Default Range
DID Inactivity Timer 2411-Seconds 060
000 to 255
DID Answer Wait Timer 2412-Seconds 005
DID Music Timer 2413-Seconds 005
DID Beeps Timer 2414-Seconds 010
DID Ring Timer 2415-Seconds 030
001 to 255 DID Busy Tone Timer 2416-Seconds 015
DID Error Tone Timer 2417-Seconds 005
Matrix
Default = Disable.
Step 3
For programming and recording voice messages, please refer topic Voice Message Applications.
Step 4
For setting privacy from DID call for each user, please refer topic Privacy.
Relevant Topics:
3. Privacy 679
=X=X=
Matrix
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Whats this?
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) permits a user to use the system's resources from a remote location without
contacting the operator or receptionist. Thus it is applicable for incoming calls only.
In general, for using this feature, SE should enable DISA feature on the trunk and the caller will be required to
successfully login to the DISA session.
Note:
If DISA is disabled, ETERNITY will route the call by DID logic, if DID is enabled. If DISA and DID both are disabled,
the incoming call will be routed as per routing logic of trunk landing group and routing group. Refer chapter Direct
Inward Dialing (DID) for more information about DID.
Once the caller has successful login DISA session, he can perform following different tasks to use the ETERNITY:
The caller can call any of the stations (Generally known as Direct Inward Dialing or DID).
The caller can make external calls.
The caller can activate/deactivate desired features of the station.
The caller can use PAS (Public Address System) and other facilities of the system.
The caller can enter SE or SA mode using the appropriate password and configure the required features of the
ETERNITY.
Special Digits:
After successfully logged-in to DISA session, for making call or for using different features of the ETERNITY, the caller
will be required to go on-hook, go off-hook, use 'flash', use 'pause' or dial some special digits like A, B, C, D. Now, as
the caller is calling from a remote device, the conventional way of dialing 'flash' key or going on-hook by momentary
make/break of loop current will not be understood by the ETERNITY. Hence the ETERNITY supports specific codes,
which the system can interpret if received during DISA session. The caller should use the codes as given in the
Table1, below:
Variants of DISA:
SE can configure a DISA variant on the trunk from the following options: (These options are explained in 'How to
Program?' topic of this chapter)
0. Disabled
1. PIN Auth.- Multiple Calls
2. CLI Auth.- Multiple Calls
3. CLI Auth.-One call- Ans. Sig.
How to use DISA?
Pre-requisites for the Caller to use DISA:
The caller can use this feature only if ETERNITY is programmed as follows:
The SE must have enabled DISA variant on the trunk template in the suitable Time Zone (WH/BH/NH), during
which the caller will make DISA call. Assign this trunk template to the trunk. The number of this DISA enabled
trunk should be known to the caller. Refer chapter Trunk Feature Template.
Special Digit/activity Code to be dialed
on-hook #0
off-hook #1
Flash #2
Pause #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
To Terminate the DISA #9
# ##
End of String #*
Matrix
The station number of ETERNITY, to which DISA login is required, should be known to the caller. SE must have
allowed DISA feature to that station, from the station's COS group in the desired Time Zone. Refer chapter Class
of Service (COS).
The user of this station or SA must have changed the default Password (1111) for this station. This new password
must be known to the caller. Refer chapters User Password and System Security for more information.
SE should program the DISA timers (if required to change default values, for the user).
If the caller has ensured above configuration, he should follow the steps mentioned below to make call using
DISA (if DISA in enabled with variants 1 or 2 or 3):
There are three stages for a DISA session as explained below:
Login
Making a call or programming through DISA
Termination
(a) Login:
Dial the number of the DISA- enabled trunk to call ETERNITY, during the Time Zone which is programmed for the
trunk.

The ETERNITY answers the call. You will get music. (You will get DID voice message greetings if VM is enabled.).
Once the music is over, you will get beeps.
Dial DISA login code i.e. 1079 during beeps. (This step is not applicable for DISA variants 2, 3 as the caller will be
considered as auto login station).
Dial the Station Number, on which DISA login is required (during beeps). The caller will get beeps. (This step is not
applicable for DISA variants 2, 3 as the caller will be considered as auto login station).
Dial the changed 'User Password' of the station, during beeps. (This step is not applicable for DISA variants 2, 3
as the caller will be considered as auto login station).
You get DISA log in beeps or message (if VM is enabled) indicating successful DISA login.
(b) Making a call or programming through DISA:
Go off-hook by dialing off-hook code (#1) within 'DISA Idle State Timer' (default 20 seconds). (This step is not
applicable for DISA variant 3).
(Please note that after dialing '#' digit, you should dial next digit within 'DISA Inter Digit Timer' (default 2 seconds)
for dialing the valid code for special digit).
Now the your station behaves as normal local station of ETERNITY and programming can be done the same way
as is done from Local Station.
After going off-hook, dial any digit within 'DISA Inactivity Timer' (default 2 Minutes). E.g. Dial a station number or
grab a trunk line and dial an external number.
You will be in speech if called party answers your call.
OR
Dial #2 to use 'flash' function. Dial #3 for 'Pause' function. OR dial codes for dialing special digits as mentioned in
'Table1' above.
OR
Program the ETERNITY. Programming can be done the same way as is done from a Local Station. Refer chapter
Remote Programming.
If you are in speech, then to continue the speech, dial any digit after getting warning beeps, within 'DISA Warning
Beeps Timer' (default 15 sec). Else, the ETERNITY will disconnect the call and you will get slow beeps of the
DISA idle state.
Matrix
To go on-hook, dial on-hook code (#0).
To use DISA again, dial off-hook code (#1). (This step is not applicable for DISA variant3, as only one DISA
session is allowed. For second session, you should make DISA call again).
(c) Termination:
To terminate DISA session, dial code (#9) during feature tone.
For example,
Suppose the station '2001' is allowed DISA feature from its COS group for WH
The changed user password for station '2001' is '3456'.
Suppose the trunk subscribed from PSTN with number '02652630555' is enabled for DISA during WH and VM is
disabled on this trunk.
Suppose the selected DISA variant is 'PIN Auth.-Multiple Calls' for this trunk.
Now the caller can login to DISA as explained below:
Dial number '02652630555' during WH.
On getting dial tone, dial the access code 1079. You will get beeps.
Dial station number '2001' during beeps. You will get beeps.
Dial password '3456' during beeps.
You will get DISA login beeps.
Dial '#1' (within 20 sec.). You will get dial tone.
Now you can use ETERNITY like a Local Caller e.g. for making an external call, dial TAC '0' to grab a trunk and
dial the number.
How to program?
Step 1
Selecting DISA option
Select the DISA variant on a trunk, using Trunk Feature Template.
Refer chapter Trunk Feature Template to program DISA variant for the trunk (for WH/BH/NH as applicable) from following
options.
By default, DISA Variant is 'disabled' for all templates.

Disabled:
If this option is selected, the DISA feature will be disabled in all templates and the caller will not be able to use DISA
feature for calling to ETERNITY.
PIN Auth.-Multiple Calls:
If this option is selected, the caller can use DISA feature to call ETERNITY and dial the digits for DISA login. The
caller can use codes for on-hook, off-hook and make multiple calls as usual (As mentioned in 'How to use DISA' topic
in this chapter).
CLI Auth.- Multiple Calls:
If this option is selected, SE can allow some of the callers who will not be required to dial the digits of DISA login.
When any of these callers makes the call to ETERNITY on DISA enabled trunk, the ETERNITY will consider it as
successfully logged in "Auto Login station" with specific port type/port number. A table is configured with CLI number
('Calling Number') of such callers and corresponding port type/port number to work as Auto Login Station. This table is
called 'DISA-CLI Auth. Table'. (Refer Table2 in topic 'How to Program' in this chapter).
The caller will get dial tone of ETERNITY.
Now, the caller can use codes for on-hook, off-hook and make multiple calls as usual (As mentioned in 'How to use
DISA' topic in this chapter).
If 'Calling Number' of the caller is not programmed in the Table, the call will be routed as per programmed routing logic
in ETERNITY as if the DISA is disabled.
Code Meaning
0 Disabled
1 PIN Auth.-Multiple Calls
2 CLI Auth.- Multiple Calls
3 CLI Auth.-One Call- Ans. Sig.
Matrix
CLI Auth.-One Call- Ans. Sig.:
This option is generally, programmed for dialing specific DTMF digits by the calling device (e.g. GFX-11) when the call
made by that calling device, is answered by ETERNITY. In this case, the caller is connected to the FXS port of the
calling device (e.g. GFX-11). For more details refer chapter Gateway Application-Answer Signaling.
When any of the callers whose CLI number is configured in the 'DISA-CLI Auth. Table', makes the call to ETERNITY,
the ETERNITY will consider it as successfully logged in "Auto Login station".
Now when the option 'CLI Auth.-One Call- Ans. Sig.' is configured, the caller will get connected to the trunk
programmed in TAC-1 (for WH/BH/NH as applicable) of the 'Station Basic Feature Template' assigned to station used
for auto login. Refer chapter Station Basic Feature Template. The calling device will get dial tone.
On receiving dial tone, the device (e.g. GFX-11) will start dialing out DTMF digits as dialed by the caller connected to
the device (e.g. GFX-11). The Toll Control assigned in the Station Basic Feature Template will be applicable while
dialing the digits.
When the called party answers the call, billing will be started on the caller's station (e.g. pay phone), connected to the
device (if the flag for 'Gateway Application-Ans. Signaling' is enabled). For more details, refer chapter Gateway
Application-Answer Signaling.
Since the codes for off-hook and on-hook do not work, the caller can make only single call during one DISA session.
If the 'Calling Number' of the caller is not programmed in the Table, the call will be routed as per programmed routing
logic in ETERNITY as if the DISA is disabled.
Step 2
'DISA - CL I Auth.' Table
SE can configure 'DISA - CLI Auth.' - Table for DISA Application using parameters CLI number and Auto Login
parameters as explained below:
Calling Number:
Use following command to program Calling Number for DISA Application:
4111-Index-Calling Number-#*
Calling Number can be programmed using maximum of 16 digits.
The allowed digits are 0-9, #, *, A, B, C, D, +. Use following codes to program these digits:
By default, all indices of calling number will be blank.
Port Type and Port Number for Auto Login station:
Use following command to program Port Type and Port Number for DISA Application:
4112-Index-Port Type-Port Number
Index Calling Number
Auto Login as
Port Type Port Number
001
002
003
::
::
998
999
Special Digit Code
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
* **
# ##
Matrix
Port Type can be programmed as SLT, DKP, ISDN Terminal or None as in Table below:
For example,
To program station '3001' as auto login station, dial the command '4112-001-02-001'.
By default, all indices of port type is blank.
Step 3
Allow DISA to a station:
Please refer chapter Class of Service (COS) to know, how to allow DISA to a desired station.
Step 4
DISA Timers
DISA Idle State Timer:
Use following command to program DISA Idle State Timer:
2420-Seconds
Where,
Seconds = 000-255
By default, DISA Idle State Timer is 020.
DISA Inactivity Timer:
Use following command to program DISA Inactivity Timer:
2421-Minutes
Where,
Seconds = 000-255
By default, DISA Idle State Timer is 002.
DISA Warning Beeps Timer:
This timer is not programmable. It is fixed as 15 sec.
DISA Inter Digit Timer:
This timer is not programmable. It is fixed as 2 sec.
Step 5
DISA Voice Messages:
Please refer chapter Voice Message Applications to program and record DISA voice messages. By default, the voice
messages are same as programmed for DID.
Important Points:
DISA Inactivity Timer is not applicable for T1E1PRI line, BRI, SIP and Mobile trunks.
DISA calls in the SMDR report are marked as "O" in the remarks column. Refer chapter, Station Message Detail
Recording-Report, for more information.
Relevant Topics:
4. Remote Programming 718
6. Gateway Application-Answer Signaling 548
7. Station Message Detail Recording-Report 814
8. User Password 902
=X=X=
00 None 000
01 SLT 001 to 512
02 DKP 001 to 128
28 ISDN Terminal 01 to 64
Matrix
Direct Station Selection Console
Whats this?
Matrix supports the state of the art design of the small 'Console' which is used to select a station or to select the
'function'; just by pressing the assigned key on it.
It is called 'Direct Station Selection Console' (DSS). The DSS console is a feature rich 2-wire Digital Terminal. The
DSS console occupies a separate digital port.
Two types of DSS Terminal types are supported:
DSS64 with 64-keys
DSS72 with 72-keys
With DSS72, user can assign additional eight SLTs to the DSS keys as compared to DSS64.
Dual color LEDs on the console, show the status of the ports. For example, the status for an activity like called station
ringing is indicated by the Green LED blinking. The status of speech with the station or incoming call is indicated by
the Green LED continuously ON.
The Red LED on the console indicates the status for other stations like other stations going OFF-Hook, ringing, calling
other station, dialing on trunk, on 'Hold', etc.
For some functions, the color of LED may turn Orange. For example, a loop key will glow to orange color for a call
returned to your station or for unanswered calls.
How to attach the DSS to a DKP?
The DSS console can be attached with the ETERNITY in the same way as the DKP. Once DSS is attached to the
ETERNITY, it should be programmed as an attachment (console) for any one of the DKPs connected to the system.
In order to use all the programmable keys two DSS can be attached with DKP using following options:
DKP+DSS72+DSS72
DKP+DSS64+DSS64
DKP+DSS72+DSS64
DKP+DSS64+DSS72
DKP+DSS64 DKP+DSS64+DSS64
When one DSS64 is attached with a DKP; the DSS keys of DKP as well as all 64 keys of DSS64 can be used. If
DSS72 is used, 72 keys can be used as DSS keys.
Similarly if two DSS64 are connected, 128 additional keys can be used as DSS keys.
Thus if only one DSS is used, keys will not be available for accessing some of SLTs out of all SLTs. But for accessing
these SLTs you can assign the keys.
By default, all the DSSs are assumed to be DSS72. ETERNITY does not identity all the DSS types differently
because in current implementation it is not known whether the terminal is first attachment to DKP or the second
attachment.
Matrix
DSS64/DSS72/DSS64 (16x4) key Map is as shown below:
Following options are available for connecting two DSS stations:
How to program?
Use following command to assign a function to a key of DSS assigned to a DKP:
1254-1-DKP-DSS-Key Location-Function Type-Function Number
1254-2-DKP-DKP-DSS-Key Location-Function Type-Function Number
1254-*-DSS-Key Location-Function Type-Function Number
Where,
DKP = DKP Software Port Number from 001 to 128.
DSS = DSS Number from 1 to 2.
Key Location is from 01 to 72. For 'Function Type and 'Function Number' refer Tables in chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft
Keys Programming.
Use following command to clear a function of a key of DSS of a DKP:
1254-1-DKP-DSS-Key Location-00-000
1254-2-DKP-DKP-DSS-Key Location-00-000
1254-*-DSS-Key Location-00-000
Default First DSS64 Console for Operator:
1st DSS
(DSS1)
2nd DSS
(DSS2)
Default
DSS1
Default
DSS2
Remarks
DSS72 DSS72 005-076 077-148 All SLTs can be assigned a key as per number of keys.
DSS64 DSS64 005-068 077-140
If user keeps the default assignment for both DSS: First 64 keys of DSS64
will be assigned SLT 005 to 068 whereas second DSS64 will be assigned
SLT 077 to 140. Due to this SLTs 069 to 076 and 141 to 148 cannot be
accessed from DSS. Hence DSS1 and DSS2 will be required to be
programmed.
DSS72 DSS64 005-076 077-140 All SLTs can be assigned a key as per number of keys.
DSS64 DSS72 005-068 077-148
If user keeps the default assignment for both DSS: First 64 keys of DSS64
will be assigned SLT 005 to 068 whereas second DSS72 will be assigned
SLT 077 to 148. Due to this SLTs 069 to 076 cannot be accessed from DSS.
Hence only DSS2 will be required to be programmed.
SLT005 SLT006 SLT007 SLT008 SLT009 SLT010 SLT011 SLT012
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
01
DSS64 DSS72 DSS64 (16 x 4)
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
01 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Matrix
Default Second DSS64 Console for Operator:
Default First DSS72 for Operator Console:
Default Second DSS72 for Operator Console:
SLT005 SLT029 SLT053
Matrix
Default First DSS64 (16x4) for Operator Console:
Default Second DSS64 (16x4) for Operator Console:
SLT005 SLT021 SLT037 SLT053
Matrix
=X=X=
Matrix
Directory Dialing by Name
What is this?
ETERNITY provides a facility to call a station or an external party by dialing the name of the person. The station user
need not remember the station number/telephone number of the person he wishes to call. Also, he need not
remember the abbreviated dialing codes. He needs to simply key-in first three characters of the name of the person
and make a call.
This feature is allowed only to DKP users.
How it works?
When the station user presses Spd/Dial by name key and enter a character, the system points to the first name in the
stations list and displays it on the DKP.
If the station user presses Up or Down key, the system takes the user to other stations in the list.
Likewise, if the user dials two characters, the system narrows down the search to names starting with the two
characters keyed in. For e.g. the user dials SU and presses hold key, then the system sorts out the names starting
with SU and displays the first name from the sorted list.
The user is given an option to search/navigate the sorted list using Up and Down key. The moment the user presses
hold key, the system calls the selected person.
How to use it?
To Call a Station
To enter the name, press the key corresponding to the character/s. For example, to call Sumer, press 7 four times.
Wait for the cursor to go to next position and press 8 two times. Wait for the cursor to go to next position and press
6 once. The DKP displays SUM. The process of entering the name is same as in mobile phones for entering short
messages.
How to program?
No Class of Service programming is required to use this feature.
Important Points:
The name of the person should be programmed as the station name.
The name of the person should be programmed in the personal/global directory against his telephone number.
Only the stations having access to internal dialing can use this feature.
Only the stations having access to abbreviated directory can make external calls using this feature.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
1 Press spd. DKP displays Enter Name.
2 Enter the first character.
DKP displays the first name beginning with that character.
User the up/down arrows to navigate the name menu.
3
Press hold to select the person.
The system calls the person.
You get RBT/Busy tone
Matrix
Disconnect Information on TWT
Whats this?
As a general application telecom equipment like PCO machine is connected to the SLT port of the system. Now
whenever the called party (remote party) disconnects i.e goes ON-Hook it is required to inform the SLT port so that
the PCO machine can consider the call as complete and stop billing. In absence of this signal, the call is considered
as complete when the caller goes on hook. But this will result in inaccurate billing.
When PBX is used for Gateway kind of application, it is desirable to disconnect the call when the call is terminated by
either end. If the called party (subscriber of PSTN, in this case) disconnects whereas the calling party doesnt, the
call within the system remains live. This becomes more critical when a call is routed from TWT to TWT.
To avoid such problems, the system supports a feature Disconnect Information on TWT. The detection is supported
as:
Disconnect Supervision on TWT Port
Disconnect Tone Detection on TWT Port
(Note: Please contact your Authorised dealer to know about Hardware compatibility for Open Loop
Disconnect on TWT)
How it works?
Disconnect Information on TWT Port (for IC and OG Calls)
The parameter is applicable only for both IC and OG calls made through TWT ports.
Detection of the parameter is started when call gets matured.
Following options are supported:
None
Polarity Reversal
Open Loop Disconnect
None: It is used when no signalling is available from the CO.
Polarity Reversal: It is used when call disconnection is signalled in the form of Polarity Reversal. The polarity of line
gets reversed when call is disconnected from remote user. TWT port will be released (free) and caller will get error
tone.
Open Loop Disconnect: It is used when call disconnections signalled in the form of Open Loop Disconnect pulse.
System will check Open Loop Disconnect signal for the time programmed for Open Loop Disconnect Timer for each
TWT port. It is programmable. If Open Loop signal is detected for the time less than the Open loop disconnect timer
programmed, it will not be considered as valid open loop signal for releasing the port. But if Open loop is detected
continuously at least for the time programmed in the Open Loop Disconnect timer, it is considered as a valid
Disconnect supervision signal.The call will be released and caller will get error tone. This timer can be programmed
only if Open Loop Disconnect option is selected.
Disconnect Tone Detection on TWT Port (for IC/OG calls)
This parameter is applicable only for both IC and OG calls made on TWT ports.
Disconnect Tone: It is used when call disconnection is signalled in the form of disconnect tone. The Disconnect tone
consists of Cadence (ON-OFF time) and frequency.
ON time and OFF time are programmable and by defaultprogrammed as 750ms. The frequency can be detected in
the range of 275-665Hz. If the cadence of tone from CO, matches with programmed values and the frequency is in
detectable range, then system will detect it and will consider it as valid Disconnect Tone. The call will be released and
caller will get Error tone.
When there is call on TWT port and call is answered i.e goes OFF-Hook from ringing state, system will check
programming of following flag:
Disconnect Tone Detection is enabled in DID No Digit Dial State.
Disconnect Tone detection is enabled in OG Call + All IC Call states other than DID No Digit Dial State.
If flag is disable for the particular state as mentioned above:
System will not detect Disconnect tone.
TWT port will be released (free) only if called party goes ON-Hook
If flag is Enabled, same logic for Cadence and Frequency is applicable as explained in above design (for Outgoing
Calls).
Disconnect Tone detection for DSP Based Trunk Card:
ETERNITY supports some of the TWT cards which have DSP based TWT ports.
The DSP cannot detect the frequency from the tone present. DSP can detect that tone only for which frequency and
cadence is provided by application while initialization. Hence, frequency and cadence should be programmed for
such cards. Frequency1 and Frequency2 are programmable as explained below:
Matrix
Frequency 1 can be detected from 300 to 1400 Hz.
Frequency 2 can be detected from 20 to 1400 Hz. Frequency 2 will be addition or modulation to frequency 1. One
more parameter is programmed viz. "Operator".
This parameter is programmable with 3 options:
No operator
Modulation (*)
Addition (+)
If No operator is programmed, frequency 2 will not be applicable.
If Modulation is programmed, than frequency 1and frequency 2 will be used as modulation i.e F1* F2
If Addition is programmed, than frequency 1 and frequency 2 will be used as addition i.e F1 + F2.
Cadence is programmable from 0040-4000 msec for On-Off time 1 and 2.
When disconnect tone is detected on port as per the Frequency and Cadences programmed, the disconnect tone is
detected and call will be disconnected.
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template for programming following parameters:
Cadence (First cycle and Subsequent cycle)
Operator
Frequency1
Frequency2
Frequency 1 = 300-1400 Hz
Frequency 2 = 20-1400 Hz
Operator = No, *, +
Cadence is from 0040-4000 msec for On-Off time 1 and 2.
How to program?
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template to program Disconnect Supervision, Open Loop Disconnect Timer and
Disconnect Tones Cadence as ON or OFF Time and Disconnect Tone Detection.
Important Point:
With this TWT hardware Template user can check the programming of both Disconnect supervision (as programmed)
+ Disconnect Tone, during a call.
Relevant Topics:
1. Answer Supervision on TWT 258
3. Call Disconnection Tone Detection 323
=X=X=
Port
Number
Call Disconnect Tone Detection
Frequency
1 (Hz)
Operator
Frequency
2 (Hz)
Cadence (in msec)
First Cycle Subsequent Cycle
On time 1 Off time 1 On time 2 Off time 2
1 400 No 25 750 750 750 750
2 400 No 25 750 750 750 750
Operator Meaning
No No Operator
* Modulation of Frequency 1 and Frequency 2
+ Addition of Frequency 1 and Frequency 2
Matrix
Disconnect Signaling on SLT
Whats this?
As a general application, telecom equipment like PCO machine is connected to the SLT port of the system. Now
whenever the called party (remote party) disconnects i.e goes ON-Hook it is required to inform the SLT port so that
the PCO machine can consider the call as complete and stop billing. In absence of this signal, the call is considered
as complete when the caller goes on hook. But this will result in inaccurate billing.
To solve such problems, the system supports Disconnect Signaling. It is a signal which is generated on SLT port,
when the called party has disconnected. This helps to avoid excessive billing.
When call is made from SLT to any other port for e.g. TWT/Mobile/SIP/T1E1PRI/BRI whenever called party
disconnects, they provide a disconnect signal. This information is generated on the SLT port, so that billing of call can
be stopped.
It can be in the form of:
None
Polarity Reversal
Open Loop Disconnect
How it works?
Disconnect signaling is programmed for OG calls, IC calls and Internal calls made by SLT.
When a call is made from SLT port to any other port and call gets matured, the system will wait for any disconnection
signaling.
When other port gets disconnected due to disconnection information available on the port, the system will check the
Disconnect Signal programmed in the hardware template assigned to the SLT port from where call has been made
as explained below:
None-It is used when no signalling is to be generated on SLT for call disconnection. When call is disconnected.
User will get error tone.
Polarity Reversal-it is used when the call disconnection is to be signalled in the form of Polarity Reversal. The
Battery polarity of the SLT port will be reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the SLT port is +ve for TIP
and -ve for RING in speech condition then on disconnection on other port, TIP will become -ve and Ring +ve.
When call is disconnected, user will get Error tone.
Open Loop Disconnect-It is used when call disconnection is to be signalled in the form of Open Loop Disconnect
pulse. During this:
The Battery voltage on SLT port will be removed for time of Open Loop Disconnect Timer programmed for that
SLT port and will be restored again.
But the Polarity of the SLT port battery voltage will not be changed. When call is disconnected, user gets Error
tone.
Open Loop Disconnect Timer can be programmed by SLT hardware Template and is applicable only if Open Loop
Disconnect option is selected for Disconnect Signalling on SLT.
User will get error tone after disconnect signal is generated on the SLT port.
How to program?
Refer chapter SLT Hardware Template for programming Disconnect Signaling Type and Open Loop Disconnect Timer.
Important Points:
Polarity Reversal is change of status while the Open Loop Disconnect is in form of pulse.
While detecting the Open Loop Disconnect on TWT port, if the battery voltage remains absent at least for the
programmed Open Loop Disconnect Timer, the TWT port will go idle.
While generating open loop disconnect on the SLT, SLT battery voltage will be removed for the programmed Open
Loop Disconnect Timer and after that the battery voltage will be restored (The voltage will be same as it was before
generating the open loop).
Relevant Topics:
1. Answer Signaling on SLT 257
=X=X=
Matrix
Distinctive Rings
Whats this?
The ETERNITY support flexible rings. It is possible to use ring cadence of our choice during different situations. One can
set Triple ring for 'Internal Call-High Priority' situation and long ring for 'Alarm Call'. There are twelve situations possible:
Internal Call
Priority Internal Call
External Call
Alarm Call
Auto Call Back Call
Auto Redial Call
Message Wait Call
SE Mode
Operator Alarm
Emergency
Self Ring
Call Supervision
A set of ring type is called as Distinctive Ring type. The Distinctive Ring type is not programmable. On selecting the
Region Code and Defaulting the System the Distinctive Ring type to suit the Region is loaded.
Table for default settings: (Refer Note1 below the Table).
Note1:
For Region Code for Malaysia, default Distinctive Rings will be as mentioned below:
For Internal Call: Ring Type 06, which has Cadence of 1000 ms On - 4000 ms off
For external call (incoming call): Ring Type 08 which has cadence 400ms On - 200 ms Off - 400 ms On - 2000 ms off.
For Other call types: Same as for Country - India. Refer chapter Default Settings for other default parameters.
How to use it?
Lift the handset. Dial out following command and keep the handset back on the cradle. The telephone instrument rings
depending upon the ring type.
How to program?
Use following command to assign a ring type to a situation:
4002-Situation-Ring Type
Where,
Type1 Type2 Type3
Internal Call Short Very Slow Double Double
Trunk Call Double Long Slow Long Slow
ACB Short Slow Short Slow Short Slow
Auto Redial Very Long Slow Very Long Slow Very Long Slow
Self Alarm Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast
Emergency Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast
Operator Alarm Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast
Message Wait Short Fast Short Fast Short Fast
Programming Ring Continuous Continuous Continuous
Self Ring Short Slow Short Slow Short Slow
Priority Triple Triple Triple
Call Supervision Continuous Continuous Continuous
Situation Meaning
01 Internal Call
02 Trunk Call
03 Auto Call Back Call
04 Auto Redial Call
05 Self Alarm Call
Matrix
Demonstration of rings
It is possible to demonstrate these various types of rings. When a customer purchases a PBX, he feels to get acquainted
with different types of rings given by the system. Unless one is familiar with these rings, he would not understand their
meaning. For programming the demonstration timer, refer chapter Call Progress Tones.
Use following commands to demonstrate the ring:
4003-Ring Type
Where,
Use following command to default all ring type situation:
4001
Timer of Relevance:
Demonstration Timer-Time for which the system demonstrates the tone/ring to the user.
Command: 3542-Seconds.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
06 Emergency
07 Operator Alarm
08 Message Wait Call
09 Programming Ring
10 Self Ring
11 Priority Call
12 Call Supervision
Ring Type Meaning Cadence (in ms)
00 OFF
01 Continuous
02 Short Fast 750-750
03 Short Slow 500-1500
04 Short Very Slow 750-2250
05 Long Fast 1500-500
06 Long Slow 1000-4000
07 Very Long Slow 2000-4000
08 Double 400-200-400-2000
09 Triple 400-200-400-200-400-2000
Ring Type Meaning
0 OFF
1 Continuous
2 Short Fast
3 Short Slow
4 Short Very Slow
5 Long Fast
6 Long Slow
7 Very Long Slow
8 Double
9 Triple
Situation Meaning
Matrix
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Whats this?
Many times it happens that a user wishes privacy for some duration and would not like to be disturbed by phone calls.
Do Not Disturb (DND) feature is very useful in such situations. This feature is useful for Managers and other staff of
Enterprise who would not like to be disturbed because of phone calls during important meetings or conference. For
Hospitals, this feature is useful to avoid phone calls during meeting of doctors. Refer separate Manual for Hotel
Applications of this feature.
If the user has set 'DND' feature, other station users can still call to that user if they have access to 'DND Override' as
well as they have same or higher priority than the user. (the user should not have enabled 'Privacy from DND
Override')
To use this feature, the user should enable 'DND' and/or 'DND Override' from Class of Service. Refer chapter Class of
Service (COS) for more details.
If the user has set DND on his station, other station users will get 'Routing Tone' when they try to call the user who has
set DND feature.
The user can also set the suitable 'text message' while setting DND on his station. This will help the remote party who
is calling to this station, to know more details about the status of the user viz. he is in meeting or he is on leave etc.
The ETERNITY offers a service feature called DND-Remote. Using this feature, the SA can set/cancel this feature on
the user's station or press DSS key for DND, to set the feature on the DKP. Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft
Keys Programming for details about DSS key.
How to use it?
Different class of users can have following flexibilities while using DND feature:
DND Override
DND Message
DND Remote
DND Override:
DND Override and priority features are interconnected as explained below:
User can set/cancel DND feature, using the Access Code.
Suppose User A has set DND and User B wants to call to User A.
If User B makes call to the User A, the User B will get 'routing tone' as User A has set DND on his station.
But due to urgency, if User B needs to call User A, User B will request to allow DND Override from COS for his
station.
If SE has allowed this feature, User B will dial access code (dial '4') or press DSS key for override.
Now, the User B can override DND feature, successfully only if User B has same or higher priority than User A
and at the same time, SE has not allowed User A the feature 'Privacy from DND Override' from COS.
On successful override, Use B can place a call on User A, if user A is free. Else User B will get busy tone.
Thus, User B can override the DND feature, set by User A if following other features are configured:
SE has allowed DND Override from COS for User B
SE has not allowed Privacy from DND Override from COS for User A
SE has configured priority of User B same as or higher than priority of User A, using specific commands.
Refer chapter Priority for more details.
DND Message:
If the DKP user has set or not set, the DND feature and dials the access code for DND, he can select the suitable text
message from the display on the DKP, e.g. 'Cancel DND', 'Unavailable', 'In Meeting', 'In Conference', etc.
This text message will be seen by other DKP callers only, while making call to the DKP which has set DND.
SE can edit the specific Text message as required for specific application.
DND Remote:
In an Enterprise, the receptionist can dial the SA command to set/cancel the DND on the specific station of the user or
boss.
How to Configure?
Using Feature Access Code:
User can dial the access code to set/cancel DND feature. Refer chapter Access Codes.
Dial 18-Text Message Number
Where,
For SLT, enter Code = 1 to 9 to Set DND and 0 to Cancel DND.
Matrix
For DKP, navigate the list of messages, select the message and press 'Enter'.
Set DND from SLT and DKP:
Dial 18-1 to Set DND with Text message 1
Cancel DND from SLT and DKP:
Dial 18-0 to Cancel DND.
Note:
Text message will be seen by other DKP callers only, while making call to the DKP which has set DND.
Using SA Command: (Remote DND)
Set DND from SLT and DKP:
Dial 1072-001-Flexible Number-Text message Number
OR
Press DSS key assigned to DND feature (if DND is currently not set-on DKP)
Cancel DND from SLT and DKP:
Dial 1072-001-Flexible Number-0
OR
Press DSS key assigned to DND feature (if DND is currently set-on DKP)
Where,
Flexible Number is the flexible number of the Room/Phone number.
If DKP (EON) is used, after entering Flexible Number you can navigate the list of text messages, select the
message and press 'Enter'. The List of messages are as given for Access Code '18' .
Use Text Message Number 1 to 9 for SLT.
Using SE Command to edit Text messages:
Step 1
Use following command to default all DND Text Messages:
1501
Step 2
Use following command to Edit the Text Message:
1502-Text Message Number-Text Message
Where,
Text Message Number = 1 to 9
Text Message is a string of max 16 alpha numeric characters. If it is less than 16, terminate with #*
Text Message Number DND Message
1 Do Not Disturb
2 Unavailable
3 In Meeting
4 In Conference
5 Try on Mobile
6 On Vacation
7 On Business Trip
8 Out of Office
9 With a Guest
Matrix
Default Text messages are as given below:
Important Points:
Refer chapter Class of Service (COS) to allow or not to allow the features 'DND' and 'Privacy from Override' for the
station.
Refer DND feature in chapter QSIG for more details about DND over QSIG.
Relevant Topics:
1. Access Codes 225
3. Priority 676
5. QSIG 687
=X=X=
Text Message Number DND Message
1 Do Not Disturb
2 Unavailable
3 In Meeting
4 In Conference
5 Try on Mobile
6 On Vacation
7 On Business Trip
8 Out of Office
9 With a Guest
Matrix
DS1 Trunks
Whats this?
Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) trunks use Bit-Oriented Signaling (BOS) and multiplexes 24 channels (T1 service) or 32
channels (E1 service) into a single data stream. DS1 can be used for voice or voice-grade data and for data-transmission
protocols. T1 trunk service multiplexes 24 channels into a single 1.544-Mbps data stream. E1 trunk service multiplexes
32 channels into a single 2.048-Mbps stream. Both T1 and E1 provide a digital interface for trunk groups.
Signaling Modes:
Common Channel Signaling (CCS) is an industry-standard technique where any one of a group of channels carries the
signals for the other channels. Matrix uses the 24th channel of a group for signaling. This signaling technique differs from
24-channel signaling. When the system is configured for Facility-Associated Signaling, 24-channel signaling uses the
24th channel in a DS1 facility to carry signals. This technique also is called clear channel, out-of-band or alternate voice
data (AVD) signaling.
Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) is similar to common-channel signaling and is used only when the Bit Rate is 2.048
Mbps (the trunk is used with an E1 interface). Signaling is carried on the 16th channel.
Common-channel signaling and channel associated signaling provide a maximum transmission rate of 64 Kbps for
bearer channels.
ROBBED-BIT signaling is a per-channel signaling technique for transmitting signaling bits on each channel in a DS1
facility. The least-significant bit in every 6th transmitted information frame is removed and replaced by a signaling bit.
This technique is also called in-band signaling. The maximum transmission rate for each bearer channel with ROBBED-
BIT signaling is 56 Kbps.
ISDN-PRI signaling is carried on the 24th channel for a 1.544 Mbps connection and on the 16th channel for a 2.048
Mbps connection.
QSIG is an ISDN based protocol for signaling between nodes of a Private Integrated Services network.
Any of the common trunks, except for PCOL (Personal Central Office Line) trunks, can be analog or digital. (PCOL trunks
can only be analog.) Administering a digital trunk group is very similar to administering its analog counterpart, but digital
trunks must connect to a DS1 port and this port must be administered separately.
User interface for E1_PRI and E1_CAS channels:
In case of ISDN_E1_PRI and ISDN_E1_CAS the protocol supports 32 Channels ranging from 00 to 31, out of which
2 channels (channel no. 00 and 16) are used for framing/signaling. So effectively user has 30 channels for OG/IC
calls.
For better understanding of the user the channel IDs are mapped as shown below. Thus for the E1_PRI and E1_CAS
the DS1 portsupports total 30 channels ranging from 01 to 30, which you can use for making and receiving calls.
The system Debug is for trouble shooting and so the channel ID in debug will be as the actual channel ID as
supported by the E1_PRI and E1_CAS protocols.
Similarly, in case of T1 PRI, Protocol supports 24 channels (from 01 to 24), in which channel no. 24 is used for the
signaling, so effectively there are 23 Voice channels are available.
But in case of T1 RBS, Protocol supports 24 channels (from 01 to 24) and the protocol doesnt consume any channel
for signaling so that there are total 24 channels available for the users.
Loop Back Tests for E1 and T1
ETERNITY supports following types of Loop back tests:
Near end Loop back: These are of two type viz.
Line loop Back test
Payload loop back test
The ETERNITY will form the line loop back or payload loop back same as required by the other end.
00 01 02 03 04 14 15 16 17 31
01 02 03 04 14 15 16 17 30
18
Channel ID as
per Protocol
Channel ID for
User Interface
Mapping of Actual Channel ID with User Interface (E1_PRI and E1_CAS)
Matrix
Far end Loop Back Test: These are of two type viz.
Line loopback test
Payload loopback test
These tests are conducted when the DS1 port is in NT mode and is connected to other PBX and wants to test the line
between itself and the far end. In this mode, ETERNITY acts as a network.
Near end Loopback:
Near end loop back are of following types:
Line loop back
This can be implemented by shorting of signaling wires 'RTIP' and 'RRING' to 'TTIP' and 'TRING' respectively at the
line side.
This is as good as shorting the Rx pair to Tx pair. In this case DS1 port does not need to be in sync with network.
Payload Loop back:
This is effectively a physical connection of payload channels (Timeslot) with framing generated by DS1 port itself for
the transmit signal. In this case DS1 port will be in sync with the Network.
When the other end connected with the DS1 port of the ETERNITY wants to perform the loopback tests, the DS1 port
will form the loopback depending upon the type of test the other end wants to perform (i.e. line loopback or payload
loopback).
Method of forming loopback:
Method of forming loopback at the DS1 port side is different for the E1 and T1 carrier. These are explained below.
Case 1:
When line type of the DS1 port is configured as ISDN_E1_PRI or ISDN_E1_CAS:
The protocol doesn't support the facility that the remote end can close/open the loop at the DS1 port side
automatically.
Hence when the remote end wants to perform the loopback test he will inform the person (SE) at the ETERNITY side
to form the type of loop back as desired (i.e. Line loopback or Payload loopback) on the DS1 port.
When the SE forms the loopback at DS1 port side (by issuing appropriate SE Command), the remote end can start
the test.
On completion of the testing, the remote end person will inform the SE to release/open the loopback formed at the
DS1 port side.
On request of the remote end, the SE will give SE command for the DS1 port to open the Near end loopback.
Case 2:
When line type of the DS1 port is configured as ISDN_T1_PRI or ISDN_T1_RBS,
The protocol supports loopback Activation and deactivation message, whereby the remote end can send the loop up
activation code to the DS1 port and the DS1 port decodes the message and forms the loop back automatically.
On completion of the testing Remote end can send the loop deactivation code and the DS1 port can open the already
formed loopback.
So in this case the SE's intervention is not required to form and release the loop back.
In case the remote end doesn't support facility to automatically form/release the loopback for the DS1 port though the
carrier is T1, the SE can use the command (6141-1-DS1-Type of Loop Back) on request of the remote end and the
loopback will get formed or released, depending on the command issued.
Loopback Activation:
When the system receives the SE command to form Line/Payload loop back (in case of E1):
It will inform the ETERNITY ME Card DS1 about the received command ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will release all the
calls supported by the DS1 Port under test.
The ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will form the required type of loop back.
System will put the DS1 port in maintenance mode. It will release all active calls supported by DS1 port and restrict
the usage of DS1 port for IC/OG calls.
When the loopback activation code is received from far end on the DS1 port, (When carrier is T1)
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will inform the system about the received information and the DS1 port number.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will release all the calls supported by the DS1 Port under test.
System will put the DS1 port in maintenance mode. It will release all active calls supported by DS1 port and restrict
the usage of DS1 port for IC/OG calls.
Matrix
Loopback Release:
On receiving the loopback release code or receiving the command to release the loop back (either Payload or Line),
the system will take the DS1 port out from the maintenance mode and now the DS1 port will function normally.
Far end Loop back Test:
Far end loop back test gives facility to ETERNITY to check the health of the line towards the other end connected on
its DS1 port using loopback tests.
The types of the far end loopback test are:
Line loopback
Payload loopback
Note:
The option 'Release All Loop Backs' is required when the far end requires the universal loop back release code to
release the Loop Back.
Method of forming loopback:
Method of forming loopback at the DS1 port side is different for the E1 and T1 carrier. These are explained below.
Case 1:
When line type of the DS1 port is configured as ISDN_E1_PRI or ISDN_E1_CAS:
The protocol doesn't support the facility that the ETERNITY can perform the loopback tests automatically.
The SE of the ETERNITY will inform the far end connected with the DS1 port, to form the loopback as required.
Once the far end has formed the desired loop back the SE can issue command to start the Far end loop back test.
Start Loopback Test:
On receiving the command to start Far End loop back test (either the Line Loopback or Payload loopback test).
The system will put this DS1 port in maintenance mode and inform the ETERNITY ME Card DS1 about the test to
perform with DS1 port number
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will release all the calls supported by the DS1 Port under test.
The ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will start the PRBS generator and counter.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will send the PRBS count every 1 second to the system.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will increment PRBS Counter for every error encountered during the test during one
second.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will reset the PRBS counter to zero, after sending the PRBS Counter to the system, every
second.
The system will store the received PRBS count (received every second) in Performance report, which can be
captured from Serial port or Printer port.
End Loopback Test/Release All Loop Backs
When the SE wants to end the loopback test he will issue the command to end the Far End Loop Back Test, for the
DS1 port under the test.
SE will inform the other end's person that loopback test is finished and now the remote end can open the loop formed.
On receiving the command to end loop back test for the DS1 port, the system will take the DS1 port out of
maintenance state and inform the DS1 port about the received command.
DS1 port will function normal.
Case 2:
When the line type of the DS1 port is configured as "ISDN_T1_PRI" or "ISDN_T1_RBS"
Loop back activation/deactivation is automatic.
Important Points:
The activation methods are different for the D4 and ESF framing.
In case of D4 framing only Line loop back is supported.
In case of ESF framing both, Line loopback and Payload loop back are supported.
When Framing = D4
D4 Framing supports only:
Line Loop Back test
Start Line Loop Back Test
The test will start for the DS1 port when SE issues the command to start the Far end line loop back test. When SE
command (6142-1-DS1-1) is issued.
Matrix
The system will inform the ETERNITY ME Card DS1 about the command and put this DS1 port in maintenance state.
The ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will release all calls supported by DS1 port under test.
The ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will send the line loop back "Activation Code" and will start the PRBS generator and
counter.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will send the PRBS count every 1 second to Master.
second.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will reset the PRBS counter to zero, after sending the PRBS Counter to the system, every
second.
Stop Loop Back Test
When SE command (6142-DS1-2) or (6142-DS1-5) to end the Far end loop back test is issued.
The system will inform the ETERNITY ME Card DS1 about the received command and will take out the DS1 port from
the maintenance mode.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will send the inband "Deactivation Code".
When Framing = ESF
ESF framing supports both:
Line Loop back
Payload loop back tests.
Start Loop Back Test:
Depending upon the SE command issued to start the type of Loop Back (Line or Payload) test.
The system will put the DS1 port under test in Maintenance mode and will inform the DS1 Port about the received
command.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will release all the calls supported by the DS1 port.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will send the Loop back "Activation Message" for the line/payload loop back as informed by
the system.
The ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will start the PRBS generator and counter.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will send the PRBS count every 1 second to Master.
second.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will reset the PRBS counter to zero, after sending the PRBS Counter to Master, every
second.
Stop Loop Back Test/Release All Loop Backs:
When SE issues command (6142-DS1-2) or (6142-DS1-4) or (6142-DS1-5) to end the Far end loop back test.
The system will inform the ETERNITY ME Card DS1 about the received command and will take out the DS1 port from
the maintenance mode.
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 will send the "Deactivation Message" for the line/payload loopback test as required.
Performance Report:
50 entries will be stored in Performance report.
The report will store the entries in FIFO order.
From SA Mode
User the following command to start/abort online printing of DS1 performance report:
1072-030-Flag
Where,
By default, Flag is 0.
User the following command to start/abort offline printing of DS1 performance report:
1072-031-Flag
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Where,
Notes:
PRBS counter = 0 indicates the 'healthy' condition.
During loop back test the PRBS counter may be greater than zero at initial stage of the loop back stage, but it will be
zero afterwards consistently for the healthy condition.
PRBS counter = greater than zero, indicates the 'faulty' condition for the loop back test.
How to program?
Port Status
Used to enable/disable the port. When the Port is disabled, it will not be allotted to the user on grabbing the port. Instead
the user will get error tone.
Use the following command to enable/disable the port:
6101-1-DS1-Port Status
6101-2-DS1-DS1-Port Status
6101-*-Port Status
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, the DS1 Port is enabled.
Service Provider
Assign a Service Provider to the DS1 port. This is useful in LCR.
Use following command to assign a name to the DS1 port:
6102-1-DS1-SP
6102-2-DS1-DS1-SP
6102-*-SP
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
SP is from 01 to 99.
By default, Service Provider is 01.
Line Coding Mechanism
Line coding is a pattern that data assumes as it is propagated over a communications channel as following:
AMI: Alternate Mark Inversion. All transmissions generated by digital trunk ports are encoded in AMI Line coding. Voltage
on the line will be a net DC '0'.
B8ZS: AMI with 0-code suppression, binary 8-zero substitution.
HDB3: High density bipolar line coding.
For both B8ZS and HDB3, line coding, the terminals at end-to-end will be HDB3-compatible.
Use following command to program the Line Coding Mechanism for the DS1 port:
6103-1-DS1-Line Coding
6103-2-DS1-DS1-Line Coding
6103-*-Line Coding
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Port Status Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
By default, Line Coding is HDB3.
Set Line Coding = AMI or B8ZS for T1 line. However, B8ZS is recommended.
Set Line Coding = AMI or HDB3 for E1 line. However, HDB3 is recommended.
CMI is used in Japan and since ETERNITY does not support Japan, this option will never be used.
Framing Mode
Framing: It is the set of 24 or 32 8-bit time slots that is treated as a single transmission unit.
SF: D4 Superframe. The 12-frame unit that contains the synchronization pattern is known as the 'Superframe'.
ESF: Extended Superframe Unlike the 12-bit synchronization pattern for D4 which utilizes all of the available framing bits
for sync., ESF employs only 6 of the available 24 framing bits to carry a synchronization pattern. Each 24-frame entity
spanning one ESF cycle, is referred to as an 'ESF superframe'. With CEPT1 framing, the framing information is cycled
through sixteen (0-15) frames (each containing channels 0-31). The type of framing used at both ends must be identical,
unless the signaling and framing are converted somewhere in the transmission stream (as might happen in international
communication).
Use following command to program the Framing Mode for the DS1 port:
6104-1-DS1-Framing
6104-2-DS1-DS1-Framing
6104-*-Framing
Where,
By default, Framing is CEPT1 Multi Frame.
Note:
Set Framing = SF or ESF for T1 line. However, ESF is recommended since it supports advanced features like CRC and
FDL, which provide the performance reports.
Line type
Signal Type/Line Type signifies the type of signaling to be used on the T1/E1 line. The E&M Protocol can be used on
DS1 Port. This can be done by assigning E&M Feature Template to DS1 Port. Refer chapter E&M Feature Template.
Use following command to program signaling type/ Line type of a DS1:
6105-1-DS1-Line Type
6105-2-DS1-DS1-Line Type
6105-*-Line Type
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Line Coding Meaning
1 AMI-Basic
2 B8ZS
3 HDB3
4 CMI (Not Used)
Framing Meaning
1 SF (also called D4)
2 ESF
3 CEPT1 Multi Frame
Line Type Meaning
1 ISDN_E1_PRI
2 ISDN_T1_PRI
3 ISDN_E1_CAS
4 ISDN_T1_RBS
5 ISDN_E1_QSIG
6 ISDN_T1_QSIG
7 ISDN_E1_E&M
Matrix
By default, signaling type/line type of a DS1 is 1.
Interface Companding
The entry in this field must match the compounding method used by the far-end switch. This field does not appear for all
DS1 ports. Companding is a method of improving the signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio resulting from the pulse code modulation
(PCM) process on voice calls. The analog signal's amplitude is compressed before it is quantized and transmitted. Either
of two algorithms are used to compand voice band signals: A-law and m-law. A-law is generally used in countries that
use E1 at 2.048 mbps; while m-law is used in countries that use T1 at 1.544 mbps.
Use the following command to program interface companding (PCM coding) of a DS1:
6108-1-DS1-Interface Companding
6108-2-DS1-DS1-Interface Companding
6108-*-Interface Companding
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, the interface companding of a DS1 is 1.
Auto Receive Equalization Mode
Use the following command to program auto receive equalization mode:
6110-1-DS1-Mode
6110-2-DS1-DS1-Mode
6110-*-Mode
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Auto Receive Equalization Mode is 1.
Receive Equalization Parameters
This field increases the strength of incoming signals by a fixed amount to compensate for line losses.
Use the following command to program the receive equalization parameters of a DS1:
6111-1-DS1-Receive Equalization Parameters
6111-2-DS1-DS1-Receive Equalization Parameters
6111-*-Receive Equalization Parameters
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, the receive equalization parameters of DS1 is 1.
8 ISDN_T1_E&M
Interface Compounding Meaning
1 A-Law (for E1 Service)
2 Mu-Law (for T1 Service)
Mode Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Receive Equalization Parameters Meaning
1 None
2 8 dB
3 16 dB
4 24 dB
5 32 dB
6 40 dB
7 48 dB
8 Reserve
Line Type Meaning
Matrix
Glare Option
ISDN glare occurs if the system initiates an out going call on a B-Channel at the same time the network initiates an
incoming call on that same B-channel. When processing a glare condition, programmed glare option on DS1 port will be
considered.
Use following command to program Glare Option for the DS1 port:
6112-1-DS1-Glare Option
6112-2-DS1-DS1-Glare Option
6112-*-Glare Option
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Glare Option is 2.
Set Glare=Proceed, if ETERNITY is to be given priority in event of Glare.
Set Glare=Held Back, if the other end of the link is to be given priority in event of Glare.
Please note that the Glare settings should be complimentary on either side of the link.
Idle Code
It is the 8-bit sequence that occupies the time slot on a E1/T1 trunk channel when it is not being used.
Use the following command to program the Idle Code of a DS1:
6113-1-DS1-Idle Code
6113-2-DS1-DS1-Idle Code
6113-*-Idle Code
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Idle Code is from 000 to 255 (corresponding to 8 bits).
The binary equivalent of the programmed value (000 to 255) is sent on the channel to signify that the channel is idle. (or
Unused) This setting depends on the network. Most commonly applicable values are 7F and FF (Binary equivalent is
0111 1111 and 1111 1111, decimal equivalent is 127 and 255).
By default, the idle code is 127 (7F).
Note:
Use message mode of the Digital Switch IC to send the idle channel code.
Overlap Receiving Timer
Use the following command to program overlap receiving timer:
6114-1-DS1-Timer
6114-2-DS1-DS1-Timer
6114-*-Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Timer is from 00 to 99.
By default, Overlap Receiving Timer is 15 seconds.
This timer is relevant while receiving the called party number information in overlap receiving mode.
If overlap receiving timer value is 0, it means indirectly to support only Enbloc receiving method. By the term 'Enbloc', we
mean receiving digits in a single block.
Pause Timer
Use following command to program Pause Timer:
6109-1-DS1- Pause Timer
6109-2-DS1-DS1-Pause Timer
6109- * - Pause Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8
Pause Timer is from 1 to 9 seconds
By default, Pause Timer is 3 seconds.
Glare Option Meaning
1 Proceed
2 Held Back
Matrix
This Timer is used to provide delay for the number dialing by the DS1 port. Pause timer will be applicable when any 'P'
digit is configured in the DTMF number string which is to be outdialed as DTMF digits on DS1 port. One of the
applications for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter Multi-Stage Dialing.
For example, if PPP2 is to be outdialed and Pause timer is programmed as 3 seconds, the ETERNITY will out dial the
digit 2 after 9 seconds i.e delay of individual P i.e 3+3+3 =9.
DTMF ON Time
Use following command to program DTMF ON Time:
6117-1-DS1-DTMF ON Time
6117-2-DS1-DS1-DTMF ON Time
6117-*-DTMF ON Time
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
DTMF ON Time is from 051 to 255 msec.
By default, DTMF ON Time is 102 msec.
This parameter decides for how much time the DTMF digit will be ON, while out dialed by the ETERNITY.
One of the applications for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter Multi-Stage Dialing.
DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer
Use following command to program DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer:
6118-1-DS1-DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
6118-2-DS1-DS1-DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
6118-*-DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8
DTMF Inter digit Pause Time is from 051 to 255 msec.
By default, DTMF Inter digit Pause Time is 102 msec.
This parameter decides how much time the pause (gap) should be present between two digits while dialed by the
ETERNITY. One of the applications for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter Multi-Stage Dialing.
Orientation Type
Use following command to program 'Orientation Type' for the DS1 port:
6106-1-DS1-Orientation Type
6106-2.DS1-DS1-Orientation Type
6106-*-Orientation Type
Where,
DS1=1 To 8.
By default Type = 1.
When Orientation = Terminal, the port will be regarded as trunk. All the trunk related parameters will be applicable.
When Orientation = Network, the port will be regarded as station. All the station related parameters will be applicable.
When Orientation = Tie-line, the port will be regarded as station for all IC calls to it and as trunk for all OG calls to be
made through it.
OG source calling party TON
Use following command to program OG source calling party TON for a DS1:
6126-1-DS1-Source TON
6126-2-DS1-DS1-Source TON
6126-*-Source TON
Where,
Orientation Meaning
1 Terminal
2 Network
3 Tie Line
Matrix
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, OG source calling party TON of DS1 is 1.
OG source calling party NPI
Use following command to program OG source calling party NPI for DS1:
6127-1-DS1-Source NPI
6127-2-DS1-DS1-Source NPI
6127-*-Source NPI
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, OG source calling party NPI for DS1 is 2.
OG Destination Called Party TON
Use following command to program OG Destination Called Party TON for a DS1:
6128-1-DS1-Destination TON
6128-2-DS1-DS1-Destination TON
6128-*-Destination TON
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, OG Destination Called Party TON of DS1 is 1.
Source TON Meaning
1
Unknown: This is used when the user or network has no a prior information about the numbering plan. In
this case, the Address Value field is organized according to the network dialing plan. e.g. prefix or
escape digits might be present.
2 International Number.
3 National Number: Prefix or escape digits shall not be included.
4
Network Specific Number: This is used to indicate administration/Service number specific to the serving
network. e.g. used to access an operator.
5
Subscriber Number: This is used when a specific short number representation is stored in one or more
SCs as part of a higher layer application.
6 Abbreviated Number
7 Reserved Number.
Source NPI Meaning
1 Unknown
2 ISDN Numbering Plan
3 Data Numbering Plan
4 Telex Numbering
5 National Numbering Plan
6 Private Numbering Plan
7 Reserved for Extension
Destination TON Meaning
1
Unknown: This is used when the user or network has no a prior information about the
numbering plan. In this case, the Address Value field is organized according to the
network dialing plan. e.g. prefix or escape digits might be present.
2 International Number.
3 National Number: Prefix or escape digits shall not be included.
4
Network Specific Number: This is used to indicate administration/Service number
specific to the serving network. e.g. used to access an operator.
5
Subscriber Number: This is used when a specific short number representation is
stored in one or more SCs as part of a higher layer application.
7 Reserved Number.
Matrix
OG Destination Called Party NPI
Use following command to program OG Destination Called Party NPI for DS1:
6129-1-DS1-Destination NPI
6129-2-DS1-DS1-Destination NPI
6129-*-Destination NPI
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, OG Destination Called Party NPI for DS1 is 2.
Feed Inband-tones before DISCONNECT
Use following command to program to select whether the inband tones should be feed on DS1-NT before sending
DISCONNECT message?
6130-1-DS1-Flag
6130-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6130-*-Flag
Where,
Default = NO.
This flag is applicable only when DS1 port is configured as 'Network'.
When this flag is enabled (set as 'Yes'), inband tones shall be feed for 15 seconds (fixed, non programmable) before
sending DISCONNECT message.
When this flag is disabled (set as 'No'), inband tones (Busy/Error as applicable for the state of the call) shall not be
feed before sending the DISCONNECT message. However when DISCONNECT message is sent from DS1-NT port,
inband tones will always be sent with 'progress indicator 8'.
Dial Tone Flag
When the user dials the trunk access code or selective trunk access code for dialing the number directly on the trunk
port, he waits for the dial tone before dialing the number. But some exchange does not give Dial Tone for the DS1
Port. For Example, when DS1 port as E1CAS type is used in Delhi, it is observed that the exchange does not give dial
tone when direct dialing on the trunk is used.
To solve such problems, ETERNITY supports 'Dial Tone' when the DS1 Port is accessed.
It is applicable only when Online dialing is used as for Store and Forward dialing, the dial tone is given to the user.
The dial tone is played for the Dial tone timer of the PBX.
Use following command to program the dial tone flag for DS1 port:
6115-1-DS1-Flag
6115-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6115-*-Flag
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Dial Tone Flag is '0' for all the DS1 ports.
Destination NPI Meaning
1 Unknown
2 ISDN Numbering Plan
3 Data Numbering Plan
4 Telex Numbering
5 National Numbering Plan
6 Private Numbering Plan
7 Reserved for Extension
Flag Meaning
0 No
1 Yes
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Notes:
When dial tone flag is disabled, user will hear the dial tone of the exchange if provided, otherwise, user will hear the
silence.
If the user is making the call from the FXS port and dial tone is not provided by the exchange, user will not know when
to start dialing the number. In this case, it is possible that some digits are not out dialed on the port and wrong number
is dialed out because system will out dial the number only if Outgoing call Acknowledge is received from the
ETERNITY ME Card DS1 and user will not know about this condition. Hence, it is required to enable this flag, if
exchange is not providing the dial tone.
Routing Tone Flag
When online dialing or store and forward dialing is used, some exchange do not provide any tone when call is
proceeding from the exchange.
Thus, the user does not know whether the call is processing or not if for some time there is silence from the
exchange.
In such case, this parameter is required to be programmed by the user.
Routing tone will be stopped when alert message or connect message or disconnect message comes from the
ETERNITY ME Card DS1.
Use following command to program the routing tone flag for DS1 port:
6116-1-DS1-Flag
6116-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6116-*-Flag
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Routing Tone Flag is '0' for all the DS1 ports.
Channel Count (Data)
Use the following command to reserve channels for data transmission on DS1:
6135-1-DS1-Channel Count (Data)
6135-2-DS1-DS1-Channel Count (Data)
6135-*-Channel Count (Data)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Channel Count (Data) is from 00 to 30.
By default, Channel Count for data transmission is 00.
Channel Count (OG)
Use the following command to program number of channels reserved for OG channel count:
6136-1-DS1-Channel Count (OG)
6136-2-DS1-DS1-Channel Count (OG)
6136-*-Channel Count (OG)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Channel Count (OG) is from 00 to 30. "It specifies the number of channels to be reserved for making an OG calls. For
example, If OG channel count is programmed as 15, simultaneous 15 (maximum) OG calls can be made from the DS1
port".
By default, OG Channel Count is 30.
Channel Count (IC)
Use the following command to program number of channels reserved for IC channel count:
6137-1-DS1-Channel Count (IC)
6137-2-DS1-DS1-Channel Count (IC)
6137-*-Channel Count (IC)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Channel Count (IC) is from 00 to 30. "It specifies the number of channels to be reserved for making an IC calls. For
example, If IC channel count is programmed as 10, simultaneous 10 (max.) IC calls can be received on the DS1 port".
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
By default, Channel Count (IC) is 30.
OG Reference ID
Use the following command to assign OG Reference ID to DS1 port:
6131-1-DS1-OG Reference ID
6131-2-DS1-DS1-OG Reference ID
6131-*-OG Reference ID
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
OG Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, OG Reference ID is 00.
IC Reference ID for Working Hour
Use the following command to assign IC Reference ID for Working Hour:
6132-1-DS1-IC Reference ID
6132-2-DS1-DS1-IC Reference ID
6132-*-IC Reference ID
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
IC Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, IC Reference ID is 00.
IC Reference ID for Break Hour
Use the following command to assign IC Reference ID for Break Hour:
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, IC Route Reference ID is 00.
IC Route Reference ID for Non-working Hour
Use the following command to assign IC Route Reference ID for Non-working Hour:
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, IC Route ID is 00.
Near End Loopback
Use the following command to activate/release Near End Loopback for DS1:
6141-1-DS1-Loopback
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Far End Loopback
Use the following command to start/stop far end loopback test for DS1:
6142-1-DS1-Code
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Loopback Meaning
1 Activate Line Loopback
2 Release Line Loopback
3 Activate Payload Loopback
4 Release Payload Loopback
Code Meaning
1 Start Line Loop Back Test
Matrix
Online Performance Report Printing
Use following command to assign the port for online Performance Report Printing:
6143-Port
Where,
Default, None.
Offline Performance Report Printing
Use following command to assign the port for offline Performance Report Printing:
6144-Port
Where,
Default, None.
E1 Line Signaling Variant
The following command is applicable when the Bit Rate=E1.
Use following command to program E1 Line Signaling Variant for the DS1 port:
6152-1-DS1-E1 Line Signaling Variant
6152-2-DS1-DS1-E1 Line Signaling Variant
6152-*-E1 Line Signaling Variant
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, E1 Line Signaling Variant is 01.
2 End Line Loop Back Test
3 Start Payload Loop Back Test
4 End Payload Loop Back Test
5 Release All Loop Backs
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
3 Printer
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
3 Printer
E1 Line Signaling Variant Meaning
01 ITU T Q.400-Q.490
02 E1 CAS Wink Start
03 E1 CAS Wink Start FGD
04 E1 CAS Delay Dial
05 E1 CAS Immediate Start/Dial
06 E1 CAS FXS Ground Start
07 E1 CAS FXS Loop Start
08 E1 CAS FXO Ground Start
09 E1 CAS FXO Ground Start
10 Indian Line Signaling Variant 1
11 Indian Line Signaling Variant 2
Code Meaning
Matrix
ITU-T Q.400-Q.490 is the only Line Signaling Variant supported currently. India supports three types of E1 line signaling
protocols. One is same as ITU-T Q.400-Q.490. Other two differ from this standard and hence are not supported currently.
These will be supported on knowing their usage in the field. Most of the Countries follow ITU-T Q.400-Q.490.
E1 Register Signaling Variant
Use following command to program E1 Register Signaling Variant for the DS1 port:
6153-1-DS1-E1 Register Signaling Variant
6153-2-DS1-DS1-E1 Register Signaling Variant
6153-*-E1 Register Signaling Variant
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, E1 Register Signaling Variants is 3.
E1 CAS Decadic: A-bit is used to transmit the DNIS. The A-bit is toggled as per the Pulse Dial Ratio set.
E1 CAS DTMF: DNIS/ANI is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the DTMF signals as per ITU-T
Q.23.
E1 CAS MFC R2: DNIS/ANI is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the MFC R2 signals as per ITU-T
Q.400-Q490.
E1 CAS MFC R1: DNIS/ANI is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the MFC R1 signals as per ITU-T
Q.300-Q390. Generally, E1 CAS MFC R2 is only used.
DNIS: Dialed Number In Service.
ANI: Auto Number Identification.
E1 Auto Alarm
E1 Auto Alarm-This command is used to disable/enable E1 Auto Alarm for DS1 port.
Use following command to enable/disable E1 Auto Alarm for the DS1 port for E1 signaling:
6154-1-DS1-Flag
6154-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6154-*-Flag
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, E1 Auto Alarm is '0'.
Line Build Out Parameters
This field reduces the outgoing signal strength by a fixed amount. The appropriate level of loss depends on the distance
between your switch (measured by cable length from the smart jack) and the nearest repeater. Where another switch is
at the end of the circuit, as in campus environments, use the cable length between the 2 switches to select the
appropriate setting from the table below. This field is relevant if the Near-end CSU type field is integrated.
E1 Register Signaling Variant Meaning
1 E1 CAS Decadic
2 E1 CAS DTMF
3 E1 CAS MFC R2
4 E1 CAS MFC R1
Flag Meaning
0 Do not send alarm
1 Send alarm @ 1 second
Matrix
Use the following command to program the line build out parameters of a DS1:
6162-1-DS1-Code
6162-2-DS1-DS1-Code
6162-*-Code
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, the Line Build Out Parameters is 8.
Custom Pulse Width (CPW) for T1 signaling
Use following command to enable/disable Custom Pulse Width (CPW) Flag for the DS1 port for T1 signaling:
6171-1-DS1-Flag
6171-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6171-*-Flag
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Flag is '0'.
Custom Pulse Width Word 1 for T1 signaling
This command is used for Pulse shaping in first phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 1 for the DS1 port for T1 signaling:
6172-1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
6172-2-DS1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
6172-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 1 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 1 is 63 volt.
This command is used for Pulse shaping in second phase.
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
This command is used for Pulse shaping in third phase.
Code Meaning
1 0-133ft
2 133-266ft
3 266-399ft
4 399-533ft
5 533-665ft
6 -7.5dB or equidistance
7 -16dB or equidistance
8 -22.5dB or equidistance
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
This command is used for Pulse shaping in fourth phase.
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width (CPW) Flag for E1 signaling
Use following command to enable/disable Custom Pulse Width (CPW) Flag for the DS1 port for E1 signaling:
6155-1-DS1-Flag
6155-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6155-*-Flag
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Flag is '0'.
Custom Pulse Width Word 1 for E1 signaling
This command is used for Pulse shaping in first phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 1 for the DS1 port for E1 signaling:
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
This command is used for Pulse shaping in second phase.
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
This command is used for Pulse shaping in third phase.
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
This command is used for Pulse shaping in fourth phase.
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ISDN PRI Switch Variant
This field selects the variant for ISDN PRI when ISDN PRI is selected as signaling mode. This must match with the other
end of the link.
Use following command to program the ISDN PRI Switch Variant:
6107-1-DS1-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
6107-2-DS1-DS1-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
6107-*-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, ISDN PRI Switch Variant of a DS1 is 5.
DS1 (E1 CAS) Parameters:
Forward tone Maximum ON timer (T1)
This timer signifies the maximum time for which the forward signal can be ON, from the outbound end.
Use the following command to program Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer:
7101-1-DS1-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
7101-2-DS1-DS1-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
7101-*-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer is 15 secs.
The DSP (Digital Signaling Processor) device will send the forward tone for this timer and will expect backward signal
within this timer. If no backward signal is received during this time, a timeout condition will occur in which case, an alert
signal will be sent to the ETERNITY ME Card Master, error tone be issued to the calling party and a clear forward signal
will be sent on the line.
Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer (T2)
This timer signifies the maximum time between two out going forward signals. During this time the forward tone will
remain OFF. If the outbound end does not send a forward signal for this time, the inbound end will interpret it as per its
condition and shall take action accordingly.
Use the following command to program Forward Tone Maximum Off Timer:
7102-1-DS1-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
7102-2-DS1-DS1-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
7102-*-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
Where,
ISDN PRI Variant Meaning
1 ATT_4ESS
2 ATT_SESS
3 AUSTRALIA
4 DMS
5 NET5
6 NTT_INS64
7 SWV_HONG_KONG
8 US_NI12
Matrix
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Forward Tone Maximum Off Timer is 24 seconds. This timer will be less than the Incoming R2
register timeout timer programmed by the inbound end.
Maximum Compelled Cycle Time (T3)
This timer signifies the maximum time within which one Compelled signalling cycle should end.
Use the following command to program the Maximum compelled cycle time:
7103-1-DS1-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
7103-2-DS1-DS1-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
7103-*-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Total Call Set Up Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Maximum Compelled Cycle Time is 15 secs.
Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals (T1A)
Backward signals A-3, A-4, A-6 and A-15 are pulsed to the outbound end. Pulse duration of these signals vary from
country to country.
Use the following command to program Pulse duration for pulsed signals:
7104-1-DS1-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
7104-2-DS1-DS1-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
7104-*-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Tolerance is fixed at +/-25ms.
By default, the Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals is 150ms.
Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer (T1B)
This timer signifies the time for which the outbound end waits for the pulsed signal. If the pulsed signal is not received
during this time, the compelling signalling is considered to be complete.
Use the following command to program the Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer:
7105-1-DS1-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
7105-2-DS1-DS1-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
7105-*-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer is 15 secs.
First Forward Tone Wait Timer
This timer signifies the minimum time between receipt of line seizure signal and first forward signal.
Use the following command to program first forward tone wait timer:
7106-1-DS1-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
7106-2-DS1-DS1-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
7106-*-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
First forward tone wait timer is from 08 to 24 seconds.
By default, the First Forward Tone Wait Timer is 15 seconds.
Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
This timer signifies the minimum time for which the forward/backward signal should persist on the line to be recognized
as a forward/backward signal by the receiving end.
Use following command to program Minimum MF Signal Persist timer:
7107-1-DS1-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
7107-2-DS1-DS1-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
7107-*-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Minimum MF Signal Persist timer is from 001 to 255 ms.
Matrix
By default, Minimum MF Signal Persist timer is 20 ms.
DNIS END Type (Outbound)
This parameter is applicable only when the DNIS length is set= 99 (i.e variable). The outbound end indicates end of DNIS
using a group I tone or using time out.
Use following command to program to set DNIS END Type (outbound) for DS1 port:
7108-1-DS1-End of DNIS
7108-2-DS1-DS1-End of DNIS
7108-*-End of DNIS
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
End of DNIS is from 00, 11 to 15.
00 indicates End of DNIS as time out.
01 to 15 indicates group 1 tone to declare End of DNIS.
By default, DNIS End Type (Outbound) is 15.
DNIS End Type (Inbound)
This parameter is applicable only when the DNIS length is set = 99 (i.e variable). The inbound end indicates end of DNIS
using a Group I tone or using time out.
Use following command to program DNIS End Type:
7109-1-DS1-DNIS End Type
7109-2-DS1-DS1-DNIS End Type
7109-*-DNIS End Type
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
DNIS End Type is from 00, 11 to 15.
00 indicates End of DNIS as time out.
01 to 15 indicates group 1 tone to declare End of DNIS.
By Default, DNIS End Type (Inbound) is 15.
ANI Send Position (Outbound)
This parameter signifies the number of DNIS digits after which to send ANI. As such ANI is sent on receiving the
backward tone 'Send next digit' or send next ANI digit. If send next ANI tone is received then this parameter is not
applicable. But if same tone is used by the inbound end to request next ANI digit and next DNIS digit then ANI is sent
after the number of digits as set in this parameter.
Use following command to program the ANI Send Position:
7110-1-DS1-ANI Send Position
7110-2-DS1-DS1-ANI Send Position
7110-*-ANI Send Position
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI Send Position is from 00 to 99.
By default, ANI Send Position is 00.
Is ANI Available (Outbound)
This parameter indicates the Group A tone (received from the inbound tone) that should be interpreted as a question by
the inbound end asking the outbound end whether the outbound end has ANI digits to be sent.
Use following command to program Is ANI Available (Outbound):
7111-1-DS1-Is ANI Available (Outbound)
7111-2-DS1-DS1-Is ANI Available (Outbound)
7111-*-Is ANI Available (Outbound)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Is ANI Available (Outbound) is Group A tone from 00 to 15. If no question by the inbound end, set this parameter to 00.
By default, Is ANI Available is '05'.
Positive Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound)
This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone that the outbound end will send to the inbound end as a response to Is ANI
Available tone from the inbound end. The tone defined in this parameters indicates the Group 1 tone with which the
Outbound end will respond to the inbound end to indicate that it has ANI digits to be sent.
Use the following command to program the Positive Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound):
7112-1-DS1-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
Matrix
7112-2-DS1-DS1-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
7112-*-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Positive Response to Is ANI Available is a Group 1 tone from 01 to 15.
By default, Positive Response to Is ANI Available is 01.
Negative Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound)
This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone that the outbound end will send to the inbound end as a response to Is ANI
Available tone from the inbound end. The tone defined in this parameter indicates the Group 1 tone with which the
Outbound end will respond to the inbound end to indicate that it does not have ANI digits to be sent.
Use following command to program the Negative Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound):
7113-1-DS1-Negative Response to Is ANI Available
7113-2-DS1-DS1-Negative Response to Is ANI Available
7113-*-Negative Response to Is ANI Available
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Negative Response to Is ANI Available is a Group 1 tone from 01 to 15.
By default, Negative Response to Is ANI Available is 10.
ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone used to signify end of ANI digits with Presentation Allowed.
Use the following command to program the End of ANI with Presentation Allowed (Outbound):
7114-1-DS1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
7114-2-DS1-DS1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
7114-*-ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound) is a Group 1 tone from 00, 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this
parameter to 00.
By default, ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound) is 15.
ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone used to signify end of ANI digits with Presentation Restricted.
Use the following command to program the End of ANI with Presentation Restricted (Outbound):
7115-1-DS1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
7115-2-DS1-DS1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
7115-*-ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound) is a Group 1 tone from 00, 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this
parameter to 00.
By default, ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound) is 00.
DNIS Digit Length (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the number of DNIS digits that are expected by the Inbound end to indicate the Called party
number during MFC R2 signaling.
Use following command to program the DNIS Digit Length:
7116-1-DS1-DNIS Digit Length
7116-2-DS1-DS1-DNIS Digit Length
7116-*-DNIS Digit Length
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
DNIS Digit Length is from 01 to 99.
By default, DNIS Digit Length is 99.
DNIS Digit length (01 to 98) will be expected by the inbound end. (Practical value would be 01 to 10)
DNIS Digit length 99 indicates DNIS length is variable. Further action is taken after timeout or on receipt of I-15. Refer
parameter 'DNIS End Type (Inbound)'.
ANI Request Position (Inbound)
The inbound end may request/may not request ANI digits. It may request ANI digits after receiving first DNIS or after
receiving second DNIS or even after receiving all the DNIS digits.
Matrix
Use following command to program the number of DNIS digits after which ANI digits should be requested by the inbound
end:
7117-1-DS1-ANI Request Position
7117-2-DS1-DS1-ANI Request Position
7117-*-ANI Request Position
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI Request Position is from 00, 01 to 99.
ANI Request Position=00 indicates Never request ANI digits.
ANI Request Position=01 to 98 indicates Request ANI digits on receipt of these many DNIS digits.
ANI Request Position = 99 indicates Request after receiving all the DNIS digits (complete DNIS).
By default, ANI Request Position is 99.
ANI Length (Inbound)
This parameter signifies the number of ANI digits that would be expected by the inbound side as Calling Party Number
during MFC R2 signaling. This parameter at the inbound side guides the inbound register to switch from requesting ANI
digits back to requesting DID digits.
Use following command to program ANI Length (Inbound):
7118-1-DS1-ANI Length
7118-2-DS1-DS1-ANI Length
7118-*-ANI Length
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI Length = 00 to 99.
By default, ANI Length is 99.
ANI Length=00 indicates ANI is not sent by the Outbound end.
ANI Length = 99 indicates ANI Length is variable. If ANI length is variable, the logic waits for End of ANI from the
outbound side. The inbound end will sense for I-12 and I-15. I-12 is used to signify that no ANI digits are available
whereas I-15 is used to signify end of ANI digits. Some countries like China use I-15 to signify both the events viz. End of
ANI and no ANI digits available.
Ask ANI (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to ask the outbound end whether it has ANI digits to be sent.
This parameter is also known as Request ANI Category.
Use following command to program the ASK ANI available:
7119-1-DS1-ASK ANI
7119-2-DS1-DS1-ASK ANI
7119-*-ASK ANI
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ASK ANI Available is from 00 or 01 to 15.
If no such tone is sent by the inbound end, set this parameter to 00. For India, this should be set to 04
By default, Ask ANI (Inbound) is '05'.
Positive Response to Ask ANI (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the Group 1 forward tone to be received by the inbound end from the outbound which would
indicate that Outbound end has ANI digits to be sent. This parameter is also known as ANI category.
Use following command to program Positive Response to Ask ANI:
7120-1-DS1-Positive Response to Ask ANI
7120-2-DS1-DS1-Positive Response to Ask ANI
7120-*-Positive Response to Ask ANI
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Positive Response to Ask ANI is from 01 to 15.
This cannot be zero. This is because; Is ANI Available request would be made by the inbound end only if the country
supports this protocol. In such event, Is ANI Available request will be responded to.
For e.g., In India I-1 or I-10 is sent by the Outbound end. In Kuwait, I-6 is sent.
By default, Positive Response to Ask ANI is 01.
Negative Response to Ask ANI (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the Group 1 forward tone to be received by the inbound end from the outbound which would
indicate that Outbound end has ANI digits to be sent. This parameter is also known as ANI category.
Matrix
Use following command to program Negative Response to Ask ANI:
7121-1-DS1-Negative Response to Ask ANI
7121-2-DS1-DS1-Negative Response to Ask ANI
7121-*-Negative Response to Ask ANI
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Negative Response to Ask ANI is from 01 to 15.
This cannot be zero. This is because; Is ANI Available request would be made by the inbound end only if the country
supports this protocol. In such event, Is ANI Available request will be responded to.
For e.g., In India I-1 or I-10 is sent by the Outbound end. In Kuwait, I-6 is sent.
By default, Negative Response to Ask ANI is 10.
ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the Group I tone that the inbound end should expect from the outbound end to consider End of
ANI digits with an information that the Presentation of ANI by the outbound end is allowed.
Use following command to program the ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed:
7122-1-DS1-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
7122-2-DS1-DS1-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
7122-*-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed is 00 or 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this parameter to 00. For e.g. India uses
A-4, China uses A-1, etc.
By default, ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed is 15.
ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted (Inbound)
This parameter specifies the Group I tone that the inbound end should expect from the outbound end to consider End of
ANI digits with an information that the Presentation of ANI by the outbound end is Restricted.
Use following command to program the ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted:
7123-1-DS1-ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted
7123-2-DS1-DS1-ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted
7123-*-ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted is 00 or 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this parameter to 00. For e.g. India
uses A-4, China uses A-1, etc.
By default, ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted (Inbound) is 00.
Ordinary Subscriber
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is an Ordinary
Subscriber. This signal is sent in response to Calling Party Category signal Request from the inbound end.
Use following command to program the Ordinary Subscriber:
7124-1-DS1-Ordinary Subscriber
7124-2-DS1-DS1-Ordinary Subscriber
7124-*-Ordinary Subscriber
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Ordinary Subscriber is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Ordinary Subscriber is 01.
Priority Subscriber
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is a Priority
Subscriber. This signal is sent in response to Calling Party Category signal Request from the inbound end.
Use following command to program the Priority Subscriber:
7125-1-DS1-Priority Subscriber
7125-2-DS1-DS1-Priority Subscriber
7125-*-Priority Subscriber
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Priority Subscriber is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Priority Subscriber is 02.
Matrix
Maintenance Equipment
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is maintenance
equipment.
Use following command to program the Maintenance Equipment:
7126-1-DS1-Maintenance Equipment
7126-2-DS1-DS1-Maintenance Equipment
7126-*-Maintenance Equipment
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Maintenance Equipment is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Maintenance Equipment is 03.
Operator
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is Operator.
Use following command to program the Operator:
7127-1-DS1-Operator
7127-2-DS1-DS1-Operator
7127-*-Operator
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Operator is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Operator is 05.
Pay Phone
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is Pay Phone
(Coin box).
Use following command to program the Pay Phone:
7128-1-DS1-Pay Phone
7128-2-DS1-DS1-Pay Phone
7128-*-Pay Phone
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Operator is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Pay Phone is 00.
Data Transmission
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the call is a Data Call.
Use following command to program the Data Transmission:
7129-1-DS1-Data Transmission
7129-2-DS1-DS1-Data Transmission
7129-*-Data Transmission
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Data Transmission is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Data Transmission is 06.
Interception Operator
This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the call is from Interception
Operator. This is used in Singapore.
Use following command to program the Interception Operator:
7130-1-DS1-Interception Operator
7130-2-DS1-DS1-Interception Operator
7130-*-Interception Operator
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Interception Operator is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Interception Operator is 00.
Send next Digit (N+1)
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request next digit, be it ANI digit or DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send next Digit:
7131-1-DS1-Send Next Digit
Matrix
7131-2-DS1-DS1-Send Next Digit
7131-*-Send Next Digit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send next Digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
For e.g. India uses A-1 to signify event 'Send DNIS Digit'.
By default, Send Next Digit is 01.
Send last but one Digit (N-1)
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request last but one digit i.e. N-1 digit, be it ANI digit or
DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send last but one Digit:
7132-1-DS1-Send Last But One Digit
7132-2-DS1-DS1-Send Last But One Digit
7132-*-Send Last But One Digit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Last But One Digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
For e.g. India uses A-9 to signify event 'Send last but one digit'.
By default, Send Last But One Digit (N-1) is 02.
Send last but two digit (N-2)
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request last but two digit i.e. N-2 digit. Be it ANI digit or
DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send last but two digit:
7134-1-DS1-Send Last But Two Digit
7134-2-DS1-DS1-Send Last But Two Digit
7134-*-Send Last But Two Digit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Last But Two Digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
For e.g. India uses A-7 to signify event 'Send last but two digit'.
By default, Send Last But Two Digit (N-2) is 07.
Send last but three Digit (N-3)
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request last but three digit i.e. N-3 digit. Be it ANI digit or
DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send Last But Three Digit:
7135-1-DS1-Send Last But Three Digit
7135-2-DS1-DS1-Send Last But Three Digit
7135-*-Send Last But Three Digit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send last but three digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
For e.g. India uses A-8 to signify event 'Send last but three digit'.
By default, Send Last But Three Digit is 08.
Address-Complete, Change over to reception of Group B signals
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform the inbound end that the incoming register at the
inbound end needs no additional address digit and is about to go over to transmission of a group B signal conveying the
status of the equipment at the subscriber at the inbound end.
Use following command to program the Address-Complete, Change over to reception of Group B signals:
7136-1-DS1-Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals
7136-2-DS1-DS1-Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals
7136-*-Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals is 03.
Matrix
Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used by the inbound end to request Calling Party Category from the
outbound end. This tone also informs the outbound end to change to reception of Group C signal. This signal is used in
Mexico.
Use following command to program the Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C:
7137-1-DS1-Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
7137-2-DS1-DS1-Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
7137-*-Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Calling Party Category and change to Group C is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C is 00.
Congestion in National Network
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform the congestion at the inbound end.
Use following command to program congestion in the National Network
7138-1-DS1-Congestion in National Network
7138-2-DS1-DS1-Congestion in National Network
7138-*-Congestion in National Network
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Congestion in National Network is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Congestion in National Network is 04.
Send Caller Party's Category
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request calling party category.
Use following command to program the Send caller party's category:
7139-1-DS1-Send Caller Party Category
7139-2-DS1-DS1-Send Caller Party Category
7139-*-Send Caller Party Category
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Caller Party Category is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
For e.g. India uses A-7 to signify event 'Send last but two digit'.
By default, Send Calling Party's Category is 05.
Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform the inbound end that the incoming register at the
inbound end needs no additional address digit, but will not send Group B signals. Also charge the call on answer.
Use following command to program the Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions of Group B signals:
7140-1-DS1-Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
7140-2-DS1-DS1-Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
7140-*-Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Address-Complete, Charge Set-up Speech Conditions is 06.
Repeat DNIS digits from beginning
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform the outbound end to send all the DNIS digits from the
beginning.
Use following command to program the repeat DNIS digits from beginning of Group B signals:
7141-1-DS1-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
7141-2-DS1-DS1-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
7141-*-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning is 00.
Matrix
Send Next ANI Digit
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request next (first) ANI digit.
Use following command to program the Send Next ANI Digit
7142-1-DS1-Send Next ANI Digit
7142-2-DS1-DS1-Send Next ANI Digit
7142-*-Send Next ANI Digit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Next ANI Digit is 00 or 01 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this parameter to 00.
Few countries use different tone to request next ANI digit and next DNIS digits.
For e.g. India uses A-4, China uses A-1, etc.
By default, Send Next ANI Digit is 05.
Special Information Tone
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the call cannot be made
through because of reasons beyond those which are considered by the Protocol and hence Special Information tone will
be sent to the calling party. The PBX should send only the Group B signal and then disconnect the call.
Use following command to program the Send Special Information Tone:
7143-1-DS1-Send Special Information Tone
7143-2-DS1-DS1-Send Special Information Tone
7143-*-Send Special Information Tone
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Special Information Tone is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Special Information Tone is 02.
Special Information Tone, and setup Speech Conditions
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the call cannot be made
through because of reasons beyond those which are considered by the Protocol and hence Special information tone will
be sent to the calling party and request the outbound end to setup speech conditions. In this case, the PBX will connect
the calling party to the voice message of the PBX informing the caller that the call cannot be connected. This is required
in countries like Argentina. This is same as a condition 'Call rejected, No indication of cause'. This signal is also used in
India to inform the caller that the called party's number is changed and the caller should contact the Help desk of the
Service Provider.
Use following command to program the Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Condition:
7144-1-DS1-Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions
7144-2-DS1-DS1-Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions
7144-*-Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Special Information Tone, and Setup Speech Conditions is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions is 02.

Subscriber line busy
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the called subscriber is busy.
Use following command to program the subscriber line busy:
7145-1-DS1-Subscriber Line Busy
7145-2-DS1-DS1-Subscriber Line Busy
7145-*-Subscriber Line Busy
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber Line Busy is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscriber Line Busy is 03.
Subscriber line free, charge
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the called subscriber is free
and the call is to be charged on answer.
Use following command to program the subscriber line free, charge:
7146-1-DS1-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
7146-2-DS1-DS1-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
7146-*-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
Where,
Matrix
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber Line Free, Charge is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscriber Line Free, Charge is 06.
Subscriber line free, No charge
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the called subscriber is free
but the call is not to be charged on answer. This signal permits nonchargable calls without the need for transferring "no
charge' information by line signals.
Use following command to program the subscriber line free, no charge:
7147-1-DS1-Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge
7147-2-DS1-DS1-Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge
7147-*-Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge is 07.
Congestion
This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform that congestion is encountered after changeover
from Group-A to Group-B signals.
Use following command to program Congestion:
7148-1-DS1-Congestion
7148-2-DS1-DS1-Congestion
7148-*-Congestion
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Congestion is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Congestion is 04.
Unallocated Number
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the number received is not in
use.
Use following command to program the Unallocated Number:
7149-1-DS1-Unallocated Number
7149-2-DS1-DS1-Unallocated Number
7149-*-Unallocated Number
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Unallocated Number is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Unallocated Number is 05.
Subscriber's line out of order
This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the called subscriber's line is
out of order
Use following command to program the subscriber's line out of order:
7150-1-DS1-Subscriber's Line out of Order
7150-2-DS1-DS1-Subscriber's Line out of Order
7150-*-Subscriber's Line out of Order
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber's Line out of order is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscribers Line Out of Order is 08.
Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
This parameter specifies the Group B backward tone used to inform the outbound end that the call is rejected but there is
no indication of cause.
Use following command to program the Call rejected, No indication of cause:
7151-1-DS1-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
7151-2-DS1-DS1-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
7151-*-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Matrix
Reject Call due to R2MF Tone is from 00 to 15.
By default, Reject Call due to R2MF Tone is 00.
Alternative Answer Tone
This parameter specifies the Group B backward tone used to inform the outbound end that the call is accepted and the
speech path is made through. This is same as A-6. This is required in few countries like Czech Republic.
Use following command to program the Alternative Answer Tone:
7152-1-DS1-Alternative Answer Tone
7152-2-DS1-DS1-Alternative Answer Tone
7152-*-Alternative Answer Tone
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Alternative Answer Tone is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Alternative Answer Tone is 00.
Changed Number (Announcement on line)
This parameter specifies the Group B backward tone used to inform the outbound end that the number dialed by the
calling party is changed. However, this parameter will be rarely used. Please note that VM should be assigned for this
feature.
Use following command to program the Changed Number (announcement on line):
7153-1-DS1-Changed Number (announcement on line)
7153-2-DS1-DS1-Changed Number (announcement on line)
7153-*-Changed Number (announcement on line)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Changed Number (announcement on line) is from 00, 01-15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Changed Number (announcement on line) is 00.
Send next ANI digit (group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone to request next (even first) ANI digit from the outbound end.
Use following command to program the Send next ANI digit (Group C):
7154-1-DS1-Send Next ANI Digit (Group C)
7154-2-DS1-DS1-Send Next ANI Digit (Group C)
7154-*-Send Next ANI Digit (Group C)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send next ANI digit (Group C) is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
By default, Send Next ANI Digit (Group C) is 00.
Request transition to Group A and restart from first DNIS (Group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone to restart from first DNIS and request transition to Group A.
Use following command to program the Request transition to Group A and restart from first DNIS.
7155-1-DS1-Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS
7155-2-DS1-DS1-Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS
7155-*-Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not
applicable.
By default, Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS is 00.
Address completed, change to reception of Group B (Group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone used to signify Address completed, change to reception of Group B
signal.
Use following command to program the Address completed, change to reception of Group B signal:
7156-1-DS1-Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal
7156-2-DS1-DS1-Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal
7156-*-Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Matrix
Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not
applicable.
By default, Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal is 00.
Congestion (Group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone used to signify Congestion
Use following command to program the tone for Congestion:
7157-1-DS1-Congestion
7157-2-DS1-DS1-Congestion
7157-*-Congestion
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Congestion is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Congestion is 00.
Request transition back to Group A, and sent next DNIS (Group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone used to signify request transition back to group A, and send next
DNIS.
Use following command to program the tone for request transition back to group A, and send next DNIS signal:
7158-1-DS1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS
7158-2-DS1-DS1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS
7158-*-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Request transition back to group A, and send next DNIS is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not
applicable.
By default, Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS is 00.
Request transition back to Group A, and restart the last DNIS (Group C)
This parameter specifies the backward group C tone used to signify request transition back to group A, and repeat the
last DNIS
Use following command to program the tone for request transition back to group A, and repeat the last DNIS:
7159-1-DS1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS
7159-2-DS1-DS1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS
7159-*-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS is from 00, 01 to 15. Use '00' when this parameter is not
applicable.
By default, Request Transition Back to Group A and Restart the Last DNIS is 00.
CD Bits
This parameter indicates the default values of C and D bits when the ETERNITY transmits line signals.
Use following command to program the CD Bits for DS1 port:
7161-1-DS1-CD Bits
7161-2-DS1-DS1-CD Bits
7161-*-CD Bits
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, CD Bits is 1.
CD Bits Meaning (Binary Value)
0 00 (C=0, D=0)
1 01
2 10
3 11
Matrix
Note:
The C and D bits received during an IC call are ignored by the ETERNITY.
Invert Bit A
This parameter signifies that A-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit A for the DS1 port:
7162-1-DS1-Invert Bit A
7162-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit A
7162-*-Invert Bit A
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit A is 0.
Invert Bit B
This parameter signifies that B-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit B for the DS1 port:
7163-1-DS1-Invert Bit B
7163-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit B
7163-*-Invert Bit B
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit B is 0.
Invert Bit C
This parameter signifies that C-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit C for the DS1 port:
7164-1-DS1-Invert Bit C
7164-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit C
7164-*-Invert Bit C
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit C is 0.
Invert Bit D
This parameter signifies that D-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit D for the DS1 port:
7165-1-DS1-Invert Bit D
7165-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit D
7165-*-Invert Bit D
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit D is 0.
Invert Bit A Meaning
0 Don't Invert
1 Invert
Invert Bit B Meaning
0 Don't Invert
1 Invert
0 Don't Invert
1 Invert
Invert Bit D Meaning
0 Don't Invert
1 Invert
Matrix
E1 Metering Bit
This parameter signifies the bit used by the network to signal metering pulses.
Use following command to program the E1 Metering Bit for the DS1 port:
7166-1-DS1-E1 Metering Bit
7166-2-DS1-DS1-E1 Metering Bit
7166-*-E1 Metering Bit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, E1 Metering Bit is 1.
E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
This timer signifies the minimum time for which the metering bit should change to be recognized as a genuine metering
pulse subject to E1 Metering Pulse Maximum timer. All changes occurred for time less than this timer will be ignored. This
parameter is applicable only for E1 lines with R2 MFC signaling.
Use following command to program the Metering Pulse Minimum timer for the DS1 port:
7167-1-DS1-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
7167-2-DS1-DS1-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
7167-*-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
E1 Metering Pulse Minimum timer is from 20ms to 1000ms.
By default, E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer is 150ms.
Clear Back Signal
This parameter signifies the signal used
to signify that the called party has disconnected the line first. This is indicated in two ways viz. Release guard signal or
forced release signal. This is country dependent.
Use following command to program the Clear Back Signal for the DS1 port:
7168-1-DS1-Clear Back Signal
7168-2-DS1-DS1-Clear Back Signal
7168-*-Clear Back Signal
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Clear Back SignalMeaning
1Release Guard (Ab=1)
2Forced Release (Bb=0)
By default, Clear Back Signal is 1.
Release Timer
This timer signifies the time for which the clear back signal should persist on the line to be recognized as a genuine clear
back signal. This is also known as Clear Back timer.
Use following command to program the Release Timer for the DS1 port:
7169-1-DS1-Release Timer
7169-2-DS1-DS1-Release Timer
7169-*-Release Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Release Timer is from 20ms to 1000ms.
By default, Release Timer is 400 ms.
E1 Metering Bit Meaning
0 None
1 Bit-A
2 Bit-B
3 Bit-C
4 Bit-D
Matrix
Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
This timer signifies the time for which the outbound end waits for seizure acknowledgment from the inbound end after
sending the line seizure signal. On expiry of this timer, Clear forward signal is sent by the outbound end. Alarm will be
generated. This timer is applicable only when acting as Outbound end.
Use following command to program Line seizure acknowledge wait timer:
7170-1-DS1-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
7170-2-DS1-DS1-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
7170-*-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer is from 0001 to 9999 milli seconds.
By default, Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer is 200ms.
Release Guard Timer
This timer signifies the time for which inbound register waits before declaring the channel idle (sending idle signal) when
clear forward line signal is received from the outbound end. This timer is also applicable for Forced Release signal. This
timer is applicable only when acting as Inbound end.
Use following command to program Release Guard Timer:
7171-1-DS1-Release Guard Timer
7171-2-DS1-DS1-Release Guard Timer
7171-*-Release Guard Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
DS1 Release Guard Timer is from 0000 to 9999 milliseconds.
By default, Release Guard Timer is 200ms. This timer depends on the speed of switching and processing.
E&M on DS1 port
Step 1
ETERNITY supports E&M protocol on DS1 port. Both E1 E&M and T1 E&M can be used as options of signaling type
of DS1 port. To use E&M on DS1, follow the steps mentioned below:
Select the signal type/line type as ISDN_E1_ E&M or ISDN_T1_ E&M.
Use following command to program signaling type/ Line type of a DS1:
6105-1-DS1-Line Type
6105-2-DS1-DS1-Line Type
6105-*-Line Type
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, signaling type/line type of a DS1 is 1.
Assign E&M Feature template to DS1 using following command
Step 2
Use Following command to assign E&M Feature Template to DS1 Port
6004-1-DS1-Template Number
6004-2-DS1-DS1- Template Number
6004-*- Template Number
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Line Type Meaning
1 ISDN_E1_PRI
2 ISDN_T1_PRI
3 ISDN_E1_CAS
4 ISDN_T1_RBS
5 ISDN_E1_QSIG
6 ISDN_T1_QSIG
7 ISDN_E1_E&M
8 ISDN_T1_E&M
Matrix
Template Number is 01 to 50.
By default, Template 01 is assigned to DS1.
Now proceed to program other parameters for E&M on DS1 using following commands:
Step 3
Use following command to select B Bit Value
7191-1-DS1-Code
7191-2-DS1-DS1-Code
7191-*-Code
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, the Code is 1 (Same as A bit)
Step 4
Use following command to program B Bit Value
7192-1-DS1-B Bit Value
7192-2-DS1-DS1- B Bit Value
7192-*- B Bit Value
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
B bit value can be 0 or 1.
By default, B bit value is 0.
Step 5
Use following command to program CD Bit Value
7193-1-DS1-CD Bit Value
7193-2-DS1-DS1-CD Bit Value
7193-*- CD Bit Value
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
CD bit value can be 1 or 3.
By default, CD bit value is 1.
Step 6
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit A for the DS1 port:
7162-1-DS1-Invert Bit A
7162-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit A
7162-*-Invert Bit A
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit A is 0.
Step 7
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit B for the DS1 port:
7163-1-DS1-Invert Bit B
7163-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit B
7163-*-Invert Bit B
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Code Meaning
1 Same as A bit
2 Fixed Value
Invert Bit A Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
0 Do not invert
Matrix
By default, Invert Bit B is 0.
Step 8
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit C for the DS1 port:
7164-1-DS1-Invert Bit C
7164-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit C
7164-*-Invert Bit C
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit C is 0.
Step 9
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit D for the DS1 port:
7165-1-DS1-Invert Bit D
7165-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit D
7165-*-Invert Bit D
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit D is 0.
Step 10
Use the following command to program the line build out parameters of a DS1:
6162-1-DS1-Code
6162-2-DS1-DS1-Code
6162-*-Code
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, code is 8 = -22.5 dB or equidistance.
Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
This command is used to enable Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on DS1 trunk. Refer chapter Gateway
Application-Answer Signaling for more details.
Step 1
Use following command to set flag for 'Gateway Application-Answer Signaling' on DS1 trunk:
6119-1-DS1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling flag
1 Invert
Invert Bit C Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
Invert Bit D Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
Code Meaning
1 0 - 133 ft.
2 133 - 266 ft.
3 266 - 399 ft.
4 399 - 533 ft.
5 533 - 655 ft.
6 -7.5 dB or equidistance
7 -16 dB or equidistance
8 -22.5 dB or equidistance
Matrix
6119-2-DS1-DS1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling flag
6119-*- Gateway Application-Answer Signaling flag
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Gateway Application-Answer Signaling flag is 'disable'.
Step 2
Use following command to program DTMF digits string to be dialed as Gateway Application-Answer Signaling:
6120-1-DS1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
6120-2-DS1-DS1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
6120-1-DS1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
DTMF Digits allowed for DTMF string are from (0 - 9), *, #, A, B, C, D.
Maximum 4 DTMF digits can be programmed. If you need less than 4 digits for DTMF string, terminate the command
using #*.
To program #, *, A, B, C, D use following codes:
By default Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String is 'CCC'.
Relevant Topics:
3. T1 RBS Parameters 858
4. T1 Maintenance 852
10. Logical Partition 616
DS1 PERFORMANCE REPORT AS ON 14-04-2009(Thu) AT 09:57
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:03
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Digit Code for programming through command
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
* **
# ##
Matrix
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETERNITY V08R05 Page : 1
Online report:
=X=X=
Matrix
Dynamic Lock
Whats this?
A feature by which the station user can change the Toll Control Level (Office) and avoid misuse of local and long
Distance dialing in his absence without any interference by the System programmers.
How it works?
ETERNITY supports 4 levels of Toll Control. Level 0, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3.
A user can change the Toll Control level of the station based on his requirement.
The SA can change the Toll Control level of the station based on requirement remotely.
The changing of Toll Control level by the user operates with a 4-digit password. Each station user has his personal
password called User Password.
Toll Control level of the station can be changed in two ways (1). Manually (change the Toll Control level of the station
when required by dialing the required code and explicitly change it back when the requirement is over) and (2).
Automatically (the system changes the Toll Control Level to default Toll Control Level after a set time).
If the Toll Control Level is 0, then Toll control is time based. The outgoing call is allowed/denied as per the External
List assigned as Allowed List and Denied List for that time of the day by the SE.
If the Toll Control Level is 1, 2, 3 the outgoing call is Allowed/Denied as per the External List assigned as Allowed and
Denied Lists, to each level.
ETERNITY will check the Toll control as per dynamic lock level when dynamic locked station uses Redial and Auto
Redial feature.
How to use it?
Program the Timer
Where,
Minutes is 00 to 99.
By default, Minutes is 00.
Minutes specify delay in minutes after which the station changes the Toll Control Level. If it is programmed as 00, then
the user has to explicitly change the toll control level by dialing the required code.
Change Toll Control Level
Where,
2 Dial 142-User Password-Minutes. Confirmation tone
2 Dial 141-User Password-Level. Confirmation tone
Level Meaning
0 Timezone wise assigned AL and DL shall apply.
1 AL and DL assigned for Dynamic Toll Control Level 1 shall apply.
ETERNITY
Open
Open
Lock
Lock
Matrix
By default, meaning of lock level setting as per following table:
From SA Mode
Program the Timer
Where,
Minutes is 00 to 99.
By default Minutes is 00.
Change Toll Control Level
Where,
By default, meaning of lock level setting as per following table:
How to program?
Program the Allowed and Denied lists for different Toll Control Levels.Refer the topic Station Basic Feature Template for
more details.
Important Points:
The default password needs to be changed for changing the Toll Control Level by the user. Please refer the topic
User Password for more details on changing the password.
Relevant Topics:
1. Toll Control 877
4. Auto Redial 262
5. Last Number Redial 601
=X=X=
Level By default
0 Allow all calls
1 Lock STD + ISD Calls
2 Lock ISD Calls
3 Lock all calls
2 Enter SA Mode. Dial tone
3
Dial 1072-002-Flexible Number-2-
Minutes.
Confirmation tone
2 Enter SA Mode. Dial tone
3 Dial 1072-002-Flexible Number-1-Level. Confirmation tone
Level Meaning
0 Timezone wise assigned AL and DL shall apply.
Level By default
0 Allow all calls
1 Lock STD + ISD Calls
2 Lock ISD Calls
3 Lock all calls
Matrix
E&M Connectivity
Whats this?
E&M connectivity feature of ETERNITY offers seamless connectivity in PLCC network and also in between various
communication products like PBX, Router, Lease Line, etc.
E&M interface is widely used interface to connect such diverse equipment. For example, in a PLCC network, number
of PLCC EPAX needs to be connected. As shown in the figure 1 of PLCC network, number of EPAXs are connected
with each other through E&M tie lines.
Say, an existing PBX capacity needs to be expanded beyond the configuration limit of a PBX. Installing one more PBX
and connecting both the PBXs through E&M interfaces can get us the desired expansion.
Four different applications of E&M connectivity are shown below:
Figure 1: E&M Connectivity on PLCC-Network
How it works in PLCC network?
E&M interface is achieved using a ETERNITY ME Card E&M. An E&M port of ETERNITY-PLCC EPAX has dual
personality, both of a subscriber and a trunk. An E&M port works like a subscriber interface for any incoming call to it and
works like a trunk interface when any subscriber makes an outgoing call through it. However, please note that a trunk line
cannot be connected to an E&M port. Also a subscriber cannot be connected to an E&M port.

PLCC-EPAX (SID-61)
PLCC-EPAX
(SID-70)
PLCC-EPAX
(SID-52)
PLCC-EPAX
(SID-34)
PLCC-EPAX (SID-51)
E&M1 E&M2 E&M3
E1 E2 En
E1
E2
En
E&M1
E&M3
E&Mn
E&Mn
E&M1 E&M2 E&M3 E&Mn
E&M2
E1 E2 En
E1
E2
En
E&Mn
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
E&Mn
E&M1
Matrix
Incoming call on an E&M port in PLCC network:
When any subscriber of PLCC EPAX with SID-51 grabs an E&M2 port, he gets dial tone of SID-61. Now he can call any
subscriber of SID-61 and use features like priority, conference, etc. just like a normal subscriber would do. However, this
E&M port needs to be programmed for the same.
Outgoing call using E&M port in PLCC network:
When any subscriber of PLCC EPAX-34 dials network access code (as per programming) and dials SID say 52, an
E&M1 port is grabbed (as it is programmed for the same). Now he can call any subscriber of SID-52 and establish
speech. However, this E&M port needs to be programmed as any other normal trunk like enabling the port, programming
the dial type, etc.
All E&M ports can be put together in one single group depending on the requirement. A separate access code can be
assigned to it. This makes the operations easy. Now the subscribers have at least two different access codes for making
outgoing calls using trunk lines and other for making outgoing calls using E&M tie lines.
PBX EXPANSION (2-SYSTEMS)
Figure 2: Two PBXs are connected using E&M interface.
In the above figure,
E&M1 to E&Mn are E&M lines between two PBX systems.
Figure 3: PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
PSTN PSTN
PBX-A PBX-B
T1
T2
Tn
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
S1 S2 Sn S1 S2 Sn
T1
T2
Tn
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
PSTN PSTN
PBX-A
(8x8x8)
PBX-B
(16x8)
PBX-C
(24x8)
T1
T2
Tn
S1 S2 S8 S1 S2 S16
2001 2002 ....... 2008
S1 S2 S24
T1
T2
Tn
3001 3002 ........ 3016
4001 4002 ........... 4024
E&M5
E&M6
E&M7
E&M8
E&M5
E&M6
E&M7
E&M8
E&M1 ............. E&M8
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
E&M4
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
E&M4
Matrix
Figure 4: Two PBX systems located far from each other connected to each other using E&M connectivity.
How it works?
E&M interface is achieved using an ETERNITY ME Card E&M. An E&M port of ETERNITY-PLCC EPAX has dual
personality: both of a station and a trunk. An E&M port works like a station interface for any incoming call to it and works
like a trunk interface when any station makes an outgoing call through it. However, please note that a trunk line cannot be
connected to an E&M port. Also a SLT or DKP cannot be connected to an E&M port.
Incoming call on an E&M port
When any station of PBX B grabs an E&M port, he gets dial tone of PBX A. This port of PBX A behaves as a SLT port.
Now he can call another station, grab a trunk, or use a feature like raid, etc. just like a normal station would do. However,
this E&M port needs to be programmed as any other normal station. Features like Class of Service, Toll Control, etc. will
apply to this port, if programmed.
Outgoing call using E&M port
When any station from PBX A makes an outgoing call through an E&M port, he dials trunk access code. The E&M port
behaves as trunk interface and gives the station, the dial tone of PBX B. Now he can dial any station of PBX B or grab a
trunk line of PBX B to make a call or use any feature depending on the station programming done by the SE of PBX B.
Hence the E&M port of PBX A should be programmed as any other normal trunk like enabling the port, programming the
dial type, etc.
All E&M ports can be put together in one single group or few groups depending on the requirement. A separate access
code can be assigned to it. This makes the operations easy. In such case the stations can have at least two different
access codes for making outgoing calls, one for making outgoing calls using trunk lines and other for making outgoing
calls using E&M lines. Generally, E&M connectivity is used to expand the PBX capacity or connect two or more remotely
located PBXs. This forms a network of PBXs. The requirement is that, so formed network should work as one Group.
This is commonly known as Closed User Group. Please refer Closed User Group (CUG) and Closed User Group-With
Exchange ID for more details.
How to program?
Please refer Station Basic Feature Template, Station Advanced Feature Template, Trunk Feature Template for more
details.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
PSTN
PBX-A
S1 Sn
T1
T2
T3
2001 2099
E&M
PSTN
PBX-B
S1 Sn
T1
T2
T3
2001 2099
E&M
E&M
Router
E&M
Router
Lease
circuit,
VSAT
Matrix
E&M Features
Whats this?
The E&M port of ETERNITY has dual personality: both of a station and a trunk. An E&M port works like a station interface
for any incoming call and works like trunk interface when any station makes an outgoing call through it. However please
note that a trunk line cannot be connected to an E&M port. Also a SLT or DKP cannot be connected to the E&M port. The
Trunk Feature Template, Station Basic Feature Template, Station Advanced Feature Template can be assigned to the
E&M port accordingly. In addition, the E&M ports are to be programmed for parameters like Status of the port, Seizure
Type. Dial Type, Pulse Dial Ratio, Release Type, etc. Timers like Idle Wait Timer-Flash Timer-Pause Timer are also to be
programmed for the E&M port. The significance of all the parameters and Timers of the E&M port is explained below.
While an E&M call is established, the call process consists of three phases over the E&M Port as shown below:
Seizure
Dial
Release
All the types are programmable using different options. Matrix also programming of Seizure Pulse, Release Pulse and
Wink Pulse.
Status of the Port
An E&M port can individually be enabled or disabled. This can be useful when a particular port goes out of order and will
be stopped from being allocated to a user.
Service Provider ID
Program a Service Provider for the E&M.
Seizure Types
Matrix supports five types of seizure:
Immediate
Immediate + Wink
Seizure Pulse
Seizure Pulse + Wink
Express
Immediate
OG Call:
While making an out going call, when the station user of PBX-A seizes the E&M Port of PBX-A, status of the M wire
of its E&M port will go high indicating that it has seized the E&M line. There will not be any signaling over the E wire
of E&M Port during seizure.
IC Call:
While receiving an incoming call over the E&M port-B of PBX-B. PBX-B will be ready to receive digits as soon as it
detects high state on its E wire. There will not be any signaling over the M wire of E&M Port of PBX-B while
receiving an IC call.
Seizure Dial Release
M
E
PBX-A PBX-B
Rx
Tx
SA
SB
M
E
SA
SB
Rx
Tx
-48V
0V
Immediate Start
Matrix
Immediate with Ack:
OG Call:
If this seizure type is programmed, while making an OG call by seizure of 'E&M port', the "M" wire will go high
immediately.
The remote end will acknowledge this by making its "M" wire high, which in turn activates (high) "E" wire of the E&M
Port.
On sensing high signal on "E" wire, the ETERNITY will start out dialing the DTMF/pulse digits.
IC Call:
On detecting high signal on "E" wire of the E&M Port, the ETERNITY will consider it to be an incoming call seizure
and hence it will immediately make its "M" wire high, which will allow the remote end to dial out the DTMF/Pulse digits.
Call Disconnection:
If the parameter 'Release type' is programmed as "Status Change" and for this type of seizure, the "M" wire at remote end
goes Low for some call condition, the call will be disconnected. (Orientation Type of E&M Port is programmed as Station).
For e.g. "M" wire at remote end will go 'Low' in following conditions:
Remote end user dials invalid number and doesn't hang up on getting error tone:
Remote end user dials valid station number and after conversation remote end hangs up first.
Remote end user dials valid number and station doesn't reply but the remote party doesn't disconnect the call.
Remote end has made 'Orientation Type' of E&M Port as 'Trunk' and for IC call all the Stations programmed in trunk
landing group are busy and also second call is not allowed to station user, the ETERNITY will disconnect the call after
expiry of RBT timer, by making "M" wire 'Low'.

Immediate + Wink:
The wink pulse width is programmable and is programmed as wink pulse width timer.
Method of seizing the E&M tie line using Immediate + Wink Start for OG and IC call is described below:
OG Call:
While making an out going call when the PBX-A initiates seizure (grab), state of the M wire of the E&M port of PBX-
A will go HIGH.
Acknowledging this E&M port of PBX-B will send Immediate + Wink signal over its M wire when PBX-B is ready to
receive digits.
On receiving the acknowledgment in form of Wink signal on E wire of E&M port of PBX-A before Wait Wink Timer
expires, it will consider it as successful seizure. Digits will be dialed out from E&M port.
If Wink is not received from PBX-B within Wait Wink Timer, PBX-A will drop the call.
IC Call:
While receiving an incoming call over E&M port of PBX-B, on its M wire it will send Wink signal to the PBX-A, which
has initiated the seizure (grab).
The Wink signal will be sent by the PBX-B when it is ready to receive the digits from the PBX-A.
PBX-A will identify the seizure successful, when it receives continuous LOW Wink signal over E wire of its E&M
Port before Wait Wink Timer expires.
-48V
0V
Wink Pulse
Wink
Pulse
Width
M
E
PBX-A PBX-B
Rx
Tx
SA
SB
M
E
SA
SB
Rx
Tx
-48V
0V
-48V
0V
Wink
Pulse
Matrix
Seizure Pulse:
Seizure Pulse is programmable. Various time periods T1, T2 and T3 are programmed as required. These are
programmed as Seizure pulse. Default Seizure Pulse Time, T1= 230 msec, T2=80 msec, T3=80 msec for some E&M
feature templates.
Method of seizing the E&M tie line using Seizure Pulse for OG and IC call is described below:
OG Call:
While making an out going call from E&M port of PBX-A, it will send seizure pulse over the M wire of its E&M port to
seize the line.
PBX-A will not make any signaling over the E wire of the E&M port of the PBX-A during seizure.
IC Call:
While receiving an incoming call over the E&M Port the PBX-B it will detect for valid seizure pulse over the E wire of
its E&M port.
Seizure Pulse + Wink
OG Call:
When seizure type, Seizure Pulse + Wink is set for an E&M Port, while making an OG call Seizure Pulse (as
programmed) will be sent on the M wire of E&M Port and will start Wait Wink Timer and expect Wink from
remote.
On receiving valid Wink pulse from remote end within Wait Wink Timer, digits will be dialed out on E&M Port.
If valid Wink pulse is not received from the remote end, digits will be dialed out on expiry of Wait Wink Timer.
IC Call:
When Seizure type, Seizure Pulse + Wink is set for an E&M Port, on detecting valid Seizure pulse (matching with
programmed value of seizure) on E wire of the E&M Port, the E&M Port will send Wink pulse (of programmed value)
on M wire, and the call will be considered to be present.
Express:
When Caller from PBX A is making call to PBX B, the Express Signaling works as shown below:
Caller from PBX A presses the desired DSS key to seize the E&M tie line.
Till the DSS key is pressed by caller the signal on the M wire of E&M port-A will send continuous high signal to E&M
port-B. When the destination answers, the caller will release the DSS key as he has successfully seized the line. When
-48V
0V
T1 T3
T2
M
E
PBX-A PBX-B
Rx
Tx
SA
SB
M
E
SA
SB
Rx
Tx
-48V
0V
Seizure Pulse
M
E
PBX-A PBX-B
Rx
Tx
SA
SB
M
E
SA
SB
Rx
Tx
-48V
0V
Till DSS Key is Pressed
Matrix
the caller releases the DSS key, signal on the M wire of the E&M Port-A, and hence E wire of the E&M port-B will go
low.
Dial Type
Digits can be dialed over E&M tie line by two methods:
Tone
Pulse
When dial type is Pulse, the dialed digits will be sent on the M wire of the E&M port of the originating side and will be
received over the E wire of the E&M port of the terminating side.
When dial type is Pulse, the pulse dial ratio can be set to any of the following values:
10PPS, 1:2
10PPS, 2:3
10PPS, 1:1
20PPS, 1:2
20PPS, 2:3
20PPS, 1:1
If the dial type is Tone, the DTMF signals will be sent on the Tx of the E&M port of the originating side and it will be
received over the Rx of the E&M port of the terminating side.
When Seizure type is Express, the caller can make call by pressing the DSS key.
When seizure type is Immediate, the PBX seizes the tie line and the system will start the pause timer. On expiry of
the pause timer the PBX sends the digits to the remote PBX.
When seizure type is Seizure Pulse+Wink, on receiving Wink signal from the terminating end the originating side
(which initiates seizure) will start the pause timer and on expiry of pause timer it will start sending digits.
When seizure type is Seizure Pulse, the originating PBX system will start the pause timer after sending the seizure
pulse and on expiry of the seizure pulse it will send digits to the terminating end.
Following table shows status of the M wire of an E&M Port, while making OG call and Receiving IC call.
Release Type
Matrix supports four methods for release of the E&M call based on, which end will release the call as well as release
pulse width:
None (Should be programmed for express type of seizure)
Release Pulse
Status change (Status change of M wire)
None:
This option is programmed when seizure type is Express.
It is advisable to keep the release type as None in case the protocol doesnt support any signaling for disconnecting
the E&M port. Because if such E&M port is involved in Trunk-to-Trunk call the Trunk Inactivity Timer will be started
based on this.
Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer will be started if the E&M port programmed with Release type None is involved in
trunk to trunk call, and also the another trunk is TWT or another E&M Port is with None as release type.
Release Pulse:
If this type is selected, the specific Pulse width of Release pulse will be used to disconnect the call. This pulse width is
programmable, as shown below:
E&M Seizure Type
M Wire's Status after seizure
and in conversation while
making OG call
M Wire's Status when an IC
call initiates
M Wire's status on answer
and in conversation while
receiving IC call
Immediate High Low High
Immediate + Wink High Wink High
Seizure Pulse Low Low Low
Seizure Pulse + Wink Low Wink Low
Express Low Low Low
Immediate with Ack High High High
-48V
0V
Release Pulse Width
Matrix
Call can be disconnected by either party by sending Release Pulse.
For Example: SLT 2001 is connected to PBX-A and SLT 3001 is connected to PBX-B.
SLT 2001 user goes ON-Hook.
If SLT user 2001 goes on-hook the PBX-A will send Release Pulse over the M wire of the E&M port of the PBX-A.
PBX-A will release its E&M port.
The Release pulse sent by PBX-A will be received and detected on the E wire of the E&M port of the PBX-B. Hence
the PBX-B will release its E&M port.
SLT3001 user goes ON-Hook.
If SLT user 3001 goes on-hook the PBX-B will send Release Pulse over the M wire of the E&M port of the PBX-B.
PBX-B will release its E&M port.
The Release pulse sent by PBX-B will be received and detected on the E wire of the E&M port of the PBX-A.
Hence the PBX-A will release its E&M port.
Status Change: Program this option from Release Type, if status change of M wire is to be considered for release of
E&M call.
Other parameters of Trunk Feature Template are as described below:
Orientation Type:
Select the option of Orientation Type from:
Trunk
Station
Tie-line
When Orientation = Trunk, the port will be regarded as trunk. All the trunk related parameters will be applicable.
When Orientation = Station, the port will be regarded as station. All the station related parameters will be applicable.
made through it.
Note for programming:
Access code is not required on the E&M port when it is programmed as Station (But in case of BRI Port the access
code is required when orientation = Network, because ISDN Terminals connected on the BRI Port can be called
using the Access code of the BRI Port).
Maximum OG Pulse Digit Count
The count gives the maximum number of digits that can be dialed out to make a call. When dialing out the number, if the
number of digits dialed are more than this count, the port which is used for dialing these numbers is released
automatically.
Compander Control Signal (CCS)
To improve the quality of speech transmission, PLCC networks use a signal called Compander Control Signal (CCS).
The PLCC network expects this signal from the PBX when speech is established. The ETERNITY provides this facility.
The ETERNITY sends CCS signal to the PLCC panel. CCS signal can be sent to the PLCC panel in the following cases:
When the E&M port is used as an Endpoint: The system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while making an outgoing
call through the E&M port or when a call is received at the E&M port.
When the E&M port is used for Transit Exchange: The system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while there is a
M
E
PBX-A PBX-B
Rx
Tx
SA
SB
M
E
SA
SB
Rx
Tx
-48V
0V
Release Pulse
Matrix
DTMF Detection
Consider Two PBXs are connected using the E&M interface. The E&M ports have dual personality. It behaves like a
station for an incoming call and trunk for an outgoing call. When any station from PBX A makes an outgoing call through
the E&M port, the E&M port of PBX A behaves as a trunk interface and gives the station the dial tone of PBX B. The
station user of PBX A can dial a station of PBX B or grab a trunk Line of PBX B. If the dial type of the E&M port of PBX A
is programmed as Pulse type, all the digits dialed by the station user are received twice by the E&M port of PBX B (Pulse
and Tone). The DTMF detection for SLT port can be disabled and stopped receiving redundant digits.
Idle Wait Timer
This timer signifies the time after which the codes could be simply (Station Numbers or Station Numbers with Exchange
ID) dialed over the E&M trunk. This timer is useful in two conditions:
Consider a situation in which forced disconnection is used. Suppose two exchanges A and B are connected through
E&M trunk. Station 2002 of PBX A is talking to station 3001 of PBX B over the E&M line. Station 2001 of PBX A calls
station 3001 of PBX B and finds it to be busy. Station 2001 is allowed to use forced disconnection feature. He issues
forced disconnection command. The PBX A disconnects the Station 2002. It then waits for E&M Idle Wait Timer and
then dials 3001 over the E&M trunk.
Consider another situation. When a Station of PBX A goes On-Hook, PBX A sends a release signal over the E&M
trunk to PBX B. In turn PBX B sends a release signal to PBX A as an acknowledgment. The E&M Idle Wait Timer
programmed in PBX A does not allow any other station of PBX A to grab the E&M trunk. Similarly, E&M Idle Wait
Timer programmed in PBX B does not allow any station of PBX to grab the E&M trunk.
Flash Timer
In pulse dialing, codes are dialed in pulses. A Flash key is generally used to dial this code. Flash is breaking the loop
current for 83ms to 999ms. Flash Timer signifies the time period for which the loop current breaks.
Flash Timer programmed in the E&M feature template assigned to the E&M port is insignificant, when seizure type is
programmed as Seizure Pulse/Seizure Pulse + Wink.
When seizure type is programmed as Seizure Pulse/Seizure Pulse + Wink and Flash is dialed, the Seizure Pulse
will be sent on the E&M port (Value of the seizure pulse will be same as programmed in the assigned E&M feature
template).
Pause Timer
It is the time for which the system waits before dialing the outside number after grabbing the E&M trunk. Some times it is
observed that after grabbing the Trunk, the user does not get the dial tone immediately. When user himself is dialing the
number, he waits for the dial tone and then dials the number. But this is not so when the system dials the number. Now if
there is no pause time and if the PSTN is of old type then it is possible that the system may dial out the number before
getting the dial tone. This may result in dialing a wrong number. To avoid this situation, ETERNITY offers pause timer.
Ring Timer
It is the time for which the station connected to ETERNITY rings. At the end of this period the station stops ringing. This
timer is useful in the situation explained below: If station connected to PBX A gets an incoming call, it starts ringing. At
this time if user is busy with some other important work, than he can wait for some time and then attend the call. But if he
attends the call, after the ring is stopped call cannot be attended and only Error Tone is heard. It can be programmed
upto 255 seconds.
How to program?
Please refer the topic E&M Feature Template for details on programming range, default values and assigning these
features to individual E&M.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Matrix
E&M Feature Template
What's this?
The E&M Feature Template is a set of general features that completely define the features specific to the E&M. The
ETERNITY offers 50 such Template, each of which can be programmed as per the requirement. However, by default the
system provides all the E&M Feature Template with commonly used values. An E&M template is assigned to all E&M
port.
How it works?
The E&M feature template contains features of the E&M like:
Status-To Enable/Disable the E&M port.
Service Provider ID-To assigns a service provider to an E&M trunk.
Seizure Type-To programs the Seizure type for an E&M. e.g. Select 'Immediate with Ack' parameter for OG and
IC calls using E&M port. Program the release type is programmed as "Status Change" when this seizure type is
used for Call Disconnection.
Orientation Type: To program from trunk, station or tie line.
Wait Wink Timer: The time up to which system will wait for the acknowledgment in form of Wink signal on "E" wire
of E&M port of PBX, to consider it as successful seizure.
Seizure pulse width T1: It is the time period of first ON period of the 'seizure pulse'.
Seizure pulse width T2: It is the time period of second ON period of the 'seizure pulse'.
Seizure pulse width T3: It is the time period of third ON period of the 'seizure pulse'.
Wink pulse width timer: It is one of the seizure type and is period of the 'seizure pulse'.
Dial Type: To program the dial type for E&M.
Pulse Dial Ratio-To program the Pulse Dial Ratio for an E&M.
Release Type-Program suitable type.
Release Pulse Width Timer-To program release pulse width timer for E&M.
Maximum OG Pulse Digit Count-To program the maximum Out Pulse Digit Count from the E&M.
Compander Control Signal (When End Point)-To Enable/Disable CCS when E&M is used as End Point.
Compander Control Signal (When Transit Exchange)-To Enable/Disable CCS if E&M is used for Transit calls.
DTMF Detection-To Enable/Disable DTMF detection on an E&M.
Idle Wait Timer-To program the Idle Wait Timer for the E&M.
Flash Timer-To program the Flash Timer for the E&M.
Pause Timer-To program the Pause Timer for the E&M.
Forced Maturity Timer-To program forced maturity timer for E&M. This is the time period after which, the system
will consider the call as matured.
Ring Timer-To program the Ring Timer for the E&M.
Prefix String-To program for the Prefix String for E&M.
IDP: This parameter is set to a value (millisecond) for decoding the pulse digits. It is set to suitable value, which
can be detected by the device on remote end. The IDP will be used while using E&M Signaling on DS1 Port. For
this, the E&M template with suitable value of IDP should be assigned to the DS1 port. This value of programmed
IDP, will also be applicable while out dialing pulse digits from E&M Ports.
Gateway Application-Answer Signaling: Configure following parameters for the template corresponding to E&M
port. Refer chapter 'Gateway Application-Answer Signaling' for more details.
Use?: Select '1' if Gateway Application-Answer Signaling feature is required on trunk and '0' if feature is not
required.
DTMF String: Configure this with DTMF digits to be dialed while using Gateway Application-Answer Signaling.
DTMF Digits, allowed for DTMF string are from (0 - 9), *, #, A, B, C, D. To program #, *, A, B, C, D use following
codes:
Refer chapter E&M Features for details about some of the parameters mentioned above.
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
* **
# ##
Matrix
Category: In some countries, calls from VoIP to Public Network (PSTN, PLMN) are not allowed. To meet such
regulatory requirements, this parameter is programmed on the trunk as 1 to 3. Select Category '1' if the trunk port is
to be interfaced with PSTN or PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network). Select Category '2' if the leased line is to be
terminated in the trunk port. Select Category '3' if the port is to be used to interconnect two PBXs, e.g. QSIG. Refer
chapter Logical Partition for more details. Default is '3' for all templates.
How to program?
Programming an E&M Feature Template
Use the following command to program the feature in an E&M Feature Template:
6002-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
6002-2-Template Number-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
6002-*-Parameter Number-Code
Where,
Parameter Number is 01 to 27.
How to assign default values to an E&M Feature Template?
Use the following command to default an E&M Feature Template:
6001-1-Template Number
6001-2-Template Number-Template Number
6001-*
Where,
Following table shows all the E&M Feature Template programmed by default.
How to assign an E&M Feature Template to an E&M?
Use the following command to assign an E&M Feature Template to an E&M:
6003-1-E&M-Template Number
6003-2-E&M-E&M-Template Number
6003-*-Template Number
Where,
E&M is from 001 to 128.
By default, Template 01 is assigned to the E&M.
Use Following command to assign E&M Feature Template to T1E1PRI Port
6004-1-T1E1PRI-Template Number
6004-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Template Number
Where,
T1E1PRI is from 1 to 8.
Matrix
By default, Template 01 is assigned to T1E1PRI.
Relevant Topics:
1. E&M Features 517
4. DS1 Trunks 475
=X=X=
Matrix
E1 Maintenance
Whats this?
The E1 Maintenance consists of Error Counts (Performance Statistics), Alarms and Loop Back Tests.
This is as per standards like G.704, G.706 and G.732.
G.775 is also considered for detection of defect conditions like Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF), Alarm
Indication Signal (AIS), etc.
To elaborate, the Digital line can have transmission errors. All the errors will not generate an Alarm. Few severe errors
generate Alarms. However, all the errors are logged in the System Fault Log.
The SNIIC (Subscriber Network Interface Integrated Circuit), is used to interface E1 line to ETERNITY. It supports
error counters listed in the table given below.
Each error detected by the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI/port is sent to the master in the form of an event.
The master counts these errors and prepare a statistical record if the condition matches. For e.g. Severely Errored
Seconds Count is incremented when one OOF (Out of Frame) event reaches the master or more than 320 framing
errors reach the master.
This statistical record is updated and maintained by the master.
Facility-Associated and Non-Facility Associated Signaling:
Signaling on ISDN PRI trunks consists of messages transported over the D-Channel, which is channel 24 on T1
interface or channel 16 on E1 interface. This signaling can be provided by two methods:
FAS: The D channel can provide signaling for the other B channels on the same interface. This is called Facility
Associated Signaling (FAS).
NFAS: The D channel can provide signaling for the other B channels on more than one interface. This is called
No facility Associated Signaling (NFAS). The signaling arrangements, the capability is supported to designate a D
channel on one interface to be a backup to a D channel on another interface in case of failure. This is called D
channel backup.
Error Counts (Performance Statistics)
Error Counters supported by SNIIC in E1 Mode.
Following parameters form the statistical record. This can be generated in the form of a report as shown below:
Out Of Frame (OOF)-Out of Frame is the occurrence of a particular density of framing error events. OOF is declared
when three consecutive frame alignment signals have been received with an error. OOF ends when;
In frame N, the FAS is correct.
In frame N+1, the FAS is absent.
Errored Frame Alignment Signal This counter is incremented on receipt of each errored FAS.
E-bit This counter is incremented when either E1 or E2 bit is set in the transmit frame.
CRC-4 Error This counter is incremented when the received frame has CRC-4 errors.
Line Code violation Error This counter is incremented when a line code violation error occurs.
Excessive Zeros Error This counter is incremented when excessive zeros are received or Line code
violation error occurs.
Positive Slip Buffer This counter is incremented every time a positive slip occurs.
Negative Slip Buffer This counter is incremented every time a negative slip occurs.
Performance Parameter Seconds/Count
Error Seconds 000 to 255
Bursty Errored Seconds 000 to 255
Severely Errored Seconds 000 to 255
Severely Errored Framing Seconds 000 to 255
Unavailable Seconds 000 to 255
Positive Slip Seconds 000 to 255
Negative Slip Seconds 000 to 255
Loss of Frame Count 000 to 255
Line Errored Seconds 00000 to 65535
Excessive Zeroes Error Count 000 to 255
CRC-4 Error Count 00000 to 65535
Matrix
In frame N+2, the FAS is present and is correct.
Errored Seconds-It is defined as a second with one of the following:
One FAS Errors.
One or more OOF defects.
One or more Slip events.
A detected AIS defect.
Bursty Errored Seconds
Without CRC-It is a second with:
More than one but less than 320 Errored FAS.
No OOF.
No SES.
No AIS.
With CRC-It is a second with:
More than one but less than 320 CRC errors.
No OOF.
No SES.
No AIS.
Severely Errored Seconds
With CRC-It is a second with one of the following:
832 or more CRC error events.
one or more OOF defects.
Without CRC-It is a second with one of the following:
2048 or framing errors.
Slips are not included. This is not incremented during Unavailable seconds.
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS)-It is a second with either one or more OOF defects or a detected AIS
defect.
Unavailable Seconds-It is defined as a second in which E1 service is unavailable. An unavailable state is declared at
the onset of 10 consecutive severely errored seconds and is cleared on onset of 10 consecutive seconds with no
severely errored seconds.
Positive Slip Seconds-It is defined as a second in which a frame is repeated to account for frequency drift between ET2
and the network.
Negative Slip Seconds-It is defined as a second in which a frame is deleted to account for frequency drift between ET2
and the network.
Loss of frame count-Loss of Frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous loss of signal or OOF. LOF is cleared
after 10 seconds of continuous no loss of signal or OOF.
Line Errored Seconds-It is a second in which one or more than one line code violation error occurs.
Excessive Zeroes Error Count-This counter is incremented when excessive zeroes are received on the line or when
line code violation error occurs.
CRC-6 Error Count-This counter is incremented when a CRC-6 Error is detected.
Alarms
Alarms are indicated on the LEDs of the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI.
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI has four LEDs viz. L1 to L4.
L1 and L2 indicate alarms for T1E1PRI-1 whereas L3 and L4 indicate alarms for T1E1PRI-2.
During normal conditions, the LED blinks green (1 sec ON, 1 sec. OFF).
RED Alarm:
This alarm is generated if Loss of Signal persists for 2.5 seconds.
This is indicated by flashing the LED Red (500ms ON, 500ms OFF).
Matrix
The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as RED Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
This alarm is cleared when the signal is acquired back and persists for 10 seconds.
The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as RED Alarm Cleared <Slot No.> <Port
No.> at HH:MM:SS.
RED Alarm is declared if
Received signal is more than 20 dB or 40 dB below nominal for at least 1ms.
32 consecutive zeroes are received (As per CISCO, LOS is declared if more than 10 consecutive zeroes are
received).
Loss of frame alignment occurs.
When RED Alarm is declared, Yellow Alarm is sent to the far end within 12ms of detection of LOS.
YELLOW Alarm:
This Alarm is also known as Remote Alarm Indication or Distant Alarm.
This Alarm is generated when Yellow Alarm is sent by the far end (Yellow Alarm is sent by the far end to indicate that
it has lost the incoming signal).
Yellow Alarm is declared when the signal corresponding to Yellow Alarm persists for 0.5 seconds.
This is indicated by flashing the LED Orange (500ms ON, 500ms OFF).
The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as YELLOW Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
This alarm is cleared when No Yellow Alarm signal persists for 0.5 seconds.
The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as YELLOW Alarm Cleared <Slot No.>
<Port No.> at HH:MM:SS. Yellow Alarm is declared if:
Bit 3 of the receive NFAS is 1 on two consecutive occasions.
Yellow Alarm is cleared if:
Bit 3 of the receive NFAS is 0.
If equipment is connected in downstream (Drop and insert mode i.e. NT mode) then on receipt of Yellow Alarm, a
Blue Alarm will be sent on the port, which is configured in NT mode.
BLUE Alarm:
It is also known as Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).
This alarm indicates that the upstream equipment connected to the ETERNITY has lost receiving its incoming signal.
This alarm is generated when AIS persists for 2.5 seconds.
This is indicated by flashing the LED Red (1 sec. ON, 1 sec. OFF).
The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as BLUE Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
This alarm is cleared when clearance of AIS is detected for continuous 10 seconds.
The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as BLUE Alarm Cleared <Slot No.>
<Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
Blue Alarm (AIS) is declared if unframed all ones signal is received as a string of 512 bits containing fewer than three
zero bits.
When BLUE Alarm is declared, Yellow Alarm is sent to the downstream equipment connected to the ETERNITY.
Port1 Status:
Port2 Status:
LED Card Status Port Status
L1 Green Flashing @1 Sec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is established
L1 Red Flashing @1 Sec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is not established LOS-Red alarm detected.
L1 Red Flashing @500 msec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is not established LBFA -Loss of Basic Frame Alignment.
L1 Red Flashing @100 msec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is not established- LMFA loss of multiframe alignment.
L1 Yellow Flashing @1 Sec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is established -RAI (Yellow Alarm) is detected.
L2 Green Port 1 achieves CRC4 synchronization.
L2 Yellow Port1 does not achieve CRC4 synchronization.
L2 Green Flashing @1 Sec. Port 1 achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected.
L2 Yellow flashing @1 Sec. Port 1 doesnt achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected.
L2 Green Steady Port2 Layer 1 is established.
L3 Red Flashing @1 Sec. Port 2 Layer is not established-LOS-Red alarm detected.
L3 Red Flashing @500 msec. Port 2 Layer is not established-LBFA-Loss of Multi Frame Alignment.
Matrix
Loop Back Tests:
Please refer the topic DS1 Trunks for more details.
Relevant Topic:
1. DS1 Trunks 475
=X=X=
L3 Red Flashing @100 msec. Port 2 Layer is not established-LMFA Loss of Multi Frame Alignment.
L3 Yellow Flashing @1 Sec. Port 2 Layer is established-RAI (Yellow Alarm) is detected.
L4 Green Port 2 achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue alarm) is detected.
L4 Yellow Port2 doesnt achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected.
Matrix
Emergency Detection and Reporting
Whats this?
Whenever an Emergency call is made by a station, it is detected by the system and reported to the Operator. This is
useful when a distantly located station of ETERNITY dials emergency number. In such cases, the Operator may not be
aware of the emergency and when the Police reaches the site, the operator might be put in a jeopardize condition.
How it works?
When any station makes an emergency call the system informs the Operator by giving a ring till Alarm Ring Timer2.
If Operator is DKP then it will ring continuously an display an emergency message on the LCD. A typical message on
the LCD could be:
Here line 2 of LCD shows that there is an emergency condition at station 2001.
Once the OGTBG is assigned for dialing emergency number, the system searches for a free trunk in this OGTBG to
dialout the emergency number.
How to program?
Use the following command to enable/disable emergency reporting:
5110-Code
Where,
By default, Emergency Reporting is enabled.
Important Points:
Please note that no other feature access code should match with the feature access code of Emergency numbers.
However, an access code can be a subset of any other access code.
Relevant Topics:
1. Access Codes 225
5. Conflict Dialing 393
6. Alarms 245
=X=X=
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Emergency Dialing
What's this?
The ETERNITY supports dialing of Emergency number immediately without any blocking.
Toll control (Allowed denied list, Dynamic lock) will not bar dialing of the Emergency Number.
Emergency number dialing will be allowed to station, even if allotted Call Budget amount is consumed.
Automatic number translation logic will not be applied to the dialing of Emergency Number.
Call Duration Control (CDC) will not be applied on the dialing of Emergency Number.
Emergency Number table has 10 entries. Each entry of the table has 2 parameters viz. Emergency Number and
Outgoing Trunk Bundle group (OGTBG). When the number is dialed, it will be routed through the port programmed in
corresponding OGTBG.
Emergency Numbers are considered as access codes only and can be out dialed even in following cases:
In Off-Hook condition.
In Standby Mode of the station (after dialing Flash).
After grabbing the trunk line.(using Trunk access code or selective access)
During Busy, Error, Confirmation and Placed phases. Refer chapter Access Codes for all phases and for
Emergency Numbers for various countries.
SIM card is not present in the Mobile port.
Mobile port is not registered with any of the GSM network.
SIM PIN is not entered or incorrect SIM PIN is entered.
Even if Keypad of phone is locked.
Emergency Number will not be out dialed in following cases:
If Port from which number is to be routed (TWT, Mobile, T1E1PRI or BRI) is disabled.
If hardware related to dialing of Emergency number is not present.
If Emergency number is to be routed from ports T1E1PRI or BRI but the link is not established for that T1E1PRI or
BRI trunk.
If Emergency number is dialed during SE Programming mode
Emergency dialing will not work if Mains Power to the ETERNITY fails.
How to dial Emergency number?
Go Off-Hook
Dial Trunk Access Code-Emergency Number
For example:
Dial '0'-'112'
How it works?
Emergency Number will always be out dialed through the OTBG programmed for the emergency number dialed
except when Selective trunk access code/Selective Trunk Access DSS key, is used for grabbing the trunk where it will
be dialed through the trunk selected only.
As shown in the Table you can only program the Emergency numbers and OGTB Group at indices 6 to10 of the
Emergency Number table.
First five numbers 01 to 05 are pre-programmed as per region (e.g. USA or Australia) selected in the ETERNITY. This
will be useful when it is required that the emergency number should be routed to the particular trunk first i.e first it will
be tried to route through ISDN and than analog trunk or vice-versa.
The Emergency Number Table should be programmed in the system as shown below:
Default Emergency Number Table
Index Emergency Number OG Trunk Bundle Group
01 Uneditable (Blank or as per region selected) (Note1) 01 or as per region selected
02 Uneditable (Blank or as per region selected) 01 or as per region selected
06 01
07 01
Matrix
Note1:
The Emergency numbers are fixed as per the region where ETERNITY is installed.
For example,
If Region code is selected as USA, than Emergency Number Table in the system will be as given below:
If Region code selected is for Australia, than Emergency Number Table will be as given below:
How to program?
Emergency Numbers
Use following command to program Emergency Numbers:
3116-Index-Emergency Number-#*
Where,
Emergency Number is 8 digits max. using digits 0-9 only
OGTBG
Use following command to program OG Trunk Bundle Group (OTBG) for emergency numbers:
3117-Index-OG Trunk Bundle Group
Where,
Default emergency numbers and OTBG
Refer chapter Default Settings for default emergency numbers and OTBG for different region codes.
Important Points:
Where the Trunk access code conflicts with the Emergency Number, emergency number should be dialed after
dialing the trunk access code. i.e after dialing the trunk access code it should not wait for conflict timer before applying
the logic for TAC (Trunk Access Code). For e.g. trunk access code is 0 and emergency number is 000. (In Australia).
Now, if you dial '0', it will be considered as trunk access code and the logic for trunk access code will be applied.
Thus, where emergency number conflicts with the trunk access code, it is recommended to dial the trunk access code
first and than the emergency number i.e for above case user has to dial 0-000 for emergency number dialing.
08 01
09 01
10 01
01 911 25
02 112 01
03 01
04 01
05 01
Index Emergency Numbers OG Trunk Bundle Group
01 000 25
02 106 23
03 112 24
04 01
05 01
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
3. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
Matrix
External List
Whats this?
External List is a group of number strings. ETERNITY uses these lists to support seven different features viz. Toll Control,
Dynamic Lock, Call Budget, Call Duration Control, Call Taping, SMDR and Carrier Pre-Selection. Maximum of 24
external lists are supported by the ETERNITY. Each External List can house 999 numbers. Each number string can be
programmed up to 16 characters maximum.
Using the Number List for different features:
Association of External List with Toll Control:
When the number is dialed from a station, the ETERNITY compares the dialed number string with the number strings in
External List assigned to the station to check whether the number is allowed or denied from the station.
Association of External List with Dynamic Toll Control:
If the user changes the lock level and thereafter dials a number from his station, from the locked levels the ETERNITY
compares the dialed number string with the number strings in External List assigned to the station for the locked status.
Association of External List with Call Budget:
If the call budget of the station exhausts and thereafter the station dials a number, the ETERNITY compares the dialed
number string with the number strings in External List assigned to the station for the call budget exhausted status.
Association of External List with Call Duration Control:
If Call Duration Control feature is set on a station, the ETERNITY compares the dialed number string with the number
strings in External List for Call Duration Control (CDC) condition.
Association of External List with SMDR:
The system keeps tracks of the calls received and calls made by the numbers programmed in the External List
programmed as a SMDR filter.
Association of External List with Carrier Pre-Selection:
The system uses the External Lists for dialed number list and substitute number list of ANT.
Association of External List with Call Taping:
The system uses the External List for programming the numbers for incoming and outgoing call taping.
Also the default values will take care of features Dynamic Toll Control Level 0, 1, 2 and 3. The default external lists in the
system are as shown below:
Matrix
Default External Lists:
Where,
B is Blank.
How to program?
Step 1
Take a pen and a paper. Decide which of the above-mentioned seven features are to be used. Make the External List
accordingly.
Step 2
Use following command to program a number in an External List:
4302-List Number-Location Index-Number-#*
Where
List is from 01 to 24.
Location Index is from 001 to 999.
Number is a number string of maximum 16 digit long terminated with #*. The digits used are as given in Table below for
digits: 0-9, #, *, A, B, C, D, F, P, +.
Location
List-
01
List-
02
List-
03
List-
04
List-
05
....
List-
15
List-
16
List-
17
List-
18
List-
19
List-
20
List-
21
List-
22
List-
23
List-
24
001 B 00 0 00 B
Same
as
List
05
B B B 0 B 0 B 0 B 0
002 B 0 B B B B B B 1 B 1 B 1 B 1
003 B 1 B B B B B B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2
004 B 2 B B B B B B 3 B 3 B 3 B 3
005 B 3 B B B B B B 4 B 4 B 4 B 4
006 B 4 B B B B B B 5 B 5 B 5 B 5
007 B 5 B B B B B B 6 B 6 B 6 B 6
008 B 6 B B B B B B 7 B 7 B 7 B 7
009 B 7 B B B B B B 8 B 8 B 8 B 8
010 B 8 B B B B B B 9 B 9 B 9 B 9
011 B 9 * * * B B B * B * B * B *
012 B * # # # B B B # B # B # B #
013 B # F F F B B B F B F B F B F
014 B F B B B B B B B B B B B B B
015 B + B B B B B B B B B B B B B
: : B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
999 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
Special Digit Code
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
Dot (.) #9
Matrix
Use the following command to clear the number programmed in a list:
4302-List Number-Location Index-#*
Where,
List Number is from 01 to 24.
Location Index is from 001 to 999.
Step 3
Use the following command to default an External List:
4301-1-List Number
4301-2-List Number-List Number
4301-*
Where,
List Number is from 01 to 24.
Important Point:
For programming '.' use '#9' when SLT or DKP is used. But for dialing a number with '.' use '*'.
Relevant Topics:
1. Toll Control 877
2. Dynamic Lock 512
3. Call Budget 290
5. Call Taping 351
7. Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection 604
8. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
# ##
* **
Special Digit Code
Matrix
External Music
Whats this?
ETERNITY provides a facility to give external music to the users by way of connecting an external music source. It is
possible to give external music to the stations or external callers or both. For more details, please refer Music on Hold
(MOH).
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Matrix
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
Whats this?
Matrix ETERNITY supports an embedded FTP server which can be used for three purposes:
Uploading/Downloading System Software.
Uploading/Downloading System Configuration files.
Uploading/Downloading Call Record files (SMDR).
File Transfer Protocol (FTP), a standard Internet protocol, is the simplest way to exchange files between computers
on the Internet. Like the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), which transfers displayable Web pages and related
files, and the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), which transfers e-mail, FTP is an application protocol that uses
the Internets TCP/IP protocols. FTP is commonly used to transfer Web server for everyone on the Internet. Its also
commonly used to download program and other files to your computer from other servers.
As a user, you can use FTP with a simple command line interface (for example, from the Windows MS-DOS Prompt
window) or with a commercial program that offers a graphical user interface. Your Web Browser can also make FTP
requests to download programs you select from a Web page. Using FTP, you can also update (delete, rename, move
and copy) files on a server. You need to logon to an FTP server. However, publicly available files are easily accessed
using anonymous FTP.
How to use it?
Please refer topics Backup-System Configuration, Backup-SMDR and Backup-System Software for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Backup-System Configuration 276
2. Backup-SMDR 271
3. Backup-System Software 280
=X=X=
Matrix
Flash Timer
What is Flash?
Pulse dialing is a type of signaling in which codes (digits) are dialed in pulses. A hook switch or a Flash key is generally
used to dial this code. Technically, Flash is breaking the loop current for 200 milliseconds to 900 ms. Please note that
since this code is not simulated in standard DTMF convention, one cannot dial it in DTMF mode.
Flash timer signifies the time period for which the loop current breaks. Flash timer is programmable. Flash timer ranges
from 083 ms to 999 ms. By default, Flash Timer is 600 ms.
Where is it used?
Stations dial flash to use few PBX features and also to use few PSTN features. Flash is used in following cases:
While transferring a call from one station to another.
While making conference between few stations.
While toggling call between two stations.
While using call-waiting facility available from PSTN exchange.
Now a days, more number of basic service providers and different types of advanced electronic telephone exchanges
are prevailing. It is possible that one service provider interprets breaking of loop current for 300 ms as flash, other service
provider interprets breaking of loop current for 900 ms as flash and system interprets breaking of loop current for 600 ms
as flash. Hence if the system engineer sets the flash timer to 600 ms then he might not be able to use features provided
by the service provider interpreting 900 ms for flash.
To take care of this situation, ETERNITY offers Flexibility to program different flash timers for both stations and
trunks.
How to program?
Step 1
Please refer the topic SLT Hardware Template for more details on assigning flash timer to a SLT.
Step 2
Please refer the topic TWT Hardware Template for more details on assigning Flash Timer to E&M.
Step 3
Please refer E&M Feature Template for more details on assigning Flash Timer to an E&M.
Important Points:
Many times it happens that while transferring the call, the call either gets disconnected or is not transferred. This
happens due to mismatch of time for which the hook switch is pressed, if used for transferring the call hence it is
advisable to use Flash Key of the telephone instrument, instead of hook switch.
This problem may occur with Flash Key also, if the timer for the Flash Key on the telephone instrument and the flash
timer of the system are not set properly.
Few telephone instruments have flash timers set to 800 ms. In such case the call does not get transferred because
the flash timer of all stations is set at 600 ms by default. In such cases the flash timer of the station where the phone
is connected should be increased to 800 ms.
Relevant Topics:
4. E&M Features 517
=X=X=
Matrix
Flashing on Trunks
Whats this?
Trunk exchanges support many advanced features like call waiting, call forward etc. To use these features it is required to
dial codes during speech. The dialing of codes during speech do not create problem when you are dialing on the trunk
directly. (Please refer the topic Continued Dialing for more details). But with the PBX connected between the user and the
central office, the central office codes clash with PBX codes. This leads to difficulty in accessing CO features while in
speech. However, ETERNITY supports dialing codes on trunk when in speech to all codes from any extension. But it is
required to inform the PBX, prior to dialing some code on the trunk.
How to use it?
Example:
To use Call Waiting facility of service provider exchange from any station, perform following steps:
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Flashing on Trunk to a user.
Relevant Topics:
2. Flash Timer 539
3. Continued Dialing 394
=X=X=
3 Dial *. Feature tone stopped.
4 Dial Desired Code.
1 Dial Flash-*. This informs the system to pass following code.
2 Dial Flash-1. Speech with second call.
4 Dial Flash-1 Speech with first call.
6 Dial Flash-1 Speech with second call.
Matrix
Flexible Numbers
Whats this?
ETERNITY offers Flexibility to assign a code of your choice to access a station. This code is called Flexible number.
For example, to access first SLT having software port 001, one has to dial 2001. It is possible to change this code to
any other number of your choice.
ETERNITY offers two types of stations viz. SLT and DKP. The system loads default access codes to all the SLT and
DKP stations on first power ON. Later on the stations can be assigned default Flexible numbers using a command.
A typical table of default SLT station numbers looks like:
A typical table of default DKP station numbers looks like:
How to program?
Use following command to program the access code for a SLT station:
3101-1-SLT-Access Code-#*
3101-2-SLT-SLT-Access Code-#*
Where,
SLT is a 3-digit number from 001 to 512.
Access Code is maximum of 6 digits.
Use following command to clear the access code for a SLT:
3101-1-SLT-#*
3101-2-SLT-SLT-#*
3101-*-#*
Use following command to assign the default flexible number of a SLT:
3151-1-SLT
3151-2-SLT-SLT
3151-*
Where,
Use following command to program the access code for a DKP:
3102-1-DKP-Access Code-#*
3102-2-DKP-DKP-Access Code-#*
Where,
DKP is a 3-digit number from 001 to 128.
Access Code (flexible number) is maximum of 6 digits.
Software Port Access Codes
001 2001
002 2002
003 2003
: :
: :
512 2512
001 3001
002 3002
003 3003
: :
: :
128 3128
Matrix
Note:
The flexible number can be programmed up to 6 digits, however the SE is recommended to program flexible number of 4
or less than 4 digits only, while using EON45 with ETERNITY, otherwise the EON45 user will get truncated message on
the LCD display of EON45.
Use following command to clear the access code for a DKP:
3102-1-DKP-#*
3102-2-DKP-DKP-#*
3102-*-#*
Use following command to assign the default flexible number to a DKP:
3152-1-DKP
3152-2-DKP-DKP
3152-*
Important Points:
It is possible to have maximum of 6 digit flexible numbers.
It is possible to clear the flexible number of a station, range of station and all stations.
Flexible numbers are the codes dialed from dial phase to call another station. These flexible numbers should be
unique and should not match with either other SLT stations or DKP stations or any of the features available from the
dial phase.
Flexible number having common digits can be assigned to another station. Please refer Conflict Dialing for more
details.
Same flexible number cannot be assigned to two different stations.
Use flexible numbers for all the features used from User mode and SA mode. Software port numbers are to be used
only during for SE mode.
When the access code of a station is cleared; its flexible number becomes null or void.
If access code of a station is cleared, one cannot call that station. However the station with NULL flexible number can
make calls as usual.
Relevant Topics:
2. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
Matrix
Floor Service
Whats this?
In Enterprises, hospitals and other applications, all the rooms on one floor have common service rooms. Similarly,
another service room allotted for another floor. For example, Pantry, Zerox room, Fax room etc. The station users are
required to dial a code to call the concerned person in the room. It may be required that all the station users are given
common code say '38' to call the concerned person in the room.
Now, for critical requirement it is required that the call from a station user, should be placed to the service room of the
corresponding floor only i.e. if room number 2001 dials '38' then the call should go to 2010 (assigned for Fax Room) and
if 3001 dials '38' then the call should go to 3010 (assigned for Pantry services).
How to program?
Step 1: This feature is programmed by assigning a unique station group to 'Floor Service' feature for each floor. Please
refer topic Station Advanced Feature Template for assigning this feature.
Step 2: On each floor, a group of stations will be assigned same template where 'Floor Service' is enable (viz. assigned
station group other than '00').
Now, a group of all stations on one floor can dial access code '38' to place a call on Station Group for Floor Service.
Thus, if you program a single station in a station group, call will be placed on that station only.
Example:
Above programming is explained with following example:
Floor 1: Station users 3001 to 3010 should call to Station 3015 for any work related to Pantry services on this floor.
Floor 2: Station users 3101 to 3110 should call to Station 3115 for any work related to Pantry services on this floor.
Floor1:
Refer chapter Routing Group for commands 6502 and 6505.
Make Routing group = 01 with only one member '3015' and other Stations programmed as 'Null' .
Program the rotation method, as 'First station within the group'.
Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template for commands 6502 and 6505.
Assign Station advanced feature template number 05 to all DKP from 3001 to 3010 using command:
5604-2-001-010-05
Assign Floor Service feature to Routing Group 01 for template 05 using commands:
5602-1-05-14-01 where, feature number 14 is 'Floor Service' and 01 is routing group assigned for floor service.
Floor2:
Refer chapter Routing Group for commands 6502 and 6505.
Make Routing group = 12 with only one member '3115' and other Stations programmed as 'Null' .
Program the rotation method, as 'First station within the group'.
Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template for commands 6502 and 6505.
Assign Station advanced feature template number 15 to all DKP from 3101 to 3110 using command:
5604-2-101-110-15
Assign Floor Service feature to Routing Group 01 for template 05 using commands:
5602-1-15-14-01 where, feature number 14 is 'Floor Service' and 12 is routing group assigned for floor service.
Now, the users on first floor can dial Access Code '38' to contact Station number '3015' of Pantry on first floor.
The users on second floor can dial Access Code '38' to contact Station number '3115' of Pantry on second floor.
How to use?
From SLT:
Go off-hook.
Dial, Access Code '38'
From DKP:
Go off-hook.
OR
Matrix
Important Points:
Please refer separate manual for more details about Hotel Applications of this feature.
Relevant Topics:
4. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
Matrix
Follow Me
Whats this?
Make your calls follow you wherever you go.
After going to your co-workers desk if you desire to receive all your calls on his station, use this feature.
How to use it?
Example:
Your station number is 201. Your user password is 1212. Right now you are at station 203. You want to divert all your
calls to station 203. Dial 135-201-1212 from station 203.
Cancel Follow Me
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Follow Me to a user. The user should have Call Forward COS to
use Call Follow Me Feature.
Important Points:
The stations dial tone changes to feature tone if its calls are forwarded.
Multiple users can use Follow Me from the same station.
Follow Me can be overwritten. Station A sets Follow-Me on station B. After a period of time, he goes to station C and
he wishes to receive his call at station C. He can set Follow Me once again on station C.
Follow Me cannot be chained. If station A sets Follow Me to station B. And station B sets Follow Me on station C,
Follow Me of station A is automatically cancelled.
DND is given priority over Call Follow Me feature.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Forward 331
=X=X=
2 Dial 135-Station-User Password. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset of your station. Dial tone
Matrix
Forced Answer
Whats this?
This feature enables the caller to force the called station answer the call by making the destination stations speaker
OFF-Hook. This is useful when the called party is not responding to the call in spite of the station ringing continuously.
Now the caller can forcefully make the speaker OFF-Hook and come in speech with the called party.
This feature is helpful to managers who can simply call their secretary and deliver the message instead of waiting for
the secretary to answer their call.
How to use it?
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow forced answer to a user.
Important Points:
Forced Answer can be requested from both-SLT and DKP.
The destination must be DKP only.
The speaker LED glows when the DKP goes OFF-Hook.
The user can dial Flexible Number and 5 in a line or Flexible number and then 5 in RBT.
Forced Answer is not allowed from DID.
Forced Answer will also work when the called party is busy, but has free loops for the calls to land. The calling person
gets RBT and when he dials 5, he is in speech with called party. The party which was in speech with the called party
earlier is now in held state. On completion of the speech the called party is in speech with the held party.
Forced Answer is allowed when the destination is ringing or in two-way speech.
=X=X=
2 Dial Flexible Number. Ring Back Tone (If the called party is free).
3 Dial 5. RBT stops. Called Partys speaker goes OFF-Hook. Speech with called party.
Matrix
Whats this?
This feature enables a station user to free the system resources (station or a trunk) for him.
How to use it?
How it works?
Suppose, Station A and Station B are talking to each other. Station C calls Station B and finds it to be busy. If he uses
Forced Call Disconnection, he gets confirmation tone. Station A and station B gets Error tone. However, for this to
happen the priority of Station C should be higher than that of Station B and Station A else he wont be able to use this
feature.
Likewise suppose Station A is talking to an external party through trunk 1. Station B tries to grab Trunk 1. On finding it
busy, he uses Forced Call disconnection. Doing so, he gets connected to trunk 1 and gets CO dial tone whereas
Station A gets disconnected and gets error tone. However, for this to happen priority of Station B should be higher
than Station A. In this case, priority of the trunk is not considered.
Suppose station A is talking to an external party through trunk1. Station B calls station A and finds it busy. He uses
forced call disconnection. Doing so, station B gets dial tone whereas, the trunk 1 gets disconnected.
This is also termed as Forced Release (In ETERNITY-Jeeves).
CAUTION!
Forced Call Disconnection is a sensitive feature. The System Engineer should restrict access to
this feature. If a user is allowed the access to Forced Call Disconnection, he should use this
responsibly.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Forced Call Disconnection to a user.
Important Points:
In PLCC applications, Forced Call Disconnection can be used in a chain to reach the last Exchange through many
tandem exchanges in between.
There is no privacy against Forced Call Disconnection. However, priority of station is taken in account as explained in
the example given above.
Relevant Topics:
2. Priority 676
=X=X=
2 Dial Station/Trunk Access Code. Busy tone
3 Dial #*.
The called station/trunk gets disconnected.
You get dial tone after the confirmation tone.
4 Dial Station/External Number. Ring Back Tone
Matrix
What's this?
When ETERNITY acts as a Gateway, this feature is used to convey the call maturity information on source port, when
call made using destination port gets matured.
This information can be useful for billing equipment connected at calling party side.
How it works?
This feature of answer signaling is applicable only for DISA option selected as 'CLI Authentication-one call- Ans. Sig.'
in the DISA-CLI Authentication Table. Refer chapter Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
The ETERNITY works as gateway for routing the call to the destination.
If the calling party's number is programmed in Table - 'DISA-CLI Authentication', the ETERNITY will consider the
calling party as successfully logged in as station which is programmed as "Auto Login station". The call will get
answered by the ETERNITY. The caller will get dial tone.
Caller can dial the desired number.
ETERNITY will route the call form the destination port.
When called party answers the call (i.e. call on destination port gets matured), the Answer Signaling will be done on
source port, if enabled.
Answer Signaling will be done in form of DTMF digit string as programmed on the source port.
If Answer Signaling is disabled on the source port, the DTMF digit string will not be dialed out, even if it is
programmed.
On receiving these digits, Billing equipment/PBX with which the calling party is connected, can consider the call is
matured and start billing.
How to program?
To configure 'Gateway Application-Answer Signaling' flag and 'DTMF String' on desired trunk refer following chapters:
For TWT Trunk, Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template
For E&M Trunk, Refer chapter E&M Feature Template
For MOBILE Trunk, Refer chapter Mobile Port
For DS1 Trunk, Refer chapter DS1 Trunks
For BRI Trunk, Refer chapter ISDN-BRI
For SIP Trunk, Refer chapter SIP Trunk Parameters
By default, 'Gateway Application-Answer Signaling' is disabled for all ports.
By default, DTMF Digit String' is programmed as 'CCC' on all ports.
Application:
ETERNITY
PSTN
N/w
PSTN
N/w
DS1-1 DS1-2
GFX11
Mobile FXS
GFX11
Mobile FXS
GFX11
Mobile FXS
GFX11
Mobile FXS
Mumbai Delhi
Kolkata Chennai
Matrix
Multiple GFX11s are installed at different places for PCO Application.
One ETERNITY is installed at central place.
On FXS port of each GFX11, 'Pay Phone' is connected.
On GSM port of each GFX11, SIM card is installed.
GFX11s are configured for multi stage dialing, in which when ever caller dials the number using pay phone, GFX11
will store the number, it will first make a call to ETERNITY's DS1 line on which DISA - 'CLI Auth- One Call - Ans. Sig.'
is enabled.
GFX11's SIM Numbers are programmed in 'DISA - CLI Auth.' table in ETERNITY.
ETERNITY compares the Calling Number received on DS1 Port with DISA-CLI Auth. Table.
As the number is programmed in the table, ETERNITY answers the call and offers the trunk assigned in Station Basic
Feature Template of the station used as 'Auto Login'.
When ETERNITY answers the call, the GFX11 sends the stored called number (which is actually dialed by the caller)
in DTMF digits.
ETERNITY routes the call on this number using the offered trunk.
When called party answers the call, ETERNITY will send 'DTMF Digit Strings' programmed on the DS1 Port (Source
Port, on which call originated) as a Gateway Answer Signaling'.
The Pay Phone connected with FXS Port of the GFX11 is also configured to understand the same DTMF string as call
maturity.
Pay Phone will start billing only on receipt of the desired DTMF digits.
Remarks:
Source Port: Port of the ETERNITY on which call originates.
Destination Port: Port of the ETERNITY on which call terminates.
Relevant Topics:
4. Mobile Port 630
5. DS1 Trunks 475
6. ISDN-BRI 573
=X=X=
Matrix
GPAX Application
Whats this?
GPAX application is one of the applications provided by ETERNITY and used in commercial establishment/Society/
Organisation, etc. Group PBX are installed, operated and maintained by organisations/agencies. The owner will be
treated as the main hirer. The private exchange (PSTN)/service provider will provide junctions to the PBX and the owner
will pay the rental of the junctions, and the call charges. The number of junctions provided to the PBX should be adequate
to carry the traffic. The owner/agencies of the PBXs will be responsible for the payment of all charges to the private
exchange/service provider.
In this application say a PBX A is connected to PSTN. PBX A is given an exchange ID (say 2837). A number of stations
(say 001-100) can be connected to PBX A. When a station 015 dials 2837025, PBX A interpret this number to be dialed
for the same system. However, for dialing a station number belonging to same system, it is not necessary to prefix the
station number with exchange ID. When a station 020 dials 2834537, PBX A does not interpret this to be dialed for the
same system and hence will dial the digits on the trunk.
When a station user picks up the handset and dials any digit except the one programmed in the routing table will be
dialed on the trunk. If the user dials digit that is programmed in the routing table with Self-flag enabled, the system will not
dial the digits on the trunk since it would interpret these to be dialed for the same system.
For dialing the digits on the trunk it is required to program the routing table carefully. Route code should be specified in
route code column of routing table in association with Self Route Flag disable. This will make the call to be routed on
trunk which is specified in OG Trunk Bundle Group. Regarding this please refer Closed User Group (CUG) and Closed
User Group-With Exchange ID.
In order to make internal calls, user is advised to program Routing Table such that one of the entries in routing table
should have route code as #, Strip digit count as 1 and Self route flag as 1 (enable). Doing so, when user picks up
handset and dials the required number with prefix #, the system interpret this number as an activity for the internal users
and waits for relevant access code.
Because of Strip digit count=1, the first digit dialed by the user (i.e. # in this case) will be ignored and next digit will be
processed which could be a feature code or a station number.
In order to use system features, the feature codes should be prefixed by #. Whenever the user dials # on picking the
handset, the PBX assumes it to be an activity for the internal users and waits for relevant access code.
In GPAX application, Answer Signaling on SLT and Answer Supervision on trunk shall e programmed properly. Also the
Disconnect Supervision parameter shall be programmed as appropriate for proper billing of calls.
PSTN
PBX A
T1
T2
Tn
2837
S1 S2 Sn
001 002 100
Matrix
Following figures shows how call is established between users using PSTN and ETERNITY-GPAX.
FXO
(Trunk)
FXS
(SLT)
Inter Exchange
Trunk interface
card
Subscriber
Card
Inter
Exchange
Trunk card
Sub Card
Subscriber
Card
Inter Exchange
Trunk interface
card
PSTN
Makarpura Alkapuri
A
B
C
D
Customer Site
ETERNITY-GPAX
1. Call fromA to B is shown by
2. Call from B to A is shown by
3. Call from C to A is shown by
Trunk
MFC
Inter
Exchange
Trunk
interface card
Subscriber
Card
PSTN
A
C
Customer Site
ETERNITY-GPAX
1. Call from A to C is shown by
SLT
Card
Operator
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
1. Answer Signaling on SLT 257
=X=X=
Trunk
MFC
Inter
Exchange
Trunk
interface
card
Subscriber
Card
PSTN
A
C
Trunk Offer
ETERNITY-GPAX
1. Call from A to C is shown by
SLT
Card
Operator
3. Call from Opt. to A is shown by
Matrix
GPAX Billing
Whats this?
In commercial establishments/large societies/organisations etc. staff make calls from their rooms. It is required that the
cost of these calls is calculated so that amount of calls made by a staff member can be paid. GPAX provides a facility
which if enabled can calculate cost of each call if programmed properly.
To calculate the total cost of a call please refer following topic for more details:
Call Cost Calculation (CCC), Call Duration Control (CDC), Call Budget, Answer Signaling on SLT and GPAX charge
Internal Calls in Station Advanced Feature Template.
In order to make billing for internal calls between GPAX users, GPAX charge internal calls flag to be set to enable (please
refer Station Advanced Feature Template for more details).
If GPAX charge internal calls flag is enabled, this call will be recorded in the Station message detail recording-outgoing
buffer. If GPAX charge internal calls flag is set to disable, the call made to an internal station will not be billed and will be
recorded in the SMDR-Internal buffer as normal internal call.
GPAX has a dedicated memory space (commonly called buffer) to store details of each call.
These calls are retained in the buffer even during power failure.
Various reports can be routed either on the printer or on the computer from this buffer.
Once the buffer is 100% full, the new call overwrites the oldest one.
It follows First In First Out (FIFO) scheme.
It is recommended that printing of various reports should be regularised on fixed dates. This should be done
regardless of whether the buffer is full or not.
This will prevent spilling and subsequent loss of data. You can enable or disable call logging for individual trunk.
This gives flexibility of monitoring only important (STD) trunks.
This also prevents frequent spilling of the buffer, as new local calls will not be recorded.
=X=X=
Matrix
GPAX Flexible Numbers
Whats this?
In office/organisation etc., it is required that the flexible numbers are given in such a manner that it identifies the
departments/blocks i.e. say subscribers for marketing department may start with 5, for technical support with 6 and
so on.
ETERNITY offers Flexibility to the user to assign a code of your choice to access a station. This code is called
Flexible number. For example, to access first SLT having software port 001, one has to dial 2001. It is possible to
change this code to any other number of your choice.
ETERNITY offers two types of stations viz. SLT and DKP. The system loads default access codes to all the SLT and
DKP stations on first power ON. Later on the stations can be assigned default Flexible numbers using a command.
Default table of SLT station numbers looks like:
Default table of DKP station numbers looks like:
How to program?
Please refer topic Flexible Numbers for more details.
Important Points:
While using the ETERNITY in the GPAX application, SE should program different toll control levels as per the user's
requirement for making the calls which can be different than office user.
For example, SE can program the External number list for Allowed / Denied numbers for home user, as per following
Table:
Relevant Topics:
2. Access Codes 225
4. Dynamic Lock 512
=X=X=
001 2001
002 2002
003 2003
: :
: :
512 2512
001 3001
002 3002
003 3003
: :
: :
128 3128
Dynamic Toll Control Level External List can be programmed and assigned to:
0 (time zone wise toll control) Allow Local calls only
1 Allow Local + STD calls
2 Allow Local + STD + ISD calls
3 Lock all calls
Matrix
Help Desk
Whats this?
ETERNITY allows few stations to be programmed as emergency stations.
These stations could be First Aid, Security, Fire Station etc.
Whenever a call is placed to these stations if the station is found busy, Auto Call Back is set automatically.
How to program?
Help Desk is programmable. By enabling this feature in the COS of the station, the station can be made a Help Desk
station.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Matrix
Hold
Whats this?
This feature allows the user to talk other station or external party without releasing the present party. It is same as
asking the person to wait in the waiting room while you want to attend another important guest simultaneously.
This feature is allowed to DKP users only if it is allowed for the COS group assigned to the station of user. Refer
chapter Class of Service (COS).
The station user can dial another number when the current party is held. The held party gets MoH.
Even if the station user goes ON-Hook, the held call is active. However when the DKP user goes ON-Hook when one
call is on 'Hold', the call does not come back immediately but comes back after expiry of call park timer in case of
External call.
ETERNITY supports two types of Hold functions, based on method of retrieving the held call:
Global Hold
Exclusive Hold
Global Hold: If the call is put on 'Global Hold', it can be retrieved from any of the DKP interfaced to the ETERNITY,
which has programmed DSS key of the 'Held' Trunk/Station. The held call should be retrieved before expiry of Call
Hold Retrieval Timer programmed in ETERNITY.
Exclusive Hold: If the call is put on 'Exclusive Hold', it can be retrieved only from the DKP which had put it in
Exclusive Hold. The held call should be retrieved before expiry of Call Hold Retrieval Timer programmed in
ETERNITY.
Retrieving held call: The held call (Global or Exclusive), should be retrieved, before expiry of 'Call Hold retrieval
timer'. If it is not retrieved, the call will be placed on the station user which had put the call on hold. The DKP user can
retrieve the held call from the same DKP from which the Call was put on hold, by pressing Hold key when it is idle
(On-hook). Now, if the DKP user has put multiple calls on Hold, the call will be retrieved which was first put on hold (by
FIFO method).
User can not retrieve the held call, using SLT.
How to use it?
SE should allow the user to use 'Hold' feature from the COS group for the station (DKP).
Only DKP user will be able to use the Global Hold and Exclusive Hold feature as explained below:
Global Hold:
User A is in speech with Party B.
During speech, User A presses "HOLD' Key.
Call with Party B is put on 'Global Hold'.
User A Goes On-Hook. However, the Call with Party B is still on 'Global Hold'.
Exclusive Hold:
User A is in speech with Party B.
User A presses "HOLD' twice in 1 second.
Call with Party B is put on 'Exclusive Hold'.
DKP User Goes On-Hook. However, the Call with Party B is still on 'Exclusive Hold'.
To Retrieve Global Hold call from the DKP:
Press DSS Key of the line blinking with 'Red' color.
Note: The DSS key is the specific key, programmed for that trunk / Station.
To Retrieve Exclusive Hold call from the DKP:
Press DSS Key of the line blinking with 'Blue/Green' color.
Note: The DSS key is the specific key, programmed for that trunk / Station.
To Retrieve Global Hold call from the SLT:
It is not supported for SLT.
How to program?
Call Hold Retrieval Timer
This timer is applicable for Global Hold as well as Exclusive Hold calls. The user should retrieve the held call before
expiry of this timer.
Matrix
If the held call is not retrieved within Call Hold Retrieval Timer, the call will be placed on the station user which had put
the call on hold. Now, the held party will get the RBT.
Use following command to program Call Hold Retrieval Timer:
3805-Seconds
By default, seconds is 060.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Matrix
Hot Desking
Whats this?
Hot Desking enables the user to use all the features/facilities allowed to him from another station.
Generally in an organization persons with higher hierarchy have access to most of the important features. But when
these people go away from their work place within the organization, they are unable to use these features since the
stations they might be using then may not have access to these features.
Hot Desking enables to over come this restriction.
How to use it?
How it works?
To perform Hotdesking minimum two stations are required. (Host station and Hot Desking station).
Host station is the station whose user performs Hotdesking.
Hotdesking station is the station where Hotdesking is performed.
On hotdesking, the hotdesking station works as your own station. All the properties of your station are copied to the
host station. No activity except hotdesking is possible from the host station. If anybody now wants to use the host
station then they have to perform Hotdesking.
When your job is over, and you get back to your seat (now the host station) you have to clear the hotdesk.
Clearing the hotdesk is equivalent to performing self Hot Desk. After which the stations are swapped again and
acquire their original properties. Your colleague needs to clear the hotdesk at his station.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Hot Desking to a user.
Important Points:
SLT users can Hotdesk only another SLT port.
DKP users can Hotdesk another DKP port.
Hotdesk of a SLT user on a DKP port or vice versa is not allowed.
The User password of both the stations involved cannot be default password.
Hotdesk feature should be enabled on both the stations involved in Hotdesk.
While accomplishing Hotdesk, both the stations should be idle.
No features/facilities except Hotdesk are allowed from the host station.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
1 You are at your colleagues station.
3 Dial 1091-Your Station Number-User Password. Stations swapped.
Matrix
Hotline
Whats this?
Hotline eliminates repeated dialing of a station number.
As soon as the user picks up his handset, the ETERNITY automatically dials the fixed station. The station starts
ringing and the user gets ring back tone.
In an office environment, it is found that a boss calls his secretary or his co-worker frequently. He can use this feature.
How to use it?
Example:
The boss needs to speak to his secretary (station number 202) many times in a day. He can avoid repeated dialing by
activating the Hotline feature from his station:
151-202

Delayed hot line is possible. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the station immediately but get regular
dial tone. If the user does not dial anything during this short dial tone, the ETERNITY places the hotline call to the station.
This delay timer allows the user to dial other numbers without canceling hot line.
Set Hotline Timer
The default value of hot line timer is 3 seconds and its range is 000-255 seconds.
Important Point:
If Dial Tone timer is less than Hotline Timer, then Hotline timer overrides Dial Tone timer.
Hot Outward Dialing (HOD)/Hot OG Trunk
Whats this?
You get connected to a desired trunk the moment you lift the handset.
This feature is useful when you are making more number of trunk calls compared to internal calls. Once this feature is
enabled, as soon as you lift the handset you get the trunk dial tone after the set time.
How to use it?
Example:
To simulate dialing of trunk access code 62 immediately on lifting the handset, dial 152-62.
Important Point:
Delayed HOD is possible on a station. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the trunk line immediately
but get a regular dial tone. This HOD delay timer is same as Hotline delay timer.
HOD With External Number
Whats this?
You get connected to a desired external number the moment you lift the handset.
This feature is useful when you are making call to a particular external number many times in a day. Once this feature
is enabled, as soon as you lift the handset, the system dials the telephone number and you get connected to the
external person.
How to use it?
2 Dial 151-Station. Confirmation tone
2 Dial 154-Seconds. Confirmation tone
2 Dial 152-Trunk Access Code. Confirmation tone
2 Dial 153-Trunk Access Code-Number-#* Confirmation tone
Matrix
Example:
Let us activate HOD for external number 0265 630555. Let us assume trunk access code 63. Dial following code to set
this feature:
153-63-0265630555-#*
Important Points:
Delayed HOD With Number is possible from any station. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the
external number immediately instead you get a normal dial tone. You get connected to the external number only after
the set time. This HOD delay timer is same as Hotline delay timer.
This allows you to dial other numbers without canceling HOD.
Hotline and HOD cannot be activated on the same station at the same time.
Cancel Hotline/Hot Outward Dialing
Whats this?
There is a common code to cancel both Hotline and Hot Outward Dialing.
How to use it?
The cancellation code must be dialed from the dial tone. If the delay timer is kept at its minimum of 1 second,
you have to be very quick in dialing the code.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Hot line to a user.
Important Points:
On using this feature from DKP, the ETERNITY offers a menu list to the user to choose from. On dialing 15, the DKP
displays Hotline Internal. The user should use Up/Down keys to navigate and make desired selection.
If the Hotline Delay Timer is programmed as 0 the station user cannot dial any feature code. Not even the feature
code to cancel HOD. To cancel HOD, the user should follow the following steps.
Relevant Topics:
2. Toll Control 877
=X=X=
Action Response
Go OFF-Hook. CO Dial Tone
Dial by Digit. Pause/Silence
Wait for Trunk Inter Digit Timer. Pause/Silence
Dial Flash. Feature Tone
Dial the code to change the HOD timer or to cancel the HOD. Confirmation Tone
Go ON-Hook. Return ring of the trunk.
Go OFF-Hook. Connected to the held trunk.
Go ON-Hook.
Matrix
IC Reference Table
Whats this?
The IC Reference Table is a set of general features that define the logic of resolving an incoming call and placing on the
target DDI station. An IC Reference Table is assigned to every port. This table in conjunction with DDI Routing Table
identifies the target station. The ETERNITY offers 64 such table each of which can be programmed as per the
requirement.
How it works?
The IC Reference Table is configured using following Parameters:
IC Reference ID-This is the reference number acts as an identifier to the translation logic programmed in the IC
Reference Table. Any number of table can have the same reference number. An IC Reference ID is assigned to ISDN
and SIP trunks. When a call lands on the ISDN trunk, the system checks the IC Reference Number assigned to it and
identifies the corresponding DDI Routing Table for call resolving. For more details on the complete Translation Logic
please refer the topics Direct Dialing-In (DDI) and DDI Routing Table.
Start Channel Number-This is the First Channel Number for the trunk to which the logic is applicable.
Total Channel Count-The Total number of channels of the trunk to which the IC Reference Table is applicable.
DDI Routing Reference ID-This is the DDI Routing Table's Reference number used by the IC Reference table for
mapping the received DDI number to a flexible number. It is a link parameter.
Route on First Destination-This flag can be enabled or disabled. Once the station is identified, the system checks
the DDI IC routing flag of the station. If the flag is enabled, the call always lands on first station of the MSN number. If
the flag is disabled, the call is routed to the identified target station.
Ring Timer-This timer signifies the time for which the station on which the incoming call is received rings. On expiry
of this timer if the Call is not answered the call is routed as per the programmed logic. Route to TLG-When No Reply-
When the DDI station does not answer the call, the system checks for this flag. If it is enabled, then the system routes
the call to the TLG assigned to the Trunk. It is in seconds.
Route on TLG-When No Reply-If the DDI station cannot take the call because it is not replaying, the system checks
for this flag. As per the flag set, it will either disconnect the call or route the call to Trunk Landing Group or answer the
call automatically or play voice message and on completion of message disconnect the call or answer the call
automatically, play voice message and on completion of message transfer call to Trunk Landing Group. ETERNITY
also supports an option by which the calls will be routed to user's Mail Box in case the station user to whom the call is
to be routed is not present and call remains un answered. Now, if the station is not assigned mail box, the caller will
get welcome message in VMS and will not be able to access the mail box directly.
Route on TLG-When Busy-If the DDI station cannot take the call because it is busy, the system checks for this flag.
As per the flag set, it will either disconnect the call or route the call to Trunk Landing Group or answer the call
automatically or play voice message and on completion of message disconnect the call or answer the call
automatically, play voice message and on completion of message transfer call to Trunk Landing Group. ETERNITY
also supports an option by which the calls will be routed to user's Mail Box in case the station to which call is to be
routed is busy and call remains un answered. Now, if the station is not assigned mail box, the caller will get welcome
message in VMS and will not be able to access the mail box directly.
Trunk Features Template-A Trunk feature template is assigned to each DDI Routing Table. This enables the user to
allow Auto Answer timezone wise, allow DID on few numbers timezone wise etc. For more details please refer the
topic Trunk Feature Template.
How to program?
Use the following command to default IC Reference Table Index:
6301-1-IC Reference Table Index
6301-2-IC Ref. Table Index-IC Ref. Table Index
6301-*
Where,
IC Reference Table Index is from 01 to 64.
Use the following command to program IC Reference Table Index:
6302-1-IC Reference Table Index-Feature Number-Value
Matrix
6302-2-IC Ref. Table Index-IC Ref. Table Index-Feature Number-Value
6302-*-Feature Number-Value
Where,
IC Reference Table Index is from 01 to 64.
Default values of the IC Reference Table is given below:
Parameters Value:
Relevant Topics:
3. ISDN-BRI 573
4. DS1 Trunks 475
=X=X=
Feature No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
Feature
Name/Table
Index
IC
Ref.
ID
Start
Channel
No.
Total
Channel
Count
DDI
Routing
Ref. ID
Route on
First Dest.
DDI Ring
Timer
(Sec.)
Route to
TLG on when
No-Reply
Route to
TLG when
Busy
Trunk
Feature
Template
01 00 01 00 00 Disable 045 Disconnect Disconnect 01
: : : : : : : : : :
Code 0 00-99 01-30 00-30 00-99 Disable 001-255 Disconnect Disconnect 01-50
1
Enable Route to TLG
Route to
TLG
2 Greet and
Disconnect
Greet and
Disconnect
3
Greet and
Route to TLG
Greet and
Route to
TLG
4 Route to Voice
Mail
Route to
Voice Mail
Matrix
Incoming Call Management
Whats this?
When a call lands on a trunk, the system needs to check for features like CLI based routing, Enabling of DID or DISA,
DDI enabling etc. before routing the call to the destination. The flow chart given below depicts the logic of incoming call
management by the system.
How it works?
Does calling
number match with
CLI Based Routing
Table?
Incoming call
Is that
station free?
Is DDI
Routing
enabled?
Place the call.
Is the call
answered?
End
B
Is DISA/DID
enabled?
Place the call
to the TLG
End
Is trunk
auto answer
enabled?
Call processed as per
the DID/DISA Logic
Auto Answer greetings/
RBT or Message
Call Routed to TLG
End
If RBT timer
elapsed?
Place the call to
TLG
End
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
1. CLI Based Routing 366
3. Trunk Auto Answer 880
=X=X=
B
Is DID/
DISA enabled on
the received DDI
No.?
Route Call as per
DID/DISA logic
Trunk Auto answer/RBT
or RBT Message
Route the call to the
destiantion as per the DDI
template assigned
Is the
destination
free?
Is Route to
TLG when Busy
enabled?
Disconnect
Call routed to TLG
End
Destination Rings
Destination
replies?
End
Is DDI
Ring Timer
elapsed?
Is route to
TLG when No Reply
enabled?
Disconnect
Call routed to TLG
End
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Is Trunk
Auto Answer
enabled?
No
Yes
Route Call as per Trunk
Auto Answer Logic
Matrix
Internal Call Restriction
Whats this?
Using this feature, the operator will be able to allow/restrict internal calls. The operator has flexibility to allow calls
during day time and restrict calls during night time. In ETERNITY this feature is implemented by following ways:
Assigning 'Guest Group' to the station
To enable/disable Internal Call Barring (Call Block)
Assigning 'Guest Group' to the station
Privacy of the user is very important in Enterprises and hospitals. In general, most of the users need to communicate
only with reception, operator, pantry and such other service stations. He is not required to dial other user numbers.
For example, in hospitals the patients need to call the nurse and not the doctor or other patients.
Sometimes, a group of users occupy multiple rooms in the Enterprise. In such cases members of the group would like
to communicate only among themselves and service stations.
Essentially we need following logic:
Certain service stations should be able to dial any other service station or any guest (e.g. Nurses, Operator).
Certain stations should be able to dial only service stations (e.g. patients, single user in the office).
A group of station users need to dial amongst each other and the service stations (e.g. doctors).
Above requirements are implemented as follows:
Solo Group (e.g. patients, single user of the station). This is classified in group 00.
Universal Group (e.g. Nurses and other services staff). This is classified in group 99.
Friend's Group (e.g. Group of visitors). Such a group of station users can be assigned to any group number from 01
to 98.
Following diagram depicts this logic:
How to use it?
From SA mode:
Dial,
1072-904-Flexible Number-Guest Group
OR
Press DSS key for 'Guest Group'
Where,
Flexible Number is the code given to access a station.
Guest Group is from 00 to 99.
By default, the guest group assigned is 99.
The user can call any body in his 'guest group' number '99'.
The station users in one 'guest group', '99' can call each other within the group as well as the station users in other
groups.
The default Guest group of all the stations = 99.
Enable/Disable Internal Call Barring (Call Block)
ETERNITY supports a feature, to allow or bar the Internal Calls for the users of ETERNITY. This is called Call Blocking.
Universal Group
99
Friends Group
00
Friend Group
A
Friend Group
B
Universal Group
99
Friends Group
00
Friend Group
A
Friend Group
B
Matrix
How to use it?
From SA mode:
Dial,
1072-045-Code
OR
Press DSS key for 'Enable/Disable Internal Call Block'.
Where,
When this feature is enabled, the LED on the DSS key assigned to 'Call Block' will glow Red and when disabled, the
LED will be turned Off.
When the operator issues "Call Block'- Enable command, all the station users will be assigned guest group = 00.
When the operator issues "Call Block'- Disable command, all the station users will be assigned guest group = 99.
Note:
Even after issuing SA command for 'Call Block', the operator can use the SA command 1072-904 to change the guest
group of any station user.
Important Point:
Please refer separate manual for more details about Hotel Applications for this feature.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Code Meaning
0 Disable Call Block, (i.e. Internal Calls allowed)
1 Enable Call Block (i.e. Internal Calls barred)
Matrix
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI)
Whats this?
Each GSM Module is identified by a unique number to stop the use of stolen GSM Module from accessing the
network. This is called International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number.
The IMEI number is pasted on the GSM engine.
How it works?
The system will store the IMEI number in its memory and when the SE wishes to download the IMEI number, the
number stored in memory is send to the Jeeves.
Command:
There is no SE command to display IMEI number on telephone instrument.
IMEI number of the Mobile ports GSM Engine will be known from the Web Jeeves only.
Important Point:
Some times it may happen that GSM Engine does not send the IMEI data. In such case, the user should restart the
system.
=X=X=
Matrix
Interrupt Request (IR)
Whats this?
When your call is urgent and you cannot wait for the called person to become free, you can land in his conversation
after intimating him.
While landing, you get ring back tone and the called person gets beeps for Interrupt Request Timer.
During the beeps, the called person can dial Flash to answer your call. He can talk to you while his previous partner
is put on hold and gets music.
Replace handset once your talk is over. This will automati cally restore his original speech with the held-up party.
How to use it?
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Interrupt Request to a user.
Timer of Relevance:
Interrupt Request Timer-Time for which the station on which interrupt request is made gets the beeps.
Important Points:
Interrupt Request works even when the destination is talking on a trunk line.
Interrupt Request works if the called person is in 2-way, normal speech.
Interrupt Request is ineffective if the called person is having call privacy from Interrupt Request.
The called party requested Interrupt Request can toggle both the calls.
Interrupt Request can also be used after putting one party in hold. An important trunk call can be transferred to a busy
station after putting the calling party in hold and interrupting the busy destination to inform him about his call. This is
most advantageous feature for the operator while transferring calls.
Relevant Topics:
2. Privacy 679
3. QSIG 687
=X=X=
2 Dial Station. Busy tone
3 Dial 3. Ring Back Tone. The called person gets beeps.
4 The destination dials Flash. Speech with the called person.
Matrix
ISDN-An Introduction
The ISDN Technology
ISDN stands for Integrated Services Digital Network. Integrated Services refers to ISDNs ability to deliver two or
more simultaneous connections, in any combination of data, voice, video, and fax, over a single line. Digital refers to
ISDNs purely digital transmission, as opposed to analog transmission of Plain Old Telephone System (POTS). ISDN
transmits data digitally, resulting in a very clear transmission quality. Network refers to the fact that ISDN is not simply
a point-to-point solution like a leased line. ISDN networks extend from the local telephone exchange to the remote user
and include all the telecom and switching equipment in between.
ISDN is based around two types of channels:
Bearer channel commonly called B-channel.
Common Signaling channel commonly called D-Channel.
The Bearer Channel (B-Channel)
The B-channels are logical pipes in a single physical ISDN line.
The B-channel is a 64 Kbps clear channel whose entire bandwidth is available for user information since call setup.
The user information can take several forms such as data or PCM encoded voice. One of the B-channels can be
used for a device such as telephone or fax machine, while the other B-channel can be used for data transfer.
Alternatively, two B-channels can be combined to download data at very high speeds to a PC.
B-channels form circuit-switched connections, which resemble analog telephone connections in that they are end-to-
end physical circuits temporarily dedicated to transfer information between two devices. The circuit-switched nature
of B-channel connections, combined with their reliability and high bandwidth, makes ISDN suitable for voice, video,
fax and data applications.
B-channels can be used to transfer any layer 2 or higher protocols across a link within the OSI model.
Although B-channels are normally used for on-demand connections, taking full advantage of the circuit-switched
networks upon which they are based, they can also be configured as semi-permanent or nailed-up connections,
which are always up, much like a leased line. However, this can cause a capacity problem for carriers and ISPs,
which can be solved by an emerging feature of ISDN called Always On/Dynamic ISDN (AO/DI).
The Common Signaling Channel (D-Channel)
Unlike B-channels, which function as pipes, the D-channel is associated with higher level protocols at layers 2 and 3
of the OSI model that form the packet-switched connections.
D-channel uses packet-switched connections, which are best adapted to the intermittent but latency-sensitive nature
of signaling traffic, thus accounting for the vastly reduced call setup time of 1 to 2 seconds on ISDN calls (vs. 10 to 40
seconds using an analog modem).
D-channel transmits at either 16 Kbps (for BRI) or 64 Kbps (for PRI).
The D-channel is used mostly for administrative signaling, to instruct the carrier to set up or terminate a B-channel
call, to ensure that a B-channel is available to receive a call, or to provide signaling information for features like CLIP,
CLIR, COLP, COLR, etc.
Following two sketches show the call setup process in POTS and in ISDN network.
Call Setup Process in POTS
Human Telephone
Telephone
Network
Called
Party
Pick up handset
Off-hook signal
Dial tone
Dial tone
Enter number
Tones or Pulses
Ringback signal
Hello
Hi, Sumer here
Tones or pulses
Ringback signal
Hello
Hi, Sumer here
Ring Current
Hello
Hi, Sumer here
Matrix
Call Setup Process in ISDN
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) ISDN
The most common ISDN service is called Basic Rate or BRI. BRI is also referred to as 2B+D. Two B-channels carry
data and services at 64 Kbps (or combine for 128 Kbps) whereas one D-channel carry signaling and administrative
information at 16Kbps to set up and terminate calls.
A BRI line consists of two B-channels, which can be viewed as two logical pipes supported by a D-channel as shown
below:
BRI is intended to be the access point for customer premise equipment (CPE) such as ISDN telephones, ISDN Fax
and other ISDN terminal equipment.
Maximum Eight ISDN devices can be connected to this single physical line and all the devices share the B-channels
and D-Channel. Individual devices are distinguished through the use of Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs), with a
different ISDN number assigned to each device. D-channel signals automatically route communications to
appropriate ISDN device.
Point-to-Point BRI configuration and Point-to-Multipoint BRI configurations are shown below in the figure.
In a Point-to-Point physical configuration, the NT (NT1 or NT2) and the TE (TE1 or TA) can be up to 1km apart.
There are two configurations possible in Point-to-Multipoint configuration viz. short passive bus configuration and
extended passive bus configuration. In case of short passive bus configuration, eight TEs can be connected to a
single NT on a bus up to 200 meters. In extended passive bus configuration, multiple TEs are grouped together at
one end of a bus, up to 1 km from the NT.
Human
ISDN
Telephone Network
Called
Party
Pick up handset
Setup
Setup Acknowledge Dial tone
Enter number
Tones or Pulses
Ringback signal
Hello
Hi, Sumer here
Hello
Hi, Sumer here
Hello
Hi, Sumer here
Information
D-Channel
B-Channel
Call Proceeding
Alerting
Connect
Connect Acknowledge
Setup
Call Proceeding
Alerting
Connect
Connect Acknowledge
ISDN BRI Service
ISDN
NT 1
D-Channel
U Interface S/T Interface
TE NT
TE
NT
TE TE
TE
NT
TE TE
Point-to-Point BRI configuration
BRI
Line
BRI
Line
Point-to-Multi point short passive Bus BRI configuration
Point-to-Multi point extended passive Bus BRI configuration
ISDN
Network
ISDN
Network
ISDN
Network
BRI
Line
Matrix
Although only two B-channels are available at any point in time, numerous other calls can be put on hold via D-
channel signaling, a feature referred to as multiple call appearances.
BRI can be used in small offices to support all of its voice and data communication requirements. In a larger office,
one or more BRI lines can be divided among multiple users and applications via a server or a PBX.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ISDN
To support higher bandwidth requirements, ISDN is also available in primary rate or PRI (Primary Rate Interface).
This service differs depending upon the region where it is deployed. In North America, Japan and Korea PRI supports
23B channels and one 64 Kbps D channel. In the rest of the world it provides 30B channels and one 64 Kbps D
channel. These are referred to as 23B+D and 30B+D respectively.
A PRI line consists of thirty B-channels, which can be viewed as thirty logical pipes supported by two D-Channels as
shown below. One of the D-channel is permanently used for framing, synchronization and other administrative
purpose. Hence, the user has access to only D-channel for signaling.
Unlike BRI, PRI does not support a bus configuration i.e. multiple devices cannot be connected to a PRI line.
However, a PBX can be used to reallocate PRI resources.
A single PRI connection is usually much less expensive than obtaining the equivalent number of B-channels through
multiple BRI connections.
Primary benefit of PRI is that the bandwidth can be dynamically allocated among applications. E.g. certain channels
can be allocated for voice calls, but as those calls are terminated, the unused B-channels can be reallocated to such
high-bandwidth applications as video conferencing. This is usually accomplished via a PBX or a server capable of
distributing the E1 bandwidth on a PRI link.
The ISDN Terminology
Various new terms used in context of ISDN are explained below.
ISDN functional devices and reference points:
The ISDN standards define several different types of devices. Each device type has certain functions and responsibilities
but may not represent an actual physical piece of equipment. Hence these are called functional devices. The LE, NT1,
NT2, TE1, TE2 and TA are examples of the functional devices.
Since functional devices do not work in isolation, there are several device-to-device interfaces, each requiring a
communications protocol. Each of these device interfaces is called a reference point. The functional devices and
reference points are explained below in detail. Please refer the figure given below.
Network Termination Type1 (NT1)
This functional device represents the termination of the physical connection between the customer site and the Local
Exchange (LE). The NT1s responsibilities include line performance monitoring, timing, physical signaling protocol
conversion, power transfer and the multiplexing of the B-Channel and D-Channel.
Network Termination type2 (NT2)
These functional devices refer to those devices that provide customer site switching, multiplexing, and concentration.
This includes PBXs, LANs, mainframe computers, terminal controllers and other CPE for voice and data switching. NT2
is generally absent in some ISDN environments, such as residential or Centrex ISDN service.
Terminal equipment (TE) refers to end-user devices, such as an analog or digital telephone, X.25 data terminal
equipment, ISDN workstation, or integrated voice/data terminal (IVDT).
Terminal equipment type1 (TE1) are those devices that utilize the ISDN protocols and support ISDN services, such as
an ISDN telephone or workstation.
ISDN PRI Service
D-Channel
B-Channel
Matrix
Terminal equipment type2 (TE2) are non-ISDN compatible devices, such as the analog telephones in use on todays
telephone network.
Terminal Adaptor (TA) allows a non-ISDN device (TE2) to communicate with the network. TAs allow analog telephones,
X.25 DTEs, PCs, and other non-ISDN devices to use the network by providing any necessary protocol conversation.
R reference point-It is the reference point between non-ISDN equipment and a TA.
S reference point-It is the reference point between ISDN user terminals (TE1 or TA) and the network termination
equipment (NT1 or NT2).
T reference point-It is the reference point between customer site switching equipment (NT2) and the local loop
termination (NT1). In absence of the NT2, the user-network interface is usually called the S/T reference point.
U reference point-The reference point between NT1 devices and line-terminations equipment in the local exchange.
The U reference point is relevant only in North America, where the NT1 function is not provided by the local exchange. In
other countries, the ISDN service providers provide NT1 along with the services i.e. the U-interface is built in feature of
the service. The customer gets S/T interface.
=X=X=
TE 2 device
(Standard
Phone)
NT 2 NT 1
NT 2 NT 1
TA NT 2 NT 1
4-wire 4-wire 2-wire
S T U
S T U
S T U R
TE 1 device
(Computer)
TE 1 device
(ISDN Phone)
4-wire 4-wire
4-wire 4-wire
2-wire
2-wire 2-wire
ISDN
Switch
ISDN
Switch
Switched
Network
Packet
Network
Matrix
ISDN-BRI
Whats this?
BRI port of the ETERNITY configured for NT mode can be connected to the BRI Port of another PBX configured for
TE mode. In such case, the ETERNITY will behave as Transit Exchange.
Dialing method (enbloc/overlap) on the BRI port is programmable. This is because many PSTN exchanges support
only Overlap receiving. Hence, in such cases the BRI port (configured for TE mode) will send the called party number
in overlap mode.
ETERNITY supports a software port entity called "ISDN Terminal" which can be connected to the BRI-NT port and will
be treated as stations of the PBX.
How it works?
The ISDN numbering plan with ETERNITY revolves around Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) and Direct Dialing In
(DDI).
With MSN feature, practically all the station users or other specific terminals can be given a unique telephone
number. One station can be assigned a number 2765400, other station can be assigned 2765401, etc. Hence, for one
subscriber the Service Provider can assign multiple numbers. Hence this feature is called Multiple Subscriber
Number.
The ETERNITY can be programmed to land all the calls coming through various channels of the BRI line on the
Operator just like in case of normal trunk.
Alternatively, using DDI feature of ISDN the calls can be made to land directly on the desired stations. To accomplish
this requirement, each station should be given a unique directory number. On assigning directory number, a table is
formed internally called DDI table as shown below:
When a caller calls a MSN number, the call lands on the PBX. The PBX compares the incoming number with the DDI
table. If the incoming number matches with any number in the DDI table, it routes the call to the specific station. If the
incoming number does not match with any number in the DDI table then it is matched with CLI number. If it matches
with any number in the CLI table, the call is routed according to the CLI table. If the number does not match with
either of these tables then the call is routed to the landing destination.
How to connect the BRI line?
Most of the Service Providers provide the NT1 along with the BRI line.
At the Customer's Premises, the BRI line is terminated on the NT1. The S/T interface of the NT1 is connected to BRI
port of the ETERNITY.
The configuration details of U interface (RJ-45) at NT1 are given below:
Station (S/w Port No.) Directory Number
000 03
005 04
006 05
008 06
009 07
Pin Number Pin Detail
4 Tx
5 Rx
ISDN
Network
NT 1
Power
U-Interface
(2 wire)
S/T
Interface
ETERNITY
Matrix
The configuration details of S/T interface (RJ-45) on NT1 are given below:
Association of BRI port and ISDN Terminal:
The 'ISDN terminal' is defined as a real port type in the system.
Since 32 BRI ports are supported at present and as per protocol max. 8 terminals can be connected to BRI port; at
present 64 software ports are supported for ISDN terminals viz. 01 to 64 (Maximum 64 Terminals).
ISDN terminals (software ports) do not have any hardware slot and port Id of their own.
ISDN terminals (software ports) are associated to the BRI software port and the BRI software port has a hardware slot
and port ID of its own.
Each ISDN terminal is assigned an access code (flexible number), station basic template, station advanced template
and a CPU group.
Note:
The ISDN terminals do not have a direct software port number as other port types have. Rather the ISDN terminals
have a derived software port number. Such derived software port numbers are used while programming station name
or assigning basic or advanced station feature templates or programming routing group.
Important points for Call routing from the BRI NT:
When call is made from the ISDN terminal the BRI port will check the calling party number sent by the ISDN Terminal.
If the calling party number = Programmed access code of the ISDN Terminal which are assigned to the BRI port, the
BRI Terminal will process the call further as per the Station basic feature template and Station Advanced Feature
Template assigned to the ISDN Terminal.
If the ISDN terminal doesn't send the calling party number while making the OG call, the Station basic/Advance
feature template assigned to the BRI port will be used, for call processing.
When the ISDN terminal doesn't send the calling party number = Access code programmed for the BRI port on which
it is connected, while making the OG call, the Station basic/Advance feature template assigned to the BRI port will be
applied.
When ISDN terminal sends calling party number which is not programmed for any ISDN terminals assigned to that
particular BRI Port, neither its access code of that particular BRI port, the call will be dropped, by the BRI port.
BRI port personality (Orientation Type)
BRI port can be connected to a public ISDN exchange, private ISDN exchange or to an ISDN terminal (BRI Access).
When the BRI port is connected to a Public ISDN exchange, it behaves as a terminal. ETERNITY supports this
function of BRI Access by assigning it a parameter viz. Orientation = Terminal. The signaling used for this Orientation
is Q.931-protocol.
When the BRI port is connected to an ISDN Phone or ISDN Video phone, it behaves as a 'network'. ETERNITY
supports this function of BRI Access by assigning it a parameter viz. Orientation = Network. In this case, the BRI port
behaves as network. The signaling used for this Orientation is Q.931- protocol.
When the BRI port is connected to a private ISDN (the main application of this configuration is CUG, feature
transparency, etc.), the BRI port is used as a pipe of 128Kbps. It is of no significance which end acts as network and
which acts as terminal (User) since the role of the BRI port in such case will be to route the call depending on the
signaling protocol applied on the BRI port (128Kbps link). ETERNITY supports this function of BRI Access by
assigning it a parameter viz. Orientation = Tie-line. In this case, the BRI port behaves as 128Kbps link. The signaling
used for this Orientation can be any of the Inter-exchange signaling protocol for BRI Access. The most commonly
used is QSIG.
TEI negotiation on BRI port
BRI port supports both automatic and fixed TEI negotiation, so that it can be integrated with other vendor's PBX (e.g.
Nortel PBX). If 'Fixed' mode is selected, its value is required to be configured using SE commands. TEI is 'Terminal
Endpoint Identifier' protocol for negotiation used while connecting to the BRI port with remote BRI port.
Applications of BRI-NT Port:
Two applications are described below:
Video Phone
Making Data Call
Pin Number Pin Detail
3 Rx1
4 Tx1
5 Tx2
6 Rx2
Matrix
Video Phone
An important application of BRI-NT is establishing a Video Call using Video phone. It is used just like other ISDN
Phones.
Video Phone can be used with ETERNITY supporting a BRI connection. ETERNITY does not support call transfer
from one Video Terminal to another Terminal. But the call routing is implemented by preparing suitable OG Trunk
Bundle Group (OGTBG).
The OGTBG for the Video Phone should be so formed by the SE that a BRI channel will be allotted by the Call
Processing logic (preferably).
If the OGTBG formed by the SE contains a non-ISDN trunk and if by the OGTBG logic this non-ISDN trunk is to be
allotted to the ISDN phone which has requested 2 B-channels then the call will be dropped. The non-ISDN trunk is
allowed only if the ISDN user makes an audio call. The PBX will allot first channel even if other channels are
available.
OG Call using Video Phone:
The ETERNITY will support supplementary feature viz. Hold only. If the terminal equipment uses Hold feature to hold
a video call, it will be applicable.
The ETERNITY does not support logic for converting audio call to video call.
Instead, the Video Phone user will have to use one Trunk Access Code (and hence OGTBG) to make and receive
Video call and another TAC to make an audio call.
IC call to a Video Phone:
User can program normal DDI routing logic to route the IC call to the Video Phone using the first or additional
channels.
Depending upon terminal equipment call, the call will be answered by the Operator and transferred to the Video
Phone.
Video Conference
As shown in the figure ETERNITY supports Video conference from BRI-NT port.
This feature works only if it is supported by the Service Provider. Video Conference is established mainly by the Video
Conferencing (VC) equipment.
A Video Conference system (H.320) can be connected to any of the BRI-NT port.
For Video conferencing, three BRI-NT ports of ETERNITY are connected to the three ports of the VC equipment (The
remaining one port of the Video Conference system remains free).
Thus user will assign at least 6 B-channels to the OGTBG that is to be assigned to the VC equipment. (User can
assign BRI-NT software port nos. 01 to 03 to the Video Conferencing equipment).
The user will program the routing of IC calls to the Video Conferencing equipment using DDI routing table for placing
IC video conferencing calls.
More than one VC-equipment can be connected to any of the BRI-NT Port.
Notes:
Video Conferencing generally requires 6 B-channels. But Video Conferencing can also be done at lower bit rates also
using the "aggregation" of 6 B channels which must be supported by the VC equipment.
Please note that a Video Conference call cannot be transferred or kept on Hold.
Making Data Calls
ETERNITY BRI-NT port supports data communication also.
Matrix
For data-communication, connect the Router supporting ISDN-BRI or a Computer with ETERNITY ME Card BRI to
the BRI-NT port as shown below:
Using this feature following applications are supported:
The computers connected in the LAN can browse the net through the BRI.
Remote LAN Access the Computers in the LAN can access the computer/computers in LAN at the remote end
(Branch office/Home office).
Files can be transferred from one LAN to another.
OG Data calls from the Router:
The data call can be made by the router requesting desired number of channels. This establishes a live connection
between the Router and the ISP through the PBX. The users on the LAN can browse the net as normal using
Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
For this, the ETERNITY will allocate data channels only on the BRI-TE port so as to leave other channels for speech
calls when the system detects the call to be a data call.
Similarly, a Remote Computer can be accessed (Remote LAN Access) by dialing the Remote users' number (The
remote end PBX should be so programmed that the call made to a number lands directly on the Router.) This
establishes a permanent connection between the two Routers (and hence two LAN networks).
Now the user at PBX-A can access the computer in LAN at the remote end in the same way as accessing another
computer on the same network.
IC Data calls to the Router:
Program the Trunk Landing Group such that all data calls will land on the PRI-NT port to which the Router is
connected using CLI based Routing logic or DDI based routing logic.
However, while routing call on the BRI-NT port, the PBX will check that the data channels reserved for data
communication on the BRI-NT port are enough to establish the call. Otherwise the call will be rejected.
The call will be rejected if the number of channels reserved for data calls, are already busy with one data-call.
How to program?
Time Zone
Program the time zone for the BRI port. Please refer Time Tables chapter to program the time zone for the BRI port.
Refer chapter Software Port and Hardware ID to assign a hardware slot and a hardware port number to a BRI
software port.
Name
Use following command to assign a name to the BRI port:
5405-1-BRI-Name
5405-2-BRI-BRI-Name
5405-*-Name
Where,
Name is an alpha-numeric string of 12 characters. Terminate the command with #*.
By default, Name field is Blank.
Port Status
Matrix
This parameter is used to enable/disable the port. When the Port configured in TE mode is disabled, it will not be allotted
to the user on grabbing the port. Instead the user will get error tone. Also no IC call will be allowed. Likewise, when the
port is configured in NT mode is disabled, the IC call will not be allowed to land on this port. The port will be treated as
absent and accordingly other activities will be performed like routing the call to other stations in the group, etc.
Use following command to enable/disable BRI port:
6201-1-BRI-Port Status
6201-2-BRI-BRI-Port Status
6201-*-Port Status
Where,
By default, the BRI Port is enabled.
Service Provider
Use following command to assign a Service Provider to the BRI port:
6202-1-BRI-SP
6202-2-BRI-BRI-SP
6202-*-SP
Where,
By default, all the BRI ports are assigned SP = 01.
This parameter is insignificant when BRI port is configured in NT mode.
BRI ISDN Switch Variant
Program the BRI ISDN Switch Variant of the BRI Port.
Use following command to program the ISDN BRI Switch Variant of the BRI port:
6203-1-BRI-ISDN BRI Switch Variant
6203-2-BRI-BRI-ISDN BRI Switch Variant
6203-*-ISDN BRI Switch Variant
Where,
By default, ISDN BRI Switch Variant is 06.
Companding
The companding law can be programmed for the BRI port. Generally, the countries using T1 use m-law whereas
countries using E1 use A-law.
Use following command to program the type of interface companding for the BRI port:
6205-1-BRI-Companding
6205-2-BRI-BRI-Companding
6205-*-Companding
Where,
ISDN BRI Variant Meaning
01 ATT_4ESS
02 ATT_5ESS
03 AUSTRALIA
04 AUTO CONFIG
05 DMS_100
06 ETSI_NET3
07 NTT_INS64
08 SWV_HONG_KONG
09 US_NI1
10 US_NI2
11 VN_X
Companding Meaning
1 A-Law
Matrix
By default, all the BRI ports are configured for A-law.
Idle Code
Use following command to program the Idle Code for the BRI port:
6207-1-BRI-Idle Code
6207-2-BRI-BRI-Idle Code
6207-*-Idle Code
Where,
Idle Code is from 000 to 255.
The binary equivalent of the programmed value (000 to 255) is sent on the channel to signify that the channel is idle. (or
Unused) This setting depends on the network. Most commonly applicable values are 7F and FF (Binary equivalent is
0111 1111 and 1111 1111, decimal equivalent is 127 and 255).
By default, Idle Code for the BRI port is 127 (7F).
Overlap Receiving Timer:
Use following command to set overlap receiving timer for BRI:
6208-1-BRI-Timer
6208-2-BRI-BRI-Timer
6208-*-Timer
Where,
BRI is from 01 to 32
Timer is from 001 to 255 seconds.
Default= 015 seconds.
This timer is relevant while receiving the called party number information in overlap receiving mode. It is not relevant for
overlap sending mode
Pause Timer
Use following command to program Pause Timer:
6209-1-BRI- Pause Timer
6209-2-BRI-BRI-Pause Timer
Where,
This Timer is used to provide delay for the number dialing by the BRI port. Pause timer will be applicable when any 'P'
digit is configured in the DTMF number string which is to be outdialed as DTMF digits on BRI port. One of the applications
for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter Multi-Stage Dialing.
DTMF ON Time
Use following command to program DTMF ON Time:
6210-1-BRI-DTMF ON Time
6210-2-BRI-BRI-DTMF ON Time
6210- * - DTMF ON Time
Where,
This parameter decides for how much time the DTMF digit will be ON, while out dialed by the ETERNITY. One of the
Use following command to program DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer:
6211-1-BRI- DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
2 Mu-Law
Companding Meaning
Matrix
6211-2-BRI-BRI- DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
6211- * - DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
Where,
Orientation Type:
Use following command to program Orientation Type for the BRI port:
6204-1-BRI-Orientation Type
6204-2-BRI-BRI-Orientation Type
6204-*-Orientation Type
Where,
By default Type = 1.
When Orientation=Terminal, the port will be regarded as trunk. All the trunk related parameters will be applicable.
When Orientation=Network, the port will be regarded as station. All the station related parameters will be applicable.
made through it.
Debug
Debug information of various parts of the card can be obtained on the COM port of the card.
Use following command to get appropriate debug information for the BRI port:
6291-1-BRI-Level-Code
6291-2-BRI-BRI-Level-Code
6291-*-Level-Code
Where,
Level is from 1 to 4 (As shown below).
Code is the value for the specified level to turn ON the debug for the parameters Code range = 000 to 255. Code value
'000' for each level will turn off that level's debug.
Level and Code for BRI port are as below:
Level 1
Level 2
Orientation Type Meaning
1 Terminal
2 Network
3 Tie Line
Unused Flow NLS LAP SVC Primitives Variables State Primitives
Code Meaning
001 Primitives
002 State
004 Variables
008 SVC Primitives
016 LAP
032 NLS
064 Flow Debug
000 Debug Off
Unused Unused Unused DTMF Digit Unused Layer 4 Unused Unused
Matrix
Level 3
Level 4
By Default Debug = off for all BRI ports for all levels.
Example:
If '004' decimal value is entered as Debug Code for Level 1, then its binary equivalent '100' (0000100) indicates that
debug for "Variables" will get enabled.
If "007" decimal value is entered as a Debug Code for the Level 1, then its binary equivalent "111" (00000111)
indicates that debug for "Primitives", "States" and "Variables" will get enabled.
Caller TON
Use following command to program a Caller TON for the BRI port:
6221-1-BRI-Caller TON
6221-2-BRI-BRI-Caller TON
6221-*-Caller TON
Where,
By default, Caller TON for BRI is Unknown.
Caller NPI
Use following command to program a Caller NPI for the BRI port:
6222-1-BRI-Caller NPI
6222-2-BRI-BRI-Caller NPI
6222-*-Caller NPI
Where,
Code Meaning
004 Layer 4
016 DTMF Digit
000 Debug Off
Unused Unused Unused HDLC D-Channel Unused Unused Unused Unused
Code Meaning
016 HDLC D-Channel
000 Debug Off
Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused OS Task NI
Code Meaning
001 Network Interface (NI)
002 OS Task
000 Debug Off
Caller TON Meaning
1 Unknown
2 International Number
3 National Number
4 Network Specific Number
5 Subscriber Number
7 Reserved Number
Matrix
By default, Caller NPI for BRI is ISDN Numbering.
Called Party Caller TON
Use following command to program a Called Party destination TON for the BRI port:
6223-1-BRI-Called Party TON
6223-2-BRI-BRI-Called Party TON
6223-*-Called Party TON
Where,
By default, Called Party TON for BRI is Unknown.
Called Party NPI
Use following command to program a Called Party NPI for the BRI port:
6224-1-BRI-Called Party NPI
6224-2-BRI-BRI-Called Party NPI
6224-*-Called Party NPI
Where,
By default, Called Party NPI for BRI is ISDN Numbering.
OG Reference ID
Use following command to program an OG Reference ID to a BRI port:
6231-1-BRI-OG Reference ID
6231-2-BRI-BRI-OG Reference ID
6231-*-OG Reference ID
Where,
OG Reference ID is from 00 or 01 to 99.
Caller NPI Meaning
1 Unknown
2 ISDN Numbering
3 Date Numbering
4 Telex Numbering
5 National Numbering
6 Private
7 Reserved
Called Party TON Meaning
1 Unknown
2 International Number
3 National Number
4 Network Specific Number
5 Subscriber Number
7 Reserved Number
Called Party NPI Meaning
1 Unknown
2 ISDN Numbering
3 Date Numbering
4 Telex Numbering
5 National Numbering
6 Private
7 Reserved
Matrix
By default, OG Reference ID for BRI is 00.
This command is significant only if the BRI port is configured in TE mode.
IC Reference ID-WH
Use following command to program an IC Reference ID-WH on the BRI port:
6232-1-BRI-IC Reference ID
6232-2-BRI-BRI-IC Reference ID
Where,
By default, IC Reference ID-WH for BRI is 00.
IC Reference ID-BH
Use following command to program an IC Reference ID-BH on the BRI port:
Where,
IC Reference ID is from 00 or 01 to 99.
By default, IC Reference ID-BH for BRI is 00.
IC Reference ID-NH
Use following command to program an IC Reference ID-NH on the BRI port:
Where,
IC Reference ID is from 00 or 01 to 99.
By default, IC Reference ID-NH for BRI is 00.
Reserved Channels
Use the following command to program number of channels reserved for data transmission:
6235-1-BRI-Channel Count
6235-2-BRI-BRI-Channel Count
6235-*-Channel Count
Where,
Channel Count is from 00 to 02.
By default, Number of Channels is 02.
Channels Reserved for OG Calls
Use following command to reserve the number of channels for OG calls on a BRI port.
Where,
By default, Channel is reserved for OG Calls for BRI is 2. Both the channels are used for receiving OG calls.
Channels reserved for IC Calls
Use following command to reserve the number of channels for IC calls on a BRI port.
Where,
Matrix
By default, Channel is reserved for IC Calls for BRI is 2. Both the channels are used for receiving IC calls.
TEI Negotiation
SE can select the Automatic or Fixed TEI negotiation for each BRI port as required. If Fixed TEI negotiation is selected,
the value of fixed TEI negotiation is required to be programmed.
TEI Negotiation Mode
Use following command to select TEI Negotiation on a BRI port:
6238-1-BRI-TEI Negotiation Mode
6238-2-BRI-BRI-TEI Negotiation Mode
6238-*-TEI Negotiation Mode
Where,
By default, TEI Negotiation Mode is Automatic
TEI Value
Use following command to program TEI Negotiation value when programmed as Fixed:
6239-1-BRI-TEI Value
6239-2-BRI -BRI-TEI Value
6239-*-TEI Value
Where,
TEI Value is from 00 to 63
By default, TEI Value is 00
SE should take care of following points while using above commands for TEI negotiation:
When you change the TEI mode on any port, the BRI card will get reset.
If you have selected 'Fixed' mode, program the value as per the value of port connected at remote end as explained
below:
TEI Value programmed in the BRI (NT) should match with the TEI value programmed in the Terminal equipment
connected with it.
TEI value of BRI (TE) port of ETERNITY should match with the TEI value expected by the NT equipment at other
end.
Commands for ISDN-Terminal
Program Access Code for the ISDN Terminal:
Use following command to program access code for ISDN Terminal:
3103-1-ISDN Terminal-Access Code-#*
3103-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Access Code-#*
Where,
Access Code is of maximum six digits. Terminate with # if less than 6 digits.
By default, Access code for ISDN Terminal is as shown below:
To default access code for ISDN Terminal:
Use following command to default access code for ISDN terminals:
TEI Negotiation mode Meaning
0 Automatic (Non-fixed)
1 Fixed
ISDN Terminal Access Code
01 3201
02 3202
: :
64 3264
Matrix
3153-1-ISDN Terminal
3153-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal
3153-*
Where,
ISDN-Terminal is from 01 to 64.
Use following command to assign a BRI software port to ISDN Terminal:
7301-1-ISDN Terminal-BRI
7301-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-BRI
7301-*-BRI
Where,
BRI is from 00 o 32.
By default, No BRI port is assigned to any ISDN Terminal and BRI is 00.
Use following command to de-assign the ISDN Terminal from BRI Port:
7301-1-ISDN Terminal-00
7301-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-00
7301-*-00
Name
The called station will get this name on his display when the ISDN terminal will call him, refer topic Name Programming
for more details.
Call Pickup Group
Refer chapter Call Pick Up to assign call pickup group to ISDN terminal.
Use following command to assign Personal Directory to an ISDN Terminal.
1907-1-ISDN Terminal-Personal Directory
1907-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Personal Directory
1907-*-Personal Directory
Where,
ISDN Terminals = 01 to 64.
Personal Directory = 01 to 50
By default, personal directory = 01.
To assign the manual time zone for ISDN Terminal. Please refer Time Tables for more details.
This command is used to enable Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on BRI trunk. Refer chapter Gateway
Step 1
Use following command to set flag for Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on BRI trunk:
6206-1-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
6206-2-BRI-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
6206-*-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
Where,
By default, Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag is 'disable'.
Step 2
6212-1-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
6212-2-BRI-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
6212-*-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
using #*.
By default Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String is 'CCC'.
Layer 1 Mode
This parameter is applicable for BRI port, when orientation type is 'Terminal'.
The Public ISDN provides different types of lines in different countries as mentioned below:
On Demand
Always ON
In 'On Demand' type of line, layer 1 (physical layer) remains 'down' when the line is idle.
When the network places incoming call, it activates the layer 1 and places the call.
When the terminal makes out going call, the layer 1 gets activated automatically.
In 'Always ON' type of line, layer 1 is always 'up', in normal condition.
In this type of line, 'layer 1 down' indicates fault condition and calls get failed.
Use following command to program 'Layer 1 Mode' for BRI port:
6225-1-BRI-Layer 1 Mode
Where,
Select the 'Layer 1 Mode' parameter, depending upon the type of line, terminated on BRI port of ETERNITY.
By default, Layer 1 Mode is 'Always ON'.
Notes for using above command:
When Layer 1 mode is set as 'Always ON', the ETERNITY uses this BRI to place call only if the layer 1 is 'up'. When
layer 1 goes 'down', ETERNITY considers the line as un-healthy and will not use this BRI as destination port.
ETERNITY will place the call using the alternate port programmed in the same routing group.
When Layer 1 mode is set as 'On Demand', ETERNITY will not check the layer 1 condition while placing call through
this BRI.
The default Layer 1 Mode is 'Always ON'. Hence, if the interfaced line is of 'On Demand' type, the calls will not get
routed through BRI port, unless the 'Layer 1 Mode' is changed to 'On Demand'.
When the port is un-healthy, the ETERNITY routes the call using other healthy port. However, this depends upon the
member selection method and other ports programmed in the OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG). Refer chapter 'OG
Trunk Bundle Group' for more details.

Relevant Topics:
1. ISDN-PRI 586
2. ISDN-An Introduction 569
=X=X=
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
* **
# ##
Layer 1 Mode Meaning
1 Always ON
2 On Demand
Matrix
ISDN-PRI
Whats this?
This chapter explains the connection of PRI line, and application of PRI. Refer chapter ISDN-An Introduction for more
details.
For MSN Numbering System, please refer ISDN-BRI.
PRI port of the ETERNITY configured for NT mode can be connected to the PRI Port of another PBX configured for
TE mode. In such case, the ETERNITY will behave as Transit Exchange.
Dialing method on the PRI port is not programmable. The PRI port (configured for TE mode) will send the called party
number in Enbloc mode.
All the switch variants are applicable to the PRI port whether programmed in TE or NT mode.
Applications:
Applications for PRI-NT Port are as described below:
Videoconferencing system connected to the PRI-NT port with IC/OG calls.
Data Calls support.
Networking of PBXs.
Videoconferencing system connected to the PRI-NT port:
Connect the Video Conference system (H.320) to the PRI-NT port of the ETERNITY.
This feature works only if it is supported by the Service Provider. Video Conference is established mainly by the Video
Conferencing (VC) equipment.
Video Conferencing requires 6 B-channels. But Video Conferencing can also be done at lower bit rates also using the
aggregation of 6 B channels which must be supported by the VC equipment.
The VC equipment uses two methods:H.221 and H.242 BONDING, for aggregation.
More than one Videoconferencing system can be connected to the ETERNITY to each PRI-NT port.
It also supports internal calling like, one Video Conferencing system to another.
OG calls from VC
After suitable connections to the VC equipment, user follows following sequence:
Program the OGTBG (OG Trunk Bundle Group) such that the user gets at least 6 B-channels of the same PRI
port.
Go OFF-Hook.
Dial the trunk access code to grab the PRI trunk.
Dial the destination number.
If VC at the called party responds, the call is established which occupies 6-B Channels.
If 6 B-channels on the same PRI port are not available, user at VC will get busy tone.
The user at calling partys VC gets dial tone of the ISDN exchange.
The user at VC starts dialing the destination number. The destination number is sent in keypad IE by the VC user to
the PRI-NT port whereas it is dialed on the PRI-TE port in the method programmed for the port i.e. Enbloc.
Rest of the signaling is done between the VC equipment and the called partys VC equipment.
If VC equipment supports Phone Book feature, user can make call using the feature.
At the end of VC, all the 6 B-channels are freed and available for other users.
It is preferable that the SE will assign an OGTBG to the Video Conferencing equipment in such a manner that the
same group is not assigned to any other station. This is to allow Video Conferencing call at any time.
IC Video Call:
PBX
ISDN
PRI NT
PRI TE
Video
Conferencing
System
Matrix
Following steps are followed for IC call:
Program the system to place IC video calls to the PRI-NT port using DDI Routing Table.
For this, program the DDI Routing Table. Refer related chapter.
You can also prepare the Trunk Landing Group (Routing Group) to land the call to PRI-NT port. For this purpose,
Routing Group is to be modified.
Data Calls from PRI-NT:
ETERNITY PRI-NT port supports data communication also.
For data-communication, connect the Router supporting ISDN-PRI or a Computer with ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI
to the PRI-NT port as shown below:
Using this feature following applications are supported:
The computers connected in the LAN can browse the net through the PRI.
Remote LAN Access the Computers in the LAN can access the computer/computers in LAN at the remote end
(Branch office/Home office).
Files can be transferred from one LAN to another.
OG Data calls from the Router
The data call can be made by the router requesting desired number of channels. This establishes a live connection
between the Router and the ISP through the PBX. The users on the LAN can browse the net as normal using Internet
Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
For this, the ETERNITY will allocate data channels only on the PRI-TE port so as to leave other channels for speech
calls when the system detects the call to be a data call.
Similarly, a Remote Computer can be accessed (Remote LAN Access) by dialing the Remote users number (The
remote end PBX should be so programmed that the call made to a number lands directly on the Router.) This
establishes a permanent connection between the two Routers (and hence two LAN networks).
Now the user at PBX-A can access the computer in LAN at the remote end in the same way as accessing another
computer on the same network.
IC Data calls to the Router:
Program the Trunk Landing Group such that all data calls will land on the PRI-NT port to which the Router is
connected using CLI based Routing logic or DDI based routing logic.
However, while routing call on the PRI-NT port, the PBX will check that the data channels reserved for data
communication on the PRI-NT port are enough to establish the call. Otherwise the call will be rejected.
The call will be rejected if the number of channels, reserved for data calls are already busy with one data-call.
Networking of PBXs:
One of the applications is also for connecting multiple PBX using PRI-NT and PRI-TE ports. A simple connection of only
two PBXs is explained below. Refer following figure for connecting another PBX to the PRI-NT port.
Various cases of Calls from PBX-A to PBX-B can be:
PBX
ISDN
PRI NT
PRI TE
Router
Hub
PBX-A
ISDN
PRI NT
PRI TE
ISDN
PRI TE
PRI TE
2001
3001
PBX-B
Matrix
Case-1: (2001 calls 3001)
A station 2001 of PBX-A can call a station 3001 of PBX-B by dialing 3001.
Such a call can be routed using CUG table of PBX-A. Refer chapter Closed User Group (CUG).
Case-2: (2001 calls a subscriber of ISDN network connected to PBX-B)
Method 1
Program (for PBX-A) an OGTBG containing the PRI-NT port and assign Trunk access code to it.
Grab the PRI-NT by dialing access code. User of 2001 will get dummy dial tone of the PBX-A.
Dial a station number 3001 of PBX-B.
Method 2
User of 2001 can dial trunk access code of PBX-A, and dial a trunk access code of PBX-B. He will be connected to
ISDN network through PBX-B.
Then he can make OG call on PRI-NT port as per method programmed for the PRI-NT port. (For example, PRI-NT
port can be programmed as a Trunk port and when station user of PBX-B grabs the PRI-NT port, his call will be
placed on the destination programmed for PRI-NT port in the Trunk Landing Group).
Case-3: (3001 to 2001)
Station 3001 of PBX-B will go Off-Hook.
Using CUG feature of PBX-B, 3001 can call 2001 through PRI-NT port. Refer chapter Closed User Group (CUG) for
more details.
3001 can also dial Trunk Access Code to grab its PRI-TE port. He will get dial tone of PRI-NT Port of PBX-A. Now
3001 can dial 2001 or trunk access code to make a call to the ISDN network connected to PBX-A.
How to program?
For programming of the PRI, please refer topic DS1 Trunks for more details.
Important Points:
Trunk software ports are automatically assigned to the PRI port by the system depending on the slot in which they are
inserted.
Please take care to terminate the PRI line on the HDSL interface only of the ISDN modem.
The DDI Routing and Routing Tables shall be programmed as explained in chapters on DDI.
Relevant Topics:
1. ISDN-An Introduction 569
2. Software Port and Hardware ID 755
3. DS1 Trunks 475
=X=X=
Matrix
Jeeves
Whats this?
Matrix supplies a special windows based software package to program the ETERNITY through the Internet, known as
Jeeves. Description of following features related to web will help in programming the system:
Attention:
Before programming any feature/parameters refer chapter Class of Service (COS) and allow it, if required.
Please refer 'Front Desk Wizard'; a 'Windows' based Jeeves software, supplied by Matrix, for Hotel/Motel
Applications. This is a user friendly, password-protected configuration tool which is programmable by:
System Engineer (SE), System Administrator (SA) and Front Desk User.
Thus we have System Engineer Wizard, System Administrator Wizard and Front Desk Wizard.
Following terms are explained for using Web based programming Jeeves.
IP Address
An IP address (Internet Protocol address) is a unique number, similar in concept to a telephone number, used by
network devices (computers, time-servers, FAX machines, some telephones) attached to a network to refer to each
other when sending information through a LAN or a WAN or the Internet for example.
An example of IP address is 207.142.131.236.
The Internet Protocol (IP) knows each logical host interface by a number, the so-called IP address. On any given
network, this number must be unique among all the host interfaces that communicate through this network.
For all programs that utilize the TCP/IP protocol, the sender IP address and destination IP address are required in
order to establish communications and send data.
Sub Net Mask Address
A network mask, also known as a subnet mask, net mask or address mask, is a bit mask used to tell how much of an
IP address identifies the sub network the host is on and how much identifies the host.
Subnet masks are usually represented in the same representation used for addresses themselves e.g. 255.128.0.0.
Sub netting is the process of allocating bits from the host portion as a network portion.
For example, giving the class A network 10.0.0.0 a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0 would break it down into 256 sub-
network (10.0.0.0 to 10.255.0.0).
Indicating that the first octet of the IP address shows the network address, the second one shows the subnet number
and the last two show the host part.
Default gateway
A default gateway is a node on a computer network that serves as an access point to another network.
In enterprises, the gateway is the computer that routes the traffic from a workstation to the outside network that is
serving the Web pages.
In homes, the gateway is the ISP that connects the user to the internet.
A default gateway is used by a host when an IP packet's destination address belongs to someplace outside the local
subnet (thus requiring more than one hop of Ethernet communication).
The default gateway address is usually an interface belonging to the LAN's border router.
Domain Name System (DNS)
DNS is a system that stores information about host names and domain names in a type of distributed database on
networks, such as the Internet.
Of the many types of information that can be stored, most importantly it provides a physical location (IP Address) for
each domain name and lists the mail exchange servers accepting e-mail for each domain.
The DNS provides a vital service on the Internet as it allows the transmission of technical information in a user
friendly way.
While computers and network hardware work with IP addresses to perform tasks such as addressing and routing,
humans generally find it easier to work with hostnames and domain names (such as www.example.com) in URLs
and e-mail addresses.
Class First Bits Start End Mask in dotted decimal
A 0 1.0.0.0 126.0.0.0 255.0.0.0
B 10 128.0.0.0 191.255.0.0 255.255.0.0
C 110 192.0.0.0 233.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Matrix
The DNS therefore mediates between the needs and preferences of humans and of software.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
The DHCP is a client-server networking protocol.
A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the host to participate on the Internet network.
DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
MAC Address
Media Access Control Address-MAC Address is the unique address that a manufacture assigns to each networking
device.
Consists of two parts: 24-bit Company ID (manufacturer ID0, and 24-bit Extension ID (board ID).
How to use it?
Double Click on Internet Explorer icon or Click on Start Programs Internet Explorer.
Enter IP Address at Address Bar after confirming from SE. Let us say IP Address 192.168.1.103 is entered at
Address Bar on opening page of Microsoft Internet Explorer.
Log in as SE
Log in as SA
Matrix
Click on option to 'Log in as SE', if you are a System Engineer. Feature Menu is displayed on the left side of Welcome
page.
Click Login after entering valid User Password for SE:
Matrix
You will get 'Home Page' with Links of menu on left side:
In order to make required changes in features, Click on any concerned feature.
To elaborate:
Example 1:
Click Class of Service features. Default list of COS feature and COS groups is shown.
In order to enable a particular feature in particular COS group, click particular box or remove Tick mark to disable a
particular feature.
Matrix
Click Submit to make the changes made effective.
Click Default in order to default COS Table.
Matrix
Click Default One in order to default only one COS group out of displayed COS groups.
Select the COS group from the list and click OK.
Above programming can also be done by using respective commands for concerned features.
Matrix
You can click Home to go to Home page.
Click Contact, Matrix contact address is displayed for any assistance.
You can click Logout to exit programming through Jeeves and to reach Home page.
Matrix
How to program?
Step 1
Use following command to program Web Configuration IP Address of Master Ethernet Port:
2110-Address-Address-Address-Address
Where,
Address is from 000 to 255 for first three octets and 001 to 254 for fourth octet.
By default, IP Address is 192.168.001.101
Note: When system is made default, Master Ethernet port parameter will not default.
Step 2
Use following command to program Sub Net Mask Address of Master Ethernet Port:
Where,
Address is from 000 to 255.
By default, IP Address is 255.255.255.000.
Step 3
Use following command to program Web Configuration Gateway IP Address of Master Ethernet Port:
Where,
Step 4
Use following command to program Web Configuration Primary DNS Address of Master Ethernet Port:
Where,
Step 5
Use following command to program Web Configuration Secondary DNS Address of Master Ethernet Port:
Where,
Step 6
Use following command to program Web Configuration Host Name of Master Ethernet Port:
2115-Name
Where,
Name is a string of maximum 16 Characters.
Step 7
Use following command to program Web Configuration Domain Name of Master Ethernet Port:
2116-Name
Where,
Name is a string of maximum 16 Characters.
Step 8
Use following command to enable/disable Web Configuration DHCP Flag of Master Ethernet Port:
2117-Flag
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Step 9
Use following command to program Web Configuration Time Out Timer:
2118-Time Out Timer
Where,
Time Out Timer is from 001 to 255 minutes.
By default, Time Out Timer is 010 minutes.
Step 10
Use following command to program Web Configuration Release for all web users (logout):
2119
Step 11
Use following command to program Web Configuration Release for selective web user (logout):
2120-User
Where,
User is from 1 to 4.
Step 12
The 'Listening port of Web Server' is programmable. Refer chapter System Parameters for the command to program
'Listening port of Web Server'.
=X=X=
Matrix
Key Board Macro
Whats this?
Many times, it is required that the user dials a short access code for a specific function. The specific function can be
dialing a feature code, making an internal call, making an external call, etc.
This feature also supports few proprietary telephone instruments wherein a string is dialed on the SLT when a key is
pressed on the telephone instrument.
For example a SLT instrument possess 10 special purpose keys. When these keys are pressed, strings *50 to *59 are
dialed on the SLT.
An access code corresponds to each key.
The system takes appropriate action on receiving these digits. The actions could be making an external call, making
an internal call, using a feature code, etc.
ETERNITY allows you to abbreviate a long, regularly used function into a macro and assign it to a DSS key. Hence
the name Key Board Macro.
When the DSS key is pressed the corresponding access code is executed.
Key Board Macros simplify day to day operations.
Key Board Macro is allowed to SLT and DKP users.
These access codes should not clash with any other Access code in dial state.
How to use it?
A maximum of 25 keyboard macros can be made.
The keyboard macros can be accessed by SLT and DKP users.
How to program?
Step 1
Use the following command to create a Macro:
1810-Macro Index-Number String
Where,
Macro Index is from 01 to 25.
Number String is a string of 24-digits (A complete feature code or programming command).
If the length of the Number String is less than 24-digits terminate it with #*.
Use the following command to clear a Macro:
1810-Macro Index-#*
Where,
Note:
User can program a special digit for 'Pause' in the Key Board Macro Number string using code #3.
Step 2
Use the following command to program Access codes for the Macros:
3115-1-Macro Index-Access Code
3115-2-Macro Index-Macro Index-Access Code
3115-*-Access Code
Where,
Access Code is a string of 4-digits.
Access Code is maximum of 6 digits. If it is less than 6 digits, terminate it with #*.
Use following command to clear Access Code:
3115-1-Macro Index
3115-2-Macro Index-Macro Index
3115-*
Matrix
Step 3
Use the following command to default access code for the Macro:
3165-1-Macro Index
3165-2-Macro Index-Macro Index
3165-*
Where,
Default Macros for all countries is 'Blank' (for Enterprise mode of ETERNITY).
Refer separate Manual for Hotel Application of this feature and defaults for Hotel Mode of ETERNITY.
Refer chapter System Parameters for the command for Enterprise Mode of ETERNITY.
Step 4
For more details on assigning a keyboard macro to a DSS key please refer to the topic Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys
Programming.
Example:
Make a Key Board Macro to Call Forward-All Calls to operator (Station Number 2001).
Assign it to Key Number 07 of DKP 001.
Assign an Access Code for it.
1810-01-1312001-#* (Make a Key Board Macro)
1252-1-001-07-14-01 (Assign it to key 7 of DKP 001)
3115-1-01-*50-#* (Assign Access code for Macro)
Now to Call Forward-All Calls to Station 2001, the station user just need to press DSS key (07) of his DKP, or press *50
to Call Forward-All Calls to Station 2001.
The following tables explain the above example and the relationship among Macro Index, Access Code and Number
String may look as given below:
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Macro Index Access Code
01 *50
02 *51
03 *52
: :
25 *55
Macro Index Number String Meaning
01 1312001 Call Forward-All calls to Station 2001
02 1322002 Call Forward-If Busy to Station 2002
03 1332003 Call Forward-If No Reply to Station 2003
: : :
25 1342004 Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply to Station 2004
Matrix
Last Caller Recall
Whats this?
ETERNITY offers a facility to trace last caller to your station.
How to use it?
Example:
Station 2001 wants to find out who made a last call to it.
Station 2001 should dial 112 from his station. The station that last called 2001 rings. Speech establishes when the called
party answers the call.
=X=X=
2 Dial 1092. The station that last called you rings. You get Ring Back Tone.
3 Called party answers the call. Speech.
Matrix
Last Number Redial
Whats this?
This feature redials the last external number string.
This feature saves time during retrying a busy external number. It is same as REDIAL button of the telephone
instrument.
This feature is also known as Last Number Redial (LNR).
How to use Redial from SLT?
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow redial to a user.
Timer of Relevance:
Pause Timer-Please refer Trunk Feature Template for more details.
Important Points:
The system uses the same trunk access code you used for dialing the number last time.
All the digits dialed out by the DKP are stored in buffer. This buffer contains the digits dialed between last OFF-Hook
and last ON-Hook.
When the DKP user presses the function key Redial (the printed key) or the DSS key for this feature, the system
dials out the number string.
If the station is programmed for dynamic lock, and user makes use Last Number Redial feature, the system will
check the Toll control as per dynamic lock level.
Relevant Topics:
3. Dialed Number Directory 415
4. Dynamic Lock 512
=X=X=
2 Press 7. Silence.
3 The system grabs a trunk. Trunk dial tone
4 The system dials out the last number.
Matrix
Least Cost Routing-An Introduction
Whats this?
Different basic service providers offer different rates for different times of the day and the destination numbers. For
example, SP1 may offer cheaper rates compared to SP2 for calls made during peak hours. i.e. 09.00 to 20.00. Whereas
SP2 may offer cheaper rates as compared to SP1 during off peak hours i.e. 20.00 to 09.00.
Least cost routing logic is used to select the cheapest trunk from the total allotted trunks to the station to make outgoing
calls. This way, the cost of outgoing calls can be minimized, by selecting the most economical trunk depending upon the
time of call and the destination number.
Above diagram shows that few trunks of both SP2 and SP1 are interfaced with ETERNITY. Here it is desirable to use
LCR facility if these service providers offer different rates.
ETERNITY offers five different types of LCR logic.
Time based LCR
This logic is used when different SPs provide different rates during different timings of the day. This logic uses online
dialing. In online dialing, the digits dialed by the user are directly passed on the trunk.
Number based LCR
This logic is used when different SPs provide different rates for different areas, different phone numbers. For
example, BSNL provides cheaper rates for a call made from Baroda to Delhi as compared to Reliance. This logic
uses Store and Forward dialing. In Store and Forward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and then
these are dialed on the trunk.
Mixed LCR
This logic is used when the rates of service providers differ both time wise and number wise. For example, SP1
provides cheaper rates for a call made from city A to city B during peak hrs (09.00 to 20.00) as compared to SP2.
Whereas SP2 provides cheaper rates for a call made from city A to city B during off peak hours (20.00 to 09.00). This
logic uses Store and Forward dialing. In Store and Forward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and
then these are dialed on the trunk.
SP-SP LCR
This logic is used when a SP provides different rates for calling a number to his own network and calling number to
some other SPs network. For e.g. SP1 provides cheaper rates to call a SP1 number in City A and City B as compared
to calling a SP2 in City A and City B.
Carrier Pre Selection LCR
In countries where the telephone system has been deregulated it is possible for subscriber to choose the carrier they
want to use for long distance calls. The choice of the carrier is based on cost of calls and the number of lines offered.
The subscriber does not have to change his telephone lines to be able to access cheap long distance call service.
How to program?
To program the LCR, first of all the type of LCR for an OGTBG had to be chosen (viz. Time Zone, Number, Mixed
LCR, SP-SP) and a service provider code to each trunk has to be assigned.
To program LCR-CPS the ANT has to be enabled in OG Trunk Bundle.
Matrix
For more details on how each type is to be programmed refer the respective topics viz. Least Cost Routing-Number
Based, Least Cost Routing-Time Based, Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based, Least Cost Routing-SP to
SP, Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection.
Relevant Topics:
1. Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection 604
2. Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based 605
3. Least Cost Routing-Number Based 608
4. Least Cost Routing-Time Based 612
5. Least Cost Routing-SP to SP 610
=X=X=
Matrix
Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection
Whats this?
This feature is used in European and the American market. In India the same service provider provides local call and long
distance call service. However, in Europe and other western countries this is not true. In these countries, the service
providers for short distances (Local area) and long distances are different unlike India, where the service provider is the
same for short and long distances. For e.g. in India SP1, SP2, SP3 etc. provide both short distance as well as long
distance services. In simple words, a customer stationed at City A and has a SP1 connection can call a friend in City A
using SP1 services. Also he can call another friend in City B using SP1 services because SP1 also provides services in
City B. However this is not true in American and European market.
A user is a subscriber of SP0 and has trunk lines of SP0 only. He can call other subscriber in the local area simply by
grabbing a trunk. However, when he wants to make a long distance call, he needs to dial a string called dialed number
string of the dialed number list for ANT to select a carrier (trunk) of the desired long distance Service Provider. That is
accessing a secondary service provider by dialing a short code. He can make the long distance call using SP1, SP2 or
SP3 and to select either of these SPs, he needs to dial a number from dialed number list of ANT. Once the trunk of the
secondary SP is selected all your calls are rerouted to your secondary SPs network, using corresponding Substitute
Number String of ANT.
How it works?
This feature can be implemented using ANT feature by programming the Dialed and substitute number lists as
explained below:
Member of the OGTBG are OG trunk bundles and each OG trunk bundle have facility to use ANT feature.
To serve the purpose of CPS feature the ANT has to be enabled for the OG trunk bundle and the Dialed and
substitute number lists shall be programmed accordingly.
For Example:
If it is required that the dialed number 2630555, should get appended by 961 whenever it is dialed out from the
trunk port TWT01, then:
SE will program the TWT01 in OG Trunk Bundle.
ANT will be enabled for this OG Trunk Bundle and the Dialed number list index will be programmed as 2630555
and the substitute number list will be programmed as 9612630555 in the same index.
The programmed OG Trunk Bundle will be programmed as the member of the OGTBG and the same OGTBG will
be assigned to the station user.
How to program?
Refer chapter Automatic Number Translation for more details.
Relevant Topics:
2. Automatic Number Translation 267
=X=X=
PBX Subs SP#0
SP#1
SP#2
SP#3
Matrix
Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based
Whats this?
This logic is used when the rates of service providers differ both time wise and number wise (Mixed). For example, SP1
provides cheaper rates for a call made from city A to city B during peak hrs (09.00 to 20.00) as compared to SP2.
Whereas SP2 provides cheaper rates for a call made from city A to city B during off peak hours (20.00 to 09.00). This
logic uses Store and Forward dialing. In Store and Forward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and
then these are dialed on the trunk.
How to program?
Step 1
Decide the LCR type i.e. whether no LCR, Time wise LCR, Number wise LCR or Mixed LCR.
Use following command to program LCR type for an OG Trunk Bundle Group:
1404-1-OGTBG-LCR Type
1404-2-OGTBG-OGTBG-LCR Type
1404-*-LCR Type
Where,
By default, LCR Type is No LCR.
Step 2
Assign the service provider code to a trunk.
Please refer TWT Hardware Template for more details.
Step 3
Make following table on a plain paper.
Suppose we have four basic service providers viz. SP#1, SP#2, SP#3 and SP#4.
For Area code 022 (Number String 1) in time zone 08.00-12.00, (time zone 1), SP1 provides cheapest services followed
by SP3, SP4 and SP2. Then the first entry in first row would be as shown.
For Area code 011 (Number String 2) in time zone 08.00-12.00 (time zone 1), SP4 provides cheapest services followed
by SP1, SP2 & SP43 then the second entry in first row would be as shown.
For Area code 022 (Number String 1) in time zone 12.00-18.00, (time zone 2), SP2 provides cheapest services followed
by SP3, SP1 and SP4. Then the first entry in second row would be as shown.
Use following command to program Time Zone Index for Mixed LCR:
3421-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time
Where,
Time Zone Index is from 01 to 08.
Start Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone starts.
End Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone ends.
By default, Time Zone is 00.00 to 23.59.
LCR Type Meaning
0 No LCR
1 Timezone Wise LCR
2 Number Wise LCR
3 Mixed LCR (Timezone + Number)
4 SP-SP Wise LCR
Number/Timezone 022 011 03 ...... 99
08:00-12:00 1,3,4,2 4,1,2,3 .... .... ....
12:00-18:00 2,3,1,4 .... .... .... ...
: : : : : :
08 : : : : :
Matrix
The time zone table looks like:
Use following command to program the number at number Index for Mixed LCR:
3422-Number Index-Number String-#*
Where,
Number Index is from 01 to 99.
Number String can be a complete telephone number, a truncated telephone number or an area code. Number string is of
maximum 16 digits.
By default, Number String is Blank.
Use the following command to clear a number index for mixed LCR:
3422-Number Index-#*
Use following command to program the Service Provider (SP) sequence for the each Number and Time Zone:
3423-Number Index-Time Zone Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4
Where,
SP1: Service Provider 1 is the cheapest service provider.
SP2: Service Provider 2 is the cheaper service provider.
SP3: Service Provider 3 is the cheap service provider.
SP4: Service Provider 4 is the costly service provider.
Use following command to default Mixed LCR:
3420
By default, Number Index is Blank.
By default, Time Zone is 00.00 to 23.59.
By default, Service Provider Sequence is 1,2,3,4.
Default mixed LCR table is shown below:
Example:
SP1 is cheapest for City A to City B (022 long distance code) call during 08.00-20.00 followed by SP4, SP3 and SP2.
SP3 is cheapest for City A to City C (011 long distance code) call during 20.00 to 08.00 followed by SP1, SP4 and
SP2.
Use following command to define LCR type:
1404-01-3
Use following command to program time zone index in mixed LCR:
3421-01-0800-2000
3421-02-2000-0800
Use following command to program the number at number index in mixed LCR:
3422-01-022-#*
3422-02-011-#*
Time Zone Index Start Time End Time
01 HH:MM HH:MM
02 HH:MM HH:MM
: : :
08 HH:MM HH:MM
Number/Timezone B B B ...... B
00:00-23:59 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4 : 1,2,3,4
00:00-23:59 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4 : 1,2,3,4
: : : : : :
00:00-23:59 1,2,3,4 : : : :
Matrix
Use following command to assign SPs.
3423-01-01-01-04-03-02
3423-02-02-03-01-04-02
Important Point:
If no match is found in the table the first entry in the table is used.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Matrix
Least Cost Routing-Number Based
Whats this?
This logic is used when different SPs provides different rates for different areas, different phone numbers. For example,
SP1 provides cheaper rates for a call made from City A to City B as compared to SP2. This logic uses Store and Forward
dialing. In Store and Forward dialing, the digits are first stored in a memory location and then dialed on the trunk.
How to program?
Step 1
Decide the LCR type.
Refer chapter Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based to program LCR type for an OG Trunk Bundle Group.
Step 2
Please refer TWT Hardware Template for more details.

Step 3
In the above table for Number Index 1 (Number string in Number Index 01 can be a complete telephone number, a
truncated number or an area code), program the service providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost. For example, if
we have four service providers viz. SP#1, SP#2, SP#3 and SP#4 and if for area code 022(to be input at number index
01), the services of SP1 are cheapest followed by SP3, SP4 and SP2 then the first row in the table would appear as
shown.
Use following command to program the number at number Index:
Where,
Number String can be a complete telephone number, a truncated telephone number or an area code. Number string is of
maximum 16 digits.
By default, Number String is Blank.
Use the following command to clear a number string for a number index:
Where,
Use following command to program the Service Provider (SP) sequence for the each Number:
3412-Number Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4
Where,
SP1: is the cheapest service provider.
SP2: is the cheaper service provider.
SP3: is the cheap service provider.
SP4: is the costly service provider.
Please note that it is mandatory to complete this command. You have to program the service provider sequence for each
number. If the number of service provider are less complete it with the cheapest service provider. SP is from 01 to 99.
By default, Service Provider Sequence is 1, 2, 3, 4.
Use following command to default Number wise LCR table:
3410
By default, Number String is blank and Service Provider Sequence is 1, 2, 3, 4.
No. Index Number String Service Provider in hierarchical order of increasing cost
01 123456789 01 03 04 02
02 321546987 02 01 03 00
: : : : : :
99 564789321 B B B B
Matrix
The default number wise LCR table would look like:
Example:
SP1 is cheapest for City A-City B call followed by SP3 and SP4.
SP2 offers cheapest service if a local is made to 813-323-2045 from 813-323-2046 followed by SP3, SP1 and SP4.
SP3 offers cheapest service for City A-City B call followed by SP1, SP2 and SP4.
Use following command to program number wise LCR type:
1404-1-02
Use following command to program number index for LCR:
3411-01-022-#* (Where 022 is the area of City B)
3411-02-813-323-2045-#*
3411-03-011-#* (Where 011 is the area code of City C)
Use following command to assign SPs for respective numbers:
3412-01-01-03-02-04
3412-02-02-03-01-04
3412-03-03-01-02-04
Important Point:
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
No. Index Number Service Provider in hierarchical order of increasing cost
01 B 01 02 03 04
02 B 01 02 03 04
: : : : : :
99 B 01 02 03 04
Matrix
Least Cost Routing-SP to SP
Whats this?
This logic is used when a SP provides different rates for calling a number to his own network and calling number to some
other SPs network. Suppose a call is to be made to a SP1 number in City A. Assume SP1 offers cheaper rates if calls
are made to its network only, it is desired that the call is made through a SP1 line only. The Station user is neither aware
as to which is the SP1 line nor is he careful to select cheapest line. The PBX is required to do the job. In this case SP-SP
LCR is used. Once the number is dialed, the PBX ignores the area code dialed out by the user and then starts checking
the number. If the call is made to a SP1 number, the PBX allots a SP1 line to the station user.
It is necessary to program the ignore digit count equal to the number of digits after which the LCR logic for selecting the
line is to be applied. Since truncated area codes are used, the ignore digit count may not be same as the area code.
Please refer Call Cost Calculation (CCC) for programming the ignore digit count and for better understanding.
How to program?
Step 1
Step 2
Assign the service provider code to a trunk. Please refer the topic TWT Hardware Template for more details.
Step 3
In the above table for number index 1, program the service providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost. For
example, if we have four service providers SP1, SP2 and SP3, SP4. For making calls from SP1 to SP1, SP1 is the
cheapest followed by SP4, SP2 and SP3. The first row in the table would appear as shown in the table.
Use following command to program Number String in the Number Index:
Where,
Number string can be complete telephone number, a truncated telephone number or an area code. Number string is of
maximum 16 digits.
By default, Number string is BLANK.
Use following command to clear Number String from the Number Index:
Use following command to program the Service Provider(SP) sequence for each Number:
Where,
SP1 is the cheapest Service Provider.
SP2 is the cheaper Service Provider.
SP3 is the cheap Service Provider.
SP4 is the costliest Service Provider.
SP is from 01 to 99
It is mandatory to complete this command. If fewer number of service providers are used, then repeat the cheapest
service provider for remaining SPs.
Use following command to default SP-SP wise LCR table:
3440
No. Index Number String Service Provider in hierarchical order of increasing cost
01 123456678 01 04 02 03
02 987654321 02 01 03 00
: : : : : :
99 234567890 B B B B
Matrix
By default, number String is Blank.
By default, Service Provider sequence is 1,2,3,4.
The Default SP-SP wise LCR table would look like:
Relevant Topics:
6. Region Code 705
=X=X=
No. Index Number Service Provider in hierarchical order of increasing cost
01 B 01 02 03 04
02 B 01 02 03 04
: : : : : :
99 B 01 02 03 04
Matrix
Least Cost Routing-Time Based
Whats this?
This logic is used when different SPs provide different rates during different timings of the day. This logic uses online
dialing. In online dialing, the digits dialed by the user are directly passed on the trunk.
How to program?
Step 1
Decide the LCR type
Step 2
Assign the service provider code to a trunk. Please refer the topic TWT Hardware Template for more details.
Step 3
In the above table for different time zones, program the service providers in hierarchical order of increasing cost. For
example, If we have four service providers SP#1, SP#2, SP#3 and SP#4 and if for time zone 1 (08.00 to 20.00) the
services of SP2 is cheapest followed by SP1, SP4 and SP3 then the first row in the table would appear as shown in the
table.
Use following command to program Time Zone Index:
3402-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time
Where,
Start Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone starts.
End Time is the time in HH:MM format when the Time zone ends.
Use following command to program the Service Provider (SP) sequence for the Time Zone:
3403-Time Zone Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4
Where,
SP1: is the cheapest service provider.
SP2: is the cheaper service provider.
SP3: is the cheap service provider.
SP4: is the costly service provider.
Please note that it is mandatory to complete this command. If fewer number of service providers are used, then repeat
the cheapest service provider for remaining SPs. SP is from 01 to 99.
Use following command to default Time Zone wise LCR table:
3401
By default, time zone is 00.00 to 23.59.
By default, service provider sequence is 1, 2, 3, 4.
The default time zone wise LCR table would look like:
Examples:
Index Time Zone Service Provider in hierarchical order of increasing cost
01 08:00-20:00 02 01 04 03
02 B 02 01 03 04
: : : : : :
08 B : : : :
Index Time Zone Service Provider in hierarchical order of increasing cost
01 00:00-23:59 01 02 03 04
02 00:00-23:59 01 02 03 04
: : : : : :
08 00:00-23:59 01 02 03 04
Matrix
Given: Four service providers are available viz. Service Provider Code 1,2,3,4. Four trunks with software port numbers
01, 02, 03 and 04 are available. 01 and 02 are from SP1, 03 is from SP2 and 04 is from SP3. All the trunks are in OG
Trunk Bundle Group 1.
First assign the SP code to each trunk using the TWT Hardware Template.
Example:
SP1 is cheapest during 08.00 to 16.00 followed by SP3, SP2 and SP4.
SP4 is cheapest during 16.00 to 20.00 followed by SP1, SP2 and SP3.
SP3 is cheapest for 20.00 to 23.00 followed by SP1, SP4 and SP2.
SP1 is cheapest for 23.00 to 08.00 followed by SP2, SP3 and SP4.
Use following command to program time zone LCR type for the OG Trunk Bundle Group:
1404-1-1-01
Use following command to program LCR time zones:
3402-1-0800-1600
3402-2-1600-2000
3402-3-2000-2300
3402-4-2300-0800
Use following commands to assign service providers for the respective time zone:
3403-01-01-03-02-04
3403-02-04-01-02-03
3403-03-03-01-04-02
3403-04-01-02-03-04
Important Point:
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Matrix
Live Call Screening
Whats this?
Live Call Screening is useful when a VMS is interfaced with the ETERNITY.
Many times a user may not want to attend calls and hence forwards all his calls to the VMS. However, he wants to
know the caller and the purpose of his call.
With LCS activated, whenever the caller starts recording a message in the mailbox of the user/called person, the
speaker of the DKP of the user gets turns ON. The message being recorded in the mailbox is also heard by the user.
If the user feels like talking to the caller, he simply needs to go OFF-Hook.
When the user goes OFF-Hook, the caller is connected to the user, and the system stops recording the message in
the mailbox.
If the user does not perform any action, the speaker is turned OFF automatically on expiry of the LCS timer.
LCS can be activated/deactivated as per the Users requirement.
LCS would work only if LCS is enabled from the COS and activated by the user.
After listening to some part of the message, if the user finds that the call is not important, then he can ignore the caller
by dialing any digit. When the user dials any digit, the speaker of the DKP is turned OFF while message recording in
the VMS continues.
DKP user will hear callers message, prompts of VMS which are meant for caller will not be heard by DKP user.
This feature will work in conjunction with Call Forward on VMS, i.e. both Call Forward on VMS and LCS, be enable of
for this feature to work.
How to use it?
To activate LCS
To deactivate LCS
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow LCS to a user.
Timer of Relevance:
LCS Timer-Time for which the speaker remains ON while the message from the caller is being recorded.
Important Points:
A voice mail system of Matrix (CADENCEPRO/ETERNITY ME/GE/PE VMS Card) or any external Voicemail system
must be installed to use this feature.
If VMS of Matrix is installed with ETERNITY, it is advisable that only one station be associated with the extension.
LCS works only if your station is idle and the VMS has a free port.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
1
Caller is recording message in the mailbox. Message is heard on the
speaker also.
2 Press SPK key or lift the handset. Caller gets connected to the user and gets disconnected from the VMS.
2 Dial 1094-1. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Live Call Supervision
Whats this?
A person with higher hierarchy in an organization can know to which destination his subordinate is making a call.
How it works?
The number dialed by a station is stored in the systems memory. When the boss requests Live Call Supervision for a
station, the system retrieves the last external number dialed by the station (which is to be supervised) and presents it on
the LCD of the requesting station. If the last dialed number is an internal number, then the system shows error.
How to use it?
How to program?
Live Call Supervision is a programmable feature. Please refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Live
Call Supervision to a user.
Important Points:
This feature can be used even when the station that is to be supervised is in speech with an external party.
This feature is supported with DKP or with station having CLI phone.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
2 Dial 1098-Destination Station. Confirmation tone
3 Disconnect.
Station Rings. The number is displayed on the LCD
of the CLI phone. No ring if no number is dialed.
4 Lift the handset. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Logical Partition
What's this?
In some countries, calls from VoIP to Public Network like PSTN or PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) are not
allowed.
To achieve this, 'Logical Partitioning' is configured in ETERNITY, whereby the ETERNITY will automatically not allow
the calls from VoIP to other Trunk ports, like TWT, DS1, BRI, E&M, Mobile and will not allow calls across different
trunks, if required. Thus, this feature is used to meet specific telecom regulatory requirements for the country.
For this feature, each trunk is classified in specific 'Category' depending upon the installation requirements. SE can
allow/restrict the calls within same category of trunk and across the different category of trunks as well as with VoIP
also.
Note: As the calls from VoIP to Public trunks will always be restricted, SIP trunks don't require 'category'
classification.
The parameter, 'Category' is programmed on the trunk as 1 to 3 as explained in topic 'How to program?'
After assigning 'Category', SE can allow/restrict 'Call Permission' within these categories and with the VoIP (SIP
Trunk) as explained by following matrix:
For example, for ETERNITY, installed in UK and USA the above matrix will have value "Allow" for all the categories of
trunks and for the VoIP as well. No restriction will be applied for the calls across trunks. Whereas, for ETERNITY,
installed in other countries, above matrix restricts calls across and within all categories of the trunks. (i.e. trunk to
trunk calls are not allowed).
How to configure?
SE should follow the steps as explained below, to allow/restrict calls between different categories of trunks or with
VoIP trunks: (To meet the regulatory requirements or for other reasons)
Step 1: Assign specific 'category' to different trunks like, TWT, DS1, BRI, MOBILE and E&M. For example, assign
Category '1' to TWT-001 Trunk and assign Category '2' to BRI-01 trunk.
Step 2: Allow/restrict 'call permission' between these categories of trunks as required.
Step 3: Allow/restrict call permission of these categories of trunks to the VoIP trunks as required.
How to program?
Step 1: Assign 'Category' for Trunks
This parameter is configured to implement Logical Partition feature in ETERNITY. This feature is used to restrict calls
from VoIP to other trunks and to restrict calls across trunks, if required. Thus it is used to meet specific regulatory
requirements for the country.
Category 1: It is assigned, if the trunk port is to be interfaced with PSTN or PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network).
Category 2: It is assigned, if the leased line is to be terminated in the trunk port.
Category 3: It is assigned, if the trunk port is to be used to interconnect two PBXs, e.g. QSIG.
TWT trunk:
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template for command 5902, to set category for TWT Port.
DS1 trunk:
Use following command to set Category for DS1 port:
6121-1-DS1-Category
Call From
Call To
Category-1 Category-2 Category-3 VoIP
Category-1 Allow / Restrict the call Allow / Restrict the call Allow / Restrict the call Allow / Restrict the call
VoIP Allow / Restrict the call Allow / Restrict the call Allow / Restrict the call Allow / Restrict the call
Matrix
6121-2-DS1-DS1-Category
6121-*-Category
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Category is from 1 to 3
By default, Category is 1.
Refer chapter DS1 Trunks to set other parameters for DS1 Port.
BRI trunk:
Use following command to set Category for BRI port:
6213-1-BRI-Category
6213-2-BRI-BRI-Category
6213-*-Category
Where,
Category = 1 to 3.
Refer chapter ISDN-BRI to set other parameters for BRI Port.
Mobile trunk:
Use following command to set Category for Mobile port:
8018-1-Mobile-Category
8018-2-Mobile-Mobile-Category
8018-*-Category
Where,
Category = 1 to 3.
Refer chapter Mobile Port to set other parameters for Mobile Port.
E&M Trunk:
Refer chapter E&M Feature Template for command 6002, to set category for E&M Port.
Step2: Define Call Permission
Use following command to define call permission between two Categories
5317-Category-Category-Flag
Where,
By default, calls will be denied between all categories of trunks.
Note: For ETERNITY, installed in UK and USA this parameter will have value "Allowed" for all the categories of trunks
and for the VoIP as well. No restriction will be applied for the calls across trunks. Whereas, for ETERNITY, installed in
other countries, this parameter will have value "denied" and will restrict the calls across and within all categories of the
trunks. (i.e. trunk to trunk calls are not allowed).
Important Point:
Trunk to Trunk calls will not be allowed in the default settings of ETERNITY in countries other than UK and USA.
Related Topics:
1. Mobile Port 630
2. DS1 Trunks 475
3. ISDN-BRI 573
Category Meaning
1 Category-1
2 Category-2
3 Category-3
4 VoIP
Flag Meaning
0 Calls denied
1 Calls allowed
Matrix
=X=X=
Matrix
MAC Address Cloning
What's this?
When a user connects his device to the internet, the ISP (Internet Service provider) allocates a dynamic IP address to
the customer and when user disconnects his connection with the ISP, the same IP address which was allocated to the
user now can be allocated to the other user. This is useful for efficient use of the IP Addresses.
ISPs ensure each customer receives only one dynamic address using several methods. The methods of Dial-up and
DSL services require the customer to log-in with a user name and password. Another method is the Cable modem
services; which will register the MAC address of the device that connects to the ISP.
But if the device is changed, the MAC address which is monitored till now, will no longer match with the MAC address
of the new device. To get registered this new address may take long time. Hence another method is used of
simulating the address by the software. This process is called cloning/spoofing of MAC address.
The ETERNITY supports the cloning on each VoIP Ethernet port of the system.
How it works?
Whenever the customer replaces the device, the new MAC Address no longer matches with the one, registered with
the ISP.
By using method of MAC cloning, the actual address of the hardware is not changed; but the address is simulated by
the software.
The emulated MAC address appears to the service provider; identical to the one which was registered in the
hardware.
In case of the PC, the authentication/registration of the service is done using the MAC address of the NIC (Network
Interface Card) on the user's PC. But in case of ETERNITY system, this is done on the VoIP Ethernet Port as
explained below:
In above figure, the user has connected VoIP Ethernet Port of ETERNITY for the same service provided by the ISP.
User's PC was initially directly connected to the line provided by ISP, and now the VoIP Ethernet Port is connected to
it. Hence, the service is not allowed to the user as it finds different MAC address while monitoring the MAC address
registered with it (MAC address of the VoIP Ethernet Port is different than that of User's PC).
By using cloning of the MAC address of the PC, on the Ethernet Port of the ETERNITY; the ISP will find the originally
authorized MAC address and will authenticate the service.
By using specific commands, the user can program the MAC Cloning" on each VoIP Ethernet port of the ETERNITY.
The system will check the MAC Cloning flag and, provide the Clone MAC address as programmed.
How to program?
Use following command to enable/disable the MAC Cloning to be used for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7773-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-MAC Cloning
7773-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-MAC Cloning
Matrix
7773-*-MAC Cloning
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is from 01 to 16
By default, MAC Cloning is 0 for all VoIP Ethernet Port.
Use following command to program the MAC Cloning on VoIP Ethernet Port:
7774-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Clone MAC Address
Where,
MAC Address is a string of maximum 16 characters.
MAC address cannot be entered from SLT. This is entered the same way as programming a name of the station or a
trunk.
For example, to program MAC Address 00.50.C2.55.B0.10, enter 0050C255B010 from the DKP.
By default, the Clone MAC address of 00.50.C2.55.B0.30 is Blank.
(Range and * command for Clone MAC address Programming is not supported)
Note:
The MAC address of Master Ethernet Port can be viewed on DKP, by using SE command 2122. Refer chapter
System Parameters.
Important Point:
To prevent the possible collision and loss of data user should not clone the MAC address which is already used by
other device in the same network and the MAC address used should be as per IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority) standard.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
MAC Cloning Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Magneto Trunk Port
What's this?
ETERNITY ME Card Magneto is used as interface card to the ETERNITY system for connecting to the Magneto
Phones.
Magneto phones are widely used in field by military soldiers. Radiotelephone is also used but it has disadvantage of
limited range and enemy interception. Magneto phones are also used by other companies like, Railways and Electric
utilities.
Magneto phones being reliable, self-contained and easy to install provide simple and secure method of
communication. Magneto phone contains battery and ringing generator.
Battery is used to power the microphone only and ringing generator is used to provide ring voltage to alert the other
phone.
Tip and Ring wires of the magneto phone are dry (They don't carry battery voltage when idle or in speech), this
means the wires carry only AC voice signals and not the DC voltage of the battery.
Magneto trunk port doesn't support the answer signaling or disconnect signaling. Also it doesn't support dialing
facility.
How it works?
Both ETERNITY ME/GE support ETERNITY ME/GE Card Magneto (For availability of ETERNITY GE Card Magneto
for ETERNITY GE contact your dealer).
Magneto port is treated as a Trunk port. No battery voltage is to provided on the Tip-Ring pair of the Magneto Trunk.
It supports interface of Magneto phone only.
ETERNITY supports Maximum of 128 Magneto Trunk ports and ETERNITY GE supports Maximum of 48 Magneto
Trunk ports.
Like normal analog trunk, each magneto trunk port is assigned a Trunk Feature Template. Port type for the Magneto
Trunk is '29'.
Station Basic and Advance Feature Template are not applicable for the Magneto trunk port.
Two configurations of ETERNITY ME Card Magneto are supported. The jumper setting in the card is not required.
ETERNITY ME Card Magneto8
Following types of calls are supported for the Magneto Trunk port:
Magneto Port Magneto Port
Magneto Port SLT Port
Magneto Port DKP Port
Magneto Port ISDN Terminal
Magneto Port DOP
Magneto Port T1E1PRI (T1E1PRI/BRI connected in private network only).
Magneto Port BRI (T1E1PRI/BRI connected in private network only).
Call Setup Process using ETERNITY ME Card Magneto
Case-1
IC Call on Magneto Trunk port lands on SLT:
Magneto Phone User Cranks the ring generator and applies ring voltage Ring signal on SLT SLT is ringing.
Following options are possible:
Magneto Phone User Stops Cranking the ring generator Ring volume off.
User answers the call Call matured Two way speech.
Station user disconnects the call (go on-hook) Call End (The magneto phone has no ability to disconnect the
call).
Ringing is stopped after expiry of ring timer Call is stored in SMDR as unanswered call with Remark = 'U'.
If SLT is 'busy', the magneto phone user does not get answer from the other side. Now if the Magneto phone user
continue to crank the Ring Generator till the SLT becomes 'Idle', the SLT will be ringing.
Case-2
OG Call from SLT using Magneto Trunk:
SLT user dials TAC for Magneto Trunk port-1. Following options are possible:
When the station user presses the digit for TAC, 'ringing voltage' will be applied to Tip-Ring of Magneto Trunk Port
for about 2 seconds for every digit pressed to alert the Station user. This is applicable even if the call is matured.
Two way speech is established between Caller and Magneto phone user, if magneto phone user lifts the handset
and communicates with the station user.
Station user disconnects the call. The call will be disconnected only if the station user goes ON-Hook, because the
magneto phone user has no ability to disconnect the call from his side.
Matrix
How to program?
Step 1
H/w Slot -Port
Refer chapter Software Port and Hardware ID to assign hardware ID to a Magneto Trunk port.
Step 2
Status
Use following command to Enable/Disable the Magneto Trunk Port:
6801-1-Magneto Trunk-Code
6801-2-Magneto Trunk-Magneto Trunk-Code
6801-*-Code
Where,
Magneto Trunk is from 001 to 128.
By default, Magneto Port is Enable.
Port will function normally when enabled.
Disabling Magneto Trunk port is required in case of hardware failure of the port. If station user tries to access the
disabled port, he will get the error tone.
The disabled port is programmed as member of OG Trunk Bundle Group and it will not be accessible to user.
Step 3
Time Zone
Refer chapter Time Tables to change Time zone for the Magneto trunk Port.
Step 4
Port Name
Refer chapter Name Programming to assign a Name to the Magneto Trunk port.
Step 5
Trunk Feature Template
Refer chapter Trunk Feature Template to assign Trunk Feature Template to the Magneto trunk.
Important Points:
While using ETERNITY ME Card TWT for different types of calling, user should consider following points:
In case of call from Magneto Trunk port to Magneto Trunk port, the call disconnection information from either side
will not be available.
Hence the call shall get disconnected after the expiry of 'DISA Inactivity Timer'. The DISA Inactivity timer will start
when call is considered to be matured.
As there is no signaling involved the magneto phone user can not disconnect the call and hence the call is
considered to be completed only on receiving the disconnection information from the other party port involved in
call.
The answer signaling is not supported by the protocol and hence the call shall be considered to be matured on
expiry of the 'Ring Timer'.
During DID, caller can dial only station number; hence it is not possible for the caller to reach the magneto trunk
port directly using DID feature. (because magneto trunk port can be accessed using TAC, which is not allowed
during DID).
Incoming call on Magneto trunk port can be routed to the T1E1PRI/BRI port, provided T1E1PRI/BRI is connected
in the private network. In public network the called party number is must to place the call, which the magneto
phone user can not dial and hence while T1E1PRI/BRI is connected in public network the call can not be placed
successfully.
Stations having access to the 'Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer' feature can only transfer the Magneto trunk's call to
another Magneto Trunk or any other type of trunk.
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Matrix
Master Time Zone
Whats this?
ETERNITY supports to assign a time table to stations and trunks.
Based on these timetables the timezones are fixed for the stations and trunks.
The operators and the landing destination for the incoming calls vary based on timezones.
The station user can also set personal time zones if the time table assigned to him is in manual mode.
If a holiday is announced the time zone for all the stations and trunks must be non-working hours, so that calls can
land accordingly.
Instead of changing timezone/timetable of each station and trunk, ETERNITY allows to program a Master Time Zone
for the system.
How to program?
Use the following command to program the Master Time Zone for the system:
4801-Code
Where,
When code is 0, all the trunks SLT, DKP work as per their individual tables. But if code is 1, 2 or 3, then individual time
tables are overridden and all feature and facilities work as per this timezone.
Relevant Topic:
1. Time Tables 870
=X=X=
Code Meaning
0 Master Time Zone not Applicable
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Matrix
Meet Me Paging
What is this?
A Station user can announce the name of the person with whom he wishes to talk to on the PAS port/Page zone. The
called person can pick up the call from any station by dialing Meet Me Paging code followed by the station number of the
calling party.
The Station user making a Meet Me Paging call needs to announce the station number from where he is making the call
so that the called person knows which station number is to be dialed.
This feature is of great use for operators. Using this feature, the Operator can transfer a caller to the called person who is
not on his desk. The Operator can hold the caller, use Meet Me paging feature to locate the person and transfer the call
to him.
How to use it?
Caller:
Called Party:
Important Point:
All the stations can use Meet Me Paging feature.
Relevant Topic:
1. Paging 660
=X=X=
2 Dial 1074-Page Zone Number. You get connected to the paging ports of the page zone.
3
Start announcement when the ring back tone stops.
Wait till the called person answers you call.
Speech establishes when the called person answers
the call.
1 Lift the handset of the nearby station.
2 Dial 1093-Station Number of the Caller/AOP.
Matrix
Message Wait
Whats this?
The ETERNITY supports 'Message Wait' (MW) feature to inform the user about any message waiting for him on his
extension, if he could not attend the call. User can use this feature if it is allowed in COS for his extension.
The user station can get different types of message wait notifications as an indication about the waiting message in
the mail box. The message wait notification could be in form of stuttered dial tone, a voice message, LED Lamp or
ringing on his extension.
The MW feature can be set by using access code. One station can set message wait on another station or user can
set MW on his own station.
To call back to the station which had set MW, the station user can dial access code to retrieve the MW or press the
DSS key for 'Retrieve Message Wait'. The system will place a call on the free station out of multiple stations which
had set MW on the user's station.
Thus, this feature is used by following ways:
When the operator station has set MW on the user station and when the user arrives back to his place and presses
the key for Retrieve Message Wait, the call will be placed on the operator station who had set MW feature.
For Enterprise users, the user can set MW on his station and if there is any voice message in his mail box, he can
press the key for Voice Mail, to call to VMS.
How it works?
Whenever a message wait request is made by a station, the station number will be stored in the system. Maximum of
three stations can set MW on the station.
When the user try to retrieve the message by dialing the access code, the system will place the call on the free station
which had set MW on user's station. If the call is matured, that station number will be deleted from the system and the
LEDs on the DSS key for Retrieve Message Wait and on DSS key for Voice Mail will be turned off, if there is no further
stations which had set MW.
Message Wait Notification:
The Message Wait indication can be set on the station as per the message wait notification type programmed. This
notification is programmed by configuring 'Station Advanced Feature template'.
When there is a voice message for the station user, the LED indication will be there on DSS key for 'Retrieve
Message Wait' and on the DSS key for 'Voice Mail', irrespective of the notification type set.
The user presses the key for 'Retrieve Message Wait', the system will place a call on the station which had set MW.
If user presses the key for 'Voice Mail', he will get connected to VMS and on listening new messages, LED of the
Voice Mail key will turn off. After serving one waiting message, if there is no further message wait pending for this
station, the LED of 'Retrieve Message Wait' will also get turned off.
Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template to configure from following options:
No Message Notification
User will not get any notification for MW
Stuttered Dial Tone
If the message wait notification type is selected as stuttered dial tone, then on lifting the handset, the station user
gets stuttered dial tone informing about the message.
The user will then press the key for 'Retrieve Message Wait' to place a call on the station which had set MW.
Voice Message
If the message wait notification type is selected as Voice Message, then on lifting the handset, the station user
gets voice message informing about the message. On completion of the voice message, the station user gets
normal dial tone.
The user will then press the key for 'Voice Mail' to place a call on the VMS (if installed) to get the message.
LED Lamp
If the message wait notification type is selected as LED Lamp and if the station user owns a SLT, then the station
user gets LED glowing, informing about the message.
If the station user owns a DKP, then the LED of the DSS key assigned for Retrieve Message Wait function glows,
indicating a message.
The user will then press the key for 'Retrieve Message Wait' to place a call on the station which had set MW.
Matrix
Ring
If the message wait notification type is selected as ring type then the station user gets the 'ring' playing, informing
about the message. On answering the ring, the user gets connected to the station which had set MW.
The user can also press the key for 'Retrieve Message Wait' to place a call on the station which had set MW.
How to use?
Configuring Message Wait
Follow the steps mentioned below to configure the MW feature:
Enable feature 'Set/Cancel Message Wait' in COS. Refer chapter Class of Service (COS).
Assign voice message application number to the Voice Module. Refer chapter Voice Message Applications.
Dial the Access code to set/cancel Message Wait: 1076-Station Number-Code
(Code=1 to set MW, Code=0 to cancel MW). You will get Confirmation tone.
Configure the message wait notification type for each station in the 'Station Advanced Feature Template'. Refer
chapter Station Advanced Feature Template to configure type of notification.
Now, when there is a new voice message, LED on DSS key for 'Retrieve Message Wait' and DSS key for 'Voice Mail'
will glow.
To Set/Cancel Message Wait on a station
Using Access Code:
Dial 1076-Flexible Number-Code
Where,
Flexible Number is the code given to access a station.
To Retrieve MW:
Using Access Code:
Dial 1077
The system will place a call on the station which had set MW on the station of user.
Once the call is placed and matured, that station is removed from the system.
Now, if there is no message wait for you, you will get voice prompt as 'You have no messages', followed by the dial
tone.
To Cancel Message Wait:
User can not cancel the message wait using specific access code, from the station on which message wait is set. But the
system will cancel it by following ways:
After dialing message retrieve code 1077, when the call is matured to the station which had set MW, that specific MW
will be cancelled.
However the LED indicating MW will be off only when MW is served for all stations, one by one.
To Receive a Message Wait Call:
For this feature, the user is required to set MW on the station which did not reply to the call made by the user. This can be
done by using the access code.
When the called station user dials the number of the station which had requested MW, the user will receive the MW call
in form of 'ring'.
On DKP (EON)
'Ring' is played on the station when a Message Wait call is received and user will get the display of station number
from which MW call is received.
Go off-hook to attend the MW call.
On SLT
'Ring' is played on the station when a Message Wait call is received.
Go off-hook to attend the MW call.
To program Ring parameters
Only SE can configure the parameters for the 'ring' which is configured as MW notification. If the user needs to change
the default 'ring' values of ring parameters, he should contact SE.
Code Meaning
0 Cancel
1 Set
Matrix
Message Wait Ring Count
It is the Number of times the station should ring after the message wait is set.
Use following command to program the Message Wait Ring Count:
4403-Message Wait Ring Count
Where,
Message wait ring count is from 000 to 255.
By default, Message Wait Ring Count is 010.
Message Wait Ring Timer
It is the Time for which the station should ring.
Use following command to program the Message Wait Ring Timer:
4404-Message Wait Ring Timer
Where,
Message wait ring interval timer is from 000 to 255 seconds.
By default, Message Wait Ring Timer is 030 seconds.
Message Wait Ring Interval Timer
It is the Time after which the station should ring.
Use following command to program the Message Wait Ring Interval Timer:
4405-Message Wait Ring Interval Timer
Where,
Message wait ring interval timer is from 000 to 255 minutes.
By default, Message Wait Ring Interval Timer is 030 minutes.
Important Point:
Relevant Topics:
5. QSIG 687
=X=X=
Matrix
Missed Calls
What is this?
Last 5 missed calls (unanswered calls) whether internal or external are stored in the system.
The calls are stored in First In First Out (FIFO) order.
On dialing a code for missed calls, last missed call is displayed on the LCD of the DKP. Remaining 19 calls can be
seen using 'Up'/'Down' key. Thus the DKP can display last 20 missed calls. The call which is forwarded to VMS is also
stored in the missed call log for that station.
The calls are displayed in Last In First Out (LIFO) fashion.
In event of power failure, the missed calls details are erased.
Internal calls are also stored in the Missed called list.
ETERNITY will store the external calling number in Missed Calls List, whenever station doesnt reply, irrespective of
the routing type used to route the call.
How to use it?
Important Points:
This feature is useful only for DKP users.
User can not make call by selecting the number in missed call list and pressing Hold.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
2 Dial 1097. DKP displays last missed call.
3 Press Up/Down arrow key to navigate. DKP displays remaining missed calls.
Matrix
Mobile Port
Whats this?
Global System for Mobile (GSM) is a second generation cellular system standard to specify digital modulation and
network level architectures and services, and is the world's most popular technology.
Incoming Call Mode (Allow/Reject/Ignore) on Mobile port:
The ETERNITY supports to allow/reject/ignore the incoming call on the Mobile port.
This feature is useful for application of blocking incoming calls on the SIM number of the ETERNITY installed in
outbound Call Centre.
General Features:
One of the most remarkable features of GSM is the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM), which is a memory device that
stores information such as the subscriber's identification number, the networks and countries where the subscriber is
entitled to service, privacy keys and other user specific information.
Without a SIM installed, all GSM mobiles are identical and nonoperational. It is the SIM that gives GSM subscriber
units their identity.
A second remarkable feature of GSM is the on-the-air privacy which is provided by the system.
The privacy is made possible by encrypting the digital bit stream sent by a GSM transmitter, according to a specific
secret cryptographic key that is known only to the cellular carrier.
Network Registration Retry Count:
For any reason if the GSM port is not able to get registered with network, the ETERNITY supports to re-initialize the
GSM port after certain retries.
This is done by programming the parameter 'Network Registration Retry Count' for the specific GSM port. It is the
number of times for retry of the network registration process.
Every time the Network registration retry timer is expired, the ETERNITY will decrease the count by one. Finally on
expiry of this count, the specific GSM port is re-initialized. Refer chapter Network Selection for Mobile Port for more
details regarding Registration Retry Timer.
How it works?
How to program?
Step 1
Assign hardware slot and a hardware port number to a Mobile software port. Refer chapter Software Port and Hardware
ID for more details.
Step 2
Name-When a call lands on this port, if the Calling name or the Calling number is not available from the network, this
name is displayed on the station, refer chapter Name Programming for more details.
Step 3
This command is used to enable/disable the Mobile port. When the port is disabled, it will not be allotted to the user on
grabbing the port. Instead, the user will get error tone. Also there will not be IC call.
Use the following command to program status of Mobile port:
8000-1-Mobile-Flag
8000-2-Mobile-Mobile-Flag
8000-*-Flag
Where,
Matrix
By default, Mobile port is enabled.
This is same as Power ON/OFF.
Step 4
Use the following command to assign Service Provider to the Mobile port:
8001-1-Mobile-SP
8001-2-Mobile-Mobile-SP
8001-*-SP
Where,
Step 5
Use the following command to set Receive Gain of the Mobile port:
8002-1-Mobile-Receive Gain
8002-2-Mobile-Mobile-Receive Gain
8002-*-Receive Gain
Where,
By default, Receive Gain is 3 (Normal).
Step 6
Use the following command to set Transmit gain of the Mobile port:
8003-1-Mobile-Transmit Gain
8003-2-Mobile-Mobile-Transmit Gain
8003-*-Transmit Gain
Where,
By default, Transmit Gain is 3 (Normal).
Step 7
Refer Trunk Feature Template for command to assign Trunk Feature template for Mobile port.
Step 8
Refer Time Tables for command to program Time Zone for Mobile port.
Step 9
Use following command to configure the 'Incoming Call Mode' on the Mobile port:
8005-1-Mobile-Mode
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Receive Gain Meaning
1 Very Low
2 Low
3 Normal
4 High
5 Very High
Transmit Gain Meaning
1 Very Low
2 Low
3 Normal
4 High
5 Very High
Matrix
8005-2-Mobile-Mobile-Mode
8005-*-Mode
Where,
By default, Incoming calls are 'Allowed'.
Step 10
Use following command to select frequency band for Mobile:
8009-1-Mobile-Mobile Frequency Band
8009-2-Mobile-Mobile-Mobile Frequency Band
8009-*-Mobile Frequency Band
Where,
By default, Mobile Frequency Band is '900+1800' for the Mobile ports installed with GSM Module and is Any
CDMA for the Mobile ports installed with CDMA Module.
For Example,
Program 4 for GSM Network of both 850 and 1900 MHz fraquencies and program 3 for CDMA network of frequency
band Cellular A.
Note:
No need to select frequency band for Mobile port of 3G card.
Step 11
Use following command to program Pause Timer for Mobile port:
8014-1-Mobile- Pause Timer
8014-2- Mobile - Mobile -Pause Timer
Where,
This Timer is used to provide delay for the number dialing by the Mobile port. Pause timer will be applicable when any 'P'
digit is configured in the DTMF number string which is to be outdialed as DTMF digits on Mobile port. One of the
Step 12
Use following command to program DTMF ON Time for Mobile port:
8015-1- Mobile -DTMF ON Time
8015-2- Mobile - Mobile -DTMF ON Time
Where,
Mode Meaning Description
1 Allow IC calls will be allowed and incoming call logic is applicable.
2 Ignore IC calls will not be processed further and call logic will not be applied on it.
3 Reject IC calls will be rejected immediately and mobile port will be free.
Mobile Frequency Band Band Selection for GSM/CDMA(Freq in MHz)
1 900/Any CDMA
2 1800/Cellular A or B
3 1900/Cellular A
4 850+1900/Cellular B
5 900+1800/Any CDMA
Matrix
This parameter decides for how much time the DTMF digit will be ON, while out dialed by the ETERNITY.
One of the applications for using this parameter is Multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter Multi-Stage Dialing.
Step 13
Use following command to enable/disable debug on Mobile port:
8028-1-Mobile-Code
8028-*-Code
Where,
By default, Debug Status is 'disable' for all Mobile ports.
Step 14
Use following command to program Network Registration Retry Count:
8004-1-Mobile-Network Registration Retry Count
8004-2-Mobile-Mobile-Network Registration Retry Count
8004-*-Network Registration Retry Count
Where,
Network Registration Retry Count is from 001 to 255.
Default: 050 for all mobile ports.
Step 15
This command is used to enable Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on Mobile trunk. Refer chapter Gateway
Use following command to set flag for Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on Mobile port:
8016-1-Mobile-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
8016-2-Mobile-Mobile-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
Where,
By default, Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag is 'disable' for all Mobile ports.
8017-1-Mobile-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
8017-2-Mobile-Mobile-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
Where,
using #*.
DTMF ON Time Meaning
1 100 msec
2 200 msec
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
By default Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String is 'CCC' for all Mobile ports.
From SA Mode
Mobile Network Signal Strength:
Some times a user tries to make a call using mobile port but the Mobile port can not place the call on GSM network
due to absence of signal or weak signal. Hence the system supports the display of Signal Strength of the Mobile port.
This can be done by using SA command from DKP only.
For all other ports user will get error tone for the SA command. When command is issued and the Network has
responded, the user will get display of signal strength with programming beeps.
As the values are in -dBm, the '-113' represents weak signal, where as '-51' represents maximum signal strength.
Lift the handset.Dial tone
Dial 1072-032-Mobile Port.Confirmation tone
It will also be possible to know the 'Signal Strength' of the Mobile Port using the Web Jeeves. For current 'status' SE
should 'refresh' the web page 'Mobile port status' page, in 4 to 5 seconds (approx.), after opening the web page.
After the power on when the Web page 'Mobile Port Status' page is clicked for the first time, SE will get the values of
following parameters for all the 'enabled' Mobile ports:
The 'Port Name' which will be as programmed for the Mobile port and the current network operator with which the
port is currently registered.
The 'IMEI number' as received from the Mobile port once it is initialized.
The 'Network operator code (MCC-MNC)' of the network to which the Mobile port is registered.
The 'Signal strength' in '-dBm', that was received on completion of the initialization or that was received during last
query.
Important Points:
Network Response Timer signifies the time for which the Mobile port waits for a response from the GSM network. It is
fixed 150 seconds for all ports.
Normally, on receiving "User Busy" message from Network on Mobile port the call will be disconnected and Mobile
port will be idle. But some network doesn't give busy tone or busy voice message. Hence the caller may be waiting
when the called party is busy.
The ETERNITY does not limit the number of parties involved in a telephonic conference. It is dependent on the
Service Provider.
This service is actually provided from the Service Provider. Service Provider is required to be contacted to disable or
enable these features from GSM network.
During conference, if one of the participants disconnects, the second participant gets on hold automatically. The user
needs to dial *1 to re-establish speech with the second participant.
Relevant Topics:
2. Time Tables 870
3. Software Port and Hardware ID 755
4. Name Programming 642
5. Network Selection for Mobile Port 646
6. SIM PIN 733
8. Call Back on Mobile Port 287
=X=X=
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
* **
# ##
Matrix
Multi-Stage Dialing
What's this?
There are some applications where we have to dial a fixed number string before dialing the actual number. For
example, using the ITC card (This card is provided by PSTN as prepaid card for calling the number from BSNL line).
In such application, the number is required to be out dialed after the call gets matured and introducing some fixed
number string (Calling card number) before dialing actual number. For example, for making an ISD call using ITC
card, you may be required to dial following sequence of digits:
Dial first the number for using ITC calling card e.g. 1602233 (7 digits).
Then, after the call is matured dial the 16 digit PIN number printed on the ITC card. e.g. xxx.. (16 digits).
After dialing the PIN number, dial the number to which you want to call i.e ISD number. e.g. yyy..(14 digits)
Thus, you will have to dial 1602233 and 16 digit PIN number-i.e total 23 fixed digits every time, before dialing the ISD
number of 14 digits.
To avoid pressing of such long digits for making call and to dial some digits with required delay, the feature called
'Multi-Stage Dialing' is supported in the ETERNITY. Using this feature the ETERNITY will take care for dialing the
digits after the call is matured and dialing of digits with suitable pause time, before dialing out the destination number.
This feature works by suitable programming of following digits in the Number Lists for ANT feature: 0-9, #, *, A, B, C,
D, F, P, W, . (dot), +. Where A, B, C, D are the DTMF digits, F is for Flash, P is for Pause and W is for Wait for Answer
(period for the call is matured). Enter the special digits using specific Code for the digit.
While ETERNITY is dialing out the digits, user will get Call Proceeding Tone as configured in the system. Refer
chapter System Parameters.
Following parameters will be required, to configure this feature for the trunk port:
Dialed Number String in ANT Table
Substitute Number String in ANT Table
Pause Timer
DTMF ON Time
Inter Digit Pause Time
Call Proceeding Tone
This is explained with an Example after the topic How to Program?
How to program?
Step 1
Dialed Number string:
Program Dialed Number String using command '4751'. Refer chapters Automatic Number Translation.

Step 2
Substitute Number String:
Program Substitute Number String using command '4752'. Refer chapters Automatic Number Translation.
Notes for programming Number String:
It is recommended to SE, to not to program Pause character "P" before "W" character for the number string to be out
dialed from Mobile port. Else, the GSM Module may get restart while out dialing the DTMF digits without call maturity
signal.
Use following Codes to program the special digits:
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
. (dot) #9
# ##
* **
Matrix
Step 3
Enable ANT feature:
Enable 'ANT' for the trunk port using command 6702. Refer chapter OG Trunk Bundle for more details.
Step 4
Assign ANT Table to the Trunk Port:
Assign the ANT Table to the trunk port using command 6702. Refer chapter OG Trunk Bundle for more details.
Step 5
Pause Timer:
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template for command '5902' to program Pause Timer on TWT Trunk.
Refer chapter DS1 Trunks for command '6109' to program Pause Timer on DS1 Trunk.
Refer chapter ISDN-BRI for command '6209' to program Pause Timer on BRI port.
Refer chapter Mobile Port for command '8014' to program Pause Timer on Mobile port.
Refer chapter SIP Trunk Parameters for command '7720' to program Pause Timer on SIP trunk.
Refer chapter E&M Feature Template for command '6002' to program feature Pause Timer on E&M trunk.
Step 6
DTMF ON Time
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template for command '5902' to program DTMF ON Time on TWT Trunk
Refer chapter DS1 Trunks for command '6117' to program DTMF ON Time on DS1 Trunk.
Refer chapter ISDN-BRI for command '6210' to program DTMF ON Time on BRI port.
Refer chapter Mobile Port for command '8015' to program DTMF ON Time on Mobile port.
Refer chapter SIP Trunk Parameters for command '7725' to program DTMF ON Time on SIP trunk.
Step 7
Inter Digit Pause Time
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template for command '5902' to program Inter Digit Pause Time on TWT Trunk
Refer chapter DS1 Trunks for command '6118' to program Inter Digit Pause Timer on DS1 Trunk.
Refer chapter ISDN-BRI for command '6211' to program Inter Digit Pause Timer on BRI port.
Refer chapter SIP Trunk Parameters for command '7726' to program Inter Digit Pause Timer on SIP trunk.
Step 8
Refer chapter System Parameters for command '5311' for programming of Call Proceeding Tone.
Example:
Refer the figure given below:
Suppose you need to dial following numbers:
Scenerio1 (through Gateway): Route the Number starting with 0044 through Gateway 1 i.e.9898906335 through the
TWT trunk port 001 after the call is matured (after period for Wait for Answer).
W *1
GSM
Network
PSTN
Network
PSTN
Network
Internet
Pay Phone ETERNITY
(with GSM Card)
FXS Mobile
ATD9898906335 00441159253724
Gateway 1
Mobile 1 VoIP
9898906335
2630555
Gateway in
UK (0044)
VoIP FXO
00441159253724
Dial 00441159253724
Matrix
Scenerio2 (with Calling Card): Dial the Number starting with '2' using the calling card; by dialing first 1602233 and then
dialing the PIN number 1132121234#1P of the card after the call is matured (after period for Wait for Answer).
Step 1
Program dialed number string '0044' in ANT Table-1
4751-1-1 -01 - 0044 - #*
Program dialed number string '2' in ANT Table-1
4751-1-2 -02 - 2 - #*
Step 2
Program substitute number string '9898906335WP0044' in ANT Table-1
4751-1-1 -01 - 9898906335 *1 #3 0044 - #*
Program substitute number string '1602233WP1132121234#1P2' in ANT Table-1
4751-1-2 -02 - 1602233 *1 #3 1132121234#1 #3 2 - #*
Step 3
Assign ANT Table-1 to Mobile port-001
6702-1-64-6-1
Enable ANT feature for Mobile port-001
6702-1-64-5-1
Step 4
Keep other parameters Pause Timer, Inter Digit Pause Timer, DTMF ON Time same as default value.

ANT Table-1:
Scenerio1:
Program '0044' as Dialed String and program '9898906335WP0044' as Substitute string. Now when you dial
'00441159253724', the system will dial out the number as explained below:
The system will dial out first, the Gateway1 number 9898906335.
After the call is matured and delay for the pause timer, the system will dial the destination number:
'00441159253724'
Scenerio2:
Similarly, the system will process the call when you dial the number starting with prefix '2' e.g. 2630555, using the
calling card:
The system will first dial out the number 1602233.
After the call is matured and delay for the pause timer, the system will dial the PIN number with the destination
number as: 2-6-3-0-5-5-5. The service provider's network (PSTN) will route the call on destination '2630555'.
Relevant Topics:
2. Mobile Port 630
4. DS1 Trunks 475
5. ISDN-BRI 573
Index Dialed Number String Substitute Number String
1 0044 9898906335WP0044
2 2 1602233WP1132121234#1P2
3
4
5
6
:
32
Matrix
=X=X=
Matrix
Music on Hold (MOH)
Whats this?
Whenever a person is put on hold while his call is being transferred or otherwise, the person gets music. The ETERNITY
supports two types of music sources.
Internal Music Source
VM01 acts as an internal music source. The music recorded in this VM is played back to the users/callers. Maximum 16
seconds of music can be recorded in the VM01.
External Music Source
A hold-on music of your choice can be played while you keep a person on hold. The ETERNITY supports such external
music interface on the ETERNITY ME Card Switch by way of providing an Analog Input Port (AIP). An AIP can handle
un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signal from an external music source.
The specifications of an Analog Input Port are given below:
Any external device meeting above specifications can be connected with the system. The volume must be set to a level
such that the music on the trunks is not very low or very loud. The volume of the signal coming from this device must
never increase beyond the specified limits.
The external music port is an audio input port and no electrical signal of higher volume than the specified limit
should be applied to this port. This may result in permanent damage to the system. Matrix warranty does not
cover damages resulting from improper use.
How to program?
Use following command to demonstrate Music on Hold:
3551-Code
Where,
By default, code is 1.
Specification Value
Code Meaning
1 Internal Music Source
2 External Music Source
Matrix
Use following command to select the type of music to be played when stations are kept on hold:
3552-Code
Where,
Use following command to select the type of music to be played when trunks are kept on hold:
3553-Code
Where,
Use following command to select the type of music for background music:
3554-Code
Where,
By default, the type of Back Ground Music is 1.
Important Points:
If all the stations of the Routing Group are busy then MoH is played to the station user (MoH can be internal music or
through AOP).
The above point is true in case when alarm call is not routable due to any other reason e.g. Group Empty, etc.
Example:
Program the system such that when stations are kept on hold, they get internal Music on Hold and when trunks are kept
on hold, the caller gets external music. Background Music should be external.
3552-2
3553-2
Relevant Topic:
1. Background Music (BGM) 269
=X=X=
Code Meaning
Code Meaning
Code Meaning
Matrix
Mute
Whats this?
This feature helps the user to disconnect the speech transmission path in between a conversation.
The user can still listen to the opposite party because the receiving path is not disconnected.
This is very useful to handle calls received midway of a discussion and bar the caller from listening to your discussion.
How to use it?
Important Points:
Whenever the DSS key assigned for Mute is pressed, the LED of the DSS key glows. On pressing the DSS key
again the LED goes OFF.
Mute will be applied in all the speech states.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Action Response
Speech with a party.
Press the DSS key assigned for Mute or 1052. Mute ON. Transmit path disconnected.
You can still hear the calling party.
Press the DSS key assigned for Mute or 1052. Mute OFF.
Matrix
Name Programming
Whats this?
Stations (SLT/DKP) and Trunks (TWT, BRI, E&M, T1E1PRI and GSM) can be programmed with names. These names
are displayed on the LCD of the DKP when a call is made to or received from the station/trunk. These names makes
identification easy. A station/trunk name can be of maximum 12 characters consisting of alphanumeric characters,
punctuation marks and spaces.
How to program?
Names can be programmed only from the DKP. The method of ETERNITY station name is same as typing short
messages in mobile. Press hold to terminate the command. For e.g, to enter 'SUMER', Press '7' three times. Wait for the
cursor to go to next position. Now press '8' two times. Wait for next cursor to go to next position. Likewise enter all the
alphabets and then press 'hold' key of the DKP. The DKP would show 'OK!' on the LCD.
Station Name Pattern:
ETERNITY also supports programming of the 'Format' in which SE can program the Name. This format is in form of Title-
First Name-Name.
For example, Mr.- Anil - Patel, where, Title = Mr., First name = Anil, Name = Patel
Depending upon the format, the system will adjust and store the suitable Name and display it on the station.
Step 1
Use following command to select the format in which the system should store and display the station Name:
3615 - Code
Where,
Name = A string of alphanumeric characters (maximum 18).
Note: Refer separate manual for Hotel Application of this feature.
By Default, the code of format is 3.
Step 2
Use following command to program a name of a SLT:
5402-1-SLT-Name-#*
5402-2-SLT-SLT-Name-#*
5402-*-Name-#*
Where,
SLT = Software Port Number of the SLT is from 001 to 512.
Name = A string of alphanumeric characters to be assigned for the station (maximum 18).
Use the following command to clear the SLT name:
5402-1-SLT-#*
5402-2-SLT-SLT-#*
5402-*-#*
Code Name Format
1 Title - Space-First Name - Space- Name
2 First Name only
3 Name only
4 First Name - Space - Name
5 Title - Space - First Name
6 Title - Space - Name
Matrix
Step 3
Use following command to program a name of a DKP:
5403-1-DKP-Name-#*
5403-2-DKP-DKP-Name-#*
5403-*-Name-#*
Where,
DKP = Software Port Number of the DKP is from 001 to 128.
Name = A string of alphanumeric characters (maximum 18).
Use the following command to clear the DKP name:
5403-1-DKP-#*
5403-2-DKP-DKP-#*
5403-*-#*
Step 4
Use the following command to program a name for a TWT trunk:
5404-1-TWT-Name-#*
5404-2-TWT-TWT-Name-#*
5404-*-Name-#*
Where,
TWT is from 001 to 128.
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters to be assigned (maximum) 12 characters.
Use the following command to clear the name of a TWT trunk:
5404-1-TWT-#*
5404-2-TWT-TWT-#*
5404-*-#*
Step 5
Use the following command to program a name for a BRI trunk:
5405-1-BRI-Name-#*
5405-2-BRI-BRI-Name-#*
5405-*-Name-#*
Where,
Use the following command to clear the BRI trunk name:
5405-1-BRI-#*
5405-2-BRI-BRI-#*
5405-*-#*
Step 6
Use the following command to program a name for an E&M trunk:
5406-1-E&M-Name-#*
5406-2-E&M-E&M-Name-#*
5406-*-Name-#*
Where,
Use the following command to clear a name of an E&M trunk:
5406-1-E&M-#*
5406-2-E&M--E&M-#*
5406-*-#*
Step 7
Use the following command to program a name for a T1E1PRI trunk:
5407-1-T1E1PRI-Name-#*
5407-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Name-#*
5407-*-Name-#*
Where,
Matrix
Use the following command to clear the name for T1E1PRI trunk:
5407-1-T1E1PRI-#*
5407-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-#*
5407-*-#*
Step 8
Use the following command to program a name for a Mobile trunk:
5408-1-Mobile-Name-#*
5408-2-Mobile-Mobile-Name-#*
5408-*-Name-#*
Where,
Use the following command to clear the name of mobile trunk:
5408-1-Mobile-#*
5408-2-Mobile-Mobile-#*
5408-*-#*
Step 9
Use the following command to program a name for ISDN Terminal:
5409-1-ISDN Terminal-Name-#*
5409-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Name-#*
5409-*-Name-#*
Where,
ISDN Terminal is from 01 to 64
Use the following command to clear the name of ISDN Terminal:
5409-1-ISDN Terminal-#*
5409-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-#*
5409-*-#*
Step 10
Use the following command to program name of a SIP Trunk:
5410-1-SIP Trunk-Name-#*
5410-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Name-#*
5410-*-Name-#*
Where,
SIP Trunk is from 01 to 32.
Name is a string of maximum 12 characters. 0 to 9, A to Z, a to z, ! (exclamation mark), % (percent), ' (single quote), *
(asterisk), - (minus or dash), + (plus) and . (dot).
By default, the Trunk Name is Blank.
Use the following command to clear name of a SIP Trunk:
5410-1-SIP-#*
5410-2-SIP-SIP-#*
5410-*-#*
Step 11
When an incoming call comes on the Magneto Trunk port, this name is sent to the destination station.
Use following command to assign a Name to the Magneto Trunk port:
5411-1-Magneto Trunk-Name-#*
5411-2-Magneto Trunk-Magneto Trunk-Name-#*
5411-*-Name-#*
Where,
Name is an alpha-numeric string of Maximum 12 characters. Terminate the command with #* if less than 12 characters
are to be used as name.
Matrix
By default, Magneto Trunk name is blank.
Use the following command to clear name of a Magneto Trunk:
5411-1-Magneto Trunk-#*
5411-2-Magneto Trunk-Magneto Trunk-#*
5411-*-#*
Important Point:
By default, Name is blank for all above commands.
=X=X=
Matrix
Network Selection for Mobile Port
What's this?
The GSM Network Operator provides Roaming facility for the users who want to continue normal communication
even out side their home region. For this the user will be required to get registered with other GSM network operator
and his calls will be charged for the Roaming.
Using "Network Selection" feature, user can select the GSM network as mentioned below:
Manual
Automatic
Manual
If the subscriber is in the home region moves in to a border area where network coverage of other nation's network
operator is also available then his Mobile Set may get registered with the other network operator and he will be
charged more. This is not preferred by the subscriber. It is required that subscriber can select the network for
registration of his Mobile set, manually.
Automatic
Subscriber requires that his Mobile set will always get registered with GSM network whether he is in home region, in
border area of home region or moves out side home region. He wants the Mobile set to get registered with the any
available GSM network and make and receive calls at any cost, then it is required that the Mobile set should get
registered with any available network automatically.
What is Network Operator's Code?
Network operator's code is MCC append by MNC.
MCC: MCC is a Mobile Country Code, MCC identifies a country, and a country may be assigned more than one MCC.
MCCs are generally of 3 digits. MCC assigned to India is 404, which is same for all the network operators in India.
MNC: MNC is Mobile Network Code. It is generally of 2 to 3 digits. The MCC-MNC combination uniquely identifies the
home network of the mobile terminal or mobile user. MNC are different in each state for same network operator,
means AirTel-Gujarat is assigned MNC 98, where AirTel-Maharashtra is assigned MNC 90.
How it works?
The system supports the Network selection function in two cases:
When the System gets powered ON.
When the Mobile Port is not registered with the GSM network at any time.
In both the cases the Mobile port will work as per the Network Selection Mode programmed for the Mobile port and
proceed accordingly.
Automatic
Mobile port will get registered automatically with the network operator which the SIM supports.
If the Mobile port doesn't get registered, on expiry of network registration retry timer the Mobile port will again start the
process of Network Selection.
Manual
Mobile port will send the query for the available GSM Network operators.
Available GSM Network operators will respond this query with their codes (MCC-MNC).
Mobile port will select the n/w operator as per the priority programmed.
If match is not found in the priority table, Mobile port (SIM) will not get register with any of these available network
operators.
If the Mobile port is not registered, on expiry of network registration retry timer the Mobile port will again start the
process of Network Selection.
How to program?
Use following command to program the network selection mode for the Mobile Port:
8007-1-Mobile-Code
8007-*-Code
Where,
Matrix
Default: Automatic.
Use following command to program the network operator code in priority for Mobile port:
8008-1-Mobile-Priority-Network Operator Code-#*
8008-2-Mobile-Mobile-Priority-Network Operator Code-#*
8008-*-Priority-Network Operator Code-#*
Where,
Priority is from 1 to 9.
Network Operator code is of 8 digits maximum.
By default, Network Operator Code is '00000' for all Priority1 to priority9.
How to get Display of "Registered GSM Operator's ID"?
Many times it is important for the user to know, with which network operator the Mobile port is currently registered.
Using SA command you can know the ID of the GSM network operator with which the Mobile Port is currently
registered. (This command can be given from DKP only).
If command is given from SLT, you will get confirmation tone but you will not get any information.
SA Command:
Use following command from DKP to know the ID of the network operator with which the Mobile port is currently
registered.
For example:
Mobile Port Number: 1
Network Selection Mode = Manual
Priority 1 = 40491
Priority 2 = 40425
Priority 3 = 40421
Mobile Port Number: 2
Network Selection Mode = Automatic
Network Operator Code = Blank
Maximum 8 digits can be programmed from 0-9, #, *. This programming will look as mentioned below:
Important Points:
Network Registration Retry Timer:
It is the time after which the Mobile port has failed to get registered with the network and starts re-registration.
Network Registration Retry Timer is 2 Seconds and is non-programmable.
The Mobile port (SIM) can get registered with the networks which are supported by the network operator of the SIM
used.
Relevant Topics:
1. Mobile Port 630
2. SIM PIN 733
=X=X=
Code Meaning
1 Automatic
2 Manual
Press DSS key or dial 1072-017-Mobile Port Number. Confirmation tone
If port registered. You will get display 'Operator Name'.
If port not registered. You will get display 'Error'.
Mobile Port Number N/w Selection Mode
Network Operator Code (MCC-MNC)
Priority1 Priority2 Priority3 Priority4 .... Priority9
001 Manual 40491 40425 40421 00000 ... 00000
002 Automatic 00000 00000 00000 00000 ... 00000
Matrix
OFF-Hook Alert
Whats this?
Many a times the DKP user does not replace his handset properly or is in a error tone state due to any action. In such
cases the callers gets an error tone, when they try to reach the DKP user. The DKP user is not aware of this.
ETERNITY supports a feature called as OFF-Hook Alert by which the speakerphone of the DKP station is activated,
when the error tone matures.
This gains the users attention.
The error tone goes on till the handset is put back.
If the user presses the SPK key then the error tone does not stop but is transferred to the receiver.
=X=X=
Matrix
OG Reference Table
Whats this?
The OG Reference Table is a set of general features that define the logic of building the DDI Number for a station
placing a call and sending it to the network. An OG Reference Table is assigned to SIP/T1E1PRI/BRI ports. This table
in conjunction with DDI Routing Reference Table builds the DDI Number. The ETERNITY offers 64 such Tables each
of which can be programmed as per the requirement.
How to use it?
OG Reference Number-This is the reference number acts as an identifier to the translation logic programmed in the
OG Reference Table. Any number of table can have the same reference number. An OG Reference ID can be
assigned to ISDN, SIP, T1E1PRI and BRI trunks. For more details on the complete translation logic please refer the
topics Direct Dialing-In (DDI), DDI Routing Table.
Start Channel Number-This is the first channel number for the trunk to which the logic is applicable.
Channel Count-The Total number of channels from the Start Channel Number of the port (Trunk) to which the OG
Reference Table is applicable.
ISDN Number-Each ISDN Trunk is given an Installation Number by the Service Provider. This is the combination
of Main Number (MSN Number) and the first DDI Number. The Number is of maximum 16 digits. This is also known
as ISDN Installation Number or just ISDN Number. The MSN number is given by the service provider whereas the
Directory Numbers can be selected by the user. However the number of digits to be used for the Directory Number
should be informed to the service provider.
DDI Routing Reference ID-The DDI Routing Reference ID programmed in the OG reference table, provides
mapping with the DDI Routing Reference ID programmed in the DDI Routing Table. Using the mapped entry of DDI
Routing Table, the DDI number gets created from the flexible number. This DDI number is sent as Calling Party
Number while making OG call.
How to program?
Programming an OG Reference Table
Use the following command to program an OG Reference Table:
6312-1-OG Reference Table Index-Parameter Number-Value
6312-2-OG Reference Table Index-OG Reference Table Index-Parameter Number-Value
6312-*-Parameter Number-Value
Where,
OG Reference Table Index is from 01 to 64.
Parameter Number is from 1 to 5.
How to assign default values to an OG Trunk Bundle?
Use the following command to default an OG Reference Table:
6311-1-OG Reference Table Index
6311-2-OG Reference Table Index-OG Reference Table Index
6311-*
Where,
OG Reference Table Index is from 01 to 64.
Matrix
Default values of OG reference table as given below:
Parameter Value:
Relevant Topics:
2. ISDN-BRI 573
3. DS1 Trunks 475
=X=X=
Parameter No. 1 2 3 4 5
Parameter Name/Index OG Ref. ID Start Channel No. Channel Count ISDN Number DDI Routing Ref. ID
01 00 01 00 Blank 000
02 00 01 00 Blank 000
03-63 Same as 02
64 00 01 00 Blank 000
Code 01-99 BRI 01-02 01-30 16 digits 001-128
T1E1PRI 01-30
Matrix
OG Trunk Bundle
Whats this?
The OG Trunk Bundle is set of parameters that completely define the grouping of similar channels. The word channel
refers to a speech path. A TWT trunk is a channel, an E&M trunk is a channel, a GSM port is a channel. Each speech
path of the T1/E1 line is a channel. Bundles of similar trunks are formed. These Bundles are used to form an OGTBG.
The ETERNITY supports 64 OG Trunk Bundles.
How to use it?
The OG trunk bundle contains parameters like:
Trunk Type-Specific trunk bundle consists of some of these ports. The different types of ports are TWT, BRI,
T1E1PRI, E&M, Mobile, SIP and Magneto.
Trunk Number-Once the type of port is identified in the bundle, it is required to identify the number of that port,
because there can be more than one port for given type.
Start Channel Number-This is applicable to BRI and DS1 Trunks.
Trunk Count-This is the number of trunks to be kept in the same bundle. For TWT and E&M this could be 128. This
value for the BRI and DS1 Trunks is counted from the start channel. For example if the port type is TWT, port number
is 002 and channel count is 025, then TWT channels 002 to 027 would be grouped together. Consider a second
example where channels 15 to 25 of T1E1PRI port are to be programmed in one channel group then port type will be
T1E1PRI, port number would be 5, start channel number will be 15 and channel count will be 11.
Rotation Type-This parameter shows which channel should be selected when next call lands on that port for
example, if ascending order is selected that the system checks 001-128, for first free channel and if descending order
is selected the system checks from 128-001.
Ascending Order: e.g.
001 to 128 (for TWT/E&M)
01 to 30 (for T1E1PRI)
01 to 02 (for BRI)
01 to 32 (for SIP)
Descending Order: e.g.
128-001 (for TWT/E&M)
30 to 01 (for T1E1PRI)
02 to 01 (for BRI)
32 to 01 (for SIP)
Cyclic:
Always the next channel is picked for a new OG call.
ANT Apply-Select from enable/disable as required. To use ANT feature, it should be enabled for the trunk port from
which the number is to be dialed out.
ANT Table No. - This is a Table number in which Dialed Number Strings and corresponding Substitute number
strings are programmed at specific Index. This table number is assigned to the specific trunk port from which the
number is to be dialed. Refer chapter Automatic Number Translation for more details.
How to program?
Use following command to program the feature in OG Trunk Bundle:
6702-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-Code
6702-2-OG Trunk Bundle Number-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-Code
Where,
OG Trunk Bundle Number is from 01 to 64.
Use following command to set default values for OG Trunk Bundle:
6701-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number
6701-2-OG Trunk Bundle Number-OG Trunk Bundle Number
6701-*
Where,
Matrix
OG Trunk Bundle Number is from 01 to 64.
Default value of OG Trunk Bundle table as given below:
Parameters Value:
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Parameter
No./
Bundle No.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Trunk Port
Start
Channel No.
Total Trunk
Count
Rotation Type
Alternate Number
Translation (ANT)
Type Number Apply ANT Table No.
01 TWT 001 01 008 Ascending Disable 1
02 MOBILE 001 01 032 Ascending Disable 1
03 BRI 001 01 002 Ascending Disable 1
04 DS1 001 01 032 Ascending Disable 1
05 SIP 001 01 032 Ascending Disable 1
06 None 000 01 017 Cyclic Disable 1
:: None 000 01 017 Cyclic Disable 1
:: None 000 01 017 Cyclic Disable 1
61 TWT 001 01 008 Ascending Disable 1
62 BRI 001 01 002 Ascending Disable 1
63 DS1 001 01 030 Ascending Disable 1
64 MOBILE 001 01 032 Ascending Disable 1
Code 00 None 000 01-30 001-128 0 Disable 1-8
03 TWT 001-128 1 Ascending Enable
04 BRI 001-002 2 Decending
05 T1E1PRI 001-030 3 Cyclic
06 E&M 001-128
25 Mobile 001-032
26 SIP 001-032
29 Magneto 001-128
Matrix
OG Trunk Bundle Group
What is this?
OG Trunk Bundle Group provide efficient allocation of trunks to different stations.
All the trunks connected to the system can be bunched in different groups called OG Trunk Bundle Group. Maximum
8 Trunks can be put in one OG Trunk Bundle Group and 32 such OG Trunk Bundle Group can be formed.
These OG Trunk Bundle Group can be allotted to each individual station.
A station can be allotted different OG Trunk Bundle Group during different timings of the day.
How it works?
System uses two methods while selecting a trunk from the OG Trunk Bundle Group viz. Remember last trunk and Dont
Remember last trunk. In Remember last trunk method, the system remembers the last trunk used and allots next trunk in
the group to the station. In dont remember last trunk method, the system searches for a first free trunk from the group.
Following flow chart depicts the chronology of events when a station grabs a trunk.
Time based LCR Mixed LCR No LCR SP-SP LCR Number based LCR
Start
Station user dials trunk
group access codes
Which
LCR type is
selected ?
System finds the cheapest
trunk from the group
depending upon the time on
which call is made &
following rotation logic
Is the
cheapest
trunk free
?
Are other
trunk available
in this group
System allots the
trunk to the station
End
No
Select next
cheapest trunk
in this group
Yes
Yes
System gives busy
tone to the station
System waits for next
action from the user
No
System waits for dialing
of entire number
System finds
cheapest trunk for
this number
Is cheapest
trunk free?
System dials out
the number
End Select next cheap
trunk in this group
No
Yes
Yes
System gives busy
tone to the station
action from user
End
A
D
C
Are other
trunks available
in this group?
No
System allots a free trunk from the
OG trunk bundle group depending
upon the rotation flag
End
Matrix
A
System waits for dialing of
entire number
System gets the OG trunk bundle group. System finds the
OG trunk bundle group from the grabbed. OG trunk
bundle group depending upon time and rotation logic
Is the cheapest
trunk free ?
System dials out the number
End
Are
other trunks
available with OG
trunk bundle
group ?
Select next cheapest
trunk within the group
Yes
No
Yes
No
System gives busy
tone to the station
action from user
End
C
System waits for dialing of entire
number
System ignores first few digits from the
dialed number as per ignore digit count
and finds cheapest trunk for the number
from the OG trunk bundle group as per
the number logic and rotation logic
D
Matrix
How to program?
Step 1
Use following command to make default OG Trunk Bundle Group:
1401-1-OGTBG Number
1401-2-OGTBG Number-OGTBG Number
1401-*
Where,
OGTBG Number is from 01 to 32.
Step 2
Use following command to set OG Trunk Bundle:
1402-1-OGTBG Number-Destination Index-OG Trunk Bundle
1402-2-OGTBG Number-OGTBG Number-Destination Index-OG Trunk Bundle
1402-*-Destination Index-OG Trunk Bundle
Where,
Destination Index is from 1 to 8.
OG Trunk Bundle is from 01 to 64.
For Defaults refer Table1.
Step 3
Use following command to set Rotation Flag. For explanation on how to use, refer important point at the end of chapter:
1403-1-OGTBG Number-Flag
1403-2-OGTBG Number-OGTBG Number-Flag
1403-*-Flag
Where,
For Defaults refer Table1.
Step 4
For LCR Type-refer chapter Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based.
Step 5
For CPS refer chapter Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection.
Step 6
Refer the topic Station Basic Feature Template for details on assigning OGTBG to stations.
Step 7
How to assign an access code to OGTBG?
There are maximum 6 trunk access codes. These are Flexible access codes. Trunk access codes are common for all the
users. They cannot be different for different station.
A default trunk access codes table is given below:
Flag Meaning
0 Rotation OFF
1 Rotation ON
OGTBG Index Default Trunk Access Code
1 0
2 5
3 61
4 62
Matrix
Use following command to program the desirable access code for a trunk access index:
3112-1-OGTBG Index-Access Code-#*/Press <Hold>
3112-2-OGTBG Index-OGTBG Index-Access Code-#*/Press <Hold>
3112-*-Access Code-#*/Press <Hold>
Where,
OGTBG Index is from 1 to 6.
Access Code is maximum 6 digits (Generally access code for trunk is of two digits).
Use following command to clear the access code for a OGTBG index:
3112-1-OGTBG Index-#*
3112-2-OGTBG Index-OGTBG Index-#*
3112-*-#*
Use following command to assign default access code for a OGTBG index:
3162-1-OGTBG Index
3162-2-OGTBG Index-OGTBG Index
3162-*
How to use it?
To grab OG Trunk Bundle Group 3, the user should dial 61.
To grab OG Trunk Bundle Group 1, the user should dial 0.
How the Rotation flags work?
Eight OG Trunk Bundle can be programmed as member of each OGTBG.
OGTBG has Rotation flag, and each OG trunk bundle has Rotation type Cyclic/Descending/Ascending.
These two flags dont have any relation with each other and so will work in isolation.
If Rotation is ON in the OGTBG:
The first call will get routed using the OG Trunk bundle Member1. The trunk port from the OG Trunk Bundle member
1 will get selected using the rotation type programmed for the OG trunk bundle programmed as member 1.
When second call is there, it will get routed using the OG trunk bundle Member 2, and the trunk port from the OG
trunk bundle member 2 will get selected according to the rotation type programmed in the OG Trunk Bundle
programmed as member2.
Accordingly the member of the OGTBG will be accessible to the station user accessing the OGTBG in sequence.
If the Rotation is OFF in the OGTBG:
The calls will always get routed from the OG trunk Bundle member 1 if any trunk/channel is free in it. If all the trunks/
channels of the OG trunk bundle member 1 are busy then the call will get routed using the OG trunk bundle
member 2.
Now the trunk/channel to route the call will get selected as per the rotation type programmed for the OG trunk bundle
used as member 2 and when the trunk ports of OG trunk bundle programmed in member 1 and member 2 all are
busy, the OG trunk bundle member 3 will be used to route the call.
Thus the Rotation flag of OGTBG will be used to select the OG trunk bundle member1 to member 8 as are call basis
while the rotation type flag associated with the OG trunk bundle will decide the rotation mechanism to select the trunk
port from the particular OG trunk bundle.
5 63
6 64
2 Dial 0/5/61 to 64. Dial tone of the trunk.
3 Dial desired external number.
OGTBG Index Default Trunk Access Code
Matrix
Default OG Trunk Bundle Group Table (Table-1):
Relevant Topics:
3. Time Tables 870
6. Trunk Access Group (TAG) 879
=X=X=
Group
no.
Rotation
flag
LCR
Type
OGTB
Member 1
OGTB
Member 2
OGTB
Member 3
OGTB
Member 4
OGTB
Member 5
OGTB
Member 6
OGTB
Member 7
OGTB
Member 8
01 ON None 01 02 03 04 05 00 00 00
02 ON None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
03 ON None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
: : : : : : : : : : :
32 ON None 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Matrix
Operator
Whats this?
Generally, in context of PBX, an Operator is referred to as a person who handles more number of calls at a time and
facilitates a link between the caller and the called person.
Medium sized offices generally employ one operator. Generally, a receptionist is defined as an Operator during
Working hours, an Office Assistant as an Operator during Break hours and a Security Guard as an Operator during
Non-working hours.
The system offers multiple Operators. It is possible to have four Operators (maximum) in each time zone.
An Operator is a routing group made of one or many stations. If only one station is required to be an operator,
program a routing group with one station and make it the operator.
An operator can be assigned optimum call loops if it is a DKP (Please refer Digital Key Phone-Operation for more
details).
The DSS keys of the Operator can be programmed (if DKP) to simplify the job of the operator. Refer Digital Key
Phone-Soft Keys Programming for more details.
Few SLTs/DKPs can be assigned Operator 1, few can be assigned Operator 2, etc. so that call management is
efficient.
However, each station can have only one Operator per time zone i.e. SLT 2001 can have 3001 as Operator for
working hours, 3002 as Operator for Break hours where as 3003 as Operator for Non-working hours. In simple
words, when 2001 dials 9 during working hours, the call goes to 3001, when he dials 9 during Break hours the call
goes to 3002 and when he dials 9 during Non-working hours, the call goes to 3003.
Likewise, trunk is also assigned as Operator. Hence, when the caller dials 9 through DID during working hours, the
call is routed to the station defined as Operator for the working hours and so on. For e.g. The caller on trunk 001
(during working hours) dials 9 the call lands on 3001, when a caller on trunk 001 dials 9 during non-working hours
the call lands on 3003 and when the caller dials 9 during break hours the call lands on 3002.
Alternatively, it is also possible to have same Operator for all the time zones.
The table given below depicts how operator stations are assigned to stations timewise.
How to program?
Step 1
Use following command to assign a time table to an Operator:
1602-1-Operator-Time Table
1602-2-Operator-Operator-Time Table
1602-*-Time Table
Where,
Operator is from 1 to 4.
Time table is from 1 to 8.
Step 2
Use following command to define an Operator for working hours:
1611-1-Operator-Routing Group
Where,
By default, Routing Group is 32.
Operator Station
Station/Trunk Working Hour Break Hour Non-Working Hour
2001 3001 3002 3003
3001 3001 3001 3001
3002 3002 3002 3002
3003 3003 3003 3003
Trunk 000 3001 3002 3003
Matrix
Use following command to define an Operator for break hours:
Where,
By default, the routing group is 32.
Use following command to define an Operator for non-working hours:
Where,
By default, the routing group is 32.
To assign an operator for station and trunks. Please refer the topic Station Basic Feature Template and Trunk Feature
Template.
How to make Operator Absent/Present
To make Operator Absent, dial 104-Password-0.
To make Operator Present, dial 104-Password-1.

When the Operator is Absent, the incoming calls go to the landing destination of the Operator.
In this situation, if any user tries to make an external call then;
If the user station is DKP then a message User Absent is displayed in the LCD.
If the user station is SLT then the user gets a error tone.
The Operator must be made present when the operator returns back.
Use the following command to default an operator:
1601-1-Operator
1601-2-Operator-Operator
1601-*
Where,
On issuing this command, timetable 1 is assigned to operator and routing group 01 is assigned to operator for all
timezone.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Matrix
Paging
Whats this?
You can deliver a message to a mass of people just by lifting your handset and dialing a code. This feature is helpful
when it is required to call few people for a meeting. This feature is of great use in factories, offices, etc. where it is not
feasible to provide more number of stations. In such cases, if you need to call somebody you can just make an
announcement naming him to come and see you or call you. This can also be used for mass communication (Public
Address System-PAS).
The ETERNITY supports two types of paging.
Internal paging
Each DKP is equipped with built-in hands-free speaker. A user can use this for announcements. As soon as the access
code for a paging zone is dialed, the speaker of the DKP is activated and the callers voice is heard.
One or more destinations (DKP Stations and external paging ports) can be paged simultaneously depending on the zone
programming.
Maximum number of internal paging ports = Max number of DKP = 128.
External Paging
Many times it is required to make announcements in a hall, in a lobby or on a shop floor. In such situations, internal
paging might not serve the purpose because of limited voice level available on the small speaker of a DKP. As higher
power output is needed, external amplifier and speaker are desirable.
The ETERNITY supports such external paging by way of providing an Analog Output Port (AOP) on the ETERNITY ME
Card Switch. An AOP outputs un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signal to be amplified by an external amplifier. The
specifications of an Analog Output Port are given below.
Specification Value
Maximum Voltage 0.707 Vrms across 600
Paging
Internal Paging
(on the DKP)
External Paging
(AOP)
On Built-In
Paging Port
ETERNITY
DKP
DKP
DKP
Matrix
Paging Interface block diagram is given below:
For more details on installation of external paging equipment, please refer Section 1: Introduction. Please note that the
ETERNITY supports one built in paging port on the ETERNITY ME Card Switch. This port is located on the ETERNITY
ME Card Switch of the system. Its interface is available on from the facial panel on the front side of the card.
This special external paging port has following hardware ID.
Slot Number=16
Port Number = 00
Follow the steps to connect a Paging system to the ETERNITY:
Connect good quality external amplifiers and matching speakers to the external music port. A combination of 10W
amplifier and a 4W speaker can be used. Other combinations can also be used as per the requirement.
Keep the distance between the system and the amplifier at minimum to reduce noise pickup.
Use shielded cable for connecting the system with the amplifier and amplifier with the speaker.
The PAS port is an audio output port hence no electrical signal should be applied to this port. This may result in
permanent damage to the system. Matrix warranty does not cover damages resulting from improper use. Please
refer the connection details for making connections.
How to use it?
A User needs to dial paging access code for making announcement in a paging zone. Access code for each paging zone
is flexible and can be programmed the same way other access codes are programmed.
A paging zone may contain one or more internal and external paging ports. When a user dials a code for the zone, all the
speakers of the zone are activated and the announcement is heard on all the speakers.
Once the announcement is over, user needs to replace the handset. The system deactivates all the speakers.
2 Dial 1074-Page Zone Number. You get connected to the external paging port.
3 Start announcement when the ring back tone stops.
ETERNITY
M
a
s
t
e
r
S
w
i
t
c
h
P
o
w
e
r
Amplifier
Matrix
The flow chart elaborates these steps.
How to program?
The ETERNITY supports maximum of ten (10) paging zones. Each zone is assigned a station group. A port can be of
internal type (DKP) or external type (built-in port). The ports to be assigned to a zone are first grouped into a station
group. (Please refer Station Group for more details). Assign the station group to the page zone.
Use following command to program station group in the page zone:
2301-1-Page Zone-Station Group
2301-2-Page Zone-Page Zone-Station Group
2301-*-Station Group
Where,
Page Zone is from 01 to 10.
Station Group is from 01 to 16.
By default, Station Group is 01.
Use the following command to clear the station group assigned to paging zone:
2301-1-Page Zone-00
2301-2-Page Zone-Page Zone-00
2301-*-00
Example 1:
Announcement is to be made on DKP ports 001, 002 and 003 in page zone 0. Program the DKP ports in station group 01.
6602-1-01-1-02-001
6602-1-01-2-02-002
6602-1-01-3-02-003
Assign the station group to page zone 01.
2301-1-01-01
Relevant Topic:
1. Station Group 767
=X=X=
Start
User dials a paging zone code
System activates the free ports
User speaks out his message. The
message is heard on all the speakers
The user disconnects
System releases all the paging ports
and deactivates the speakers
End
Making an
announcement
Terminating an
Announcement
Matrix
Peer-to-Peer Calling
Whats this?
Making a call on the VoIP Ethernet Port without going through any proxy is called Peer-to-Peer Calling.
For this the system supports, the table to be programmed which consists of Number, Destination Address and Name
field for each entry.
The user has to know only the IP address of the called party.
Note:
For programming . use #9 when SLT or DKP is used. But for dialing a number with . use *.
For example:
There are 3 branch offices of the same company located at different places and they are connected to each other by
private IP Network as shown in the figure below:
Following types of calls can be made using peer to peer calling feature.
2001 will dial 3001 to call Mumbai office.
2001 can dial 31-2001 to call Delhi office, i.e with PBX exchange ID.
2001 can use trunk Access Code 0 to call Mumbai office. He can dial 0-3001.
2001 can call 2001 in Delhi by dialing Trunk Access Code i.e. by dialing 0-312001.
2001 can call the local PSTN number 28111263 of Mumbai by dialing Trunk Access Code i.e by dialing 0-
02228111263.
Baroda local user 2630555 can call the Baroda user through Baroda-PBX i.e 2630555 user will dial any PSTN
number of PBX for which DISA is enabled and dials the Chicago number using TAC i.e. 0011-312-651011.
2001 can transfer the call to 3001 in Mumbai (whether Internal or External Call).
2001 can call sumer@pulver.com directly through SLT or DKP using TAC.
2001 can call IP address 192.167.100.1 directly through SLT or DKP using TAC.
2001 can call 123@abc.com through SLT or DKP using TAC.
sumer@pulver.com and IP address 192.167.100.1 can be stored in the Global Memory/Personal Memory. Toll control
will be checked for IP Address.
Above mentioned different applications of the non-proxy calling are possible with suitable programming of the ETERNITY
with ETERNITY ME Card VoIP. Programming for different applications of calling is explained in detailed in Important
points.
IP Network
Baroda
Mumbai
Frankfurt
Delhi
Chicago
PBX-A PBX-E
PBX-D PBX-B
PBX-C
32
31
PSTN
22
Sumer@pulver.com
123@abc.com 192.167.100.1
123@xyz.com
456@abc.com
192.168.1.4
192.168.1.3
192.168.1.2
192.168.1.1 192.168.1.5
9898001122 6545351
2654515 2630555 28121234 28111263
890011 651011
24531 24251
PSTN
1-312
3002 3001
4002 4001
PSTN
11
2002 2001
PSTN
265
2002 2001
5002 5001
PSTN
49-69
2637223
Matrix
How it works?
Peer to Peer Table is used, for deciding the destination IP Address for call routing on the non-proxy SIP trunks (Registrar
server address shall be programmed as blank for these trunks). This table is common for all the SIP trunks.
Program three parameters viz. Number String Prefix, Destination Address and Name for each entry.
Number String Prefix can be maximum 8 digits long. (0-9, #, * allowed). Default: Blank.
Program the first entry for destination Address and Name which will be used to route the call in case the dialed
number is not found in the Peer-to-Peer call table. Thus entries at Index-001 are reserved for the case of dialed
number string not programmed in the Peer-to-Peer Table.
Destination Address can be maximum 15 characters long. Default: Blank.
Enter Name of maximum 12 characters long. Default: Blank.
After this table, the system will check Automatic Number Translation (ANT) logic for dialing the number.
If dialed number is found in the Peer-to-Peer table and Destination address is not programmed for that Number, caller
will get error tone.
If destination address is programmed, then system will apply ANT logic.
Programming of the Peer-to-Peer Table can be done through Web Jeeves and SE mode using DKP or SLT.
How to program?
Number String
Use following command to program the Number String in peer-to-peer table:
7801-1-Index-Number String-#*
7801-2-Index-Index-Number String-#*
7801-*-Number String-#*
Where,
Index is from 001-999.
Number String can be a complete telephone number, truncated telephone number or an area code.
Number string is of maximum 8 digits with (0-9, #. *).
By default, Blank for all indices.
Use following command to clear the Number String for an Index:
7801-1-Index-#*
7801-2-Index-Index-#*
7801-*-#*
Destination Address
Use following command to program the Destination Address in peer-to-peer table:
7802-1-Index-Destination Address-#*
7802-2-Index-Index-Destination Address-#*
7802-*-Destination Address-#*
Where,
Destination Address is of maximum 40 char. with ASCII.
Use following command to clear the destination address for an index:
7802-1-Index-#*
7802-*-#*
Index Number String Destination Address Name
001 No Match Found
002 2001 192.168.001.116
003 2002 192.168.1.21 Matrix
: Blank Blank Blank
999 Blank Blank Blank
Matrix
Name
Use following command to program the Name in peer-to-peer table:
7803-1-Index-Name-#*
7803-2-Index-Index-Name-#*
7803-*-Name-#*
Where,
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters of maximum 8 characters.
Use first 25 keys and the redial key to enter the name. Terminate with #*.
Display Name field is not sent in the SIP message. It is just a tag for the entry.
Use following command to clear the Name for an Index:
7803-1-Index-#*
7803-*-#*
Important Points:
Differentiating the Proxy and Non-Proxy trunk:
Refer the chapter SIP Trunk Parameters. The system will consider the SIP trunk to be party, if the registrar server
is programmed for it. If the registrar server address is not programmed, it will be considered as non-proxy trunk.
Using existing CUG table for making outgoing call using SIP Trunk:
We can use the existing CUG Table of the system i.e. program the extension number or PBX Exchange ID in the
CUG table and Assign the OGTBG (consisting of SIP Non-proxy trunk).
Thus when the user dials the extension number directly or with PBX exchange ID, CUG table will be checked first
and if the number is found in the CUG table, call will be routed using the OGTBG programmed for that number.
How to program the PBX and how the call will be routed when different type of calls is made is explained
below:
Case 1:
2001 of PBX-A dials 3001 after picking up the Handset:
The call should land on station 3001 of PBX-E.
Program 3001(or 3 or 30 or 300) with OGTBG containing SIP Trunk (Non-Proxy Trunk) in the CUG table of PBX-
A. Program Maximum dialed digits as 4 for this index. All other parameters in the CUG table should be blank.
Program 3001(or 3 or 30 or 300) and Destination Address 192.168.1.1 in the Peer-to-Peer table.
When 2001 dials 3001, it will be compared in the CUG table. As number is matched in the CUG table, OGTBG is
decided.
From OGTBG it is decided that it is a SIP trunk, thus Peer-to-Peer table is checked and Destination address is
found from the table.
Use the SIP as station for incoming call, by assigning * as SIP ID for the SIP trunk.
Thus in the SIP message 3001@192.168.1.1 is send from PBX-A.
PBX-E receives 3001@192.168.1.1 in the SIP message.
PBX-E checks the CUG table first and as 3001 is not programmed in the CUG table, it checks the flexible number
of the stations.
3001 is found in the flexible number list of PBX-E.
Thus the call is routed to the station 3001 of PBX-E.
The call will be routed even if 3001 is programmed in the CUG table. For this, enable self route flag.
Case 2:
2001 of PBX-A dials 31-2001 (with PBX exchange ID) after picking up the handset. The call should land on station
2001 of PBX-C:
Program 31(or 312 or 3120 or 312001) with OGTBG containing SIP Trunk (Non-Proxy Trunk) in the CUG table of
PBX-A. Program Maximum dialed digits as 6 for this index. All other parameters in the CUG table should be
blank.
Program 31 (or 312 or 3120 or 312001) with Self Route Flag Enabled and strip digit count2 in the CUG table of
PBX-C.
When 2001 dials 312001, it will be compared in the CUG table. As number is matched in the CUG table, OGTBG
is decided.
Matrix
PBX-C receives 312001@192.168.1.3 in the SIP message.
PBX-C checks the CUG table first and 312001 is found in the CUG table with self route flag enable and strip digit
count 2.
Thus the call is routed to the station 2001 of PBX-C after striping of 31.
Case 3:
2001 of PBX-A dials 3001 using Trunk Access Code (TAC) after picking up the handset i.e. by dialing 0-3001:
The call should land on station 3001 of PBX-E.
Program LCR-Number Based (assign OGTBG containing SIP trunk (Non-proxy) to number 3) or assign SIP Trunk
(Non-Proxy trunk) for the TAC 0.
When 2001 dials 0-3001, OGTBG is decided as per the programming i.e. LCR-Number based or OGTBG
assigned to TAC.
PBX-E checks the CUG table first and as 3001 is not programmed in the CUG table, it checks the flexible number
of the stations.
3001 is found in the flexible number list of PBX-E.
Thus the call is routed to the station 3001 of PBX-E.
Case 4:
2001 of PBX-A dials 2001using Trunk Access Code i.e. by dialing 0-312001. Call should land on station 2001 of PBX-
C:
Program LCR-Number Based (assign OGTBG containing SIP trunk (Non-proxy) to number 31) or assign SIP
Trunk (Non-Proxy trunk) for the TAC 0.
Program 31 (or 312 or 3120 or 312001) with Self Route Flag Enabled and strip digit count2 in the CUG table of
PBX-C.
assigned to TAC.
PBX-C receives 312001@192.168.1.3 in the SIP message.
PBX-C checks the CUG table first and 312001 is found in the CUG table with self route flag enable and strip digit
count 2.
Thus the call is routed to the station 2001 of PBX-C after striping of 31.
Case 5:
2001 should be able to call the local PSTN number 28111263 of Mumbai by dialing Trunk Access Code i.e. by dialing
0-02228111263. The call should be routed to the PSTN number 28122263 of PBX-E:
Program LCR-Number Based (assign OGTBG containing SIP trunk (Non-proxy) to number 022) or assign SIP
Trunk (Non-Proxy trunk) for the TAC 0.
Program 022 and Destination Address 192.168.1.1 in the Peer-to-Peer table.
Program 022 with OGTBG containing any analog or digital trunk in the CUG table of PBX-E. Program Strip digit
count = 3. All other parameters in the CUG table should be blank.
assigned to TAC.
PBX-E checks the CUG table first and as 022 is programmed in the CUG table, it decides the OGTBG.
Using the trunk programmed in the OGTBG, it dials out the number 28111263 after stripping off the digit 022.
Thus the call is routed to the PSTN number 28111263 through PBX-E.
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
1. VoIP Calling 917
=X=X=
Matrix
PLCC-An Introduction
Whats this?
ETERNITY-PLCC EPAX is a digital PBX. It uses a digital switch and hence is a 100% non-blocking system. In PLCC
network, number of PLCC EPAX needs to be connected.
Refer to diagram showing cluster of exchanges in a PLCC network. Each exchange in PLCC network is assigned with
Exchange Identity (SID) in order to get identified by other exchanges in the network. Thus each exchange is identified by
Exchange Identity (SID). As shown, an exchange is connected to the other exchange through an E&M tie line. Also, it is
possible that an exchange may not be directly connected to all other exchanges in a PLCC network through E&M tie
lines.
For example, SID-52 exchange is connected to SID-51, SID-34, SID-71 and SID-60 exchanges through direct E&M tie
lines. However, SID-52 exchange is not directly connected to SID-61, SID-62 and SID-72 exchanges through E&M tie
lines.
Following example shows how a call is established.
Consider, an example where subscriber 20 of SID-52 needs to call subscriber 30 of SID-51. After dialing trunk access
code, dial 51 (SID number of the exchange) and then dial 30 (subscriber number of SID-51). This is how a call is
completed, as both exchanges; SID-51 and 52 are connected through a direct E&M tie line.
However, consider another example, where subscriber 20 of SID-52 needs to call subscriber 10 of SID-61. Even though,
here both exchanges are not connected through direct E&M tie line, it is possible by dialing trunk access code with SID
number of the exchange (here 61) followed by subscriber number (here 10). However, the call will proceed through SID-
60 and then reach SID-61. This is called Transit Call. Here, the subscriber will not be able to know that call has
proceeded to the required exchange through transit facility.
SID-52
SID-60 SID-34
SID-71 SID-51
SID-72
SID-61
SID-62
E&M Tie Line
Sub. 30
Sub. 31
Sub. 22
Sub. 21
Sub. 20
Sub. 11
Sub. 10
PLCC Network
Sub. 12
Matrix
PLCC-Priority
All callers do not have same hierarchical position in an organization. It is not advisable to keep a call waiting ofsome
important person just because there is already one unimportant call pending at the destination. The important caller
should be allowed to jump the queue and be attended first ahead of other earlier pending calls.
The ETERNITY supports flexible priority assignment for different users. Each port can be assigned a priority level
between 0 to 9. Higher the priority level, more important the caller is. Accordingly 0 has the least priority and 9 has
the highest priority.
This feature enables a station user to free the system resources (station or a trunk) for him.
How to use it?
How it works?
Suppose, Station A and Station B are talking to each other. Station C calls Station B and finds it to be busy. If he uses
Priority, he gets connected to Station B. Station A gets disconnected and gets error tone. However, for this to happen
the priority of Station C should be higher than that of Station B and Station A else he wont be able to use this feature.
Likewise suppose Station A is talking to an external party through trunk 1. Station B tries to grab Trunk 1. On finding it
busy, he uses Priority. Doing so, he gets connected to trunk 1 and gets P&T dial tone whereas Station A gets
disconnected and gets error tone. However, for this to happen priority of Station B should be higher than Station A. In
this case, priority of the trunk is not considered.
2 Dial Station/Trunk Access Code. Busy tone
3 Dial #*.
The called station/trunk gets disconnected.
You get dial tone after the confirmation tone.
4 Dial Station/External Number. Ring Back Tone
PLCC-EPAX (SID-61)
PLCC-EPAX
(SID-70)
PLCC-EPAX
(SID-52)
PLCC-EPAX
(SID-34)
PLCC-EPAX (SID-51)
E&M1 E&M2 E&M3
E1 E2 En
E1
E2
En
E&M1
E&M3
E&Mn
E&Mn
E&M1 E&M2 E&M3 E&Mn
E&M2
E1 E2 En
E1
E2
En
E&Mn
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
E&Mn
E&M1
Matrix
Suppose station A is talking to an external party through trunk1. Station B calls station A and finds it busy. He uses
Priority. Doing so, station B gets dial tone whereas, the trunk 1 gets disconnected.
Priority-Within the Exchange
Under this facility any subscriber having priority access can enter in to conversation with two conversing subscribers
within the exchange.
How to use it?
Please refer above diagram. If any two subscribers, say 20
and 21 of an exchange with SID-52 (without priority access) are in conversation and a third subscriber, say 22 (of same
exchange) with priority access and wants to talk with subscriber 21. But, when subscriber 22 dials for subscriber 21, it
gets busy tone. Subscriber 22 can use its priority by dialing code #* in such case and can come in conference with
subscribers 20 and 21.
Priority-In Other Exchange
Under this facility any subscriber having priority access can enter in to conversation with two conversing subscribers
in two different exchange.
How to use it?
Please refer above diagram. If any two subscribers, say 20 and 21 of an exchange with SID-52 are in conversation and a
subscriber, say 10 of an exchange with SID-61 (from the same network with priority access) want to talk with subscriber
20 of SID-52. After dialing the required subscriber 20 of SID-52, he gets busy tone. Subscriber 10 of SID-61 can now
press #* on his telephone and can get into conference with both subscriber 20 and 21 of SID-52.
SID-61 SID-52 SID-34
E&M tie line E&M tie line
In conversation
Dials. Gets busy tone.
Uses priority by dialling
'#*'
Sub. 20
(Without priority access)
Sub. 21
Sub. 22
(With priority access)
SID-61 SID-52 SID-34
E&M tie line
In conversation
Sub. 10
Sub. 20
Sub. 21
'# *'
E&M tie line
Matrix
Priority-Over Busy E&M Tie Line
Under this facility any subscriber having priority access can use priority to free a busy E&M tie line.
How to use it?
Please refer diagram, if two subscribers, say 20 of SID-52 (without priority access) and 11 of SID-61 (without priority
access) are in conversation on an E&M tie line. Both this exchanges SID-52 and SID-61 are connected with each other
through a single E&M tie line. Now, if subscriber, say 10 (with priority access) of SID-61 wants to talk with subscriber 21
of SID-52, then he will get busy tone. Subscriber 10 of SID-61 can now use its priority by pressing #* on his telephone
and can get into conference with both subscriber 11 of SID-61 and subscriber 20 of SID-52. After termination of the call
by subscribers 11 and 20, subscriber 10 can get dial tone and make a call on an E&M tie line to subscriber 21 of SID-52.
PLCC-Routing Table
In PLCC network, number of PLCC-EPAX needs to be connected. The entire network should behave as a single unit
or one group. It is not feasible to have unique station numbers throughout the network. In such cases, an Exchange
ID is assigned to the PBX and a routing table is programmed in the exchange. In case of newly added exchange in
the network, the routing tables of other exchanges required to be modified.
In the above figure, 3 PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
E&M1 to E&M3 are E&M lines between the three PBX systems.
How it works?
In this application, it is possible to have same station number in two or more PBXs of the network. Few new words have
been used to explain PLCC routing table, each of these words have been explained below:
SID-61 SID-52
E&M tie line
In conversation
'#*'
Sub. 10
Sub. 20
Sub. 21
Sub. 11
Matrix
and Self Route flag. The PLCC routing table programming works according to this table.
Route Code: Route code could be of maximum sixteen digits. Digits 0 to 9, # and * are allowed. Generally, route code
should be a unique number. For example in the figure given above, route code for PBX-A can be defined as 21, route
code for PBX-B can be defined as 22 and that for PBX-C can be defined as 23.
rotation On/Off for trunk selection from the OGTBG is used. If rotation is OFF then always the first trunk in the OGTBG is
rotation is ON then the trunks in the OGTBG are selected in round robin fashion.
Strip Digit Count: This count signifies the number of digits to be striped of while dialing/decoding a number. To
elaborate: Consider figure 1. The requirement is that if station 2001 of PBX-B dials 212002 and if E&M 1 is busy then the
call should reach station 2002 of PBX-A through alternate route. In this case the strip digit count of PBX-A should be
programmed as 2 and that of PBX-B and PBX-C should be programmed as 0. Doing so, when station 2001 of PBX-B
dials 212002 and if E&M1 is busy then the call is routed through PBX-C. In this case, PBX-B dials 212002 on E&M3,
PBX-C receive this code and dials out the same code i.e. 212002 on E&M2 without striping of any digit. On receiving
212002, PBX-A strips of two digits as per the programming and routes the call to station 2002.
Self-Route Flag: This flag signifies that the digits being dialed are for the same PBX and are not to be dialed on the E&M
trunk.
Consider a case in which PLCC network has exchanges A, B, C with station numbers 2001 to 2100 for PBX A, 3001
to 3100 for PBX B and 4001 to 4100 for PBX C. Route code can be defined as 2, 3 and 4 for PBX A, PBX B and
PBX C respectively. When station number 2001 wants to talk to 2050, he dials the required number. PBX A checks
subsequent dialed digit and transfer the call to station number 2050. If first digit happens to be 3 or 4 the call is
transferred to PBX B or PBX C respectively. PBX B and PBX C checks for second and subsequent digits. If the dialed
number is available in the exchange then the call is transferred to destination. If the dialed number is not available then
the error message will be given by that particular exchange.
The PLCC Routing table should be programmed carefully. Specified Route code in association with Self Route Flag
disable will make the call to be routed on trunk specified in OG Trunk Bundle Group.
OG Call with Trunk Access Code:
In PLCC applications, SLT numbers are duplicated. Internal and External dialing is differentiated. Internal dialing happens
by dialing SLT numbers directly. External dialing starts with dialing the trunk access code (usually 0) followed by SID and
remote SLT number. Suppose the exchange ID of PBX-A is 21 and that of PBX-B is 22. Both PBXs have same station
numbers, say 2001,2002, etc. Suppose a station of PBX-A wants to call 2001 of PBX-B. He has two options. He can dial
222001 or 0222001 i.e one with route code 22 and other with route code 022. Hence we need to program two entries in
the routing table, one with route code 22 and other with route code 022.
The ETERNITY has only one routing table. The same table is used for Closed User Group and Closed User
Group-With Exchange ID. Hence the table has to be programmed keeping the application in mind.
Route Index Route Code OGTBG Strip Digit Count Self Route Flag Maximum Dialed Digits
001
:
:
250
Matrix
How to program?
For more details on above steps, please refer topic Closed User Group (CUG) and Closed User Group-With Exchange
ID.
PLCC-Express Line Network
ETERNITY-PLCC Express Line Communication System is a digital PBX. It uses a digital switch and hence is a 100%
non-blocking system. ETERNITY-PLCC Express Line Communication System is available in three models: ETERNITY
GE-6S, ETERNITY ME-10S and ETERNITY ME-16S.
Refer to diagram in Introduction to PLCC Network topic showing cluster of substations in a PLCC network. A substation
in a PLCC network is connected to any other substation through a dedicated PLCC express line (i.e. 4/6 wire E&M tie
line) as shown in the diagram.
How to program?
PLCC Express Line Communication System is one of the applications of the ETERNITY. We recommend the user to
read relevant topics before programming it for PLCC Express Line application.
Step 1
Refer chapter E&M Feature Template to program the feature in an E&M Feature Template.
Step 2
Refer chapter E&M Feature Template to assign default values to an E&M Feature Template.
Step 3
Refer chapter E&M Feature Template to assign an E&M Feature Template to an E&M.
Step 4
Refer chapter Name Programming to program a name for E&M trunk.
Step 5
Hardware ID is an attribute of a software port. Hardware ID of a software port decides where the port is physically
located. To derive hardware ID of a software port, we need slot number and port number of the card. Hence, all the
programming is done for the software port and not for the hardware ID. Accordingly, the software port number is used for
all the programming. Please refer Software Port and Hardware ID for more details, to assign hardware ID to an E&M
software port:
Step 6
Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an E&M.
Step 7
Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template to assign a Station Basic Feature Template to an E&M.
Step 8
Please refer Time Tables chapter to program the time zone of a trunk.
Step 9
To program a feature in a Trunk Feature Template, please refer Trunk Feature Template for more details.
Step 10
To assign a Trunk Feature Template to an E&M, please refer Trunk Feature Template topic.
Step 11
Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming to assign a function to a key of DSS-64 assigned to a DKP. In
this commands function type and function number can be programmed as explained below.
Function:
A function should be assigned to these Keys, which they should perform. There are 2 different types of functions, which
can be assigned to a key for PLCC express line application. Each function that can be assigned to a key is given unique
number. Following table list the function types available:
Matrix
Step 12
Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming to assign a function to a DKP key. In this command refer above
explanation to program Function Type.
Step 13
Define dialing property of E&M port. The dialing properties are based on the applications. If the dialing type for a E&M is
programmed as pulse type then Pulse-Dialing ratio should be defined. The E&M support six different Pulse Dialing
Ratios.
For assigning Dial Type and Pulse Dial Ratio, please refer E&M Feature Template topic.
Relevant Topics:
2. Time Tables 870
=X=X=
Function Type Meaning Function Number/Port
00 Null --
06 Access a trunk 001 to 128
Value Meaning/Ratio
1 10PPS, 1:2
2 10PPS, 2:3
3 10PPS, 1:1
4 20PPS, 1:2
5 20PPS, 2:3
6 20PPS, 1:1
Matrix
Printer Port
Whats this?
The ETERNITY offers a built in parallel port for connecting a printer with the system. This port is available (in the form of
a 25 pin connector) on the ETERNITY ME Card Master of the system and is marked PRN on the facia panel.
How it works?
Any standard printer can be attached with the system. The system sends data in the pure ASCII format. No special
characters or control sequences are sent.
Relevant Topics:
2. System Activity Log 829
3. System Fault Log 839
=X=X=
Matrix
Priority
Whats this?
All callers do not have same hierarchical position in an organization. It is not advisable to keep a call from some important
person waiting just because there is already one unimportant call pending at the destination. The important caller should
be allowed to jump the queue and be attended first ahead of other earlier pending calls.
Following cases highlight the utility of this feature:
Calls from CEO.
Calls on a special or private trunk line.
Calls on a help or emergency line.
Calls on a hot line.
All the above calls can be given priority from other normal calls.
Priority is relevant only when there is more than one calls pending on the destination.
How it works?
When the destination answers a call by going off-hook or, the call with the highest priority is connected.
In case of a DKP user, the second line of the LCD shows the call with the highest priority. And this will be the first call to
be answered whenever the user lifts his handset.
In case of a SLT user, the priority is not relevant because there cannot be more than one call ringing on a SLT.
The ETERNITY supports Flexible priority assignment for different users. Each port can be assigned a priority level
between 0 to 9. Higher the priority level, more important the caller is. Accordingly 0 has the least priority and 9 has the
highest priority. Following ports can be programmed with a desired priority level:
SLT users.
DKP users.
Trunk lines.
Priority logic also applies to operators.
Above example shows arrival of calls on the operator in following chronological order:
When operator answers calls by going OFF-Hook, above calls will be answered in the following order:
DKP#201
TRUNK#001
SLT#301
SLT#302
Of course, the DKP user can alter the above sequence by manually answering calls by using the DSS key.
Please refer separate Manual for Hotel Applications for using this feature for Hotel/Motel applications.
Caller Time of the Call Priority
SLT 301 10:00:00 0
SLT 302 10:00:05 0
Trunk 001 10:00:10 4
DKP 201 10:00:15 7
Matrix
How to program?
Please refer Trunk Feature Template for more details on programming priority for trunks.
Use following commands for programming priority for Stations:
Priority of SLT user
Use following command to assign priority to SLT:
3911-1-SLT-Priority
3911-2-SLT-SLT-Priority
3911-* -Priority
Where,
SLT = 001-512
Priority is 1 to 9
By default, priority for SLT is 5
Priority of DKP user
Use following command to assign priority to DKP:
3912-1-DKP-Priority
3912-2-DKP-DKP-Priority
3912-* -Priority
Where,
DKP = 001-128
Priority = 1 to 9
By default, priority for DKP is 5
Priority of ISDN Terminal user
Use following command to assign priority to ISDN Terminal:
3913-1-ISDN Terminal -Priority
3913-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Priority
3913-* -Priority
Where,
ISDN Terminal = 01-64
Priority = 1 to 9
By default, priority for ISDN Terminal is 5
Priority of DS1 user
This command is applicable when DS1 port is configured in NT mode. Refer chapter DS1 Trunks.
Use following command to assign priority to DS1:
3914-1-DS1-Priority
3914-2- DS1-DS1-Priority
3914-* -Priority
Where,
DS1 = 1-8
Priority = 1 to 9
By default, priority for DS1 is 5
Priority of E&M user
This command is applicable when E&M port is configured to act as a station.
Use following command to assign priority to E&M:
3915-1-E&M-Priority
3915-2- E&M-E&M-Priority
3915-* -Priority
Where,
E&M = 001-128
Priority = 1 to 9
By default, priority for E&M is 5
Priority of BRI user
Matrix
This command is applicable when BRI port is configured to act as a station.
Use following command to assign priority to BRI:
3916-1-BRI-Priority
3916-2- BRI-BRI-Priority
3916-* -Priority
Where,
BRI = 01-32
Priority = 1 to 9
By default, priority for BRI is 5
Important Point:
Refer separate Manual for Hotel Applications for using this feature for Hotel/Motel applications.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Matrix
Privacy
Whats this?
While two stations are in speech, it is desired that no third person can listen their talk i.e privacy of their conversation is
maintained. However if few important stations are allowed to use features like interrupt request, barge-in and raid, they
can intrude the conversation. Also if DID is activated, outside caller can reach any station or if there is a call from another
trunk line, it will interrupt your conversation by giving intrusion tone. Some times this is very annoying and undesirable.
ETERNITY provides privacy against all these types of intrusions. This is known as Privacy.
There are four types of intrusions against whom a user might wish privacy:
Privacy from Interrupt Request and Barge-In.
Privacy from Raid.
Privacy from Trunk call intrusion.
Privacy from DID call.
These four types are provided as programmable features in the Class of Service groups. A user can be assigned any
combination of above four privacy flags by selecting an appropriate Class of Service group. If it is required that no other
station can raid you then the corresponding flag i.e Privacy-Raid in the Class of Service should be made 1. Likewise
other flags should be made 1 or0 as per the requirement. For more details, please refer section Class of Service
(COS).
How it works?
Following flow charts depict the series of events in which it works.
Start
Station A and Station B are in speech
Station C calls Station A. He gets busy tone
Station C dials interrupt request,
Barge-In or Raid code
In Station C
allowed the dialed
feature ?
Is Station A
programmed with
privacy against interrupt
request / Barge-In or
Raid ?
Station A gets beeps in his speech
Logic of interrupt request, Barge-In
and Raid follows here
End
Call blocked. Station
C gets error tone
End
No
Yes
No
Yes
Privacy from IR/Barge-In/Raid
Matrix
Privacy from Trunk Call
Start
Station A and Station B are in speech
Fresh call arrives on Trunk T. Station
A is the first destination for the trunk
Is Station A
programmed with
privacy against trunk
call beeps ?
System gives beeps to station
A for trunk landing ring timer
Does
station A attends
the trunk call
Station B goes on hold. Caller
gets connected to Station A
End
Station A is not interrupted. System
lands the call on next landing
station in the trunk landing group
End
System routes the call to the next
destination in trunk landing group
No
Yes
No
Yes
End
Privacy from DID calls
Start
An external call lands on a
trunk programmed for DID
The external caller dials
Station A
Is Station
A programmed with
privacy against DID
?
The caller is routed to
Station A. He gets ring
End
The caller gets DID error
message or DID error tone
End
Yes
No
Matrix
How to program?
Access to Call Privacy is programmable from Class of Service. Any station can be allowed or denied Call Privacy
through Class of Service programming.
To deny Call Privacy set the flag to 1 and to allow Call Privacy set the flag to 0.
Example:
To program station 201 such that no other station can raid it, enable this feature i.e. set this bit to 1.
Relevant Topics:
2. QSIG 687
=X=X=
Matrix
Programming the System
Whats this?
ETERNITY is a flexible system and can be programmed to suit your needs. Programming can be done at three levels:
System Engineer Level
At this level, System Engineer does the programming. This is called System Engineer mode. For more details please
refer the topic System Engineer (SE) Mode.
System Administrator Level
At this level, System Administrator does the programming. This is called System Administrator mode. For more
details please refer the topic System Administrator (SA) Mode.
User Level
At this level, User does the programming for himself of features like Alarms, Call Follow Me, etc, using the respective
Access Code. For more details, please refer respective sections. For the complete list of features accessible to the
user, please refer Appendix E: Features at a Glance.
Attention:
Before programming any feature/parameters refer chapter Class of Service (COS) and allow it, if required.
Tools for Programming
The ETERNITY can be programmed using following tools:
Conventional Telephone Instrument (SLT).
Digital Key Phone (EON45/EON42S/P, EON42SR, EON48).
Computer (using communication software like HyperTerminal, ProComm, etc.).
Matrix Jeeves.
Programming the ETERNITY using a conventional telephone instrument
oThis is the most commonly used method of programming the system. However, care should be taken while issuing
commands which need to be terminated. The commands like assigning a flexible number of less than four digits to a
station needs to be terminated using '#*'.
Programming the ETERNITY using DKP (e.g. using EON45)
Programming the ETERNITY using an EON45 is very convenient since it displays the commands being keyed in on
the LCD.
It also displays the current values of the parameters being programmed. For e.g. when a command for the
abbreviated dialing is issued for an index, it displays the telephone number assigned for the index to be programmed.
The SE has the flexibility to add few digits to the telephone number or change the telephone number instead of
entering the complete command again.
For example, one of the service providers has prefixed digit '2' to all the telephone numbers. In such case, this feature
of EON45 could of great help to the user.
Following keys are used for cursor movement while editing the command:
Up and Down arrow keys used to shift the cursor left and right during programming.
Key marked 'spd/-' to shift the cursor to the left.
Key marked 'trf/fl/x' to delete a character.

Programming the System
SE Level
User Level
SA Level
Matrix
Name programming is done from the keypad only. Please refer Name Programming for more details.
Please note that the command is submitted to the system by pressing 'hold' key, which acts, similar to 'enter' key of the
computer.
Programming the ETERNITY using Computer, please refer Programming Using a Computer.
Programming the ETERNITY using the Jeeves, please refer Jeeves.
Steps for programming
ETERNITY simplifies programming of the system by means of the various Programming Templates. These Templates
are group of features that completely define the advanced and basic behavior of SLT ports, DKP ports, different types of
trunks etc. Program the different Template to meet the user requirements and assign them to the Station, Trunks etc. In
addition, certain individual programming is required per station or trunk to the complete programming. Most of the time,
the default values are selected to meet the user's requirements. In such conditions programming can be skipped and the
system may function with default values.
It is advisable to program the system in following hierarchy. One may skip undesirable features programming.
Class of Service
Current Date and Time
SLT Programming (Programming of the Soft ware Port, Hardware Slot, Flexible number, Station Basic and Advanced
Feature Template, SLT Hardware Template, etc.)
DKP Programming (Programming of the Software Port, Hardware Slot, Flexible Number, Station Basic and Advanced
Feature Template, etc.)
TWT Programming (Programming of the Software Port, Hardware Slot, Hardware Port, Trunk Basic and Advanced
Feature Template, TWT Hardware Features Template, etc.)
Station Message detail Recording (SMDR)
Voice Message Applications
Call Budget
Department Call
Paging
Music
Rings
External Call Forward
Analog Input Port (AIP)
Emergency Dial
E&M Programming (Programming of the Software Port, Hardware Slot, Hardware Port, Name Trunk Basic and
Advanced Feature Template, E&M Feature Template, Station Basic and Advanced Feature Template)
DSS Programming (DKP Software Port, DSS No, Hardware Slot, Hardware Port)
BRI Programming (Programming of the Software Port, Hardware Slot, Hardware Port, Name Trunk Basic and
Advanced Feature Template, etc.)
All the Templates (Features contained, programming the Template, assigning the Template) mentioned above are
explained in detail in the respective topics.
The ETERNITY accepts the command immediately and works accordingly but it takes approximately 2 minutes to save a
command. Hence it is advisable not to turn OFF the system for 2-3 minutes after entering the last command.
In condition of power failure, whichever commands were entered during last 30 seconds will not be saved and will have
to be reprogrammed.
Important Points:
Programming can be done at the site without opening the system from any Station.
System can also be programmed from a remote end from anywhere in the world. For more details, please refer
section Remote Programming.
Programming is accomplished by dialing separate codes (string of digits) for different settings. This eliminates need
for entering long and confusing programming sequences. Programming commands are broken into two parts: Codes
and Values.
The system continues to function normally even during programming. This allows the SE or SA to change the settings
without disturbing any communication.
The SE mode and the SA mode are password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorized
alterations and subsequent misuse of features and facilities.
The ETERNITY can be programmed from multiple stations at a time.
The ETERNITY can be programmed using DISA facility also.
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
2. Remote Programming 718
3. Programming Using a Computer 685
4. Jeeves 589
6. Name Programming 642
7. System Engineer (SE) Mode 838
8. System Administrator (SA) Mode 834
=X=X=
Matrix
Programming Using a Computer
Whats this?
Programming a system like ETERNITY through phone is a bit time consuming process. ETERNITY provides a facility to
program it using a computer. A text file is to be made which can be uploaded to the ETERNITY using any communication
software like ProComm, BitComm, HyperTerminal, etc. The advantage of programming the ETERNITY through computer
is that once a text file is ready, any change can be made in it and can again be uploaded to the PBX.
How to use it?
As explained above any communication software can be used to upload the text file from the computer to the
ETERNITY.
Connect the communication port of the ETERNITY with the communication port of the computer using a crossed
communication cable. Matrix provides 10 meters long crossed communication cable with 9-pin D type female
connector on both the sides. Please refer Communication Ports for more details.
Program the communication port of the ETERNITY for serial communication.
The ETERNITY can be installed on any standard computer with Window and NT operating system.
How to program?
Use following command to assign communication port for programming using computer:
2101-Code
Where,
By default, the Communication Port assigned is None.
Use the following command to enable/disable programming through the communication port:
2102-Code
Where,
By default, Communication Port is disabled.
Programming the ETERNITY using HyperTerminal
Start the computer. Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to Accessories, Double click on WordPad.
Create a text file that contains programming commands followed by the comments explaining the significance of the
command.
Each command should be prefixed with character ^.
Once all the commands are entered, save this file using a proper file name with .txt extension.
Now again click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to Accessories, Click on HyperTerminal. Double click on
HyperTerminal icon.
Give the name you desire and press <Enter>. No need to enter any phone no. Change the settings of Connect to
using its options to Direct to COM port2 (It is assumed that the PBX is connected to COM port 2 of the computer)
and click OK. Set Bits per Second to 4800, Data Bits to 8, Parity Bit to None, Stop bits to 1, Flow Control to None
and Click OK.
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM Port 1
2 COM Port 2
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
COM 1
or
COM 2
RS232C Cable
(Crossed)
ETERNITY Computer
COM 1
or
COM 2
Matrix
Click on File, Click on Properties, Click on Settings and Change Emulation option to VT100. Click on ASCII set up.
Tick for Echo characters in sending mode. Click OK.
Click on Transfer. Click on Send Text File. Give filename with path OR Browse to give the path where you have
stored your file to be transferred. Click OK.
The computer is sending the command file character by character. The PBX is receiving these characters and
executing commands after assembling them in command format. Wait for the file transfer to finish.
If the PBX accepts the programming, it responds by sending character Y. If the PBX does not accept it, it responds
by sending character N.
Click on File and then on Exit to come out of the programming mode.
Verify the programming of PBX by generating configuration reports.
The command file can be saved for future reference and use.
We can print the command file for verification and future reference.

Programming the PBX using ProCOMM
It is assumed that ProComm software is loaded at C:\ProComm\Procomm.
Start the computer. Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to MS-DOS prompt.
You get C:\windows>. Type CD.. You get C:\>. Type EDIT. A new file viz. UNTITLED opens.
Type all the commands followed by the comments explaining the significance of the command. Each command
should be prefixed with character ^. Now to save the file, press ALT-F. Point to Save As and press enter. The
computer asks you the name you want to give to this file. Give the name say <ETERNITY>. Again press ALT-F and
point to Exit. Press enter to exit.
Please note that you have saved the file in the root directory.
Again Click on Start, Point to Programs, Point to MS-DOS prompt.
You get C:\windows>. Type CD.. You get C:\>. Type CD PROCOM You get C:\ PROCOMM>. Type PROCOM You get
PROCOMM main screen. Press <ESC>. You get status bar at the bottom of the screen.
Press ALT-P to set the communication port of the computer. Press 9. Press enter.
Now press 20 if you have connected the cable to COM port 1 (where normally a mouse is connected) and press
enter OR Press 21 if you have connected the cable to COM port 2 and press enter.
To save the changes made in the settings, press 24.
After some time you get a screen with a status bar at the bottom.
Now press Page Up. Press 7 to select ASCII protocol (Preferred).
Now the computer asks the file name. Give the file name. Type C:\>ETERNITY. Press enter.
The file gets uploaded to the ETERNITY. The ETERNITY responds with Y if it accepts the file and with N if it does
not accept the file. Re-try if the programming is not done properly.
To come out of the DOS mode, press ALT-X and then Y.
Important Points:
The first line of the Text file should be P-SE Password.
Each command should be prefixed with character ^.
If WORDSTAR is being used, non-document mode must be used.
While programming ETERNITY using HyperTerminal the commands containing number strings must be terminated
with ~.
=X=X=
Matrix
QSIG
What's this?
QSIGnaling (QSIG) is an ISDN based protocol for signaling between PBX to PBX. QSIG is a protocol based on
internationally agreed Standards for ISDN.
Two/Multiple ETERNITY can be networked using QSIG. This is known as 'Interoperability'.
The ETERNITY supports QSIG on the T1E1PRI ports.
The basic call procedure in the QSIG is implemented as per the ECMA-143.
The generic functional protocol for the Supplementary Services is implemented as per ECMA-165. Refer relevant
chapter for more details for the features explained in this chapter.
This chapter provides details about following:
(A) QSIG Supplementary Services
(B) Configuring for - Basic Call and Supplementary Services
(C) Configuring for - IC Call using DDI Routing Over QSIG
(A) QSIG Supplementary Services
The ETERNITY supports following supplementary services in QSIG:
Advice of Charge (AOC)
Identification:
The Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
The Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP)
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
Name Identification:
The Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP)
The Connected Name Identification Presentation (CONP)
Call Diversion
Call Forward Unconditional (CFU)
Call Forward On Busy (CFB)
Call Forward on No Reply (CFNR)
Call Completion
Call Completion on Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
Call Completion on No Reply (CCNR)
Do Not Disturb - Override (DNDO)
Call Intrusion (CI)
Call Transfer (CT)
Recall (RE)
Message Wait Indication (MWI)
Call Offer (CO)
The implementation of these features in QSIG is as per specific ECMA standards as described below.
Advice on Charge:
Advice on Charge (AOC) is implemented as per ECMA-211 and ECMA-212.
Using this feature, the caller can know the cost of the call made to public N/W using networked trunk. The cost of the
call will be determined by using Call Cost Calculation. Refer chapter Call Cost Calculation (CCC).
The ETERNITY supports called 'AOC-E' End of the Call Charge Information. ETERNITY supports charging for calls
made to public network. The Cost of the call is calculated by the end PBX from which the call is terminated to public
Network.
CLIP/CLIR/COLP/COLR/CNIP/CONP
The Identification features are implemented as per ECMA-163 and ECMA-164.
Refer chapters Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) and Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR).
Call Diversion
Call Diversion is implemented as per ECMA-173 and ECMA-174. Refer chapters Call Forward and Call Forward-
Remote.
Remote activation/deactivation of Call Forward is not supported.
Matrix
Call Completion-on Busy Subscriber and on No Reply (CCBS and CCNR)
Call Completion (CC) features CCBS and CCNR are implemented as per standards ECMA-185 and ECMA-186.
The CCBS is implemented as the feature Auto Call Back on Busy and the CCNR is implemented as the feature Auto
Call Back on No Reply. Refer chapter Auto Call Back (ACB).
DND is implemented as per standards ECMA-193 and ECMA-194. Refer chapters Do Not Disturb (DND).
Do Not Disturb - Override (DNDO)
DND is implemented as per standards ECMA-193 and ECMA-194. Refer chapters Do Not Disturb (DND).
Call Intrusion (CI)
Call Intrusion is implemented as per standards ECMA-202 and ECMA-203.
The Call Intrusion (CI) is implemented as Raid feature. However the station on which intrusion is made, will not get
'beeps'. On successful intrusion, the 'conference 3-party' type call will be established. Refer chapters Raid and
Conference-3 Party.
Call Transfer
Call Transfer is implemented as per standards ECMA-177 and ECMA-178. Refer chapter Call Transfer.
The ETERNITY supports Call Transfer by Joining method.
'CLIP-Hold' flag on the Transferring Station:
If 'CLIP-Hold' flag is enabled on the Transferring Station, the ETERNITY will send the held party's number as calling
number while placing call on QSIG.
If 'CLIP-Hold' flag is disabled on the Transferring Station, the ETERNITY will send the calling station's number as
calling number. Refer chapter Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) and Station Advanced Feature
Template for more details of CLIP-Hold.
Note 1: It is recommended to enable CLIP Hold flag for the operator station, so that when operator transfers the
call to another PBX using QSIG, the terminating PBX (ETERNITY) can identify it as call from Public network and
treat as incoming call.
Note 2: As a Terminating PBX, the ETERNITY will consider the call as internal or from public network depending
upon the length of the digits for the calling number received.
Note 3: If Calling number is not received because of any reason, and CLIP- Hold flag is enabled, the ETERNITY
will send the 'Trunk Name' programmed for the trunk port as calling line identification.
Recall (RE)
Recall (RE) is implemented as per standards ECMA-213 and ECMA-214 and ECMA-143.
The ETERNITY supports Recall-Busy and Recall-No Answer features like ETERNITY features, Call Transfer-On
Busy and Call Transfer-While Ringing.
Refer chapter Call Transfer for more details.
Message Wait Indication (MWI)
Message Wait (MWI) is supported as per standards ECMA- 241 and ECMA-242.
Refer chapter Message Wait for details about form of indications.
Call Offer
Call Offer is implemented as per standards ECMA-191 and ECMA-192.
The call offer feature is implemented as the 'Interrupt Request' feature.
Refer chapter Interrupt Request (IR) for more details.
Matrix
(B) Configuring for - Basic Call and Supplementary Services
Configuration:
For simple application as shown in above figure, make settings as below for PBX 1 and PBX 2.
Connect T1E1PRI line between PBX 1 and PBX 2.
Now open Web Jeeves and make below settings in PBX 1 and PBX 2.
Settings at PBX 1:
Following basic settings are required in ETERNITY PBX 1.
T1E1PRI Port Parameters:
Set Signal Type as "E1 QSIG"
Set Orientation Type as "Network"
T1E1PRI PRI Parameters:
Set ISDN PRI Variant as "QSIG E1"
Closed User Groups (CUG)
OG Trunk Bundle Groups
OG Trunk Bundle
Following settings are required for CLI display.
Program Outgoing (OG) Reference ID as "01" in T1E1PRI Port Parameters.
DDI Routing-Outgoing Reference Table.
DDI Routing-DDI Routing Table
Route Index Route Code OGTBG
Strip Digit
Count
Self Router
Flag
Max. Dialed
Digits
001 21 01 0 Enable 04
002 31 01 0 Disable 04
003 0 01 0 Disable 04
Group No. Rotation Flag LCR Type
OGTB
Member 1
OGTB
Member 2
OGTB
Member 3
-------
OGTB
Member 8
01 Disable None 01 00 00 ------- 00
Template
Number
Trunk Port Start
Channel
Number
Total
Trunk
Count
Rotation
Type
Automatic Number Translation (ANT)
Port Type Port No. Apply Dialed No. List Substitute No. List
01 T1E1PRI 001 01 030 Cyclic Disable 05 06
Table ID OG Ref. ID Start Channel No. Channel Count ISDN Number DDI Routing Ref. ID
01 01 01 30 2100 01
Table
ID
Reference
ID
Start DDI
No.
Total DDI
Numbers
DDI No.
Digit Count
Port
Type
Port
Number
Start DDI
Flexible No.
001 01 2100 0100 4 FLEXNUM 000 2100
2101
2102
2103
3101
3102
3103
PBX 1 PBX 2
DS1-1 DS1-1
PSTN/ISDN/
GSM/VoIP etc
ETERNITY 1 ETERNITY 2
Q-Sig
TAC- 0
Matrix
Settings at PBX 2:
Following basic settings are required in ETERNITY PBX 2.
T1E1PRI Port Parameters
Set Signal Type as "E1 QSIG"
Set Orientation Type as "Terminal"
T1E1PRI PRI Parameters
Set ISDN PRI Variant as "QSIG E1"
Closed User Groups (CUG)
Note: Assign OGTBG of T1E1PRI-1 used for QSIG connectivity with PBX 1.
OG Trunk Bundle Groups
OG Trunk Bundle
Following settings are required for CLI display.
Program Outgoing (OG) Reference ID as "01" in T1E1PRI Port Parameters.
DDI Routing-Outgoing Reference Table.
DDI Routing- DDI Routing Table
Basic Call:
Below examples show various calls between both PBX.
Example 1:
To make call from station of PBX 1 to any station of PBX 2 or vice versa.
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial station number 3101 or from station 3101 of PBX 2, dial station number 2101.
Example 2:
To make OG call from station of PBX 1 using Trunk of PBX 2
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial 0Note (TAC at PBX 2 for Trunk) and then dial 02652630555 (External Party
number).
Note: Here 2101 of PBX 1 does not get dial tone after dialing 0 (TAC at PBX 2 for Trunk) because 0 is programmed in
CUG table for PBX 1.
001 21 02 Note 0 Disable 04
002 31 02 Note 0 Enable 04
Group
Number
Rotation
Flag
LCR
Type
OGTB
Member 1
OGTB
Member 2
OGTB
Member 3
-------
OGTB
Member 8
01 Disable None 01 00 00 ------- 00
02 Disable None 02 00 00 ------- 00
Template
Number
Trunk Port
Start
Channel
no.
Total Trunk
Count
Rotation
Type
Port
Type
Port
No.
Apply
Dialed No.
List
Substitute
No. List
01 Mobile 001 01 008 Cyclic Disable 05 06
02
T1E1P
RI
001 01 030 Cyclic Disable 05 06
Table ID OG Ref. ID Start Channel No. Channel Count ISDN Number DDI Routing Ref. ID
01 01 01 30 3100 01
Table
ID
Reference
ID
Start DDI
No.
Total DDI
Numbers
DDI No.
Digit Count
Port
Type
Port
Number
Start DDI
Flexible No.
001 01 3100 0100 4 FLEXNUM 000 3100
Matrix
Example 3:
IC call on Trunk at PBX 2 using DID
Note
Enable DID on Mobile Trunk at PBX 2.
Now External Party make IC call on Mobile port. IC call is answered by PBX 2. External Party gets DID Music. Now
External Party dials station number.
Case 1: If External Party dials station number 3101 then call lands on 3101 of PBX 2.
Case 2: If External Party dials station number 2101 then call lands on 2101 of PBX 1.
Note: Refer "IC Call using DDI Routing over QSIG" topic for how to route Incoming Call on T1E1PRI/SIP over QSIG
using DDI Routing.
Supplementary Services:
Working of Supplementary Services of QSIG in ETERNITY is explained as below.
Identification:
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial station number 3101.
CLIP/CNIP:
Name and Number of station 2101 is displayed as CLI on station 3101.
COLP/CONP:
When 3101 of PBX 2 answers the call then Name and Number of station 3101 is displayed on station 2101 using
reverse DDI method.
CLIR:
To restrict CLI at station 3101, below settings required for station 2101.
Allow "CLI Restriction (CLIR)" in Class of Service for station 2101.
Enable CLIR by dialing 103-1 from station 2101.
Here, Name and Number of station 2101 is not displayed on station 3101.
Note: If "CLI Restriction (CLIR) Override" is enabled in Class of Service for station 3101, then Name and Number of
station 2101 is displayed on station 3101.
COLR:
To restrict CLI when IC call answered by 3101, below settings required for station 3101.
Allow "CLI Restriction (CLIR)" in Class of Service for station 3101.
Enable CLIR by dialing 103-1 from station 3101.
Here, Name and Number of station 3101 is not displayed on station 2101 when station 3101 answers the IC call.
Note: If "CLI Restriction (CLIR) Override" is enabled in Class of Service for station 2101, then Name and Number of
station 3101 is displayed on station 2101.
Call Diversion:
Station 2101 of PBX 1 wants to set Call Diversion (Call Forward) to station number 3101 of PBX 2.
Call Forward- Unconditional:
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial 131-3101-#*. Now all IC calls on 2101 gets forwarded to 3101 of PBX 2.
Call Forward-on Busy:
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial 132-3101-#*. Now all IC calls on 2101 gets forwarded to 3101 of PBX 2 when 2101
is busy.
Call Forward- on No Reply:
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial 133-3101-#*. Now all IC calls on 2101 gets forwarded to 3101 of PBX 2 when 2101
does not answer the IC call for RBT- Transfer on No Reply Timer.
Note:
Call Follow Me does not work in QSIG.
Call Forward- Remote does not work in QSIG.
Call Forward- Dual Ring does not work in QSIG.
Call Forward- External number on QSIG not supported i.e. if '0' is TAC code at PBX 2 and station 2101 of PBX 1
dials 131-0-02652630555 (External Number)-#* then station 2101 gets error tone.
Matrix
Call Completion:
Station 2101 of PBX 1 wants to set CCBS/CCNR (ACB) to station number 3101 of PBX 2.
CCBS/CCNR:
From station 2101 of PBX 1, dial station number 3101 of PBX 2. Now dial Access code of ACB (Dial 2) to set CCBS/
CCNR on station 3101 of PBX 2.
Call Intrusion:
Station 2101 of PBX 1 and station 3101 of PBX 2 are in speech. Now another station wants to make Call Intrusion on
station 2101 of PBX 1.
Case 1: Station 2102 of PBX 1 wants to make Call Intrusion on station 2101 of PBX 1.
Allow "Raid" feature in Class of Service for station 2102 of PBX 1.
Set "Priority" level of station 2102 higher than "Priority" level of station 2101.
Disable "Privacy from Raid" in Class of Service for station 2101 of PBX 1.
Also disable "Privacy from Raid" in Class of Service for station 3101 of PBX 2.
Now from station 2102, make call on 2101. After getting busy tone, dial Access code of Raid (Dial 5). Speech will be
established between all three parties 2101, 2102 and 3101.
Note: If "Privacy from Raid" is enabled in Class of Service for station 2101 of PBX 1 or 3101 of PBX 2, then Raid not
possible in above case.
Case 2: Station 3102 of PBX 2 wants to make Call Intrusion on station 2101 of PBX 1.
Allow "Raid" feature in Class of Service for station 3102 of PBX 2.
Disable "Privacy from Raid" in Class of Service for station 2101 of PBX 1.
Also disable "Privacy from Raid" in Class of Service for station 3101 of PBX 2.
Now from station 3102 of PBX 2, make call on station number 2101 of PBX 1. After getting busy tone, dial Access
code of Raid (Dial 5). Speech will established between all three parties 2101, 3101 and 3102.
Note: If "Privacy from Raid" is enabled in Class of Service for station 2101 of PBX 1 or 3101 of PBX 2, then Raid not
possible in above case.
Call Transfer:
Station 2101 and station 2102 of PBX 1 are in speech. Now station 2101 of PBX 1 wants to transfer the call to any station
number or external number of PBX 2.
From station 2101, dial Flash and then dial 3101 (Station number of PBX 2) or dial 0-02652630555 (External
Number).
Now from station 2101, goes ON hook or press 'Transfer' key to transfer the call.
User can transfer the call after making speech with second party or when second party is 'Ringing' or 'Busy'.
Call Recall:
Station 2101 of PBX 1 transfers the call to station 3101 of PBX 2 when station 3101 of PBX 2 is 'Ringing' or 'Busy'. Now
station 3101 does not answer the call.
Call gets return to station 2101 after expiry of 'Transfer on Busy Timer' for transfer- on busy case and 'Transfer while
Ringing Timer' for Transfer- while ringing case.
Call Offer:
Station 2101 of PBX 1 and station 3101 of PBX 2 are in speech. Now station 2102 of PBX 1 wants to give Call Offer to
station 3101 of PBX 2.
Allow "Interrupt Request" feature in Class of Service for station 2102 of PBX 1.
Now from 2102 of PBX 1, make call on station number 3101 of PBX 2. After getting busy tone, dial Access code of
Interrupt Request (Dial 3).
Station 3101 of PBX 2 gets beeps.
Note: If "Privacy from Interrupt Request and Barge-In" is enabled in class of Service for station 3101 of PBX 2, then
Call Offer not possible from station 2102 of PBX 1.
Do Not Disturb (DND):
Station 2101 of PBX 1 wants to set Do Not Disturb on his station.
Allow "Do Not Disturb" in Class of Service for station 2101 of PBX 1.
Now from station 2101, activate Do Not Disturb by dialing 181.
Now station 3101 of PBX 2 will not be able to make call on station number 2101 of PBX 1.
Matrix
Do Not Disturb- Override (DNDO):
Station 2101 of PBX 1 has activated Do Not Disturb. Now station 3101 of PBX 2 wants to make call on station 2101 of
PBX 1.
Allow "Do Not Disturb- Override" in Class of Service for station 3101 of PBX 2.
Now station 3101 of PBX 2 can make call on station number 2101 of PBX 1.
Note: If "Privacy from DND Override" is enabled in Class of Service for station 2101, then station 3101 of PBX 2 can
not make call on station number 2101 of PBX 1.
Advice of Charge (AOC):
AOC is applicable for all external calls made by station of PBX 1 using trunk of PBX 2 (OG Gateway).
Example 1: AOC- OG Call
Station 2101 of PBX 1 makes external call by dialing 0-02652630555 (External Number).
After completion of call, PBX 2 gives Cost of the call using AOC.
Cost of call in AOC is calculated at PBX 2 as per parameters set in Web pages for 'Call Cost Calculation' at PBX 2.
If PBX 2 does not give any charge in AOC then no charge applies on station 2101 of PBX 1.
No effect of Call Cost Calculation parameters set at PBX 1.
Example 2: AOC-Internal Call
Station 2101 of PBX 1 makes call station number 3101 of PBX 2.
All calls between two stations of both PBX are free of charge.
Example 3: AOC-Call Transfer
Station 2101 and station 2102 of PBX 1 are in speech. Now station 2101 transfers the call to External Number
02652630555 using trunk of PBX 2.
Cost of the call is given as per "Call Splitting Flag" and "Originating Flag" set in SMDR- Outgoing Calls at PBX 2.
If "Call Splitting Flag" is set to 'Split' at PBX 2, then charge before the call transfer is applied to station 2101 and
charge after the call transfer is applied to station 2102.
If "Split Flag" is set to 'Don't Split' at PBX 2, then charge is applied as per "Originating Flag".
If "Originating Flag" is set to 'Originating' then all charges before and after the call transfer is applied on station
2101 who has transferred the call.
If "Originating Flag" is set to 'Terminating' then all charges before and after the call transfer is applied on station
2102.
Message Wait Indication (MWI):
Station 2101 of PINX1 is an Operator & he wants to set Message wait on station 3101 of PINX2.
Open "Station Advanced Feature Template" page from web jeeves of PINX2 & program "MW Notification Type" as
Stuttered Dial Tone".
From station 2101, dial Access Code "1076 - 3101-1", to set Message wait on station 3101 of PINX2.
Now Message wait is set on station 3101. When user goes off hook from station 3101, he will get stuttered dial tone.
Same way Message wait can also be canceled for 3101 by dialing access code "1076-3101-0".
(C) Configuring for-IC Call using DDI Routing Over QSIG
Note: If user wants DDI based routing over QSIG then following setup can be made (Not required for normal scenario
explained in Basic Call and Supplementary Services).
Configuration:
2100
2199
3100
3199
PBX 1 PBX 2
DS1-1 DS1-1
ISDN/VoIP
ETERNITY 1 ETERNITY 2
Q-Sig
0265304XXXX
Matrix
Scenario of above figure is explained as below.
T1E1PRI trunk at PBX 2 has ISDN Number with MSN number 0265304 and DDI numbers are 2100-2199 and 3100-
3199.
Station numbers from 2100 to 2199 are connected at PBX 1.
Station numbers from 3100 to 3199 are connected at PBX 2.
PBX 1 and PBX 2 are connected with each other using QSIG.
If Calling Party number is received as 0265304-2100 to 0265304-2199 then it should route on stations of PBX 1. If
Calling Party number is received as 0265304-3100 to 0265304-3199 then it should route on stations of PBX 2.
Settings at PBX 1:
Settings for PBX 1 are given in Configuration of "Basic Call" and "Supplementary Services". No need to change in these
settings.
Settings at PBX 2:
Only make following settings in ETERNITY PBX 2.
OG Trunk Bundle
External Number List
Following settings are required for DDI based routing.
Program Incoming (IC) Reference ID for all Time Zones as "01" in T1E1PRI Port Parameters.
DDI Routing- Incoming Route Reference Table.
DDI Routing- DDI Routing Table
Routing Group
Basic Call:
Below examples show various calls using DDI Routing.
Example 1: External Party makes call on 0265304-2101
Call lands directly on station 2101 of PBX 1 through QSIG.
Example 2: External Party makes call on 0265304-3101
Call lands on station 3101 of PBX 2.
=X=X=
Template
No.
Trunk Port
Start
Channel
no.
Total
Trunk
Count
Rotation
Type
Port Type Port No. Apply
Dialed No.
List
Substitute
No. List
02 T1E1PRI 001 01 030 Cyclic Enable 05 06
Location External No. List 05 External No. List 06
001 026530421 21
Table
ID
IC Ref.
ID
Start
Channel
No
Total
Channel
Count
DDI
Routing
Ref. ID
Route
on First
Destination
Ring
Timer
(Sec)
Route on
TLG when
No Reply
Route on
TLG when
Busy
Trunk Feature
Templates
01 01 01 30 01 No 045 No No 01
02 01 01 30 02 No 045 No No 01
Table
ID
Reference
ID
Start
DDI No.
Total DDI
Numbers
DDI No.
Digit Count
Port
Type
Port
Number
Start DDI
Flexible No.
001 01 3100 0100 4 FLEXNUM 000 3100
002 02 2100 0100 4 ROUTGRP 009
Routing Group Rotation Flag Member 01 Member 02 Member 03 Member 04-16
09 Enable OTBG-02 None None None
Matrix
Quick Dial
Whats this?
Quick Dial feature allows the user to assign a DSS key to frequently used number from the personal/global directory.
By doing so, the number from the global directory/personal directory can be dialed out by just pressing the key.
The speed of Quick Dial makes it very ideal for dialing frequently used numbers.
How to program?
Please refer Abbreviated Dialing for details on programming the personal/global memory and Digital Key Phone-Soft
Keys Programming for details on DSS key programming.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Matrix
Raid
Whats this?
You can enter into the conversation of the called busy station by using this feature.
The station you raid gets a beep (programmable) and you can get into conversation, if he has selected to talk with the
station which has initiated the Raid.
How to use it?
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow raid to a user.
How it works?
User A and User B are involved in active two way call. Now, when user C makes call to busy user A, he gets busy
tone. Hence the user C should use the Raid feature.
User C can use Raid feature only if User C is allowed Raid from COS, user A and B both do not have privacy from
Raid and priority of User C is higher than priority of User A and User B. If these conditions do not get satisfied the
User C will not be able to use Raid feature. Refer chapter 'Privacy' for more details.
If User C presses the flash key then User C is in speech with User A and User B gets music on hold. Again if User C
presses the flash key then User A gets music on hold and User B is in speech with User C. Now again if the three
party speech has to be established then the raided party has to dial Flash-0. (If conference is enabled on the raided
party).
If any party disconnects, a normal 2-way speech is established between the remaining two parties.
When Raid begins, the system gives beeps to user A. These beeps can be enabled/disabled. For more details on this,
refer topic Call Taping. However, for the calls on QSIG signaling (for Call Intrusion), the system will not provide
'beeps'.
A trunk can be raided if and only if it is accessed using selective trunk access code (69) or using a DSS key.
Caution!
Raid is a sensitive feature. The SA and SE should restrict access to this feature. If a user is allowed
the access to raid, he should use this responsibly and sensibly.
Relevant Topics:
2. Privacy 679
3. QSIG 687
=X=X=
2 Dial Station. Busy tone
3 Dial 5. Speech.
4 Start Talking.
Matrix
RCOC (Return Call to Original Caller)
What is this?
Generally, extensions users of the PBX are given a trunk access to make outgoing calls from their phones. It is also
common for a group of extensions to share the same trunks to make outgoing calls.
When an extension user of the PBX makes an outgoing call and the called party does not answer the call or is busy on
another line, it is possible for the called party to return the call (made by the extension user) on the basis of the CLI
number received.
However, when the called party returns the call, this incoming call is mostly likely to land on the Operator extension, as
incoming calls are usually routed to the Operator.
Now, the Operator has no way of knowing which extension made the call so as to transfer the call to that extension.
Instead, the Operator must either ask the called party whom they wish to speak to and transfer the call or put the called
party on hold and find out the extension that made the call. This is an unwieldy process for all concerned - the Operator,
the called party and the extension user who originally made the call.
This can be overcome if the PBX is able to route the returned call to the original caller's extension.
ETERNITY makes this possible with the Return Call to Original Caller feature.
This feature is supported on Mobile ports, BRI, T1E1PRI (DS1) and SIP Trunks.
NOTE: RCOC is not supported when calls are made from analog trunks - TWT and E&M- due to the signaling limitations
of these trunks.
How it works?
The Prerequisites
RCOC is enabled on the desired Trunk/s - BRI, T1E1PRI, Mobile and SIP.
RCOC is enabled in the Class of Service group assigned to the extension.
The Process
When an extension having RCOC feature in its Class of Service makes an out going call, the system checks if RCOC
is enabled on the trunk through which the outgoing call is routed.
If RCOC is enabled on the trunk, the system stores the record of the outgoing call in an internal database referred to
as the RCOC Table.
The system sets RCOC for the outgoing call in the following conditions, according to the Destination Port
45
:
If the Destination Port is a Mobile Port, RCOC is set when:
called party is busy.
called party is out of coverage/mobile is switched off.
called party does not reply.
called party rejects the call.
caller (extension that made the call) goes ON-Hook before the called party answers the call.

If the Destination Port is a BRI or T1E1PRI (DS1) Port or a SIP Trunk, RCOC is set when:
called party is busy.
called party does not answer the call.
caller (extension that made the call) goes ON-Hook before the called party answers the call.
When ETERNITY acts as Gateway,
If the Originating Port is either BRI-NT or DS1-NT, the system checks the Class of Service allowed to the trunk
port.
If the Originating Port is a trunk (DS1-TE, BRI-TE, TWT, MOBILE, SIP), RCOC will be set, if it is enabled on
Destination Port
45. The Trunk from which the outgoing call is made.
Matrix
RCOC shall be set only if the Calling Party's Number is available. If calling party number is missing, then RCOC
shall not be set.
Whenever there is an incoming call on any trunk, the system matches the CLI of the incoming all with the RCOC
Table.
If a matching record entry is found, the system routes the call to the original caller and clears the record entry from the
RCOC Table.
The return call rings on the original caller's extension for the period of the Ring Back Tone Timer (programmable;
default 45 seconds). If the original caller does not answer the call within this Timer, the call is routed to the Trunk
Landing Group programmed for that trunk.
If no match is found in the RCOC Table or the extension or the original caller is busy, the call will be routed according
to the incoming call logic programmed (as programmed in the assigned Trunk Feature Template) in the system.
Feature Interaction: RCOC and DISA CLI Authentication
When DISA CLI Authentication (Multiple Calls or One Call) is enabled on a trunk, whenever there is an incoming call
on the trunk, the system will first check the DISA CLI Authentication Table.
If a matching entry is found in the DISA CLI Authentication table, the system will give dial tone to the caller.
The caller can now invoke RCOC feature by dialing ** (pressing Star key twice).
OR
The caller can make calls to a station or an external number or use a feature as required.
If the caller invokes RCOC feature by dialing ** (pressing Star key twice), the system will check the RCOC Table.
If a matching record entry is found, the system routes the call to the original caller and clears the record entry from the
RCOC Table.
NOTE:
As RCOC is a Class of Service (COS) based feature, extensions that are not allowed this feature in their COS cannot
have their calls returned; even if this feature is enabled on the Trunk they used to make the call.
ETERNITY can keep a record of 255 entries in the RCOC Table.
The record of the outgoing call is stored in the RCOC Table, only if the same record does not already exist in the
database.
Each entry is kept for the duration of the RCOC Record Delete Timer (programmable; default: 999 minutes).
Whenever a record is stored in the RCOC database, the Record Delete Timer for that entry is activated. On the expiry
of the Timer, the entry is deleted by the system.
Each record is deleted from the database either after the call is returned or on expiry of the Record Delete Timer.
The RCOC database remains unaffected during power outages.
In case of Call Transfer, RCOC will be set for the extension which made the call on the trunk.
The Ring Back Tone Timer is common to all internal calls; calls made from one extension will ring on the destination
extension till the end of this timer. Change in the Ring Back Tone Timer for RCOC returned calls on original caller's
extension will also be applied on Ring Back Tone Timer for all internal calls. So, program this Timer taking this into
consideration.
Persons using DISA must be informed about RCOC feature access code ** and how to use this feature when in DISA
mode.
How to program?
For this feature to work, it must be enabled on the Trunk and in the Class of Service of the stations. If desired, the related
Timers, i.e., the RCOC Record Delete Timer and the Ring Back Tone Timer may also be changed.
RCOC on Trunk
Enabling RCOC on Trunk using Jeeves
Login as System Engineer.
Click on the trunk parameters of the trunk type on which you want to enable this feature, namely:
SIP Trunk Parameters
BRI Parameters
DS1 Port Parameters (T1E1PRI)
MOBILE Port Parameters
The page containing the trunk parameters will open.
Click on the check box of 'Return Call to Original Caller (RCOC)' on the page to enable this feature on the desired
trunk port.
Click on 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to save changes.
Log out of Jeeves or continue with other programming tasks.
Matrix
Enabling RCOC on Trunk using SE Command
Enter SE mode.
To enable RCOC on a SIP Trunk
Dial 7743-1-SIP-Code to enable the feature on a single SIP trunk.
Dial 7743-2-SIP-SIP-Code to enable the feature on a range of SIP trunks.
Dial 7743-*-Code to enable the feature on all SIP trunks.
Where,
SIP is the software port number of the SIP trunk from 01 to 32.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable RCOC on DS1 Trunk
Dial 6145-1-DS1-Code to enable the feature on a single DS1 trunk.
Dial 6145-2-DS1-DS1-Code to enable the feature on a range of DS1 trunks.
Dial 6145-*-Code to enable the feature on all DS1 trunks.
Where,
DS1 is the software port number of the DS1 trunk from 1 to 8.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disable
To enable RCOC on BRI Trunk
Dial 6220-1-BRI-Code to enable the feature on a single BRI trunk.
Dial 6220-2-BRI-BRI-Code to enable the feature on a range of BRI trunks.
Dial 6220-*-Code to enable the feature on all BRI trunks.
Where,
BRI is the software port number of the BRI trunk from 01 to 32.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
To enable RCOC on Mobile Port
Dial 8030-1-Mobile-Code to enable the feature on a single Mobile port.
Dial 8030-2-Mobile-Mobile-Code to enable the feature on a range of Mobile ports.
Dial 8030-*-Code to enable the feature on all Mobile ports.
Where,
Mobile is the software port of the Mobile port from 01 to 32.
Code is
0 for Disable
1 for Enable
Default: Disabled
To change the RCOC Record Delete Timer
Dial 3521-Minutes
Where,
Minutes are from 001 to 999
Default: 999 minutes
To change the Ring Back Tone Timer
Dial 3503-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 001 to 255.

Exit SE mode.
Matrix
RCOC in Class of Service
The feature 'RCOC' must be enabled in the Class of Service (COS) group assigned to the station/s for returned calls to
land on them.
In the default Station Basic Feature Template 01 assigned to all stations of the ETERNITY, the default Class of Service
group 01 has the feature "RCOC" enabled. So, all stations of ETERNITY are by default allowed this feature.
There is no need to program this feature if all stations are to be allowed this feature.
However, if you want to deny this COS feature to certain stations and allow this feature to all other stations, follow these
steps:
1. Define a CoS group with RCOC disabled.
2. Prepare a Station Basic Template with this CoS group applicable in all the time zones.
3. Assign this newly prepared Station Basic Feature Template to the station/s on which 'RCOC' is to be disabled.
Refer the topic Class of Service (COS) and Station Basic Feature Template for instructions.
=X=X=
Matrix
Real Time Clock (RTC)
Whats this?
Various features and facilities provided by the ETERNITY use date and time parameters. Such facilities work properly
only if the system is set with correct date and time values. These features are:
Alarms
SMDR
Time Zones
The ETERNITY is equipped with built in Real Time Clock (RTC) circuit. This circuit is to be set once with current date,
time zone and time values. It then updates itself regularly to keep track of the parameters.
The RTC circuit can drift over a long period. Hence it is recommended to check and reset RTC values at least
once every month to correct this drift. Please note that the system RTC takes care of the leap year.
How to program?
Date Format
Use the following command to program the date format:
1000-Date Format
Where,
By default, Date Format is 1.
Date
Use following command to set date:
1001-Date-Month-Year
Where,
DD=01 to 31 (leading zero must in case of single digit date).
MM=01 to 12 (leading zero must in case of single digit month).
YYYY = Year in four digits from 0000 to 9999.
By default, Current date is set.
Note: Before entering a date command (1001-MM-DD-YYYY), user should set date format type first.
Time Zone
ETERNITY supports updating the RTC, automatically as per the country in which it is installed.
Depending up on the programmed country code, ETERNITY updates the RTC, automatically as per that country's
current time.
The default value for Time Zone (GMT time) is programmed in ETERNITY for different countries (or 'States'). Based
on this, the current time will be automatically set in ETERNITY. Refer chapter 'Default Settings' for more information.
The default values of Time Zone can also be changed using SE command..
Use following command to select the Country for the time zone:
1002-Time Zone
Where,
Time zone related to each country is shown in Table1 at the end of chapter.
By default, time Zone is for 'India' (Index = 050).
Using this command, when time zone is changed, the difference between the current time zone and the new time
zone to be set (as programmed by this command), will be applied on the RTC and accordingly new Time will be set in
ETERNITY.
For example, if the ETERNITY is programmed with Time Zone = (GMT + 5.30) and now on 20th April 2009 at 21:00
(9 PM) the time zone is changed to (GMT + 01.00). Current RTC time will get changed to 20th April 2009, 16:30 (4.30
PM)
i.e. the current time will be less by 4 Hours and 30 Minutes.
Date Format Meaning
1 DD-MM-YYYY
2 MM-DD-YYYY
Matrix
Time
Use following command to set time:
1003-Hours-Minutes-Seconds
Where
Hours=Hours in 24-hours format in two digits from 00 to 23
Minutes = Minutes in two digits from 00 to 59
Seconds = Seconds in two digits from 00 to 59
By default, Current Time is set.
Note:
Day can not be changed in the ETERNITY, for the particular Date.
Depending upon the set Date and Time, the Day will be automatically set in the ETERNITY.
Table1 (for selecting country for Time Zone):
Index Time Zone
001 Afghanistan (GMT+04:30)
002 Algeria (GMT+01:00)
003 Antigua and Barbuda (GMT-04:00)
004 Argentina (GMT-03:00)
005 Australia (Perth) (GMT+08:00)
006 Australia (Adelaide) (GMT+09:30)
007 Australia (Brisbane, Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney) (GMT+10:00)
008 Austria (GMT+01:00)
009 Bahamas (GMT-05:00)
010 Bahrain (GMT+03:00)
011 Bangladesh (GMT+06:00)
012 Belarus (GMT+02:00)
013 Belgium (GMT+01:00)
014 Bhutan (GMT+06:00)
015 Bolivia (GMT-04:00)
016 Bosnia and Herzegovina (GMT+01:00)
017 Botswana (GMT+02:00)
018 Brunei (GMT+08:00)
019 Brazil (Fernando De Noronha) (GMT-02:00)
020 Brazil (Brasilia, Rio de Janeiro, Sao Paulo) (GMT-03:00)
021 Brazil (Manaus) (GMT-04:00)
022 Brazil (Acre) (GMT-05:00)
023 Bulgaria (GMT+02:00)
024 Cambodia (GMT+07:00)
025 Cameroon (GMT+01:00)
026 Canada (St. John's) (GMT-03:30)
027 Canada (Halifax) (GMT-04:00)
028 Canada (Montreal, Ottawa, Toronto) (GMT-05:00)
029 Canada (Winnipeg) (GMT-06:00)
030 Canada (Calgary) (GMT-07:00)
031 Canada (Vancouver) (GMT-08:00)
032 Chile (GMT-04:00)
033 China (GMT+08:00)
034 Colombia (GMT-05:00)
035 Costa Rica (GMT-06:00)
036 Croatia (GMT+01:00)
037 Cuba (GMT-05:00)
Matrix
038 Cyprus (GMT+02:00)
039 Czech Republic (GMT+01:00)
040 Denmark (GMT+01:00)
041 Egypt(GMT+02:00)
042 Fiji(GMT+12:00)
043 Finland(GMT+02:00)
044 France(GMT+01:00)
045 Germany(GMT+01:00)
046 Greece(GMT+02:00)
047 Guyana(GMT-04:00)
048 Hong Kong(GMT+08:00)
049 Hungary(GMT+02:00)
050 India(GMT+05:30)
051 Indonesia(GMT+07:00)
052 Iran(GMT+03:30)
053 Iraq(GMT+03:00)
054 Ireland(GMT)
055 Israel (GMT+02:00)
056 Italy(GMT+01:00)
057 Japan(GMT+09:00)
058 Jordan(GMT+02:00)
059 Kazakhstan(GMT+06:00)
060 Kenya(GMT+03:00)
061 Korea - North(GMT+09:00)
062 Korea - South(GMT+09:00)
063 Kuwait(GMT+03:00)
064 Kyrgyzstan(GMT+06:00)
065 Lebanon(GMT+02:00)
066 Libya(GMT+02:00)
067 Malaysia(GMT+08:00)
068 Maldives(GMT+05:00)
069 Mauritius(GMT+04:00)
070 Mexico (Mexico City) (GMT-06:00)
071 Mexico (Chihuahua) (GMT-07:00)
072 Mexico (Tijuana) (GMT-08:00)
073 Mongolia(GMT+08:00)
074 Mozambique(GMT+02:00)
075 Myanmar(GMT+06:30)
076 Namibia(GMT+01:00)
077 Nepal(GMT+05:45)
078 Netherlands(GMT+01:00)
079 New Zealand(GMT+12:00)
080 Nigeria(GMT+01:00)
081 Norway(GMT+01:00)
082 Oman(GMT+04:00)
083 Pakistan(GMT+05:00)
084 Paraguay(GMT-04:00)
085 Peru(GMT-05:00)
Index Time Zone
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
2. Daylight Saving Time (DST) 398
=X=X=
086 Philippines(GMT+08:00)
087 Poland(GMT+01:00)
088 Portugal(GMT)
089 Qatar(GMT+03:00)
090 Romania(GMT+02:00)
091 Russia (Moscow, St. Petersburg) (GMT+03:00)
092 Russia (Novosibirsk) (GMT+06:00)
093 Russia (Vladivostok) (GMT+10:00)
094 Singapore(GMT+08:00)
095 Slovakia(GMT+01:00)
096 South Africa(GMT+02:00)
097 Spain(GMT+01:00)
098 Sri Lanka GMT+05:30
099 Sudan(GMT+03:00)
100 Sweden(GMT+01:00)
101 Switzerland(GMT+01:00)
102 Syria(GMT+02:00)
103 Taiwan(GMT+08:00)
104 Tajikistan(GMT+05:00)
105 Thailand(GMT+07:00)
106 Turkey(GMT+02:00)
107 Uganda(GMT+03:00)
108 Ukraine(GMT+02:00)
109 United Arab Emirates(GMT+04:00)
110 United Kingdom(GMT)
111
United States (Atlanta, Augusta, Boston, Charlotte, Columbus, Detroit, Indiapolis,
Miami, NY, Philadelphia, Washington)(GMT-05:00)
112
Oklahoma, Omaha, St. Louis) (GMT-06:00)
113 United States (Albuquerque, Boise, Cheyenne, Denver, Salt Lake City) (GMT-07:00)
114
United States (Las Vegas, Los Angeles, Phoenix, San Francisco, Seattle) (GMT-
08:00)
115 United States (Juneau) (GMT-09:00)
116 United States (Hawaii) (GMT-10:00)
117 Uzbekistan(GMT+05:00)
118 Venezuela(GMT-04:30)
119 Vietnam(GMT+07:00)
120 Yemen(GMT+03:00)
121 Yugoslavia(GMT+02:00)
122 Zambia(GMT+02:00)
123 Zimbabwe(GMT+02:00)
Index Time Zone
Matrix
Region Code
What's this?
The ETERNITY is a versatile system that can operate to suit the customers' requirements, world wide.
How to program?
By default, the system is loaded with the Indian defaults. The user who wants to operate the system in any other
country needs to change the region code accordingly.
ETERNITY supports country selection (along with 'states', in that country), by selecting which; the time zone as well as
DST settings can be applied as default settings for the selected country. Refer chapters Daylight Saving Time (DST) and
Time Tables for more information about DST and Time Zone.
Use the following command to select the region:
5301-Region Code
Where,
Region Code is from 001 to 123.
Region Code Country Name
001 Afghanistan
002 Algeria
003 Antigua and Barbuda
004 Argentina
005 Australia (Perth)
006 Australia (Adelaide)
007 Australia (Brisbane, Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney)
008 Austria
009 Bahamas
010 Bahrain
011 Bangladesh
012 Belarus
013 Belgium
014 Bhutan
015 Bolivia
016 Bosnia and Herzegovina
017 Botswana
018 Brunei
019 Brazil (Fernando De Noronha)
020 Brazil (Brasilia, Rio de Janeiro, Sao Paulo)
021 Brazil (Manaus)
022 Brazil (Acre)
023 Bulgaria
024 Cambodia
025 Cameroon
026 Canada (St. John's)
027 Canada (Halifax)
028 Canada (Montreal, Ottawa, Toronto)
029 Canada (Winnipeg)
030 Canada (Calgary)
031 Canada (Vancouver)
032 Chile
033 China
Matrix
034 Colombia
035 Costa Rica
036 Croatia
037 Cuba
038 Cyprus
039 Czech Republic
040 Denmark
041 Egypt
042 Fiji
043 Finland
044 France
045 Germany
046 Greece
047 Guyana
048 Hong Kong
049 Hungary
050 India
051 Indonesia
052 Iran
053 Iraq
054 Ireland
055 Israel
056 Italy
057 Japan
058 Jordan
059 Kazakhstan
060 Kenya
061 Korea - North
062 Korea - South
063 Kuwait
064 Kyrgyzstan
065 Lebanon
066 Libya
067 Malaysia
068 Maldives
069 Mauritius
070 Mexico (Mexico City)
071 Mexico (Chihuahua)
072 Mexico (Tijuana)
073 Mongolia
074 Mozambique
075 Myanmar
076 Namibia
077 Nepal
078 Netherlands
079 New Zealand
080 Nigeria
081 Norway
Matrix
By default, the region code is 050 (India).
The default command does not default the 'region code'. For more details please refer the topic Default Settings.
082 Oman
083 Pakistan
084 Paraguay
085 Peru
086 Philippines
087 Poland
088 Portugal
089 Qatar
090 Romania
091 Russia (Moscow, St. Petersburg)
092 Russia (Novosibirsk)
093 Russia (Vladivostok)
094 Singapore
095 Slovakia
096 South Africa
097 Spain
098 Sri Lanka
099 Sudan
100 Sweden
101 Switzerland
102 Syria
103 Taiwan
104 Tajikistan
105 Thailand
106 Turkey
107 Uganda
108 Ukraine
109 United Arab Emirates
110 United Kingdom
111
United States (Atlanta, Augusta, Boston, Charlotte, Columbus, Detroit, Indiapolis,
Miami, NY, Philadelphia, Washington)
112
Oklahoma, Omaha, St. Louis)
113 United States (Albuquerque, Boise, Cheyenne, Denver, Salt Lake City)
114 United States (Las Vegas, Los Angeles, Phoenix, San Francisco, Seattle)
115 United States (Juneau)
116 United States (Hawaii)
117 Uzbekistan
118 Venezuela
119 Vietnam
120 Yemen
121 Yugoslavia
122 Zambia
123 Zimbabwe
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
2. Distinctive Rings 470
3. Operator 658
=X=X=
Matrix
Reminder
What's this?
The ETERNITY is installed at various places like Hospitals, Hotels, Motels and other Corporate and Medium scale
offices. The 'Reminder' feature is an important feature widely used by many customers. You can ask ETERNITY to
remind you at some specific time as well as at specific date.
Refer chapter System Parameters for setting the mode of ETERNITY and refer separate manual for Hotel
Applications, more details about Hotel/Motel applications of this feature.
However, for all types of reports, it is mentioned 'Hotel/Motel reports', same commands are applicable to assign
destination port and get reminder reports for other applications, also. Refer separate manual for Hotel/Motel
Applications for more details on how to get reports.
Various features supported by ETERNITY are mentioned below:
Reminder Setting
Voice guided reminder
Remote reminder- Personalized/Automated
Remote Voice guided reminder
Reminder Status report
Scheduled Reminder Report
Alarm/Reminders Snooze
Alarms/Reminders Notification Type
Above features are explained in detail in this chapter.
Reminder Setting
You can set the 'Reminder' in ETERNITY, which will remind you on a specific date at a specific time.
Thus you need to program following parameters:
Date of Reminder
Time of Reminder on that date
At the set date and time, your station starts ringing. In case you do not reply the Reminder call because of any reason,
the station will ring for maximum of three attempts (if number of attempts is programmed as '3'). However after three
attempts, if you could not reply the Reminder call, the ETERNITY will place the Reminder call on the 'Operator station'
so that the Operator can inform the guest about the Reminder call. 'The number of Reminder attempts' and 'Interval
between Reminders' are also programmable.
Dial the digits of command before expiry of 'Inter Digit Wait Timer'. Else you will get 'error tone'. The ETERNITY
supports maximum of '48' Reminders.
Reminder settings will be retained even during power down of the ETERNITY.
Reminder settings will be retained even during system upgrades of the ETERNITY.
The Reminder calls will be stored in the Hotel-Motel Activity Log. Refer separate Manual for Hotel Applications to
know about Hotel-Motel Activity Log.
Multiple Alarms: You can use the alarm setting command repeatedly to set different alarms.
Matrix
How to use it?
Using DKP:
Using DSS Key/Menu:
To set Reminder:
Press the 'Reminder' key.
Enter Date and Time in the format
DD:MM:YYYY:HH:MM
OR
MM:DD:YYYY:HH:MM (users in USA)
Press 'Enter' key.
To cancel Reminder:
Press 'Reminder' Key.
Press Enter Key.
Where,
DD=01-31, MM=01-12, YYYY=2008-2100, HH = 00-23hours and MM = 00-59 minutes.
The Date format can be as MMDDYYYY or DDMMYYYY. Refer chapter Real Time Clock (RTC).
Using Commands:
To set Reminder:
Dial 162.
DD:MM:YYYY:HH:MM
OR
Press 'Enter' key.
To cancel Reminder:
Dial 162
Dial #
To set/cancel Reminder using SLT:
To set Reminder:
Dial 162.
Dial Date and Time in the format
DD:MM:YYYY:HH:MM
OR
Replace the Handset on the cradle.
To cancel Reminder:
Dial 162
Dial #
Example:
From SLT:
Dial 162-01042008-1100, to set the Reminder for appointment on 1st. April 2008 at 11:00 a.m. The reminder will get
cancelled after it is served.
Matrix
Voice Guided Reminder
You can set/cancel the Reminder by following the appropriate voice prompts to set or cancel the Reminder. This is called
Voice Guided Reminder. Refer chapter Voice Message Applications for voice prompts. For this feature to work, the
software should support it for the VMS card installed in the ETERNITY.
How to use it?
Using DSS key/Menu:
To Set/cancel Voice Guided Reminder:
Press DSS Key assigned to Voice Guided Reminder.
Follow the Voice Mail System prompts to set/cancel reminder.
Using SLT:
To set/cancel Voice Guided Reminder using SLT:
Dial 164
Replace Handset.
e.g. Dial 164-Follow Voice Prompts
Remote Reminder- Personalized/Automated
The System Administrator can set/cancel the Reminder on the station of the guest or user by configuring Date and
Time. This is called Remote Reminder feature.
The Remote Reminder can be set for specific room number.
The date and time can be entered as 'Day-Date-Year-Hours-Minutes' (DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM, DD=01-31, MM=01-12
and YYYY=2008-2100, HH = Hours and MM = Minutes).
If Date format in ETERNITY is selected as MMDDYYYY, it will be entered as MMDDYYYY. Refer chapter Real Time
Clock (RTC).
Personalized Reminder: If the Reminder is set for this category, the Reminder call will be placed, on the 'Operator'
station and operator station will ring for 'Alarm/Reminder ring timer'. Now following options are possible:
If the operator does not answer the Reminder call, the call will be repeated for programmed number of Alarm/
Reminder call attempts at the interval of 'Alarm/Reminder attempt interval'. If still the operator does not reply the
call, the system will place the call, directly on the guest station and the guest station will ring for 'Alarm Ring
Timer'. If the guest station does not answer the call after expiry of ' Alarm/Reminder call attempts' , the system will
notify to the operator about 'No Reply' event only 'Once'. The operator station will ring for 'Alarm Ring Timer'.
If the 'Operator' station answers the Reminder call, the guest station will ring for 'Alarm Ring Timer' and when
guest answers the call, the operator can greet the guest and inform him/her about the wakeup call. But if the guest
station does not answer the call till expiry of Alarm Ring Timer, the operator station will get error tone and the
operator personnel will try for waking up the guest by sending some one to the guest room.
Thus, the parameters 'Number of Reminder Attempts' and 'Reminder Attempt Interval' are applicable even when
Alarm Type is 'Personalized'.
Automated Reminder: If the Reminder is set for this category, the Reminder call is placed on the Guest station and
the guest station will ring at the set time for Alarm/Reminder Ring timer. Now following options will be considered:
If the Snooze is 'Disable' and the guest answers the call, further call processing will be as per 'Alarm Notification
Type' programmed for the guest extension. (Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template for assigning
Alarm Notification Type). If the guest does not answer the call till 'Number of call attempts' is exhausted, the
system will notify to 'Operator' only 'Once' and the call is placed on the 'Operator' station. The Operator station will
ring for 'Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer'.
If the Snooze is 'Enable' and the guest answers the call and acknowledges the call by pressing digit '0', further call
processing will be as per 'Alarm Notification Type' programmed for the guest extension. (Refer chapter Station
Advanced Feature Template for assigning Alarm Notification Type). If the guest does not answer the call and does
not acknowledge the call by pressing digit '0', till 'Number of call attempts' is exhausted, the system will notify to
'Operator' only 'Once' and the call is placed on the 'Operator' station. The Operator station will ring for 'Alarm/
Reminder Ring Timer'. (For details of Snooze parameters, refer topic 'Alarm/Reminder Snooze' in this chapter).
After setting the Remote Reminder, the display on the user station will be as per the Mode of ETERNITY configured:
Hotel Mode or Enterprise Mode. Refer chapter System Parameters to select the 'Mode'. Refer separate manual for
Hotel/Motel Applications.
on pressing again it will be turned 'OFF'. Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming.
The ETERNITY supports maximum of 48 Remote Reminders.
Matrix
Notes:
The Reminder feature with the Personal Reminder category will work even if the DND is set on the station.
The Reminder feature with the Personal Reminder category will work even if the Call Forward is set on the station.
How to use it?
Using DSS key/Menu:
Set Remote Reminder
To set Remote Reminder from SA mode, SA should dial the SA command.
Press the 'Remote Reminder' key.
Enter the Room Number/Phone Number .
DD:MM:YYYY:HH:MM
OR
Select 'Personalized' or 'Automated'.
Press 'Enter' key to set Reminder.
You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the phone number for which the reminder is set.
Note for Display of Remote Reminder:
The display includes, '+' if 'Personalized' option is selected.
Cancel Remote Reminder:
Press 'Remote Reminder' Key.
Enter Room Number.
Press Enter Key.
Using Commands:
To set Reminder for the guest:
Dial 1072-033.
Enter the Room Number/Phone Number.
DD:MM:YYYY:HH:MM
OR
Dial 1 for Personalized or Dial 2 for Automated.
Press 'Enter' key to set Reminder.
You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the phone number for which the reminder is set.
To cancel Reminder:
Dial 1072-033
Enter the Room Number/Phone Number.
Dial #
You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the phone number for which the reminder is canceled.
e.g. Dial 1072-033-Room Number-DDMMYYYY-HHMM.
For example,
To set Remote Reminder at 16.30 hours on 1st. April, 2008, on Station '3103', SA will dial: (from SA mode)
1072-033-3103-01042008-1630
To cancel Remote Reminder at 16.30 hours on 1st. April, 2008, on Station '3103', SA will dial: (from SA mode)
1072-033-Room Number-# (All the Remote Reminders of the room will be cancelled).
To Set/Cancel Remote Reminder using SLT:
Same as mentioned in above topic 'Using Commands'
Matrix
SE Commands Programming:
Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer: This is a time for which the station (extension or operator) rings when the alarm/reminder
call is placed on the guest station.
Use following command to program the Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer:
2201-Seconds
Where,
Seconds = 001-255 seconds.
Number of Alarm Attempts: This parameter signifies the number of times the Alarm call will be placed on the station
before notifying the operator. SE should program this parameter if default value need to be changed.
Use following command to program the Number of Alarm Attempts:
2202-Number of Alarm Attempts
Where,
Number of Alarm attempts = 1 to 9.
Default = 3.
Alarm Attempt Interval: This parameter signifies the time between subsequent Alarm attempts. SE should program this
parameter if default value need to be changed.
Use following command to program the Alarm Attempt Interval:
2203-Alarm Attempt Interval
Where,
Alarm Attempt Interval = 1 to 9.
Default = 5 Minutes.
Note:
'Number of Alarm Attempts' and 'Alarm Attempt Interval' will also be applicable when Alarm category is programmed
as 'Personalized'.
Remote Voice Guided Reminder
The System Administrator (SA) can set/cancel the Voice Guided Reminder on the User station by following the
appropriate voice prompts. This is called Remote Voice Guided Reminder. Refer chapter Voice Message Applications
for voice prompts.
on pressing again it will be turned 'OFF'. Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming.
How to use it?
Using DSS key/Menu:
To set/cancel Voice Guided Alarm:
Press DSS Key assigned to Remote Voice Guided Reminder.
Follow the Voice Mail System prompts to set/cancel reminder.
Using Commands:
To set/cancel Voice Guided Reminder:
Dial 1072-035
Replace Handset.
e.g. Dial 1072-035-Follow VMS Prompts
Using SLT:
Reminder Status Report
SA can get the report of Reminders set on the stations by issuing SA command from DKP/SLT.
The DSS key (without LED) assigned for this feature can also be used to get reminder status report. Refer chapter
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for assigning the LED.
For getting the report SE will be required to assign destination port to the 'Hotel/Motel Report'.
Matrix
How to use it?
SE can use following command to assign destination port to the 'Hotel/Motel Report' using command:
3701-Flag.
Where,
Default = None.
SA commands:
Using DKP:
Dial 1072-917
SA will get display about printing event of Reminder Status Report. Refer Notes below.
Replace Handset.
Notes:
The + is printed if Personal Reminder is set for the station/room.
If the date format set in ETERNITY is MM-DD-YYYY or country code is 'US', then the reminder report will be printed
accordingly. Refer chapter Real Time Clock (RTC) for date format.
For multiple Reminders, the report will be printed in increasing order of room number with increasing order of date
and time. Refer the report at the end of chapter.
Using SLT
When SA will issue the SA command for this feature from SLT, Reminder Status Report will be printed on the destination
port assigned to 'Hotel/Motel Reports'.
Scheduled Reminder Report
The SA can get the reminder report at a fixed programmed time everyday. This feature is called Scheduled Reminder
Report.
This feature is frequently used where the Reminder report will be printed regularly even if the receptionist is busy with
other assignments at the time of report.
The SA can enable this feature using SA command from DKP and program the scheduled time for the report. SE
should first assign the port for Hotel Reports using the command.
On enabling this feature, the ETERNITY will print Reminder Report on the destination port assigned for Hotel
Reports.
SA can also use the DSS key (without LED), assigned by SE, to enable the report and to program the scheduled time.
Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for more details.
Refer same commands to assign destination port and get reminder report as referred for Hotel/Motel Applications.
How to use it?
SE should assign destination port to the 'Hotel/Motel Report' using the command:
Use following command to assign destination port to the 'Hotel/Motel Report':
3701-Flag
Where,
Default = None
Flag Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer
Flag Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer
Matrix
SA Commands for Scheduled Reminder Report:
Enable/Disable Scheduled Reminder Report
If SA has enabled this parameter, the system will print Reminder Report on the destination port assigned for Hotel
Reports at the scheduled time.
Using DSS key/Menu:
To Enable/Disable scheduled Reminder report:
Dial DSS key for 'scheduled Reminder report'
Select the option 'Enable/Disable'
Press Enter key
Scheduled Reminder report feature will be 'ON' or 'OFF'
Using Commands:
To Enable/Disable scheduled Reminder report:
Dial 1072-038
On getting feature tone, Dial '1' to 'Enable' or '0' to 'Disable'
Press Enter key
Scheduled Reminder report feature will be 'ON' or 'OFF'
User can get or not get the Reminder report at scheduled time on destination port.
Using SLT:
To enable Scheduled Reminder Report using SLT:
Go OFF-Hook.
Dial 1072-038.
User can get the Reminder report at scheduled time on destination port.
To disable Scheduled Reminder Report using SLT:
Go OFF-Hook.
Dial 1072-038.
User can not get the Reminder report.
Thus,
Dial 1072-038-1 (To enable the Scheduled Reminder Report)
Dial 1072-038-0 (To disable the Scheduled Reminder Report)
Default = Disable.

Scheduled Time for Reminder Report
SA should enable the Scheduled Reminder report to use this feature. This parameter signifies the time at which the
ETERNITY will print Reminder Report daily.
Using DSS key/Menu:
To program Time for scheduled Reminder report:
Pick the handset.
Press DSS key for scheduled time for Reminder report
Enter the scheduled time in HHMM.
Replace handset. Scheduled Time will be programmed for Reminder Report.
Using Commands:
Pick the handset.
Dial 1072-039 for scheduled time for Reminder report
Enter the scheduled time in HHMM (from 00:00 to 23:59 hours, default = 00:00).
Scheduled Time will be programmed for Reminder Report.
Replace handset. Scheduled Time will be programmed for Reminder Report.
Using SLT:
Matrix
Thus,
Dial 1072-039-Scheduled time for Reminder report
Where,
Scheduled time for Reminder report = 00:00 to 23:59 Hours.
Default =00:00
Snooze Alarm/Reminder is an Alarm/Reminder that is repeated many times. The ETERNITY supports this feature
which is very much useful for Hotel/Motels, Hospitals and Offices.
SE should enable/disable the Snooze Alarm/Reminder for the system. The feature cannot be set individually for each
station. Thus if SE has enabled the Snooze, the Alarm/Reminder call will be placed as Snooze Alarm/Reminder on
the station.
If Snooze Alarm/Reminder is enabled, the system gives Alarm/Reminder ring to the station as many times as the
'Number of Alarm Attempts' programmed.
The time interval between two Alarm/Reminder calls of the snooze, called ''Alarm Attempt Interval' ' is programmable.
A station gets Alarm/Reminder ring for 'Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer' which is programmable. If a station user does not
answer the Alarm/Reminder ring even after the 'Number of Alarm Attempts' is reduced to zero, the system gives ring
to the operator station. The operator station also rings for 'Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer' (For Automated alarm/
reminder).
Acknowledging Snooze Alarm/Reminder
If snooze Alarm/Reminder is enabled, the station user should acknowledge the Alarm/Reminder call by going OFF-
Hook and following message on LCD display of the DKP for pressing '0'. If the Snooze Alarm/Reminder call is not
acknowledged, the Alarm/Reminder call will be placed on the same station as many times as the 'Number of Alarm
Attempts', programmed. If the station does not acknowledge Alarm/Reminder call till expiry of 'Number of Alarm
Attempts', the Alarm/Reminder call will be placed on operator's group assigned to the station.
Note for SE/Installing person:
It is recommended to SE that, while installing the ETERNITY, refer chapter Voice Message Applications to include the
phrase "Please press 0 to acknowledge the Alarm/Reminder' as voice prompt. This is used to acknowledge the
Alarm/Reminder call, placed on the station as a Snooze Alarm/Reminder.
How to program?
SE should configure following parameters for Snooze Alarm/Reminder calls:
Enable/disable Snooze Alarm/Reminder:
Use the following command to enable/disable the Snooze Alarm/Reminder:
2204-Code
Where,
By default, Snooze Alarm/Reminder is disabled.
Snooze Attempts:
The command for parameter 'Number of Reminder Attempts - 2202' programmed is also applicable for number of
Snooze attempts.
Snooze attempt interval;
The command for parameter 'Reminder Attempt Interval - 2203' is also applicable for Snooze attempt interval.
Alarm/Reminder Notification Type:
When the user answers the Alarm/Reminder ring, he gets Music on Hold or Voice messages or External Music (AOP).
Alarm/Reminder call can also be placed on the Department Group.
Alarm/Reminder Response depends upon the programming of 'Alarm/Reminder Notification Type' in Station Advance
Feature Template. Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template for more details.
By placing the call on the department group (stations), the user (guest) can be greeted differently. One guest can be
played back greetings followed by date and time, the other can be played back greetings, date and time, humidity,
temperature, etc. Thus each station can be assigned different routing group as per the requirement. This is
programmed as 'Alarm/Reminder Notification Routing Group' in Station Advanced Feature Template. If all the stations
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
of the Routing Group are busy then MoH is played, provided Alarm/Reminder call is not routable due to any other
reason e.g. Group empty etc. (MoH can be internal music or through AOP).
SE can program the routing group number (01-49) in the Alarm/Reminder Notification Routing Group.
While the Alarm/ Reminder is served, if the station is 'Busy' or is in 'Standby' mode, the Alarm Reminder call will be
placed as per the flag set for the command for "Alarm/Reminder notification to Operator when Station is stand-by"
explained in chapter System Parameters as mentioned below:
If this flag is enabled, the call will be placed on operator.
If the flag is disabled, the call will be placed on the station after the station goes in idle state after waiting for
'XXXX' to be 'Idle'.
When the call is placed on 'Operator' the Alarm/Reminder call will be logged in the 'Hotel-Motel Activity Log'. Refer
separate Manual for Hotel Applications to know how to refer the log.
Important Points:
As a summary, while using the Reminder and Snooze features, take care of following points:
Snooze is applicable only for automated reminder calls. For personalized reminder calls, snooze will not apply even if
enabled.
Reminder Notification Type is applicable only for Automated Reminder calls. (Alarm Notification type determines
further call routing once call is answered by the station user. It is assigned to station via station advance feature
template)
Number of alarm attempt and Alarm Attempt Interval are applicable for automated reminder and personalized
reminder.
When all the Reminder attempts are exhausted, the system will notify to the Operator, of non-acknowledgement of
Reminder call.
The Reminder calls will be printed in the 'Hotel-Motel Activity Log'.
Relevant Topics:
4. Alarms 245

Reminder Report AS ON 02-03-2009(Mon) AT 12:01
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Room# Phone# Reminder P Room# Phone# Reminder P
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3991 3001 28-02-2009 07:00 + 3991 3002 01-03-2009 07:30 +
3992 3003 02-03-2009 08:00 + 3992 3004 01-01-2009 12:00 +
3993 3005 03-03-2009 00:00 3993 3006 04-03-2000 00:01
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ indicates Personal Reminder Page : 1
---End of Report---
=X=X=
Matrix
Remote Programming
Whats this?
One can program ETERNITY from any remote location. Direct inward system Access (DISA) facility of the system allows
a remote user to login and use most of the functions of the system. Programming is one of such functions allowed to the
remote user. The remote user can program the system using the same commands as used by the normal local station to
program the system. The user can login into the SA programming or SE programming mode.
How to use it?
Make a DISA call.
Login as DISA user. Get the DISA login beeps. Enter the SE/SA mode. Get programming/Dial Tone.
Make programming changes.
Exit SE/SA mode.
Terminate DISA call.
In case none of the trunk lines have DISA facility and it is required to do remote programming, then follow following
steps:
From the remote location, make a call to the system.
Ask the person answering the call at the system end to keep you on hold by dialing Flash. When the person at the
system end dials Flash, you get hold on music.
Ask the person at the system end to dial 1#91-SE Password. On completion of the command, he gets
confirmation tone. He can disconnect and carry on with the routine job.
The person at the remote end gets DISA beeps.
He dials #1 and gets the dial tone.
He can enter the SE/SA mode from the remote end.
SE Mode
Dial 1#91-SE Password program the system. Dial 00 exit from the programming mode (SE Mode).
SA Mode
Dial 1#92-SA Password program the system. Dial 1#92 exit from SA mode.
Once the user is out of SE/SA Mode he gets DISA beeps.
How it works?
Following flow chart depicts the process:
Matrix
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Start
Dial and log-in as a DISA user
remotely. For more details,
please refer section DISA
User is in DISA idle state. Gets DISA login beeps
User dials command for entering
program mode followed by SE password
Is the
password
correct ?
Error Tone
System gives programming tone
User dials any of the programming command
Is the
command dialed
correct and accepted
by the system ?
Error tone
Wait for error
tone to get over
System gives dial tone
End
Confirmation tone
Wait for confirmation
tone to get over
No
Yes
No Yes
Exit
Program
Mode
Matrix
Room Monitor
What is this?
Room Monitor lets a user to listen to the sounds in a colleagues room or cabin. A supervisor would like to listen to what
is happening in a manufacturing area.
How to use it?
CAUTION!
Room Monitor is a sensitive feature. It can breach the privacy of users. The System Administrator
and the System Engineer should restrict access to this feature. If a user is allowed the access to
Room Monitor, he should use this responsibly.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Room Monitor to a user.
Important Points:
Room Monitor can be used from both-SLT and DKP.
The destination station must be a DKP.
This feature will work when the DKP is idle.
Microphone of the destination DKP is activated when the caller uses Room Monitor. But, the speaker is not activated.
One-way speech is established. The caller can listen to the sound in the room but the destination cannot listen the
callers sound.
Room Monitoring is terminated when the caller disconnects or the called party lifts the handset to dial or the called
party gets a call from any other station.
Room Monitor feature can be used by a station whose priority is higher than the station, which has to be monitored.
Relevant Topics:
2. Priority 676
=X=X=
2 Dial 1073-Station.
3 Start listening.
Matrix
Routing Group
Whats this?
Many times it is required to call any one of the persons among a group of related people. It is not important to talk to
a particular person. The caller just wants any member from the group. ETERNITY offers flexibility to put related
stations in a group. These groups are called Routing Groups. The call made to this group using the Access Code of
the Routing Group. However the caller can access individual stations of the group also by dialing the station number.
The routing group is used to land IC call on any trunk port.
Refer chapter System Parameters for command to put the station as 'in service' or 'out of service'.
How it works?
Maximum 48 Routing groups can be formed.
Maximum 16 stations can be programmed in each routing group.
The station can be a SLT, DKP, DOP, OG Trunk Bundle Group or ISDN Terminal.
even when other stations of the group are hunted. This is called "Continuous" ringing and can be programmed for
each station.
once again.
the destinations within the group. If the rotation method is disabled, the fresh call will always land on first station of the
department group. Refer chapter OG Trunk Bundle.
Any station can answer the call.
User can program the 'OG Trunk Bundle Group' in the Routing Group. Hence, the ANT feature will be automatically
applicable as OG Trunk Bundle is part of OG Trunk Bundle Group.
Now, the trunk to trunk calls will have advantage of LCR feature as LCR is property of OG Trunk Bundle Group.
Assignment of Routing Group when ETERNITY ME/GE Card VMS is installed:
When ETERNITY ME/GE Card VMS is installed in the ETERNITY, the ETERNITY will automatically assign VMS
group number '49'.
This routing Group includes SLT software ports assigned automatically as VMS port. If ETERNITY ME Card
VMS8 is installed, 8 SLT ports will be included in the RG '49' and if ETERNITY ME Card VMS16 is installed, 16
SLT ports will be included in the RG '49'.
Thus routing Group number '49' will be non editable or non programmable by SE/SA.
For example, if the ETERNITY ME Card VMS8 is installed in the system and SLT software ports 051 to 059 are
assigned by ETERNITY ME Card Master as VMS Ports, the Routing Group 49 shall be formed as shown below:
For Destination Index-01 to 08, Member Type = SLT and Port Number = 051 to 058.
For Destination Index-09 to 16, Member Type = None and Port Number = 000.
Other Parameters Ring Timer, Continuous Ring and Rotation will remain fixed.
'ISDN Terminal' as a member of Routing Group:
When any incoming call on Trunk is to be routed on the ISDN Terminal, the Routing group assigned to the Trunk will
be programmed with the software port number of the ISDN terminal.
Now the system will identify the access code (Flexible number) associated with the Software port of ISDN terminal
programmed in the Routing group and will include the flexible number in Called party number field.
The CLI received on the Trunk port will be forwarded to ISDN Terminal in "Calling Party Number" field.
How to program?
Matrix
Step 1
Use following command to Program the destination in the Routing Group:
6502-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Port Type-Port Number
6502-2-Routing Group-Routing Group-Destination Index-Port Type-Port Number
6502-*-Destination Index-Port Type-Port Number
Where,
Destination Index is from 01 to 16
Note1:
Parameters, Ring Timer and Continuous Ring are not applicable if the SE selects Null, OG Trunk Bundle Group as
Member Type.
Step 2
Use following command to program the time for which each station in the group should ring:
6503-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Ring Timer
6503-2-Routing Group-Routing Group-Destination Index-Ring Timer
6503-*-Destination Index-Ring Timer
Where,
Ring Timer is from 001 to 255.
By default, Ring Timer is 015 seconds.
Step 3
Use following command to program continuous or non-continuous ring for a station in the group:
6504-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Flag
6504-2-Routing Group-Routing Group-Destination Index-Flag
6504-*-Destination Index-Flag
Where,
Step 4
Use following command to program rotation method of a department group:
6505-1-Routing Group-Rotation Method
6505-2-Routing Group-Routing Group-Rotation Method
6505-*-Rotation Method
Where,
How to default a Routing Group?
Use following command to default a routing group:
6501-1-Routing Group
00 Null (Note 1) 000
01 SLT 001-512
02 DKP 001-128
10 DOP 001
16 OG Trunk Bundle Group (Note1) 001-025
Flag Meaning
0 No station rings for the time set (Disable continuous)
1 The station rings till the call matures (Enable continuous)
Rotation Method Meaning
0 Fresh call lands on the first station within the group (disable continues)
1 Fresh call lands on following the rotation method (enable continuous)
Matrix
6501-2-Routing Group-Routing Group
6501-*
Where,
On issuing the command all routing groups (01 to 31) will get defaulted to the following values.
The Routing Group 32 will get defaulted to the following values:
Step 5
Use following command to clear the destination in a Routing Group:
6510-1-Routing Group
6510-2-Routing Group-Routing Group
6510-*
Where,
Destination Index Port Type Port Number Ring Timer (Sec.) Continuous Ring Flag Rotation Method
01 DKP 001 015 0 1
02 DKP 002 015 0 1
03 DKP 003 015 0 1
04 DKP 004 015 0 1
05 SLT 001 015 0 1
06 SLT 002 015 0 1
07 SLT 003 015 0 1
08 SLT 004 015 0 1
09 SLT 005 015 0 1
10 SLT 006 015 0 1
11 SLT 007 015 0 1
12 SLT 008 015 0 1
13 SLT 009 015 0 1
14 SLT 010 015 0 1
15 SLT 011 015 0 1
16 SLT 012 015 0 1
Destination Index Port Type Port Number Ring Timer (Sec.) Continuous Ring Flag Rotation Method
01 DKP 001 015 0 1
02 DKP 002 015 0 1
03 DKP 003 015 0 1
04 DKP 004 015 0 1
05 DKP 005 015 0 1
06 DKP 006 015 0 1
07 DKP 007 015 0 1
08 DKP 008 015 0 1
09 SLT 001 015 0 1
10 SLT 002 015 0 1
11 SLT 003 015 0 1
12 SLT 004 015 0 1
13 SLT 005 015 0 1
14 SLT 006 015 0 1
15 SLT 007 015 0 1
16 SLT 008 015 0 1
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
1. Department Call 412
=X=X=
Matrix
RTC Synchronization
What's this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility to synchronize the Real Time Clock of the Voicemail system (VMS) with itself. Many
features of the VMS such as Greetings, Call Transfer types, Message Wait, etc. are time based. Hence it is desirable that
the clocks of both the ETERNITY as well as the VMS be synchronized for perfect operation. Refer chapter Voice Mail
Integration.
How it works?
The ETERNITY informs the time to the VMS in the form of a string of characters daily at 00:01 hours. At 00:01 hrs, the
system calls the VMS and waits for the VMS to answer. If the VMS answers the call, the PBX sends the string to the VMS
else waits for the RBT timer. If the call is not answered till the expiry of the RBT timer, the PBX tries for the next port of
the VMS. This process continues till the PBX successfully sends the RTC synchronization string to the VMS.
The ETERNITY supports RTC Synchronization for:
External VMS
ETERNITY VMS Card
External VMS:
ETERNITY will synchronize RTC for External VMS, if RTC synchronization is enabled.
RTC synchronization will be done in the following cases:
At Power ON (of ETERNITY)
When RTC is changed in ETERNITY by the SE
When RTC gets changed due to DST
Daily at 00:01 Hrs
ETERNITY VMS Card:
RTC synchronization will be done in the following cases:
At Power ON
When RTC is changed in ETERNITY by the SE
When RTC gets changed due to DST
Daily at 00:01 Hrs
When ETERNITY VMS Card is detected
How to program?
Use the following command to enable/disable External VMS RTC Synchronization:
3812-Code
Where,
By default, External VMS RTC Synchronization is 'Disabled'.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Code Meaning
0 Disable External VMS RTC Synchronization
1 Enable External VMS RTC Synchronization
Matrix
Security Dialing and Reporting
Whats this?
The ETERNITY offers a security feature by virtue of which the system informs an internal station or an external party (as
per the programming) about the emergency. The emergency can be informed either to an internal station or an external
party, time zone wise. This feature finds its application in case of fire, burglary, etc. A factory manager can program an
internal station (Security station) in working hours/break hours and his residence phone number in non-working hours to
get information about the emergency. This is known as Security Dialing. In addition when an emergency call is placed by
a station to an external number, the system can report to internal stations also. During emergency conditions like fire or
burglary at a distantly located station of ETERNITY, the station user can dial the fire brigade or police and at the same
time can inform the Operator or Office Security personnel about the same. This is known as Security Reporting.
How it works?
To accomplish this feature, the ETERNITY supports Digital Input Ports marked DIP. An Emergency switch, output of
a Smoke detector, Glass break detector, Fire Alarm, etc. can be connected as an activator.
Whenever the DIP gets activated, the ETERNITY considers it to be an emergency condition and places a call as per
the programming. The call can be placed either to an internal station or to an external party. The ETERNITY can also
be programmed to take no action on receiving the instigation from the DIP.
If the ETERNITY is programmed to place a call to internal stations, the station follows the logic of Routing group.
If the ETERNITY is programmed to place a call to an external party, the system dials out a number assigned for
Emergency situation. When the called party answers the call, the ETERNITY delivers a pre-recorded Emergency
message. If the called party is busy, the system tries another Emergency number and tries to deliver emergency
message. This is repeated for all the three external emergency numbers. (The external emergency numbers are
taken from the global directory). If the Emergency message is delivered to all the emergency numbers, and the
acknowledgment is obtained this activity is suspended otherwise the system keeps trying all the non-served requests
for the programmed number of trials. The system considers the request to be served when the called party answers
the call, and gives acknowledgment.
This feature could be of great help in Banks. When the Banks are raided by the burglars, all the employees of the
bank are made standstill. In such a situation, if the cashier presses the Emergency Alarm (which could be placed
quite close to the cashier), the burglars would not come to know whereas the system would dial out the Emergency
number, which could be of Police, Security Agency and another branch office.
Likewise, this could be of great help in offices. A smoke detector connected to the DIP gets activated on sensing
smoke and in turn calls internal stations (a department group). The internal station rings continuously as in case of
emergency.
Instigation Process Response
Digital Input
Port (Sensor,
Panic Switch,
etc.)
No
Action
External
Number
Department
Group
Security
Dialer
Matrix
Start
The system senses an instigation of DIP
Is DIP
activation
received ?
The system dials out the Emergency
number and decrements the counter
f or this number by one.
Has
called party
answered the
call ?
The system plays the
emergency message to the
called party and stops the retries
f or the last dialed number
PBX checks the counter for
the next Emergency number
Is current
count
= maximum
count ?
The system stops
furt her retries
End
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Emergency
destination = Internal
station or External
number
External
Number
Yes
The system places the call on
the programmed SLT/DKP
and decrement the counter for
this number by one
Internal Station
Has the
called party
answered the
call ?
The system terminate
the process
End
Yes
PBX checks the counter for
the next Emergency number
Is current
count
= maximum
count ?
The system stops further retries
End
No
Yes
No
Matrix
How to program?
Step 1
Use following command to program routing group to receive the emergency call:
5203-Routing Group
Where,
Note: Only one routing group can be programmed to receive the emergency call.
By default, Routing Group assigned is 01.
Step 2
Use following command to program emergency numbers:
5202-Index-Global Memory Index
Where,
Global Memory Index is from 100 to 999.
Note: Maximum of three emergency numbers can be programmed.
By default, no number is programmed as an emergency number.
The external number have to be stored in global directory and the global directory index is to be programmed. Please
refer Abbreviated Dialing for more details.
Step 3
Use following command to program the number of trials to be made to deliver the emergency message:
5206-Count
Where,
Count is 000 to 255.
By default, Count is 005.
Step 4
Use following command to program the time interval between two trials:
5205-Time Interval
Where,
Time Interval is 000 to 255 secs.
By default, Time Interval is 015 secs.
Step 5
Use following command to assign time table for emergency condition:
5207-Timetable
Where,
Timetable is 1 to 8.
By default, Timetable 1 is assigned for emergency condition.
Step 6
Delay Dial Timer: Time delay after which the system starts dialing after receiving the instigation.
Use following command to program the delay dial timer:
5204-Timer
Where,
Timer is 000 to 255 secs.
By default, value is 015 sec.
Step 7
Use following command to program the response type for working hours:
5211-1-DIP-Time Zone-Response Type
Where,
DIP is 1.
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hours
2 Break Hours
3 Non-Working Hours
Matrix
Step 1
Use following command to program the security dialing reporting flag:
5220-Flag
Where,
Step 2
Use following command to program routing group to receive the security reporting:
5221-Routing Group
Where,
By default, Routing Group assigned is 01.
This command is optional, need not be programmed, if the security dialing reporting flag is disabled.
Use the following command to default security dialing parameters:
5201
Example:
A bank has installed an emergency alarm to take care of emergency condition. In case of emergency the Police station
(100), Hospital (102) and fire brigade (101) should be informed automatically. The bank has 10:00AM to 4:00PM as
working hours. Between 1:00PM to 1:30PM is lunch Break and 4:00PM to 10:00AM as non working hours for all the
employees. This time table is maintained in timetable 0 for the bank. The bank wishes to use the first DIP for Security
Dialing. Bank wishes that each number is tried five times.
Solution:
Program three emergency numbers in the global directory. Refer Abbreviated Dialing.
Program the numbers as emergency numbers at memory location 150, 151 and 152.
5202-1-150
5202-2-151
5202-3-152
Program the trial count as 5.
5206-005
Assign the Timetable1 for emergency condition.
5207-1 (Prior to this timetable 1 should be programmed as per the bank hours. Please refer to Time Tables for
more details on how to create Time Tables)
Assign the emergency response type for all the three timezones as external call for the first DIP.
5211-1-1-1-2
5211-1-1-2-2
5211-1-1-3-2
It can happen that the security dialing was generated by mistake and it has to be terminated from the SA mode, to
terminate security dialing generated by mistake.
How to use it?
Response Type Meaning
0 No Action
1 Routing Group
3 External Number
Flag Meaning
0 Enable
1 Disable
Action Response
Dial 1#92-SA Password. Programming tone
Dial 1072-021. Confirmation tone
Dial 1#92. Dial tone
Matrix
Important Points:
Only one response type can be selected. This should be based on timetable so that we get maximum flexibility.
If the response type chosen is external number or a internal group, call is considered to be served if the called party
dials 0 while the message is being played.
Relevant Topics:
6. Time Tables 870
=X=X=
Matrix
Selective Port Access
Whats this?
The station user can access a particular port by dialing a code.
How to use it?
The user can dial 69-03-001 to grab TWT 001.
The user can dial 69-01-001 to dial SLT 001.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Selective Pot Access to a user.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Action Display
Dial 69-Port Type-Port Offset. Response based on select.
01 SLT 001 to 512
02 DKP 001 to 128
03 TWT 001 to 128
04 BRI 01 to 32
05 T1E1PRI 1 to 8
06 E&M 001 to 128
08 AOP 1
11 Department Group 01 to 16
15 Trunk Access Code 1 to 6
25 Mobile 01 to 32
26 SIP 01 to 32
29 Magneto Trunk 001 to 128
Matrix
Self Ring Test
Whats this?
ETERNITY offers a facility to call your own station.
This is an easy method to check the ringing volume of your instrument.
This is of great use during troubleshooting (to check whether the ringing circuit of the instrument is working properly).
How to use it?
=X=X=
Action Response
Dial 1057. Go ON-Hook. Station Rings.
Go OFF-Hook. Ring stops.
Matrix
SIM PIN
Whats this?
Subscriber Identification Module (SIM) is a removable plastic card and contains an integrated IC chip with a
microprocessor, RAM and ROM.
The SIM is a smart card containing all subscriber specific data stored in it.
A programmed (default) PIN (Personal Identification Number) is stored on the SIM.
SIM PIN is a security feature.
If the user enters wrong SIM PIN three times in a row, the network suspects the user and asks for the Personal
Note:
Before installing the RUIM in CDMA port, ensure that PIN Protection is disabled. Else the Mobile port will not work.
Installing SIM Card
Before installing the SIM card and switching ON the system, consider following points:
Whenever the SIM PIN request is received from the module, the system will send the SIM PIN stored in the
configuration to the module. Hence it is necessary that the SIM PIN in the SIM card and in the system is same.
If required the parameters, 'SIM PIN' and 'SIM PIN at Power On flag' can be changed in the SIM card by removing the
SIM card from the system, inserting it into the mobile handset and changing it from mobile handset.
User should enable the 'SIM PIN at power ON' parameter in the SIM card. To protect the SIM card that is inserted in
the system from being mis-used.
Now if SE tries to change the SIM PIN, on receipt of command for SIM PIN change, the system will first send the
command to the module. If the 'SIM PIN at Power On flag' is enabled in the SIM card, the change would be effective.
If 'SIM PIN at Power On flag' is disabled in the SIM card, the change would not be effective. User can know this
change in the SIM PIN by downloading the SIM PIN page of 'Jeeves'.
Hence, the 'SIM PIN at Power On flag' in the SIM card must be enabled. Otherwise, SIM PIN will not be changed
using the command for 'Changing SIM PIN'.
Important Notes:
Ensure that the SIM PIN in the SIM card and in the system is same. By default, SIM PIN for all the ports of the system
is 1234.
To protect the SIM card that is inserted in the system from being mis-used, the customer is recommended to enable
'SIM PIN at power On' parameter in the SIM card.
While changing SIM PIN number using the command, ensure that the 'SIM PIN at Power On' parameter in the SIM
card is enabled. Else, SIM PIN will not be changed.
SIM PIN number does not get change when the user gives command to default the system parameters.
How to program?
SIM PIN (Change SIM PIN)
Use following command to change the SIM PIN for the Mobile port:
8006-1-Mobile-SIM PIN-#*
Where,
New SIM PIN can be of 4 to 8 digits. #* is to be used only if SIM PIN is lessthan 8-digits.
Relevant Topics:
1. Mobile Port 630
2. Network Selection for Mobile Port 646
=X=X=
Matrix
What is this?
The SIP Account number is referred as a SIP Trunk. It is also called Registration ID.
The ETERNITY supports maximum 32 trunks.
Call routing can be done using SIP trunks on the available VoIP Ethernet Ports.
As per application, SIP Parameters can be programmed like, enable/disable, SIP ID, registrar server address, etc.
The Trunk Feature Template, Station Basic and Station Advance Feature Template are assigned to a SIP Trunk.
The ETERNITY ME Card VoIP supports adaptive jitter buffer for reducing delay and improving Speech quality.
Refer chapter Peer-to-Peer Calling for more details.
DDI Feature can be used on SIP Trunks using parameters OG/IC Reference ID for a SIP trunk.
If SIP Trunk for which SIP ID is programmed other than *, then that trunk is treated as Trunk for every incoming call
on it and Trunk Feature Template applied to it will be applicable.
If SIP Trunk for which SIP ID is programmed as: * then that trunk is considered as (Tie Line) i.e. for incoming call it
will be considered as station, and the Station Basic/Advance Feature Template will be applicable. For OG calls, it will
be considered as Trunk.
IP Dialing:
IP number can be dialed by dialing * as dot . (If IP dialing is to be used, dont program * as the End of Dialing digit).
IP number is also checked for Toll Control.
But while programming the IP number in the Number list for Toll control check or LCR Number string, special keys are
used i.e. #9 is used while programming through DKP or SLT. (For Jeeves enter . Only).
For e.g. if 192.167.100.1 is to be programmed in the Number list through DKP or SLT, than dial
192 #9 167 #9 100 #9 1 #*.
How to program?
Assign VoIP Ethernet Port
Use following command to assign a VoIP ethernet port to a SIP trunk:
7701-1-SIP Trunk-VoIP Ethernet Port
7701-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-VoIP Ethernet Port
7701-*-VoIP Ethernet Port
Where,
SIP Trunk is from 00 to 32. 00 is to de-assign VoIP number.
By default, No VoIP Ethernet Port is assigned to SIP trunk. VoIP Ethernet Port is 00.
SIP Trunks are not assigned VoIP Ethernet Port by default:
All SIP trunks are considered as Non-Proxy trunk by default.
By default no VoIP Ethernet Port is assigned to any SIP trunks. Thus by default no incoming and outgoing call will
be routed to and from SIP trunks.
Thus, the SE has to program the VoIP Ethernet port for the SIP trunks which has to be used whether Proxy or
Non-Proxy. For Proxy he has to program other parameters also which is required for registration in Proxy.
Status
Use following command to enable/disable a SIP Trunk:
7702-1-SIP Trunk-Status
7702-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Status
7702-*-Status
Where,
By default, all the SIP trunks are disabled.
Status Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Name
To program name of a SIP Trunk, please refer chapter Name Programming for more details.
Service Provider
Use following command to assign Service Provider for SIP Trunk:
7703-1-SIP Trunk-SP
7703-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-SP
7703-*-SP
Where,
By default, all the SIP trunks are assigned SP = 01.
Time Zone
Please refer Time Tables chapter to program the time zone for SIP Trunk.
SIP User ID
Use following command to assign SIP User ID to a SIP Trunk:
7704-1-SIP Trunk-SIP User ID
7704-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-SIP User ID
7704-*-SIP User ID
Where,
SIP User ID is 40 characters maximum using ASCII characters.
By default, the SIP User ID for each SIP Trunk is *.
SIP ID parameter in SIP Trunk Parameters:
By default this parameter field is programmed as * for all SIP trunks.
Now if you want to use any SIP trunk as Proxy, assign a VoIP Ethernet Port for that SIP trunk and program the
Registrar Server Address, SIP ID and Registration related parameters for that SIP trunk as given by the ITSP. Thus
there can be more SIP trunks as Proxy for the same VoIP port if Registrar Server Address and SIP ID is
programmed.
For making outgoing call on Proxy, ITSP provides the SIP ID and Registrar Server Address. If this not programmed in
the message, call will be rejected.
For incoming call from Proxy, the Proxy server sends the SIP ID and Registrar Server address which is used by the
ETERNITY.
Caution: SE should not program the same SIP ID for the same VoIP port. Otherwise the first best match will be
considered for every call coming with that SIP ID even though the service provider is different for every call.
Thus, the user should preferably avoid using same SIP IDs from different Registrar.
If in the system there are 2 VoIP ports, than the SE can program the same SIP ID but both the SIP trunks should be
assigned to different VoIP ports.
It is a full SIP URI. It can use all ASCII characters. A SIP URI provided by the ITSP can be 12345@abc.com or
anil@abc.com. When the user part is a text, the SIP ID of a user is distinguished from his mail ID or any other ID by a
SIP Tag. i.e. SIP:anil@abc.com
When a caller calls this number, the call lands on the VoIP Ethernet Port and is routed as per the trunk feature
template assigned to the SIP trunk.
The Extension Name is used when many extensions may use the same SIP trunk to make an OG call as explained
below:
When an OG call is made through a SIP trunk with SIP ID; SIP:anil@abc.com, SIP:anil@abc.com is sent by the
system, to the SIP Server. Also, the extension name is sent in the display field. This helps the callee to identify the
caller.
SIP Registrar Servers Address
Use following command to assign SIP Registrar Servers Address to a SIP Trunk:
7705-1-SIP Trunk-SIP Registrar Servers Address
7705-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-SIP Registrar Servers Address
7705-*-SIP Registrar Servers Address
Where,
SIP Registrar Servers Address is the address of the SIP Registrar. It can be IP address also. This may same as the SIP
Server address since the SIP server might also be acting as Register Server. Maximum 40 characters with Extended
ASCII characters.
Matrix
By default, SIP Registrar Servers Address is a blank.
SIP Registrar Servers Port
Use following command to assign SIP Registrar Servers Port to a SIP Trunk:
7706-1-SIP Trunk-SIP Registrar Servers Port
7706-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-SIP Registrar Servers Port
7706-*-SIP Registrar Servers Port
Where,
Range = 1024-65535. This may be same as SIP Servers Port address.
By default, the SIP Registrar Servers Port is 5060.
SIP Registrar Servers Port is the Registrar Servers listening port for SIP. SE may change this field if the ITSP provides a
SIP port number other then the default.
SIP Re-Registration Timer
Use following command to program Re-Registration timer for a SIP Trunk:
7707-1-SIP Trunk-Re-Registration Timer
7707-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Re-Registration Timer
7707-*-Re-Registration Timer
Where,
Re-Registration timer is from 00001 to 65535 seconds.
By default, Re-Registration timer is 3600 seconds.
Programming Hint:
As a part of normal process, the Register server deletes an entry of its client from its database on expiry of a fixed
timer. This timer is set by the Register Server. Hence, in order to be registered always, the ETERNITY will send a
Registration request before this timer expires.
This timer signifies the time after which the ETERNITY will send Registration request again to be registered. In
general, SE should program this time = half of the Registration time set by the Register Server.
For example, the Register Server deletes the entry after 30 minutes of registering a client. In such case, the SE should
program this time = 15 minutes.
Note:
This is to be programmed if some Registrar does not support Expiration Time.
Registration Retry Timer
Use following command to program Registration Retry timer for a SIP Trunk:
7708-1-SIP Trunk-Registration Retry Timer
7708-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Registration Retry Timer
7708-*-Registration Retry Timer
Where,
Range = 00001 to 65535 seconds.
By default, Re-Registration Timer is 00010 seconds.
On expiry of Re-registration timer, the ETERNITY sends the registration request. If the registration attempt fails, the
ETERNITY will send the registration request on expiry of this timer.
Authentication User ID
Use following command to program Authentication User ID for a SIP Trunk:
7709-1-SIP Trunk-Authentication User ID
7709-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Authentication User ID
7709-*-Authentication User ID
Where,
Enter maximum 40 characters. You can use all ASCII characters.
Authentication User ID is the user name for registering the SIP account with the SIP registrar server. It is relevant when
Authentication ID and SIP ID are not same.
By default, Authentication User ID is Blank.
Matrix
Authentication User Password
Use following command to program Authentication User Password for a SIP Trunk:
7710-1-SIP Trunk-Authentication User Password
7710-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Authentication User Password
7710-*-Authentication User Password
Where,
Enter Maximum 24 characters. You can use all ASCII characters.
By default, Authentication User Password is blank.
Authentication User Password is the password associated with the user name above.
Simultaneous Calls
By default, ETERNITY allows making SIP calls from a SIP trunk, till the VoIP card has free voice channels. Generally,
ITSP allows multiple incoming and outgoing simultaneous calls on a single SIP Trunk.
But some ITSP limits number of simultaneous calls from a SIP Trunk. For example, if ITSP, ABC restricts that from a
SIP Trunk you can make only 2 simultaneous calls, when 2 calls are active (either outgoing or incoming) and third call
attempt incoming/outgoing will get fail.
Parameter 'Simultaneous Calls' on a SIP Trunk takes care of this issue.
Program the number of 'Simultaneous Calls' as allowed by the ITSP on the SIP Trunk.
When number of 'Simultaneous Calls' equals the number of on going calls on a SIP Trunk, the ETERNITY will
consider this SIP Trunk as busy and will not allow new call (incoming /outgoing) until one of the call ends.
If your ITSP restricts number of simultaneous calls from the subscribed SIP Trunk, then only change this parameter.
Use following command to program number of 'Simultaneous Calls' allowed on the SIP Trunk:
7741-1-SIP-Simultaneous Calls
7741-2-SIP-SIP-Simultaneous Calls
7741-*-Simultaneous Calls
Where,
Simultaneous calls can be from 01 to 64.
By default, Simultaneous Calls are '64', however number of calls from the SIP Trunk also depends up on the
number of free voice channels on the VoIP card to which it is assigned.
Source Port IP Address
Use following command to select the 'Source Port IP Address' selection:
7711-1- SIP Trunk-Code
7711-2- SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Code
7711-*-Code
Where,
By default, Source Port IP Address is 1.
Significance of the command
If 'Outbound Proxy' is enabled, the IP address of VoIP Ethernet Port will be used. But if the 'Outbound Proxy' is
disabled, the IP Address will be considered as per the option selected for the parameter 'Source Port IP Address'.
The options are as mentioned below for each SIP Trunk:
Use VoIP Ethernet Port IP Address
Use IP Address fetched using STUN
Use Router's Public IP Address
Use VoIP Ethernet Port IP Address:
Select this, if STUN server is not programmed. It is used when 'Outbound Proxy' is enabled.
Use IP Address fetched using STUN:
Select this, when STUN server is programmed and during NAT Type checking, if the system is able to get public IP
Address. This address will be displayed in 'VoIP Ethernet port Status' page.
Code Meaning
1 Use VoIP Ethernet Port IP Address
2 Use IP Address fetched using STUN
3 Use Router's Public IP Address
Matrix
If, this Address is not available during Registration, user will get suitable message about reason for failure, on the
Web page 'SIP Trunk Status'.
For IC and OG calls, if the IP address is programmed as Blank, the call will be disconnected for all condition except if
destination address is of the same network i.e Non-proxy SIP Trunk call for the same network.
Use Router's Public IP Address:
Select this, when 'Router's Public IP Address' is to be used for two way communication between two peers which are
located behind the NAT. This address will also be displayed in Web page 'VoIP Ethernet port Status'.
If, this Address is not available during Registration, user will get suitable message about reason of failure, on the Web
page 'SIP Trunk Status'.
For IC and OG calls, if the IP address is programmed as Blank, the call will be disconnected for all condition except if
destination address is of the same network i.e Non-proxy SIP Trunk call for the same network.
Preferred Vocoders
Use following command to program the preferred Vocoders for a SIP Trunk:
7712-1-SIP Trunk-Preferred Vocoder Index
7712-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Preferred Vocoder Index
7712-*-Preferred Vocoder Index
Where,
Preferred Vocoder index is from 0 to 9.
The Vocoders for the OG calls are selected as per the preferences programmed using this command.
By default, Preferred Vocoder sequence as per above table.
If the SE programs None as the preferred Vocoder, it means that there is no preference of the Vocoders defined by the
SE.
Note:
If all preterred Vocoder is programmed as None, Incoming and Outgoing call will get fail.
DTMF Option
Use following command to program the DTMF option for a SIP Trunk:
7713-1-SIP Trunk-DTMF Option Index
7713-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-DTMF Option Index
7713-*-DTMF Option Index
Where,
DTMF Option Index is from 1 to 3.
By default, DTMF Option is Via RTP followed by SIP INFO.
This option is used for only OG calls to decide how the digits will be sent. If Inband is selected, DTMF is combined in
audio signal. If RTP is selected, digits are sent via RTP using RFC 2833. followed by SIP INFO.
In case of IC call, the preference requested by the remote end is entertained. For e.g. if the remote end sends the DTMF
in PCM (i.e. Inband) then our ETERNITY ME Card VoIP will detect the DTMF received inband.
Preferred Vocoder Index Meaning
0 None
1 G.723-L
2 G.723-H
3 G.729a
4 GSM FR
5 iLBC - 30ms
6 iLBS - 20ms
7 G.711 (Mu-Law)
8 G.711 (A-Law)
DTMF Option Index Meaning
1 RTP (RFC 2833)
2 SIP Info
3 In-band
Matrix
Fax Option
Use following command to program the Fax option for a SIP Trunk:
7714-1-SIP Trunk-Fax Option Index
7714-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Fax Option Index
7714-*-Fax Option Index
Where,
Fax Option Index is from 1 to 3.
By default, Fax Option Index is Via T.38 (UDPTL) followed by Pass-Through.
This option is used for both IC and OG calls.
Important Points:
IC Call
In case of IC call, if the IC call is a Fax call then it will be routed as per the Fax TLG.
Whether the incoming IP call is a fax call can be known only if the IC call uses T.38 protocol. If the IC call uses Pass-
through then the IC call cannot be identified as Fax call.
OG Call
This command is used if you want to send fax using Pass Through and not T.38. It supports T.38 only if opposite end
supports T.38.
Outbound Proxy Server
Use following command to enable/disable Outbound Proxy Server for a SIP Trunk:
7715-1-SIP Trunk-Outbound Proxy
7715-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Outbound Proxy
7715-*-Outbound Proxy
Where,
By default, Outbound Proxy Server is disabled.
Enable this field if the ITSP service provider has a SIP outbound server to handle voice calls.
Outbound Proxy Server Address
Use following command to program the Outbound Proxy Servers address for a SIP Trunk:
7716-1-SIP Trunk-Outbound Proxy Server Address
7716-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Outbound Proxy Server Address
7716-*-Outbound Proxy Server Address
Where,
You can use Max. 40 characters with Extended ASCII characters.
By default, Outbound Proxy Server address is blank.
This may be same as the SIP Server address since the SIP server might also be acting as Outbound Server.
Outbound Proxy Server Port
Use following command to program the Outbound Proxy Servers port for a SIP Trunk:
7717-1-SIP Trunk-Outbound Proxy Server Port
7717-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Outbound Proxy Server Port
7717-*-Outbound Proxy Server Port
Where,
Range = 1024-65535.
By default, Outbound Proxy Server port is 05060.
Fax Option Index Meaning
1 T.38 (UDPTL)
2 T.38 (RTP)
3 Pass Through
Outbound Proxy Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Outbound Proxy Server port specifies the Outbound Proxy Servers listening port for SIP. This may be same as SIP
Servers Port.
Enable/Disable Send CLI
Use following command to enable/disable Send CLI on the SIP Trunk:
7718-1-SIP Trunk-Code
7718-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Code
7718-*-Code
Where,
By default, Send CLI is enabled.
When Send CLI is enabled, both the Calling Party number (SIP trunk number through which the call is being made) and
the Name (Station Name) is sent. When Send CLI is disabled, neither is sent.
OG Reference ID
Use following command to assign the OG reference ID to SIP Trunk:
7721-1-SIP Trunk-OG Reference ID
7721-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-OG Reference ID
7721-*- OG Reference ID
Where,
OG Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, OG Reference ID is 00 for SIP Trunk.
IC Reference ID
Use following command to assign the IC reference ID to SIP Trunk for Working Hour:
7722-1-SIP Trunk-IC Reference ID
7722-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-IC Reference ID
Where,
By default, IC Reference ID is 00 for SIP Trunk for Working Hour.
Use following command to assign the IC reference ID to SIP Trunk for Break Hour:
Where,
By default, IC Reference ID is 00 for SIP Trunk for Break Hour.
Use following command to assign the IC reference ID to SIP Trunk for Nonworking Hour:
Where,
By default, IC Reference ID is 00 for SIP Trunk for Non-Working Hour.
Symmetric RTP
Use following command to configure Symmetric RTP logic to be used or not for the SIP Trunk:
7719-1-SIP Trunk-Flag
7719-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Flag
7719-*-Flag
Where,
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
By default, Symmetric RTP is 'Don't Apply Symmetric RTP Logic' for all SIP Trunks.
Note: The 'Symmetric RTP' should be used for P2P (Peer-to-Peer trunks. P2P trunk is a SIP Trunk with Registrar Server
Address = 'Blank' and SIP ID = '*')
Significance of the command:
The Symmetric RTP should be used for P2P (Peer-to-Peer trunks. P2P trunk is a SIP Trunk with Registrar Server
Address = Blank and SIP ID = *.
DTMF ON Time
Use following command to program DTMF ON Time for the SIP Trunk:
7725-1- SIP Trunk -DTMF ON Time
7725-2- SIP Trunk - SIP Trunk -DTMF ON Time
Where,
This parameter decides for how much time the DTMF digit will be ON, while out dialed by the ETERNITY. One of the
Use following command to program DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer for the SIP Trunk:
7726-1- SIP Trunk - DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
7726-2- SIP Trunk - SIP Trunk - DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
7726- * - DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
Where,
This command is used to enable Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on the SIP trunk. Refer chapter Gateway
Step 1
Use following command to set flag for Gateway Application-Answer Signaling on SIP trunk:
7727-1-SIP-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
7727-2-SIP-SIP-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
Where,
By default, Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag is 'disable'.
Step 2
7728-1-SIP-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
7728-2-SIP-SIP-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF String
Where,
Flag Meaning
0 Don't Apply Symmetric RTP Logic
1 Apply Symmetric RTP Logic
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
using #*.
By default, 'Gateway Application-Answer Signaling' DTMF String is 'CCC'.
Using this feature, the ETERNITY (with VoIP Ethernet Port), can authenticate the incoming call (caller) on the SIP trunk,
using the parameters configured in the system, and then only process the call further. Refer chapter 'Digest
Authentication' for more information.
Use following command to enable/disable Digest Authentication on the SIP Trunk:
7729-1-SIP Trunk-Digest Authentication
7729-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Digest Authentication
7729-*-Digest Authentication
Where,
By default, Digest Authentication is disable.
SIP Over TCP
Using this feature, ETERNITY-VoIP Ethernet port can be programmed to send or receive SIP request on SIP Trunk over
UDP or TCP.
TCP is Transmission Control Protocol and UDP is User Datagram Protocol.
Also it will be possible to fall back from TCP to UDP on SIP Trunk (for OG messages), if TCP connection to remote peer
fails due to any reason.
Step 1
Enable/Disable SIP Over TCP
Use following command to Enable/Disable SIP Over TCP on SIP Trunk:
7730-1-SIP-SIP Over TCP
7730-2-SIP-SIP-SIP Over TCP
7730-*-SIP Over TCP
Where,
By default, SIP Over TCP is disable
Step 2
Default Transport for Outgoing Message
This parameter is configured to select the default transport protocol for OG SIP messages.
Use following command to program Default Transport for Outgoing Message for SIP Trunk:
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
* **
# ##
Digest Authentication Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
SIP Over TCP Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
7731-1-SIP-Default Transport for OG Message
7731-2-SIP-SIP-Default Transport for OG Message
7731-*-Default Transport for OG Message
Where,
These options are checked only if you have enabled 'SIP over TCP' for above parameter. Else all outgoing messages are
transported over UDP only.
UDP: If it is selected, UDP will be used as default transport protocol for outgoing messages.
TCP: If it is selected, TCP will be used as default transport protocol for outgoing messages.
TCP (with fallback to UDP): TCP will be used as default transport protocol for outgoing messages. However, if TCP
connection to remote peer fails due to any reason, the gateway will try sending messages again over UDP.
By default, Transport for OG Message is UDP.
Step 3
To program SIP UDP Port for VoIP Ethernet Port. Refer chapter VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters.
Step 4
To program SIP TCP Port for VoIP Ethernet Port. Refer chapter VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters.
Enable/disable 'Add rinstance in REGISTER'
The parameter 'rinstance' is any random value which can be used by system to fetch its own contact binding. The SE can
include or not the 'rinstance' in the contact binding of REGISTER message as per requirement of the user.
Use following command to enable/disable 'Add rinstance in REGISTER' message:
7739-1-SIP-Flag
7739-2-SIP-SIP-Flag
7739-*-Flag
Where,
By default, 'rinstance' is enabled.
Silence Suppression for G.729
Use following command to enable/disable silence suppression for G.729 Vocoder for SIP Trunk:
7740-1-SIP-Flag
7740-2-SIP-SIP-Flag
7740-*-Flag
Where,
The parameter is applicable only for Vocoder G.729.
Relevant Topics:
1. VoIP Calling 917
3. Peer-to-Peer Calling 663
Default Transport for OG Message Meaning
1 UDP
2 TCP
3 TCP (Fallback UDP)
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Flag Meaning
0 Silence Suppression Disabled
1 Silence Suppression Enabled
Matrix
4. SIP Trunk Status 745
7. Digest Authentication 416
=X=X=
Matrix
SIP Trunk Status
What's this?
The user can quickly refer the SIP Trunk status and Registration status parameters for each SIP trunk, on the Web
Page 'SIP Trunk Status'.
These parameters can not be edited and will not be displayed on SLT.
Following parameters will be displayed for each SIP trunk. (01 to 32)
Status
Registration Time
Registration Retry Count
Failed Reason
Status:
User will get display of following types of messages in 'Status' field for the web page 'SIP Trunk Status':
Registration Time:
This time is provided by server during registration and displayed.
Registration Retry Count:
This shows how many times after failure, the VoIP Ethernet Port sent registration request. As retry count increase this
number will be displayed as increasing 0,1,2.. After 'submit' of the page, this will get reset to '0'.
Failed Reason:
User will get display of message about following types of reasons in 'Failed Reason' field for the SIP Trunk, when the
registration for the SIP Trunk had failed:
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Message displayed Remarks
Disable When SIP trunk is disable.
Registering When SIP trunk is enable and waiting for response from the SIP server.
Registered When SIP trunk is registered with SIP server.
Failed When any error condition occur and no call can be made using this SIP trunk. For Example,
when STUN server address is not programmed and P2P call is made using STUN, status will
be displayed as 'Failed' and call can not be made.
Peer to Peer When SIP trunk is enabled and configured for peer to peer calling.
Message displayed Remarks
Failed to create register client When SIP stack has memory constraint/ resource limitation/no. of SIP
client to register is more then programmed in the stack
Failed to detach register client
Failed to send request When DNS server is not programmed
Local failure When DNS query fail
Response timeout Displayed after the expiry of general request timer
Error response - 4xx to 6xx Displayed the error response code
No contact header in 2xx When no contact address is received in 2xx response from SIP server
Authentication Fail When client gets failed to get authenticated from SIP server
STUN address is not programmed When STUN is enabled but address is not configured
STUN query fail When query to STUN server fails
Outbound address is not
programmed
When outbound is enable but outbound address is not configured
Router's IP address is not
programmed
When router's IP address is to be used in signaling but address is not
programmed
Matrix
SLT Hardware Template
What's this?
An SLT Hardware Template is a set of features that define the behavior of the SLT hardware port, and needless to say, it
is assigned to SLT Ports only.
The SLT Hardware Template allows you to configure according to user requirements, a common set of 15 parameters
(features) like Caller ID Presentation (DTMF, FSK), Digit Pad Count, Ring Type, AC Impedance, Answer Signaling type,
etc. to be assigned to all SLT Hardware Ports.
Each of these hardware parameters, along with its default value, is briefly described below.
SLT Hardware Template Parameters
CLIP Type: The ETERNITY provides a facility to detect the calling number and present it to the SLT. This is known as
Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP). For this feature to work, the telephone instrument connected to
the SLT port must support CLIP.
The Eternity supports 3 signaling protocols for CLI on the SLT port: DTMF, FSK-V.23, and FSK-BellCore. Select the
appropriate signaling protocol.
If you want to disable CLI on the SLT port, select 'None'.
By default, DTMF protocol is set as CLIP Type.
Digit Pad Count: Certain SLT instruments that support CLI require a minimum number of digits in the calling party's
number to be able identify and display it. The Digit Pad Count signifies the number of zeroes to be added with the
Calling party's number before displaying it on the called party's instrument. This count entirely depends on the
instrument connected to it.
Ring Type: The SLIC used with SLT port allows you to change the Ring type: Sinusoidal, Trapezoidal, Low
Sinusoidal, Low Trapezoidal. This is helpful in cases when telephone instruments, which expect sinusoidal type of
ringing current, are connected to the SLT port. By default the Ring Type for all SLT ports is Trapezoidal.
Tx Gain: The SLIC used with each SLT port provides a facility to adjust the Transmit (Tx) Gain. This enables the SLT
user to increase the volume of the outgoing speech on the SLT, if required. This is helpful when the PBX is installed at
a great distance from the Public (CO) exchange.
Rx Gain: The SLIC used with each SLT port provides a facility to adjust the Receive (Rx) Gain. This enables the SLT
user to increase the volume of the incoming speech on the SLT, if required.
AC Impedance: The SLIC used with each SLT port provides a facility to adjust the AC impedance of the SLT port with
the communication equipment connected to it.
Generally, most telephone instruments that are connected have nominal characteristics with AC impedance of 600
ohms. However, the ETERNITY allows you to connect instruments with AC impedance other than 600 ohms.
DTMF Detection: The DTMF detection can be enabled/disabled for the SLT port.
Flash Timer (msec): In Pulse Dialing, codes are dialed in pulses. A Flash key is generally used to dial this code.
Flash is breaking the loop current for 83ms to 900ms. Flash Timer signifies the time period for which the loop current
breaks.
The range of the Flash Timer is from 83 to 999 seconds. By default, the Flash Timer is set to 600 msec. Program the
Flash Timer as per user requirement.
VMS Flag: This parameter is relevant if there is a Voicemail System (VMS) or Auto Attendant integrated with the
ETERNITY. An SLT Port can be programmed as 'VMS' or 'Normal'
When there is a VMS/Auto Attendant interfaced with the ETERNITY, the port of the VMS/Auto Attendant is connected
to the SLT Port. And therefore, the SLT port is required to be programmed as a VMS Port, by selecting 'VMS'. When
Matrix
there is no VMS connected to the SLT port, the SLT port is to be programmed as 'Normal'. By default 'Normal' is
selected for all SLT ports.
Answer Signaling: An 'Answer Signal' is a signal generated by the SLT port to indicate that the called party (remote
party) has answered the call and the call is now mature.
Answer Signaling on the SLT port is particularly useful when there is a PCO machine or any Billing equipment
connected to the SLT port. With Answer Signaling enabled on an SLT port, during an outgoing call is made from that
SLT port to any other port - TWT/Mobile/SIP/T1E1/BRI - when the called party (remote party) answers, i.e. goes OFF
Hook, the Public Network provides an Answer Signal to trunk port indicate call maturity. This signal can be generated
on the on the SLT port to indicate to the PCO machine/Billing equipment connected to this port to consider the call as
matured and start billing.
In the absence of this Signal, the call will not be considered matured and hence no billing will be initiated/generated.
Thus, Answer Signaling on the SLT port helps avoid billing of unanswered and unsuccessful call attempts.
Answer Signaling is generated in the form of Polarity Reversal or Battery Reversal, whereby the Battery polarity of the
SLT port gets reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the SLT port is +ve for TIP and -ve for RING in speech
condition, then on call maturity, TIP becomes -ve and Ring becomes +ve.
To generate Answer Signaling on the SLT Port, select 'Polarity Reversal'. Select 'None' if Answer Signaling is not be
generated on the SLT port.
By default 'None' is selected, i.e. there is no Answer Signaling on SLT Ports.
Disconnect Signaling: A 'Disconnect Signal' is the signal generated on the SLT port to indicate that the called party
(remote party has disconnected the call.
Disconnect Signaling on the SLT port is useful when there is a PCO machine or any Billing equipment connected to
the SLT port. With Disconnect Signaling enabled on an SLT port, during an outgoing call is made from that SLT port to
any other port - TWT/Mobile/SIP/T1E1/BRI - when the called party (remote party) disconnects, i.e. goes ON Hook,
the Public Network provides a Disconnect Signal to trunk port indicate call disconnection. This signal can be
generated on the on the SLT port to indicate to the PCO machine/Billing equipment connected to this port to consider
the call as disconnected and stop billing. Thus, Disconnect Signaling on the SLT port helps prevent excessive billing.
ETERNITY supports two types of Disconnect Signals on the SLT Port:
Polarity Reversal: Call Disconnection is signaled in the form of Polarity Reversal. The Battery polarity of the SLT
port will be reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the SLT port is '+ve' for TIP and '-ve' for RING in
speech condition then on disconnection on other port, TIP will become '-ve' and Ring '+ve'. When call is
disconnected, user will get Error tone.
Open Loop: Call Disconnection is signaled in the form of Open Loop Disconnect Pulse, whereby the Battery
voltage on the SLT port is removed for the duration of the Open Loop Disconnect Timer programmed for that SLT
port and will be restored on the expiry of this Timer. However, the Polarity of Battery Voltage on the SLT port is not
changed. When call is disconnected, the SLT extension user gets an Error tone.
To generate Disconnect Signaling on the SLT Port, select 'Polarity Reversal' or 'Open Loop' as appropriate. Select
'None' if Disconnect Signaling is not be generated on the SLT port.
By default 'None' is selected.
Open Loop Disconnect Timer (msec): This parameter is applicable only if the option Open Loop Disconnect is
selected as Disconnect Signaling type on the SLT port.
Open Loop Disconnect Timer is the time period for which the system will remove Battery Voltage on the SLT port and
restore Battery Voltage on the expiry of the Timer to signal Call Disconnection.
The range of this timer is from 001 to 999 milliseconds. By default, the Timer is set to 500 msec.

Loop Current (mA): The SLIC circuit used provides Loop Current to the telephone instrument connected to the SLT
port to drive the telephone instrument.
Matrix
The Loop Current is to be increased/decreased according to the Loop Length, i.e. the length of the telephony wiring
cable between the wall jack (into which the SLT telephone instrument is plugged) and the MDF (into which the cables
from the SLT port are terminated).
The longer the Loop Length of the SLT port, the greater the likelihood of current dissipation, affecting speech quality
of the telephone instrument connected to the SLT port.
The system supports Loop Current of 25, 30, 35 and 40 mA. By default the Loop Current for SLT ports is set to 25mA
and the SLT port, which is sufficient to support Loop Length of 1 kilometer.
You may change the Loop Current according to the Loop Length of the SLT.
Minimum Current for OFF-Hook Detection: ETERNITY detects OFF-Hook state of an SLT instrument and gives
dial tone on the basis of the current drawn by it from the SLT port. However, all types and brands of SLT instruments
may not uniformly draw the same minimum current; some may draw lesser and some may draw more, making OFF-
Hook detection difficult for ETERNITY. To resolve this, ETERNITY provides for programmable values for threshold
current for OFF-Hook detection: 10mA, 12mA, 14mA, 16mA and 18mA.
By default, the value of the Minimum Current for OFF-Hook detection is set to 12 mA. Change this value according to
the current drawn by your SLT instrument.
When an SLT instrument draws current equal to or greater than the programmed threshold value of current for off-
hook detection, ETERNITY will consider the SLT instrument as OFF-Hook and will offer dial tone to the SLT.
ON-Hook Detection Current (mA): ETERNITY detects ON-Hook state of an SLT instrument to route calls on the
basis of the current drawn by it from the SLT port. However, as all types and brands of SLT instruments may not
uniformly draw the same current, ON-Hook detection becomes difficult for the system.
To resolve this, ETERNITY provides for programmable values for threshold current for ON-Hook Detection: 10mA,
12mA, 14mA, 16mA and 18mA.
By default, the value of the ON-Hook Detection Current is set to 10 mA.
When an SLT instrument draws current equal to or lower than the programmed threshold value of current for ON-
Hook detection, ETERNITY will consider the SLT instrument as ON-Hook.
SLT instruments also vary in the level of current drawn during the normal 'idle' state and when Flash is dialed
46
(the
simulated idle state). So, when the Flash key of an SLT instrument is pressed, and if the instrument draws a higher
current than the threshold defined for the 'idle' state, the system will not be able to detect Flash (i.e. ON-Hook state).
Consider this when changing the value of ON-Hook Detection Current. Define the value considering the current
drawn by your SLT instrument in idle state, as well as when Flash key is pressed.
How to program?
There are 50 SLT Hardware Templates that can be customized and assigned to the SLT ports. These templates contain
the default values of the above-listed parameters.
The default parameter values of the SLT Hardware Templates are country specific and are loaded in each template
according to the Country selected as the Region Code.
For example, when India is selected as the Region Code, the default value of the CLIP Type in the SLT Hardware
Templates is DTMF, whereas it is FSK-Bellcore when the Region Code is selected as US or Canada and FSK-V.23 when
UK is selected as Region Code. Similarly, the default values of AC Impedance on the SLT Hardware Templates will vary
according to the Region Code selected; 600 ohms for Region Code India, 900 ohms for Region Code the Philippines,
and 350W +(1000W || 0.21F) for Region Code UK.
46. Dialing 'Flash' either with the 'Flash Key' or by pressing the Hook-switch causes the phone to go in ON-Hook state
briefly for 600-800 milliseconds. Thus ON-Hook state is simulated briefly. The SLT may draw a higher current when
'Flash' is dialed.
Matrix
By default SLT Hardware Template Number 01 is assigned to all the SLT ports. This template has default values fulfilling
the common requirements of a very broad user base.
If the default SLT Hardware Template 01 fulfills the user and country requirements, retain Template 01.
If you want to change the values of certain SLT Hardware Parameters, but apply the same parameter values to all SLT
ports, simply customize the desired parameters in Template 01.
However, if different hardware parameters are to be applied to different SLTs, then you can customize different the SLT
Hardware Templates using SE Commands or Jeeves.
Programming the SLT Hardware Template
Use the following command to program parameter in an SLT Hardware Template:
5702-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
5702-2-Template Number-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
5702-*-Parameter Number-Code
Where,
Template Number is the number of the SLT Hardware Template from 01 to 50.
Parameter Number is the number of the SLT Hardware Template Parameter from 01 to 15.
Code is the value for each parameter from 0 to 5.
Matrix
Refer the table below for parameter numbers and meaning of codes.
Note:
'Cmplx' is 'Complex Impedance' which consists of resistive and reactive impedance for the 'AC Impedance'
parameter.
The default values of the SLT Hardware Templates are for the default Region Code India. The default values will differ
according to the Region Code you have selected for the system.
Matrix
Example:
To change the CLIP Type in Template 02 from default the DTMF to FSK-Bell, dial:
5702-1-02-01-3
Where,
02 is the template number
01 is the parameter number for CLIP Type
3 is the code for FSK-Bell
How to assign default values to an SLT Hardware Template?
Use the following command to default an SLT Hardware Template:
5701-*
Where,
Template Number is from 01 to 50
NOTE: When the SE command to set the AC impedance for the SLT is issued, the settings will be effective when the SLT
extension (for which AC Impedance is programmed) goes ON-Hook. ETERNITY will restart, if the SLT is OFF-Hook.
How to assign an SLT Hardware Template to an SLT?
Use the following command to assign an SLT Hardware Template to an SLT:
5703-1-SLT-Template Number
5703-2-SLT-SLT-Template Number
Where,
SLT is the Software Port number of the SLT port from 001 to 512.
Template Number is the number of the customized SLT Hardware Template, from 01 to 50.
By default, Template 01 is assigned to the SLT.
Example:
To assign Template 02 to SLT ports 003 to 010, dial 5703-2-003-010-02
Internal Digit-Digit Wait Timer-While dialing an SLT or a DKP, the system waits for some time. This timer is called
Internal Digit-Digit Wait Timer. During this time the user does not hear any tone. If the user does not dial another digit
during this time then the system gives Error Tone.
Use the following command to change the duration of this Timer:
5352-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 002 to 255 seconds.
By default, the Timer is set to 007 seconds.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Matrix
Static Routing Table
What's this?
The ETERNITY (with VoIP card) supports to make/receive the SIP call, to/from another VoIP device (e.g. ETERNITY
with VoIP card, ATA2LL, ATA211 etc) connected in another network which is in different subnet mask. This is done by
routing the call through the specific Address of the Gateway corresponding to network of the called device, which is
programmed in the ETERNITY (with VoIP card). These parameters are programmed in 'Static Routing Table'. Thus
you can call to ETERNITY (with VoIP card) at different locations through Multiple Gateway application.
Static routing table helps you routing the call between point to point sites (connected through Multi Protocol Label
Switching-MPLS, Frame Relay, etc.) and to public internet at the same time.
You may not be required to configure the Table, when ETERNITY (with VoIP card) is connected behind the NAT
router. In this case, LAN interface of NAT router acts as default gateway for ETERNITY (with VoIP card) and all calls
initiated from ETERNITY (with VoIP card) get routed from LAN port of NAT router. But, if you have connected multiple
offices through MPLS, Frame Relay etc and want to make/receive Peer to Peer calls between various offices and
Proxy calls to public internet at the same time, you need to configure the Static Routing Table in ETERNITY (with VoIP
card).
Notes:
Static routing table is common for all SIP Trunks.
If final destination IP address and VoIP card reside in the same subnet, Static Routing Table will not be
significant.
Since Network A and Network B( in following figure) will be in different subnets, and ETERNITY (with VoIP
card) supports only one default gateway, only Peer to Peer calls between network A and B OR Proxy calls can
be made at the same time.
For example,
As in the above figure, two offices are connected through MPLS or Frame Relay. One is in Network A and the other is
in Network B. ETERNITY (with VoIP card) is connected at both sites. User wants to make Peer to Peer calls between
two offices through Frame Relay/ MPLS network. At the same time, user may need to make proxy calls through public
internet.
Public
IP
SIP Proxy
A B
59.162.252.82
192.168.1.0/24 192.168.2.0/24
Frame Relay/MPLS
ETERNITY ETERNITY
192.168.1.1
Matrix
Following parameters are programmed in the table in each entry:
Destination Address: It is the address of final destination where the call is to be made. This can be IP address of
called SIP device or network address where called SIP device resides.
Subnet Mask: It is the mask to be applied on destination address.
Gateway Address: It is the IP address of LAN interface of your router from where you want to route the call for specific
destination. This address must be in the same subnet where calling ETERNITY (with VoIP card) resides.
Following programming should be done in the Static Routing Table of ETERNITY (with VoIP card) at location A:
Only one entry in Static Routing Table needs to configure.
Destination Address viz 192.168.2.0 specifies the network address of location B.
Subnet Mask viz. 255.255.255.255 specifies the mask to be applied on destination address. The subnet mask
'255.255.255.255' will convert the Host Address to Network Address,
Gateway Address viz 192.168.1.1 specifies the LAN address of router which connects location A and location B.IP
address of LAN interface of router which connects location A to public internet should be configured as Default
Gateway as in normal scenario. Refer chapters VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters and Jeeves for more information
about commands to program this parameter.
Doing above programming, all calls made by ETERNITY (with VoIP card), to 192.168.2.0/ 24 will be routed through
router which connects location A to location B. Whereas, all calls made by ETERNITY (with VoIP card), to address
other then 192.168.2.0/ 24 will be routed through default gateway.
Similarly, program the Static Routing Table in ETERNITY (with VoIP card) at location B to enable calling from location
B to location A.
How to program?
Destination Address
Use following command to program Destination Address in Static Routing Table:
7811-1-Index-Destination Address
Where,
Index = 1 to 8.
Destination Address is of 15 digits maximum. Enter each octet in full. E.g. to program 192.168.10.10, enter
192168010010.
By default, Destination IP Address is 000.000.000.000
Subnet Mask
Use following command to program Subnet Mask in the Static Routing Table:
7812-1-Index-Subnet Mask
Where,
Index = 1 to 8.
Subnet Mask is of 15 digits maximum. Enter each octet in full. E.g. to program 255.255.255.255, enter 255255255255
By default, Subnet Mask is 000.000.000.000
Gateway Address
Use following command to program Gateway Address in the Static Routing Table:
7813-1-Index-Gateway Address
Where,
Index = 1 to 8
Gateway Address is of 15 digits maximum. Enter each octet in full. E.g. to program 192.168.10.10, enter 192168010010.
Note: Use default Gateway Address of ETERNITY (VoIP Ethernet Port)
By default, Gateway Address is 000.000.000.000
Clear the entry
Use following command to clear specific entries of the index of Static Routing Table:
7814-1-Index
Where,
Index = 1 to 8.
Index Destination Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address
1 192.168.2.0 255.255.255.255 192.168.1.1
2
:
8
Matrix
Use following command to clear range of entries of the index of Static Routing Table
7814-2-Index-Index
Where,
Index = 1 to 8.
Use following command to clear all entries of the index of Static Routing Table
7814-*
Relevant Topics:
2. Jeeves 589
=X=X=
Matrix
Software Port and Hardware ID
Whats this?
The ETERNITY supports various types of ports as under:
The ETERNITY treats a port as an entity and processes it based on the type of the port and the programmed attributes.
Software Port
The ETERNITY takes a software port as fundamental entity. It processes the software port. Hardware ID and the access
code are just two attributes of a software port and hence they are not used anywhere in processing and programming.
Software ports are always numbered from 1 to the maximum ports supported for the port type. Following table lists this
range for each port type.
Port Type Max. Ports Supported Port No. Range
SLT 512 001-512
DKP 128 001-128
Trunk 128 001-128
E&M 128 001-128
BRI 032 01-32
T1E1PRI 008 1-8
Port
Station
Port
Trunk
Port
Auxilliary
Port
Virtual
Port
SLT
DKP
(EON45/EON42)
2 Wire analog Trunk
E&M Port
BRI Port
DS1 Port
SIP Port
Mobile Port
Paging Port
External Music Port
DIP
DOP
Software
Port
Type of Port
SLT
DKP
Trunk
DOP
DIP etc.
Hardware Port
Slot Number
Port Number
Attributes of Port
Access Code
COS Group
Toll Control Group
DID, etc.
Matrix
Each type of software port has different attributes. The system engineer (SE) programs these attributes using the
corresponding template at the time of installing the ETERNITY.
Hardware ID is an attribute of a software port. Hence, all the programming is done for the software port and
not for the hardware ID. Accordingly, the software port number is used for all the programming.
An access code is just a Flexible number assigned to the software port. Programming is for the software port
and not for the access code (Flexible number). Accordingly, the software port number is used for all the
programming.
The System Engineer allocates software port numbers to different users. This allocation is Flexible and any software port
number can be assumed for any user. Hardware ID is not relevant at this stage. Hardware ID can be programmed for a
software port any time. Further, it can be changed any time in case of hardware failure of a port.
Following example elaborates this point.
Please take a note of following points:
Software port numbers start from 001 for all different port types.
Order is not important while allocating software port numbers.
Hardware ID
The hardware ID of a software port decides where the port is physically located. To derive hardware ID of a software port,
we need:
Slot number of the card.
Port number on that card (Port offset).
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a SLT software port:
1101-SLT-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
SLT = Software port number of SLT from 001 to 512.
Slot=Slot number from 01 to 24 in which the card is inserted.
Port offset = Port number on that card (01 to 99).
By default, it is auto assigned.
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to a SLT software port:
1101-SLT-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a DKP software port:
1102-DKP-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
DKP = Software port number of DKP from 001 to 128.
Port offset = Port number on that card. (01 to 99).
Mobile (GSM) 032 01-32
SIP 032 01-32
Magneto Trunk 128 001-128
Name Position Port Type S/w Port Used
Anil Sharma Managing Director DKP 001
Nikhil Rao VP (Marketing) DKP 002
Revathi Thyagarajan VP (Finance) DKP 003
Anand Chakraborty Manager (MD) SLT 001
Pankaj Shah Accountant SLT 003
Ravi Tandon Sales Executive SLT 002
Conference Room -- DKP 005
Canteen -- SLT 004
Leased Line -- Trunk 003
STD Line -- Trunk 001
Port Type Max. Ports Supported Port No. Range
Matrix
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to DKP software port:
1102-DKP-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to DSS software port:
1103-DKP-DSS-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
DKP = Software port number of DKP from 001 to 128.
DSS is 0 or 1.
Port offset = Port number on that card. (01 to 99).
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to the DSS software port:
1103-DKP-DSS-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a TWT software port:
1104-TWT-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
TWT = Software port number of TWT from 001 to 128.
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to TWT software port:
1104-TWT-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to an E&M software port:
1105-E&M-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
E&M = Software port number of E&M from 001 to 128.
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to E&M software port:
1105-E&M-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a BRI software port:
1106-BRI-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
Slot is from 00, 01 to 24 (Slot 00 is used to de-assign the port whereas slot 01 to 16 are the universal slots, slots 17 to 24
are for internal use and should be used in this command).
Port Offset on the card is from 00, 01 to 99. (00 is used to de-assign the port whereas port number 01 to 08 are
practically used values).
By default, the Hardware Slot and Port Offset are auto assigned.
Use following command to de-assign the hardware slot and the hardware port assigned to the BRI software port.
1106-BRI-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a T1E1PRI software port:
1107-T1E1PRI-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
Slot = Slot number from 01 to 24 in which the card is inserted. (Slot 00 is used to deassign the port whereas slot 01 to 16
are universal slots, slots 17 to 24 are for internal use and should be used in this command).
Port offset = Port number on that card (01 to 99) (00 is used to deassign the port whereas port number 01 and 02 are
practically used values).
Use the following command to clear the hardware ID assigned to T1E1PRI software port:
1107-T1E1PRI-00-00
(Assigning Slot 00 and Port Offset 00 de-assigns the port).
Matrix
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a Mobile port:
1108-Mobile Trunk Number-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
Mobile Trunk Number is from 01 to 32.
Slot is from 00, 01 to 24 (Slot 00 is used to de-assign the port whereas slot 01 to 16 are the universal slots, slots 17 to 24
are for internal use and should be used in this command).
Port Offset on the card is from 00, 01 to 99. (00 is used to de-assign the port whereas port number 01 to 04 are practically
used values).
Use following command to de-assign the hardware slot and the hardware port assigned to the Mobile port.
1108-Mobile Trunk Number-00-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a VoIP software port:
1109-VoIP Ethernet Port-Slot
Where,
Slot is from 01 to 24.
Use following command to de-assign hardware ID to a VoIP software port:
1109-VoIP Ethernet Port-00
Use following command to assign hardware ID to a Magneto Trunk port:
1110-Magneto Trunk-Slot-Port offset on the card
Where,
Magneto Trunk is from 001to 128.
Slot is from 00, 01 to 24 (Slot 00 is used to de-assign the port whereas slot 01 to 16 are the universal slots, slots 17 are
24 are for internal use and should be used in this command)
Port Offset on the card is from 00, 1 to 8.
By default, the Hardware Slot and Port Offset is auto assigned.
Use following command to de-assign the hardware slot and the hardware port assigned to the Magneto trunk port.
1110-Magneto Trunk-00-00
Relevant Topics:
1. Paging 660
=X=X=
Matrix
Station Advanced Feature Template
Whats this?
The Station Advanced Feature Template is a set of general features that completely define the advanced behavior of a
station. The ETERNITY offers 50 such Templates each of which can be programmed as per the requirement. However,
by default the system provides all the Station advanced Feature Template with commonly used values. This template
should be assigned to all the 4 station types viz. SLT, DKP, E&M, T1/E1.
How it works?
The Station Advanced Feature template contains features like:
CLIP-Hold-To enable/disable CLIP-Hold on a station. Please the topic Calling Line Identification and Presentation
(CLIP) for more details.
CDC Table-To assign a CDC table to a station. Please refer the topic Call Duration Control (CDC) for more details.
Walk Out Mode-To program the Walk Out Mode for a Station. Please refer the topic Walk-In Class of Service for
more details.
Internal SMDR-To enable/disable storage of calls from the station.
Message Wait-To program the Message Wait Notification type for a station. Please refer the topic Message Wait for
more details.
Call Taping List-Incoming Numbers-To assign an external list to the station that contains numbers for incoming Call
Taping. Please refer the topic Call Taping for more details.
Call Taping List-Outgoing Numbers-To assign an external list to the station that contains numbers for outgoing Call
Taping. Please refer the topic Call Taping for more details.
Call Taping List- Internal-To Enable/Disable Internal Call Taping on the Station. Please refer the topic Call Taping for
more details.
Master Port Type and Master Port Number-To assign the Master Port Type and Master Port Number to a station.
Please refer the topic Virtual Station for more details.
GPAX Charge-To program whether the internal calls between the GPAX users is chargeable.
DDI IC Routing-This field is meaningful if the station is a DDI station. If the flag is enabled then the station behaves
like a DDI station and the DDI logic is applicable. If the flag is disabled, then the station behaves like a Non DDI
station.
DDI OG-To Enable/Disable the DDI OG flag on a station.
Floor Service: Please refer topic Floor Service for more details.
Alarm/Reminder Notification Type: To program Music on Hold, VM, External Music (AOP) to the station user and
place the Alarm Call on the Department Group. Code used is from 1 to 4. Please refer topic Alarms for more details.
Alarm/Reminder Notification Routing Group: To assign different routing group to station as per requirement.
Forced Account Code Flag: To enable this flag along with same parameter mentioned in Trunk Feature Template,
the user should enter Account Code. By default this flag is disabled. This flag is used to disable Forced Account Code
on Tie Trunks. For example, a system has two PRI lines, one connects the system to the PSTN whereas the other
connects the system to another PBX. It is required that Account code should be asked on the PRI connecting to the
PSTN whereas Account Code need not be asked on the PRI connecting to the another PBX. Hence this flag is used.
Account Code should be asked only if this flag is enabled in both templates. In other cases, Account Codes need not
be forced. Account Code should not be asked while making internal call or using a feature. Account Code is asked
only in case of externals calls. Account Code if enabled on both station and trunk, should be asked irrespective of
dialing method viz. Global Abbreviated dialing, Personal abbreviated dialing, LCR or selective trunk access. However,
if the number is dialed using selective trunk access and if Forced Account code flag is enabled on the selected trunk,
the number will be dialed using Store and Forward dialing.
Department Bill Group: To program a station to belong to a specific Department Bill Group. Maximum 100 (00-99)
such groups can be formed. Department Bill Group 00 indicates that a station does not belong to any Department
Bill Group. Department Bill Group indicates that a station belongs to a specific Department Bill Group. This feature is
required to know the total cost of the calls made by a particular department. This virtually means that these stations
are in one common group.
Call Forward Ring Timer: It is the time, within which if the call is not answered, the call gets forwarded to the
'forwarded to' destination, if 'Call Forward - No Reply' is set on the called station.
Tape Calls coming without CLI: To enable taping of incoming calls that do not have any calling line identification
(CLI). Please refer the topic Call Taping.
Matrix
How to program?
Programming a Station Advanced Feature Template.
Use the following command to program the feature in a Station Advanced Feature Template:
5602-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
5602-2-Template Number-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
Where,
Template Number is from 01 to 50.
Code takes different values that vary from feature to feature. Please refer the following table, which provides all the
values that can be assigned to various template features.
How to Assign Default values to a Station Advanced Feature Template
Use the following command to default a Station Advanced Feature Template:
5601-*
Where,
Matrix
The following table shows all the Station Advanced Feature Templates with their default values.
Matrix
How to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an SLT?
Use the following command to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an SLT:
Where,
How to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a DKP?
Use the following command to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a DKP:
5604-1-DKP-Template Number
5604-2-DKP-DKP-Template Number
Where,
By default, Template 01 is assigned to the DKP.
How to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an E&M?
Use the following command to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to an E&M:
Where,
How to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a T1E1PRI?
Use the following command to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a T1E1PRI:
5606 -*-Template Number
Where,
By default, Template 01 is assigned to the T1E1PRI.
Use following command to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to the ISDN Terminal port:
5607-1-ISDN Terminal-Station Advance Feature Template
5607-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Station Advanced Feature Template
5607-*-Station Advanced Feature Template
Where,
ISDN-Terminal is from 01 to 64.
Station Advanced Feature Template 01 to 50.
By default, Station Advance Feature Template to the ISDN Terminal Port is 01.
Use following command to assign a Station Advanced Feature Template to a SIP Trunk
5608-1-SIP Trunk-Station Advance Template
5608-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk- Station Advance Feature Template
5608-*-Station Advance Feature Template
Where,
Template number is from 01 to 50
By default, Template 01 is assigned to all SIP Trunk.
Use following command to assign Station Advance Feature Template to the BRI port:
5609-1-BRI-Station Advanced Feature Template
5609-2-BRI-BRI-Station Advanced Feature Template
5609-*-Station Advanced Feature Template
Matrix
Where,
Station Advanced Feature Template is from 01 to 50.
By default, Template is 01 for all BRI ports.
Relevant Topics:
1. DS1 Trunks 475
5. Call Taping 351
6. GPAX Application 550
9. Walk-In Class of Service 928
10. Message Wait 626
11. Alarms 245
12. QSIG 687
=X=X=
Matrix
Station Basic Feature Template
Whats this?
The Station Basic Feature Template is a set of general features that completely define the basic behavior of a station.
The ETERNITY Offers 50 such Templates each of which can be programmed as per the requirement. However, by
default the system provides the Station Basic Feature Template with commonly used values. A Station Basic Feature
Template is assigned to all the types of stations viz. SLT, DKP, E&M, T1E1PRI.
How it works?
The Station Basic Feature template contains features like:
Time Table-To assign a Time Table to the station. Please refer the topic Time Tables for more details.
Operator-To Assign an Operator to the Station. Please refer the topic Operator for more details.
Priority-To assign the priority level to the station. Please refer the topic Priority for more details.
Class of Service-To assign the COS to a station for working, Non Working and Break Hours. Please refer the topic
Class of Service (COS) for more details.
Toll Control Apply: Select yes to use the feature for allowed/denied list for different hours: WH, BH and NH.
Toll Control-Allowed Numbers-To assign external lists to the stations that work as allowed lists for different Toll
Control levels. Please refer the topic Toll Control for more details.
Toll Control-Denied Numbers-To assign external lists to the station that work as Denied Lists for different Dynamic
Toll Control levels. Please refer the topic Toll Control for more details.
Dy. Toll Control-To assign AL and DL for allowing Local calls or STD calls and ISD calls, refer chapter 'Dynamic Lock'.
Call Budget-Allowed Numbers-To assign an external list to the station that contain numbers allowed from the station
after the call budget amount is exhausted. Please refer the topic Call Budget for more Details.
Call Budget-Denied Numbers-To assign an external list to the station that contain numbers denied from the station
after the call budget amount is exhausted. Please refer the topic Call Budget for more details.
SMDR-OG (Storage)-To program the SMDR Outgoing Storage flag of a station. Please refer the topic Station
Message Detail Recording for more details.
SMDR-IC (Storage)-To program the SMDR Incoming Storage flag of a station. Please refer the topic Station Message
Detail Recording for more details.
OG Trunk Bundle Group-To assign the OG trunk bundle group for working hours, Break hours and Non working
hours. Please refer topic OG Trunk Bundle Group for more details.
Caller Category-To assign caller category to a station, as per type of the subscriber it can be programmed from the
options as shown in the template.
How to program?
Programming a Station Basic Feature Template
Use the following command to program a feature in a Station Basic Feature Template:
Where,
How to assign default values to a Station Basic Feature Template?
Use the following command to default a Station Basic Feature Template:
5501-*
Where,
Matrix
Following table shows all the Station Basic Parameters programmed by default.
Use the following command to assign a Template to a SLT:
Where,
Use the following command to assign a Template to a DKP:
5504-1-DKP-Template Number
5504-2-DKP-DKP-Template Number
Where,
By default, Template 01 is assigned to the DKP.
Use the following command to assign a Template to an E&M:
Where,
Use the following command to assign a Template to a T1E1PRI:
Where,
Use following command to assign a template to the ISDN Terminal port:
5507-1-ISDN Terminal-Station Basic Feature Template
5507-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Station Basic Feature Template
5507-*-Station Basic Feature Template
Where,
Station Basic Feature Template 01 to 50.
Matrix
By default, Station Basic Feature Template to the ISDN Terminal Port is 01.
Use following command to assign a template to a SIP Trunk
5508-1-SIP Trunk-Station Basic Feature Template
5508-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Station Basic Feature Template
Where,
SIP trunk is from 01-32.
Template number is from 01-50.
By default, Template 01 is assigned to all SIP trunk.
Use following command to assign template to the BRI port:
5509-1-BRI-Station Basic Feature Template
5509-2-BRI-BRI-Station Basic Feature Template
Where,
Station Basic feature template is from 01 to 50.
By default, Template is 01 for all BRI ports.
Relevant Topics:
1. Time Tables 870
2. Operator 658
3. Priority 676
5. Toll Control 877
6. Call Budget 290
9. Dynamic Lock 512
=X=X=
Matrix
Station Group
Whats this?
Station Group is a group of stations. The station can be a SLT, DKP, AOP or ISDN Terminal. The ETERNITY uses
these groups to support two different features viz. Paging and Do Not Disturb.
User can connect the ISDN Phone to the BRI-NT port as the ISDN phone connected to the BRI-NT is considered as
Association of Station Group with Paging
When the user selects a pagezone for announcement, ETERNITY checks the station group associated with it, and
activates the speakers of the stations in that station group.
It would not be possible to page ISDN terminal even if it is programmed as a member of the station group used for
the paging.
Association of station group with Do Not Disturb
When a call is made to a station with DND feature enabled, ETERNITY checks the station group assigned to the
called station. If the calling number is present in the station group associated for DND it puts the call throughout.
For example, if ISDN Terminal 01 is programmed in the station group = 05, and station group 05 is assigned to the
Station 2001, Station 2001 has enabled DND, now the ISDN Terminal 01 will be able to call the station 2001.
How it works?
Maximum 16 department groups can be formed. Groups are given numbers from 01 to 16.
Maximum 16 stations can be programmed in each station group. The station can be a SLT, DKP or AOP.
How to program?
Use following command to program a station group:
6602-1-Station Group-Destination Index-Port Type-Port Number
6602-2-Station Group-Station Group-Destination Index-Port Type-Port Number
6602-*-Destination Index-Port Type-Port Number
Where,
Station Group is from 01 to 16.
Where,
ISDN Terminal is a software port number of the ISDN Terminal which is included in the Station Group.
Use the following command to default a station group:
6601-1-Station Group
6601-2-Station Group-Station Group
6601-*
By default, the station group is programmed as follows:
00 Null --
01 SLT Port 001 to 512
02 DKP Port 001 to 128
08 AOP 1
Dest. Index Station Type Station
01 DKP 1
02 DKP 2
03 DKP 3
04 DKP 4
05 SLT 1
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
06 SLT 2
07 SLT 3
08 SLT 4
09 SLT 5
10 SLT 6
11 SLT 7
12 SLT 8
13 SLT 9
14 SLT 10
15 SLT 11
16 SLT 12
Dest. Index Station Type Station
Matrix
Station Message Detail Recording-Online
What's this?
The ETERNITY can generate report for the calls as and when the call is made provided the printer or a computer is
connected to the respective port. This is called SMDR Online report.
To get the online report SE should assign the destination port for IC, Internal and OG calls. SE should ensure that the
storage flag is enabled to store the calls in the buffer of the system. Refer chapter Station Message Detail Recording-
Storage to enable the storage of calls.
The ETERNITY supports to change the default format for the SMDR Report e.g. column position and field length for
calling number, speech duration, remarks field etc. SE can configure these parameters as per user's requirement.
For example,
Each Internal call is stored with following fields:
Station who made the call.
Station to which the call was made.
Date and time when the call was made.
Duration of the call in seconds.
Each outgoing call is stored with following fields:
Station who made the call.
Trunk line port used for the call
Number dialed
Date and time when the call matured
Duration of the call in seconds
Call Units.
Call Maturity Type.
Call Type (Normal, DISA, ECF etc.).
How to program?
Internal Calls: (Assigning destination port and using start/stop command for Online report)
Destination Port
Use following command to assign a destination port for Online SMDR-Internal call record:
2830-Code
Where,
By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Online printing is disabled.
If you assigned Ethernet Port as destination port, use the following command to assign the IP Address to the Ethernet
Port:
2832-IP Address
Use the following command to assign the IP Port:
2833-IP Port
Where,
IP Port is from 514 and 1024-65535
By default, IP Port is 514.
On assigning the communication port or the printer port or Ethernet Port as the destination port, the report generation
is directed to that as soon as the incoming call is completed.
If Jeeves is assigned to the COM1, then SMDR Online Report generation cannot be assigned to COM1. This is
because Jeeves has higher priority than SMDR-Internal Online process and SMDR-Internal Online process will not
work when Jeeves is using the COM1 port.
So SE should take care, not to overlap the assignment of same ports to the different processes.
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
Matrix
Start/Stop the Online Report:
Use following command to Start/Abort report generation:
1072-136-Flag
Where,
The ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the report generation in midway (1072-136-0). Once the report generation is
aborted, then it has to be explicitly started with (1072-136-1). This command is issued from the SA mode.
OG Online Report (Assigning destination port and using start/stop command for Online report)
Destination Port:
Use following command to assign destination port for Online SMDR-OG Call Record:
2730-Code
Where
By default, the port assigned is None. This means the On-line printing is disabled.
Port:
2732-IP Address
2733-IP Port
Where,
is directed to the assigned port as and when an OG call is completed.
If Jeeves is assigned to the COM1, then Online report generation cannot be assigned to COM1. This is because
Jeeves has higher priority than SMDR-OG Online process and SMDR-OG Online process will not work. So care
should be taken by the SE not to overlap the assignment of same ports to the different processes.
Start/Stop the Online Report:
Use following command to Start/Abort report generation:
1072-101-Flag
Where,
The ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the report generation in midway (1072-101-0). Once the report generation is
aborted, then it has to be explicitly started with command (1072-101-1). This command is issued from the SA mode.
IC Online Report (Assigning destination port and using start/stop command for Online report)
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer
4 Ethernet Port
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
Matrix
Destination Port:
Use following command to assign destination port for Online SMDR-IC Call Record:
2930-Code
Where,
By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Online printing is disabled.
Port:
2932-IP Address
2933-IP Port
Where,
is directed to that as soon as the incoming call is completed.
If Jeeves is assigned to the COM1, then SMDR Online Report generation cannot be assigned to COM1. This is
because Jeeves has higher priority than SMDR-IC Online process and SMDR-IC Online process will not work when
Jeeves is using the COM1 port.
Start/Stop the Online report:
Use following command to start/abort report generation:
1072-151-Flag
Where,
The ETERNITYprovides a facility to abort the report generation midway (1072-151-0). Once the report generation is
aborted, then it has to be explicitly started with (1072-151-1). This command is issued from the SA mode.
SMDR record format for IC Call Printing-Online
Each SMDR record can be taken with following Parameters, which can be changed as required. The default values
are also given.
Serial Number:
Use following command to program column position for serial number:
8200-Column Position
Where,
Column Position is from 00 to 78.
By default, Column Position is 01.
Use following command to program field length for serial number:
8201-Field Length
Where,
Field Length is from 00 to 78.
By default, Field Length is 04.
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
Matrix
Use following command to program alignment for serial number:
8202-Alignment
Where,
By default, Alignment is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for serial number:
8203-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value.
By default, Fill Character is Space.
Use following command to program reset for serial number:
8204-Reset
Where,
By default, Reset is 1.
Notes:
Serial Number starts from 1 and not 0.
When this field rolls over, it increments the increment counter.
Increment Counter
Use following command to program column position for increment counter:
Where,
By default, Column Position is 00 (This field is not available by default).
By default, Field Length is 1, which is fixed.
Use following command to program reset for increment counter:
8206-Reset
Where,
By default, Reset is 1.
Notes:
Increment Counter starts from A to Z and then rolls over back to A.
Increment Counter increments when Serial Number Counter rolls over.
Property Code
Use following command to program column position for property code:
Where,
By default, Column Position is 00 (This field is not available by default).
Use following command to program field length for property code:
8208-Field Length
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Reset Meaning
1 No Compulsory Reset
2 Reset to 001 every 24 hours (at 00:00 Hrs.)
Reset Meaning
Matrix
Use following command to program property code string for property code:
8209-Property Code String
Notes:
This is a fixed code that appears in each call.
The Enterprise can have its own code.
This code is required by the Property Management System (PMS) when it is catering to more than one PMS
interfaces.
Refer separate Manual for Hotel/Motel Applications for more details about PMS and Hotel applications for this
feature.
Station Number
Use following command to program column position for station number:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for station number:
8211-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for station number:
8212-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for station number:
8213-Fill Character
Where,
Trunk Number
Use following command to program column position for trunk number:
Where,
Use following command to program format type for trunk number:
8215-Format Type
Where,
By default, Format Type is 1.
Notes:
Matrix Format occupies 5 character space.
Check In Format occupies 4 character space.
First Character in Check In Format is X (Fixed). Remaining three characters show the software port number.
However, this will not specify whether the call is made through TWT 125 or E&M 125. Also the channel number will
not be specified in case of call made through T1E1PRI port or BRI port.
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Format Type Meaning
1 Matrix Format
2 Check-In Format
Matrix
Date
Use following command to program column position for date field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for date field:
8217-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for date field:
8218-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for date field:
8219-Fill Character
Where,
By default, Fill Character is Zero.
Use following command to program date format for date field:
8220-Date Format
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Date Format Meaning
01 DD-MM-YY
02 DD/MM/YY
03 DD.MM.YY
04 DD MM YY
05 DDMMYY
06 DD-MM-YYYY
07 DD/MM/YYYY
08 DD.MM.YYYY
09 DD MM YYYY
10 DDMMYYYY
11 MM-DD-YY
12 MM/DD/YY
13 MM.DD.YY
14 MM DD YY
15 MMDDYY
16 YY-MM-DD
17 YY/MM/DD
18 YY.MM.DD
19 YY MM DD
20 YYMMDD
21 YYYY-MM-DD
22 YYYY/MM/DD
Matrix
By default, Date Format is 1.
Use following command to program date fill flag for date field:
8257-Date Fill Flag
Where,
By default, Date Fill Flag is 1 (i.e. single digit in Date, Month and year is printed with prefix 0).
Notes:
Leading Zeros field is applicable for Date, Month and Year i.e. whether the single digit date is to be printed as space-
X or 0-X. For e.g. date = 1 is to be displayed as 1 or 01. In case when leading zeroes are not required, the date,
month and year sub-fields are right aligned and the spaces are filled with character space.
This Date field is not linked to the global flag of Date Format. The global Flag of Date format is used while using
features or in configuration reports but not in PMS. This is because the date format used by the PMS is not the same
as used by the users of the system.
Time
Use following command to program column position for time field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for time field:
8223-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for time field:
8224-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for time field:
8225-Fill Character
23 YYYY.MM.DD
24 YYYY MM DD
25 YYYYMMDD
26 MM-DD
27 MM/DD
28 MM.DD
29 MM DD
30 MMDD
31 DD-MM
32 DD/MM
33 DD.MM
34 DD MM
35 DDMM
Date Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Date Format Meaning
Matrix
Where,
By default, Fill Character is Zero.
Use following command to program time format for time field:
8226-Time Format
Where,
By default, Time Format is 1.
Use following command to program time fill flag for time field:
8258-Time Fill Flag
Where,
By default, Time Fill Flag is 1.
Notes:
Leading Zeros field is applicable for Hours, Minutes and Seconds i.e. whether the single digit hour is to be printed as
space-X or 0-X. For e.g. hour = 1 is to be displayed as 1 or 01. In case when leading zeroes are not required, Date,
Month and Year sub-fields are right aligned and the spaces are filled with character space.
Answer Duration
Use following command to program column position for answer duration field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for answer duration field:
8228-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for answer duration field:
8229-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for answer duration field:
8230-Fill Character
Where,
Use following command to enable/disable the Filler character flag for Answer Duration:
8259-Filler Character Flag for Answer Duration
Where,
Time Format Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Time Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Filler Character Flag for Answer Duration Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Default = Enable, (i.e. the Filler Character will used as programmed)
Use following command to program duration unit for answer duration field:
8231-Duration Unit
Where,
By default, Duration Unit is 4.
Notes:
When Duration Unit = Minutes, rounding to nearest whole number is done. For seconds <= 30, Minute is not
incremented and for seconds > 30, minute is incremented.
Hold Duration
Use following command to program column position for hold duration field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for hold duration field:
8233-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for hold duration field:
8234-Alignment
Where,
By default, Alignment for hold duration field is 2.
Use following command to program fill character for hold duration field:
8235-Fill Character
Where,
Use following command to enable/disable the Filler character flag for Hold Duration:
8260-Filler Character Flag for Hold Duration
Where,
Default = Enable, (i.e. Filler Character will used as programmed)
Speech Duration
Use following command to program column position for speech duration field:
Where,
Duration Unit Meaning
1 HH:MM:SS
2 HHMMSS
3 Minutes
4 Seconds
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Filler Character Flag for Hold Duration Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Use following command to program field length for speech duration field:
8238-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for speech duration field:
8239-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for speech duration field:
8240-Fill Character
Where,
Use following command to enable/disable the Filler character flag for Speech Duration:
8261-Filler Character Flag for Speech Duration
Where,
Default = Enable, (i.e. Filler Character will used as programmed).
Called Number
Use following command to program column position for called number field:
Where,
By default, Column Position is 00. (This field is not available by default)
Use following command to program field length for called number field:
8243-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for called number field:
8244-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program number format for called number field:
8245-Number Format
Where,
By default, Number Format is 1.
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Filler Character for Speech Duration Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Number Format Meaning
1 Continuous
2 Separated
Matrix
Note:
When separated is selected, put - in the called party number of 10 digits. First after three digits and another after six
digits.
Calling Number
Use following command to program column position for calling number field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for calling number field:
8247-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for calling number field:
8248-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program number format for calling number field:
8249-Number Format
Where,
By default, Number Format is 1.
Note:
When separated is selected, put - in the called party number of 10 digits. First after three digits and another after six
digits.
DID Digits
Use following command to program column position for DID digits field:
Where,
By default, Column Position is 00. i.e. this field is not available by default.
Use following command to program field length for DID digits field:
8251-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for DID digits field:
8252-Alignment
Where,
Remarks
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
1 Continuous
2 Separated
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Matrix
Use following command to program column position for remarks field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for remarks field:
8254-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for remarks field:
8255-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to assign default IC SMDR format:
8256
Relevant Topics:
2. Station Message Detail Recording-Storage 825
4. Station Message Detail Recording-Posting 782
IC calls-Online report will look like as shown below:
9 300001 05001 300001 18-04-09 14:27:54 10 0 0 U
10 300002 05001 300001 18-04-09 14:28:15 5 0 5 N
11 300001 03001 300002 18-04-09 14:28:39 5 0 36 N
12 300001 05001 300001 18-04-09 14:29:35 12 0 0 U
13 300002 05001 300001 18-04-09 14:29:51 3 0 12 N
14 300001 05001 300002 18-04-09 14:30:27 26 0 9 N
15 300001 03001 300002 18-04-09 14:31:46 6 0 27 N
Internal calls-Online report will look like as shown below:
IN 05003 3001 04-18-2009 10:20:37 4
IN 3005 3001 04-18-2009 10:20:58 5
IN 3001 3005 04-18-2009 10:21:24 25
IN 05003 3005 04-18-2009 10:22:21 109
IN 300005 300001 04-18-2009 10:36:09 11
IN 300001 300005 04-18-2009 10:38:07 19
IN 05003 300001 04-18-2009 10:38:54 103
IN 35 31 04-18-2009 10:41:46 18
IN 31 35 04-18-2009 10:42:11 11
OG calls-Online report will look like as shown below:
1 3001 03001 2427128 18-04-2009 14:04:02 4 1 3.10 D
2 3001 03001 266831 18-04-2009 14:05:13 4 1 3.10 D
3 3002 03001 2636598 18-04-2009 14:05:56 15 1 3.10 D
4 30000 03001 2630555 18-04-2009 14:07:32 14 1 3.10 D
5 30000 05001 300002 18-04-2009 14:12:00 2 1 3.10 I
6 30000 05001 300001 18-04-2009 14:12:31 21 1 3.10 I
=X=X=
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Matrix
Station Message Detail Recording
Whats this?
The ETERNITY can record the details of Internal, Incoming (IC) and Outgoing (OG) calls made from/to all the
stations. This is called Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR).
The SMDR can be obtained as a report, only if storage of each type of calls is enabled. To get the SMDR user will be
required to set the filter conditions and assign the destination port. The online SMDR is also supported by the
ETERNITY which gives the report immediately after the call is made or received.
The ETERNITY supports third party call cost calculation protocols and the parameters for this can also be set by
configuring the SMDR. Thus the user will be required to program following types of parameters:
SMDR Storage: These parameters are programmed to enable the storing of the IC, OG and Internal calls. Refer
chapter Station Message Detail Recording-Storage.
SMDR Report: These parameters are programmed to assign destination port for getting report of IC, OG and
Internal calls and to get offline report. Refer chapter Station Message Detail Recording-Report.
SMDR Online: These parameters are programmed to assign destination port for getting online report of IC, OG
and Internal calls and to configure the call record format for IC calls. To interface third party call accounting
software (CAS) with ETERNITY, SMDR online mode must be enabled. Refer chapter Station Message Detail
Recording-Online.
SMDR Posting: ETERNITY supports call cost calculation and call record formats as Holidex, Hobic, Hobis, Xiox,
etc. Using call cost calculation, ETERNITY calculates cost of the call and sends the call record to the PMS
(Property Management Software) using protocols, like Holidex, Hobic, Hobis, etc. The parameters for this are
programmed to select the protocol for call accounting software and to configure parameters for OG Handshaking
Protocol and OG call record format. To assign destination port and destination IP Address for OG posting
parameters. Refer chapter Station Message Detail Recording-Posting.
Note: Refer separate Manual for Hotel Applications for more details about PMS.
Relevant Topics:
3. Station Message Detail Recording-Online 769
=X=X=
Matrix
Station Message Detail Recording-Posting
The Station Message Detail Record (SMDR)-Posting feature of ETERNITY is used for interfacing the system with CAS.
SMDR-Posting sends call detail records to CAS for the purpose of call cost calculation.
When ETERNITY is interfaced with a third party Call Accounting Software (CAS) (See Note1) to determine the cost of the
call/s made by the station users, the system uses SMDR-Posting to send to CAS call record details, like number to which
the call was made by the station user, number of the station from which the call was made, the date and time when the
call was made, the duration of the call, metering pulses incurred for the call, etc. On receipt of this information, the CAS
calculates the cost of the call for billing.

As different CAS interfaces support different protocols, the ETERNITY offers the flexibility to send call detail records
using the protocol supported by CAS. SMDR-Posting supports as many as 15 different widely-used CAS protocols such
as, Holidex, Hobic, Micros A, Micros B, Comm One, Call-Inn, Bell-HOBIC, XIOX, RSI and others.
Each posting protocol has its own handshaking protocol and call record format. The Installer/System Engineer can
configure any one of these depending upon the protocol supported by CAS. It is also possible to customize the posting
protocol to match the settings required by the CAS used by the organization.
SMDR-Posting is supported on Serial RS232 Communication Port as well as on TCP/IP Ethernet Port. Thus, the CAS
can be interfaced on either the COM port or the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY. For every outgoing call, call detail record
is posed on the designated port (COM port/Ethernet port)
SMDR-Posting sends outgoing call records only.
SMDR-Posting Protocols
The ETERNITY supports as many as 15 different posting protocols from the system to CAS. The flow of messages
between the ETERNITY and various protocols of CAS Interface is described in the following.
1. Holidex/HOBIS A
This protocol is used by Amstar, CLS, Compass, Compu-solve, Dehan, Encore, Fabco, HIS, Holidex, HRGAS,
InnSolutions, Inn-Star, Lodgemate, Logistix, Omron, Otto Clerk, Reserve 5, Resort Computer, RDP, Springer-Miller
Systems, Star and Stuart.
HOBIS B is used by EECO and New Systems Protocol for transfer of messages from the PBX to CAS.
Case 1: Normal delivery of message to CAS
Case 2: Busy Response from the CAS
The PBX will retransmit an ENQ after 5 seconds until the CAS accepts the message or until 4 NAK responses are
received.
Case 3: No Response from CAS
PBX to CAS CAS to PBX
ENQ >
< ACK
STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC >
< ACK
ENQ >
< NAK (CAS responds but cannot accept at this time)
ENQ > (Wait for 5 seconds)
No Response
Matrix
The PBX will retransmit an ENQ after 5 seconds until CAS responds or until 4 Unsuccessful ENQ responses have been
sent.
Case 4: Negative Response to data transfer
The PBX will make a maximum of 3 attempts to send the message. If the message is still not transmitted successfully, it
will drop the message and proceed to the transmission of the next message.
Case 5: No Response to data transfer
The PBX will try to send the message for a maximum of 3 tries. If the message is not transmitted successfully, the system
will drop the message and proceed for the transmission of the next message. Also, the system will print a System Fault
event and the message.
Link Control Characters
2. HOBIS B
Handshaking Parameters for HOBIS B are as below:
Positive Response form the CAS
ENQ >
< ACK
STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC >
< NAK
ENQ > (Wait for 3 seconds)
STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC > (Maximum of 3 tries)
< ACK
ENQ >
< ACK
STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC > (Wait for 11 seconds)
No Response
ENQ >
< ACK
STX-(tex)-ETX-BCC > (Maximum of 3 tries)
Control Char. Meaning Character ASCII Value
ENQ Used to request the status of the CAS HEX 05
ACK
Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS (Indicates successful reception of
data by the CAS)
HEX 06
NAK
Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS (Unsuccessful reception of data by
the CAS)
HEX 15
STX
This marks the beginning of the data transfer. It also starts the accumulation
of the BCC
HEX 02
ETX
This is the last data character. Marks the end of the data. It is immediately
followed by the BCC.
HEX 03
BCC
This is a 'block check character' used to verify the successful transfer of data
between the systems. BCC is calculated by processing through an
accumulatory by an Exclusive OR operation. The BCC process should start
with the character after the STX character.
Depends on the data
<LF> -message-<CR>
ACK
Matrix
Negative Response form the CAS
The ETERNITY will make 3 tries (default) to send the message for Data Transfer Retry Count - on Negative Response. If
the ACK is still not received from the CAS, the ETERNITY will proceed to the next message.
No Response form the CAS
After sending the message the ETERNITY will wait for the response to data timeout time. If no response is received from
CAS for the sent message, the ETERNITY will log this message in the System Fault Log and look for new message to be
sent to CAS.
3. Hobic
Protocol for transfer of messages from PBX to CAS.
Case 1: Positive Response from the CAS
<LF>-message-<CR>
NAK
<LF>-message-<CR>
NAK
<LF>-message-<CR>
NAK
<LF>-message-<CR>
<LF>-message-<CR> (wait for Response to Data Timeout
(sec), default 5 sec)
(no response)
After 3 seconds, (Data Transfer Retry Timer on No Response),
retransmit
After 3 seconds (Data Transfer Retry Timer on
No Response), retransmit
After 3 seconds (Data Transfer Retry Timer on No Response),
retransmit
ACK Positive Acknowledgement from CAS HEX 06
NAK Negative Acknowledgement from CAS HEX 15
LF This marks the beginning of the message. Start of the Message(Line Feed) HEX 0A
CR End of the Message HEX 0D (Carriage Return)
SOM-(tex)-EOM >
< ACK
Matrix
Case 2: Negative Response from the CAS
will drop the message and proceed to the transmission of the next message.
Case 3: No Response from the CAS
The PBX will wait for 5 seconds to receive response from the CAS. If no response is received from the CAS during this
time period, it will drop the message and proceed to the transmission of the next message.
4. Micros A
Handshaking protocol for Micros A shall be as shown below:
The first field of Text is always 'ac01' which marks the start of text. However, this field is a part of message and not a link
control character.
will drop the message and proceed for the transmission of next message.
SOM-(text)-EOM > (Wait for 3 seconds)
< NAK
< NAK
No Response
ACK
Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS (Indicates successful
reception of data by the CAS)
HEX 06
NAK
Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS (Unsuccessful
reception of data by the CAS)
HEX 15
SOM This marks the beginning of the message. Start of Message. HEX 0A (Line Feed)
EOM End of Message. This marks the end of message. HEX 0D or 0A or 0C (CR or LF or FF)
PBX CAS
Text Plus Carriage Return >
< y
PBX CAS
(Wait for 3 seconds)
< n
PBX CAS
Text plus Carriage Return >
No Response
Matrix
The PBX will wait for 5 seconds and if no response is received from the CAS, it will drop the message and proceed to the
transmission of the next message.
5. Micros B
Handshaking protocol for Micros B is as shown below:
The first field of Text is always 'ac01' which marks the start of text. However, this field is a part of message and not a link
control character.
The PBX will try to send the message for a maximum of 2 tries and if still the message is not transmitted successfully, it
will drop the message and proceed for the transmission of the next message. It will also print a System Fault event and
the message.
The PBX will wait for 5 seconds and if no response is received from the CAS, it will drop the message and proceed to
transmit the next message.
6. Comm One, Call-Inn
No handshaking is required when any of the above protocols is selected.
Control Character Meaning Character ASCII value
ACK
Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS
(Indicates successful reception of data by the CAS)
HEX 79 (ASCII 'y')
NAK
Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS
(Unsuccessful reception of data by the CAS)
HEX 6E (ASCII 'n')
PBX CAS
< ACK
PBX CAS
< NAK
PBX CAS
Text plus Carriage Return >
No Response
Control Character Meaning Character value
ACK
Positive Acknowledgement by the CAS
(Indicates successful reception of data by the CAS)
HEX 06
NAK
Negative Acknowledgement by the CAS
(Unsuccessful reception of data by the CAS)
HEX 15
Matrix
7. RSI-CMS
ETERNITY sends call detail record in following format to RSI-CMS call accounting interface.
STX-Message-EXT
Call accounting interface will not send any response, ACK/NAK, for the messages received.
Call Detail Record Formats
The Call Detail Record formats are given below for various protocols.
HOLIDEX:
Note:
The Called Number will be left aligned.
If the actual dialed number is less than the specified field width, the number will be sent as per the programmed
alignment.
If the dialed number length is greater than the width of the dialed number field, the trailing number digits will be
removed. For example: if the number dialed is 15134036508 (11 digits) and the width of the called number field is 8,
then the first 8 digits will be sent.
HOBIS A:
Parameter Start Column
Number
Field
Length
Alignment Filler/
Character
Remarks
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero Every 6 hours it is cleared to 001. (Starting from
mid-night 00:00:00)
Increment Counter 04 01 NA NA Every 6 hours it is cleared to A. (Starting from
mid-night 00:00:00)
Property Code 06 03 NA NA As per the Programmed String
Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD
Station Number 16 05 RA Space --
Time 22 05 NA Zero HH:MM
Duration 28 04 RA Zero Duration is in Minutes.
Currency Symbol 33 01 NA NA $
Amount 34 06 RA Zero Format is DDD.CC
Called Number 41 12 LA Space Area code, Exchange code and Subscriber
Number separated by dash. Space is sent in
place of Area Code and first dash if area code is
not present.
Call Type Indicator 54 1 NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table programmed
by the SE. The SE should program L = local,
F=International and Space shall be used for long
distance.
Trunk Number 00 NA NA NA --
Units 00 NA NA NA --
Location 00 NA NA NA --
Account Code 00 NA NA NA --
Prefix String (ac01) 00 NA NA NA --
Remarks 00 NA NA NA --
Parameter
Start Column
Number
Field
Length
Alignment
Filler
Character
Remarks
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero --
Increment Counter 04 01 NA NA --
Property Code 06 03 NA Space As per the Programmed String
Date 10 05 NA Zero Date Format is MM/DD
Matrix
NA = Not Applicable, RA = Right Aligned, LA = Left Aligned.
HOBIS B:
Same as HOBIS A, except the handshaking parameters.

HOBIC:
Time 22 05 NA Zero Time Format is HH:MM
Duration 28 04 RA Zero In Minutes. Round up to the nearest whole
minute
Amount 34 06 RA Zero In DDD.CC
Called Number 41 12 LA Space Continuous number. Not separated by dashes.
Call Type Indicator 54 01 NA NA By default, since the table is blank, this field
shall be blank. The SE is expected to program
the call indicator fields as per his requirement.
Parameter
Start Column
Number
Field
Length
Alignment
Filler
Character
Remarks
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero Every 6 hours it is cleared to 001. (Starting from
mid-night 00:00:00)
Increment Counter 04 01 NA NA Every 6 hours it is cleared to A. (Starting from
mid-night 00:00:00)
Duration 28 04 RA Zero Duration is in Minutes.
Called Number 41 15 LA Space Area code, Exchange code and Subscriber
Number separated by dash. Space is sent in
place of Area Code and first dash if area code is
not present.
Call Type Indicator 57 1 NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table
programmed by the SE. The SE should program
L = local, F=International and Space shall be
used for long distance.
Parameter
Start Column
Number
Field
Length
Alignment
Filler
Character
Remarks
Matrix
Note:
By default the link control character EOM will be Carriage Return (CR - HEX 0D), Line Feed (LF - HEX 0A) and Form
Feed (FF - HEX 0C)

BELL HOBIC:
MICROS A:
Parameter
Start Column
Number
Field
Length
Alignment
Filler
Character
Remarks
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero The Serial number wraps to 001 every
midnight.
Increment Counter 04 01 NA NA The Increment Counter wraps to 001
every midnight.
Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD, Date on which call is started
Station Number 16 05 LA Space --
Time 22 05 NA Zero HH:MM, Time on which call is started
Duration 28 04 RA Zero Duration is in Minutes, (rounded to
nearest minute)
Amount 34 06 NA Zero Format is DDD.CC
Called Number 41 08 RA Space Exchange code and Subscriber Number
separated by dash.
No Area Code is provided.
Call Type Indicator 50 1 NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table
programmed by the SE. The SE should
follow the recommendations as given
along with the programming command.
Parameter Start Column Number Field Length Alignment Fill Char. Remarks
Serial Number 00 NA NA NA --
Increment Counter 00 NA NA NA --
Property Code 00 NA NA NA --
Station Number 06 04 RA Zero --
Date 00 NA NA NA --
Time 00 NA NA NA --
Duration 00 NA NA NA --
Amount 11 06 RA Zero Format is DDDDCC
Currency Symbol 00 NA NA NA --
Call Type Indicator 00 00 NA NA --
Called Number 18 12 RA Zero --
Prefix String (ac01) 1 4 NA NA --
Matrix
MICROS B:
Same as MICROS A, except the handshaking parameters.
HILTON:
In this protocol, the ETX is at the column position 61; hence the PBX will send blanks from column position 50 to 60.
XIOX:
Field
Start Column
Number
Field
Length
Alignment
Filler
Character
Remarks
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero The Serial number wraps to 001 every midnight.
Increment Counter 04 01 NA NA This field is not documented but is always
supposed to be an A.
Date 10 05 NA Zero MM/DD, date on which session started
Station Number 16 04 LA Space Whether this field is of four digits or five digits is
not documented. Hence, it is assumed to be of
four digits.
Time 21 05 NA Zero HH:MM, Time on which session started
Duration 27 01 NA NA Duration is in Minutes. What happens to bigger
duration call is now known. We can assume roll
over. Round it to the nearest minute.
Called Number 37 12 RA Space Area Code, Exchange code and Subscriber
Number separated by dash. IF no Area Code is
available, then space is used in place of Area
Code and first dash.
Call Type Indicator 00 NA NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table programmed
by the SE. The SE should follow the
recommendations as given along with the
programming command.
Field
Start Column
Number
Field
Length
Alignment
Filler
Character
Remarks
Serial Number 01 03 RA Zero The Serial number wraps to 001 every midnight.
Increment Counter 04 01 NA NA This field is initialized to B. This field can be
programmed to any other value. However, we
shall not give this programmable within the XIOX
protocol itself. If it is required by the customer to
start his field from say 'C', he shall have to use
customized option.
Parameter Start Column Number Field Length Alignment Fill Char. Remarks
Matrix
Comm One:
Call-Inn:
Station Number 16 04 LA Space Whether this field is of four digits or five digits is
not documented. Hence, it is assumed to be of
four digits.
Duration 27 04 NA NA Duration is in Minutes. What happens to bigger
duration call is now known. We can assume roll
over.
Called Number 40 08 RA Space Exchange code and Subscriber Number
separated by dash. No Area code is sent
Call Type Indicator 49 01 NA NA As per the Call Type Indicator table programmed
by the SE. The SE should follow the
recommendations as given along with the
programming command.
Parameter
Start Column
No.
Field
Length
Format Alignment
Filler Char.
Required?
Filler Char.
(Decimal Value)
Serial Number 00 00 X X X X
Increment Counter 00 01 X X X X
Property Code 00 00 X X X X
Station Number 06 04 Fixed LA Yes 032
Trunk Number 12 05 Matrix Format RA Yes 032
Date 37 08 MM/DD/YY RA Yes 032
Time 48 08 HH:MM:SS RA Yes 032
Duration 57 06 HHMMSS RA Yes 048
Units 00 00 X X X X
Amount 00 00 X X X X
Currency 00 00 X X X X
Call Type Indicator 00 00 X X X X
Location 00 00 X X X X
Called Number 18 18 Continuous LA Yes 032
Account Code 01 03 Fixed RA Yes 048
Remarks 00 00 X X X X
Parameter
Start Column
No.
Field
Length
Format Alignment
Filler Char.
Required?
Filler Char.
(Decimal Value)
Serial Number 00 00 X X X X
Station Number 06 04 Fixed LA Yes 032
Field
Start Column
Number
Field
Length
Alignment
Filler
Character
Remarks
Matrix
RSI-CMS:
Customized SMDR-Posting Protocol
When SMDR-Posting Protocol is selected as 'Customized', then the various parameters of the Call Detail Record format
can also be customized.
When the Call Detail Record format is customized, if there is a gap between two fields, these fields will be 'space' (ASCII-
32).
Setting up CAS Interface
ETERNITY supports CAS Interface on Communication Port (RS232) as well as Ethernet port (TCP/IP). Depending upon
the installation scenario of the ETERNITY in the organisation, the Installer/System Engineer may decide whether to use
the CAS interface on the COM Port or on Ethernet Port of the system.
Setting up CAS Interface on COM Port (RS232)
If the Installer/System Engineer has decided to set up the CAS Interface on the COM Port (Refer Note2) (RS232), the
following functional components are required to make the interface work:
Trunk Number 00 NA X X X X
Date 37 08 MM/DD/YY RA Yes 032
Time 48 05 HH:MM RA Yes 032
Duration 57 08 HH:MM:SS RA Yes 048
Units 00 00 X X X X
Account Code 00 00 X X X X
Parameter
Start Column
No.
Field
Length
Format Alignment
Filler Char.
Required?
Filler Char.
(Decimal Value)
Serial Number 02 04 Fixed RA Yes 048
Station Number 07 05 Fixed RA Yes 032
Trunk Number 13 05 Matrix Format RA Yes 032
Date 38 10 DD/MM/YYYY RA Yes 032
Time 49 08 HH:MM:SS RA Yes 032
Duration 58 05 Minutes RA Yes 048
Units 00 00 X X X X
Account Code 64 03 Fixed RA Yes 048
Parameter
Start Column
No.
Field
Length
Format Alignment
Filler Char.
Required?
Filler Char.
(Decimal Value)
Matrix
A PC with a spare serial/COM port (not supplied by Matrix).
The CAS Software (not supplied by Matrix).
The ETERNITY (supplied by Matrix).
Now, locate a spare serial/COM port on the PC. Connect the COM port the ETERNITY with the COM port of the PC using
the communication cable supplied by Matrix (Refer Note3).
Setting up CAS Interface on Ethernet Port (TCP/IP)
If the Installer/System Engineer has decided to set up the CAS Interface on the Ethernet Port (TCP/IP), the following
functional components are required to make the interface work:
A PC with a spare Ethernet port (not supplied by Matrix) Or any free Ethernet Port of the LAN Switch on which the
CAS server application software is running.
The CAS Software (not supplied by Matrix).
The ETERNITY (supplied by Matrix).
Now, connect the Ethernet port of the Master/CPU card of the ETERNITY with the Ethernet Port of the PC (on which
CAS server application is running) or to one of the Ethernet ports of the LAN Switch, if the CAS server is in the same
LAN.
Programming SMDR-Posting for CAS
Programming the SMDR-Posting feature involves the following steps:
Enabling storage of Outgoing (OG) SMDR. By default, OG SMDR storage is enabled. Refer Station Message Detail
Recording-Storage.
Selecting the appropriate SMDR-Posting protocol to be used.
Selecting the Destination Port for SMDR-Posting.
If SMDR-Posting is through RS232 (i.e. the CAS Interface is to be set up on the COM Port), program the attributes
of the COM port. Refer the chapter Communication Ports to set attributes of the COM port.
If SMDR-Posting is through TCP/IP (i.e. the CAS Interface is to be set up on the Ethernet port), program the
destination IP address and Port.
Refine the Handshake parameters, if required.
Refine Call Detail Record format, if required.
Start SMDR-Posting process.
How to configure the SMDR-Posting parameters for CAS Interface?
To program SMDR Posting Parameters using SE Commands,
Enter SE mode from any extension of ETERNITY.
Dial command 2701-1 to enable storage of SMDR of outgoing calls.
To disable dial 2701-0. If this flag is disabled, the system will not store records of outgoing calls.
By default, storage of outgoing calls is enabled.
Destination Port:
Use following command to assign Destination Port for SMDR-OG Posting:
8330-Code
Where
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
Matrix
By default, the port assigned is Ethernet
E.g. To select COM Port as destination port for SMDR Posting in ETERNITY GE model, dial: 8330-1. Recollect that
ETERNITY GE has only one COM Port.
Use following command to program CAS Server's IP Address (destination IP Address):
Where,
Address is from 000 to 255 for the first 3 Octets and 001 to 254 for the fourth Octet
By default, Destination Server IP Address is 192.168.1.103.
Use following command to program CAS Server IP Port (Destination Port):
8332-Destination IP Port
Where,
Destination IP Port number is from 1024 to 65535.
By default, destination IP Port is 5000.
Use following command to program Listening Port of ETERNITY.
8334-Listening Port
Where,
Listening Port is from 01024 to 65535.
By default, Listening Port is 06000.
Use following command to select appropriate SMDR-OG Posting Protocol:
8301-SMDR-OG Posting Protocol
Where,
SMDR-OG Posting protocols is from 01 to 15.
By default, Posting Protocol is 02 i.e. Matrix.
When the above command is issued, the system will set the default values of the handshaking related parameters and
call record format parameters of the selected Posting Protocol.
The following table shows the default values for Handshaking parameters and Link Control parameters of various OG-
SMDR Posting protocols:
3 Not Used
4 Ethernet
Posting Protocol Protocol Name
01 Blind Send
02 Matrix
03 Holidex
04 HOBIS A
05 HOBIS B
06 HOBIC
07 BELL HOBIC
08 MICROS A
09 MICROS B
10 Hilton
11 Xiox
12 Comm One
13 Call-Inn
14 RSI-CMS
15 Customized
Code Meaning
Matrix
Default values for Handshaking and Link Control parameters of OG-SMDR Posting Protocols:
Use following command to start/stop SMDR Posting Process:
8333-Code
Where,
By default, SMDR Posting is Stop.
Use following command to restore the default OG SMDR-Posting Parameters:
8300
Refining Handshake Parameters
The Installer/System Engineer may need to refine some of the Handshake parameters of the selected SMDR-Posting
protocol, i.e. change the factory default values of the protocol, to match the software requirements of the CAS being used
in the organisation. Refer the above table for default values of each protocol supported by supported by ETERNITY.
OG-SMDR Handshaking Protocol Parameters
Response to ENQ Timeout: The time for which the sender waits for a response to ENQ from the receiver.
ENQ Retry Count - on No Response (to ENQ): The number of times the sender should send ENQ before dropping the
process, in case response is not received for the last message sent.
ENQ Retry Time - on No Response (to ENQ): The time after which the sender should sent the ENQ again, in case the
response is not received for the last message sent.
ENQ Retry Count - on Negative Response (to ENQ): The number of times the sender should send ENQ before
dropping the process, in case of a negative response received for the last message sent.
ENQ Retry Time - on Negative Response (to ENQ): The time after which the sender should sent the ENQ again.
Response to Data Timeout: The time for which the sender waits for a response to data from the receiver.
Data Transfer Retry Count - on No Response (to Data Transfer): The number of times the sender should send ENQ
before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is received against ENQ and there is some problem
while sending the data.
Type Parameter/Protocol 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 a b c D e f g
01 Blind Send 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 000 000 000 000 CR-LF 0
02 Matrix 3 5 3 5 3 3 5 3 5 3 0 000 ACK NAK STX ETX 1
03 Holidex 5 4 5 4 5 11 3 11 3 11 1 ENQ ACK NAK STX ETX 1
04 HOBIS A 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 ENQ ACK NAK STX ETX 1
05 HOBIS B 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 ENQ ACK NAK LF CR 0
06 HOBIC 5 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 0 000 ACK NAK LF CR-LF-FF 0
07 BELL HOBIC 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 3 3 3 1 ENQ ACK NAK STX ETX 1
08 MICROS A 5 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 0 000 y N 000 CR 0
09 MICROS B 5 3 3 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 0 000 ACK NAK 000 CR 0
10 HILTON 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 000 ACK NAK STX ETX 1
11 XIOX 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 0 000 ACK NAK STX ETX 1
12 Comm One 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 000 000 000 000 CR-LF 0
13 Call-Inn 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 000 000 000 000 000 0
14 RSI-CMS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 000 000 000 STX ETX 0
15 Customized 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 000 000 000 000 CR-LF 0
Code Meaning
0 abort
1 Start
Matrix
Data Transfer Retry Time - on No Response (to Data Transfer): The time after which the sender should send the ENQ
again before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is received against ENQ and there is some
problem in sending the data.
Data Transfer Retry Count - on Negative Response (to Data Transfer): The number of times the sender should send
ENQ before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is received against ENQ and there is some
Data Transfer Retry Time - on Negative Response (to Data Transfer): The time after which the sender should sent the
ENQ again before dropping the process. This parameter is used when ACK is received against ENQ and there is some
Use ENQ Character: This flag is to be enabled if the protocol uses ENQUIRE (ENQ) Signal.
ENQ Character: The ASCII character (Single Character) used to send ENQUIRE (ENQ) signal to the receiver.
Acknowledgement (ACK) Character: The ASCII character (Single Character) used by the receiver to acknowledge the
receipt of the Link Control Character/Message Data.
No Acknowledgement (NAK) Character: This parameter signifies the ASCII character (Single Character) used by the
receiver to dis-acknowledge the receipt of the Link Control Character/Message Data.
Start of Packet Character: A string of four ASCII characters used by the receiver to indicate Start of Packet. Each ASCII
character is from 000 to 252. Start of Packet may be of one character only, in which case the string should be completed
by programming remaining three characters with ASCII Null Character (000).
End of Packet Character: A string of four ASCII characters used by the receiver to indicate End of Packet. Each ASCII
character is from 000 to 252. End of Packet may be of one character only, in which case, the string should be completed
by programming the remaining three characters should be programmed as ASCII Null (000).
Use Byte Code Check (BCC): This flag is to be enabled when the protocol uses BCC Signal.
How to configure Handshake Parameters?
To refine the above listed Handshaking parameters using SE Commands,
Enter SE mode.
Dial the following commands for each parameter.
Response to ENQ Timeout
Use following command to set ENQ no response timer:
8302-ENQ No Response Timer
Where,
ENQ No Response Timer is from 01-99 Seconds.
ENQ Retry Count - on No Response
Use following command to set ENQ no response retry count:
8303-ENQ Retry Count
Where,
ENQ Retry Count is from 01-99.
ENQ Retry Time - on No Response (to ENQ)
Use following command to set ENQ no response Retry Timer:
8304-ENQ No Response Retry Timer
Where,
ENQ No Response Retry Timer is from 01-99 Seconds.
ENQ Retry Count - on Negative Response (to ENQ)
Use following command to set ENQ Retry Count:
8305-ENQ Retry Count
Where,
ENQ Retry Count is from 01-99.
Matrix
ENQ Retry Time - on Negative Response (to ENQ)
Use following command to set ENQ Retry Time:
8306-ENQ Retry Time
Where,
ENQ Retry Time is from 01-99 Seconds.
Response to Data Timeout
8307-Response to Data Timeout
Where,
Response to Data Timeout is from 01-99 Seconds.
Data Transfer Retry Count - on No Response (to Data Transfer)
Use following command to set Data Transfer Retry Count:
8308-Data Transfer Retry Count
Where,
Data Transfer Retry Count is from 01-99.
Data Transfer Retry Time - on No Response (to Data Transfer)
Use following command to set Data Transfer Retry Time:
8309-Data Transfer Retry Time
Where,
Data Transfer Retry Time is from 01-99 Seconds.
Data Transfer Retry Count - on Negative Response (to Data Transfer)
Use following command to set Data Transfer Retry Count:
8310-Data Transfer Retry Count
Where,
Data Transfer Retry Count is from 01-99.
Data Transfer Retry Time - on Negative Response (to Data Transfer)
Use following command to set Data Transfer Retry Time:
8311-Data Transfer Retry Time
Where,
Data Transfer Retry Time is from 01-99 Seconds.
Use ENQ Character (if ENQUIRE Signal is used)
Use following command to enable/disable ENQUIRE Signal:
8312-ENQUIRE Signal
Where
ENQ Character
Use following command to set the ENQUIRE character:
8313-ENQUIRE
Where,
ENQUIRE is an ASCII Character from 000 to 252.
Acknowledgement (ACK) Character
Use following command to set the ACK Character:
8314-Set ACK Character
Where,
Set ACK Character is an ASCII Character from 000 to 252.
No Acknowledgement (NAK) Character
Use following command to program the NAK Character:
8315-Set NAK Character
Where,
Set NAK Character is an ASCII Character from 000 to 252.
ENQUIRE Signal Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Start of Packet Character
Use following command to set the Start of Packet string:
8316-Character 1-Character 2-Character 3-Character 4
Where,
Start of Packet is a string of four ASCII Characters. Each ASCII character is from 000 to 252. If the Start of packet
contains only one ASCII character then the string should be completed by programming remaining three characters with
ASCII Null Character (000).
If STX is to be programmed as 'Start of Packet', dial: 8316-002-000-000-000
End of Packet Character
Use following command to program the End of Packet string:
8317-Character 1-Character 2-Character 3-Character 4
Where,
End of Packet is a string of four ASCII Characters. Each ASCII character is from 000 to 252. If the End of packet contains
only one ASCII character then the string should be completed by programming remaining three characters with ASCII
Null Character (000).
If ETX is to be programmed as 'End of Packet', dial: 8317-003-000-000-000

Byte Check Code (BCC)
Use following command to enable/disable BCC Flag:
8318-BCC Flag
Where,
Refining Call Detail Record Format Parameters
The Call Detail Record (CDR) format for the selected SMDR-Posting protocol can also be refined to match the software
requirements of the CAS being used by the organisation.
This may be required if a 'customized' protocol has been selected by the Installer/System Engineer.
How to configure Call Detail Record Format Parameters?
SMDR-OG Online Call Record Format Parameters
The Call Detail Format for OG-SMDR Posting Protocols consists of the following parameters. For each parameter
explained briefly below, you can define the column position, field length (i.e. the number of digits), the alignment (whether
left aligned or right), and the filler characters, wherever required. Refine the following format parameters according to the
type of posting protocol you have selected and the requirement of the CAS being used by the organization.
Serial Number: This is the serial number generated for each call record. Serial numbers are generated from 000 to 999.
When serial number '999' is reached, the numbers roll over to 000.
Note:
When this field rolls over, it increments the increment counter.
Increment Counter: It increments when the serial number counter rolls over. The Increment counter starts from A,
ending at Z, and then roll over back to A.
Property Code: This is the property code required by the CAS used in the organisation. It is a string of alphanumeric
characters and is to be terminated with #*. This field has a maximum of 128 alphanumeric characters.
Note:
The System Engineer must program this string keeping in mind the field length used by the selected/customized
posting protocol.
BCC Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
The default value of the default Property Code String has been set as 'AAA', as at least two known protocols use this
field. The System Engineer can set a different value here and the new value will appear in the CDR record,
irrespective of the protocol type selected.
If Bell Hobic or Hilton has been selected, the System Engineer should program this field as 'AAA'. If Xiox protocol has
been selected, the System Engineer should program this field as HTL. These values are not protocol dependent, but
can be configured by the System Engineer.
Station Number: This is the extension number from which the call was made. The System Engineer can define the
column position and the field length of the Station number in the Call Detail Record.
Trunk Number: This is the number of the trunk from which the call was made.
Note:
The Matrix Format occupies 5 character spaces.
Check-Inn Format occupies 4 character spaces.
The First Character in the Check-Inn Format is X (Fixed). The remaining three characters show the software port
number. However, this does not specify whether the call is made through TWT 125 or E&M 125. Also, the channel
number is not specified in case of call made through T1E1PRI port or BRI port.
Date: The date on which the call was made. The date fill flag is to be enabled.
Notes:
Filler Character field is applicable for Date, Month and Year, i.e. whether the single digit date is to be printed as space-
X or 0-X. For example, date = 1 is to be displayed as '1' or '01'.
Where leading zeroes are not required, the date, month and year sub-fields are right aligned and the spaces are filled
with character 'space'.
The Date field is not linked to the global flag of Date Format. The global Flag of Date format is used, while using
features or in configuration reports but not in CAS. This is because the date format used by the CAS is not the same
as used by the users of the system.
Time: The time when the call was made. The format of the time field and the time fill flag are to be programmed.
Note:
Filler Character field is applicable for Hours, Minutes and Seconds i.e. whether the single digit hour is to be printed as
space-X or 0-X. For example, hour = 1 is to be displayed as '1' or '01'.
In case when leading zeroes are not required, Date, Month and Year sub-fields are right aligned and the spaces are
filled with character 'space'.
Duration: The duration of each call. Program the duration unit and the duration fill flag.
Notes:
When Duration Unit = Minutes, the rounding off to the nearest whole number is done. For seconds <= 30, Minute is
not incremented. For seconds > 30, minute is incremented.
Units: The duration of the call interpreted in terms of units. The number of units depends on the Pulse Rate. The number
of units is derived from the Call Unit = Call duration in seconds/Pulse rate in seconds.
Notes:
When Serial Number rolls over, it increments the increment counter.
Amount: This is the Amount of the call. Program the amount format and the fill flag.
Note:
Filler Character field is applicable for both the sub fields of Amount viz. Rupees/Paisa i.e. whether the single digit
Rupee is to be printed as space-X or 0-X. For example, Rupee = 1 is to be displayed as '1' or '01'. Where leading
zeroes are not required, the Rupee and Paisa are right aligned and the spaces are filled with character 'space'.
Matrix
When Amount Format = Higher Currency, rounding to nearest whole number is done. For Lower Currency <= 50,
Higher Currency is not incremented and for Lower currency > 50, Higher Currency is incremented.
Currency: This is the symbol of the currency in which the Amount is charged. A maximum of 8 ASCII Characters are
allowed.
Note:
Generally, Currency Symbol field prefixes to Amount field. Hence, to comply with various CDR formats, it is
recommended that the column position of Currency Symbol and Amount field should be programmed properly.
The System Engineer can change the Currency Symbol used in the OG-SMDR Format. However, this change will not
be reflected in the Front Desk User Wizard.
Call Type Indicator: This indicates the type of call made, i.e. whether local, international, information, etc.
The System Engineer must program the Number String, the Text String and its Meaning as explained in following table:
The Text String is a string of Alphanumeric characters. Number String is of a maximum 4-digits.
The Number Index is kept as '36' as one of the SMDR-OG Posting protocols, INN-FORM XL supports 24 different types
of calls.
By default, all the entries in this table are blank.
Note:
The System Engineer is advised to program the first 10 entries of this table as below if the selected posting protocol is
Bell Hobic or XIOX.
The System Engineer is advised to program the first 11 entries of this table as below, if the selected posting protocol
is Holidex or Hobic.
Number Index Number String Text String Meaning
01 0 LD Long Distance
02 95 IC Inter Circle
03 197 INFO Information
04 0 INTL International
: : : :
36 2 L Local
01 1 A
02 2 A
03 3 A
04 4 A
05 5 A
06 6 A
07 7 A
08 8 A
09 9 A
10 0 A
: : :
01 1 L
02 2 L
03 3 L
04 4 L
Matrix
The System Engineer is advised to use default (i.e. Blank) table, if the selected protocol is Hilton, as Hilton uses blank
entries in this field which is 12 bytes long.
The Text String should preferably be same as Field Length. If not, the remaining spaces will be filled with character
'Space'. If the Field length is less than the Text string characters, then the number of text characters equal to the Field
length will be printed.
Location: This column indicates the location of the external number to which the call was made.
Note:
The system detects the location from the called location programmed in the Area and Country Code Tables.
Called Location is programmed as one of the parameters of the Area Code Table and Country Code Table.
Depending upon the prefix dialed, the Location string is picked up from either Country Code table or Area Code table.
Called Location is not displayed for Local Calls.
The Called Location parameter in the Country Code table and Area Code table is of 8 Characters.
If the number of characters in the field Called Location is more than Field length then the remaining characters will not
be printed (overlapped by next field).
If the number of characters in the field Called Location is less than Field length then the remaining characters in the
field Called Location will be filled by spaces.
Called Number: This is the external number to which the call was made.

Note:
One way to separate the called party number is by Area Code, Exchange code and Subscriber Number. This is
difficult in an Open numbering system, in which the field size of area code, exchange code are not standard but vary
from two digits to four digits (e.g. the Area code for 'Mumbai' is of 2 digits, whereas that of 'Vadodara' is 3 digits).
In the Closed numbering system, the Area Code, Exchange Code and the Subscriber number are of fixed length. In
such case, including '-' in the called party number is not difficult. Hence, '-' is put in the called party number. The called
party number is assumed to be of 10 digits. The first '-' is placed after four digits, counting from the right. The second
'-'is placed after seven digits, counting from the right. If the dialed number is a local number of 7 digits then the second
'-'is not placed. Also, the remaining three digits are not placed, but filled with character 'space'.
In this case, even if the call is made to a geographical area where open numbering system is followed, '-' is placed in
the same way.
Account Code: This is the Account Code (Refer Note4) using which the call was made.
Remarks: This column indicates the details of the call; whether it was a DISA call, DOSA call, Auto Redial Call, type of
call maturity.
05 5 L
06 6 L
07 7 L
08 8 L
09 9 L
10 0 L
11 0 F International
: : :
Matrix
Fixed Characters are used to indicate the type of call, call details, etc. The notations for the Remarks field are:
Reset Serial Number to 001: The Serial number counter can be reset to 001 after 24 hours (from 00:00 HH:MM) or
every 6 hours. By default, 'No Compulsory Reset' is selected, which means the serial number counter will not be
automatically reset.
Starting Character - Increment Counter: Specify the starting character of the increment counter as the serial number
rolls over, in this field.
Reset Increment Counter: The Increment Counter can be reset to 001 after 24 hours (from 00:00 HH:MM) or every 6
hours. By default, 'No Compulsory Reset' is selected, which means the serial number counter will not be automatically
reset.
Prefix String Required: This flag is to be programmed if the prefix string 0ac1 is to be sent when interfacing with OG-
SMDR Posting Protocol.
Property Code: Enter the property code required by the CAS.
Currency Symbol (Enter Decimal Value): Enter currency symbol to be used.
How to configure Call Detail Record format parameters?
To refine the above listed Call Detail Record format parameters using SE Commands,
Enter SE mode.
Dial the following commands for each parameter.
Serial Number
Use following command to program column position for serial number:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for serial number:
8101-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for serial number:
8102-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for serial number:
8103-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value ranging from 032 to 254.
D DISA Call
A Auto Redial Call
C CPD
K 12KHz/16KHz
R Reversal
D Delay
I Connect
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Matrix
By default, Fill Character is 'Zero'.
Use following command to program reset for serial number:
8104-Reset
Where,
By default, Reset is '1'.
Increment Counter
Use following command to program column position for increment counter:
Where,
By default, Field Length is 1, which is fixed.
Use following command to program reset for increment counter:
8106-Reset
Where,
By default, Reset is '1'.
Use the following command to program starting character for increment counter:
8174-Starting Character
Where,
Starting Character is from A to Z.
By default, Starting Character is 'A'.
Property Code
Use following command to program column position for property code:
Where,
By default, Column Position is 000 (This field is not available by default)
Use following command to program field length for property code:
8108-Field Length
Where,
To program Property Code String:
Use following command to program property code string for property code:
8109-Property Code String
Where,
Property Code String is maximum of 16 characters.
By default, it is 'AAA'.
Station Number
Use following command to program column position for station number:
Where,
Reset Meaning
Reset Meaning
Matrix
Use following command to program field length for station number:
8111-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for station number:
8112-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for station number:
8113-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value and ranging from 032 to 254.
By default, Fill Character is 'Space'.
Trunk Number
Use following command to program column position for trunk number:
Where,
Use following command to program format type for trunk number:
8115-Format Type
Where,
By default, Format Type is '1'.
Date
Use following command to program column position for date field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for date field:
8117-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for date field:
8118-Alignment
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Format Type Meaning
1 Matrix Format
2 Check-Inn Format
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Matrix
Use following command to program fill character for date field:
8119-Fill Character
Where,
Fill Character is 3 digit ASCII value from 032 to 254.
Use following command to program date format for date field:
8120-Date Format
Where,
By default, the date format depends upon the Posting Protocol selected.
Use following command to program date fill flag for date field:
8170-Date Fill Flag
Date Format Meaning
01 DD-MM-YY
02 DD/MM/YY
03 DD.MM.YY
04 DD MM YY
05 DDMMYY
06 DD-MM-YYYY
07 DD/MM/YYYY
08 DD.MM.YYYY
09 DD MM YYYY
10 DDMMYYYY
11 MM-DD-YY
12 MM/DD/YY
13 MM.DD.YY
14 MM DD YY
15 MMDDYY
16 YY-MM-DD
17 YY/MM/DD
18 YY.MM.DD
19 YY MM DD
20 YYMMDD
21 YYYY-MM-DD
22 YYYY/MM/DD
23 YYYY.MM.DD
24 YYYY MM DD
25 YYYYMMDD
26 MM-DD
27 MM/DD
28 MM.DD
29 MM DD
30 MMDD
31 DD-MM
32 DD/MM
33 DD.MM
34 DD MM
35 DDMM
Matrix
Where,
By default, Date Fill Flag is '1'.
Time
Use following command to program column position for time field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for time field:
8123-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for time field:
8124-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for time field:
8125-Fill Character
Where,
Use following command to program time format for time field:
8126-Time Format
Where,
By default, Time format is 1.
Use following command to program time fill flag for time field:
8171-Time Fill Flag
Where,
By default, Time Fill Flag is '1'.
Duration
Use following command to program column position for duration field:
Where,
Date Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Time Format Meaning
1 HH:MM:SS
2 HH:MM
Time Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Use following command to program field length for duration field:
8128-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for duration field:
8129-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for duration field:
8130-Fill Character
Where,
Use following command to program duration unit for duration field:
8131-Duration Unit
Where,
By default, Duration Unit is '4'.
Use following command to program duration fill flag for duration field:
8172-Duration Fill Flag
Where,
By default, Duration Fill Flag is '1'.
Units
Use following command to program column position for units field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for units field:
8133-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for units field:
8134-Alignment
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Duration Unit Meaning
1 HH:MM:SS
2 HHMMSS
3 Minutes
4 Seconds
Duration Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for units field:
8135-Fill Character
Where,
Amount
Use following command to program column position for amount field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for amount field:
8137-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for amounts field:
8138-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for amounts field:
8139-Fill Character
Where,
Use following command to program amount format for amount field:
8140-Amount Format
Where,
By default, Amount Format is '3'.
Use following command to program the amount fill flag for amount field:
8173-Amount Fill Flag
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Amount Format Meaning
1 Higher Currency
2 Lower Currency
3 Spoken Currency with decimal point
4 Spoken Currency without decimal point
Amount Fill Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
By default, Amount Fill Flag '1'.
Currency Symbol
Use following command to program column position for currency symbol field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for currency symbol field:
8142-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for currency symbol field:
8143-Alignment
Where,
By default, Alignment is '2'.
Use following command to program fill character for currency symbol field:
8144-Fill Character
Where,
Use following command to program symbol for currency symbol field:
8145-Character 1-Character 2-Character 3-Character 4-Character 5-Character 6-Character 7-Character 8
Where,
Character 1 to Character 8 shall be in 3 digit Decimal values.
Decimal values 000 and 032 to 255 are allowed.
If currency string/symbol to be used is fewer than 8 characters, terminate the command with #*.
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Matrix
Refer following table to know Decimal value of corresponding currency character:
Call Type Indicator
Use following command to program column position for call type indicator field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for call type indicator field:
8147-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for call type indicator field:
8148-Alignment
Decimal ASCII Decimal ASCII Decimal ASCII Decimal ASCII Decimal ASCII
000 Null 076 L 121 y 166 211
032 Space 077 M 122 z 167 212
033 ! 078 N 123 { 168 213
034 " 079 O 124 | 169 214
035 # 080 P 125 } 170 215
036 $ 081 Q 126 ~ 171 216
037 % 082 R 127 <DEL> 172 217
038 & 083 S 128 173 - 218
039 ' 084 T 129 174 219
040 ( 085 U 130 175 220
041 ) 086 V 131 176 221
042 * 087 W 132 177 222
043 + 088 X 133 178 223
044 , 089 Y 134 179 224
045 - 090 Z 135 180 225
046 . 091 [ 136 181 226
047 / 092 \ 137 182 227
048 0 093 ] 138 183 228
049 1 094 ^ 139 184 229
050 2 095 _ 140 185 230
051 3 096 ` 141 186 231
052 4 097 a 142 187 232
053 5 098 b 143 188 233
054 6 099 c 144 189 234
055 7 100 d 145 190 235
056 8 101 e 146 191 236
057 9 102 f 147 192 237
058 : 103 g 148 193 238
059 ; 104 h 149 194 239
060 < 105 i 150 195 240
061 = 106 j 151 196 241
062 > 107 k 152 197 242
063 ? 108 l 153 198 243
064 @ 109 m 154 199 244
065 A 110 n 155 200 245
066 B 111 o 156 201 246
067 C 112 p 157 202 247
068 D 113 q 158 203 248
069 E 114 r 159 204 249
070 F 115 s 160 205 250
071 G 116 t 161 206 251
072 H 117 u 162 207 252
073 I 118 v 163 208 253
074 J 119 w 164 209 254
075 K 120 x 165 210 255
ASCII Character Table
Matrix
Where,
Use following command to program number string for call type indicator field:
8149-Number Index-1-Number String
Where,
Number String is of four digits. Terminate with #* if the string is less than four digits.
Use following command to program text string for call type indicator field:
8149-Number Index-2-Text String
Where,
Text String is a string of Alphanumeric characters. Terminate with #* if the string is less than four digits.
Keep the Text String same as the Field Length.
By default, all the entries in this table are blank.

Called Location
Use following command to program column position for called location field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for called location field:
8151-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for called location field:
8152-Alignment
Where,
Called Number
Use following command to program column position for called number field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for called number field:
8155-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for called number field:
8156-Alignment
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Matrix
Where,
Use following command to program number format for called number field:
8157-Number Format
Where,
By default, Number Format is '1'.
Account Code
Use following command to program column position for account code field:
Where,
Use following command to program field length for account code field:
8159-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for account code field:
8160-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to program fill character for account code field:
8161-Fill Character
Where,
Prefix String (ac01)
Use following command to program prefix string (ac01):
8165-Code
Where,
By default, Code is '0'.
Remarks
Use following command to program column position for remarks field:
Where,
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
1 Continuous
2 Separated
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Code Meaning
0 No
1 Yes
Matrix
Use following command to program field length for remarks field:
8167-Field Length
Where,
Use following command to program alignment for remarks field:
8168-Alignment
Where,
Use following command to assign default CDR format:
8169
Programming Area Code and Country Code
Country code and Area Code must be programmed so that a call can be placed to a particular location in a particular
country. Country and Area Codes need to be programmed also for the purpose of calculating cost of calls. Refer chapter
Use following command to program a country code:
8321-Index-Country Code-#*
Where,
Country Code is a number string of maximum of 4 digits, terminate with #* if less than four digits.
Use following command to program a location in country code:
8322-Index-Country Name-#*
Where,
Country Name is of 8 characters; terminate the command string with #*, if the name is less than 8 characters.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Alignment Meaning
1 Left Alignment
2 Right Alignment
Index Country Code
001 041
002 051
: :
200 096
Index Country Name
001 India
002 Kenya
: :
200 UAE
Matrix
Station Message Detail Recording-Report
What's this?
The ETERNITY can generate report for the calls which were stored in the buffer when it is required by the user. This
is called SMDR Reports feature.
To get the online report SE should assign the destination port for IC calls, Internal calls and OG calls. SE should
ensure that the storage flag is enabled to store the calls in the buffer of the system. Refer chapter Station Message
Detail Recording-Storage to enable the storage of calls.
The ETERNITY supports to change the default filters for getting the SMDR Report e.g. report for the calls with specific
call duration or for the calls only for specific originating stations or for the calls with specific dates on which the calls
were made or received etc. The SA can configure these filters as per user's requirement.
The ETERNITY provides flexibility to user, to get the report using following options:
Manual: Getting the report when the command is issued by SA.
Scheduled: Getting the report at preprogrammed day, date and time by SA.
Refer the sample reports at the end of chapter for IC, OG and Internal calls with information about called number,
calling number, date of call, time of call, port or trunk number on which call was established and speech duration, etc.

How to program?
Incoming calls report:
Destination Port:
Use following command to assign a destination port for SMDR-IC Report:
2931-Code
Where,
Port:
2934-IP Address
2935-IP Port
Where,
Notes:
is directed to the port assigned.
If Jeeves is assigned to the COM1, then Report generation cannot be assigned to COM1. This is because Jeeves has
higher priority than SMDR-IC Report printing process and SMDR-IC Report printing process will not work. So care
should be taken by the SE not to overlap the assignment of same ports to the different processes.
By default, the port assigned is None. This means the Report printing is disabled.
Filter Commands:
The SA can program the filters as per user's need to generate a customized report. These commands enable the user to
select the type of call reports generated viz. Normal calls, DID calls, Unanswered calls, Long Speech Duration calls. It is
also possible to generate call reports for a range of stations (SLT, DKP), different type of trunks (TWT, BRI, T1E1PRI
etc.).
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
Filter Commands
To set filter to print all normal calls 1072-152-Flag
Matrix
Where,
Seconds = 000-255.
TWT = 000-128.
BRI = 00-32.
T1E1PRI = 0-8.
E&M = 000-128.
Mobile = 00-32.
SIP = 00-32.
Date = 01-31
Month = 01-12.
Year = 0000-9999.
External List = 00-32.
For example, for TWT filter, range can be 000 to 128, as explained below:
000-000: The report of calls will be printed which are made from any TWT trunk port.
XXX-XXX: Calls will be printed from XXX-XXX. TWT number, where XXX = 001 to 128.
000-128: Error tone (Not valid).
Same explanation is true for other types of port like BRI, T1E1PRI, E&M and Mobile.
For External Number List, range can be 00-32. Where, if 00 is set, no external list is checked while processing the call.
Default the Filters:
Use following command to default the report generation filters:
1072-170
Calls made by all stations, all TWT, All BRI, All E&M and All T1E1PRI are printed.
The Date range is 01-05-2005 to 31-12-2100.
The Time range is 00:00 to 23:59.
To set filter to print all DID calls 1072-153-Flag
To set filter to print all Unanswered calls 1072-154-Flag
To set filter to print all DID Unanswered calls 1072-155-Flag
To set filter to print all DISA calls 1072-156-Flag
To set filter to print all calls with specific call duration 1072-157-Seconds
To set filter to print all DID calls 1072-153-Flag
To set filter to print all unanswered calls 1072-154-Flag
To set filter to print all DID unanswered calls 1072-155-Flag
To set filter to print all DISA calls 1072-156-Flag
To set filter to print all calls with specific call duration 1072-157-Seconds
To set filter to print all call with specific Unanswered duration 1072-158-Seconds
To set filter to print all calls with specific hold duration 1072-159-Seconds
To set filter to print all IC calls received by the station 1072-160-Flexible No.-Flexible No.
To set filter to print all IC calls received on the TWT 1072-161-TWT-TWT
To set filter to print all IC calls received on the BRI 1072-162-BRI-BRI
To set filter to print all IC calls received on the T1E1PRI 1072-163-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI
To set filter to print all IC calls received on the E&M 1072-164-E&M-E&M
To set filter to print all IC calls received on Mobile 1072-165-Mobile-Mobile
To set filter to print all IC calls received on SIP 1072-166-SIP-SIP
To set filter to print all IC calls received on Magneto 1072-116-Magento-Magneto
To set filter to print all IC calls on or from date 1072-167-DD-MM-YYYY-DD-MM-YYYY
To set filter to print all IC calls from numbers matching in a external list 1072-168-HH-MM-HH-MM
To set filter to print all IC calls from numbers matching in a external list 1072-169-External List
Flag Meaning
0 Don't store
1 Store
Filter Commands
Matrix
The External Number List is 02.
By default, All calls are printed as per the set filters.
Manual Report Generation:
SA should issue an explicit start command, to initiate the report generation.
Use following command to start/abort report generation:
1072-171-Flag
Where,
By default, the Flag is 0.
Once the Start command is issued, the report generation stops only after the complete report based on the filters set is
generated. ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the report generation in midway (1072-171-0). Once the report
generation is aborted, then it has to be explicitly started (1072-171-1) if the report is required again.
The Scheduled Report Generation:
SA can issue the command to start report, automatically at a particular time (Daily) or at a particular time on a particular
day of the week (Weekly) or at a particular time on a particular date of a month (Monthly).
Once these parameters are programmed and the report generation is enabled, there is no need of any initiation of the
command.
Enable/disable Scheduled Report:
Use following command to enable/disable the generation of daily/weekly/monthly reports:
1072-172-Flag
Where,
By default, the generation report is disabled
Daily Reports:
Use following command to program the time for daily scheduled reports:
1072-173-HH-MM
Where,
HH and MM is in 24 hour format.
By default, HH:MM is 18:00.
Weekly Reports:
Use following command to program the day and time for weekly scheduled reports:
1072-174-Day-HH-MM
Where,
Day is from 1 to 7 (1 is Sunday, 2 is Monday and 7 is Saturday).
By default, HH:MM is 10:00 and Day is 2.
Monthly Reports:
Use following command to program the date and time for monthly scheduled reports:
1072-175-Date-HH-MM
Where,
By default, HH:MM is 10:00 and Date is 01.
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
Flag Meaning
0 Disable Schedule Report Generation
1 Enable Daily Scheduled Report
2 Enable Weekly Scheduled Report
3 Enable Monthly Scheduled Report
Matrix
Note:
ETERNITY provides a facility to Abort the scheduled report generation midway (119-171-0). This aborts the current
report generation but does not affect any other scheduled report generation. The abortion of a report does not affect
its consecutive schedule. That is if a daily report is aborted on Monday, it does affect the report generation schedule
of Tuesday.
Internal Calls Report
Destination Port
Use following command to assign destination port for Online SMDR-Internal Report:
2831-Code
Where,
Port:
2834-IP Address
2835-IP Port
Where,
If Jeeves is assigned to the COM1, then SMDR Report generation cannot be assigned to COM1. This is because
Jeeves has higher priority than SMDR-Internal Report generation process and SMDR-Internal Report process will not
work.
Filter Commands:
Where,
Seconds = 000-999.
By default, Type is 3 and seconds is 000.
SA should issue an explicit start command to initiate the report generation.
Use following command to start/abort Report generation:
1072-141-Flag
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
Filter Command
To set filter to print all internal calls from a station. 1072-137-Flexible No.-Flexible No.-Type
To set filter to print all internal calls with duration greater than specified. 1072-138-Seconds
Type Meaning
0 Do not print the calls made to or from the station.
1 Print calls made to this station.
2 Print calls made from this station.
3 Print all calls made to/from this station.
Matrix
Where,
By default, flag is 0.
Once the start command is issued, the report generation stops only after the complete report based on the filters set is
Scheduled Report Generation:
SA should issue the command to start the report, automatically at a particular time (Daily) or at a particular time on a
particular day of the week (Weekly) or at a particular time on a particular date of a month (Monthly).
Once these parameters are programmed and the report generation is enabled, there is no need of any initiation
command.
Use following command to enable/disable the generation of daily/weekly/monthly scheduled reports: 1072-142-Flag
Where,
By default, the generation report is disabled.
Daily Reports:
1072-143-HH-MM
Where,
By default, HH:MM is 18:00
Weekly Reports:
1072-144-Day-HH-MM
Where,
Monthly Reports:
1072-145-Date-HH-MM
Where,
By Default, HH:MM is 10:00 and Date is 01.
Note:
ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the scheduled report generation in midway (1072-141-0). This aborts the
current report generation but does not affect any other scheduled report generation. The abortion of a report does not
affect its consecutive schedule. That is if a daily report is aborted on Monday, it does affect the report generation
schedule of Tuesday.
OG Calls Report
Destination Port
Use following command to assign a destination port for SMDR-OG Report:
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
Flag Meaning
Matrix
2731-Code
Where,
Port:
2734-IP Address
2735-IP Port
Where,
Notes:
If Jeeves is assigned to the COM1, then SMDR Report generation cannot be assigned to COM1. This is because
Jeeves has higher priority than SMDR-Internal Report generation process and SMDR-Internal Report process will not
work. So care should be taken by the SE not to overlap the assignment of same ports to the different processes.
Filter Commands:
SA can configure various filters to generate a report as per the user's requirement. It is possible to program the following
filters:
Code Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
Filter Commands
To set filter to print all calls terminated on TWT 1072-103-TWT-TWT
To set filter to print all calls terminated on BRI 1072-104-BRI-BRI
To set filter to print all calls terminated on T1E1PRI 1072-105- T1E1PRI - T1E1PRI
To set filter to print all calls terminated on E&M 1072-106-E&M-E&M
To set filter to print all calls terminated on Mobile 1072-107-Mobile-Mobile
To set filter to print outgoing calls terminated on SIP 1072-108-SIP-SIP
To set filter to print all calls terminated on Magneto 1072-179-Magneto-Magneto
To set filter to print outgoing calls for department billing group 1072-109-Group No.-Group No.
To set filter to print all calls made on or from date 1072-110-DD-MM-YYYY-DD-MM-YYYY
To set filter to print all calls made at or in between a time 1072-111-HH-MM-HH-MM
To set filter to print all calls of numbers matching in an external number list 1072-112-External Number List
To set filter to print all calls duration more than specified 1072-113-Seconds
To set filter to print all calls with units more than specified 1072-114-Units
To set filter to print all calls made using Account Code 1072-115-Account Code-Account Code
To set filter to print all calls originated on stations 1072-102-Flexible No.-Flexible No.
To set filter to print calls originated on TWT 1072 - 183 - TWT - TWT
To set filter to print calls originated on BRI 1072 - 184- BRI- BRI
To set filter to print calls originated on T1E1PRI 1072 - 185 - T1E1PRI - T1E1PRI
To set filter to print calls originated on E&M 1072 - 186 - E&M- E&M
To set filter to print calls originated on Mobile 1072 - 187 - Mobile- Mobile
To set filter to print calls originated on SIP 1072 - 188 - SIP- SIP
To set filter to print calls originated on Magneto 1072- 189-Magneto - Magneto
Matrix
Where,
Seconds = 000-999.
External List = 01-32.
TWT = 001-128.
BRI = 01-32.
T1E1PRI = 1-8.
E&M = 001-128.
Mobile = 00-16.
SIP = 00-32.
Date = 01-31.
Month = 01-12.
Year = 0000-9999.
Unit = 0000-9999.
Account Code = 0000-9999.
For Account Code filter, range can be set as various options as explained:
0000-0000: In report, all calls will be printed which doesn't consist of account code and calls with account codes will not
be printed.
XXXX-XXXX: In report, calls with account code XXXX to XXXX will be printed, where XXXX = 0001 to 9999.
0000-XXXX: In report, all calls will be printed which are without account code and which have account code upto XXXX
where, XXXX=0001 to 9999. Thus, if XXXX = 0020, then in report all calls without account code and with account code
0001 to 0020 will be printed.
For TWT filter, range can be 000 to 128, as explained below:
000-000: Valid range. I report calls will be printed which are made from any TWT trunk port.
XXX-XXX: Calls will be printed from XXX-XXX. TWT number, where XXX = 001 to 128.
000-128: Error tone (Not valid). Same explanation is true for other types of port like BRI, T1E1PRI, E&M and Mobile.
For External Number List, range can be 00-32. Where, if 00 is set, no external list is checked.
How to set filter to print the calls department bill group wise from SA mode?
Use following command to set filter to print outgoing calls for department billing group
1072-109-Department Bill Group-Department Bill Group
Where,
Department Bill Group is from 00 to 99.
If command is used for more than one group, then the calls of first department billing group will be printed followed by
next department group.
By default, first Department Bill Group is '00' and second Department Bill Group is '99'.
Default the Filters:
Use following command to default the report generation filters:
1072-120
By default, All calls are printed as per the set filters.
Calls made by all stations, all TWT, ALL BRI, ALL E&M and All T1E1PRI are printed.
The Date range = 01-05-2005 to 31-12-2100.
The Time range = 00:00-23:59.
The External Number list = 02.
Units = 0000.
Seconds = 000.
Please note that the date format depends on the date format of the system.
Deletion of calls made on or from a station:
The ETERNITY supports Deletion of SMDR Calls (From SA Mode) made from a particular station or a range of stations.
Use the following Command to delete the calls made by a station or a range of stations:
1072-131-Flexible Number-Flexible Number
Deletion of calls made on or from a date:
Use the following Command to delete the calls made on a Date or from a Date:
1072-132-DD-MM-YYYY-DD-MM-YYYY (The format of the date depends on the date format of the system)
Matrix
SA should issue an explicit start command to initiate the report generation.
Use following command to start/abort Report generation:
1072-121-Flag
Where,
Once the start command is issued, the report generation stops only after the complete report based on the filters set is
Scheduled Report Generation:
SA should issue the command to start the report, automatically at a particular time (Daily) or at a particular time on a
particular day of the week (Weekly) or at a particular time on a particular date of a month (Monthly).
Once these parameters are programmed and the report generation is enabled, there is no need of any initiation
command.
Use following command to enable/disable the generation of daily/weekly/monthly scheduled reports:
1072-122-Flag
Where,
By default, the generation report is disabled.
Daily Reports:
1072-123-HH-MM
Where,
By default, HH:MM is 18:00.
Weekly Reports:
1072-124-Day-HH-MM
Where,
Monthly Reports:
1072-125-Date-HH-MM
Where,
By Default, HH:MM is 10:00 and Date is 01.
Note:
ETERNITY provides a facility to abort the scheduled report generation in midway (1072-121-0). This aborts the
current report generation but does not affect any other scheduled report generation. The abortion of a report does not
Flag Meaning
0 Abort
1 Start
Flag Meaning
Matrix
affect its consecutive schedule. That is if a daily report is aborted on Monday, it does affect the report generation
schedule of Tuesday.
Relevant Topics:
The Offline report for Incoming calls looks like shown below:

SMDR INCOMING CALLS REPORT AS ON 14-04-2009(Tue) AT 17:25
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
STN : 000000 To 999999 TWT : 001 To 128 N : Y ANS DUR : 000
DATE : 01-05-2005 To 31-12-2100 BRI : 001 To 032 D : Y HLD DUR : 000
TIME : 00:00 To 23:59 DS1 : 001 To 008 U : Y SPCH DUR : 000
NUM LIST : 02 E&M : 001 To 128 DU : Y
MOB : 001 To 032 I : Y
Mag : 001 To 128
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SrN CallingNo TRK STN DATE TIME Ans Hld Spch R
Dur Dur Dur
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 05001 25-02-09 20:24:51 1 0 0 U
2 +919909940883 25001 300002 25-02-09 20:47:31 2 0 0 U
3 +919909940883 25001 25-02-09 20:48:35 4 0 0 U
4 +919909940883 25001 25-02-09 21:21:25 3 0 0 U
5 +919909940883 25001 25-02-09 21:22:07 1 0 0 U
6 +919909940883 25001 25-02-09 21:22:29 3 0 0 U
7 +919909940883 25001 200001 26-02-09 10:30:19 46 0 0 U
8 +919909940883 25001 26-02-09 10:31:38 5 0 0 U
9 +919909940883 25001 26-02-09 10:32:11 3 0 0 U
10 +919909940883 25001 26-02-09 10:33:29 3 0 0 U
11 +919909940883 25001 26-02-09 10:34:16 2 0 0 U
12 +919909940883 25001 26-02-09 10:35:37 1 0 0 U
13 +919909940883 25001 26-02-09 10:36:05 1 0 0 U
14 +919898906335 25002 26-02-09 10:49:05 2 0 0 U
15 +919898906335 25002 26-02-09 10:50:29 1 0 0 U
16 +919898906335 25002 26-02-09 10:51:29 4 0 0 U
17 +919898906335 25002 26-02-09 10:52:21 2 0 0 U
18 +919898906335 25002 26-02-09 10:54:33 1 0 0 U
19 +919898906335 25002 26-02-09 10:55:50 1 0 0 U
20 +919898906335 25002 26-02-09 10:56:10 5 0 0 U
21 +919898906335 25001 26-02-09 11:01:17 2 0 0 U
22 +919898906335 25001 26-02-09 11:04:08 4 0 0 U
23 +919898906335 25001 26-02-09 11:06:59 2 0 0 U
24 +919898906335 25001 26-02-09 11:07:49 1 0 0 U
25 +919898906335 25001 26-02-09 11:09:12 4 0 0 U
26 07930260008 25008 200001 27-02-09 13:37:07 45 0 0 U
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL CALLS : 26
TOTAL ANS DUR : 149 TOTAL HOLD DUR : 0 TOTAL SPCH DUR : 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R(CALL TYPE):N=Normal, D=DID, U:UnAns, DU=DID-UnAns, I=DISA, T=Transit Q=Qsig
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Matrix
The Offline report for Internal calls looks like shown below:

SMDR INTERNAL CALLS REPORT AS ON 14-04-2009(Tue) AT 17:35
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SrN CALLING STATION CALLED STATION DATE TIME DUR
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 30000 3003 24-02-2009 18:05:56 9
2 30000 3003 24-02-2009 18:59:22 2
3 30000 3003 24-02-2009 19:52:44 8
4 30000 3003 24-02-2009 19:52:59 6
5 3003 30000 24-02-2009 19:53:13 3
6 3003 30000 24-02-2009 19:54:22 3
7 30000 30000 24-02-2009 19:55:26 4
8 30000 30000 24-02-2009 19:55:34 2
9 3003 30000 24-02-2009 19:55:40 2
10 3003 30000 24-02-2009 19:56:07 3
11 3003 30000 24-02-2009 19:57:26 6
12 30000 30000 24-02-2009 19:57:39 13
13 30000 3003 24-02-2009 19:57:53 6
14 30000 3003 24-02-2009 19:58:09 9
15 30000 3003 24-02-2009 19:58:34 3
16 30000 30000 24-02-2009 19:58:31 13
17 30000 3003 24-02-2009 19:58:53 7
18 30000 30000 24-02-2009 19:58:49 18
19 30000 30000 24-02-2009 19:59:27 13
20 3003 2002 25-02-2009 20:58:07 41
21 30000 2026 27-02-2009 10:08:25 36
22 30000 2026 27-02-2009 11:31:43 25
23 30000 2027 27-02-2009 11:32:18 131
24 30000 2028 28-02-2009 16:17:32 16
25 30000 2030 28-02-2009 16:22:21 6
26 30000 2031 28-02-2009 16:22:29 15
27 30000 2032 28-02-2009 16:24:12 7
28 30000 2033 28-02-2009 16:24:21 4
29 30000 2036 28-02-2009 16:26:00 8
30 30000 2037 28-02-2009 16:26:11 3
31 30000 2028 28-02-2009 16:37:24 5
32 30000 2029 28-02-2009 16:39:35 12
33 30000 2031 28-02-2009 16:40:21 4
34 30000 2032 28-02-2009 16:40:31 13
35 30000 2034 28-02-2009 16:43:56 3
36 30000 2027 28-02-2009 17:09:09 3
37 30000 2028 28-02-2009 17:09:21 22
38 30000 2030 28-02-2009 17:09:50 19
39 30000 2034 28-02-2009 17:12:05 7
40 30000 2036 28-02-2009 17:13:31 5
41 30000 2038 28-02-2009 17:13:43 4
42 30000 2027 28-02-2009 17:15:22 3
43 30000 2029 28-02-2009 17:15:36 5
44 30000 2031 28-02-2009 17:15:50 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Matrix
The Off line report for Outgoing calls looks like shown below:

SMDR OUTGOING CALLS REPORT AS ON 14-04-2009(Tue) AT 12:03
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Originated on Terminated on
STN : 000000 To 999999 TWT : 001 To 128 TWT : 001 To 128
DATE : 01-05-2005 To 31-12-2100 BRI : 001 To 032 BRI : 001 To 032
TIME : 00:00 To 23:59 DS1 : 001 To 008 DS1 : 001 To 008
NUM LIST : 02 E&M : 001 To 128 E&M : 001 To 128
DEPT GROUP : 00 To 00 MOB : 001 To 032 MOB : 001 To 032
DUR(sec) : 000 SIP : 001 To 032 SIP : 001 To 032
UNITS : 0000 MAG : 001 To 128 MAG : 001 To 128
ACCOUNT No : 000 To 000
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SrN STN TRK CalledNo DATE TIME DUR UNIT AMOUNT R
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 3001 25001 9898906335 03-03-2009 15:32:20 32 1 3.10 I
2 3001 25002 9909940881 03-03-2009 15:33:48 90 1 3.10 I
3 3001 25001 9909940881 03-03-2009 15:36:23 48 1 3.10 I
4 3001 25011 9909940881 04-03-2009 15:42:45 14 1 3.10 I
5 3001 25011 9909940881 04-03-2009 16:10:51 7 1 3.10 I
6 3001 25011 9909940881 04-03-2009 16:11:33 32 1 3.10 I
7 3001 25011 9909940881 04-03-2009 16:27:32 26 1 3.10 I
8 3001 25011 9909940881 04-03-2009 17:26:52 22 1 3.10 I
9 3001 25011 9909940881 04-03-2009 17:27:59 23 1 3.10 I
10 3001 03001 1235 09-03-2009 14:22:17 152 1 3.10 D
11 3001 25001 9725005868# 17-03-2009 14:06:20 9 1 3.10 I
12 3001 05001 23 24-03-2009 16:54:13 60 1 3.10 I
13 3001 05001 1 24-03-2009 17:09:49 248 2 4.20 I
14 3001 05001 1 24-03-2009 17:08:04 360 2 4.20 I
15 2512 25009 9824775520 31-03-2009 13:33:22 7 1 3.10 OI
16 2512 25017 9824775520 31-03-2009 18:31:51 7 1 3.10 OI
17 2512 25017 9824775520 31-03-2009 19:39:11 7 1 3.10 OI
18 3001 05001 3001 06-04-2009 18:36:01 2 0 0.00 I
19 3001 05001 113001 07-04-2009 09:38:02 2 0 0.00 I
20 3001 05001 113001 07-04-2009 09:39:05 2 0 0.00 I
21 3001 05001 113001 07-04-2009 09:39:21 2 0 0.00 I
22 3001 05001 113001 07-04-2009 09:40:41 3 0 0.00 I
23 3001 05001 113001 07-04-2009 09:42:42 9 0 0.00 I
24 3001 05001 113001 07-04-2009 09:44:09 1 0 0.00 I
25 3001 05001 113004 09-04-2009 12:20:02 1 0 0.00 I
26 3001 05002 1235 09-04-2009 12:32:59 3 1 3.10 I
27 05002 05001 113004# 09-04-2009 12:39:08 2 1 3.10 TI
28 05002 05001 113004# 09-04-2009 12:44:38 3 1 3.10 TI
29 05002 05001 113004# 09-04-2009 12:54:36 3 1 3.10 TI
30 05002 05001 113004# 09-04-2009 14:13:48 3 1 3.10 TI
31 05002 05001 113004# 09-04-2009 14:29:14 1 1 3.10 TI
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL CALLS : 31
TOTAL DUR : 1181 TOTAL UNITS : 25 TOTAL AMOUNT : 73.50
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TRK:03=TWT,04=BRI,05=DS1,06=E&M,25=Mobile,26=SIP,29=Magneto; STN:01=SLT,02=DKP
R (CALL TYPE): O = DISA, A = Auto Redial, E = External Forwarded, T = Transit
MATURITY: C = CPD, K = 12KHz/16KHz, R = Reversal, D = Delay, I = Connect
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

=X=X=
Matrix
Station Message Detail Recording-Storage
What's this?
ETERNITY supports Station message detail recording (SMDR) facility for Incoming calls, Outgoing Calls and Internal
Calls. Refer chapter Station Message Detail Recording.
The storing of each type of call is allowed only if it is enabled by the relevant command.
ETERNITY will store the Incoming, Outgoing and Internal calls in SMDR, as per programming of SMDR storage
filters. These filters can be set by using specific commands mentioned in this chapter.
The call records are stored in the SMDR buffer. Once the SMDR buffer is full, the next call is stored in place of the
oldest call in the SMDR buffer. This is known as First In First Out (FIFO) logic.
The SMDR buffer data is maintained even during power failures. However it is advisable to take frequent printouts of
the calls to avoid accidental loss of the data.
Thus following types of storage is maintained in the ETERNITY:
SMDR-IC Storage
SMDR-Internal Storage
SMDR-OG Storage
SMDR-IC Storage
The SMDR facility is used to keep track of the incoming calls received by the ETERNITY. The SMDR is useful in
monitoring and managing the incoming traffic in more effective manner. The ETERNITY can keep log of each call
received by it in the SMDR buffer. Each incoming call is stored in the form of a record in the buffer.
Maximum 5000 records can be stored in the SMDR IC buffer.
SE can default the storage filters.
The SA or SE can clear the SMDR IC buffer using appropriate command and password from the SA mode.
SMDR and ISDN Terminal for Incoming calls:
The ISDN Terminals Flexible number or the BRI Port's access code whichever is used to place the call will get
stored in the column "STN" of the SMDR incoming calls report.
SMDR-Internal storage is used to keep record of calls made from one station to other within the organization. The
ETERNITY can keep track of each call made by any station. Each call is stored in form of a record in the SMDR
buffer.
Maximum 1000 records of Internal calls can be stored in the SMDR buffer.
The SE or SA can clear the SMDR-Internal buffer by using appropriate password from the SA mode.
The SA can print these calls on a printer or can even transfer this data on a computer for storage or further analysis.
SMDR and ISDN Terminal:
If ISDN Terminals sends its access code (flexible number) in "Calling Number IE" it will be stored in "CALLING
STATION" in SMDR Internal Calls Report.
If BRI's access code is sent as "Calling Number" it will be stored in the "CALLLING STATION" in SMDR Internal
Calls Report.
If BRI's access code is dialed or ISDN Terminal's flexible number is dialed by any station or another ISDN Terminal
it will be stored in the "CALLED STATION" field of the SMDR Internal Calls Reports.
SMDR-OG Storage
SMDR-OG storage facility is used to keep records of calls made from the system. This SMDR is useful in monitoring
and controlling the cost of telephone calls. The ETERNITY can keep track of each call made by any station.
Maximum 6000 records can be stored in the SMDR buffer.
The SE or SA can clear the SMDR-OG buffer by using appropriate password from the SA mode. The System
Administrator (SA) can print these calls on a printer. The SA can even transfer this data on a computer for storage or
further analysis.
In case of a call transfer from one station to another station, the system stores two calls with same number but
different duration for both the stations. This is called 'Call Splitting'. Refer chapter Call Splitting for more details.
SMDR and ISDN Terminal for Outgoing calls:
If ISDN Terminal sends its access code (flexible number) in "Calling Number IE" it will be stored in column "STN"
in SMDR OG Calls Report.
Matrix
If ISDN Terminal doesn't send its flexible number while making OG call, the BRI port's access code will be stored
in the column "STN" in SMDR OG Calls Report.
How to program?
SMDR- IC Storage
Enable SMDR- IC Storage:
This command enables/disables the storage of incoming calls depending upon the storage filters set.
Use following command to set SMDR storage mode:
2901-Storage Flag
Where,
By default, all the calls are stored as per the filters set.
Filter commands:
These commands enable the user to select the type of calls to be stored viz. All calls, Trunk wise calls, Un-answered
calls, DID calls, etc. Calls will be stored only if duration, exceeds than the set value.
Filter Commands:
Where,
Seconds = 000-999.
Default IC Storage Filters:
Use following command to default the incoming call storage filters:
2915
By default,
All Normal, DID, Unanswered, Unanswered DID, DISA calls will be stored.
The speech duration is set to 000.
The unanswered duration is set to 000.
The Hold Duration is set to 000.
Clear SMDR IC Buffer:
The SMDR-IC buffer can be cleared from the SA mode.
1072-180-Reverse SA Password.
Enable SMDR- Internal Storage:
This command enables/disables the storage of internal calls depending upon the storage filters set.
Use following command to set SMDR storage mode:
2801-Storage Flag
Where,
Storage FlagMeaning
0Don't store the Internal calls
Storage Flag Meaning
0 Don't store the incoming calls
1 Store the incoming calls
Store Normal Calls 2902-Flag
Store DID Calls 2903-Flag
Store Unanswered Calls 2904-Flag
Store Unanswered DID Calls 2905-Flag
Store DISA Calls 2906-Flag
Store Calls-Speech Duration More than 2907-Seconds
Store Calls-Unanswered Duration for more than 2908-Seconds
Store Calls-Hold Duration for more than 2909-Seconds
Flag Meaning
0 Don't store
1 Store
Matrix
1Store the Internal calls
By default, all the calls are stored as per the filters set.
Filter commands:
Where,
Seconds = 000-999.
By default, the speech duration is set to 000.
Default Internal Storage Filters:
Use following command to default the internal call storage filters:
2815
Clear SMDR Internal Buffer:
The SMDR-Internal buffer can be cleared from the SA mode.
Use the following command to clear the SMDR-Internal buffer:
1072-150-Reverse SA Password
SMDR-OG Storage
Enable SMDR-Internal Storage:
This command enables/disables the storage of outgoing calls depending upon the filters set.
Use following command to set SMDR storage flag:
2701-Storage Flag
Where,
By default, the Storage Flag is 1.
Filter commands:
These commands enable the user to select the type of calls to be stored viz. destination number wise, duration wise or
cost wise.
Destination Wise:
It is possible to store outgoing calls selectively depending on the destination numbers. The ETERNITY supports this
feature in association with External Lists (Allowed and Denied). An outgoing call will be stored only if the number
matches with an entry in the External list assigned.
Use following command to assign an external list containing numbers for call storage:
2702-External List
Where,
External List is 01-24.
By default, External List assigned is 02.
Duration wise:
Sometimes it is required to filter out the calls of small durations. System will not store the calls with duration less than
duration, programmed.
Use following command to set the filter of call duration:
2703-Seconds
Where,
Seconds is from 000 to 999.
By default, Seconds is 000.
Unit wise:
Sometimes it is required to filter out the calls based on Call units. System will not store the calls with units less than the
units programmed:
Filter Command
Store Calls-Speech duration 2802-Seconds
0 Don't store the outgoing calls
1 Store the outgoing calls
Matrix
Use following command to set the filter for call Units:
2704-Units
Where,
Units are from 0000 to 9999.
By default, Units is 0000.
Default OG Storage Filters:
Use following command to default the outgoing calls storage filters:
2715
By default,External List is 02, Seconds is 000 and Units is 000.
Call Splitting:
Use following command to set the call splitting flag:
2716-Splitting Flag
Where,
By default, splitting is ON.
Use following command to set the originating flag:
2717-Originating Flag
Where,
By default, the flag is originating station.
Note:
When Call Splitting Flag is set OFF, then only above command (2717) can be effective. Refer chapter Call Splitting for
more details.
Clear SMDR OG Buffer:
The SMDR-OG buffer can be cleared from the SA mode.
Use following command to clear SMDR-Outgoing buffer:
1072-133-Reverse SA Password
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Splitting Flag Meaning
0 Splitting OFF
1 Splitting ON
Originating Flag Meaning
0 OFF
1 ON
Matrix
System Activity Log
Whats this?
The ETERNITY possesses a facility whereby it keeps monitoring all its activities and also maintains them within the
system in form of a record. The record is stored in the System Activity Log (SAL).
250 such records can be stored in the buffer. This log can be printed on a printer or downloaded on a computer in
form of a report, which is called Maintenance Report.
The Activity Log stores records in FIFO method.
The Activities Report can be printed/downloaded as and when a relevant activity occurs (called Online mode).
The Activity Report can also be printed/downloaded when desired (called Offline mode). In this case, last 250
activities retained in the system will be printed/downloaded.
Whenever an activity is recorded the DSS key assigned for this feature turns ON. The user can see the activity index
by pressing the key (Only from SA Mode).
The activity is stored in the Activity Log in form of:
<DD-MM-YYYY> < HH:MM:SS> <Activity Text>
When you press DSS key for display of log, the DKP will display the activity as:
DD-MM HH:MM <Activity Index>
Note: Format of DD-MM and MM-DD will be as per date format selected in the System.
Note: Refer separate Manual for Hotel Applications for Hotel/Motel Activity Log and other details.
Table for activities in System Activity Log:
Note:
SS-Slot Number, PP -Port Number, TT -Trunk Number, XXXX -Station Number, v-Version for VvRr, r-Revision for
VvRr, ZZZZ = Card Type
For example:
ETERNITY supports 'Log In' and 'Log Out' to indicate that the station is absent/present.
When station user wants to leave office he will set his station as 'Log Out' so that all the internal and external calls will
not come on his station.
When he comes he can make his station 'Log In'" and can receive calls on his station.
This 'Log In' and 'Log Out' activity will get recorded in the System Activity Log (SAL) as shown in the list of activity:
ETERNITY also supports activities related to SIP Trunk and ETERNITY VoIP Card in SAL.
Index Activity
1 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS MATRIX ETERNITY VvRr Started
2 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Default Configuration Loaded :
3 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Card Present: Slot=SS, Type: <ZZZZZ > Card V02R01
4 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SLT Normal : XXXX , Slot=SS, Port=PP
5 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS DKP Normal : XXXX , Slot=SS, Port=PP
6 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS BRI Normal : Slot=SS, Port=PP
7 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS DS1 Normal : Slot=SS, Port=PP
8 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SMDR-IC buffer deletion : XXXX
9 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SMDR-OG buffer deletion : XXXX
10 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SMDR-Internal buffer deletion : XXXX
11 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SE Access From : XXXX
12 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS SA Access From : XXXX
13 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Emergency Number Dialed : XXXX
14 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Log In : XXXX <Station name>
15 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Log Out: XXXX <Station name>
16 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Reg Fail, Authenticacation PW Invalid, SIPTrk=TT
17 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Reg Fail, Config Parameters Invalid, SIPTrk=TT
18 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Stack Construct Authenticate Fail Slot=SS, Port=PP
19 DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS Stack Construct Fail - IP Address Invalid, Slot=SS
Matrix
How to program?
The two functional parts of system activity log are:
Storage.
Report Generation.
Storage
Use the following command to enable/disable the storage flag:
6401-Storage Flag
Where,
By default, Storage Flag is 1.
Report Generation
The system activity of report can be generated.
Online (As and when the event is logged).
Offline (when required).
Online
Use the following command to assign a port for online printing:
6402-Port
Where,
Port:
6404-IP Address
6405-IP Port
Where,
The report is generated as and when the event is logged on the assigned port, if the port is not consumed by other
processes and report generation is enabled. The Start/Stop of report generation is done from SA mode.
Use the following command to do the same.
1072-024-Flag
Where,
Offline
Use the following command to assign the port to system activity log offline printing of SAL:
6403-Port
0 Disable
1 Enable
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM Port 1
2 COM Port 2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
Flag Meaning
0 Stop
1 Start
Matrix
Where,
By default, the port assigned for system activity log offline printing is None.
Port:
6406-IP Address
6407-IP Port
Where,
Once the port is assigned the report generation has to be activated explicitly. This is done by the SA.
Use the following command to start/abort the process (from SA mode):
1072-023-Code
Where,
By default, Code is 0.
Once the report generation is initiated with 1072-023-1, it has to be terminated by a 1072-023-0, before any other
process uses the port.
Clearing the System Activity Log
The system activity log can be cleared by the SA.
Dial 1072-022-Reverse SA Password
The SE can default the system activity log parameters.
Use the following command to default system activity log parameters for SAL:
6410
On issuing this command, for the system activity log:
Storage is enabled.
Port assigned for online and offline report generation is none.
Relevant Topics:
1. Alarms 245
2. System Activity Log Display 833
3. Reminder 709
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM Port 1
2 COM Port 2
3 Printer Port
4 Ethernet Port
Flag Meaning
0 Stop
1 Start
Matrix
The Offline System Activity Log report looks like shown below:
SYSTEM ACTIVITY LOG AS ON 14-04-2009(Tue) AT 14:11
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28-02-2009 17:19:36 SE Access From : 3001
28-02-2009 17:24:52 SE Access From : 3002
28-02-2009 17:28:57 SE Access From : 3001
28-02-2009 17:29:36 SE Access From : 3001
28-02-2009 17:35:12 SE Access From : 3001
28-02-2009 17:37:48 SE Access From : 3002
28-02-2009 17:39:33 SE Access From : 3002
28-02-2009 17:40:13 SE Access From : 3002
28-02-2009 17:44:58 SE Access From : 3002
28-02-2009 17:50:48 SE Access From : 3002
28-02-2009 17:53:02 SE Access From : 3001
28-02-2009 17:55:43 SE Access From : 3002
28-02-2009 17:56:21 SE Access From : 3001
28-02-2009 18:10:42 SE Access From : 3001
28-02-2009 18:16:26 Card Present: Slot=22, Type: Switch DSP V05R01
28-02-2009 18:16:26 Card Present: Slot=24, Type: ComMngr V02R01
28-02-2009 18:16:26 MATRIX ETERNITY V8R1 Started
28-02-2009 18:16:40 Card Present: Slot=17, Type: SW-Dlc4 V05R01
28-02-2009 18:16:40 DKP Normal : 3001 , Slot=17, Port=01
28-02-2009 18:16:53 Card Present: Slot=01, Type: Twt8 Slt24 V02R08
28-02-2009 18:17:15 SE Access From : 3001
28-02-2009 18:22:31 SE Access From : 3002
28-02-2009 18:23:08 SE Access From : 3002
28-02-2009 18:35:23 SE Access From : 3001
28-02-2009 18:35:38 SE Access From : 3001
28-02-2009 18:38:43 SE Access From : 3001
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=X=X=
Matrix
System Activity Log Display
What is this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility to display the last activity monitored by the system on the DKP.
This helps the SA while troubleshooting in case when it is difficult to manage a printer or a computer to get a complete
System Activity Log.
The DSS key with LED can be assigned for this feature, refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming.
When the DSS key is pressed, last activity is displayed.
How to use it?
To view the system activity log:
This display on the LCD is Date Time Activity Index
Where,
Date is the date on which the activity was logged.
Time is the time at which the activity was logged and the activity index is the pointer to the logged activity.
System Fault Log Display
To view the system fault log:
The display on the LCD will be as Date Time Activity Index (<DD-MM> < HH:MM> <Activity Index>)
Where,
Date is the date on which the activity was logged.
Time is the time at which the activity was logged
Activity index is the pointer to the logged activity.
Note:
Format of either DD-MM or MM-DD will be as per date format set in the system. Refer chapter Real Time Clock (RTC)
for setting date format.
Note:
Format of either DD-MM or MM-DD will be as per date format set in the system. Refer chapter Real Time Clock (RTC)
for setting date format.
How to program?
The user has to be in the SA mode for viewing and acknowledging the activity.
Relevant Topics:
1. System Activity Log 829
=X=X=
Press DSS key or Dial 1072-009. Confirmation tone
Press DSS key or Dial 1072-010. Confirmation tone
Matrix
System Administrator (SA) Mode
Whats this?
System Administrator is a person who carries out routine jobs like generating SMDR report, Setting report filters,
programming the features for call services, Setting remote alarm and reminder etc. Generally, an operator of the
organization or receptionist in the Enterprise or hospital is working as a System Administrator for the ETERNITY.
Refer chapters Access Codes and Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for the list of SA commands for different
features.
How it works?
The System Administrator can enter SA mode by dialing command 1#92-SA Password.
The exit from SA mode can be Manual or Automatic.
The SA Mode timer takes care of this. This timer can be programmed for a range of 000 to 255 minutes.
Manual Exit: If the SA mode timer is programmed as 000, the Exit mode is Manual. SA must explicitly give exit
command (1#92) to exit from SA mode.
Automatic Exit: When the SA Mode timer ranges anywhere from 001 to 255, the Exit mode is Automatic. The SA
automatically exits from the mode on expiry of the timer. However the SA can exit from this mode even before expiry
of SA mode timer by dialing 1#92. The timer is loaded every time a new SA command is issued.
SA password is a 4-digit secret code used to avoid unauthorized access to SA Mode. Default SA password is 1111.
In case the SA password is forgotten, the same can be cleared to its default value from the System Engineer (SE)
Mode.
When the System Administrator dials 1#92-SA Password to log in to the SA mode from a station, the COS of the
station is checked. If SA mode is not allowed from the station, the System Administrator gets error tone. If the SA
mode is allowed and the SA password is not entered correctly, then also the system gives error tone.
System gives Dial Tone on entering SA mode successfully. After this the system accepts all the SA mode commands
till the System Administrator exits from the SA mode.
More than one person can enter the SA mode simultaneously.
How to use it?
Use the following command from SA mode to program the SA mode timer:
1072-016-SA Mode Timer
Where,
SA Mode Timer is from 000 to 255 minutes.
By default, Timer is 003 minutes.
How to program?
The commands that can be executed from SA mode are listed in the individual topics. For the complete lists of
commands executable from the SA Mode, please refer Access Codes for more details.
Relevant Topics:
3. Access Codes 225
=X=X=
2 Dial 1#92-SA Password. Confirmation tone
Matrix
System Debug
Whats this?
ETERNITY allows the System Engineer to monitor the state of software ports and IO operations. This is known as
Debug.
This feature is very useful for the SE for troubleshooting.
This effectively aids the SE in identifying the error.
How to program?
Use the following command to program a port for debug:
2103-Port
Where,
By default, the Port is 0.
Process Debug
Use following command to start/stop debug for required process:
2104-Value
Where value shall be entered in 4 digits as explained below
If it is required to enable combination of the above debugs, use value = Total Sum of the Values of all requires debugs.
This command will be saved in the configuration and hence, ETERNITY will retain this in case of power failure.
Example:
To enable debug for 'VMS' and 'PMS' use values = 0004 + 0128 = 0132 and give command 2104 - 0132.
To disable debug for all process use command: 2104-0000.
State Debug
Use following command to start/stop state debug:
2105-Port Type-Port Number Start-Port Number End-Flag
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
3 Printer
4 Ethernet
Process Type Value
Port State 0001
Card IO 0002
PMS 0004
Parameter Initialization on Power-ON 0008
Error 0016
Communication Manager 0032
File Open/Read/Write 0064
VMS 0128
ACB 0256
Maturity/AOC 0512
Auto-up gradation 1024
Matrix
Where,
Software port number range shall be the software port number of the selected port type.
Settings made using this command is not saved in the configuration and hence if the system gets restart, SE needs to
give this command again.
When system gets restart, the debug will get disabled.
Use following command to enable ETERNITY-GE HOST Debug:
2181-1-Code
Where,
Code is from 000 to 255.
Default is 000.
Use following command to enable ETERNITY-GE DSP Debug:
2184-1-Code
Where,
Default is 000.
Note:
It is not possible to enable all three debugs at a time, only one of the three can be enabled at a time.
Step 6
Use following command to Enable ETERNITY-GE DSP Debug:
2184-2-Code
Where,
Port Type Meaning
01 SLT
02 DKP
03 TWT
04 BRI
05 DS1
06 E&M
10 DOP
28 MOBILE
26 SIP
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Code Meaning
001 Enables HOST Debug on Ethernet
002 Enables ETERNITY GE Master Cmd/Event Debug
004 Enable ISDN Relate Host to DSP Cmd/Event Debug
007 Enable all three (above given) debugs
000 Enables DSP Serial Real Time Debug
Code Meaning
000 Enables DSP Serial Real Time Debug
001 Enables DSP Serial Slow Debug
002 Enables DSP Ethernet Debug
Code Meaning
001 Enable SLT Debug
Matrix
Default is 000
Use the following command to initiate the debug of IO operations:
2199-Slot Number-1-Port Number-Code
2199-Slot Number-2-Port Number-Port Number-Code
2199-Slot Number-*-Code
If the Slot No. and the Port Number are programmed as 99 the debug of all slots and ports is generated.
Where,
Slot Number= 01 to 24,
Port Number = Port offset on the card in 2 digit
If the Slot No. and the Port Number are programmed as 99 the debug of all slots and ports is generated.
By default, debug is 'disable'.
Debug on Syslog
ETERNITY supports debug on syslog.
Use following command to program the IP Address of the Syslog Server:
2178-Syslog Server IP Address
Where,
Default IP address = 192.168.1.104.
Program the IP address of the computer on which syslog server is running. ETERNITY will send debug on this IP
Address.
Use following command to program Port number on which ETERNITY shall send debug to syslog server:
2179-Syslog Server's Listening Port
Where,
Listening port can be from 1024 - 65535.
Default = 514
Program the Port Number on which the syslog server will listen.
Parameters programmed for the syslog server are applicable only when 'Ethernet' is selected as the destination port.
Relevant Topics:
1. Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port 405
=X=X=
002 Enable TWT Debug
004 Enable DKP Debug
08 Enable ENM Debug
016 Enable ISDN Debug
032 Enable GSM Debug
064 Enable VOIP Debug
128 Enable VMS Debug
255 Enable debug for all the ports listed above
000 Disable debug for all the ports listed above
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Code Meaning
Matrix
System Engineer (SE) Mode
Whats this?
SE mode allows SE to program the system for main functions like assigning access codes to the stations,
programming destinations for trunk lines, Activation of DISA facility on few lines, assigning feature access levels to
stations, etc.
In this mode, only SE can do programming.
All the programming commands are allowed from SE mode.
This mode is password protected so that no other person can make any unauthorized alterations and subsequent
misuse of features and facilities.
System engineer is a person who configures the system as per the need. He is the person who can alter the
configuration of the system. Nobody can change the system settings without his knowledge, provided the password
is kept secret.
How to use it?
SE password is 4-digit secret code used to avoid unauthorized access to SE mode. By default, SE Password is 1234.
In case the SE password is forgotten, the same can be cleared to its default value. For more details on this, please
refer section System Security.
System gives programming tone on entering SE mode.
If the SE password is not entered correctly, system gives error tone.
More than one person can enter in SE mode at a time.
To exit SE, dial 00 from the programming tone. You get Matrix dial tone.
=X=X=
2 Dial 1#91-SE Password. Confirmation tone
Matrix
System Fault Log
Whats this?
The ETERNITY possesses a facility whereby it maintains a log of all system faults. This log can be printed on a
printer or downloaded on a computer.
The system fault log stores records in FIFO method.
The system fault report can be printed online.
The DOP is triggered on the occurrence of the system fault.
The size of the fault log buffer is 100.
When the events are logged and displayed?
<Flexible Number> will be displayed, if SE mode is accessed from station.
<IP Address>, IP address of the computer used will be displayed in case of SE mode is accessed using Web Jeeves.
<Remote>, Remote will be displayed if the SE mode is accessed Remotely using Trunk port (remote programming).
<Modem> Modem will be displayed if the SE mode is accessed using Jeeves from Modem connected on COM port.
The following table gives different activities that are logged into system fault log.
VoPP Fail:
If VoPP fail message is logged the ETERNITY VoIP Card will not be functional.
Registration Timer Fail:
The system may get failed to load either the Re-registration timer or registration retry timer. In such case the Proxy
SIP trunk will remain un registered and will not be of any use.
The system will decode the registration status message received from ETERNITY VoIP Card and, if it is found to be a
problem because of Registration Timer Failure this will be logged in SFL.
This can happen to one or more SIP trunks of the same ETERNITY VoIP Card, while the other SIP Trunks of the
same VoIP Card functioning normally.
ETERNITY VoIP Card needs to be restarted to resolve the problem.
How it works?
All the faults are registered in the fault log.
The DSS key LED (if assigned) for this feature turns ON.
The DOP (if assigned) gets triggered.
The buzzer of the ETERNITY ME Card Master sounds.
If multiple DKP users have assigned the key, the DSS key LED of all DKP users turn ON.
If any one acknowledges (from SA mode) the DSS key LED of all users turn OFF.
The DOP is turned OFF (if assigned) on receiving acknowledgment.
How to program?
Use the following command to set DOP for SFL.
6454-DOP
Where,
DOP is 1.
Event Index Event Description
1 Card Absent, Slot No.
2 DKP Absent, Flexible No. of the port, Slot No. <>, Port No<>
3 SLT Short, Flexible No. of the port, Slot No. <>, Port No <>
4 SLT Open, Flexible No. of the port, Slot No. <>, Port No. <>
5 BRI Out of Synch., Slot No. <>, Port No.<>
6 T1E1PRI Out of Synch., Slot No. <>, Port No. <>
7 PMS link break-down
8 Internal Communication failure
9 RTC Failure
10 VoIP LAN Lost, Slot No. <>, Port No. <> on DD-MM-YYYY at HH:MM:SS
11 VoPP Fail, Slot No. <XX>
12 Registration Timer Fail, SIP Trunk <XX>
Matrix
The storage of faults is programmable. The reports of the fault log can be downloaded online or when desired (offline).
Use the following Command to Enable/Disable storage of faults.
6451-Flag
Where,
By Default, Flag is disabled.
Report Generation (Online)
Use the following command to assign the port to system fault log-online printing:
6452-Port
Where,
Port:
6455-IP Address
6456-IP Port
Where,
The report is generated as and when the event is logged on the assigned port, if the port is not occupied by other
processes and report generation is enabled.
Use the following command to start/stop report generation from SA mode (online):
1072-028-Flag
Where,
Offline
Use the following command to assign a port to system fault log-offline printing:
6453-Port
Where,
Port:
6457-IP Address
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
3 Printer
4 Ethernet Port
Flag Meaning
0 Stop
1 Start
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
3 Printer
4 Ethernet Port
Matrix
6458-IP Port
Where,
After the port is assigned the report generation has to be started explicitly. This is done by SA.
Use the following command to start/stop report generation from SA mode (offline):
1072-027-Code
Where,
By default, the Code is 0.
The format of the standard system fault report looks as below:
Important Points:
System Fault Log Reports
These records can be printed in on-line mode (as soon a fault occurs) on a printer to a COM port.
Report can be printed in off-line mode (as and when required), as explained in the chapter.
Relevant Topic:
1. System Fault Log Display 842
The Offline report looks like shown below:

SYSTEM FAULT LOG AS ON 14-04-2009(Tue) AT 17:40
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
03-03-2009 17:36:24 DKP Absent : 300001 , Slot=18, Port=01
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Online report:
04-18-2009 14:36:41 DS1 Out of Synchronized : Slot=01 ,Port=01
=X=X=
Flag Meaning
0 Stop
1 Start
Field Column Position
Blank 00
Date (As per Date format selected) 01
Time (HH:MM:SS) 12
Even Index No. (two characters) 21
Event Description 24
Matrix
System Fault Log Display
Whats this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility to display the last fault monitored on the system.
This helps the SA to track the faulty events.
How to use it?
When a fault occur, the LED assigned for System Fault Log, glows.
The SA can press the key and acknowledge it. He can even dial the feature access code.
On acknowledgments command;
The DSS key LED (if assigned) for this feature turns OFF.
The buzzer of the ETERNITY ME Card Master stops sounding.
The DOP (if assigned) gets turned OFF.
To view the system fault log:
The display on the LCD is Date-Time-Fault Index
Where,
Date is the date on which the Fault was logged.
Time is the time at which the Fault was logged.
Fault Index is the pointer to the logged Fault.
Relevant Topics:
1. System Fault Log 839
=X=X=
Press the DSS key or Dial 1072-010. Confirmation tone
Matrix
System Parameters
Whats this?
This chapter provides information and programming commands for following topics:
Station Type
Card Restart
System restart (Reset)
Default Timers
Software version and revision
Form feed
A-Law/u-Law
Monitor a Port
ON/OFF time of buzzer
Watch dog
Feature tone
End of Dialing
Listening Port of Web server
Hotel Mode/Enterprise Mode
Station Type
ETERNITY supports different types of extensions which can be interfaced to specific ports viz:
SLT
DKP
ISDN Terminal
For Enterprises, Hospitals and other places, these stations may be used in different way for different category of
users.
For such applications of the ETERNITY, each station is assigned a category as:
Administration or
Guest
For example, in Enterprise mode of ETERNITY, these stations may be used as Administration. Refer command to
assign Mode of operation to ETERNITY viz. Enterprise or Hotel. Generally, 'Guest' category of station is used for
Hotels.
Note: Refer separate manual for Hotel Applications of this feature.
Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for details of DKP Key Templates assigned to DKP, as per
station type selected.
SE can assign the category to the station using specific command as mentioned below:

Use following command to assign Station Type to SLT:
3921-1-SLT-Station Type
Where,
SLT from 001 to 256
By default Station Type is Administration.
Use following command to assign Station Type to DKP:
3922-1-DKP-Station Type
Where,
DKP is from 001 to 128
Station Type Meaning
1 Administration
2 Guest
1 Administration
2 Guest
Matrix
Use following command to assign Station Type to ISDN Terminal:
3923-1-ISDN Terminal-Station Type
Where,
ISDN Terminal is from 01 to 64
Card Restart
Use following command to restart the card installed in Universal Slot of the ETERNITY:
2187-Slot No
Where,
Slot number is from 01 to 16.
For details about various slots and card types in the ETERNITY, refer chapter Know Your ETERNITY.
System Restart (Reset)
Use following command to restart (Reset) the system:
5300
On receipt of this command, the system will give confirmation tone for the period of 'Confirmation Tone Timer' and
then restart.
If Jeeves is used, system will give an Alert message "Restarting the system will disconnect all the live calls. Do you
want to continue?" and then use will select 'Yes' to reset the system.
Default Timers:
Use following command to load default values of all system timers:
5303
On giving this command the following timers of the system will set to default values.
1 Administration
2 Guest
Timer Timer
Dial Tone Timer Call No-Reply RBT Timer
Ring Back Tone Timer ACB Ring Timer
Busy Tone Timer Message Wait Count
Error Tone Timer Message Wait RBT Timer
Confirmation Tone Timer Message Wait Next Try Wait Timer
Feature Tone Timer Forced Maturity Timer
Programming Mode Inter Digit Wait Timer First Digit Wait Timer
Programming Mode Confirmation Tone Timer Trunk Dial Inter Digit Wait Timer
Programming Mode Error Tone Timer Trunk-Trunk Inactive Wait Timer
Demonstration Timer Park Release Timer
Internal Inter Digit Wait Timer DID Call Answer Wait Timer
Call Park Timer DID Beep Timer
Pause Timer DID RBT Timer
Interrupt Request Timer DID Busy Tone Timer
Barge-In Timer DID Error Tone Timer
Transfer Call on Idle Station RBT Timer DID Music Tone Timer
Transfer Call on Busy Station RBT Timer DISA Idle Timer
Auto Redial Trunk DT Wait Timer DISA Inactivity Timer
Auto Redial Trunk RBT Wait Timer VMS Live Call Supervision Timer
Auto Redial Station Ring Timer Conflict Digit-Digit Wait Timer
Auto Redial Normal Wait Timer Trunk Release Conform Wait Timer
Auto Redial Normal Try Count CLI, MSN Direct Trunk Call Route Ring Timer
Auto Redial Priority Wait Timer Alarm/Reminder Snooze Count
Matrix
Software Version and Revision
Using SE Command:
Use following command to know the software version and revision of the system:
5304
This command should be issued from DKP only. On giving this command, the DKP would display the current Version (X),
Revision number (Y) and temporary release number (Z) of the system e.g. VxRy.z
Using SA Command:
Use following SA command to know the Software Version and Revision of the system:
1072-191
This feature can be assigned to DSS key which has the LED. Refer chapters Access Codes and Digital Key Phone-Soft
Keys Programming for more details about feature number and how to assign to the DSS key.
The display will be as explained below for SLT and DKP:
When this command is issued from SLT with CLI Type as 'DTMF', the SLT will display only the digits like XYZ where
X is the Version Number, Y is the Revision Number and Z is the temporary release number of the Software.
When this command is issued from SLT with CLI Type as 'FSK', the SLT will display VxRy.z. For example, Software
Version 7 with revision 5 and temporary revision 1, will be displayed as V7R5.1
When this command is issued from DKP, the DKP will display VxRy.z
Form Feed
If form feed is enabled all reports will be printed individually on separate page. It is disabled then all reports will be printed
one after the other in continuation.
Use following command to enable/disable form feed:
5321-Code
Where,
By default, Form feed is enabled.
A-Law/Mu-Law
Use the following command to set the A-Law/-Law:
5322-Type
Where,
By default, A-Law is set.
Monitor a Port
Use the following command to monitor a port:
5323-Slot-Port
Where,
Slot is from 01 to 24.
Port is port number on the card from 00 to 99.
By default, it is port 01 of each slot.
Auto Redial Priority Try Count Alarm/Reminder Snooze Timer
Alarm Timer1 Trunk Ack Wait Timer
Alarm Timer2 SA Mode Timer
RCOC Record Delete Timer Watch Dog Refresh Wait Timer
Release Conference if idle for more than (minutes) timer
Code Meaning
0 Disable Form Feed
1 Enable Form Feed
Type Meaning
1 A-Law
2 MU-Law
Timer Timer
Matrix
Use the following command to know the port details from flexible number (from SA mode):
1072-029-Flexible Number
Where,
Flexible Number is the access code of the station.
The response to the command is the hardware slot number, hardware port number and software port number of
the station in the form.
SWTTPPP HW-SSPP
Where,
SW indicates Software Port.
TT indicates the Port Type.
PPP indicates the Port Offset.
HW indicates Hardware Port.
SS indicates Slot Number.
PP indicates the port offset on the card.
On issuing this command the LED on the card can be used to monitor the port.
On/Off Timer of Buzzer
Use the following command to program the ON/OFF time of the ETERNITY ME Card Master buzzer:
5308-On Timer-Off Timer
Where,
Both the timers are 4 digits in ms.
Watch Dog
The system allows enabling a Watch Dog to take care of the system when the system hangs.
Use the following command to enable/disable the watch dog:
5309-Flag
Where,
If the system hangs when the flag is enabled, then the system restarts by itself. But if the flag is disabled and the system
hangs, then the restart command has to be issued explicitly for the system restart.
Alarm Notification
At the time of alarm if station is in stand-by state, the system will decrement alarm attempt by one and load the alarm
attempt interval. On expiry of all alarm attempts, the system will give notification to operator.
Feature Tone
Use the following command to disable/enable Feature Tone:
This command gives feature tone or dial tone to the station users when features like Call Forward, ACB, etc. are set on
the station.
5312-Feature Tone Flag
Where,
End of Dialing Digit
End of Dialing Digit is a single digit on receipt of which, end of string is interpreted by the system and the received
digits are sent for further call-processing.
ETERNITY supports this feature as programmable digit.
While receiving the dialing digits, the system waits for expiry of "inter digit wait timer' and 'End of Dialing digit'.
If end of dialing digit is received, before expiry of the inter digit wait timer, end of number string is interpreted and the
received digits is sent for further analysis.
It is generally programmed as '*' or '#' as other digits on the phone are 0-9 which are required while dialing a number.
Flag Meaning
1 Enable
2 Disable
Feature Tone Flag Meaning
0
Disable (The station user shall get normal dial tone even on using call forward
feature)
1 Enable (The station user shall get feature tone on using call forward feature)
Matrix
Use following command to program the end of dialing digit:
5313-End of Dialing Digit
Where,
End of Dialing Digit is of single digit and only * or #.
By default, End of Dialing Digit is #.
For Example:
For programming '# 'as End of Dialing digit, dial
5313-##
For programming '*' as End of Dialing digit, dial
5313-*
For programming 'None' as End of Dialing digit, dial
5313-#*
If this command is used, No digit will be considered as the End of Dialing digit. In such case Inter digit wait timer is only
applicable.
Differentiating Public Network Call and PISN Call on T1E1PRI tie line
Use following command to program Caller ID digits to be considered as call from Public Network:
5314-Minimum Caller ID Digits
Where,
Minimum Caller ID Digits is from 01 to 16.
By default, Minimum Caller ID Digits is '8'.
Significance of command:
This command is applicable to call originating on the T1E1PRI ports (Tie-Line) configured for the Q-Signaling.
By default, CLI number with 8 or more digits will be considered as call from Public Network.
The ETERNITY will check this parameter, whenever the incoming call is to be analyzed as call from PISN (Private
Integrated Subscriber Network) or non-PISN (Public Network Number).
Stand-by Notification to Operator station
Sometimes the user has not properly placed the hand set of his SLT/DKP station. After some time, this station goes in
stand-by mode. In such case it will be required to inform the Operator Station about the stand-by state, so that the
operator can inform the station user to place the handset properly. For this feature SE can configure, the option, whether
to inform to operator or not.
Use following command for SLT Stand-by Notification to Operator:
5333-Flag
Where,
By default the Stand-by Notification is Disabled
If it is enabled, the Operator station will get a ring with display of the text message about hang up of SLT number
XXXX. This message is retained after the operator has answered the ring.
If it is disabled, operator station will not get any notification. In this case, the operator will come to know that the
station is in stand-by, only when she calls the station user and the DKP will display the relevant message.
When the DKP station goes in stand-by mode, the DKP station itself will display the relevant message with error tone
e.g. Hang up Phone properly.
Listening Port of web server
Listening Port of web server is programmable.
Use following command to program Listening Port of Web Server:
2121-Port
Where,
Port is from 00080 to 65535.
By default, Listening port of Web server is 00080.
Flag Meaning
0 SLT Stand-by Notification to Operator Disabled
1 SLT Stand-by Notification to Operator Enabled
Matrix
Refer chapter Jeeves to program other Web configuration parameters.
Hotel/Enterprise Mode
You can put the ETERNITY to operate in two modes using a specific command:
Hotel Mode
Enterprise Mode
If you select 'Hotel Mode', you can get default values automatically loaded only for Hotel Mode requirements.
However default values for other programmable parameters will not be changed.
Similarly if you change the mode from Hotel Mode to Enterprise mode or use command to default the system, all the
programmable parameters except Network Port Parameters and the region code will get default values. Refer chapter
Default Settings.
Use following command to select Hotel/Enterprise mode:
5315-Code
Where,
By default, the Code is for Enterprise Mode.
Hotel Mode:
If 'Hotel Mode' is selected (enabled), refer separate manual for Hotel Applications of ETERNITY.
Default Call Budget
Use following command to program default Call Budget Amount:
3710-Preset Call Budget Amount
Where,
Call Budget Amount is of maximum 6 digits.
By default, Default Preset Call Budget Amount is 999999.
To change the default preset call budget amount to less than 6 digits, use leading zero.
For example, to program call budget amount as Rs.10, enter '000010' as Call budget amount. The system will consider it
as Rs.10. Refer chapter Call Budget to set the value of call budget.
Display MAC Address on DKP
ETERNITY supports displaying of MAC address of the Master Ethernet Port, on the DKP connected to the DKP port.
It can not be displayed on SLT.
The MAC address can be viewed for all 17 digits on EON42 and EON48. Whereas, it can be viewed only 16 digits on
EON45 and remaining digits can be viewed, by moving the cursor towards right side.
Use following command to display 'MAC Address' on DKP:
2122
For example, if MAC address is 00:50:c2:55:b0:0e, following string will be displayed on LCD after the command:
00:50:c2:55:b0:0e.
This parameter is useful while configuring ANT application for multi-stage dialing and while character P or W is
programmed in the substitute number string.
While calling by using multi-stage dialing feature, the caller will get RBT after dialing the calling card number and also
the caller will get RBT again, after the system has dialed the original called party number. Thus the caller will get the
RBT, twice. To avoid this, the SE should configure 'Call Proceeding Tone' in the system. Refer chapter "Multi-Stage
Dialing' for more information about multi-stage dialing.
The SE should configure type of 'Call Proceeding Tone', based on the requirement; whether the speech path is
required to be connected to the caller, when original called party number is out dialed or when Calling card number is
out dialed.
Following options can be configured for Call Proceeding Tone:
Network Tone
Pseudo Tone
Silent
Code Meaning
1 Enterprise Mode
2 Hotel Mode
Matrix
Network Tone: If this option is selected, the caller will get RBT after dialing the calling card number and also the
caller will get RBT again, after the system has dialed the original called party number (while the caller is using multi-
stage dialing feature with P and W programmed in the substitute number string).
Pseudo Tone: If this option is selected, the caller will get Feature Tone once the caller has completed dialing all
digits. After the tone is completed, the caller will get connected to the called number user (destination number).
Silent: If this option is selected, the caller will get Silence (Not listening any tone), once the caller has completed
dialing all digits. After dialing out the original called party number in DTMF, the caller will get connected to the called
number user (destination number).
Use following command to program Call Proceeding Tone Type, to be played in case of multi-stage dialing:
5311-Call Proceeding Tone Type
Where,
Call Proceeding Tone Type is from 1 to 3 as mentioned below.
By default, the 'Call Proceeding Tone Type' is 1 (Network Tone).
Important Point:
Relevant Topics:
3. Call Budget 290
4. MAC Address Cloning 619
=X=X=
Call Proceeding Tone Type Meaning
1 Network Tone
2 Pseudo Tone
3 Silent
Matrix
System Security
Whats this?
ETERNITYs programming/usage is secured at three levels:
System Engineer Level
System Administrator Level
User Level
System Engineer Password
This level is protected by the SE password.
This password is the main password of the system and should be kept by the system engineer. SE password is
needed to enter the system engineer mode of the system to change any setting of the system.
SE password is a 4-digit password. It cannot have either less than or more than 4 digits. Digits 0-9 are valid.
Please note that the system engineer cannot know SA password or user password. However, he can clear these
passwords to their default values.
How to program?
Use following command to change SE password:
5306-New SE Password
New SE password is a number string of 4-digits.
By default, SE Password is 1234.
Forgot your program password?
It is very important to remember the SE password. Without this password, it is not possible to enter the program mode
and change the settings. It is advisable to make a note of this password at a safe place.
However, if the system engineer (SE) password is lost, then it can be set to its default value. Following steps describe
the procedure:
Switch OFF the system.
Remove the ETERNITY ME Card Master from the system.
Locate a mini jumper (J9) on the ETERNITY ME Card Master.
Put the jumper in A-B Position.
Re-insert the card in the system and switch it ON.
Wait for 15 seconds.
Switch OFF the system.
Remove the ETERNITY ME Card Master from the system, restore the jumper in its original position and switch ON
the system.
The SE password gets default to 1234.
Enter SE mode by dialing 1#91-1234.
System Administrator Password
This level is protected by SA password.
The system administrator uses this password.
SA password is a 4-digit password. It cannot have either less than or more than 4 digits. Digits 0-9 are valid.
How to program?
Use following command to change SA password from the SA mode:
1072-015-New SA Password
Where,
New SA password is a number string of 4-digits.
By default, SA Password is 1111.
The system allows the SE to assign a new password to the SA.
Use the following command to assign a new password to the SA:
5310-New SA Password
User Security
The user can secure his station from unauthorized use by way of using User Password. For operational details on this
topic, please refer User Password.
Matrix
Added Security
Various users use the system and there are chances that users might make few operational mistakes like forgetting their
password and thereby unable to use system features or might need to lock their stations remotely, etc. ETERNITY
provides few commands to help in such conditions.
Following are such conditions:
Change the password of a station.
Lock/Unlock the DKP keypad remotely.
Making User absent/present remotely.
How to assign a new user password to a station?
Sometimes a user forgets his user password. The SA of the system can assign a new user password to the user.
Use following command to assign a new user password to the user:
1072-012-Flexible Number-User Password
How to lock/unlock a DKP keypad remotely?
Sometimes a DKP user leaves his place assuming that he would be back after sometime. Later he could not come. Since
his DKP keypad is active and is not locked any unauthorized person can make a call from his station. ETERNITY helps to
avoid this. He can ask SA to lock his keypad.

Use following command to lock/unlock the DKP keypad:
1072-013-Flexible Number-Code
Where,
Flexible Number is the flexible number of DKP.
Please note that this command can be given from DISA also.
By default, DKP Keypad is Unlocked.
How to make user absent/present remotely?
Sometimes a user leaves his place assuming that he would be back after sometime. Later he could not come. Since his
station is in present mode the incoming calls could land on this station or any station can call him. All these calls will not
be answered since he is not present. ETERNITY offers Flexibility to make a station absent remotely (SA mode).
Use following command to absent/present a station:
1072-014-Flexible Number-Mode
Where,
Please note that this command can be given from DISA also.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Code Meaning
0 DKP Unlock
1 DKP Lock
Mode Meaning
0 Station Absent
1 Station Present
Matrix
T1 Maintenance
Whats this?
The T1 system format logs which are useful for maintenance purpose of the PBX, consist of:
Error Counts (Performance Statistics or T1-Statistics)
Alarms
The ETERNITY supports T1-Statistics and Alarm-logs. This chapter explains both Statistics and Alarms and Loop
Back Tests for T1.
The T1 Maintenance consists of Error Counts (Performance Statistics), Alarms and Loop Back Test. This is as per
standards like G.704, G.706 and G.732. G.775 is also considered for detection of defect conditions like LOS, LOF,
AIS, etc. (Loss of Signal, Loss of Frames, Alarm Indication Signal).
Digital line can have transmission errors. All the errors will not generate an Alarm. Few severe errors will generate
Alarms. However, all the errors will be logged in the System Fault Log.
the SNIIC (subscriber Network interface integrated circuit) is used to interface T1 line to ETERNITY. It supports error
counters listed in the table given below. Each error detected by the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI/port will be sent to
the system in form of an event.
The system will count these errors and prepare a statistical record if the condition matches.
For Example:
Severely Errored Seconds Count is incremented when one OOF event reaches the master or more than 320 framing
errors reach the master. This statistical record is updated and maintained by the master.
Performance Statistics
Error Counters supported by SNIIC
Framing Bit Error Counter: This counter is incremented on receipt of any error in the framing pattern. In D4, FS
errors are counted. (FS errors are counted if enabled). In ESF, any error in the 001011 framing pattern increments this
counter.
Out of Frame Counter: Out of Frame is the occurrence of a particular density of framing error events. For D4
framing, OOF is declared when the receiver detects two or more framing errors within 0.75ms or two or more errors
out of five or fewer consecutive framing bits. It ends when there are fewer than two frame bit errors within 0.75ms
period. For ECF framing, OOF is declared when the receiver detects two or more errors out of five or fewer
consecutive framing bits. It ends when there are fewer than two frame bit errors within 3ms period.
CRC-6 Error Counter: This counter is incremented when the received frame has CRC-6 errors. This is applicable for
ECF framing only.
Line Code Violation Error Counter: This counter is incremented when a bipolar violation error occurs or when
excessive zeroes event occurs.
Excessive Zeroes Error Event: For AMI-coded signal, it is an occurrence of seven contiguous zeroes.
Positive Slip Counter: This counter is incremented every time a positive slip occurs.
Negative Slip Counter: This counter is incremented every time a negative slip occurs.
Statistical Record: (T1 Statistics)
Following parameters form the statistical record. This can be generated in the form of a report as shown below:
Errored Seconds
For D4, it is defined as a second with one of the following:
One or more OOF defect.
Performance Parameter No. of Seconds/Count
Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds
Severely Framing Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
Positive Slip Seconds
Negative Slip Seconds
Loss of Frame Count
Line Errored Seconds
Excessive Zeroes Error Count
CRC-6 Error Count
Matrix
One or more slip events (positive or negative).
Presence of Bipolar violation.
For ESF, it is a second with one of the following:
One or more CRC error.
One or more OOF defect.
One or more slip events (positive or negative).
Errored seconds are not incremented during Unavailable seconds.
It is defined as a second in which more than one but less than 320 framing errors (Frame sync. error in D4 and CRC error
in ESF) have occurred but with:
No Severely Errored Frame defect.
No AIS defect.
No Slip defects.
No Out of frame (OOF) condition detected.
Errored seconds are not incremented during Unavailable seconds.
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)
For D4 signals-It is defined as a count of one seconds interval with one of the following:
Framing error events.
An OOF defect.
1544 or more Line Code violation errors.
For ESF signals-It is a count of one second interval with one of the following:
320 or more CRC events (i.e. Framing errors).
One or more OOF defects.
Slip defects are not counted in SES. Also this is not incremented during an Unavailable second. It is defined as a second
in which either an OOF has occurred or 320 or more framing errors have occurred.
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS)
It is a second with either one or more OOF defects or a detected AIS defect.
Unavailable Seconds
It is defined as a second for which T1 service is unavailable. An unavailable state is declared at the onset of 10
consecutive severely errored seconds and is cleared on onset of 10 consecutive seconds with no severely errored
seconds.
Positive Slip Seconds
It is defined as a second for which a frame is repeated to account for frequency drift between ETERNITY and the
network.
Negative Slip Seconds
It is defined as a second for which a frame is deleted to account for frequency drift between ETERNITY and the
network.
Loss of Frame Count
Loss of Frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous loss of signal or OOF. LOF is cleared after 10 seconds of
continuous no loss of signal or OOF.
Line Errored Seconds
A second in which one or more Line Code Violation error events were detected.
Excessive Zeroes Error Count
This counter is incremented when excessive zeroes are received on the line or when line code violation error occurs.
CRC-6 Error Count
This counter is incremented when a CRC-6 Error is detected.
Matrix
Parameters of Facility Data Link (FDL):
FDL is used for communicating general maintenance information or for transmitting user defined information within the
T1 link. General maintenance information is in the form of Performance Message Report which is generated by the
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI and depending upon the T1 FDL Protocol, the Performance Message Report is sent every
second or on request.
How to program?
T1 FDL
T1 FDL can be enabled/disabled. This parameter is applicable only if Framing = ESF. If the Network (Public or Private) to
which the ETERNITY is connected does not support FDL then T1 FDL will be disabled.
Use following command to enable/disable T1 FDL on a T1E1PRI port:
6164-1-T1E1PRI-T1 FDL
6164-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-T1 FDL
6164-*-T1 FDL
Where,
By default, the T1 FDL is disabled.
T1 FDL Protocol
ETERNITY will support both the protocols of reporting the performance monitoring. This parameter is applicable only if
T1 FDL is enabled and Framing = ESF. This parameter will match the protocol expected by the other end of the link.
Use following command to program the T1 FDL Protocol for a T1E1PRI port:
6165-1-T1E1PRI-T1 FDL Protocol
6165-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-T1 FDL Protocol
6165-*-T1 FDL Protocol
Where,
By default, the T1 FDL Protocol is ANSI T1.403.
ANSI T1.403
As per this standard, the receiving equipment transmits a performance report message (PRM) each second over the
FDL. This PRM is not sent to any specific remote location, but is broadcast so that any PRM receiving device on the
T1 line can intercept the message.
The PRM contains error information pertaining to only the previous 4 seconds.
It is the responsibility of the PRM receiver to accumulate the information and store it for 24 hours or the time desired.
This method allows performance monitoring points at different locations along the T1 network so that error
localization is determined.

AT&T 54016
As per this standard, the receiving equipment collects the data but does not transmit it on its own based on time as
done by ANSI. Instead, the transmitting end sends a request to the receiving end to transmit the performance data.
The Performance Message Report Format is as per ANSI T1.403.
Explanation of Alarms
T1 FDL Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
T1 FDL Protocol Meaning
0 Disable
1 AT&T 54016
2 ANSI T1.403
Matrix
Alarms are indicated on the LEDs of the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI. T1E1PRI card has four LEDs viz. L1 to L4.
L1 and L2 indicate alarms for T1E1PRI-1 whereas L3 and L4 indicate alarms for T1E1PRI-2.
During normal conditions, the LED blinks green (1 sec. ON, 1 sec. OFF).
RED Alarm
This alarm is generated if Loss of Signal persists for 2.5 seconds. This is indicated by flashing the LED Red (500ms ON,
500ms OFF). The master logs this event in the System Fault Log. It is logged as System Fault event 11 as RED Alarm
<Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
It is cleared:
When the signal is acquired back and persists for 10 seconds. The LED is turned OFF. The system logs this event in
the System Fault Log. For example, it is logged as a System Fault event viz. Fault index 12 as RED Alarm Cleared
It is declared if:
Received signal is more than 20 dB or 40 dB below nominal for at least 1ms.
If 10 Consecutive zeroes are received.
The interface SNIIC has settings for 32 consecutive zeroes or 192 consecutive zeroes. Hard program it to 32
consecutive zeroes.
Loss of frame alignment occurs.
When RED Alarm is declared, Yellow Alarm is sent to the far end within 12ms of detection of LOS.
YELLOW Alarm
This Alarm is also known as Remote Alarm Indication. This Alarm is generated when Yellow Alarm is sent by the far end
(Yellow Alarm is sent by the far end to indicate that it has lost the incoming signal).
It is declared:
When the signal corresponding to Yellow Alarm persists for 0.5 seconds. This is indicated by flashing the LED Orange
(500ms ON, 500ms OFF). The system logs this event in the System Fault Log. For example it is logged as a System
Fault event 13 as YELLOW Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
It is cleared:
When No Yellow Alarm signal persists for 0.5 seconds. The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in the
System Fault Log. For example it is logged as a System Fault event 14 as YELLOW Alarm Cleared <Slot No.> <Port
No.> at HH:MM: SS.
Remarks:
Yellow Alarm in D4 is declared if:
More than 285 zeroes are received in bit position 2 of incoming DS0 channels during an integration period of 1.5ms.
Yellow Alarm in D4 is cleared if:
More than 3 ones are detected in bit position 2 of incoming DS0 channels during an integration period of 1.5ms.
Yellow Alarm in ESF is declared if:
Reception of 0000000011111111 in seven or more code words out of ten.
Yellow Alarm in ESF is cleared if:
Yellow Alarm signal pattern 0000000011111111 does not occur in 10 contiguous 16-bit signal pattern intervals.
BLUE Alarm: (AIS)
It is also known as Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).
This alarm is generated when AIS persists for 2.5 seconds. This is indicated by flashing the LED Red (1 sec. ON, 1
sec. OFF). The system logs this event in the System Fault Log. Redefine System Fault event 06 as BLUE Alarm <Slot
No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
This alarm is cleared:
When clearance of AIS is detected for continuous 10 seconds. The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in
the System Fault Log. For example it is logged as a System Fault event viz. Fault index 10 as BLUE Alarm Cleared
Matrix
Blue Alarm-AIS is declared:
If less than six zeroes are received on the incoming line data during a 3 ms interval. AIS is cleared if the above
condition does not exist for 3 ms. This interval of 3 ms could be upto maximum of 75ms.
Important Point:
When BLUE Alarm is declared, Yellow Alarm is sent to the far end.
LED Indication
LED L1 and L2 are assigned to port 1 and LED L3 and L4 are assigned to port 2.
LED L1 is used for Card Heart Bit as well as status of the PORT1.

Summary of above mentioned Alarm indications:
Port1 Status:
Port2 Status:
Note:
LED L1 is used for both Port 1 status and System Heart Bit. So in case LED is flashing, it will flash for 1 second and
will OFF for 1 second.
LED Port Status
L1 Green Steady Port1 Layer 1 is established
L1 Red Steady Port 1 Layer is not established
LOS-Red alarm detected
L1 Red flashing @500msec. Port 1 Layer is not established
LBFA-Loss of Basic Frame Alignment
LMFA-Loss of Multi Frame Alignment
L1 Yellow Port 1 Layer is established
RAI-(Yellow Alarm) is detected
L2 Green Port 1 achieves CRC4 synchronization
L2 Yellow Port 1 does not achieve CRC4 synchronization
L2 Green Flashing @500msec. Port 1 achieve CRC4 synchronization
AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected
L2 Yellow Flashing @500msec. Port 1 does not achieves CRC4 synchronization
L1 & L2 Both OFF Port 1 is disabled
LED Port Status
L3 Green Steady Port2 Layer 1 is established
L3 Red Steady Port 2 Layer is not established
LOS-Red alarm detected
LBFA-Loss of Basic Frame Alignment
LMFA-Loss of Multi Frame Alignment
L3 Yellow Steady Port 2 Layer is established
RAI-(Yellow Alarm) is detected
L4 Green Port 2 achieves CRC4 synchronization
L4 Yellow Port 2 does not achieve CRC4 synchronization
L4 Green Flashing @500msec. Port 2 achieve CRC4 synchronization
L4 Yellow Flashing @500msec. Port 2 does not achieves CRC4 synchronization
L3 & L4 Both OFF Port 2 is disabled
Matrix
Loop Back Tests:
Refer chapter DS1 Trunks for more details.
Relevant Topic:
1. DS1 Trunks 475
=X=X=
Matrix
T1 RBS Parameters
Whats this?
Some countries like North America support the standard of 1.544Mbps of PCM trunk. This is known as T1 Trunks.
The T1 type of PCM Trunks use Robbed Bit Signaling. ROBBED-BIT signaling is a per-channel signaling technique
for transmitting signaling bits on each channel in a T1E1PRI facility. The least-significant bit in every 6th transmitted
information frame is removed and replaced by a signaling bit. This technique is also called in-band signaling. The
maximum transmission rate for each bearer channel with ROBBED-BIT signaling is 56 Kbps.
ISDN-PRI signaling is carried on the 24th channel for a 1.544 Mbps connection and on the 16th channel for a 2.048
Mbps connection. There are two types of parameters:
Line Signaling (ABCD Bits)
Register Signaling
Line signaling is described by following types:
E&M Wink, E&M FGD, E&M Delay, E&M Immediate, FXS Ground start.
FXS Loop Start, FXO Loop Start and FXO Ground Start.
T1 Line signaling type is applicable when the Line Type is programmed as T1 RBS for the T1E1PRI Port.
Register signaling is described by following types:
DTMF and Decadic (In this version Decadic is not supported).
Note:
T1 Line signaling is applicable when the Line Type is programmed as ISDN_T1_RBS for the T1E1PRI Port.
Refer chapter DS1 Trunks to program Line Type as T1 RBS:
Line Signaling (ABCD Bits)
E&M Wink, E&M FGD, E&M Delay, E&M Immediate, FXS Ground start, FXS Loop Start, FXO Loop Start and FXO
Ground Start.
Register Signaling
DTMF and Decadic.
E&M Wink Start
Bits A and B are set to 1 to indicate Off-hook. Bits A and B are set to 0 to indicate On-Hook. Bits C and D follow bits A and
B. The application for making calls and receiving calls is explained below:
Making an OG Call
To transmit Off-Hook, bits A, B, C and D on the transmit channel are set to 1.
The far end (network) sends a wink (a momentary OFF-Hook for 200ms). i.e. bits A, B, C and D on the receive
channel receive a pulse (Active High) of 200ms.
On receipt of the wink signal, DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service or DID) is sent on the speech channels
using the Register Signaling type (DTMF or Decadic (A-Bit) or R1 MFC or R2 MFC).
DNIS is Dialed Number In Service. It is the ISDN number that is being dialed. This is provided by the telco in the call
setup messages. DNIS can be used to provide differentiated service to dialing users.
The call goes through when the called party answers the call.
Receiving an IC Call
Bit A, B, C and D =1 are received on the receive channel.
The PBX sends a wink.
The far end sends the DNIS in the speech channels using Register Signaling.
Disconnect
By the Network-Bits A and B on the receive channel are 0. Bits C and D are also 0 in ESF. Following this, the bits on
the transmit channel are set to 0 by the PBX.
By the PBX-Bit A and B on the transmit channel are set to 0. Bit C and D are also set to 0 in case of ESF. Following
this, the bits A and B(C and D in ESF) are received as 0 on the receive channel.
E&M Wink Start FGD
Bits A and B are set to 1 to indicate OFF-Hook. Bits A and B are set to 0 to indicate ON-Hook. Bits C and D follow bits A
and B (Incase of ESF).
Matrix
Making an OG Call
To transmit OFF-Hook, bits A, B, C and D on the transmit channel are set to 1.
The far end (network) sends a wink (a momentary OFF-Hook for 200ms.). i.e. bits A, B, C and D on the receive
channel receive a pulse (Active High) of 200ms.
On receipt of the wink signal, DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service or DID. It is the ISDN number that is being
dialed. This is provided by the telco in the call setup messages. DNIS can be used to provide differentiated service to
dialing users.) is sent on the speech channels using the Register Signaling type.
Bit A, B, C and D =1 are received on the receive channel.
The PBX sends a wink.
The far end sends the DNIS in the speech channels using DTMF.
On expiry of DTMF Inter-digit timer, the PBX sends a wink again.
The PBX goes off hook when the call is answered by the called party.
Disconnect
By the Network-Bits A and B on the receive channel are 0. Bits C and D are also 0 in ESF. Following this, the bits on
the transmit channel are set to 0 by the PBX.
By the PBX-Bit A and B on the transmit channel are set to 0. Bit C and D are also set to 0 in case of ESF. Following
this, the bits A and (C and D in ESF) are received as 0 on the receive channel.
Note:
Please note that while using T1 RBS, only DID is being sent/received and not the CLI/ANI.
E&M Delay Dial
Same as E&M Wink Start. But in this case, the receiving side does not send Wink. Instead the O/G side waits for E&M
Delay Dial timer before sending the DNIS.
E&M Immediate Start/Dial
Same as E&M Delay Dial. But here the O/G side sends the DNIS immediately after sending Off-hook on its transmit
channel.
FXS Loop Start
The T1E1PRI port acts as a FXS port whereas the network acts as FXO port. When configured for this type of signaling,
the FXS side (the PBX) uses the A-bit whereas the FXO side (the Network) uses the B-bit. Bits C and D follow A and B
bits.
Making an OG Call
To transmit OFF-Hook, bits A (and Bit C if ESF) on the transmit channel is set to 1.
The far end provides dial tone. There is no signaling change.
The ETERNITY sends the DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service or DID) on the speech channels using the
DTMF signals.
Bit B (and bit D if ESF) toggles as per the ringing pattern.
The Network sends the DNIS on the speech channel using DTMF signals.
The PBX detects toggling of bit B. When the called station of the PBX answers, the PBX transmits Off-hook state by
changing bit-A from 0 to 1.
Disconnect
By the Network: No indication from the Network. The PBX will detect error tone to detect a disconnect from the
network. On detecting on-hook from the network, the PBX transmits on-hook by setting Bit A from 1 to 0.
By the PBX: The PBX transmits on-hook by setting Bit A from 1 to 0.
Direction State A B C D
Transmit ON-Hook 0 1 0 1
Transmit OFF-Hook/Loop Closed 1 1 1 1
Receive ON-Hook 0 1 0 1
Receive OFF-Hook 0 1 0 1
Receive Ringing 1 1 1 1
Matrix
FXS Ground Start
The T1E1PRI port acts as a FXS port whereas the network acts as FXO port. When configured for this type of signaling,
the FXS side (the PBX) uses the A-bit (however, the PBX can use B-bit but generally it is ignored by the Network)
whereas the FXO side (the Network) uses the A and B-bits both. Bits C and D follow A and B bits.
Making an OG Call
To transmit Off-hook, bits A (and Bit C if ESF) and B (and Bit C if ESF) on the transmit channel is set to 0.
The network detects this change and goes off-hook. The A-bit on the receive channel goes from 1 to 0. The B-bit is
set to 1.
Bit A and Bit B are set to 1.
Network sends dial tone.
PBX detects dial tone and sends DNIS (DTMF digits) on the corresponding speech channel.
Bit A (and bit C if ESF) goes from 1 to 0.
Bit B (and bit D if ESF) toggles as per the ringing.
The Network sends the DNIS on the speech channel using DTMF signals.
The PBX detects toggling of bit B and the seizure on Bit A.
When the called station of the PBX answers, the PBS transmits Off-hook state by changing bit-A from 0 to 1.
The Network stops toggling of bit B. Bit B is set to 1.
Disconnect
By the Network-A bit on the receive channel of the PBX goes from 0 to 1. On detecting on-hook from the network, the
PBX transmits on-hook by setting Bit A from 1 to 0.
By the PBX-The PBX transmits on-hook by setting Bit A from 1 to 0. On detecting on-hook from the PBX, the network
transmits on-hook by setting Bit A from 0 to 1.
FXO Loop Start or FXO Ground Start is used when the ETERNITY is connected to the Network i.e. when the
T1E1PRI port is configured for Terminal mode (Connection mode).
Whereas FXS Loop Start or FXS Ground Start is used when the ETERNITY is connected to another ETERNITY i.e.
when the T1E1PRI port is configured for Network mode.
Note:
FXO Loop Start-This is complementary to FXS Loop Start explained above.
FXO Ground Start-This is complementary to FXS Ground Start explained above.
How to program?
Step 1
T1 Line Signaling Variants
Program the line Signaling Variant for the T1E1PRI Port. This command is applicable when the Bit Rate = T1. The T1
Line Signaling Variants are as per standard EIA-464B/AT&T TR41458. (This standard specifies the Requirements of the
PBX Switching Systems).
Use following command to program the T1 Line Signaling Variants for the T1E1PRI port:
6181-1-T1E1PRI-T1 Line Signaling Variants
6181-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-T1 Line Signaling Variants
Direction State A B C D
Transmit ON-Hook/Loop Open 0 1 0 1
Transmit Ground on Ring 0 0 0 0
Transmit OFF-Hook/Loop Closed 1 1 1 1
Receive ON-Hook/No TIP Ground 1 1 1 1
Receive OFF-Hook/TIP Ground 0 1 0 1
Receive Ringing 0 0 0 0
Matrix
6181-*-T1 Line Signaling Variants
Where,
By default, T1 Line Signaling variants for the T1E1PRI port is 1.
Step 2
Wink Timer-This timer signifies the wink time. Wink is defined as a momentary off-hook for the time defined. It acts as an
acknowledgment signal to the end making an O/G call.
Use the following command to program T1 wink timer for T1E1PRI:
6182-1-T1E1PRI-Wink Timer
6182-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Wink Timer
6182-*-Wink Timer
Where,
Wink Timer is from 0001 to 9999 ms.
By default, T1 Wink Timer is 0200 ms.
Step 3
Wink Wait Timer-This timer signifies the maximum time to wait before sending a wink start signal after an I/C seizure is
detected.
Use the following command to program the T1 wink wait timer for T1E1PRI:
6183-1-T1E1PRI-Wink Wait Timer
6183-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Wink Wait Timer
6183-*-Wink Wait Timer
Where,
Wink Wait Timer is from 0001 to 9999 ms.
By default, T1 Wink Wait Timer is 0200 ms.
Step 4
Wait Wink Timer-This timer signifies the time for which the system should wait for receiving the wink after sending the
OG Seizure.
Use the following command to program the T1 wait wink timer for T1E1PRI:
6184-1-T1E1PRI-Timer
6184-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Timer
6184-*-Timer
Where,
Timer is from 0001 to 9999 ms.
By default, T1 Wait Wink Timer is 0200 ms.
Step 5
Delay Duration-This duration signifies the time after which the DNIS information is to be sent (while making an OG call)
Use the following command to program the T1 delay duration for T1E1PRI:
6185-1-T1E1PRI-Delay Duration
6185-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Delay Duration
6185-*-Delay Duration
Where,
Delay Duration is from 0001 to 9999 ms.
By default, T1 Delay Duration is 0140 ms.
T1 Line Signaling Variants Meaning
1 E&M Wink Start
2 E&M Delay Dial
3 E&M Immediate Start/Dial
4 FXS Ground Start
5 FXS Loop Start
6 FXO Ground Start
7 FXO Loop Start
Matrix
Step 6
Start Delay Duration-This timer signifies the time for which the PBX waits for receiving DNIS from the network. This
timer is loaded on receiving the Off-hook (I/C Seizure) on the receive channel (while receiving an IC call)
Use the following command to program the T1 start delay duration for T1E1PRI:
6186-1-T1E1PRI-Start Delay Duration
6186-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Start Delay Duration
6186-*-Start Delay Duration
Where,
Start Delay Duration is from 001 to 255 seconds.
By default, T1 Start Delay Duration is 020 seconds.
Step 7
DTMF Digit Timer-This timer signifies the DTMF digit time
Use the following command to program the T1 DTMF digit timer for T1E1PRI:
6187-1-T1E1PRI-DTMF Digit Timer
6187-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-DTMF Digit Timer
6187-*-DTMF Digit Timer
Where,
DTMF Digit Timer is from 001 to 255 ms.
By default, T1 DTMF Digit Timer is 100 ms.
Step 8
DTMF Inter Digit Timer-This timer signifies the Inter-digit timer between the DTMF digits being dialed for the DNIS (or
the DID) information.
Use the following command to program the T1 DTMF inter digit timer for T1E1PRI:
6188-1-T1E1PRI-DTMF Inter Digit Timer
6188-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-DTMF Inter Digit Timer
6188-*-DTMF Inter Digit Timer
Where,
DTMF Inter Digit Timer is from 001 to 255 ms.
By default, T1 DTMF Inter Digit Timer is 100 ms.
Step 9
Debug for T1E1PRI Port
ETERNITY supports debug of parameters (debug codes) depending on the Level of debug. On issuing this command
the ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI will send the debug details to the COM port of the T1E1PRI port.
Note: Please note following command change as per Version of Software used. First set of Command '6191' is used
up to Version V6R0.12 and Commands at the end of 'Level 4' are used for Version V6R0.13 onwards. Here 'XXX' is
the Code as mentioned in Tables for Level1 to level 4.
Option 1:
Use following command to start/stop debug the parameters for the T1E1PRI port:
6191-1-T1E1PRI-Level-Debug Code
6191-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Level-Debug Code
6191-*-Level-Debug Code
Where,
T1E1PRI Port is from 1 to 8.
Level is from 1 to 4 (As shown below).
Code is the value for the specified level to turn ON the debug for the parameters. Code range is from 000 to 255. Code
value 000 for each level will turn off that levels debug.
Till S/W V6R12 V6R13 and onward
Debug Level -1 6191-1-T1E1PRI-1-XXX 6191-1-T1E1PRI-1-XXX
Matrix
Level 1:
Level 2:
Level 3:
Level 4:
Default: Debug Code = Debug OFF for all T1E1PRI ports for all levels.
Option 2:
Use following command to enabled Global Level-1 debug for T1E1PRI Port (ETERNITY-ME and ETERNITY-GE)
619-1-1-T1E1PRI-1-Code
619-1-2-T1E1PRI- T1E1PRI-1-Code
619-1-*-1-Code
Where,
Code is from 000 to 255
Unused Unused Unused Unused Layer 4 CAS DSP MFC R2 CAS
001 CAS
002 MFC R2
004 CAS DSP
008 Layer 4
000 Debug Off
Unused Unused Unused HDLC (D-Channel) FDL ABCD Bits Counters Alarms
001 Alarms
002 Counters
004 ABCD Bits
008 FDL
016 HDLC (D Channel)
000 Debug Off
Unused Flow Debug NLS Debug LAP Debug SVC Primitives Variables State Primitives
001 Primitives
002 State
004 Variables
008 SVC Primitives
016 LAP Debug
032 NLS Debug
064 Flow Debug
000 Debug Off
Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused NI Debug OS Task
001 OS Task
002 NI Debug
000 Debug Off
Code Debug Description
001 Log Primitive
002 Lap State
004 Lap Variables
008 Log SVC Primitive
Matrix
Default is 000.
Important point while using 6191 command:
In ETERNITY GE, issue * Command only.
In ETERNITY ME with ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Dual, issue command for both the T1E1PRI software port
number assigned to ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Dual.
In ETERNITY ME with ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Single, issue command for the T1E1PRI software port number
as required.
In ETERNITY ME use * command only if debug for all the T1E1PRI port is to be enabled/disabled.
Option 3:
Use following command to enabled Global Level-2 debug for T1E1PRI Port (ETERNITY-ME and ETERNITY-GE)
6191-1-T1E1PRI-2-Code
6191-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-2-Code
6191-*-2-Code
Where,
Default is 000.
Important point while using 6191 command:
In ETERNITY GE, issue * Command only.
In ETERNITY ME with ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Dual, issue command for both the T1E1PRI software port
number assigned to T1E1PRI Dual card.
In ETERNITY ME with ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Single, issue command for the T1E1PRI software port number
as required.
In ETERNITY ME use * command only if debug for all the T1E1PRI port is to be enabled/disabled.
Use following command to enabled T1E1PRI Port Level Debug (ETERNITY-ME and ETERNITY-GE)
6192-1-T1E1PRI-1-Code
6192-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-1-Code
6192-*-1-Code
Where,
Default is 000.
Use following command to enable T1E1PRI Port-Port Level Physical Layer Debug:
6192 -1-T1E1PRI- 2- Code
6192 -2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI- 2- Code
6192 -*- 2- Code
Where,
016 Log Debug
032 Log NLS
064 Log Flow
001 Telesoft NI Debug
002 Telesoft OS Debug
000 Debug Off
001 CAS Debug
002 R2 MFC State Debug
004 L4 Message Debug
008 R2 MFC R2 Digit Debug
016 DTMF Digit Debug
000 Debug Off
Matrix
Default is 000.
Step 10
Use the following command to program T1 Register Signaling Variant for the T1E1PRI port:
6161-1-T1E1PRI-T1 Register Signaling Variant
6161-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-T1 Register Signaling Variant
6161-*-T1 Register Signaling Variant
Where,
By default, T1 Register Signaling Variant is 2.
T1 RBS Decadic: A-bit is used to transmit the DNIS. The A-bit is toggle as per the Pulse dial Ratio Set.
T1 RBS DTMF: DNIS is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the DTMF signals as per the ITU-T
Q.23.
T1 RBS MFC R2: Same as above but using MFCR2 as per ITU-T Q.400-Q.490.
T1 RBS MFC R1: Same as above but MFCR1 as per ITU-T Q.300-Q.390.
Step 11
This parameter signifies the pulse dial ratio at which the signaling is done on the T1 RBS Line with T1 Register Signaling
= T1 RBS Decadic.
Use the following command to program digital pulse dial ratio for the T1E1PRI port:
6163-1-T1E1PRI-Code
6163-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Code
6163-*-Code
Where,
By default, Digital Pulse Dial Ratio is 1.
Relevant Topics:
1. T1 Maintenance 852
2. DS1 Trunks 475
=X=X=
001 Alarm Debug
002 Error Counter
004 ABCD Bits
008 FDL Debug
016 HDLC Flag
000 Debug Off
T1 Register Signaling Variant Meaning
1 T1 RBS Decadic
2 T1 RBS DTMF
3 T1 RBS MFC R2
4 T1 RBS MFC R1
Code Meaning
1 10 PPS, 1:2
2 10 PPS, 2:3
3 10 PPS, 1:1
Matrix
Telnet
Whats this?
There is an embedded Telnet server in the ETERNITY, which system engineers can use for maintenance or low level
troubleshooting. It is highly recommended that only system engineer with adequate knowledge should use the Telnet
server.
A terminal emulation program for TCP/IP networks such as the internet. The Telnet program runs on your computer
and connects your PC to a server on the network. You can then enter commands through the Telnet program and
they will be executed as if you were entering them directly on the server console. This enables you to communicate
with other servers on the network.
To start a Telnet session, you must log in to a server by entering a valid user name and password.
Telnet is a common way to remotely control Web servers. On the Web, HTTP and FTP protocols allow you to request
specific files from remote servers, but not to actually be logged on as a user of that server. With Telnet, you log on as
a regular user with whatever privileges you may have been granted to the specific application and data on that server.
How to use it?
Click on Start Programs Run.
In the Run Window enter Telnet and Click on OK button.
Matrix
Click on Connect menu and click on Remote System submenu.
In the field Host Name: enter the IP address (e.g. 192.168.1.110) of the system. Click on Connect button.
(By default, IP Address is 192.168.1.100).
After doing above step in Telnet 192.168.1.110 dialog box Matrix-ETERNITY (Host Name) Login is appear on
screen. Enter the correct Login (e.g. root) and password (e.g. 1111).
Matrix
If user enter incorrect Login or Password following screen will appear on the screen.
After successfully entering correct Login and Password following Window will appear on the screen. User can make
changes in the system as per his requirement from remote location.
Matrix
After changes is over. Type exit to log out from the system from remote location.
=X=X=
Matrix
Time Tables
Whats this?
A user having access to long distance dialing would prefer this facility disabled to avoid misuse during non-working hours
once the office is closed. Trunk calls should be routed to the security staff once the office is closed. An operator would
prefer the system to route calls directly to marketing department during lunch hours. A different greeting message needs
to be played on a holiday.
Above examples highlight the need for the system to behave differently depending on the time of the day. The ETERNITY
offers a very Flexible programming for different time zones. A day can be divided in three time zones viz. Working hours,
Lunch hours and Non-working hours. Each day of the week can be programmed with different time zones. Such a
schedule of a week is called a timetable. Thus, a timetable is a weekly schedule of three time zones for each day of the
week.
Time Zone can be programmed for each Station and Trunk from SE mode and SA mode:
Trunk port can be assigned time table using the Trunk Feature Template and the Station port can be assigned time
table using Station Basic Feature Template.
Time Zone programmed for the Trunk/Station port is of relevance only if Time Table is programmed as 0 in the Trunk
Feature Template/Station Basic Feature Template, as applicable. (Time Table=0, means no time table is assigned).
If Time Table is assigned to the Trunk / station port, the Trunk/station ports time zone depends on the programming of
the assigned time table.
The ETERNITY offers maximum of eight timetables.
A default timetable is shown below:
How to use it?
To change time Zone
Timezone/
Weekday
Working Hours Break Hours Non-Working Hours
Start End Start End Start End
Sunday 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00 00:00
Monday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00
Tuesday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00
Wednesday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00
Thursday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00
Friday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00
Saturday 09:00 18:00 13:00 14:00 18:00 09:00
Action Response
Lift the handset Dial tone
Dial 1053-Time Zone Confirmation tone
Time Table 1
Time Table 2
Time Table 3
Time Table 4
Time Table 5
Time Table 6
Time Table 7
Time Table 8
Matrix
From SA Mode
Dial 1072-025-Port Type-Port Number-Time Zone to change manual time zone of the port:
Where,
Dial 1072-018-Code to change the Master Time Zone.
Where,
How to program?
Step 1
Use following command to program a timetable:
1052-1-Time Table-Day-Time Zone-Start Time-End Time
1052-2-Time Table-Time Table-Day-Time Zone-Start Time-End Time
1052-*-Day-Time Zone-Start Time-End Time
Where,
Time Table is from 1 to 8.
Day = Day of the week as per following table:
Start Time = Time Zone start time in 24-hour, Hour: Minute format. Where Hours is 00 to 23.
End time = Time Zone end time in 24 hour, Hour: Minute format. Where Minutes is 00 to 59.
By default, Time Zone 1 is 0900 to 1800 and Time Zone 2 is 1300 to 1400. The left over time automatically is treated
as Non-Working Hours.
01 SLT 001-512
02 DKP 001-128
03 TWT 001-128
04 BRI 01-32
05 T1E1PRI 1-8
06 E&M 001-128
25 Mobile 01-32
26 SIP 01-32
29 Magneto 001-128
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Code Meaning
0 Master Time Zone not applicable
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Matrix
Time Zones and Stations
Following stations parameters can be programmed differently for different time zones:
Class of Service.
Toll Control Group.
OG Trunk Bundle Group.
With this programming, it is possible to allow the station to dial long distance codes in certain period of time. A station
user can be assigned a timetable matching his timings. Let us assume that in an office people work in two shifts. With
these 8 different timetables to choose from, a user can be allocated a timetable that matches his working hours.
Step 2
Refer the topic Station Basic Feature Template for how to assign timetable to a SLT/DKP.
Time Zones and Trunks
Following trunk parameters can be programmed different for different time zones:
DID
DISA
Trunk Landing Group
A trunk can have different priorities for different time zones. For example, it can be programmed to land on the operator
station during working hours. During lunchtime, it can land on the canteen station and finally in the non-working, the same
trunk can land on the security station.
Step 4
Refer the topic Trunk Feature Template for details a how to assign timetable to trunk.
Step 5
Manual Time Zone Commands:
When a station or trunk is assigned a timetable (1-8) the station follows the time zone programmed in the time tables.
If the time table assigned is 0, it means no time table is assigned and the time zone is to be programmed explicitly.
Use the following command to program the time zone for SLT:
1061-1-SLT-Time Zone
1061-2-SLT-SLT-Time Zone
1061-*-Time Zone
Where,
SLT Port is from 001to 512.
By default, Working Hour for all ports
Use the following command to program the time zone for DKP:
1062-1-DKP-Time Zone
1062-2-DKP-DKP-Time Zone
1062-*-Time Zone
Where,
DKP Port is from 001 to 128.
By default, Working Hour for all ports.
Use the following command to program the time zone for ISDN Terminal:
1063-1-ISDN Terminal-Time Zone
1063-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Time Zone
1063-*-Time Zone
Where,
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Matrix
Use the following command to program the time zone for TWT:
1064-1-TWT-Time Zone
1064-2-TWT-TWT-Time Zone
1064-*-Time Zone
Where,
TWT Port is from 001 to 128.
Use the following command to program the time zone for E&M:
1065-1-E&M-Time Zone
1065-2-E&M-E&M-Time Zone
1065-*-Time Zone
Where,
E&M Port is from 001 to 128.
Use the following command to program the time zone for BRI:
1066-1-BRI-Time Zone
1066-2-BRI-BRI-Time Zone
1066-*-Time Zone
Where,
BRI Port is from 01 to 32.
Use the following command to program the time zone for T1E1PRI:
1067-1-T1E1PRI-Time Zone
1067-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Time Zone
1067-*-Time Zone
Where,
T1E1PRI Port is from 1 to 8.
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Matrix
Use the following command to program the time zone for Mobile:
1068-1-Mobile-Time Zone
1068-2-Mobile-Mobile-Time Zone
1068-*-Time Zone
Where,
Use the following command to program the time zone for SIP:
1069-1-SIP-Time Zone
1069-2-SIP-SIP-Time Zone
1069-*-Time Zone
Where,
SIP Port is from 01 to 32.
Use the following command to program the time zone for Magneto:
1070-1-Magneto Trunk-Time Zone
1070-2-Magneto Trunk-Magneto Trunk-Time Zone
1070-*-Time Zone
Where,
Magneto trunk port can be assigned time table from (1-9) from Trunk Feature Template. If time table (0) is
programmed, i.e. no time table is assigned to the port; the above command shall affect the time zone as programmed
for the port.
When magneto trunk port is assigned any time table (1-9), the time zone of the port will be changed based on the
assigned time table.
The above command is of no relevance in this case.
Use the following command to default a time table:
1051-1-Time Table
1051-2-Time Table-Time Table
1051-*
Where,
Time Table is 1 to 8.
Important Points:
Relation of Master Time Zone with Station Time Table, Trunk Time Table, Operator Time Table:
If Master time zone is applicable, then it will over ride time table and hence the time zone assigned to each station,
trunk and operator.
All the stations (including operator) and Trunks will come under the control of the Master Time Zone.
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Time Zone Meaning
1 Working Hour
2 Break Hour
3 Non-Working Hour
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
3. Toll Control 877
=X=X=
Matrix
Time Zone Display
Whats this?
The time zone in which the system is working is displayed on the LCD of the DKP.
This is useful in following case:
Suppose a user is allowed to make STD calls during working hours but denied during non-working hours and
break hours. Many times the user tries to make a STD call during break hours and finds that it is not going
through. He immediately calls the SA or the SE, who then explains that the call was not through because of the
change of time schedule. This generates the need to display the time zone on the DKP.
How to use it?
Following acronyms are displayed on the LCD of the DKP in the idle state to inform about the time zone.
The LCD display looks as shown below at Working Hour, User Present and Key Pad Open condition.
The LCD display looks as shown below at Break Hour, User Absent and Key Pad Lock condition.
Relevant Topics:
1. Time Tables 870
=X=X=
W Working Hours
B Break Hours
N Non-Working Hours
No indication when Key
Pad Unlock, User Present
and Working Hour.
Break Hour User Absent
Key Pad Lock
Matrix
Toll Control
Whats this?
Toll Control can:
Restrict dialing all local telephone numbers.
Restrict dialing certain local telephone numbers.
Restrict dialing telephone nos. starting with 95.
Restrict dialing long distance calls (00).
Restrict dialing certain areas (area codes 03 and 04).
Restrict dialing telephone numbers in a particular area (area codes 031,032,..).
Restrict dialing pager numbers (96).
Restrict dialing cell phone numbers (98).
Restrict dialing telephone numbers starting with a particular digit (1).
Restrict dialing telephone numbers starting with particular area code (022).
Allow dialing only certain telephone number (630555).
Allow dialing only certain area (02 and 04).
Allow dialing only certain area code.
Allow dialing only certain pager numbers.
Allow dialing only those telephone numbers starting with particular digit (1).
This feature is applicable only for external number of OG call.
How it works?
ETERNITY uses external lists to support this feature.
When a call is made, the ETERNITY compares each digit of the dialed number string with the number strings in the
external lists programmed as allowed and denied lists.
If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in allowed list, the ETERNITY dials the
number on the trunk, else compares with the number strings in the denied list.
If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in denied list, the ETERNITY restricts
dialing the number and gives error tone to the station user.
If the dialed number matches with a number string that is available in both allowed and denied list then allowed list is
given priority and the dialed number is dialed on the trunk.
If the dialed number doesnt match with a number string in External List, then also ETERNITY dials the number.
How to use it?
By default, External Lists have same numbers programmed in it. If these numbers satisfy the stations as allowed and
denied lists.
If the toll control requirement is not met by the default external numbers then the external lists need to be customised
and assigned as allowed and denied lists.
ETERNITY supports four levels of toll control:
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
In level 0, toll control is time zone based. An allowed and denied lists is assigned/station separately for working/non-
working/break hours.
In level 1, level 2 and level 3 the outgoing calls are allowed and denied as per the External List assigned as allowed
and denied lists. They are common for all the time zones.
The station user can change his toll control level by dialing a code (Please refer the topic Dynamic Lock for more
details). He doesnt need any intervention from the SE/SA.
Matrix
The following flow chart explains the logic of Toll Control Group.
How to program?
Step 1
List the toll control to be programmed station wise for different levels.
Step 2
Check out the default External List and see whether they meet the requirements.
Step 3
If not customize the External Lists. Please refer the topic External List for details on programming the External Lists.
Step 4
Program the External Lists as allowed and denied lists for toll control level 0 (time zone based) level 1, level 2 and level 3
in the station basic feature Template. Please refer Station Basic Feature Template for details on programming the
template.
Step 5
Assign the Template to the stations. Please refer the topic Station Basic Feature Template for details on assigning the
template to a station.
Relevant Topics:
2. Dynamic Lock 512
=X=X=
Start
Station grabs a trunk
Station dials an outside
Does the
dialed numebr string
matches with any number
in allowed list as per the
toll control level?
Does the
number matches with
any number in denied
list as per the toll
control level?
System dials the number
End
System gives error tone to
the user
End
System dials the number
End
Yes
No
No
Yes
Matrix
Trunk Access Group (TAG)
The topic Trunk Access Group is renamed as OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) from Version V6 and higher
versions of ETERNITY.
Refer chapter OG Trunk Bundle Group for more details.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Matrix
Trunk Auto Answer
Whats this?
The calls landing on a trunk are answered automatically.
This is a very useful feature in call centres.
By enabling Auto Answer on trunks, you can ensure the caller will not get a busy tone, which may force him to
disconnect his call.
By enabling Auto Answer, the caller will be greeted with pleasant greetings and voice messages before the call is
actually handled. The caller will get music when station becomes free.
By enabling Auto Answer, the caller will be offered Busy Message called Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message, if
the incoming call is answered using Trunk Auto Answer feature and the call is not answered by routing group member
within specific time of DID inactivity Timer. Refer flow chart.
How it works?
ETERNITY supports 3 types of Trunk Auto Answer.
Disabled.
All (All calls landing on the trunk are answered automatically).
Busy.
The Trunk Auto Answer type can be different for different Time zones viz. WH, BH, NH.
Greetings can be assigned to the trunks to greet the caller based on the Time Zone.
These greetings are played only once.
After the greetings the trunk can be programmed to play one of the following to the Caller.
Ring Back Tone.
Internal Hold Music.
External Hold Music.
Voice Messages:
ETERNITY offers 4 Voice Messages that can be played back after the greetings.
ETERNITY offers 4 voice messages for Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message.
How to program?
Please refer the topic Trunk Feature Template for details on programming Trunk Auto Answer.
Important Point:
This feature is same as the one offered by many IVR systems, like Railway Enquiry, Banking Industry, etc. This
notifies the caller that someone would attend him shortly. This feature finds large application in call centers.
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
3. Auto Answer 260
=X=X=
Start
Call originates on the Trunk
Auto
Answer
Enable?
Load DID Inactivity Timer
Release the Trunk Port
End
Check routing group assigned to trunk port
and Play Trunk Auto Answer Greeting
message once (if enabled), followed by
continuous Trunk Auto Answer RBT
message (if enabled, otherwise play RBT)
Process the call as per the logic and
programming of the routing group
assigned to the trunk
Call
Answered?
DID Inactivity
Timer Expired?
If VM is assigned : Play Trunk
Auto Answer Busy Bye
Message (once) else play Busy
Tone for the Busy Tone Timer
Yes
No
Stop DID Inactivity
Timer and Trunk Auto
Answer RBT message.
Connect caller with call
answering station
End
Yes
Process the call as
per the programming
End
No
Answer the call
Yes
No
Matrix
Whats this?
The Trunk Feature Template is a set of general features that define the behavior of a Trunk. The ETERNITY offers 50
such Template each of which can be programmed as per the requirement. However, by default the system provides all
the Trunk Basic Template with commonly used values. A Trunk Feature Template is assigned to all the Trunk types viz.
TWT, BRI, E&M, T1E1PRI.
How it works?
The Trunk Feature template comprises of features like:
Time Table-To assign a Time Table to the Trunk. Please refer the topic Time Tables for more details.
Operator-To assign an Operator to the Trunk. Please refer the topic Operator for more details.
Priority-To assign Priority to the trunks. Please refer the topic Priority for more details.
DID-The DID can be selected from three options:
OFF: User can select this option if DID feature is to be disabled for the Time Zone
ON: User can select this option to enable DID after expiry of 'DID Answer Wait Timer'. For this, user should
program suitable timer for the Time Zone.
Delayed DID: User can select this option for DID feature to work after expiry of 'DID Delayed Timer' for specific
Time Zone. Refer chapter Direct Inward Dialing (DID) for more details.
DID Delayed Timer-Program suitable timer from 01 to 99 seconds. After expiry of this timer the DID will be in DID
Delayed Mode and incoming call will be routed to Auto Attendant. Note that when Delayed DID is enabled, DID
Answer Wait Timer will not be applicable.
DISA-Activate DISA on desired Trunks for different time zones. Please refer the topic Direct Inward System Access
(DISA) for more details for selecting option for DISA variant in WH, BH and NH.
Trunk Auto Answer-To program Auto answer in disable, all or busy condition on a Trunk. When the landing
destination is busy the trunk answers the call. The caller is kept on hold and is given Music-on-Hold. When station
becomes free, the station will get a ring but the caller will still get the music.
Trunk Auto Answer Greeting Number-To assign greeting to greet the caller when the trunk answers the call. This
can be programmed as trunk auto answer greeting1. Refer chapter Voice Message Applications to program
greetings.
Trunk Landing Group-To program the trunk landing Group for each trunk separately for Working, Non-working,
Break Hours. Please refer the topic Trunk Landing Group (TLG) for more details.
SMDR-OG Storage-Enable/Disable storage of outgoing calls from a trunk. Please refer the topic Station Message
Detail Recording for more details.
SMDR-IC Storage-Enable/Disable storage of incoming calls of a trunk. Please refer the topic Station Message Detail
Recording for more details.
Trunk Auto Answer Message Type-To program the trunk Auto Answer Message Type for each trunk separately for
Working, Non-working, Break Hours. Please refer the topic Trunk Auto Answer for more details. To program Trunk
RBT message1, refer chapter Voice Message Applications.
Hold on DSS Key Press-It is used to decide for hold state of external speech party when user press a DSS key to
dial for another port. This flag can be made enable/disable. For example, if D-001 and T-002 parties are in two party
matured phase. If D-001 has pressed any DSS key for D-003 then following two situation arises for T-002:
When Hold Flag is enable:
T-002 can listen hold music.
D-001 can listen RBT and call is placed on D-003.
When Hold Flag is disable:
T-002 is disconnected.
D-001 can listen RBT and call is placed on D-003.
Forced Account Code Flag-To enable this flag along with same parameter mentioned in Station Advance Feature
template the user should enter Account Code. By default this flag is disabled. Please refer the topic Station Advanced
Feature Template for more details.
Anonymous Calls:
When Enabled, Anonymous calls (calls without Calling Party information) are accepted and routed by the PBX.
When Disabled, Anonymous calls (calls without Calling Party information) are rejected.
FAX TLG (Routing Group):
The station on which Fax machine/s are connected can be programmed in one Routing Group and it can be
assigned as Fax TLG.
When it is detected that the IC call is a fax call the call is routed to the Fax TLG.
The Fax Call can be detected only on SIP trunk, using T.38.
Fax call cannot be, detected on TWT and GSM Trunk.
Matrix
Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message: This message is played when the incoming call is answered using Trunk
Auto Answer feature and the call is not getting answered by the routing group member within specific time (DID
inactivity timer). It has an option for not playing the message also by selecting 'None'.
Call Cost Calculation Pulse Rate Option: It is assigned for specific trunk feature template applicable for OG call
made. This will be used, to obtain Pulse rate type from Area Code Table, programmed in ETERNITY. Refer chapter
Call Cost Calculation (CCC) for more details.
Call Cost Calculation Time Schedule: This parameter is programmed for four Time Schedules T1, T2, T3 and T4.
Each time schedule is programmed for Start time and End time. It will be used to check the 'Time' at which the call
was made, while calculating cost of the call and corresponding 'Pulse Rate Option' will be used from the template.
Refer chapter Call Cost Calculation (CCC) for more details.
How to program?
Programming a Trunk Feature Template
Use the following command to program a Feature in a Trunk Feature Template:
Where,
How to assign a default values to a Trunk Feature Template
Use the following command to default a Trunk Feature Template:
5801-*
Where,
Following table shows all the Trunk Feature Templates programmed by default.
How to assign a Trunk Feature Template to a TWT?
Use the following command to assign a Trunk Feature Template to a TWT:
5803-1-TWT-Template Number
5803-2-TWT-TWT-Template Number
Where,
By default, Template 01 is assigned to the TWT.
How to assign a Trunk Feature Template to a BRI?
Use the following command to assign a Trunk Feature Template to a BRI:
5804-1-BRI-Template Number
Matrix
5804-2-BRI-BRI-Template Number
Where,
By default, Template 01 is assigned to the BRI.
How to assign a Trunk Feature Template to an E&M?
Use the following command to assign a Trunk Feature Template to an E&M:
Where,
How to assign a Trunk Feature Template to a T1E1PRI?
Use the following command to assign a Trunk Feature Template to a T1E1PRI:
5806 -*-Template Number
Where,
How to assign a Trunk Feature Template to a Mobile Port?
Use the following command to assign a Trunk Feature Template to a Mobile Port:
5807-1-Mobile Trunk Number-Template Number
5807-2-Mobile Trunk Number-Mobile Trunk Number-Template Number
Where,
Mobile Trunk Number is from 01 to 32.
By default, Template 01 is assigned to all Mobile Trunk Numbers.
Please note that these parameters are also important and have to be programmed separately.
How to assign a Trunk Feature Template to a SIP?
Use following command to assign a trunk feature template to the SIP Trunk:
5808-1-SIP Trunk-Trunk Feature Template Number
5808-2-SIP Trunk-SIP Trunk-Trunk Feature Template Number
5808-*-Trunk Feature Template Number
Where,
By default, Trunk Feature Template Number = 01.
How to assign a Trunk Feature Template to a Magneto Trunk?
Use following command to assign Trunk Feature Template to the Magneto trunk:
5809-1-Magneto Trunk-Trunk Feature Template Number
5809-2-Magneto Trunk-Magneto Trunk-Trunk Feature Template Number
5809-*-Trunk Feature Template Number
Where,
Trunk Feature Template is from 01 to 50.
Trunk First Digit Wait Timer
It is the time before which the station should dial the digits on the trunk line after grabbing the trunk. If the outside
telephone number is not dialed during this time, the system gives error tone. This is a global timer and is applicable to all
the trunks. It is recommended to keep this timer slightly more than the first digit wait timer of the trunk line itself.
Matrix
Use following command to program Trunk First Digit Wait Timer:
5353-Seconds
Trunk Digit-to-Digit Wait Timer
It is the time between dialing of two digits on the trunk. If this timer is too large then the user will have to wait for long time
to transfer the call to other station. If this timer is too small then it is possible that few last digits of the telephone number
dialed on the trunk will get skipped in the OG SMDR report. This is a global timer and is applicable to all the trunks.
Use following command to program Trunk Digit-to-Digit Wait Timer:
5354-Seconds
Relevant Topics:
1. ISDN-BRI 573
2. DS1 Trunks 475
3. E&M Features 517
6. Priority 676
8. Time Tables 870
9. Operator 658
=X=X=
Matrix
Trunk Landing Group (TLG)
Whats this?
When more number of trunks are interfaced with the system and if all the trunks are programmed to land on operator
then it would become difficult for the operator to answer the calls efficiently. This would result in inefficient call
management.
ETERNITY helps to the condition. It is possible to make groups of stations on which a particular trunk will land. This
group is called Trunk Landing Group.
How it works?
Maximum 33 trunk landing groups can be formed from 01 to 33.
Maximum 8 stations can be programmed in each Trunk Landing Group.
Each station can either be a SLT, DKP or a DOP.
even when other stations of the group are hunted. This is called Continuous ringing and can be programmed for
each station.
once again.
the destinations within the group. If the rotation method is disabled, the fresh call will always land on first free station
of the Trunk Landing Group.
Association of the Trunk Landing Group with Routing Group
ETERNITY allows to program related stations into groups known as Routing Groups. Please refer the topic Routing
Group for more details. It is possible to make groups of stations on which a particular trunk will land in a Routing Group.
A Routing Group is programmed as a TLG.
How to program?
Step 1
Decide the number of trunk landing groups to be formed.
Step 2
Please refer the topic Routing Group.
Step 3
Please refer the topic Trunk Feature Template.
Example:
Program system for following constraints:
2 TWT lines (S/w ports 001 to 002) are interfaced with ETERNITY.
First TWT line should land on SLT numbers 201, 203, 205, 202, 204, (S/w ports 008, 010, 012, 009, 011 respectively)
always.
Other TWT line should land on DKP numbers 206, 207, 208, 209, 210 (S/w ports 013, 014, 015, 016, 017) always.
TWT1 should ring for 10 seconds on each station.
TWT2 should ring for 20 seconds on each station.
Stations should ring for the set time only for both the TWTs.
Rotation Method to be followed.
Program the SLTs in the Routing Group 01.
6502-1-01-1-01-008
6502-1-01-2-01-010
6502-1-01-3-01-012
6502-1-01-4-01-009
6502-1-01-5-01-011
Matrix
Program the DKPs in the Routing Group 02.
6502-1-02-1-02-013
6502-1-02-2-02-014
6502-1-02-3-02-015
6502-1-02-4-02-016
6502-1-02-5-02-017
Program the Ring Timer for Routing Group 01.
6503-1-01-1-010
6503-1-01-2-010
6503-1-01-3-010
6503-1-01-4-010
6503-1-01-5-010
Program the Ring Timer for Routing Group 02.
6503-1-02-1-020
6503-1-02-2-020
6503-1-02-3-020
6503-1-02-4-020
6503-1-02-5-020
The last two requirements need not be programmed because they are the default values. Please refer the topic
Routing Group for more details on steps 1-5.
Program Trunk Feature Template 01 and assign Routing Group 01 as Trunk Landing Groups all the time.
5802-1-01-16-01
5802-1-01-17-01
5802-1-01-18-01
Program Trunk Feature Template 02 and assign Routing Group 02 as Trunk Landing Groups all the time.
5802-1-02-16-02
5802-1-02-17-02
5802-1-02-18-02
Assign Trunk Feature Template 01 to TWT1.
5803-1-001-01
Assign Trunk Feature Template 02 to TWT2.
5803-1-002-02
Please refer the topic Trunk Feature Template for more details on steps 6-9.
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Matrix
Trunk Reservation
Whats this?
An important user can reserve a particular trunk for him for some time.
He need not share the trunk with others as long as the reservation is in effect.
How to use it?
Cancel Trunk Reservation
A reserved trunk can be freed manually by a command before its timer expires.
Once your important calls are over, do not forget to cancel the reservation. This will enable others to use the trunk.
If more than one station try to reserve the same trunk, the station that is identified first by the system will be given the
reservation. All the other stations will get error tone.
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for more details on how to allow trunk reservation to a user.
Timer of Relevance:
Trunk Reservation Timer-Time for which the trunk is reserved for you.
Command: 3804-Minutes
Default: 010 Minutes.
Valid Range: 001 to 255 minutes.
Important Points:
Trunk reservation is used once the user gets busy tone for a trunk access code.
Part of this feature is similar to Auto Call Back.
As soon as a trunk from the requested group is available, he gets ring.
When the user answers the ring, he gets connected with the trunk and hears the dial tone.
Now, this trunk is reserved for him.
The trunk remains reserved for trunk reservation timer.
During this time other users cannot access this trunk even if it is free.
Station which requested trunk reservation can make more than one call during trunk reservation timer.
The trunk becomes available to other users after the timer. This timer is called Trunk Reservation Timer and is
programmable.
Relevant Topics:
2. Auto Call Back (ACB) 261
=X=X=
2 Dial Trunk Access Code. Busy tone
Matrix
TWT Hardware Template
Whats this?
The TWT Hardware Template is a set of features that completely define the behavior of the hardware port of the TWT.
The ETERNITY offers 50 such Template each of which can be programmed as per the requirement. However, by default
the system provides all the TWT Hardware Template with commonly used values. A TWT Hardware template is assigned
to all the TWTs.
How it works?
Status: A TWT port can be individually enabled/disabled. This can be useful when a particular trunk goes out of order
and should be stopped from being allocated to a user. If any port is disable, IC and OG calls, are not allowed on that
port. But if call is active on one port, it will be displayed only after the call ends.
Service Provider: Please refer the topic Least Cost Routing-An Introduction for more details.
TWT Type: Three types of TWTs can be interfaced to the TWT port of the ETERNITY.
Normal Dial type is the conventional TWT available from the PSTN.
Hotline type is the TWT connecting two destinations immediately on grabbing it.
Hotline Dial type is a special TWT available from the PSTN, which works as normal dial type for some time
thereafter works as Hotline type.
Dial Type: The ETERNITY supports Pulse and Tone (DTMF) dialing on the TWT. Depending on requirement, the
same can be programmed.
Pulse Dialing Ratio: If the Dialing type for a TWT is programmed as pulse type then Pulse-Dialing ratio should be
defined. The TWTs supports six, different Pulse Dialing Ratio. This is helpful when different service providers use
different types of Pulse Dialing Ratio.
Receive CLI Type: If CLI is enabled on a TWT, then ETERNITY senses the digits/codes sent by the PSTN and sends
this information to the landing station/operator along with the ringing signal. (AS = Alert signal, RP = Ringing Pulse.)
For India, the standard for CLI Type supported is 'Any DTMF format (without Start/stop code)'
Following CLI Types for detection on FXO port and DTMF are supported:
Code Meaning
1 Normal
2 Delayed
3 Hotline
Code Meaning
1 10PPS, 1:2
2 10PPS, 2:3
3 10PPS, 1:1
4 20PPS, 1:2
5 20PPS,2:3
6 20PPS, 1:1
Code CLI Format
0 None
1 Any ETSI DTMF format
2 Any FSK V.23 format
3 Any FSK Bellcore format
4 First ring, ETSI DTMF, Second ring
5 Polarity Reversal, ETSI DTMF, First Ring
6 First Ring, FSK, Second Ring
7 Dual Tone-Alert Signal, FSK, First Ring
8 Ringing Pulse-AS, FSK, First Ring
9 Polarity Reversal, Dual Tone-Alert Signal, FSK, First Ring
10 Any DTMF format (without Start/stop code)
Matrix
PPDC: This count is the number of digits to be ignored before toll control check is begun and is same as the number
of PBX connected between the main PBX and the last subscriber. Many a times, small and medium range PBX
systems are connected behind some bigger PBX systems. Stations of the big PBX are used as TWT trunks of the
small PBX. There could also be some TWT trunks coming directly on the smaller PBX. In such situations, it is not
easy to implement toll control restrictions.
DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer: To program the timer range from 1-9.
DID No Digit Dial State for Disconnection Tone Detection: To program as Enable or Disable.
OG Calls + All IC Call States other than DID No Digit Dial State for Disconnect Tone Detection: To program as Enable
or Disable.
Answer Supervision: Refer chapter Answer Supervision on TWT.
Pseudo Maturity Timer: Refer chapter Answer Supervision on TWT.
Disconnect Supervision: Refer chapter Disconnect Information on TWT.
Open Loop Disconnect Timer: Refer chapter Disconnect Information on TWT.
Disconnect Cadence Tone ON Time: Refer chapter Disconnect Information on TWT.
Disconnect Tone Cadence OFF Time: Refer chapter Disconnect Information on TWT.
Speech Delay Timer: It is the time after which the system gives dial tone to the station user on grabbing the TWT. To
understand the significance of this timer, let us consider a situation. A station user not having access to long distance
numbers, grabs a TWT and dials a number 1022-6305555. This number is dialed out since it starts with 1 but since
the actual dial tone from the Central Office comes after some time, the CO interprets this number as 022-6305555
and establishes the speech. This way a station user not having access to long distance calls can dial out a long
distance number. This situation can be avoided by programming Speech Delay Timer to an appropriate value.
Pause Timer: It is the time for which the system waits before dialing the outside number after grabbing the TWT.
Some times it is observed that after grabbing the TWT, the user does not get the dial tone immediately. When user
himself is dialing the number, he waits for the dial tone and then dials the number. But this is not so when the system
dials the number. When Redial or Auto-Redial or Abbreviated Dialing feature is used the ETERNITY grabs the trunk
line and dials the number at its own. Now if there is no pause timer and if the PSTN is of old type then it is possible
that the system may dial out the number before getting the dial tone. This may result in dialing a wrong number. To
avoid this situation, ETERNITY offers pause timer. Pause timer is used during Redial, Auto Redial and Memory
Dialing on a TWT. Pause timer is from 500 to 2500 msec.
Flash Timer: In pulse dialing, codes are dialed in pulses. A Flash key is generally used to dial this code. Flash is
breaking the loop current for 83ms to 900ms. Flash Timer signifies the time period for which the loop current breaks.
Ring Cadence OFF Timer: Program this timer to set OFF time for Ring cadence. During the incoming call on TWT
port, if CO gives ring in which ring off period is quite long, the system will consider that ring is stopped, and hence the
system stops ringing the SLT port. But in actual condition incoming call is still present. To get proper indication, the
system supports Ring Cadence OFF timer on TWT port so that ring can continue even for incoming call with quite
long ring off period. Ring Cadence OFF timer is programmable.
DTMF Out Dial: While the number is dialed, the programmed 'DTMT tone' is sent to the analog trunk by the slave
card. This is applicable for many features for example: Memory dialing, Auto Redial, Redial and Making OG call from
DKP. The 'level' of DTMF digit is fixed, 6.0 dB. Following parameters for DTMF signal are programmable:
The level of each DTMF digit, which is fixed -6.0 dB
DTMF signal ON Time (msec)
DTMF Inter digit pause Timer (msec)
DTMF Signal ON Time: It is the width of DTMF digit to be out dialed by the hardware of the TWT port and is
programmable as shown in the Template.
DTMF Inter digit pause Timer: When the hardware of the TWT port out dials the DTMF digits on TWT, it will wait for
the inter digit pause timer, while dialing the DTMF digits on TWT and is programmable as shown in the Template.
DTMF Detection:
Some service providers support the DTMF digits with the parameters which are not valid while the ETERNITY
detects the digits when DID is set on TWT. Hence the parameters for the DTMF signal are programmable and the
suitable default settings are provided to the user.
Note: The 'DTMF Signal' related parameters depend upon the network, terminal and service providers. The
default settings of DTMF detection parameter given in the TWT hardware template are as supported by most of
the service providers. In case you face problem in DTMF detection, check the parameters supported by the
service provider, network and terminals involved in the call scenario and program the DTMF detection parameters
as relevant.
Following parameters are considered for the DTMF signal:
Code Meaning
0 None
1 Polarity Reversal
2 Open Loop Disconnect
Matrix
The low and high levels of frequency, not programmable.
Minimum Level (dB)
Minimum ON Time (msec)
Minimum OFF Time (msec)
The low and high level combination of frequencies is not programmable, as the ETERNITY hardware, takes care
of the entire bandwidth automatically.
While detecting the DTMF digits on the TWT port, the programmed minimum ON time, minimum OFF time and
DTMF level will be compared with the received DTMF parameters to validate the DTMF digit for detection.
For example, if the Minimum Level of DTMF signal is programmed as -4.5 dB, the lowest valid value for the DTMF
level is -4.5 dB. If the DTMF level is lower than -4.5dB (like -6.0, -6.5, -7.0, 9.0, -10.5), the digit will not be
considered as valid DTMF digit.
DTMF Detection Minimum ON time,
DTMF Detection - Minimum OFF time
DTMF Detection - Minimum Level (dB)
Code Meaning
01 17
02 34
03 51
04 68
05 85
06 102
07 119
08 136
09 153
10 170
11 187
12 204
Code Meaning
01 17
02 34
03 51
04 68
05 85
06 102
07 119
08 136
09 153
10 170
11 187
12 204
Code Meaning
01 0
02 -1.5
03 -3.0
04 -4.5
05 -6.0
06 -7.5
07 -9.0
08 -10.5
Matrix
AC Line Termination Impedance: 16 different AC Line Termination impedance are possible.
Transmit Level setting:
Transmit path signal to PSTN side can be gained or attenuated.
Negative means Attenuation and Positive means Gain.
Transmit Gain Table:
Code Transmit Level (dB)
1 +10.0
2 +9.5
3 +9.0
4 +8.5
5 +8.0
6 +7.5
7 +7.0
8 +6.5
9 +6.0
10 +5.5
11 +5.0
12 +4.5
13 +4.0
14 +3.5
15 +3.0
16 +2.5
17 +2.0
18 +1.9
19 +1.8
20 +1.7
21 +1.6
22 +1.5
23 +1.4
24 +1.3
25 +1.2
26 +1.1
27 +1.0
28 +0.9
29 +0.8
30 +0.7
Matrix
31 +0.6
32 +0.5
33 +0.4
34 +0.3
35 +0.2
36 +0.1
37 0 (default)
38 -0.1
39 -0.2
40 -0.3
41 -0.4
42 -0.5
43 -0.6
44 -0.7
45 -0.8
46 -0.9
47 -1.0
48 -1.1
49 -1.2
50 -1.3
51 -1.5
52 -1.6
53 -1.7
54 -1.8
55 -1.9
56 -2.0
57 -2.5
58 -3.0
59 -3.5
60 -4.0
61 -4.5
62 -5.0
63 -5.5
64 -6.0
65 -6.5
66 -7.0
67 -7.5
68 -8.0
69 -8.5
70 -9.0
71 -9.5
72 -10.0
73 -10.5
74 -11.0
75 -11.5
76 -12.0
77 -12.5
78 -13.0
Matrix
Receive Level setting:
Receive path signal from PSTN side can be gained or attenuated.
Negative means Attenuation and Positive means Gain.
Rx Gain Table:
79 -13.5
80 -14.0
81 -14.5
82 -15.0
Code Receive Level (dB)
1 +10.0
2 +9.5
3 +9.0
4 +8.5
5 +8.0
6 +7.5
7 +7.0
8 +6.5
9 +6.0
10 +5.5
11 +5.0
12 +4.5
13 +4.0
14 +3.5
15 +3.0
16 +2.5
17 +2.0
18 +1.9
19 +1.8
20 +1.7
21 +1.6
22 +1.5
23 +1.4
24 +1.3
25 +1.2
26 +1.1
27 +1.0
28 +0.9
29 +0.8
30 +0.7
31 +0.6
32 +0.5
33 +0.4
34 +0.3
35 +0.2
36 +0.1
37 0 (default)
38 -0.1
39 -0.2
Matrix
On-hook Speed:
This parameter sets the amount of time for the line-side device to go on-hook.
40 -0.3
41 -0.4
42 -0.5
43 -0.6
44 -0.7
45 -0.8
46 -0.9
47 -1.0
48 -1.1
49 -1.2
50 -1.3
51 -1.5
52 -1.6
53 -1.7
54 -1.8
55 -1.9
56 -2.0
57 -2.5
58 -3.0
59 -3.5
60 -4.0
61 -4.5
62 -5.0
63 -5.5
64 -6.0
65 -6.5
66 -7.0
67 -7.5
68 -8.0
69 -8.5
70 -9.0
71 -9.5
72 -10.0
73 -10.5
74 -11.0
75 -11.5
76 -12.0
77 -12.5
78 -13.0
79 -13.5
80 -14.0
81 -14.5
82 -15.0
Code Receive Level (dB)
Matrix
The on-hook speed specified are measured from the time the on hook bit is cleared until loop current equals zero.
Off-hook Speed:
This parameter decides the time to settle the line transients after which transmission or reception can occur.
Current Limiting Mode:
This parameter decides whether to limit the loop current or not.
By enabling the Current limiting mode, it will limit the loop current to maximum of 60mA.
Minimum Operational Loop Current:
This parameter sets the minimum loop current at which DAA can operate.
TIP/Ring Voltage Adjustment:
This parameter adjusts the TIP/RING voltage on the line side.
Countries where Low voltage is required should use lower TIP/RING voltage.
Ringer Impedance:
20Mohm ringer impedance is provided on the line side by the DAA module.
Some countries like Poland, South Africa and Slovenia requires high ring impedance which is achieved by the
DAA module by setting to "Synthesized Impedance".
Ringer Threshold:
This parameter decides the level below which it would not generate the ring event and level above which it would
generate the ring event.
Code Meaning
1 <0.5msec (default)
2 3 msec (ETSI)
3 26 msec (Australia)
Code Meaning
1 512 msec
2 128 msec
3 64 msec
4 8 msec (default)
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable (default)
Code Meaning
1 10 mA
2 12 mA (default)
3 14 mA
4 16 mA
Code Meaning
1 3.1 V
2 3.2 V
3 3.35 V
4 3.5 V (default)
Code Meaning
1 High (default)
2 Synthesized
Code Meaning
1 13.5 - 16.5 Vrms
2 19.35 - 23.65 Vrms (default)
3 40.5 - 49.5 Vrms
Matrix
Following parameters are not applicable for Software Version2 TWT card:
Rx Gain
Tx Gain
Disconnect Tone Detection: Frequency1, Frequency-2 and Operator, are not applicable
On-Hook Speed
Off-Hook Speed
Current Limiting
Minimum Loop Current
Tip-Ring Voltage
Ring Impedance
Ringer Threshold
Disconnect Supervision - Open Loop Disconnect
AC Termination Impedance
Following impedance value would not be supported by software Version 2 of TWT card:
Rx CLI Type
Following CLI type would not be supported by Software Version 2 TWT card:
DTMF Out Dial following Table:
Gateway Application-Answer Signaling: Configure following parameters for the template corresponding to TWT
port. Refer chapter Gateway Application-Answer Signaling for more details.
Use?: Select '1' if Gateway Application-Answer Signaling feature is required on trunk and '0' if not required.
Caller ID type Meaning
4 First Ring, ETSI DTMF, Second Ring
5 Polarity Reversal, ETSI DTMF, First Ring
6 First Ring, FSK, Second Ring
7 Dual Tone-Alert Signal, FSK, First Ring
8 Ringing Pulse -Alert Signal, FSK, First Ring
9 Polarity Reversal, Dual Tone-Alert Signal, FSK, First Ring
10 Any DTMF format (without Start/stop code)
Code Programmed value-For both On Time or Inter Digit Pause Time (msec)
1 51
2 68
3 85
4 102
5 119
6 136
7 153
8 170
9 187
10 204
Matrix
DTMF String: Configure this with maximum 4, DTMF digits to be dialed while using Gateway Application-Answer
Signaling DTMF Digits, allowed for DTMF string are from (0 - 9), *, #, A, B, C, D. To program #, *, A, B, C, D use
following codes:
Category: In some countries, calls from VoIP to Public Network (PSTN, PLMN) are not allowed. To meet such
regulatory requirements, this parameter is programmed on the trunk as 1 to 3. Select Category '1' if the trunk port is
to be interfaced with PSTN or PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network). Select Category '2' if the leased line is to be
terminated in the trunk port. Select Category '3' if the port is to be used to interconnect two PBXs, e.g. QSIG. Refer
chapter Logical Partition for more details. Default is '1' for all templates.
How to program?
Programming a TWT Hardware Template
Use the following command to program the feature in a TWT Hardware Template:
Where,
Following table shows all the TWT hardware Template programmed by default for different countries:
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
* **
# ##
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
01 Enable 1 Normal 600 Tone 10PPS, 1:2 Any ETSI DTMF format 0 0 None 20 None
02 Enable 1 Normal 600 Pulse 10PPS, 1:2 Any ETSI DTMF format 0 0 None 20 None
04 Enable 1 Normal 600 Pulse 10PPS, 1:2 Any ETSI DTMF format 0 0 None 20 None
05 Enable 1 Normal 320 + (1050 || 230 nF) Tone 10PPS, 1:2 Any FSK V.23 format 0 0 None 20 None
06 Enable 1 Normal 600 Tone 10PPS, 1:2 Any FSK Bellcore format 0 0 None 20
Open Loop
Disconnect
08 Enable 1 Normal 900 Tone 10PPS, 1:2 Any ETSI DTMF format -2 dB +1 dB None 20 None
09 Enable 1 Normal
220 + (820 || 120 nF) and
220 + (820 || 115 nF) Tone 10PPS, 1:2 Any FSK Bellcore format -1.7 dB
+1
.2dB
None 20 None
10 - 49
Parameter
No./
Template
No.
same as Template 1
Tx
Gain
(dB)
Pulse Dial
Ratio
AC Termination Impedance
Rx Gain
(dB)
Rx CLI Type
Answer
Supervision
Pseudo
Answer
Supervision
Timer
(sec)
Disconnect
Supervision
Status
Service
Provider ID
Trunk Type Dial Type
Matrix

How to assign default values to a TWT Hardware Template?
Use the following command to default a Template:
5901-*
Where,
How to assign a TWT Hardware Template to a TWT?
Use the following command to assign a TWT Hardware Template to a TWT:
5903-1-TWT-Template Number
5903-2-TWT-TWT-Template Number
Where,
Note: Please use TWT Hardware Template - 8 for Philippines.
By default, Template 01 is assigned to all TWTs.
Important Points:
Call Disconnect Tone (CDT) detection will be insignificance if DISA is enabled on the TWT Port.
If DID and DISA both are enabled on any TWT port, and call gets routed using DISA feature, CDT Detection will not
be started even if enabled.
If DID and DISA both are enabled on any TWT port, and call gets routed using DID feature, CDT Detection will be
applicable as programmed.
'TWT Start Type' is Loop Start which is not programmable.
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
ON Time 1
(ms)
OFF Time 1
(ms)
ON Time 2
(ms)
OFF Time 2
(ms)
01 200 3 Disable Disable 400 No 25 750 750 750 750 1 1000 600 4
06 200 3 Disable Disable 480
+
620 500 500 500 500 1 1000 600 4
10 - 49
Frequency 2
(Hz)
OG call +
All IC call
States
other than
DID No
Digit Dial
State
DID No Digit
Dial State
Parameter
No./
Template
No.
Ring
Cadence
OFF Timer
(sec)
Speech
Delay Timer
(sec)
Pause Timer
(ms)
Disconnect Tone Cadence
First Cycle
(Cadence)
Subsequent Cycles
Frequency 1
(Hz)
Operator
Same as template No. 01
Open Loop
Disconnect
Timer
(ms)
DID
Disconnect
Tone
Detection
Timer
(sec)
Disconnect Tone
Detection
Flash
Timer
(ms)
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
Current Limiting
DTMF
Signal ON
Time
(ms)
DTMF Inter
Digit
Pause
Timer
(ms)
Minimum
Level
(dB)
Minimum
ON Time
(ms)
Minimum
OFF Time
(ms)
01 102 102 -4.5 34 68 < 0.5 8 X 3.5 High 13.5 - 16.5 0 X CCC 1
02 102 102 -4.5 34 68 < 0.5 8 X 3.5 High 13.5 - 16.5 0 X CCC 1
03 102 102 -4.5 34 68 < 0.5 8 X 3.5 High 13.5 - 16.5 0 X CCC 1
04 102 102 -4.5 34 68 < 0.5 8 X 3.5 High 13.5 - 16.5 0 X CCC 1
05 102 102 -4.5 34 68 3 8 X 3.5 High 13.5 - 16.5 0 X CCC 1
06 102 102 -10.5 34 68 < 0.5 8 X 3.5 High 13.5 - 16.5 0 X CCC 1
07 102 102 -4.5 34 68 < 0.5 8 X 3.5 High 13.5 - 16.5 0 X CCC 1
08 102 102 -4.5 34 68 < 0.5 8 X 3.2 High 13.5 - 16.5 0 X CCC 1
09 102 102 -4.5 34 68 < 0.5 8 X 3.2 High 13.5 - 16.5 0 X CCC 1
10 - 49
50 102 102 -4.5 34 68 < 0.5 8 X 3.5 High 13.5 - 16.5 0 X CCC 1
Category
Gateway Application -
Answer Signaling
Use?
DTMF
String
Minimum Loop
Current
(mA)
Ringer
Threshold
(Vrms)
Tip-Ring
Voltage
(Volts)
DTMFOut Dial
(Level = - 6.0dB, Fixed)
Parameter
No./
Template
No.
Same as Tempalte No. 01
PPDC
Ringer
Impednace
DTMF Detection
On-Hook Speed
(ms)
Off-Hook Speed
(ms)
Matrix
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Matrix
User Absent/Present
Whats this?
User can absent himself when he leaves his desk. Once the user has absented himself, no caller can call the user.
This feature enables the caller to know the user is absent and can call a second station.
How to make SLT/DKP user absent/present?
Sometimes a SLT/DKP user leaves his place assuming that he would be back after sometime. Later he could not come.
Since his SLT/DKP is in present mode the incoming calls could land on this station or any station can call him. All these
calls will not be answered since he is not present.
How to use it?
To make User Present:
104-User Password-1
Using above command DKP display looks like:
By default, User is present.
To make User Absent:
104-User Password-0
Using above command DKP display looks like:
Important Points:
When a caller calls an absent station the caller gets error tone.
Command will not work with default password.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Matrix
User Password
Whats this?
User does the programming for himself i.e customizing his own station by setting features like Alarms, Call Follow Me,
etc. For more details, please refer the individual topics.
ETERNITY provides the user security of its station from unauthorized use. It also helps user to use few important
features that are password protected.
Each station of ETERNITY can have a password. This password helps the user in using following features:
Call Follow Me.
Dynamic Lock.
DISA.
Walk-In Class of Service.
User Absent/Present.
Hot Desk.
User password is a 4-digit password. It cannot have either less than or more than 4 digits.
User password can be changed only from the station.
The default User password is 1111 for all the users.

The features requiring password dont accept the default password. Thus it is compulsory for the user to
change the User password if he wishes to use any of the features that are protected by the password.
In case the user has forgotten his password, the System Engineer(SE) or the System Administrator(SA) can clear the
password for any user.
How to use it?
Where,
New User Password is a number string of 4-digits.
By default, User Password is 1111.
User password is used while using following features:
Call Follow Me.
Dynamic Lock.
DISA.
Walk-In Class of Service.
User Absent/Present.
Hot Desk.
Please refer respective topics for better understanding.
Important Point:
You need not press 'Enter' key when 4 digits password is entered to access the phone settings menu for DKP.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
2 Dial 114-Old User Password-New User Password. Confirmation tone
Matrix
Video Call
What is this?
Video call can be set up if the service provider supports it.
The Video Conferencing equipment (VC) is connected at the NT Port of the PBX.
ETERNITY supports using of Video Phone for:
OG Call
IC Call
Conferencing
It supports this feature from both BRI-NT and PRI-NT ports.
Refer chapters ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI for more details.

Relevant Topics:
1. ISDN-BRI 573
2. ISDN-PRI 586
=X=X=
Matrix
Virtual Station
Whats this?
The ETERNITY provides a facility whereby many users can share one telephone instrument. Despite sharing a
telephone instrument, each user acts as a single user in terms of receiving calls and making calls. Each user is called
Virtual Station. It is called Virtual because the user does not have a physical station for himself/herself.
This feature finds its application in Laboratories, Common rooms, Hostels, Hospitals, etc. where it is difficult to provide
dedicated telephone instrument for each user due to lack of resources.
How it works?
The physical station is called Master Station whereas all the stations assigned to this master station are called Virtual
Stations.
A Master Station can be a SLT or DKP.
One Virtual station can have one master station.
All the calls made to Virtual Station ring on Master station.
All the calls made by the virtual stations are recorded in the memory of that station and the SMDR printout can be
taken for it.
The Virtual station can be assigned all the features that can be assigned to any normal station like Class of Service,
Toll Control, Call Forward, etc.
A Virtual Station can also forward its calls to VMS.
How to use it?
All the incoming calls for the virtual station land on the master station.
For making Outgoing calls, the Virtual Station needs to use Walk in Class of Service. Please refer Walk-In Class of
Service for more details.
The Virtual user is logged out from the master station as per the walk in Class of Service mode assigned to it.
How to program?
Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template for more details on programming the master port type and master port
for a station.
Relevant Topics:
2. Walk-In Class of Service 928
=X=X=
Matrix
VLAN Tagging
What's this?
LAN is defined as a single broadcast domain with Standard (IEEE802.1Q) VLAN is Virtual LAN.
If a user broadcasts information on his/her LAN, the broadcast will be received by every other user on the LAN.
VLANs allow to logically segmenting a LAN into different broadcast domains.
In order to extend VLAN's across different switches, a link called 'trunk' must interconnect the switches.
Now, when you want traffic from multiple VLANs to be able to cross a link that interconnects two switches, there is a
need to configure a LAN tagging method on the ports that supply the link.
To implement this feature in ETERNITY, a frame is tagged when it leaves VoIP Ethernet port of the ETERNITY with
information about the 'VLAN Id' that the frame belongs to.
How it works?
If you enable the VLAN, the ETERNITY will tag all the packets leaving the VoIP Ethernet port and also receives only
packets with VLAN tag.
If it is disabled, the packets are sent, untagged.
For Example:
The VoIP Ethernet port of ETERNITY is connected to the external switch in which multiple VLANs are configured.
Suppose 4 VLANs are configured in external switch VLAN1 (Marketing), VLAN2 (Accounting), VLAN3 (R&D) and
VLAN4 (HR). To limit the broadcasting only to marketing department, VLAN Id configured for that VoIP Ethernet Port,
will be '1'. Now when the frames will leave from the Ethernet port, the ETERNITY will add the VLAN Tag in frames
with VLAN Id '1'. When these frames will reach the port of external switch / router to which the VoIP Ethernet port is
connected, it will read the VLAN header and identify that frame belong to VLAN1 (Marketing) and will forward the
frame to VLAN1.
In above example, if you want to shift the user who is using the particular VoIP Ethernet port, to the other department
say HR, just change the VLAN Id to '4' and the ETERNITY will tag the frames leaving that VoIP Ethernet port with
VLAN Id, '4'.
Thus following parameters are required to be programmed for this feature:
Option for using (adding) VLAN Tag also called VLAN identifier-Yes or No.
VLAN ID.
How to program?
VLAN Flag
Use following command to choose VLAN, is to be used or not for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7775-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-VLAN Flag
7775-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-VLAN Flag
7775-*-VLAN Flag
Where,
By default, Don't Use VLAN.
VLAN ID
Use following command to program 'VLAN Id' for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7776-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-VLAN ID
7776-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-VLAN ID
7776-*-VLAN ID
Where,
VLAN ID is from 1 to 4095.
By default: 1.
VLAN Flag Meaning
0 Don't use VLAN
1 Use VLAN
Matrix
Important Point:
If VLAN tagging is enabled, and frames received on the VoIP Ethernet port, carrying VLAN Id other than programmed
for the VoIP Ethernet port, shall be discarded.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
Matrix
Voice Help
Whats this?
Users may not remember access codes for various features. The ETERNITY allows recording of voice help for
frequently used features.
With this feature, the users need to remember just once code for accessing the Voice Help. The user is guided on the
access codes for other features in the form of a voice message.
This facility can be used for any other application like remembering important phone numbers and passing on a small
message to colleagues.
How to use it?
Important Point:
A voice module must be spared for this feature. Please refer topic Voice Message Applications for more details.
Relevant Topic:
=X=X=
2 Dial 1090.
The ETERNITY plays voice
help.
Matrix
Voice Mail Integration
Whats this?
Any VMS/Auto-Attendant can be integrated with the ETERNITY. However this integration works well if the exchange
of information between the two is perfect. Generally, this integration works on two protocols: Tone Sensing and
Gateway. Tone Sensing relies on sensing of various Call Progress tones. Gateway uses DTMF digits to signify
various Call Progress events. The ETERNITY supports both Tone Sensing as well as the Gateway mode.
User can transfer the call on the mail box of the station by dialing the access code for 'Blind transfer to VMS'. Refer
chapter Call Transfer for more details.
ETERNITY supports:
External VMS
ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS 16
Note:
Refer separate manual for 'VMS Card' for more information.
Refer separate manual for Hotel Application for more information about Hotel/Motel applications of this feature.
External VMS
How to connect a VMS/Auto-Attendant to a PBX?
The ports of VMS/Auto-Attendant should be connected to the SLT ports of the ETERNITY using a single pair telephone
cable.
The figure given below shows connection of a VMS with the ETERNITY where only two VMS ports are interfaced.
How it works?
As shown in the figure, VMS is connected on two SLT stations. If all the calls are to be routed through VMS, PBX should
be programmed such that all the incoming calls land on VMS. Alternatively, PBX should be programmed such that
incoming calls land on other extensions.

When an incoming call lands on the VMS, the VMS processes the call and guides the caller to reach the desired station.
As stated earlier, integration of the ETERNITY with VMS or an Auto-Attendant works on two protocols viz. Tone Sensing
and Gateway.
Tone Sensing relies on sensing of various Call Progress tones. For example, when an incoming call lands on VMS
through the ETERNITY, it answers the call and prompts the caller to dial a station. Subsequently it senses the dialed
station number, keeps the caller on hold and dials the station number where the call is to be diverted. Then the VMS waits
for the ring back tone. It first senses the ring back tone and then waits for it to stop. As soon as the ring back tone stops
the VMS transfers the call to the dialed station. All this process involves sensing of various tones like ring back tone, hold
tone, etc. and hence is commonly called tone sensing. However, this method is not accurate.
To overcome this problem, ETERNITY offers Gateway mode.
Gateway uses DTMF digits to signify various Call Progress events. With Gateway mode, in the above example when the
VMS receives an incoming call, it answers the call. Then it prompts the caller to dial a station. It senses the dialed station,
keeps the caller on hold and dials the station where the call is to be diverted. On successful receipt of the dialed station,
the ETERNITY sends a defined code (signifying ring back tone) to the VMS. Depending upon the transfer type set for the
VMS, it either transfers the call or waits for the called party to respond. In the latter case, when the called party answers
the call, the ETERNITY again sends a defined code (signifying successful speech connection). The VMS detects this
code and transfers the call to the dialed station. Since codes (defined string of characters) are used for the transfer of
information, this method is very much reliable and near to perfect.
Matrix
ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS
How to connect ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS8/VMS16?
ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS can be inserted in any free slot of ETERNITY.
ETERNITY will automatically configure required number of SLT port as VMS ports.
The port name of all these VMS SLT Ports is assigned as 'Voice Mail'.
Also these SLT Ports (assigned to VMS) will be assigned Station Basic Feature Template number is '41'. Refer
chapter Station Basic Feature Template for more details.
The ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS supports maximum 512 mailboxes and each mailbox can store total of 254
messages.
The System shall automatically assign VMS group when ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS is installed. The default
VMS Group assigned is Routing Group number '49'. Refer chapter Routing Group for more details.
SA can place the Voice guided remote alarm call to the voice mail. Refer chapter Alarms and Digital Key Phone-Soft
Keys Programming for details of SA command.
How to use?
Assigning Mailbox to the station:
ETERNITY supports to assign or de-assign a Mailbox to the station.
From SA mode:
Dial 1072-005-Station Number-Code
Where,
Station number is flexible number of the station.
How to program?
Default IP Address of the Ethernet port of the ETERNITY ME/GE/PE Card VMS 16, is 192.168.001.131.
Step 1
Use following command to assign Destination Type for VMS group:
4601-Destination Type
Where,
By Default, Destination Type is Routing Group.
Step 2
Use following command to assign Destination for VMS group:
4602-Destination-#*
Where,
Destination is 10 digit maximum with digits 0-9, * and #.
By default, Destination is '49'
Please refer the topic Routing Group for details on programming. Take care to see all the stations programmed in the
Routing Group assigned as VMS Group are SLTs. Assigning 00 as routing group means no routing group is programmed
as VMS Group.
Code Meaning
0 De-assign mail box
1 Assign mail box
Destination Type Meaning
1 Routing Group
2 Number
Matrix
Step 3
How to assign an access code of your choice to VMS Group?
Access code is the code dialed from the dial phase to call the VMS group. The VMS group access code must be unique
and should not match with either SLT station number or DKP station number or any of the features available from the dial
phase.
Use the following command to program the access code for a VMS Group:
3114-1-VMS Group Index-Access Code-#*
3114-2-VMS Group Index-VMS Group Index-Access Code-#*
Where,
VMS Group Index is 1.
Access Code is maximum of 6 digits. If it is less than 6 digits, terminate it with #*.
By default, the Access Code of the VMS Group is 3931.
How to default the Access Codes?
Use following command to default the access code for a VMS Group:
3164-1-VMS Group Index
3164-2-VMS Group Index-VMS Group Index
3164-*
Where,
How to clear the Access Codes?
Use following command to clear the access code for a VMS Group:
3114-1-VMS Group Index-#*
3114-2-VMS Group Index-#*
3114-*-#*
Where,
Step 4
Use following command to know 'IP Address: Web Server Port' of VMS Card:
2131-Slot Number
Where,
Slot Number is from 01 to 16 (In which VMS Card is inserted).
Note:
This command can be issued from DKP only.
Relevant Topics:
3. Message Wait 626
4. QSIG 687
=X=X=
Matrix
Whats this?
ETERNITY can store various voice messages. These messages can be played back to the caller/user depending on the
situation. In case DID is activated on few trunk lines then it is possible to guide caller to reach his desired person using
this facility. A station user having access to personal alarm feature can record a relevant personal voice message for him
at his own.
Note:
Refer separate manual for VMS Card for more information.
Refer separate manual for Hotel Application for more information about Hotel/Motel applications of this feature.
The ETERNITY ME supports 8 voice modules of 16 seconds each. Please note that voice module 01 is reserved for
Music-on-Hold and hence it cannot be used for any other voice message application.
The ETERNITY GE supports 8 Voice Modules of 16 seconds each.
The ETERNITY PE supports 6 Voice Modules of 16 seconds each.
The voice messages can be of two types:
Once-Only.
Continuous.
Once only messages are played only once from start to end. Continuous messages also start from the beginning and
after reaching the end they are repeated all over again.
This facility can be used for different situations as enumerated below:
DID Greeting messages
During working hours
During lunch hours
During non-working hours
DID guidance messages
Dial message
Wrong dial message
RBT message
Busy message
No reply message
No dial message
Conference number message
Conference password message
Feature messages
Alarm
Security dial message
Help menu
Hold on music (recorded)
Message Wait
Dial tone message
Ring back tone message
Busy tone message
Error tone message
Confirmation tone message
Toll Control Messages
Greeting Messages
Trunk Auto Answer Message
Five voice messages can be played back simultaneously.
Applications of Voice Messages
Voice Messages for DID
Greeting message for working hours:
"Welcome to Cotton Software".
Greeting message for lunch hours:
Matrix
"Welcome to Cotton Software. This is lunchtime. Please call after 2.00 pm".
Greeting Message for non working hours:
"Welcome to Cotton Software. We are closed for the day. Please call later".
Dial Message:
"Please dial the desired station number".
Wrong Dial Message:
"Sorry you have dialed an invalid station number. Please dial a valid station number".
Busy Dial message:
"The station you have dialed is busy. Please hold the line or try any other station number".
No reply message:
"The station you have dialed is not responding. Please try another station".
No Dial message:
"Sorry you have not dialed any station number. Please wait while your call is transferred to the operator".
Conference Number Message:
"Please dial the Conference Number".
Conference Password Message:
"Please dial the Conference Password".
RBT Message:
"You have successfully dialed the required station".
Call Transfer Message:
"Transferring the call to the operator".
This message is played to the caller, when he doesn't dial any number and the call is transferred to the operator.
Voice Message for Alarm.
This feature is very useful in hotels where it is required to wake up guests at odd time. At the same time it is also required
to greet them. When the guest picks up the handset on getting ring, he is greeted with this recorded message.
Popular greeting message for alarms is:
"Good Morning, Sir. This is a wake up call. You may please call room service for any assistance. Thanks. Have a nice
day".
Voice Message for Music on Hold.
Normally, when a caller is kept on hold, he gets internal hold on music. This internal music can be replaced with the
external music (Please refer section Music on Hold (MOH)). But to feed external music, a separate music source is
required which may not be feasible all the time. However, this same requirement can be fulfilled using this feature. Any
message like advertisement of your company or any message related to your new plans can be recorded and can be
played back to the caller when he is kept on hold. This way, two jobs are done at a time; the operator can attend to other
call and the message, which otherwise you had to give to the caller, has reached him in a much better manner.
Messages for Music-on-Hold can be:
"Welcome to Progressive bearings. We are glad to announce that we are now an ISO 9001 company. Best and
continued efforts of our employees to deliver optimum quality products have made this possible".
Voice Message for Help menu.
Many people believe that features provided by the PBX are good. But they cannot use the features because when they
need features, they don't remember the codes. ETERNITY helps them by playing back the help menu. Codes of the
frequently used features can be recorded. Whenever the user needs to access a feature, he just presses a feature code
after lifting the handset. The system plays help menu of the codes. The user need not remember or refer manuals for
frequently used feature codes.
Help menu messages could be:
"17-For Auto-Redial".
"1073-For room monitor".
"1071-For personal memory programming".
"116-To retrieve a parked call".
If more features are used, a message can be recorded with all required codes. However, limitation of the capacity of the
voice message must be kept in mind.
Voice Message for Message Wait
Whenever there is a new message in the mailbox of the station user and if the VMS informs the ETERNITY about the
new message, the ETERNITY changes the dial tone of the station to stuttered dial tone. The ETERNITY offers a facility
to playback a message instead of the stuttered dial tone. An appropriate voice message can be played back to the station
user when he lifts the handset.
Message for Message Wait can be:
Matrix
"You have a new message in your Mailbox. Please access your mailbox".
Voice message for Dial tone
Normally, when a caller goes OFF-Hook to dial a station, he gets the dial tone for a fixed time interval (Dial Tone Timer).
If the caller does not respond within that time, he gets a error tone. The caller may not be aware of this instead if
message is played back, this time out situation can be ruled out.
Message for Dial Tone:
"Please dial the number immediately after the beep". Take care that the length of the message is shorter then the dial
tone timer.
Voice message for Ring Back Tone
When the caller dials a station, if the station is free, the caller gets a Ring Back Tone. Instead of the ring Back Tone, the
caller can be played a messages like:
"The station you have dialed is free. Please wait till the station responds". Take care that the length of the message is
shorter then Ring Back Tone Timer.
Voice message for Busy Tone
When a caller dials the station, if the station is busy, the caller gets a busy tone. The ETERNITY can be made to play
back message like:
"The station you have dialed is currently busy. Please dial after some time". Take care that the length of the message
is shorter then the Busy Tone Timer.
Voice message for Error Tone
When the caller performs a wrong operation or uses a feature without access, the error tone received can be replaced
by:
"Please check the number you have dialed".
Voice message for Confirmation Tone
The ETERNITY confirms the successful usage of features with a confirmation tone which could be replaced with
message like:
"The requested operation is performed successfully".
Voice Message for Toll Control
When a station dials out a number the Toll Control assigned to the station is checked. If the dialed number matches with
any of the number in the denied list this message could be played.
"Please check the number you have dialed. This facility is not available on your Telephone".
Voice Message for Trunk Auto Answer
This message will be played to the caller whose call is answered by the Auto Answer feature of the trunk.
"Please Wait! Your call will be attended shortly". ETERNITY supports 4 Trunk Auto Answer messages.
Voice Messages-Station User Greetings
ETERNITY supports two greeting messages. These messages are played on lifting the handset. Festival Greetings,
Reminders etc. can be played to users on lifting the handset. Messages like 'Happy New Year", "Meet in the Conference
Room at 4 O'clock" etc. can be recorded as greeting messages. Once the greeting message is in effect, on lifting the
handset greeting1 and greeting2 are played followed by dial tone.
Voice Guidance-Time Based Greetings
ETERNITY supports 3 time based greetings viz. Morning, Afternoon, Evening greetings. Message like "Good Morning",
"Good Afternoon", "Good Evening" can be recorded here.
These time based greetings are played before the DID greetings on a DID enabled trunk. On an AutoAnswer enabled
trunk these messages are played before the trunk AutoAnswer greetings.
Voice Messages can be recorded from any of the two sources:
Telephone Instrument.
Music System (External Music Source).
Use the following command to select the source to record the Voice Message:
2501-Code
Matrix
Where,
By default, Recording Source is 1.
How to program the system for voice message?
You can record up to 16 voice messages depending on the model of ETERNITY you are using. ETERNITY ME allows
you to record 16 voice messages, while ETERNITY GE allows you record 8 voice messages, and ETERNITY PE
allows you to record a maximum of 6 voice messages.
Each message has a duration of 16 seconds.
Step 1
Use following command to record a voice message:
2502-Voice Module
Where,
Voice Module is the voice module number from 1 to 8.
(The number of Voice Modules from 1 to 8 are assigned only from Switch Card software version V5R3 and above. For
switch cards below this version, maximum voice modules will be 16),
Note:
The voice module number varies according to the number of voice messages supported by the model of ETERNITY
you are using. If using ETERNITY ME the voice modules number would range from 01 to 16. If using ETERNOTY GE
the voice module number would range from 01 to 08. In ETERNITY PE the voice module number would range from
01 to 06.
How to record voice message?
Lift the handset.
Enter Programming Mode.
Issue command 2502-Voice Module.
When the command to record the message in VM is issued, SE will get dial tone (for 10 seconds maximum) and on
completion of dial tone, SE can immediately start recording the message. (Voice messages are stored in 16-bit PCM
format in the switch card)
Go on-hook on completion of message. It is also possible to record the voice message from the external music
source.
Step 2
Use following command to verify a message:
2503-Voice Module
Where,
If the audibility of the recorded message is not good enough then repeat the above procedure.
Step 3
Use the following command to define voice message duration for voice modules:
2504-Voice Module-Duration
Where,
Voice Module is 1 to 8.
Duration is from 00 to 16 seconds.
By default, Duration to Voice Modules is 16 seconds.
Step 4
Use the following command to assign a voice message application to a voice module:
2505-Voice Message Application Number-Voice Module
Where,
Voice Message Application Number is from 01 to 43.
Code Meaning
1 Telephone Instruments
2 Music System
Matrix
Note:
The Time Based Greetings will be played during following time periods:
Use following command to de-assign the voice module from voice message application:
2505-Voice Message Application Number-00
Where,
VM Application
Voice Message Greeting Time at which Greeting will be played
Morning Greeting 00:00 to 11:59
Afternoon Greeting 12:00 to 14:59
Evening Greeting 15:00 to 23:59
Number Meaning Once/Continuous (Not Programmable)
01 DID Greeting for Working Hours Once
02 DID Greeting for Break Hours Once
03 DID Greeting for Non-Working Hours Once
04 DID Dial Prompt Message Once
05 DID RBT Message Continuous
06 DID Wrong Dial Message Once
07 DID Busy Message Once
08 DID No Reply Message Once
09 DID No Dial Message Once
10 Conference Number Once
11 Conference Password Once
12 DID Call Transfer to Operator Message Once
13 Alarm/Reminder Message Continuous
14 Help Message Continuous
15 Message Wait Message Continuous
16 Security Dial Message Continuous
17 Internal Dial Tone Message Once
18 Internal Ring Back Tone Message Continuous
19 Internal Busy Tone Message Once
20 Internal Error Tone Message Once
21 Internal Confirmation Tone Message Once
22 Toll Control cum COS Violation Message Once
23 Station User Greeting Message 1 Once
24 Station User Greeting Message 2 Once
25 Morning Greeting Once
26 Afternoon Greeting Once
27 Evening greeting Once
28 Trunk Auto Answer Greeting 1 Once
32 Trunk RBT Message 1 Continuous
36 Trunk Auto Answer Busy Bye Message 1 Once
Matrix
By default, Voice Module assigned is 00.
How to assign station user greeting message to a Station?
This is done from SA mode only. From SA mode it can be done using the DSS key or by issuing the command.
Use following command to set/cancel greetings at a station:
1072-008-Flexible Number-Greeting Number-Code
Where,
Flexible Number is the station number.
How to record the voice message from external music port?
Connect the pre-amplified output of the music source from where the message is to be recorded to the external music
port. Please refer Music on Hold (MOH) for more details.
Enter Programming Mode.
Use following command to record the voice message:
2502-Voice Module Number
Where,
Voice Module Number is from 1 to 8.
Press the 'Play' button of the music source.
Go ON-Hook on completion of the voice message. Press 'Stop' button of the music source.
Important Points:
Voice module 01 is reserved for Music on Hold so please take care not to use this module for other voice message
applications.
Note for SE/Installer:
It is recommended to SE that while installing the ETERNITY, include the phrase 'Please press 0 to acknowledge the
Alarm and Reminder' as voice prompt. This is used to acknowledge the Alarm/Reminder call, placed on the station as
a Snooze call. Refer chapters Alarms and Reminder for more information.
Relevant Topics:
3. QSIG 687
4. Alarms 245
5. Reminder 709
6. Message Wait 626
=X=X=
40 DDI No Reply Message Once
41 DDI Busy Message Once
42 DDI Call Transfer to TLG Message Once
43 You have no messages Once
Greeting Number Meaning
0 Greeting Message 1
1 Greeting Message 2
Code Meaning
0 Cancel
1 Set
Number Meaning Once/Continuous (Not Programmable)
Matrix
VoIP Calling
What is this?
Matrix ETERNITY ME Card VoIP has one VoIP port with index number 26 for accessing from port-list.
One VoIP port supports 8 channels as per ETERNITY ME Card VoIP8 used.
ETERNITY supports maximum 16 VoIP ports.
Each VoIP port can be assigned only a Hardware Slot. As each card has max. one VoIP port, Port Offset is not
required to assign.
The OG calls made by the stations of the PBX or received from other networked PBXs, through the VoIP port can be
routed to the Internet using SIP protocol. For this, specific configuration can be made to select the SIP Trunk and to
dial the number.
Similarly IC calls received from the Internet through the VoIP port can be routed to the stations of the PBX or to the
networked PBX.
No SIP server within the PBX is supported.
User can configure the card for various applications as mentioned below:
Case 1:
Broadband Modem, Router, DSL Modem, etc. connected to the VoIP Port shown in figure:
Case 2:
The switch/hub/router connected to VoIP Port, forming the LAN of the Corporate as shown in figure:
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
ETERNITY
POTS
FXS1
IP
FXS2
DKP
Router
IP
VoIP Port
FXS1
FXS2
FXO
ETERNITY
POTS
DKP
Matrix
VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters
Whats this?
Some of the basic features like IP Address, PPPoE authentication etc. and advanced features like STUN, NAT and
QoS can be programmed for each Ethernet VoIP Port called, VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters.
Thus ETERNITY supports a total of 16 such ports.
Each VoIP Port can be assigned some important parameters, like:
Connection Type
PPPoE User ID
PPPoE User Password
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
DNS IP Address
DNS Domain Name
Enable/disable 100rel response
Notes:
If Connection Type = DHCP, followings fields will be non-editable:
PPPoE User ID
PPPoE User Password
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway IP Address
The current values will be displayed in the above fields except PPPoE User Password which will be displayed as
******
IP address and MAC address will be entered using dot.
How to program?
Connection Type
Use following command to program the Connection Type for the VoIP port:
7751-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Connection Type
7751-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-Connection Type
7751-*-Connection Type
Where,
Note:
If DHCP is enabled then IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Address, DNS IP Address will be replaced by the
dynamic values sent by the DHCP server. Also, the PPPoE functionality will be redundant.
PPPoE User ID
Use following command to program the PPPoE User ID of the VoIP Ethernet Port: (Applicable when Connection Type =
PPPoE is selected)
7752-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-PPPoE User ID
7752-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-PPPoE User ID
7752-*-PPPoE User ID
Where,
Connection Type Meaning
1 DHCP
2 PPPoE
3 Static IP
Matrix
You can use a string of maximum 16 characters with extended ASCII character set.
By default, PPPoE User ID is Blank.
PPPoE Password
Use following command to program the PPPoE password of the VoIP port: (Applicable when Connection Type = PPPoE
is selected)
7753-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-PPPoE Password
7753-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-PPPoE Password
7753-*-PPPoE Password
Where,
Enter a string of maximum16 characters with extended ASCII character set.
By default, PPPoE Password is Blank.
IP Address
Use following command to program the IP address of the VoIP Ethernet Port: (Applicable when Connection Type = Static
IP is selected)
7754-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-IP Address
7754-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-IP Address
7754-*-IP Address
Where,
Range is 000-255 for first three octets and 001-254 for fourth octet.
Enter a string of maximum 15 characters. Enter each octet in full. For e.g. To program IP address 192.168.10.11, enter
192168010011.
By default, IP Address of VoIP Ethernet Port is 192.168.001.116.
Subnet Mask
Use following command to program the Subnet Mask of the VoIP Ethernet Port: (Applicable when Connection Type =
Static IP is selected)
7755-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Subnet Mask
7755-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-Subnet Mask
7755-*-Subnet Mask
Where,
Enter a string of maximum 15 characters. Enter each octet in full. For e.g. To program Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0, enter
255255255000.
Gateway Address
Use following command to program the Gateway address of the VoIP Ethernet Port: (Applicable when Connection Type
= Static IP is selected)
7756-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Gateway Address
7756-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-Gateway Address
7756-*-Gateway Address
Where,
Enter a string of maximum 15 characters. Enter each octet in full. For e.g. To program Gateway Address 192.168.10.10,
enter 192168010010.
DNS IP Address
Use following command to program the DNS IP Address for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7757-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-DNS IP Address
7757-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-DNS IP Address
7757-*-DNS IP Address
Where,
Enter a string of maximum 15 characters. Enter each octet in full. For e.g. To program DNS IP Address 192.168. 205.20,
enter 192168205020.
DNS Domain Name
Use following command to program the DNS Domain Name for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7758-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-DNS Domain Name-#*
Matrix
7758-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-DNS Domain Name-#*
7758-*-DNS Domain Name-#*
Where,
Enter Maximum of 24 characters with ASCII characters.
Note:
Domain Name cannot be entered from SLT.
STUN Server Address
STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP through NATs) allows SIP client to know the public IP address and port of NAT router
behind which it is located.
Use following command to program STUN Servers Address for a VoIP Ethernet Port:
7759-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-STUN Address
7759-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-STUN Address
7759-*-STUN Address
Where,
STUN Address is string of 40 characters maximum.
By default, STUN Address is Blank.
STUN Server Port
Use following command to program the STUN Servers Port for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7760-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-STUN Port
7760-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-STUN Port
7760-*-STUN Port
Where,
VoIP Ehternet Port is from 01 to 16.
STUN Port is from 1024-65535.
By default, STUN Port is 3478.
STUN Port sepcifies the STUN Servers port for SIP. Change this value if the ITSP provides STUN Port number other
than the default.
UDP NAT Keep Alive
Network Address Traversal (NAT) allows multiple hosts in the network to share the single public routable IP address.
Means all the hosts in the private network shall be identified by single public IP address in the global IP cloud.
When the ETERNITY-VoIP Ethernet port is connected behind the NAT router and SIP messages are transported over
UDP then UDP NAT Keep Alive messages are to be sent to refresh the UDP binding in the NAT router. The ETERNITY-
VoIP port sends CR-LF (Carriage Return - Line Feed) message as UDP NAT Keep Alive message to refresh the UDP
binding. The CR-LF are generally ASCII characters which are widely used to indicate an end of line.
Enable UDP NAT Keep Alive:
Program this as enable, if you want the ETERNITY-VoIP port, to send Keep Alive messages periodically to refresh the
binding in the NAT router.
Use following command to enable/disable NAT Keep Alive for UDP on VoIP Ethernet Port:
7761-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive for UDP
7761-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive for UDP
7761-*-NAT Keep Alive for UDP
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port = 01 to 16.
By default NAT Keep Alive for UDP disable.
UDP NAT Keep Alive Interval (Seconds):
This is the Time period after which the ETERNITY-VoIP port should send Keep Alive messages. This time period should
be less than the binding timer of the router.
NAT Keep Alive for UDP Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Use following command to program NAT Keep Alive Interval for UDP on VoIP Ethernet Port:
7762-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive Interval for UDP
7762-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive Interval for UDP
7762-*-NAT Keep Alive Interval for UDP
Where,
NAT Keep Alive Interval for UDP is 001 - 999 seconds
By default, NAT Keep Alive Interval for UDP is 120 sec.
Name
Use following command to program Name for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7763-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Name-#*
7763-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-Name-#*
7763-*-Name-#*
Where,
Name is Maximum of 12 ASCII characters.
SIP QoS - DiffServ/ToS Level
Use following command to program SIP QoS - DiffServ/Tos Level for a VoIP Ethernet Port:
7765-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-DiffServ/ToS Level
7765-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-DiffServ/ToS Level
7765-*-DiffServ/ToS Level
Where,
SIP DiffServ/ToS Level is from 00 to 63. Default = 26.
RTP QoS - DiffServ/ToS Level
Use following command to program the RTP QoS - DiffServ/ToS Level for a VoIP Ethernet Port:
7767-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-RTP QoS - DiffServ/ToS Level
7767-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-RTP QoS - DiffServ/ToS Level
7767-*-RTP QoS - DiffServ/ToS Level
Where,
RTP DiffServr/ToS Level is from 00 to 63. Default = 46.
SIP Listen Port
Use this parameter only if Routers Public IP Address to be used.
Use following command to program SIP Listen Port for the SIP Trunk:
7768-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Listen Port
7768-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Listen Port
7768-*-SIP Listen Port
Where,
SIP Listen Port is from 1024 to 65535.
By default, SIP Listen Port is 5060.
RTP Listen Port
Use this parameter only if Routers Public IP Address is to be used.
Use following command to program RTP Listen port for VoIP Ethernet port:
7769-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-RTP Listen Port
7769-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-RTP Listen Port
7769-*-RTP Listen Port
Where,
RTP Listen Port is from 1024 to 65278.
Default: RTP Listen port is 8000.
SIP Invite Timer
'SIP Invite Timer' will be started when SIP call is initiated and will be stopped, when any response (Provisional or
Final) is received from the remote end or user goes ON-Hook.
On expiry of the timer, user will get 'Error Tone'.
Matrix
Use following command to program SIP Invite Timer for VoIP Ethernet port:
7770-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Invite Timer
7770-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Invite Timer
7770-*-SIP Invite Timer
Where,
SIP Invite Timer is from 010 to 180 seconds.
SIP Provisional Timer
SIP Provisional Timer will be started when the system receives the 'Provisional' response in response of the SIP call
made, and will be stopped, when any 'Final' response is received or user goes ON-Hook.
On expiry of the timer, user will get 'Error Tone'.
Use following command to program SIP Provisional Timer for VoIP Ethernet port:
7771-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Provisional Timer
7771-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Provisional Timer
7771-*-SIP Provisional Timer
Where,
SIP Provisional Timer is from 010 to 180 seconds.
LED for SIP Trunk
Use following command to assign LED to the SIP Trunk of VoIP Ethernet Port:
7772-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Trunk
7772-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Trunk
7772-*-SIP Trunk
Where,
DNS Connection Type
Use following command to set the DNS connection type for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7777-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-DNS Connection Type
7777-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-DNS Connection Type
7777-*-DNS Connection Type
Where,
By default: Static.
DNS (Domain Name Server) is used to resolve the IP address from the domain name.
DNS address can be used by the system, which is programmed Manually (static) or which is obtained Automatically
from DHCP server or PPPoE server as per the Flag set.
If Connection Type for the VoIP port is set to DHCP and DNS flag is set to static, the system will use the DNS address
programmed manually, and ignore the DNS address if provided by DHCP server.
If Connection Type for the VoIP port is set to DHCP and DNS server connection type 'flag is set to 'Obtain
Automatically', the system will use the DNS address provided by DHCP server. Request to PPPoE server for DNS
address alone is impractical.
If Connection Type for the VoIP port is PPPoE and DNS flag is set to Static, the system will use the manually
programmed DNS address even if DNS address is provided by PPPoE server.
If Connection Type for the VoIP port is PPPoE and 'DNS connection type' flag is set to Obtain Automatically, the
system will use the DNS address provided by PPPoE server. Request to DHCP server for DNS address alone is
impractical.
Thus it is summarized that:
If Connection Type for the VoIP port is set to DHCP or PPPoE and 'DNS connection type' flag is set to Obtain
Automatically, ETERNITY will use the DNS address provided by the same server which also has provided other
network parameters (IP address etc).
DNS Connection Type Meaning
1 Static
2 Obtain automatically
Matrix
If Connection Type for the VoIP port is Static and 'DNS connection type' flag is set to Static, the ETERNITY will use
the DNS address programmed manually. Request to DHCP or PPPoE server for DNS address alone is
impractical.
General Request Timer
'General Request Timer' will be used whenever any new transaction is created by SIP stack. For example,
'Registration'. On expiry of this timer, the SIP transaction made will be cleared.
It is same for all SIP Trunks
Use command to program SIP General Request Timer for the VoIP Ethernet port:
7779-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP General Request Timer
7779-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP General Request Timer
7779-*-SIP General Request Timer
Where,
SIP General Request Timer is from 10 to 60 Seconds.
By default, 20 Sec.
Router's Public IP Address:
'Router's Public IP Address' is programmed when, two way communication is required between two peers which are
located behind the NAT. This is required because if Private IP Address of VoIP Ethernet ports are used, the Router
can not.
For two way voice communication between two peers when both are located behind the NAT (irrespective of the NAT
type) and Router's Public IP Address has to be used, following points should be taken care on both sides:
Public IP address of router should be programmed in Router's Public IP Address in client.
RTP listening port (configured in VoIP Ethernet port parameters) of client should be forwarded by router to VoIP
Ethernet port IP address of client.
SIP listening port (configured in VoIP Ethernet port parameters) of client should be forwarded by router to VoIP
Ethernet Port IP address of client.
For last two parameters, the 'Listening port' of peer are mapped with router's 'Listening ports', using the feature 'Port
Forwarding' in router.
But the first parameter viz. Router's Public IP Address is programmed as a 'VoIP Ethernet Port' Parameter. It is used
only if 'Use Router's Public IP Address' option is selected for Source Port IP Address" parameter which is
programmed in chapter 'SIP Trunk Parameters'.
Router's Public IP Address will be applicable for both Proxy and Non-proxy SIP Trunk.
Router's Public IP Address will not be applicable, if Outbound Proxy flag is enabled for that SIP Trunk.
Following parameters will be displayed in Web page 'VoIP Ethernet Port Status' as:
Router's Public IP address
IP Address fetched using STUN
Mapped SIP Port will be displayed as "SIP Port fetched using STUN".
Example for using "Router's Public IP Address":
Consider the above scenario, in which the VoIP Ethernet Port (C) is connected behind the router R1 and R2. The call
is made on different networks (Network 1 and Network 2) i.e Router's public IP address is to be used.
Configuration of VoIP Ethernet Port, connected behind R1 is:
IP Address is 192.168.1.1.
The Public IP address for R1, is 102.98.54.69 (this address should be configured as 'Router's Public IP Address'
in the system).
RTP listening port is 8000
VoIP
Ethernet
Port of
ETERNITY
IP
A
B
C
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.2
Network 1
Network 2
102.98.54.69 199.54.74.92
R1 R2
Computer
Computer
Computer
Computer
A
B
C
VoIP
Ethernet
Port of
ETERNITY
Matrix
SIP listening port is 5060
Configuration of VoIP Ethernet Port connected behind R2 is:
IP Address is 192.168.1.2.
The Public IP address for R2, is 199.57.74.92 (this address should be configured as 'Router's Public IP Address'
in the system).
RTP listening port is 9000.
SIP listening port is 5060.
Now, to achieve the two way communication, also take care about following points for Router R1:
5060 Port (/UDP) in R1 should be forwarded to IP address of VoIP Ethernet Port connected behind it.
RTP listening port (/8000) should be forwarded to IP address of VoIP Ethernet Port connected behind R1.
Also take care about following points for Router R2:
5060 Port (/UDP) in R2 should be forwarded to IP address of VoIP Ethernet Port connected behind it.
RTP listening port (/9000) should be forwarded to IP address of VoIP Ethernet Port connected behind R2.
Use following command to program the Router's Public IP Address for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7780-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-IP Address
7780-*-IP Address
Where,
IP Address is of 15 character maximum.
By default, IP Address is Blank.
Use SIP Port fetched using STUN?
This parameter is programmed for the VoIP Ethernet Port card of ETERNITY, to decide whether to use SIP Port as
SIP listening Port in SIP signaling, by selecting the options from:
STUN mapped SIP port
Local Programmed SIP port
The programming is applicable for all SIP Trunks and for both peer to peer and proxy Trunks.
When the flag is set to '1', the system will use the port provided by the STUN server as SIP listening port in SIP
signaling.
When the flag is set to '0', the system will use the Local Programmed SIP listening port in SIP signaling.
The flag is set, on the basis of whether 'port forward' is enabled/disabled in the NAT router.
Use following command to program 'Use SIP Port Fetched using STUN?'
7781-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Code
7781-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-Code
7781-*-Code
Where,
By default, 'Use SIP Port Fetched using STUN'.
Note:
Defaults and range of Server Port fetched using STUN, will be same as programmed for STUN Server.
Enable/Disable sending of ICMP Message (when RTP is received on closed RTP (UDP) ports):
The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) is a network layer protocol like other protocols e.g. Internet Protocol
(IP) and is used to integrate the gateway with other IP devices like IP PBX.
When the source host (like IP Phone or ETERNITY VoIP port) makes the SIP call on the VoIP Ethernet port of the
ETERNITY (destination host) and if due to some reason, the request can not be served by the VoIP Ethernet port of
the ETERNITY, the Ethernet port will send the ICMP message to the source host, indicating the reason for not serving
the request. The reason may be like 'Network Unreachable' or 'Host Unreachable' or 'Protocol Unavailable' or 'Port
Unavailable'.
You can set the flag to 'Yes', to send the ICMP message and set to 'No', for not sending any message for the reason
for not serving the request from the source host.
Use following command to enable/disable 'Sending ICMP Message' on VoIP Ethernet Port:
Code Meaning
0 Do Not use SIP Port fetched using STUN
1 Use SIP Port fetched using STUN
Matrix
7782-*-Code
Where,
If flag is set to 'Yes', the VoIP Ethernet Port will send the ICMP message on receipt of packet on closed ports as usual.
If flag is set to 'No', the VoIP Ethernet Port will not send any ICMP message on receipt of packets on the UDP ports
which are not open.
By default, Sending ICMP message on VoIP Ethernet Port is 'Yes'.
Enable/disable 100rel response
In general, the provisional responses provide the information about the progress of the 'Request' message, and they
are not sent reliably every time. However for Interoperability and other important features, it is required to support,
reliable transmission of provisional responses. In ETERNITY, this is implemented by supporting sending and
receiving reliable provisional responses by '100rel and PRACK'. The '100rel' is a SIP extension and 'PRACK' is
'Provisional acknowledgement'.
SE can enable/disable sending and receiving of provisional responses reliably for a VoIP Ethernet Port.
Use following command to enable/disable '100rel response' on VoIP Ethernet Port:
7783-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-Code
7783- * - Code
Where,
This command is significant when the VoIP Ethernet Port of ETERNITY is acting as UAC (User Agent Client). Enable it if
for some feature, the system is required to send/ receive provisional response reliably else disable it.
By default, '100rel response' is disabled.
SIP TCP Port
SIP TCP port is the TCP listening port for SIP messages.
Use following command to program SIP TCP Port for VoIP Ethernet Port:
7784-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP TCP Port
7784-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP TCP Port
7784-*-SIP TCP Port
Where,
SIP TCP Port is from 1024 to 65535.
By default, SIP TCP Port is 5060.
TCP NAT Keep Alive
When the ETERNITY-VoIP Ethernet port is connected behind the NAT router and SIP messages are transported over
TCP then TCP NAT Keep Alive messages are to be sent to refresh the TCP binding in the NAT router. The ETERNITY-
VoIP port sends CR-LF (Carriage Return - Line Feed) message as TCP NAT Keep Alive message to refresh the TCP
binding. The CR-LF are generally ASCII characters which are widely used to indicate an end of line.
Enable TCP NAT Keep Alive:
Program this as enable, if you want the ETERNITY-VoIP port, to send Keep Alive messages periodically to refresh the
binding in the NAT router.
Use following command to enable/disable NAT Keep Alive for TCP on VoIP Ethernet Port:
7785-1-VoIP Ethernet Port - NAT Keep Alive for TCP
7785-2-VoIP Ethernet Port - VoIP Ethernet Port - NAT Keep Alive for TCP
7785-*- NAT Keep Alive for TCP
Where,
Code Meaning
0 No
1 Yes
Code Meaning
0 100rel response is disabled
1 100rel response is enabled
Matrix
By default, NAT Keep Alive for TCP disable.
TCP NAT Keep Alive Interval (Seconds):
This is the Time period after which the ETERNITY-VoIP port should send Keep Alive messages. This time period should
be less than the binding timer of the router.
Use following command to program NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP on VoIP Ethernet Port:
7786-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP
7786-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP
7786-*-NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP
Where,
NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP is 0001 - 9999
By default, NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP is 120 sec.
PPPoE Service Name
This is used by ETERNITY-VoIP card, in PPPoE signaling messages when the VoIP Ethernet Port tries to establish
PPPoE connection to ISP.
SE should program this field only if it is provided by the ISP to the user. Else it should be kept blank.
This command can be issued from DKP only.
Use following command to program PPPoE Service Name on VoIP Ethernet Port:
7787-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-PPPoE Service Name
7787-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-PPPoE Service Name
7787-*-PPoE Service Name
Where,
PPPoE Service Name can be of maximum 16 ASCII Characters.
If less than 16 Characters, terminate the command using #*
By default, PPPoE Service Name is Blank.
Important Point:
If you use the command to default the system, all the programmable parameters except Network Port Parameters
(viz. IP Address, Subnet Mask, Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, Host Name, Domain Name, DHCP Server) and the
region code will get default values. To default Network port parameters, click on 'Default' link in the "Master Ethernet
Port Parameters" page.
Relevant Topics:
1. VoIP Calling 917
3. MAC Address Cloning 619
4. Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port 405
5. VoIP Ethernet Port Status 927
7. Static Routing Table 752
=X=X=
NAT Keep Alive for TCP Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
VoIP Ethernet Port Status
What's this?
The user can quickly refer the VoIP Ethernet port parameter for each Ethernet Port, on the Web Page 'VoIP Ethernet
Parameter Status'.
These parameters can not be edited and will not be displayed on SLT.
Following parameters will be displayed for each VoIP Ethernet port (01 to 16).
Relevant Topics:
=X=X=
Parameter Display options
Ethernet link Up or Down
Stack State Idle, Constructing, Construct success, Construct fail, Construct error, Destructing
or Destruct success.
Host IP address Programmed static address or allocated by DHCP or PPPoE
Subnet mask Programmed Subnet mask
Gateway IP Address Programmed gateway address
DNS IP address Programmed DNS address
MAC Address Displays unique or clone MAC address for the Ethernet port.
NAT Status Enable or disable
NAT Type None, Public, Port Restricted, Restricted or Symmetric
Router's Public IP Address The programmed Address in 'VoIP Ethernet Port parameters' will be displayed, if
'Use Router's Public Address' is selected for Source port IP Address parameter in
chapter SIP Trunk Parameters.
IP Address Fetched using Stun The programmed Address in 'VoIP Ethernet Port parameters' will be displayed, if
'Use IP Address fetched using STUN' is selected for Source port IP Address
parameter in chapter SIP Trunk Parameters.
SIP port Fetched using STUN The programmed port number in 'VoIP Ethernet Port parameters' will be
displayed, if Use SIP Port fetched using STUN is programmed.
Matrix
Walk-In Class of Service
Whats this?
A user can make calls from some other stations according to his Class of Service and Toll Control programming.
A user can make calls from any other station and still put the calls in his account.
This feature is useful to managers when they move away from their desk. Using this feature, they can make long
distance calls from any other station where such dialing is not allowed.
This facility is protected with the user password.
Users can Walk-In from any port (SLT or DKP).
ETERNITY offers two types of Walk-In:
One call per Walk-In: The user is automatically logged out after a call.
Walk-In until Logout: The user remains Walked-In until he manually Walks Out or a second person walks in to the
same port.
How to use it?
To Walk-In
To Walk-Out
How to program?
A station of ETERNITY can be programmed for either type of walk-in. Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template
for more details.
Example:
A user is having station number 203. His user password is 3535. He is sitting at station number 205. He needs to
make a long distance call from 205 which is not allowed from 205.
The user with station number 203 can Walk-in 205 and make necessary calls from 205, dial 111-1-203-3535.
On dialing above command, the system gives confirmation tone. The user can dial the trunk access code to get trunk
dial tone during the confirmation tone. Alternately he can wait for the dial tone once the confirmation tone expires.
Important Points:
Only one person can Walk-In a station at a time.
Walk-In Class of Service is not allowed with default user password.
Walk-In Class of Service is available to all the stations.
Relevant Topics:
2. Virtual Station 904
=X=X=
2 Dial 111-1-Station-Password. Confirmation tone
Section 3: Appendices
Matrix
Appendix A: Technical Specification
System Resources
Optional Interfaces
The maximum number of ports supported by the GSM, SLT and DKP Cards may vary according to the type of
Power Supply used. Refer the following table for maximum ports supported with Universal Power (PSUNI) and
DC Power Supply in ETERNITY ME.
System Resources Description
Maximum Capacity
ETERNITY ME ETERNITY GE ETERNITY PE
10S 16S 3S 6S 12S 3SS 3SP 6SP
Total Card Slots 16 19 5 8 14 3 3 6
Universal Card Slots The Maximum Physical Card Slots 10 16 3 6 12 3 3 6
Total User Ports The Maximum Physical Ports
available
324 516 60 120 240 24 24 48
Maximum Ports
10S 16S 3S 6S 12S 3SS 3SP 6SP
SLT Ports To connect Single Line Analog
Telephones, Modem, Fax
320 512 60 120 240 24 24 48
DKP/DSS Ports To connect Proprietary Digital Key
Phones or DSS Consoles
128 128 48 96 128 24 24 48
TWT Ports To connect Two-Wire Trunk Lines 128 128 48 96 128 8 8 16
BRI Ports To connect to ISDN BRI Network or
Compatible Devices
32 32 12 24 32 - 6 12
T1/E1/PRI Ports To connect to T1 or E1 PRI Network or
ISDN PRI Compatible Devices
8 8 3 6 8 - 3 6
GSM Ports To connect to GSM Network 32 32 12 24 32 12 12 24
VoIP Channels To make VoIP (SIP) Calls using
Internet or Intranet
80 128 24 48 96 24 24 48
E&M Ports To connect E&M Network 80 128 12 24 48 - - -
Voice Mail System To configure as Voice Mail System 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Magneto Trunk Ports To connect Magneto Phones 128 128 12 24 48 - - -
Redundancy To provide Redundancy in case of
Primary Hardware Failure
Available
for Master
Card,
Switch
Card and
PS48VDC
- - - - - - -
Digital Input Port To connect Sensor or Panic Switch - - - - 1 1 1
Digital Output Port To connect to External Devices like
Door Lock or Relay Port
- - - - 3 3 3
Door Phone Port To connect Four-Wire Door Phones - - - - 3 3 3
Matrix
ETERNITY ME - Universal Power Supply (PSUNI)
Analog SLT ports supported for Short Loop with Loop Current programmed
ETERNITY ME DC to DC 400W Power Supply
Built-In Interfaces
Cards
GSM 32 ports in Talk mode
SLT
128 ports in Talk mode for short loop
DKP 96 ports maximum
Loop Current Programmed 20mA 25mA 30mA 35mA 40mA
Number of ports supported in talk mode (OFF-Hook short loop)
according to loop current programmed
250 200 175 150 128
GSM 112 ports in Talk mode
SLT 256 ports in Talk mode for short loop
DKP 128 ports
10S 16S 3S 6S 12S 3SS 3SP 6SP
DKP/DSS Port
To connect Proprietary Digital Key Phone
or DSS Consoles
4 4 - - - - - -
RS232 Port To connect Computer for SMDR Output 2 2 1 1 1 - 1 1
Parallel Printer Port To connect a parallel Printer 1 1 - - - - - -
Analog Input Port To connect External Music Device 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1
Analog Output Port To connect a Public Address System 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1
Digital Input Port To connect Sensor or Panic Switch 1 1 1 1 1 - - -
Digital Output Port
To connect to External Devices like Door
Lock or Relay Port
1 1 1 1 1 - - -
Ethernet Port
To access Web-Based Programming Tool
"Jeeves
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
USB Port Reserved for Future Application 1 1 1 1 1 - 1 1
Conference
Maximum No. of Simultaneous 3-Party
Conference
7 7 5 5 5 2 2 5
Voice Modules (16
Seconds each)
Auto Attendant and Other Voice Based
Applications
16 16 8 8 8 6 6 6
ETERNITY ME Cards Description
SLT32 32 SLT Ports card to connect 32 Single Line Telephones
DKP32 32 DKP Ports card to connect 32 Digital Key Phones /DSS Consoles
Matrix
TWT16 16 Two-Wire Trunk Ports card to connect 16 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
TWT8 8 Two-Wire Trunk ports card to connect 8 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
TWT8+SLT24 8 Two-Wire Trunk Ports and 24 SLT ports card to connect 8 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
BRI8 8 BRI Ports card to connect 8 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
T1E1PRI Dual Dual Port T1/E1PRI Card with QSIG Support to connect 2 T1/E1 PRI Lines or
Compatible Devices
T1E1PRI Single Single Port T1/E1PRI Card with QSIG Support to connect 2 T1/E1 PRI Lines or
Compatible Devices
GSM8 8 GSM Ports card to insert 8 GSM SIM Cards for GSM Network Connectivity
VoIP8 VoIP Card to connect to IP Network for making VoIP calls. Supports 8 VoIP (SIP)
Channels per Card
E&M8 8 E&M Ports card to connect to 8 E&M Lines
Magneto8 8 Magneto Ports to connect 8 Magneto Phones
VMS16 16 Port Voice Mail System with 512 Mailboxes to give mailbox facility to PBX users
ETERNITY GE Cards Description
DKP4+SLT16 4DKP Ports and 16 SLT Ports card to connect 4 Digital Key Phones and 16 Single
Line Telephones
TWT2+DKP2+SLT16 2 Two-Wire Trunk ports, 2 Digital Key Phone ports and 16 SLT ports to connect 2
Two-Wire Trunk Lines, 2 Digital Key Phones/DSS Consoles and 16 Single Line
Telephones
TWT2+DKP2+SLT8 2 Two-Wire Trunk ports, 2 Digital Key Phone ports and 8 SLT ports to connect 2 Two-
Wire Trunk Lines, 2 Digital Key Phones/DSS Consoles and 8 Single Line Telephones
TWT8+SLT8 8 Two-Wire Trunk Ports and 8 SLT Ports card to connect 8 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
TWT4+SLT16 4 Two-Wire Trunk Ports and 16 SLT Ports card to connect 4 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
TWT16 16 Two-Wire Trunk Ports card to connect 16 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
T1E1PRI Single Single Port T1/E1PRI Card with QSIG Support to connect 1 T1/E1 PRI Line or
Compatible Device
Channels per Card
ETERNITY PE Cards Description
ETERNITY ME Cards Description
Matrix
* Only in ETERNITY GE3SP and GE6SP
** Check Availability
Optional Items:
Technology:
SLT (Analog Station)
DKP4 + SLT4 4 DKP Ports and 4 SLT Ports card to connect 4 Digital Key Phones and 16 Single
Line Telephones
TWT4 + SLT4 4 Two-wire Trunk ports and 4 SLT (Analog phone) card
TWT4+ DKP4 CARD 4 Two-Wire Trunk Ports and 4 DKP Ports card to connect 4 Two-Wire Trunk Lines
and 4 Digital Key Phones/DSS Consoles
TWT2+ DKP2+SLT4 2 Two-Wire Trunk Ports, 2 DKP Ports and 4 SLT Ports card to connect 2 Two-Wire
Trunks, 2 Digital Key Phones/DSS Consoles, 4 Single Line Telephones
BRI2* 2 BRI Ports card to connect 2 ISDN BRI Lines or ISDN Compatible Devices
T1E1PRI Single* Single Port T1/E1PRI Card with QSIG Support to connect 1 T1/E1 PRI Line or
Compatible Device
Channels per Card
Multifunction** Multifunction card with:
3 Door phone ports to connect 4-wire Door Phones.
3 Digital Output Ports to connect External Devices like Door Lock.
1 Digital Input Port to connect a Sensor Device or Panic Switch.
Eon45, Eon42, Eon48 Digital Key Phone
EONSOFT PC based Digital Key Phone
DSS64, DSS72 Direct Station Selection unit for 64/72 ports
Type of Switching PCM/TDM, Digital Switching, 100% Non-Blocking
Processor 32-bit RISC
Architecture Distributed Processing
Slots Universal
Signaling Loop Start
Dialing DTMF and Pulse (10/20PPS)
Off Hook AC Impedance 600/900/Complex
Off Hook Current 39mA max
Loop Limit 1800 max (excluding Telephone)
On-Hook Voltage (Tip/Ring) -48V nominal
DTMF Detection ITU-T Q.24
Return Loss >18dB
Longitudinal Balance >50dB
Transmission Level Adjust Tx Gain: -3dB to +6dB, Rx Gain: -3dB to 6dB
Ringing Trapezoidal 60VRMS/25Hz and Sinusoidal 52VRMS/25Hz
REN 3
CLI Reception DTMF, FSK ITU-T V.23 and FSK Bellcore 202
Protection Over Voltage Secondary Protection
ETERNITY PE Cards Description
Matrix
DKP (Digital Station)
TWT (Two-Wire Trunk)
ISDN BRI
ISDN PRI
Physical Connector RJ45
Signaling Proprietary Digital (2B+D)
Interface Single Pair for Speech, Signaling and Power
Loop Limit 100
Speech Level Adjustable Tx and Rx Gain for Handset and Hands-free
Protection Over Voltage Secondary Protection
Signaling Loop Start
Loop Limit 1200
Off Hook AC Impedance 600/900/Complex
Pulse Dialing 10/20 PPS
DTMF Dialing and Reception ITU-T Q.23 and Q.24
Return Loss >18dB
Longitudinal Balance >50dB
Transmission Level Adjust Tx Gain: -15dB to +10dB, Rx Gain: -15dB to 10dB
CLI Reception DTMF, FSK ITU-T V.23 and FSK Bellcore 202
Call Maturity Delay and Polarity Reversal
Protection Over Voltage and Over Current Secondary Protection
Channels 2B+D
Personality Network (NT) and Terminal (TE)
Switch Variant
AT&T 4ESS, DMS-100, ETSI NET3, ITU-T Q.921, ITU-T Q.931, NTT INS64, US Ni1
(National ISDN1), France Vnx
Protection Solid state (Over Voltage and Over Current)
Built-in Secondary Protection
Physical Connector RJ45 (120)
Channels 2B+D and 30B+D
Personality Network (NT) and Terminal (TE)
Line Coding AMI/B8ZS for T1 and HDB3 for E1
Framing ESF for T1 and CEPT1 (with/without CRC) for E1
Switch Variant
AT&T 2ESS, AT&T 5ESS, DMS-100, ETSI NET5, ITU-T Q.921, ITU-T Q.931, NTT
INS64, US NI2 (National ISDN 2), QSIC ECMA, France VN
Supplementary Services QSIG ECMA
Matrix
E1 CAS:
T1 RBS:
GSM Trunks:
VoIP
Bit Rate 2048 kbps +/-50 ppm
Line Coding HDB3
Framing CEPT1 (with/without CRC) with CAS MF
Line Signaling ITU-T Q.400 - Q. 490
Register Signaling MFC-R2
Alarms I.431. G.732, ETSI 300-233
Bit Rate 1544 kbps +/- 50 ppm
Line Coding AMI and B8ZS
Line Signaling
FXS Loop Start, FXO Loop Start, FXS Ground Start, FXO Ground Start, E&M
(Immediate, Wink Start, Wink Start FGD)
Framing D4, ESF
Digit Dialing DTMF
Alarms ANSI T1.231
Performance ANSI T1.403, ANSI T1.231, AT&T TR54016
GSM Band (MHz) Quadband GSM850, EGSM900, DSC1800, PCS1900
Compliant ETSI GSM Phase2/2+
SIM Card One SIM per GSM Port
SIM Interface 1.8V, 3V
Transmission Power Class 4 (2W) at GSM850MHz and EGSM900MHz band
Class 1 (1W) at DCS1800MHz and PCS1900MHz band
RF Sensitivity Better than -106dBm
External Antenna One Antenna per 4 GSM Ports,1.8/3.0dBi, 50, SMA (male) Connector, Omni-
directional with cable of 3 meters length
VoIP Protocols SIP V2, SDP, RTP, RFC 2833
Network Protocol IPv4, TCP, UDP, DHCP, STUN
SIP Maximum 32 SIP Accounts per System, Outbound Proxy Support, Display Name, User
Name, Password, URL, Proxy URL, Register URL, Register Interval
NAT/Firewall Support PPPoE
Voice Codecs G.711 (A-Law, -Law), G.723, G.729AB, GSM-FR, iLBC
Line Echo Cancellation G.168 with 64-129ms Tail Length
Voice Dynamic Jitter Buffer (Adaptive), Comfort Noise Generation and Voice Activity Detection
Fax T.38 and Pass Through
Data Network Ethernet (RJ45) Port, Auto MDIX (10/100 BaseT)
Quality of Service Layer 3 DIFFServ and ToS
LED Indications 1-LED for System Status and 1-LED for Registrar Status
Matrix
E&M Trunks:
Auxiliary Ports:
Power Supply:
Mechanical:
Type Type IV and Type V
Signaling Pulse 10PPS, Pulse 20PPS, DTMF
Signaling Protocol Normal, Delay, Wink, CCS Signals
Speech Interface 2-wire and 4-wire
Analog Input Port 0.7Vmrs, Isolated, Push-type connector
Analog Output Port 0.7Vmrs, Isolated, Push-type connector
Digital Input Port Loop Sensing-Open/Close, 5mA, Push-type connector
Digital Output Port VDC Max.= 60VDC, IDC Max.= 0.15A, Push-type connector
Supply Input
Option 1: Mains 90-265VAC, 47-63Hz
Option 2: 48VDC +/-20%
Power Consumption ETERNITY ME10S 70W
ETERNITY ME16S 100W
ETERNITY GE3S 25W
ETERNITY GE6S 30W
ETERNITY GE12S 50W
ETERNITY PE3SS 75W
ETERNITY PE3SP 75W
ETERNITY PE6SP 75W
Dimensions (W x H x D) ETERNITY ME10S 48.20 x 33.00 x 29.90 cm (19.00 x 12.90 x 11.70 Inches)
ETERNITY ME16S 52.30 x 33.00 x 29.90 cm (20.50 x 12.90 x 11.70 Inches)
ETERNITY GE3S 18.00 x 16.30 x 25.40 cm (07.04 x 06.42 x 10.00 Inches)
ETERNITY GE3SS 29.8 x 5.2 x 30.0 cm (11.73 x 2.04 x 11.8 Inches)
ETERNITY GE3SP 29.8 x 5.2 x 30.0 cm (11.73 x 2.04 x 11.8 Inches)
ETERNITY GE6SP 43.9 x 5.2 x 30.0 cm (17.28 x 2.04 x 11.8 Inches)
Unit Weight ETERNITY ME10S 08.3 Kg (18.3 lbs)
ETERNITY ME16S 10.5 Kg (23.1 lbs)
ETERNITY GE3S 01.5 Kg (03.3 lbs)
ETERNITY PE3SS 1.55Kg (3.41 lbs)
ETERNITY PE3SP 1.57Kg (3.45 lbs)
ETERNITY PE6SP 2.51Kg (5.52 lbs)
Matrix
Environment:
Compliance
Installation ETERNITY ME10S Wall Mount, Table Top, 19" Rack (Optional)
ETERNITY ME16S Wall Mount, Table Top
ETERNITY GE3S Wall Mount, Table Top
ETERNITY GE6S Wall Mount, Table Top
ETERNITY GE12S Wall Mount, Table Top, 19" Rack (Optional)
ETERNITY GE3SS Wall Mount, Table Top
ETERNITY GE3SP Wall Mount, Table Top
ETERNITY GE6SP Wall Mount, Table Top, 19" Rack (Optional)
Operating Temperature
-10
o
C to +50
o
C (-14
o
F to +122
o
F)
Operating Humidity 5-95% RH, Non-Condensing
Storage Temperature
-40
o
C to +85
o
C (-40
o
F to +185
o
F)
Storage Humidity 0-95%, RH, Non-Condensing
EMI/EMC
Conducted Emission CISPR 22
Radiated Emission CISPR 22
Harmonic Current Emission IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage Flicker IEC 61000-3-3
Electro-static Discharge IEC 61000-4-2
Radiated Susceptibility IEC 61000-4-3
Electrical Fast Transient IEC 61000-4-4
Surge IEC 61000-4-5
Conducted Immunity IEC 61000-4-6
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8
Voltage Interruption & Dips IEC 61000-4-11
FCC
Conducted Emission: FCC Part 15 Sub Part B
Radiated Emission: FCC Part 15 Sub Part B
FCC68 US: MTXMFO1BETERNITY
TEC IR/IPX-01/03 APR2005
EC Directives R&TTE 1999/5/EC
LVD 73/23/EEC
EMC 89/336/EEC
Safety IEC 60950:2001 (First Edition)
Matrix
Appendix B: Packing List
Verify contents of the package shipped to you with the contents listed below. If any of the items is missing or damaged,
contact your Dealer/Reseller.
ETERNITY ME 10S/16S
* Factory fitted with the Power Card, Master Card and Switch Card.
If your model is ETERNITY 10SR with the Redundancy Option, there will be 2 Power Cards, 2 Master Cards and
2 Switch Cards factory fitted.
ETERNITY ME Cards
ETERNITY ME PS48VDC (Power Supply)
ETERNITY ME PSUNI
ETERNITY ME Switch
ETERNITY ME Master
Sr. No. Item Quantity
1 ETERNITY ME* 1
2 3-pin Power Cord, MC-4 Black 1
3. MDF Cable for ETERNITY ME Switch Card 1
4. Wall Mounting Nails 4
5. Mounting Template 1
6. User Card 4
7. Quick Start 1
8. CD (System Manual, Hospitality System Manual,
User Card, Quick Start and Voice Messages)
1
9. Warranty Card Set 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card PSV8VDC 1
2. 3-Way Battery Cable 1
3. Fuse Slow Blow 5x20 10 Amp 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card PSUNI 1
2. Cable Mains MC-4, 4 pin 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card Switch 1
2. MDF Cable (24 way - 10 pair) 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card Master 1
2. Cable (RJ45) 1
Matrix
1. ETERNITY ME Card SLT32 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cables 8
1. ETERNITY ME Card DKP32 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card TWT16 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card TWT8 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card TWT8+SLT24 1
Matrix
ETERNITY ME Card BRI8
ETERNITY ME Card BRI4
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Dual
ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Single
ETERNITY ME Card GSM8
ETERNITY ME Card GSM4
ETERNITY ME Card VoIP8
ETERNITY ME Card E&M8
ETERNITY ME Card E&M4
1. ETERNITY ME Card BRI8 1
2. MDF (36 way, 20 pair) Cable 2
1. ETERNITY ME Card BRI8 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Dual 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card T1E1PRI Single 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card GSM8 1
2. GSM Antenna External SMA 2
1. ETERNITY ME Card GSM4 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card VoIP8 1
2. RJ45 Cable 1
1. ETERNITY ME Card E&M8 1
2. MDF Cable (36 way, 20 pair) 2
1. ETERNITY ME Card E&M4 1
Matrix
ETERNITY ME Card VMS16
ETERNITY GE
* Factory fitted with the Power Card and CPU Card.
ETERNITY GE Cards
1. ETERNITY ME Card Magneto8 1
2. MDF Cable (36-way, 20 pair) 1
1 ETERNITY ME Card VMS16 1
2. 1 GB USB Flash Drive* 1
3. RJ45 Cable 1
1 ETERNITY GE* 1
5. User Card 4
6. Quick Start 1
7
CD (System Manual, Hospitality System Manual,
1
1. ETERNITY GE Card SLT20 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card SLT8 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card DKP16 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card DKP8 1
Matrix
ETERNITY GE Card BRI4
ETERNITY GE Card T1E1PRI Single
1. ETERNITY GE Card DKP4+SLT16 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT8 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT8+SLT8 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT4+SLT16 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT16 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card TWT8 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card BRI4 1
2. MDF (RJ45) Cable 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card T1E1PRI Single 1
Matrix
ETERNITY GE Card GSM4
ETERNITY GE Card VoIP8
ETERNITY GE Card E&M4
ETERNITY GE Card VMS16
* Factory fitted
ETERNITY PE
* Factory fitted with the Power Supply Unit and CPU.
ETERNITY PE Cards
ETERNITY PE Card SLT8
ETERNITY PE Card DKP8
1. ETERNITY GE Card GSM4 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card VoIP8 1
2. RJ45 Cable 1
1. ETERNITY GE Card E&M4 1
1 ETERNITY GE Card VMS16 1
3. RJ45 Cable 1
1 ETERNITY PE* 1
6. User Card 4
7. Quick Start 1
8
CD (System Manual, Hospitality System Manual,
1
1. ETERNITY PE Card SLT8 1
1. ETERNITY PE Card DKP8 1
Matrix
ETERNITY PE Card DKP4 + SLT4
ETERNITY PE Card TWT8
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4 + SLT4
ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+ DKP4
ETERNITY PE Card TWT2+ DKP2+SLT4
ETERNITY PE Card BRI2
ETERNITY PE Card T1E1PRI Single
ETERNITY PE Card GSM4
ETERNITY PE Card VoIP8
1. ETERNITY PE Card DKP4+SLT4 1
1. ETERNITY PE Card TWT8 1
1. ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+SLT4 1
1. ETERNITY PE Card TWT4+DKP4 1
1. ETERNITY PE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT4 1
2 MDF (RJ45) Cables 3
1. ETERNITY PE Card BRI2 1
2. RJ45 Cable 1
1. ETERNITY PE Card T1E1PRI Single 1
2. RJ45 Cable 1
1. ETERNITY PE Card GSM4 1
1. ETERNITY PE Card VoIP8 1
2. RJ45 Cable 1
Matrix
ETERNITY PE Card VMS16
* Factory fitted
NEO10
EON42
EON48
EON45
1 ETERNITY PE Card VMS16 1
3. RJ45 Cable 1
1. NEO10 Phone Body 1
2. Handset 1
3. 6P6C Line Cord 1
4. 4P4C Spring Cord 1
5. User Guide 1
1. EON42 Phone Body 1
2. Handset 1
3. 6P6C Line Cord 1
5. EON42 User Card 1
2. Handset 1
3. 6P6C Line Cord 1
5. Foot Stand 1
2. Handset 1
3. 6P6C Line Cord 1
Matrix
DSS64
DSS72
EONSOFT
PPM4
1. DSS64 Console 1
2. Cable RJ45 1
1. DSS72 Console 1
2. Cable RJ45 1
3. Foot stand 1
1. EONSOFT Dongle 1
2. Handset with Spring Cord 1
3. Communication Cable 1
4. Screw m7/30 2
5. Screw Grip 2
7. EONSOFT CD 1
1. Matrix PPM4 1
2. Wall Mounting Screws 2
3. Wall Mounting Screw Grips 2
Matrix
Appendix C: How to Make the Telecom Earth
The Earth (Ground) is the most important safety procedure to prevent electrical shocks and fires. It protects from lightning
strikes, electrical transients, static discharges, electromagnetic interference and electrical hazards.
A proper earth must be in place to protect people and the system. The following explanation shows how a perfect
electrical earth can save lives.
In the above diagram, Vc = VS *Z2 / Z1 + Z2
Where,
Z1 is the stray impedance between the electrical parts of the Gadget and the Chassis.
Z2 is the stray impedance between the Chassis and the Earth.
If Z2 = 0 then VC = 0
This formula implies that if the impedance between the Chassis and the Earth is reduced to 0 then the Voltage on the
Chassis, i.e. VC, would be Zero and hence any person touching the enclosure will not get an electric shock. Hence Z2
should be made Zero.
This can be done by providing a perfect earth to the electrical equipment.
It is recommended that you provide a dedicated earth for the PBX/any other telecom equipment. This dedicated earth is
called the Telecom Earth (Ground).
Providing a separate Telecom Earth to the telecom equipment eliminates the possibility of any back-voltage on the earth.
Electrical Parts of the Gadget
Enclosure of the Gadget
A.C. Input
P
N
Vs Vc
Z1
Z2
Earth
System
Protective Earth
Terminal
CO Line
Lightning
Protectors
CO Line
Telecom Earth
Matrix
How to make a perfect Earth
Dig a pit of area 2 feet x 2 feet x 6 feet (L x B x D).
Get a copper plate of size 1.5 feet x 1.5 feet x 0.25 feet.
Connect a copper strip of size 1-inch wide, 3 mm thick and 6 feet length at the center of the copper plate by welding
or nuts and bolts.
Insert a G.I. pipe onto the copper strip till it reaches the copper plate.
Place this set up into the pit. Make sure that at least 4 inches of the G.I. pipe is above the ground level.
Fill the bottom of the pit with a 1-inch layer of charcoal and salt in the proportion of 3:1 (3 parts charcoal, 1 part salt)
and then cover with the soil.
Connect a bare 14 SWG copper wire (double) on the top of the copper strip and run it to the exchange room and
connect it on the bus bar.
The Bus bar is a copper strip, 4 inches long with 6 screws and nuts mounted on it. It has to be fixed on the wall in the
exchange room.
The earth wire of the Primary Protection Modules (PPM) should be connected to this Bus bar.
Water the earth at regular intervals.
Exchange Room
BUS BAR
G.1 PIPE
4 Inch
Pit of area 2x2x6
Copper strip 1 inch wide
x 3 mm thick x 6 mm long
Soil
1 layer of salt and charcoal 1:3 ratio
Copper plate 1.5x1.5 x 1/4 thick
Matrix
Appendix D: Troubleshooting
All servicing to be undertaken ONLY by qualified service personnel. There are no user serviceable parts inside the
unit.
Always switch off "MAINS" and "BATTERY" marked switches of the system before opening the system and remove
power cable from Mains plug, to avoid risk of electric shock.
ETERNITY is not turning ON
AC Mains:
Check the Mains Voltage.
Check the Mains Switch.
Check the Mains Fuse (6Amp Slow Blow, glass fuse provided in AC Mains socket of ETERNITY ME Card 10SAC/
16SAC).
Check the MOV (275/20).
Check for loose connection of PT3 connector (connecting AC Mains socket to ETERNITY ME Card 10SAC/16SAC).
Please contact authorized Matrix dealer.
ETERNITY ME Card PS48VDC:
Check the DC voltage of DC power source, it has to be 43-56V.
If FCBC is used, check battery voltage interfaced with FCBC, it has to be 43-56V.
Please check the fuse.
One Station is not working
Change the telephone instrument and check.
Check wiring of that Station.
When I call 2001 Station the call goes to 2002
Dial 130 from 2001 (your call might have been forwarded).
Station not ringing
Check ringer volume of the telephone instrument.
Try replacing the telephone instrument.
Dial 130 to disable call forward/call follow me feature.
Station found busy
Check whether hand-set is properly kept on the cradle.
Try replacing telephone instrument.
Check wiring.
Station cannot dial
Try replacing telephone instrument.
Ensure dialing is not disabled through programming.
Incoming Call does not land correctly
Ensure proper programming of trunk landing group for the trunk.
Check for Call Privacy from incoming calls.
Check the Time programmed in the PBX. This is a time sensitive feature.
CLI Number does not come on the Station
Please check up with your Telephone Company (Service Provider) for CLI facility.
Please check whether the Station where you are checking CLI function is programmed as CLI Phone.
There is lot of hum on AOP
Please check AOP port.
Please check the amplifier.
Please check for any open circuit in the wiring.
Please check for any mismatch of speaker and amplifier.
Digital Output Port does not operate
Please check the connections made.
Matrix
Please check for the polarity. Refer to the figure shown in topic Digital Output Port (DOP).
Security Dialer does not work
Please check the connections of the Panic Switch/Sensor to the Digital Input Port (DIP).
Please check the programming for Security Dialer.
Please contact authorized Matrix Dealer.
GSM Call not OK
Please check antenna connection with antenna port of ETERNITY ME Card GSM or ETERNITY ME Card GSM.
Please check GSM network registration, with SIMcard interface.
Please check Mobile Trunks programming in the Routing Group.
Select proper Routing Type selection as per Time Zone.
VoIP Call is not OK
Please check registration of SIP with Server of Service Provider.
Please check number dialing method is followed correctly.
Please check SIP trunks are programmed correctly in the Routing Group.
Please check proper Routing Type selection as per Time Zone.
=X=X=
Matrix
Appendix E: Features at a Glance
Abbreviated Dialing
Account Code
Alarms
Auto Call Back
Auto Redial
Back Ground Music
Barge-In
Call Cost Display
Call Chaining
Call Forward
Personal/Global Abbreviated Dialing 8-Location Code
Program Personal memory 1071-Location Code-Number-#*-TAC
Account Code by Number 1058-Account Code
Account Code by Name 1059-Account Name
Once Only Alarm 161-Hours-Minutes-1
Daily Alarms 161-Hours-Minutes-2
Cancel Once Only/Daily Alarm 161-#
Set/Cancel Voice Guided Alarm 163-Follow VMS Prompts
Auto Call Back-On Busy 2
Auto Call Back-On No Reply 2
Cancel Auto Call Back 102
Auto Redial 17
Cancel Auto Redial 1070
Enable/Disable Back Ground Music 1099
Barge-In 4
Last Ten dialed numbers Cost display 1075
Call Chaining 1050
Call Forward-All Calls to Another Station 131-Station/Department Group/VMS Group
Call Forward-All Calls to External Station 131-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*
Call Forward-If Busy 132-Station/Department Group/VMS Group
Call Forward-If Busy-All Calls to External Number 132-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*
Call Forward-If No Reply 133-Station/Department Group/VMS Group
Call Forward-If No Reply-All Calls to External Number 133-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*
Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply 134-Station/Department Group/VMS Group
Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply-All to External Number 134-Trunk Access Code-Dest. Number-#*
Call Forward-Dual Ring 1361
Disable Call Forward-Dual Ring 1360
Cancel Call Forward 130
Matrix
Call Park
Call Pick Up
Call Splitting
Call Transfer
Calling Line Identification Restriction
Cancel All Station Features
Conference 3-Party
Conference Dial-In
Conference Multiparty
Department Call
Direct Inward System Access
To Park a Call 115-Orbit Number
To Retrieve the Parked Call 116-Orbit Number
Call Pick Up-General 4
Call Pick Up-Selective 12-Station
Call Splitting (Toggle) Flash-1
Call Transfer to Station Speech with Station-Flash-Station (Transfer Target)-
OnHook
Call Transfer to Station (External Number) Speech with External Number-Flash-Station (Transfer
Target)-OnHook
Call Transfer to Trunk (External) Speech with External Number -Flash-#-TAC-External
Number (Transfer Target)-Flash-#
Call Transfer to Trunk Speech with Station -Flash-TAC-External Number-Go
OnHook
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) Flash-1078-Station
Enable/disable CLIR 103
Cancel all station features 1051
Conference 3-Party Flash-0
Conference-Unsupervised Flash-#
Schedule a Conference 194-Conference Number-Conference Password
Initiate a Conference 195-Conference Number-Conference Password
To include a station in a midway of conference 191
Cancel a Conference 196-Conference Number-Conference Password/190
Conference Multiparty Flash-191
To exclude a station from mid of conference 192
Terminate Conference 190
Conversation Recording Flash-1095
Department Call Department Number (3901-3916)
Enter DISA Mode 1079-Station Number-User Password
Matrix
Do Not Disturb
Dynamic Lock
Flashing on Trunks
Floor Service
Follow Me
Forced Answer
Hold
Hot Desking
Hotline
Interrupt Request
Last Caller Recall
Last Number Redial
Live Call Screening
Live Call Supervision
Set Do Not Disturb with Text Message 18-DND Message Number
Cancel Do Not Disturb 18-0
Set Dynamic Timer 142-User Password-Minutes
Change Toll Control Level 141-User Password-Level
Flashing on Trunks Flash-*
To access Floor Service 38
Set Call Follow Me 135-Station-User Password
Cancel Call Follow Me 130
Forced Answer 5
Forced Call Disconnection #*
Put the caller on Hold Flash
Retrieve the caller Flash
Set Hot Desk 1091-Your Station Number-User Password
Set Hotline 151-Station
Set Hotline Timer 154-Seconds
Hot Outward Dialing 152-Trunk Access Code
HOD with Number 153-Trunk Access Code-Number-#*
Cancel Hotline/HOD 150
Interrupt Request 3
Last Caller Recall 1092
Last Number Redial 7
To Activate LCS 1094-1
To Deactivate LCS 1094-0
Set Live Call Supervision 1098-Destination Station
Matrix
Maid-In
Meet Me Paging
Message Wait
Mini Bar
Missed Call
Mute
Operator
Paging
Raid
RCOC
Reminder
Room Monitor
Selective Port Access
Self Ring Test
System Administrator Mode
Maid Status from a Room 1054-Code
Meet Me Paging-Caller 1093-Page Zone Number
Meet Me Paging-Called Party 1093-Station Number of the Caller/AOP
Message Wait Set/Cancel 1076-Staion-Code
Message Wait Retrieval 1077
To check the utilities of the room 1056-Item Number-Quantity
Check Missed Call 1097
Mute 1052
To grab OG Trunk Bundle Group 0/5/6-OGTBG Index
Call to Operator 9
Paging 1074-Page Zone Number
Raid 5
RCOC in DISA Mode ** on dial tone
Set Reminder 162-DD-MM-YYYY-HH-MM
Cancel Reminder 162-#
Set/Cancel Voice Guided Reminder 164-Follow VMS Prompts
Room Monitor 1073-Station
Selective Port Access 69-Port Type-Port Offset
Self Ring Test 1057
Enter System Administrator Mode 1#92-SA Password
Exit SA Mode 1#92
Matrix
System Engineer Mode
Time Tables
Trunk Reservation
User Absent/Present
User Password
Voice Help
Walk-In Class Of Service
=X=X=
Enter System Engineer Mode 1#91-SE Password
Exit SE Mode 00
Change Time Zone 1053-Time Zone
Reserve a Trunk 6
Cancel a Reserved Trunk 102
User Absent 104-User Password-0
User Present 104-User Password-1
Change User Password 114-Old User Password-New User Password
Voice Help 1090
To Walk-In 111-1-Station Password
To Walk-Out 111-0
Matrix
Appendix F: System Commands
Abbreviated Dialing
Access Codes
Account Codes
Alarms
Alternate Number Dialing
Auto Call Back
Auto Redial
Program telephone number in a personal directory 1902-PM Group-Location Code-Number-#*
Clear telephone number from a location in a PM Group 1902-PM Group-Location Code-#*
Program a name in PM Group 1903-PM Group-Location Code-Name-#*
Clear a name from location in a PM Group 1903-PM Group-Location Code-#*
To assign PM Group to a SLT 1905-1-SLT-PM Group
To clear PM Group assigned to a SLT 1905-1-SLT-00
To assign PM Group to a DKP 1906-1-DKP-PM Group
To clear PM Group assigned to a DKP 1906-1-DKP-00
To program a TAC Index to PM Group 1904-PM Group-Location Code-TAC Index
To clear a PM Group 1901-1-PM Group
To program a telephone number in global directory 1801-Location Code-Number-#*
Clear telephone number from a location in global directory 1801-Location Code-#*
Program a name in global directory 1802-Location Code-Name-#*
Clear a name from a location in the global directory 1802-Location Code-#*
Program the OGTBG for global directory 1803-1-Location Code-OGTBG
Clear a location code in the global directory 1800-1-Location Code
Program the access code for features 3111-1-Feature Number-Access Code-#*
Assign default access code 3161-1-Feature Number
Program account name for the account code 4851-1-Account Code-Account Name
Program alarm/reminder ring timer 2201-Seconds
Program number of alarm attempts 2202-Number of Alarm Attempts
Program alarm attempt interval 2203-Alarm Attempt Interval
Assign destination port to the Hotel/Motel report 3701-Flag
Enable/disable snooze alarm/reminder 2204-Code
To assign an alternate group number to a location code 1804-1-Location Code-Alternate Number Group
To clear an alternated group number to a location code 1804-1-Location Code-000
Program auto call back ring timer 3801-Seconds
Program time duration between two trials for low priority 1704-Seconds
Program the number of trials for low priority 1705-Count
Program time duration between two trials for high priority 1706-Seconds
Program the number of trials for high priority 1707-Count
Program auto redial dial tone wait timer 1701-Seconds
Program auto redial RBT wait timer 1702-Seconds
Program auto redial ring timer 1703-Seconds
To choose the mode 5003-1-DOP-Mode
Program the scheduled on time at an index for a DOP 5004-1-DOP-Index-Scheduled ON Time
Matrix
Automatic Number Translation
Barge-In
Call Back on Mobile Port
Call Budget on Trunk
Program the scheduled off time at an index for a DOP 5005-1-DOP-Index-Scheduled OFF Time
Program the Turn DOP ON Response Timer for a DOP 5006-1-DOP-Turn DOP ON Response Timer
Program the Turn DOP OFF Response Timer for a DOP 5007-1-DOP-Turn DOP OFF Response Timer
To associated DIP port with the DOP port 5008-1-DOP-DIP
To program Dialed Number String for the Index of the ANT
Table
4751-1-ANT Table No.-Index-Dialed Number String-#*
To program Substitute Number String for the Index of the
ANT Table
4752-1-ANT Table No.-Index-Substitute Number String
-#*
To default the ANT Table 4750-1-ANT Table No.
To program Barge-In Timer 3803-Seconds
To Enable/Disable Call Back Mode for the Mobile Port 8010 - 1 - Mobile - Code
To program Call Back Timer for the Mobile Port 8011 - 1 - Mobile - Call Back Timer
To program Call Back Mode for the Mobile Port 8012 - 1 - Mobile - Call Back Mode
To assign Trusted Caller List to the Mobile Port 8013-1-Mobile-Trusted Caller List Number
To program Call Budget Type on TWT 3301-1-TWT-Budget Type
To program Call Budget Amount on TWT 3302-1-TWT-Budget Amount
To program Free minutes on TWT 3303-1-TWT-Minutes
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for TWT 3304-1-TWT-Call Budget Reset Mode
To program the date on which every month the call budget
consumed statistics should get reset
3305-1-TWT-Date
To reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for TWT
manually
3306-1-TWT
To program Budget Type on DS1 Port 6122-1-DS1-Budget Type
To program Budget Amount on DS1 Port 6123-1-DS1-Budget Amount
To program Free Minutes on DS1 Port 6124-1-DS1-Minutes
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for DS1 6138-1-DS1-Call Budget Reset Mode
consumed statistics should get reset on DS1
6139-1-DS1-Date
To reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for DS1
manually
6140-1-DS1
To program Budget Type on SIP 7733-1-SIP-Budget Type
To program Budget Amount on SIP 7734-1-SIP-Budget Amount
To program Free Minutes on SIP 7735-1-SIP-Minutes
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for SIP 7736-1-SIP-Call Budget Reset Mode
consumed statistics should get reset on SIP
7737-1-SIP-Date
To reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for SIP
Trunk manually
7738-1-SIP
To program Budget Type on Mobile 8019-1-Mobile-Budget Type
To program Budget Amount on Mobile 8020-1-Mobile-Budget Amount
To program Free Minutes on Mobile 8021-1-Mobile-Minutes
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for Mobile 8022-1-Mobile-Call Budget Reset Mode
consumed statistics should get reset on Mobile
8023-1-Mobile-Date
Matrix
Call Duration Control (CDC)
To reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for Mobile
port manually
8024-1-Mobile
To program Budget Type on BRI 6214-1-BRI-Budget Type
To program Budget Amount on BRI 6215-1-BRI-Budget Amount
To program Free Minutes on BRI 6216-1-BRI-Minutes
To program Call Budget Reset Mode for BRI 6217-1-BRI- Reset Mode
consumed statistics should get reset on BRI
6218-1-BRI-Date
To reset Call Budget consumed Amount/Minutes for BRI
Trunk manually
6219-1-BRI
Program the unit charge for first unit when 16 KHz
metering is used
2600-Unit Charge for First Unit
Program the unit charge for additional unit when 16 KHz
metering is used
2601-Unit Charge for Additional Unit
To select service charge type 2602-Service Charge Type
To program service charge 2603-Service Charge
To set the service charge percentage when is selected
based on the percentage
2604-Percentage
Program duration of first unit for a pulse rate type on
normal days
Program duration of additional unit for a pulse rate type on
normal days
2608-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of
Additional Unit
Load default normal pulse rate type 2606
Program cost of first unit for a pulse rate type on normal
days
2609-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of First Unit
Program cost of additional unit for a pulse rate type on
normal days
2610-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of Additional
Unit
Program duration of first unit for a pulse rate type on
holidays
Program duration of additional unit for a pulse rate type on
holidays
2613-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of
Additional Unit
Program cost of first unit for a pulse rate type on holidays 2614-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of First Unit
Program cost of additional unit for a pulse rate type on
holidays
2615-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of Additional
Unit
Load default holiday pulse rate type 2611
To program an area code 2620-Area Code Index-Area Code-#*
To clear an area code for an Index 2620-Area Code Index-#*
To program Pulse Rate Type for Pulse Rate Option of area
code index
2621-Area Code Index-Pulse Rate Option-Pulse Rate
Type
To program pulse rate for an area code 2621-Area Code Index-Pulse Rate Type
To delete the complete area code table 2622-Reverse SE Password
To program ignore digit count when SP_SP LCR is used 2623-Area Code Index-Ignore Digit Count
Program weekly off day 2630-Day-Code
Program holiday date 2631-Holiday Date Index-Date-Month
To clear a holiday date index 2632-Holiday Date Index
To program area code name 2633-Area Code Index-Name
To clear an area code name 2633-Area Code Index
To enable CDC for outgoing call 4202-1-CDC Table-Code
To enable CDC for incoming call 4203-1-CDC Table-Code
Matrix
Call Hold
Call Park
Call Pick Up
Call Progress Tones
Call Taping
Call Transfer
CLI Based Routing
To enable CDC for internal call 4204-1-CDC Table-Code
To assign an external number to a table (allowed) 4205-1-CDC Table-External Number
To assign an external number to a table (denied) 4206-1-CDC Table-External Number
To assign CDC time to CDC table 4207-1-CDC Table-CDC Timer
To assign disconnection flag to a CDC table 4208-1-CDC Table-Disconnection Flag
To default a CDC Table 4201-1-CDC Table
To enable/disable Global Hold flag 5318-Code
To change Call Hold Retrieval Timer 3805-Seconds
To change Call Park Timer 3809-Seconds
To change Call Park Release Timer 3810-Minutes
Set call park timer 3809-Seconds
Set call park release timer 3810-Minutes
To assign call pickup group for SLT 3901-1-SLT-Call Pickup Group
To de-assign call pickup group for SLT 3901-1-SLT-00
To assign call pickup group for DKP 3902-1-DKP-Call Pickup Group
To de-assign call pickup group for DKP 3902-1-DKP-00
To assign call pickup group for ISDN Terminal 3903-1-ISDN Terminal-Call Pickup Group
To assign call pickup group for DOP 3904-1-DOP-Call Pickup Group
To de-assign call pickup group for DOP 3904-1-DOP-00
To select CPTG type 3501-CPTG Type Number
To program dial tone timer 3502-Seconds
To program the ring back tone timer 3503-Seconds
To program busy tone timer 3504-Seconds
To program error tone timer 3505-Seconds
To program confirmation tone timer 3506-Seconds
To program the programming confirmation tone timer 3509-Seconds
To program the programming error tone timer 3508-Seconds
To select a dial tone 5307-Flag
To demonstrate call progress tones 3541-Code
To set demonstration timer 3542-Seconds
Program the port in whose mailbox the call is to be taped 4701-Station Type-Station
To enable/disable beeps during Call Taping 5332-Code
To program transfer while ringing timer 3806-Seconds
To program transfer-on busy timer 3807-Seconds
To program trunk-to-trunk inactivity timer 3808-Seconds
To program the incoming number in a CLI table 4101-Index-Telephone Number-#*
To clear a number from the CLI table 4101-Index-#*
To program name of calling party 4102-Index-Name-#*
Matrix
Class of Service (COS)
Clock Synchronization
Closed User Group (CUG)
Communication Ports
Conference Dial-In
Conference-Multiparty
Conflict Dialing
Customer Name
Daylight Saving Time (DST)
To clear a name of calling party 4102-Index-#*
To assign landing destination for the incoming number 4103-Index-Port Type-Port Number
To clear a location index in the CLI table 4104-1-Index
To enable/disable a feature in a COS group 1302-1-COS Group-Feature Number-Code
To default the COS group 1301-1-COS Group
To program the clock sources 5341-Clock Source Index-Port Type-Port Offset
To select 'System Clock Synchronization' 5342-System Clock Synchronization
To select the 'PLL Locking Mode' 5343-PLL Locking Mode
To program route code 4502-1-Route Index-Route Code-#*
To clear a particular route code 4502-1-Route Index-#*
To assign OGTBG to a router code 4503-1-Route Index-OGTBG
To program strip digit count for a route 4504-1-Route Index-Strip Digit Count
To program self route flag for a route 4505-1-Route Index-Code
To program maximum dialed digits to select router for a
route code
4506-1-Route Index-Maximum Dialed Digits
To clear an entry in a routing table 4501-1-Route Index
To set data transfer rate of a COM port 3201-Port-Speed
To set data bit of a COM port 3202-Port-Data Bits
To set parity of a COM port 3203-Port-Parity
To set stop bit of a COM port 3204-Port-Stop Bits
To set flow control of a COM port 3205-Port-Flow Control
To set default parameters of a COM port 3210-Port
To program the DSR sensing 3206-Port-DSR Sensing
To enable/disable beeps during conference 5331-Code
To program the Release Conference if Idle Timer 5355-Minutes
To program the release conference, if idle timer 5355-Minute
To program conflict dialing timer 5351-Seconds
To program the customer name 5401-Customer Name-#*
To clear the customer name 5401-#*
To Set RTC DST Mode using command 1010-DST Mode
To select DST Forward Time Adjustment Type using
command
1011-DST Forward Type
To set time for DST Forward Type 'Day-Month wise' option
using command
1012-Date-Month-Current Time-Advance Time
To set time for DST Forward type 'Date-Month wise' option
using command
1013-Ordinal-Day-Month-Current Time-Advance Time
Matrix
DDI Routing Table
Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port
Default Settings
Department Call
Digital Input Port (DIP)
Digital Key Phone-Operation
To select DST Backward Time Adjustment Type using
command
1014-DST Backward Type
To set time for DST Backward Type 'Day-Month wise'
option using command
1015-Date-Month-Current Time-Backward Time
To set time for DST Backward type 'Date-Month wise'
option using command
1016-Ordinal-Day-Month-Current Time-Backward Time
To Select the Region for Scheduled DST using command 1017-Region
To program the feature in a DDI Routing Table 6322-1-Table Index-Parameter Number-Value
To default a DDI table 6321-1-Table Index
To enable/disable debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port 7791-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Debug
To program Syslog Server Address on which Debug
parameter is to be sent for the VoIP Ethernet Port
To program Server Port Address on which Debug
parameter is to be sent for the VoIP Ethernet Port
To enable debug level for the VoIP Ethernet Port 7794-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Index-Code
To load the default parameters 5302-Reverse SE Password
To assign routing group to the department group 2001-1-Department Group Index-Routing Group
To clear the routing group assigned to the department
group
2001-1-Department Group Index-00
To program the access code for a department number 3113-1-Department Group Index-Access Code-#*
To default the access code for a department group 3163-1-Department Group Index
To clear the access code for a department number 3113-1-Department Group Index-#*
To program SIP-Id in the Digest Authentication Table 4118-Index-User ID
To program User Password in the Digest Authentication
Table
4119-Index-User Password
To enable/disable DIP 4902-1-DIP-Code
To program the DIP as active high/active low 4903-1-DIP-Code
To program the event sense time for a DIP 4904-1-DIP-Event Sense Timer
To assign default values to a DIP 4901-1-DIP
To enable headset connectivity on a DKP port 1213-1-DKP-Headset Connectivity
To assign number of loops to a DKP 1201-1-DKP-Loopcount
To set the ringer tone to a DKP 1202-1-DKP-Ringer Type
To set the ringer volume to a DKP 1203-1-DKP-Ringer Volume
To set the ringer mode to a DKP 1204-1-DKP-Ringer Mode
To set the ringer delay timer to a DKP 1205-1-DKP-Ringer Delay Timer
To program ringer auto acknowledge mode to a DKP 1206-1-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode
To program ringer auto acknowledge timer to a DKP 1207-1-DKP-Ringer Auto Ack Timer
To program the handset MIC volume to a DKP 1208-1-DKP-Handset MIC Volume
To program the handset speaker volume to a DKP 1209-1-DKP-Handset Speaker Volume Level
Matrix
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
To program the speaker phone MIC volume to a DKP 1210-1-DKP-Speaker Phone MIC Volume
To program the speaker phone speaker volume to a DKP 1211-1-DKP-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume
To set the key click volume for a DKP 1212-1-DKP-Key Click Volume
To program auto call answer mode of a DKP 1214-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode
To program auto call answer timer for a DKP 1215-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer
To adjust the LCD backlight level of EON42 1216-1-DKP-LCD Backlight Level
To adjust the LCD contrast level of EON42 1217-1-DKP-LCD Contrast Level
To adjust DTMF Transmit Level of DKP 1218-1-DKP-DTMF Transmit Level
To program LCD backlight OFF timer for EON42 1219-1-DKP-LCD Backlight OFF Timer
For setting the destination to play ring on EON42 & EON48 1220-1-DKP-Ring Destination
To set Rx level of Headset for DKP (Headset Speaker
Volume level)
1222-1-DKP-Headset Rx Level
To set Tx level of Headset for DKP (Headset MIC Volume
Level)
1223-1-DKP-Headset Tx Level
To enable/disable DTMF generation flag to a DKP 1241-1-DKP-DTMF Generation
To select the language for DKP 1224-1-DKP-Language
To assign a function to a DKP key 1252-1-DKP-Key Location-Function Type-Port
To copy a entire key map from one DKP to another DKP 1255-Source DKP-Destination DKP
To program the DKP Key Template 1261-1-DKP Key Template-EON Terminal Type-Key
Number-Function Type-Function Number
To program the name of the DKP Key Template 1262-1-DKP Key Template-DKP Key Template Name
To assign DKP Key template to a DKP 1221-1-DKP-DKP Key Template
To program the DOP as normally open/normally close 5002-1-DOP-Code
To program the desirable access code for a DOP 3104-1-DOP-Access Code-#*
To clear the access code of a DOP 3104-1-DOP-#*
To assign default the access code of a DOP 3154-1-DOP
To default the DOP parameters 5001-1-DOP
To set DID inactivity timer 2411-Seconds
To set DID answer wait timer 2412-Seconds
To set music timer 2413-Seconds
To set beeps timer 2414-Seconds
To set ring timer 2415-Seconds
To set busy tone timer 2416-Seconds
To set error tone timer 2417-Seconds
To enable/disable the Disconnect when Caller Doesn't Dial
a Digit' flag
5338-Code
To enable/disable the Disconnect DID call when Dialed
Number Busy:
5336-Code
To enable/disable Disconnect DID Call, when Dialed
Number does Not Reply
5337-Code
To program DISA idle state timer 2420-Seconds
To program DISA inactivity timer 2421-Minutes
To program CLI Number for DISA Application 4111- Index-Calling Number - #*
Matrix
Direct Station Selection Console (DSS)
Distinctive Rings
DS1 Trunks
To program Port Type and Port Number for DISA
Application
4112- Index- Port Type- Port Number
To assign a function to a key of DSS assigned to a DKP 1254-1-DKP-DSS-Key Location-Function Type-
Function Number
To clear a function of a key of DSS of a DKP 1254-1-DKP-DSS-Key Location-00-000
To demonstrate the ring 4003-Ring Type
To make default all ring type situation 4001
To assign ring type to a situation 4002-Situation-Ring Type
To default all DND Text Messages 1501
To Edit the Text Message 1502-Text Message Number-Text Message
To enable/disable the port 6101-1-DS1-Port Status
To assign a name to the DS1 port 6102-1-DS1-SP
To program the line coding mechanism for the DS1 port 6103-1-DS1-Line Coding
To program the framing mode for the DS1 port 6104-1-DS1-Framing
To program signalling type/line type of a DS1 6105-1-DS1-Line Type
To program interface companding of a DS1 6108-1-DS1-Interface Companding
To program auto receive equalization mode 6110-1-DS1-Mode
To program the receive equalization parameters of a DS1 6111-1-DS1-Receive Equalization Parameters
To program glare option for the DS1 port 6112-1-DS1-Glare Option
To program the idle code of a DS1 6113-1-DS1-Idle Code
To program overlap receiving timer 6114-1-DS1-Timer
To program orientation type for the DS1 port 6106-1-DS1-Orientation Type
To program source TON for a DS1 6126-1-DS1-Source TON
To program source NPI for DS1 6127-1-DS1-Source NPI
To program OG destination party TON or a DS1 6128-1-DS1-Destination TON
To program OG destination party NPI for DS1 6129-1-DS1-Destination NPI
To program to select whether the inband tones should be
feed on DS1-NT before sending DISCONNECT message?
6130-1-DS1-Flag
To program the dial tone flag for DS1 6115-1-DS1-Flag
To program the routing tone flag for DS1 6116-1-DS1-Flag
To reserved channels for data transmission on DS1 6135-1-DS1-Channel Count (Data)
To program number of channels reserved for OG 6136-1-DS1-Channel Count (OG)
To program number of channels reserved for IC 6137-1-DS1-Channel Count (IC)
To assign OG reference ID to DS1 6131-1-DS1-OG Reference ID
To assign IC reference ID for working hour 6132-1-DS1-IC Reference ID
To assign IC reference ID for break hour 6133-1-DS1-IC Reference ID
To assign IC reference ID for non-working hour 6134-1-DS1-IC Reference ID
To active/deactive near end loopback for DS1 6141-1-DS1-Loopback
To start/stop far end loopback test for DS1 6142-1-DS1-Code
To assign the port to performance report for online printing 6143-Port
To assign the port to performance report for offline printing 6144-Port
To program E1 line signaling variant for the DS1 6152-1-DS1-E1 Line Signaling Variant
To program E1 register signaling variant for the DS1 6153-1-DS1-E1 Register Signaling Variant
Matrix
To enable/disable E1 auto alarm for the DS1 E1 signaling 6154-1-DS1-Flag
To program the line build out parameters of a DS1 6162-1-DS1-Code
To enable/disable customer pulse width flag for DS1 T1
signaling
6171-1-DS1-Flag
To program customer pulse width word1 for DS1 T1
signaling
6172-1-DS1-Customer Pulse Width Word 1
signaling
signaling
signaling
To enable/disable customer pulse width flag for DS1 E1
signaling
6155-1-DS1-Flag
To program customer pulse width word1 for DS1 E1
signaling
signaling
signaling
signaling
To program the ISDN PRI switch variant 6107-1-DS1-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
To program forward tone maximum ON timer 7101-1-DS1-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
To program forward tone maximum OFF timer 7102-1-DS1-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
To program the maximum compelled cycle time 7103-1-DS1-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
To program pulse duration for pulsed signals 7104-1-DS1-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
To program the pulsed signal maximum wait timer 7105-1-DS1-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
To program first forward tone wait timer 7106-1-DS1-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
To program minimum MF signal persist timer 7107-1-DS1-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
To program to set DNIS END type (outbound) for DS1 7108-1-DS1-End of DNIS
To program DNIS end type (inbound) for DS1 7109-1-DS1-DNIS End Type
To program the ANI send position 7110-1-DS1-ANI Send Position
To program the Is ANI available (outbound) 7111-1-DS1-Is ANI Available
To program the positive response to Is ANI available
(outbound)
7112-1-DS1-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
To program the negative response to Is ANI available
(outbound)
7113-1-DS1-Negative Response to Is ANI Available
To program the end of ANI with presentation allowed
(outbound)
7114-1-DS1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed
To program Pause Timer 6109-1-DS1- Pause Timer
To program DTMF ON Time 6117-1-DS1-DTMF ON Time
To program DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer 6118-1-DS1- DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer
To program the end of ANI with presentation restrict
(outbound)
7115-1-DS1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict
To program the DNIS digit length 7116-1-DNIS Digit Length
To program the DNIS request position 7117-1-DS1-ANI Request Position
To program ANI length 7118-1-DS1-ANI Length
To program the Ask ANI available 7119-1-DS1-Ask ANI
To program positive response to ask ANI 7120-1-DS1-Positive Response to Ask ANI
To program negative response to ask ANI 7121-1-DS1-Negative Response to Ask ANI
To program end tone presentation allowed (inbound) 7122-1-DS1-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
Matrix
To program end tone presentation restrict (inbound) 7123-1-DS1-ANI End Tone Presentation Restrict
To program the ordinary subscriber 7124-1-DS1-Ordinary Subscriber
To program the priority subscriber 7125-1-DS1-Priority Subscriber
To program the maintenance equipment 7126-1-DS1-Maintenance Equipment
To program the operator 7127-1-DS1-Operator
To program the pay phone 7128-1-DS1-Pay Phone
To program the data transmission 7129-1-DS1-Data Transmission
To program the interception operator 7130-1-DS1-Interception Operator
To program the send next digit 7131-1-DS1-Send Next Digit
To program the send last but one digit 7132-1-DS1-Send Last but One Digit
To program the send last but two digit 7134-1-DS1-Send Last but Two Digit
To program the send last but three digit 7135-1-DS1-Send Last but three Digit
To program the address complete, change over to
reception of group B signals
7136-1-DS1-Address Complete, Change Over to
Reception of Group B
To program the send calling party category and change to
group C
7137-1-DS1-Send Calling Party Category and Change
to Group C
To program congestion in the national network 7138-1-DS1-Congestion in National Network
To program the send caller party's category 7139-1-Send Caller Party Category
To program the address-complete, charge, setup speech
of condition group B signals
7140-1-DS1-Address Complete, Charge, Setup Speech
Condition
To program repeat DNIS digits from beginning of group B
signals
7141-1-DS1-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
To program the send next ANI digit 7142-1-DS1-Send Next ANI Digit
To program the send special information tone 7143-1-DS1-Send Special Information Tone
To program the send special information tone and setup
speech condition
7144-1-DS1-Send Special Information Tone and Setup
Speech Condition
To program the subscriber line busy 7145-1-DS1-Subscriber Line Busy
To program the subscriber line free, charge 7146-1-DS1-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
To program the subscriber line free, no charge 7147-1-DS1-Subscriber Line Free, No Charge
To program congestion 7148-1-DS1-congestion
To program the unallocated number 7149-1-DS1-Unallocated Number
To program the subscriber's line out of order 7150-1-DS1-Subscriber's Line Out of Order
To program the call rejected, no indication of cause 7151-1-DS1-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
To program the alternative answer tone 7152-1-DS1-Alternative Answer Tone
To program the changed number (announcement on line) 7153-1-DS1-Changed Number (Announcement on
Line)
To program the send next ANI digit (group C) 7154-1-DS1-Send Next Digit
To program the request transition to group A and restart
from first DNIS
7155-1-DS1-Request Transition to Group A and Restart
from First DNIS
To program the address completed, change to reception of
Group B signal
7156-1-DS1-Address Completed, Change to Reception
of Group B Signal
To program the tone for congestion 7157-1-DS1-Congestion
To program the tone for request transition back to group A
and send next DNIS signal
7158-1-DS1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and
Send Next DNIS
To program the tone for request transition back to group A
and restart the last DNIS signal
7159-1-DS1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and
Restart the Last DNIS
To program the Cd bits of the DS1 port 7161-1-DS1-CD Bits
To program the invert/don't invert bit A for the DS1 7162-1-DS1-Invert Bit A
To program the invert/don't invert bit B for the DS1 7163-1-DS1-Invert Bit B
To program the invert/don't invert bit C for the DS1 7164-1-DS1-Invert Bit C
To program the invert/don't invert bit D for the DS1 7165-1-DS1-Invert Bit D
Matrix
E&M Feature Template
Emergency Detection and Reporting
Emergency Dialing
Flexible Numbers
Hold
IC Reference Table
Interrupt Request
To program the E1 metering bit for the DS1 port 7166-1-DS1-E1 Metering Bit
To program the metering pulse minimum timer for the DS1 7167-1-DS1-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
To program the clear back signal for the DS1 7168-1-DS1-Clear Back Signal
To program the release timer for the DS1 7169-1-DS1-Release Timer
To program line seizure acknowledge wait timer 7170-1-DS1-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
To program release guard timer 7171-1-DS1-Release Guard Timer
To program signaling type/line type of a DS1 6105-1-DS1-Line Type
To assign E&M Feature Template to DS1 6004-1-DS1-Template Number
To select B Bit value 7191-1-DS1-Code
To program B Bit value 7192-1-DS1-B Bit Value
To program CD Bit value 7193-1-DS1-CD Bit Value
To program to invert/don't invert Bit A for the DS1 port 7162-1-DS1-Invert Bit A
To program to invert/don't invert Bit B for the DS1 port 7163-1-DS1-Invert Bit B
To program to invert/don't invert Bit C for the DS1 port 7164-1-DS1-Invert Bit C
To program to invert/don't invert Bit D for the DS1 port 7165-1-DS1-Invert Bit D
To program the line build out parameters of a DS1 6162-1-DS1-Code
To program Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag 6119-1-DS1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
Flag
To program "Gateway Application-Answer Signaling DTMF
String".
6120-1-DS1-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
DTMF String
To program the feature in an E&M feature template 6002-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
To assign default an E&M Feature Template 6001-1-Template Number
To assign an E&M feature template to an E&M 6003-1-E&M-Template Number
To assign E&M Feature Template to DS1 6004-1-DS1-Template Number
To enable/disable emergency reporting 5110-Code
To program emergency numbers 3116-Index-Emergency Number-#*
To program an OGTBG for emergency number 3117-Index-OG Trunk Bundle Group
To program the access code for a SLT 3101-1-SLT-Access Code-#*
To clear the access code for a SLT 3101-1-SLT-#*
To assign the default flexible number of a SLT 3151-1-SLT
To program the access code for a DKP 3102-1-DKP-Access Code-#*
To clear the access code for a DKP 3102-1-DKP-#*
To assign the default flexible number of a DKP 3152-1-DKP
To program Call Hold Retrieval Timer 3805-Seconds
To default the IC Reference Table 6301-1-IC Reference Table Index
To program IC Reference Table Index 6302-1-IC Reference Table Index-feature Number-Value
To set interrupt request timer 3802-Seconds
Matrix
ISDN BRI
Jeeves
To assign a name to the BRI port 5405-1-BRI-Name
To enable/disable BRI port 6201-1-BRI-Port Status
To assigning a service provider to a BRI port 6202-1-BRI-SP
To program the BRI ISDN switch variant of the BRI port 6203-1-BRI-BRI ISDN Switch Variant
To program orientation type for a BRI port 6204-1-BRI-Orientation Type
To program the type of interface companding for the BRI 6205-1-BRI-Companding
To program the idle code for the BRI 6207-1-BRI-Idle Code
To set overlap receiving timer for BRI 6208-1-BRI-Timer
To program Pause Timer 6209-1-BRI- Pause Timer
To program DTMF ON Time 6210-1-BRI-DTMF ON Time
To program DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer 6211-1-BRI- DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
To get appropriate debug information 6291-1-BRI-Level-Code
To program a caller TON for the BRI 6221-1-BRI-Caller TON
To program a caller NPI for the BRI 6222-1-BRI-Caller NPI
To program a called party TON for the BRI 6223-1-BRI-Called Party TON
To program a called party NPI for the BRI 6224-1-BRI-Called Party NPI
To program an OG reference ID to a BRI 6231-1-BRI-OG Reference ID
To program an IC reference ID-WH on the BRI 6232-1-BRI-IC Reference ID
To program an IC reference ID-BH on the BRI 6233-1-BRI-IC Reference ID
To program an IC reference ID-NH on the BRI 6234-1-BRI-IC Reference ID
To program number of channels reserved for data
transmission
To reserve the number of channels for OG calls on BRI 6236-1-BRI-Channel Count
To reserve the number of channels for IC calls on a BRI 6237-1-BRI-Channel Count
To select TEI Negotiation on a BRI port 6238-1-BRI-TEI Negotiation Mode
To program TEI Negotiation value when programmed as
Fixed
6239-1-BRI-TEI Value
To program access code for ISDN terminal 3103-1-ISDN Terminal-Access Code-#*
To default access code for ISDN terminal 3153-1-ISDN Terminal
To assign a BRI software port to ISDN terminal 7301-1-ISDN Terminal-BRI
To de-assign a BRI software port to ISDN terminal 7301-1-ISDN Terminal-00
To assign personal directory to an ISDN terminal 1907-1-ISDN Terminal-Personal Directory
To program Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag
6206-1-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
Flag
String".
6212-1-BRI-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
DTMF String
To program Layer 1 Mode for the BRI Port 6225-1-BRI-Line Type
To program web configuration IP address of master
ethernet port
To program sub net mask address of master ethernet port 2111-Address-Address-Address-Address
To program web configuration gateway IP address of
master ethernet port
To program web configuration primary DNS address of
To program web configuration secondary DNS address of
To program web configuration host name of maser
ethernet port
2115-Name
Matrix
Key Board Macro
Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based
Least Cost Routing-Number Based
Least Cost Routing-Time Based
Logical Partition
Live Call Screening
To program web configuration domain name of master
ethernet port
2116-Name
To enable/disable web configuration DHCP flag of master
ethernet port
2117-Flag
To program web configuration time out timer 2118-Time Out Timer
To program web configuration release for all web users 2119
To program web configuration release for selective web
user
2120-User
To create a macro 1810-Macro Index-Number String
To clear a macro 1810-Macro Index-#*
To program access codes for the macro 3115-1-Macro Index-Access Code
To clear access code 3115-1-Macro Index
To program to default access code for the macro 3165-1-Macro Index
To program LCR type for an OGTBG 1404-1-OGTBG-LCR Type
To program time zone index for mixed LCR 3421-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time
To program the number at number index for mixed LCR 3422-Number Index-Number String-#*
To clear a number index for mixed LCR 3422-Number Index-#*
To program the service provider sequence for the each
number and time zone
3423-Number Index-Time Zone Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-
SP4
To default mixed LCR 3420
To program the number at number index 3411-Number Index-Number String-#*
To clear a number string for a number index 3411-Number Index-#*
To program the service provider sequence for the each
number
To default number wise LCR table 3410
To program number string in the number index 3441-Number Index-Number String-#*
To clear number string from the number index 3441-Number Index-#*
To program the service provider sequence for each
number
To default SP-SP wise LCR table 3440
To program time zone index 3402-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time
To program the service provider sequence for the time
zone
3403-Time Zone Index-SP1-SP2-SP3-SP4
To default time zone wise LCR table 3401
To set Category for DS1 port 6121-1-DS1-Category
To set category for BRI Port 6213-1-BRI-Category
To set Category for Mobile port 8018-1-Mobile-Category
To define call permission between two Categories 5317-Category-Category-Flag
To program LCS timer 3811-Seconds
Matrix
MAC Address Cloning
Magneto Trunk Port
Master Time Zone
Message Wait
Mobile Port

Music on Hold
Name Programming
To enable/disable the MAC Cloning to be used for the VoIP
Ethernet Port
7773-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-MAC Cloning
To program the MAC Cloning on VoIP Ethernet Port 7774-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Clone MAC Address
To enable/disable Magneto Trunk port 6801-1-Magneto Trunk-Code
To program the master time zone for the system 4801-Code
To program Message Wait Ring Count 4403-Message Wait Ring Count
To program the message wait ring timer 4404-Message Wait Ring Timer
To program the message wait ring interval timer 4405-Message Wait Ring Interval Timer
To program status of mobile port 8000-1-Mobile-Flag
To assign service provider to the mobile port 8001-1-Mobile-SP
To set receive gain of the mobile port 8002-1-Mobile-Receive Gain
To set transmit gain of the mobile port 8003-1-Mobile-Transmit Gain
To configure the incoming call mode on the Mobile port 8005-1-Mobile-Mode
To select frequency band for mobile port 8009-1-Mobile-Mobile Frequency Band
To program Pause Timer for Mobile port 8014-1-Mobile- Pause Timer
To program DTMF ON Time for Mobile port 8015-1- Mobile -DTMF ON Time
To enable/disable debug on mobile port 8028-1-Mobile-Code
To program Network Registration Retry Count 8004-1-Mobile-Network Registration Retry Count
To program Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag 8016-1-Mobile-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
Flag
String".
8017-1-Mobile-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
DTMF String
To demonstrate music on hold 3551-Code
To select the type of music to be played when station are
kept on hold
3552-Code
To select the type of music to be played when trunks are
kept on hold
3553-Code
To select the type of music for background music 3554-Code
To select the format in which the system should store and
display the station Name
3615 - Code
To program a name of a SLT 5402-1-SLT-Name-#*
To clear a name of a SLT 5402-1-SLT-#*
To program a name of a DKP 5403-1-DKP-Name-#*
To clear a name of a DKP 5403-1-DKP-#*
To program a name of a TWT 5404-1-TWT-Name-#*
To clear a name of a TWT 5404-1-TWT-#*
To program a name of a BRI 5405-1-BRI-Name-#*
To clear a name of a BRI 5405-1-BRI-#*
To program a name of an E&M 5406-1-E&M-Name-#*
To clear a name of an E&M 5406-1-E&M-#*
Matrix
Network Selection for Mobile Port
OG Trunk Bundle
OG Reference Table
Operator
Paging
Peer-to-Peer Calling
To program a name of a DS1 5407-1-DS1-Name-#*
To clear a name of a DS1 5407-1-DS1-#*
To program a name of a mobile 5408-1-Mobile-Name-#*
To clear a name of a mobile 5408-1-Mobile-#*
To program a name of an ISDN terminal 5409-1-ISDN Terminal-Name-#*
To clear a name of an ISDN terminal 5409-1-ISDN Terminal-#*
To program a name of a SIP trunk 5410-1-SIP Trunk-Name-#*
To clear a name of a SIP trunk 5410-1-SIP Trunk-#*
To program a name of a Magneto trunk 5411-1-Magneto Trunk-Name-#*
To clear a name of a magneto trunk 5411-1-Magneto Trunk-#*
To program the network selection mode for the mobile 8007-1-Mobile-Code
To program network operator code in priority for mobile 8008-1-Priority-Network Operator Code-#*
To make default OGTBG 1401-1-OGTBG Number
To set OG trunk bundle 1402-1-OGTBG No-Destination Index-OG Trunk Bundle
To set rotation flag 1403-1-OGTBG Number-Flag
To program the desirable access code for a trunk access
index
3112-1-OGTBG Index-Access Code-#*
To clear the access codes for an OGTBG index 3112-1-OGTBG Index-#*
To assign default access code for a OGTBG index 3162-1-OGTBG Index
To program the feature in OG trunk bundle 6702-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number-Feature Number-
Code
To set default values for OG trunk bundle 6701-1-OG Trunk Bundle Number
To program an OG reference table 6312-1-OG Reference Table Index-Parameter Number-
Value
To default an OG reference table 6311-1-OG Reference Table Index
To assign a time table to an operator 1602-1-Operator-Time Table
To define an operator for working hour 1611-1-Operator-Routing Group
To define an operator for break hour 1612-1-Operator-Routing Group
To define an operator for non-working hour 1613-1-Operator-Routing Group
To default an operator 1601-1-Operator
To program station group in the page zone 2301-1-Page Zone-Station Group
To clear the station group assigned to paging zone 2301-1-Page Zone-00
To program the number string in peer-to-peer table 7801-1-Index-Number String-#*
To clear the number string for an index 7801-1-Index-#*
To program the destination address in peer-to-peer table 7802-1-Index-Destination Address-#*
To clear the destination address for an Index 7802-1-Index-#*
To program the name in peer-to-peer table 7803-1-Index-Name-#*
To clear the name for an index 7803-1-Index-#*
Matrix
Priority
Programming Using a Computer
RCOC
Real Time Clock
Region Code
Reminder
Routing Group
RTC Synchronization
To assign priority to SLT 3911-1-SLT-Priority
To assign priority to DKP 3912-1-DKP-Priority
To assign priority to ISDN Terminal 3913-1-ISDN Terminal -Priority
To assign priority to DS1 3914-1-DS1-Priority
To assign priority to E&M 3915-1-E&M-Priority
To assign priority to BRI 3916-1-BRI-Priority
To assign communication port for programming using
computer
2101-Code
To enable/disable programming through the
communication port
2102-Code
To enable RCOC on a SIP Trunk 7743-1-SIP-Code
To enable RCOC on DS1 Trunk 6145-1-DS1-Code
To enable RCOC on BRI Trunk 6220-1-BRI-Code
To enable RCOC on Mobile Port 8030-1-Mobile-Code
To change the RCOC Record Delete Timer 3521- Minutes
To change the Ring Back Tone Timer 3503-Seconds
To program the date format 1000-Date Format
To set the date 1001-Date-Month-Year
To select the Country for the time zone 1002-Time Zone
To set time 1003-Hours-Minutes-Seconds
To select the region 5301-Region Code
Program alarm/reminder ring timer 2201-Seconds
Program number of alarm attempts 2202-Number of Alarm Attempts
Program alarm attempt interval 2203-Alarm Attempt Interval
Assign destination port to the Hotel/Motel report 3701-Flag
Enable/disable snooze alarm/reminder 2204-Mode
To program the destination in the routing group 6502-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Port Type-
Port Number
To program the time for which each station in the group
should ring
6503-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Ring Timer
To program continuous or non-continuous ring for a station
in the group
6504-1-Routing Group-Destination Index-Flag
To program rotation method of a department group 6505-1-Routing Group-Rotation Method
To default a routing group 6501-1-Routing Group
To clear the destination in a routing group 6510-1-Routing Group
To enable/disable External VMS RTC Synchronization 3812-Code
Matrix
SIM PIN
To program routing group to receive the emergency call 5203-Routing Group
To program emergency numbers 5202-Index-Global Memory Index
To program the number of trials to be made to deliver the
emergency message
5206-Count
To program the time interval between two trials 5205-Time Interval
To assign time table for emergency condition 5207-Time Table
To program the delay dial timer 5204-Timer
To program the response type for working hours 5211-1-DIP-Time Zone-Response Type
To program the security dialing reporting flag 5220-Flag
To program routing group to receive the security reporting 5221-Routing Group
To default security dialing 5201
To change the SIM PIN for the mobile port 8006-1-Mobile-SIM PIN-#*
To assign a VoIP ethernet port to a SIP trunk 7701-1-SIP Trunk-VoIP Ethernet Port
To enable/disable a SIP trunk 7702-1-SIP Trunk-Status
To assign service provider for SIP trunk 7703-1-SIP Trunk-SP
To assign SIP user ID to a SIP trunk 7704-1-SIP Trunk-SIP User ID
To assign SIP registrar servers address to a SIP trunk 7705-1-SIP Trunk-SIP Registrar Server Address
To assign SIP registrar servers port to a SIP trunk 7706-1-SIP Trunk-SIP Registrar Server Port
To program re-registration timer for a SIP trunk 7707-1-SIP Trunk-Reregistration Timer
To program registration retry timer for a SIP trunk 7708-1-SIP Trunk-Registration Retry Timer
To program authentication user ID for a SIP trunks 7709-1-SIP Trunk-Authentication User ID
To program authentication password for a SIP trunk 7710-1-SIP Trunk-Authentication User Password
To program Source Port IP Address Selection 7711-1-SIP Trunk-Code
To program the preferred vocoders for a SIP trunk 7712-1-SIP Trunk-Preferred Vocoder Index
To program the DTMF option for a SIP trunk 7713-1-SIP Trunk-DTMF Option Index
to program number of 'Simultaneous Calls' allowed on the
SIP Trunk
7741-1-SIP-Simultaneous Calls
To program the fax option for a SIP trunk 7714-1-SIP Trunk-Fax Option Index
To enable/disable outbound proxy server for a SIP trunk 7715-1-SIP Trunk-Outbound Proxy
To program the outbound proxy server address for a SIP
trunks
7716-1-SIP Trunk-Outbound Proxy Server Address
To program the outbound proxy server port address for a
SIP trunks
7717-1-SIP Trunk-Outbound Proxy Server Port
To enable/disable send CLI on the SIP trunk 7718-1-SIP-Code
To configure Symmetric RTP logic to be used or not for the
SIP Trunk
7719-1-SIP Trunk-Flag
To program Pause Timer for the SIP Trunk 7720-1-SIP Trunk- Pause Timer
To assign the OG reference ID to SIP trunk 7721-1-SIP Trunk-OG Reference ID
To assign the IC reference ID to SIP trunk for WH 7722-1-SIP Trunk-IC Reference ID
To assign the IC reference ID to SIP trunk for BH 7723-1-SIP Trunk-IC Reference ID
To assign the IC reference ID to SIP trunk for NH 7724-1-SIP Trunk-IC Reference ID
To program DTMF ON Time for the SIP Trunk 7725-1- SIP Trunk -DTMF ON Time
To program DTMF Inter digit Pause Timer for the SIP
Trunk
7726-1- SIP Trunk - DTMF Inter digit Pause Time
To program Gateway Application-Answer Signaling Flag 7727-1-SIP-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
Flag
Matrix
SLT Hardware Template
Software Port and Hardware ID
Static Routing Table

Station Advance Feature Template
String".
7728-1-SIP-Gateway Application-Answer Signaling
DTMF String
To enable/disable Digest Authentication on the SIP trunk 7729-1-SIP Trunk-Digest Authentication
To Enable/Disable SIP Over TCP on SIP Trunk 7730-1-SIP-SIP Over TCP
To program Default Transport for Outgoing Message for
SIP Trunk
7731-1-SIP-Default Transport for OG Message
To enable/disable 'Add rinstance in REGISTER' message 7739-1-SIP-Flag
To enable/disable silence suppression for G.729 Vocoder
for SIP Trunk
7740-1-SIP-Flag
To program parameter in a SLT hardware template 5702-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
To default a SLT hardware template 5701-1-Template Number
To assign a SLT hardware template to a SLT 5703-1-SLT-Template Number
To program internal digit-digit wait timer 5352-Seconds
To assign hardware ID to a SLT software port 1101-SLT-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a SLT software port 1101-SLT-00-00
To assign hardware ID to a DKP software port 1102-DKP-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a DKP software port 1102-DKP-00-00
To assign hardware ID to DSS software port 1103-DKP-DSS-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to DSS software port 1103-DKP-DSS-00-00
To assign hardware ID to a TWT software port 1104-TWT-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a TWT software port 1104-TWT-00-00
To assign hardware ID to an E&M software port 1105-E&M-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to an E&M software port 1105-E&M-00-00
To assign hardware ID to a BRI software port 1106-BRI-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a BRI software port 1106-BRI-00-00
To assign hardware ID to a DS1 software port 1107-DS1-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to a DS1 software port 1107-DS1-00-00
To assign hardware ID to a mobile software port 1108-Mobile-Slot-Port offset on the Card
To clear the hardware ID assigned to mobile software port 1108-Mobile-00-00
To assign hardware ID to a VoIP software port 1109-VoIP Ethernet Port-Slot
To de-assign hardware ID to a VoIP software port 1109-VoIP Ethernet Port-00
To assign hardware ID to a Magneto software port 1110-Magneto Trunk-Slot-Port offset of the card
To de-assign hardware ID to a Magneto software port 1110-Magneto Trunk-00-00
To program Destination Address in Static Routing Table 7811-1-Index-Destination Address
To program Subnet Mask in the Static Routing Table 7812-1-Index-Subnet Mask
To program Gateway Address in the Static Routing Table 7813-1-Index-Gateway Address
To clear specific entries of the index of Static Routing Table 7814-1-Index
To program the feature in a station advanced feature
template
To default a station advance feature template 5601-1-Template Number
To assign a station advance feature template to a SLT 5603-1-SLT-Template Number
To assign a station advance feature template to a DKP 5604-1-DKP-Template Number
To assign a station advance feature template to an E&M 5605-1-E&M-Template Number
To assign a station advance feature template to a DS1 5606-1-DS1-Template Number
Matrix
Station Basic Feature Template
Station Message Detail Recording-Online
To assign a station advance feature template to an ISDN
Terminal
5607-1-ISDN Terminal-Template Number
To assign a station advance feature template to a SIP 5608-1-SIP-Template Number
To assign a station advance feature template to a BRI 5609-1-BRI-Template Number
To program a feature in a station basic feature template 5502-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
To default a station basic feature template 5501-1-Template Number
To assign a template to a SLT 5503-1-SLT-Template Number
To assign a template to a DKP 5504-1-DKP-Template Number
To assign a template to an E&M 5505-1-E&M-Template Number
To assign a template to a DS1 5506-1-DS1-Template Number
To easing a template to an ISDN Terminal 5507-1-ISDN Terminal-Template Number
To assign a template to a SIP trunk 5508-1-SIP Trunk-Template Number
To assign a template to a BRI 5509-1-BRI-Template Number
To assign destination port for Online SMDR-IC Call Record 2930-Code
To assign the IP Address to the Ethernet Port 2932-IP Address
To assign the IP Port 2933-IP Port
To assign a destination port for Online SMDR-Internal call
record
2830-Code
To assign destination port for Online SMDR-OG Call
Record
2730-Code
To program column position for serial number 8200-Column Position
To program field length for serial number 8201-Field Length
To program alignment for serial number 8202-Alignment
To program fill character for serial number 8203-Fill Character
To program reset for serial number 8204-Reset
To program column position for increment counter 8205-Column Position
To program reset for increment counter 8206-Reset
To program column position for property code 8207-Colume Position
To program field length for property code 8208-Field Length
To program property code string for property code 8209-Property Code String
To program column position for station number 8210-Column Position
To program field length for station number 8211-Field Length
To program alignment for station number 8212-Alignment
To program fill character for station number 8213-Fill Character
To program column position for trunk number 8214-Column Position
To program format type for trunk number 8215-Format Type
To program column position for date field 8216-Column Position
To program field length for date field 8217-Field Length
To program alignment for date field 8218-Alignment
To program fill character for date field 8219-Fill Character
To program date format for date field 8220-Date Format
To program date fill flag for date field 8257-Date Fill Flag
To program column position for time field 8222-Column Position
Matrix
Station Message Detail Recording-Posting
To program field length for time field 8223-Field Length
To program alignment for time field 8224-Alignment
To program fill character for time field 8225-Fill Character
To program time format for time field 8226-Time Format
To program time fill flag for time field 8258-Time Fill Flag
To program column position for answer duration field 8227-Column Position
To program field length for answer duration field 8228-Field Length
To program alignment for answer duration field 8229-Alignment
To program fill character for answer duration field 8230-Fill Character
To enable/disable the Filler char. flag for Answer Duration 8259-Filler Character Flag for Answer Duration
To program duration unit for answer duration field 8231-Duration Unit
To program column position for hold duration field 8232-Column Position
To program field length for hold duration field 8233-Field Length
To program alignment for hold duration field 8234-Alignment
To program fill character for hold duration field 8235-Fill Character
To enable/disable the Filler character flag for Hold Duration 8260-Filler Character Flag for Hold Duration
To program column position for speech duration field 8237-Column Position
To program field length for speech duration field 8238-Field Length
To program alignment for speech duration field 8239-Alignment
To program fill character for speech duration field 8240-Fill Character
To enable/disable the Filler char. flag for Speech Duration 8261-Filler Character Flag for Speech Duration
To program column position for called number field 8242-Column Position
To program field length for called number field 8243-Field Length
To program alignment for called number field 8244-Alignment
To program number format for called number field 8245-Number Format
To program column position for calling number field 8246-Column Position
To program field length for calling number field 8247-Field Length
To program alignment for calling number field 8248-Alignment
To program number format for calling number field 8249-Number Format
To program column position for DID digits field 8250-Column Position
To program field length for DID digits field 8251-Field Length
To program alignment for DID digits field 8252-Alignment
To program column position for remarks field 8253-Column Position
To program field length for remarks field 8254-Field Length
To program alignment for remarks field 8255-Alignment
To assign Destination Port for SMDR-OG Posting 8330-Code
To program SMDR OG Posting Protocol 8301-SMDR OG Posting Protocol
To set ENQ no response timer 8302-ENQ No Response Timer
To set ENQ no response retry count 8303-ENQ Retry Count
To set ENQ no response Retry Timer 8304-ENQ No Response Retry Timer
To set ENQ Retry Count 8305-ENQ Retry Count
To set ENQ Retry Time 8306-ENQ Retry Time
To set SMDR-OG posting Data response to Data Timeout 8307-Response to Data Timeout
To set Data Transfer Retry Count (No Response) 8308-Data Transfer Retry Count
To set Data Transfer Retry Time (No Response) 8309-Data Transfer Retry Time
To set Data Transfer Retry Count (Negative Response) 8310-Data Transfer Retry Count
To set Data Transfer Retry Time (Negative Response) 8311-Data Transfer Retry Time
To enable/disable ENQUIRE Signal 8312-ENQUIRE Signal
Matrix
To set the ENQUIRE character 8313-ENQUIRE
To set the ACK Character 8314-Set ACK Character
To program the NAK Character 8315-Set NAK Character
To set the Start of Packet string 8316-Start of Packet
To program the End of Packet string 8317-End of Packet
To enable/disable BCC Flag 8318-BCC Flag
To set SMDR-OG Posting Parameters to Default Value 8300
To program column position for serial number 8100-Column Position
To program field length for serial number 8101-Field Length
To program alignment for serial number 8102-Alignment
To program fill character for serial number 8103-Fill Character
To program reset for serial number 8104-Reset
To program column position for increment counter 8105-Column Position
To program reset for increment counter 8106-Reset
To program starting character for increment counter 8174-Starting Character
To program column position for property code 8107-Column Position
To program field length for property code 8108-Field Length
To program property code string for property code 8109-Property Code String
To program column position for station number 8110-Column Position
To program field length for station numbe 8111-Field Length
To program alignment for station number 8112-Alignment
To program fill character for station number 8113-Fill Character
To program column position for trunk number 8114-Column Position
To program format type for trunk number 8115-Format Type
To program column position for date field 8116-Column Position
To program field length for date field 8117-Field Length
To program alignment for date field 8118-Alignment
To program fill character for date field 8119-Fill Character
To program date format for date field 8120-Date Format
To program date fill flag for date field 8170-Date Fill Flag
To program column position for time field 8122-Column Position
To program field length for time field 8123-Field Length
To program alignment for time field 8124-Alignment
To program fill character for time field 8125-Fill Character
To program time format for time field 8126-Time Format
To program time fill flag for time field 8171-Time Fill Flag
To program column position for duration field 8127-Column Position
To program field length for duration field 8128-Field Length
To program alignment for duration field 8129-Alignment
To program fill character for duration fiel 8130-Fill Character
To program duration unit for duration field 8131-Duration Unit
To program duration fill flag for duration field 8172-Duration Fill Flag
To program column position for units field 8132-Column Position
To program field length for units field 8133-Field Length
To program alignment for units field 8134-Alignment
To program fill character for units field 8135-Fill Character
To program column position for amount field 8136-Column Position
To program field length for amount field 8137-Field Length
To program alignment for amounts field 8138-Alignment
Matrix
Station Message Detail Recording-Report
To program fill character for amounts field 8139-Fill Character
To program amount format for amount field 8140-Amount Format
To program amount fill flag for amount field 8173-Amount Fill Flag
To program column position for currency symbol field 8141-Column Position
To program field length for currency symbol field 8142-Field Length
To program alignment for currency symbol field 8143-Alignment
To program fill character for currency symbol field 8144-Fill Character
To program symbol for currency symbol field 8145-Symbol-#*
To program column position for call type indicator field 8146-Column Position
To program field length for call type indicator field 8147-Field Length
To program alignment for call type indicator field 8148-Alignment
To program number string for call type indicator field 8149-Number Index-1-Number String
To program text string for call type indicator field 8149-Number Index-2-Text String
To program column position for called location field 8150-Column Position
To program field length for called location field 8151-Field Length
To program alignment for called location field 8152-Alignment
To program column position for called number field 8154-Column Position
To program field length for called number field 8155-Field Length
To program alignment for called number field 8156-Alignment
To program number format for called number field 8157-Number Format
To program column position for account code field 8158-Column Position
To program field length for account code field 8159-Field Length
To program alignment for account code field 8160-Alignment
To program fill character for account code field 8161-Fill Character
To program column position for DID digits field 8162-Column Position
To program field length for DID digits field 8163-Field Length
To program alignment for DID digits field 8164-Alignment
To program prefix string (ac01) 8165-Code
To program column position for remarks field 8166-Column Position
To program field length for remarks field 8167-Field Length
To program alignment for remarks field 8168-Alignment
To assign default CDR format 8169
To program a country code 8321-Index-Country Code-#*
To program a location in country code 8322-Index-Country Code-#*
To start/stop SMDR Posting Process 8333-Code
To program the destination IP Address for Posting SMDR-
OG Call Record
To program the destination IP Port for Posting SMDR-OG
call Record
8332-Destination IP Port
To assign a destination port for SMDR-IC Report 2931-Code
To assign destination port for Online SMDR-Internal
Report
2831-Code
To assign a destination port for SMDR-OG Report 2731-Code
Matrix
Station Message Detail Recording-Storage
Station Group
System Activity Log
System Debug
To set SMDR storage mode (IC) 2901-Storage Flag
Store Normal Calls 2902-Flag
Store DID Calls 2903-Flag
Store Unanswered Calls 2904-Flag
Store Unanswered DID Calls 2905-Flag
Store DISA Calls 2906-Flag
Store Calls-Speech Duration More than 2907-Seconds
Store Calls-Unanswered Duration for more than 2908-Seconds
Store Calls-Hold Duration for more than 2909-Seconds
To default the incoming call storage filters 2915
To set SMDR storage mode (Internal) 2801-Storage Flag
Store Calls-Speech duration 2802-Seconds
To default the internal call storage filters 2815
To set SMDR storage flag (OG) 2701-Storage Flag
To assign an external list containing numbers for call
storage
2702-External List
To set the filter of call duration 2703-Seconds
To set the filter for call Units 2704-Unit
To default the outgoing call storage filters 2715
To set the call splitting flag 2716-Splitting Flag
To set the originating flag 2717-Originating Flag
To program a station group 6602-1-Station Group-Destination Index-Port Type-
Port Number
To default a station group 6601-1-Station Group
To program the storage flag to enable/disable SAL 6401-Storage Flag
To assign a port for online printing of SAL 6402-Port
To assign a port for offline printing of SAL 6403-Port
To default system activity log parameters for SAL 6410
To program a port for debug 2103-Port
To start/stop debug for required process 2104-Value
To start/stop state debug
2105-Port Type-Port Number Start-Port Number End-
Flag
To enable ETERNITY-GE Host debug 2181-1-Code
To enable ETERNITY-GE DSP Debug 2184-1-Code
To enable ETERNITY-GE DSP Debug 2184-2-Code
To initiate the debug of IO operations 2199-Slot Number-1-Port Number-Code
To program the IP Address of the Syslog Server 2178-Syslog Server IP Address
To program Port number on which ETERNITY shall send
debug to syslog server
2179-Syslog Server's Listening Port
Matrix
System Fault Log
System Parameters
System Security
T1 Maintenance
T1 RBS Parameters
To set DOP for SFL 6454-DOP
To enable/disable storage of faults 6451-Flag
To assign the port to system fault log-online printing 6452-Port
To assign a port to system fault log-offline printing 6453-Port
To assign Station Type to SLT 3921-1-SLT-Station Type
To assign Station Type to DKP 3922-1-DKP-Station Type
To assign Station Type to ISDN Terminal 3923-1-ISDN Terminal-Station Type
To restart the card installed in Universal Slot of the
ETERNITY
2187-Slot No
To restart the system 5300
To load default values of all system timers 5303
To know the software version/revision of the system 5304
To enable/disable form feed 5321-Code
To set the A-law/M-law 5322-Type
To monitor a port 5323-Slot-Port
To program the on/off time of the ETERNITY ME Card
Master buzzer
5308-ON Timer-OFF Timer
To enable/disable the watch dog 5309-Flag
To enable/disable "Alarm/Reminder notification to Operator
when Station is stand-by
5311-Flag
To enable/disable feature tone 5312-Feature Tone Flag
To program the end of dialing digit 5313-End of Dialing Digit
To program Caller ID digits to be considered as call from
Public Network
5314-Minimum Caller ID Digits
SLT Stand-by Notification to Operator 5333-Flag
To program Listening Port of Web Server 2121-Port
To select Hotel/Enterprise Mode 5315-Code
To program default Call Budget Amount 3710-Preset Call Budget Amount
To display 'MAC Address' on DKP 2122
To program Call Proceeding Tone Type for multi-stage
dialing
5311-Call Proceeding Tone Type
To change SE password 5306-New SE Password
To assign a new password to the SA 5310-New SA Password
To enable/disable T1 FDL on a DS1 port 6164-1-DS1-T1 FDL
To program the T1 FDL protocol for a DS1 port 6165-1-DS1-T1 FDL Protocol
To program the T1 line signaling variants for the DS1 port 6181-1-DS1-T1 Line Signaling Variants
To program T1 wink timer for DS1 6182-1-DS1-Wink Timer
To program the T1 wink wait timer for DS1 6183-1-DS1-Wink Wait Timer
To program the T1 wait wink timer for DS1 6184-1-DS1-Wait Wink Timer
Matrix
Time Tables
Trunk Reservation
TWT Hardware Template
VLAN Tagging
Voice Mail Integration
To program the T1 delay duration for DS1 6185-1-DS1-Delay Duration
To program the T1 start delay duration for DS1 6186-1-DS1-Start Delay Duration
To program the T1 DTMF digit timer for DS1 6187-1-DS1-DTMF Digit Timer
To program the T1 DTMF inter digit timer for DS1 6188-1-DS1-DTMF Inter Digit Timer
To start/stop debug the parameters for the DS1 port 6191-1-DS1-Level-Code
To enable DS1 port level debug 6192-1-DS1-1-Code
To program T1 register signaling variant for the DS1 port 6161-1-DS1-T1 Register Signaling Variant
To program digital pulse dial ratio for the DS1 port 6163-1-DS1-Code
To program a timetable 1052-1-Time Table-Day-TZ-Start Time-End Time
To program the timezone for SLT 1061-1-SLT-Time Zone
To program the timezone for DKP 1062-1-DKP-Time Zone
To program the timezone for ISDN Terminal 1063-1-ISDN Terminal-Time Zone
To program the timezone for TWT 1064-1-TWT-Time Zone
To program the timezone for E&M 1065-1-E&M-Time Zone
To program the timezone for BRI 1066-1-BRI-Time Zone
To program the timezone for DS1 1067-1-DS1-Time Zone
To program the timezone for Mobile 1068-1-Mobile-Time Zone
To program the timezone for SIP 1069-1-SIP-Time Zone
To program the timezone for Magneto 1070-1-Magneto Trunk-Time Zone
To default a time table 1051-1-Time Table
To program a feature in a trunk feature template 5802-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
To default a trunk feature template 5801-1-Template Number
To assign a trunk feature template to a TWT 5803-1-TWT-Template Number
To assign a trunk feature template to a BRI 5804-1-BRI-Template Number
To assign a trunk feature template to an E&M 5805-1-E&M-Template Number
To assign a trunk feature template to a DS1 5806-1-DS1-Template Number
To assign a trunk feature template to a Mobile 5807-1-Mobile-Template Number
To assign a trunk feature template to a SIP 5808-1-SIP-Template Number
To assign a trunk feature template to a Magneto trunk 5809-1-Magneto Trunk-Template Number
To program trunk first digit wait timer 5353-Seconds
To program trunk digit-to-digit wait timer 5354-Seconds
To program trunk reservation timer 3804-Minutes
To program the feature in a TWT hardware template 5902-1-Template Number-Feature Number-Code
To default a TWT hardware template 5901-1-Template Number
To assign a TWT hardware template to a TWT 5903-1-TWT-TWT Hardware Template Number
To choose VLAN, is to be used or not for the VoIP Ethernet
Port
7775-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-VLAN Flag
To program 'VLAN Id' for the VoIP Ethernet Port 7776-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-VLAN ID
To assign destination type for VMS Group 4601-Destination Type
To assign destination for VMS Group 4602-Destination-#*
Matrix
VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters
To program the access code for a VMS group 3114-1-VMS Group Index-Access Code-#*
To default the access code for a VMS group 3164-1-VMS Group Index
To clear the access code for a VMS group 3114-1-VMS Group Index-#*
To know 'IP Address: Web Server Port' of VMS Card 2131
To select a source to record a VM 2501-Code
To record a voice message 2502-Voice Module
To verify a message 2503-Voice Module
To define voice message duration for voice modules 2504-Voice Module-Duration
To assign a voice message application to a voice module 2505-Voice Message Application Number-Voice
Module
To program the connection type for a VoIP port 7751-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Connection Type
To program the PPPoE User ID of a VoIP ethernet port 7752-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-PPPoE User ID
To program the PPPoE password of a VoIP ethernet port 7753-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-PPPoE Password
To program the IP address of a VoIP ethernet port 7754-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-IP Address
To program the subnet mask of a VoIP ethernet port 7755-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Subnet Mask
To program the gateway address of a VoIP ethernet port 7756-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Gateway Address
To program the DSN IP address of a VoIP ethernet port 7757-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-DNS IP Address
To program the DNS domain name for a VoIP ethernet port 7758-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-DNS Domain Name-#*
To program STUN server's address for a VoIP ethernet
port
7759-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-STUN Address
To program the STUN server's port for a VoIP ethernet port 7760-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-STUN Port
To enable/disable NAT for UDP for the VoIP Ethernet port 7761-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive for UDP
To program the NAT keep alive interval for a VoIP ethernet
port
7762-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive Interval for
UDP
To program the name for a VoIP ethernet port 7763-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Name-#*
To program SIP QoS - DiffServ/Tos Level for a VoIP
Ethernet Port
7765-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-DiffServ/ToS Level
To program the RTP QoS - DiffServ/ToS Level for a VoIP
Ethernet Port
7767-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-RTP QoS - DiffServ/ToS
Level
To program SIP UDP Port for VoIP Ethernet port 7768-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP USP Port
To program the RTP listen port for a SIP trunk 7769-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-RTP Listen Port
To program the SIP invite timer for a SIP trunk 7770-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Invite Timer
To program the SIP provisional timer for a SIP trunk 7771-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Provisional Timer
To assign LED to the SIP trunk of a VoIP ethernet port 7772-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP Trunk
To set the DNS connection type for the VoIP Ethernet Port 7777-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-DNS Connection Type
To select the UDP NAT Keep Alive message type for the
VoIP Ethernet
7778-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive Msg. Type
for UDP
To program SIP General Request Timer for the VoIP
Ethernet Port
7779-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP General Request Timer
To program the Router's Public IP Address for the VoIP
Ethernet Port
To program 'Use SIP Port Fetched using STUN? 7781-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Code
To enable/disable Sending ICMP Message 7782-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Code
To enable/disable '100rel response 7783-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Code
To program SIP TCP Port for the SIP Trunk 7784-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-SIP TCP Port
To enable/disable NAT Keep Alive for TCP on VoIP
Ethernet Port
7785-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive for TCP
Matrix
=X=X=
To program NAT Keep Alive Interval for TCP on VoIP
Ethernet Port
7786-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-NAT Keep Alive Interval for
TCP
To program PPPoE Service Name on VoIP Ethernet Port 7787-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-PPPoE Service Name
Matrix
Appendix G: Regulatory Information
Customer Information-ACTA
Federal Communications Commission Statement
Part 15:
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.
Part 68:
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA (Administrative
Council for Terminal Attachments). On the bottom side of this equipment is a label that contains, among other
information, a product identifier in the format US: MTXMF01BETERNITY. If requested, this number must be provided to
the telephone company.

REN Number
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on
the telephone line may result in devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of
RENs should not exceed 5.0. To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by
the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains, among
other information, a product identifier in the format US: MTXMF01BETERNITY. The digits represented by 01 are the
ringer equivalence number (REN) without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). If requested, this number
must be provided to the telephone company.
If this equipment 'ETERNITY' causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance
that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company
will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you
believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make
necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment 'ETERNITY', for repair or warranty information, please contact your dealer. If
the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the
equipment until the problem is resolved.
It is recommended that repairs be performed by the representatives of your Sales Representative.
The equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party
line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation
commission for information.
Using Automatic Dialers:
This equipment supports automatic dialing of Emergency number for using the feature 'Security Dialing and Reporting'.
Hence the user should take care about following point:
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND (OR) MAKING TEST CALLS TO EMERGENCY NUMBERS:
Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call.
Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evenings.
Using Direct Inward Dialing ("DID"):
The equipment supports a feature 'direct inward dialing' (DID). Hence while operating it, following points must be
considered:
ALLOWING THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO NOT PROVIDE FOR PROPER
ANSWER SUPERVISION IS A VIOLATION OF PART 68 OF THE FCC'S RULES. PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION
IS WHEN:
Matrix
A. This equipment returns answer supervision to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) when DID calls are:
Answered by the called station
Answered by the attendant
Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the customer premises equipment (CPE) user.
Routed to a dial prompt
B. This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN. Permissible exceptions are:
A call is unanswered
A busy tone is received
A reorder tone is received
Equal Access:
This equipment is capable of providing the end user equal access to the carrier of the user's choice. This equipment is
capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes.
Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator
Consumers Act of 1990.
Electrical Safety:
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal
equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem.
However Matrix provides all protection against lightning transients in the equipment; the user must provide a suitable
surge arrestor while integrating the equipment with other networking equipments.
Using FAX Capability:
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any
other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.) In order to program this information
into your FAX machine, Refer user's Guide for the software of the Fax operation, such as 'Win Fax'.
Alarm Dialing Equipment:
The equipment supports a Digital Output Port (DOP), for various control applications. For example, on receiving a signal
from the Digital Input Port connected to a sensor like fire alarm, smoke sensor, etc. the DOP will be switched 'ON'.
Please refer ETERNITY System manual and refer chapter Automated Control Applications for verifying proper operation
after installation.
CAUTION!
To ensure proper operation, this equipment must be installed according to the enclosed installation
instructions. To verify that the equipment is operating properly and can successfully report an
alarm, this equipment must be tested immediately after installation, and periodically thereafter,
according to the enclosed test instructions.
Installation and Repairs
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. Repairs
to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the dealer/supplier. Contact the support
at Support@MatrixTeleSol.com
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Matrix
TEC Certificate:
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
Matrix
CE Certificate:
Matrix
CE Certificate:
Matrix
RoHS Certificate:
=X=X=
Matrix
Appendix H: Open Source Licensing Terms and Conditions
The firmware of this product also includes some of the Open-Source software released under GNU General Public
License (GPL) Version 2. Terms of this license is printed in full below.
The source of the open source software used in this product is available on CD, upon written request from:
R&D Team
Matrix Telecom Pvt Ltd
394, Makarpura GIDC,
Vadodara - 390 010
Gujarat
India.
Customer shall bear the shipping and handling charges.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
Matrix
distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
Matrix
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
Matrix
allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
received the program in object code or executable form with such
an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
Matrix
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
Matrix
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
(at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
Matrix
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of
the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something
other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--
whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
Public License instead of this License.
Matrix
Appendix I: Acronyms
A
ACB: Auto Call Back
AIP: Analog Input Port
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal
ANSI: American National Standard Institute
ANT: Automatic Number Translation
AO/DI: Always On/Dynamic ISDN
AOP: Analog Output Port
APM: Analog Personality Module
ATA: Analogue Telephone Adaptor
AVD: Alternate Voice data signaling (Also called clear
channel, out-of-band signaling)
B
BCC: Byte Check Code
BGM: Background Music
BH: Break Hour
BI: Barge-In
BOS: Bit Oriented Signaling
BPS: Bits per second
BRI: Basic Rate Interface (2 B-Channels@64Kbps + D-
Channel@64Kbps)
BSCs: Base Station Controllers
BSS: Base Station Subsystem
BTSs: Base Transceivers Stations
C
CAS: Channel Associate Signaling, Call Accounting
Software
CCC: Call Cost Calculation
CCS: Common Channel Signaling
CCS: Compander Control Signal
CCWT: External Call Waiting Tone
CD: Carrier Detect
CDC: Call Duration Control
CDC: Call Duration Control
CDR: Call Detail Record
CESID:Customer Emergency Services Identification
Dialing
CI: Call Incoming
CLIP: Calling Line Identification and Presentation
CLIR: Calling Line Identity Restriction
CO: Call Outgoing
CO: Central Office
COLP: Connected Line Identification Presentation
COLR: Connected Line Identification Restriction
COS: Class of Service
CPC: Calling Party Control
CPD: Call Progress Detection
CPTG: Call Progress Tone (Generation)
CPU: Call Pick-Up
CPW: Custom Pulse Width
CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check
CTS: Clear to Send
CPE: Customer Premise Equipment
CUG: Closed User Group
CVT: Constant Voltage Transformer
D
DCD: Data Carrier Detected
DCE: Data Communication Equipment (Data circuit
terminating equipment)
DDI: Direct Dialing-In
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DID: Direct Inward Dialing
DIP: Digital Input Port
DISA: Direct Inward System Access
DKP: Digital Key Phone
DLC: Digital Station Card
DND: Do Not Disturb
DNS: Domain Name System
DOP: Digital Output Port
DS1: Digital Signal Level 1
DSR: Data Signal Ready
DSS64:Direct Station Selection Console
DST: Daylight Saving Time
DTE: Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF: Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTR: Data Terminal Ready
E
E1: E-Carrier1 (30B+D)
EID: Exchange ID
ENQ: Enquiry
ETX: End of Text
E & M: Ear and Mouth Interface
F
FAS: Frame alignment signal
FCBC: Float cum Boost Charger
FDL:
FIFO: First In First Out
FM: Frequency Modulation
FSK: Frequency Shift Keying
FTP: File Transfer Protocol
G
GDT: Gas Discharge Tube
GND: Ground
GSM: Global System for Mobile
GPRS: General Purpose Radio Service
H
HDSL: High Speed Digital Subscriber Line
HLR: Home Location Register
HOG: Hot Outward Dialing
I
IC: Incoming call
ICWT: Internal Call Waiting Tone
IEC:
IMEI: International Mobile Equipment Identity
IP: Internet Protocol
IR: Interrupt
ISDN: Integrated Service Digital Network
Matrix
ISP: Internet Service Provider
ITU: International Telecommunication Union
IVDT: Integral Voice/Data Terminal
J
K
L
LA: Left Align
LAN: Local Area Network
LAN NIC: Network Interface Card
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display
LCM: Line Coding Mechanism
LCR: Least Cost Routing
LCS: Live Call Screening
LE: Local Exchange
LED: Light Emitting Diode
LIFO: Last in First Out
LNR: Last Number Redial
LOF: Loss of Frame
LOS: Loss of signal
LSR: Least Cost Routing
M
MAC: Media Access Control Address
MCC: Mobile Country Code
MCI: Malicious Call Identification
MDF: Main Distribution Frame
MFA: Multi-Frame Alignment
MNC: Mobile Network Code
MOH: Music on Hold
MOV: Metal Oxide Varistor
MS: Mobile Station
MSC: Mobile Switching Center
MSN: Multiple Subscribers Numbers
MTBF: Mean Time between Failures
N
NH: Non Working Hour
NPI: Numbering Plan Identification, Number Planning
Index
NSS: Network and Switching Subsystem
NT1/2: Network Termination (Type 1/2)
O
OG: Outgoing
OMC: Operation Maintenance Centers
OOF: Out of Frame
OSI: Open Systems Interconnect
OSS: Operation Support Subsystem
P
PAS: Public Address System
PBX: Private Branch Exchange
PC: Personal Computer
PCM: Primary Interface Compounding
PCOL: Personal Central Office Line
PFT: Power Fail Transfer Module
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PISN: Private Integrated Service Network
PLCC: Power Line Carrier Communication
PMS: Property Management Software
POTS: Plain Old Telephone Systems
PPDC: Pre PSTN Digit Count
PPM: Primary Protection Module
PPS: Pulse per second
PRI: Primary Rate Interface (23B+D/30B+2D)
PS: Power Supply
PSK: Phase Shift Keying
PSTN: Public Switched Telephone Network
PUK: Personal Unlock Key
Q
QAM: Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QSIG: Q-Signaling
R
RA: Right Align
RBT: Ring Back Tone
RF: Radio Frequency
RI: Ring Indicator
RLSD: Receive Line Signal Detector (also called
Carrier Detect)
RTC: Real Time Clock
RTS: Request to Send
RXD: Receive data
S
SA: System Administrator
SAL: System Activity Log
SE: System Engineer
SEFS: Severely Eroded Framed Seconds
SES: Severely eroded seconds
SFL: System Fault Log
SID: Exchange Identity
SIP: Session Initiated Protocol
SIM: Subscriber Identity Module
SLIC: Subscriber Loop Integrated System
SLT: 2 wire Analog Station, Single Line Telephone
SMDR: Station Message Detail Recording
SMPS: Switch Mode Power Supply
SP: Service Provider
STX: Start of Text
SPID: Service Provider Identifier
T
T1: T-Carrier (23B+D)
TA: Terminal Adaptor
TAC: Trunk Access Code
TAG: Trunk Access Group
TCM: Trellis Coding Modulation
TCP/IP:Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TE1/2: Terminal Equipment (Type 1/2)
TEI: Terminal Endpoint Identifier
TLG: Trunk Landing Group
TON: Type of Numbering Plan (Caller/Called)
TON: Type of Number
TWT: Two Wire Trunks, 2 wire Analog Trunk Card
TXD: Transmit data
U
UART: Universal Asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UPS: Un-interrupted Power Supply
Matrix
V
VIC: Voice Interface Card
VLR: Visitor Location Register
VMS: Voice Mail Service
VMA: Voice Message Application
W
WAN: Wide Area Network
WH: Working Hour
X
Y
Z

Matrix
Appendix J: Warranty Statement
Matrix Telecom Pvt. Ltd. (Matrix) warrants to its consumer purchaser any of its products to be free of defects in material,
workmanship and performance for a period of 15 months from date of manufacturing or 12 months from the date of
installation which ever is earlier.
During this warranty period, Matrix will at its option, repair or replace the product at no additional charge if the product is
found to have manufacturing defect. Any replacement product or part/s may be furnished on an exchange basis, which
shall be new or like-new, provided that it has functionality at least equal to that of the product, being replaced. All
replacement parts and products will be the property of Matrix. Parts repaired or replaced will be under warranty
throughout the remainder of the original warranty period only.
This limited warranty does not apply to:
1. Products that have been subjected to abuse, accident, natural disaster, misuse, modification, tampering, faulty
installation, lack of reasonable care, repair or service in any way that is not contemplated in the documentation for the
product or if the model or serial number has been altered, tampered with, defaced or removed.
2. Products which have been damaged by lightning storms, water or power surges or which have been neglected,
altered, used for a purpose other than the one for which they were manufactured, repaired by customer or any party
without Matrixs written authorization or used in any manner inconsistent with Matrixs instructions.
3. Products received improperly packed or physically damaged.
4. Products damaged due to operation of product outside the products specifications or use without designated
protections.
Warranty valid only if:
Primary protection on all the ports provided.
Mains supply is within limit and protected.
Environment conditions are maintained as per the product specifications.
Warranty Card:
When the product is installed, please return the warranty card with:
Date, signature and stamp of the customer
Date, signature and stamp of the channel partner
Matrix assumes that the customer agrees with the warranty terms even when the warranty card is not signed and
returned as suggested.
The Purchaser shall have to bear shipping charges for sending product to Matrix for testing/rectification. The product
shall be shipped to the Purchaser at no-charge if the material is found to be under warranty. The Purchaser shall have to
either insure the product or assume liability for loss or damage during transit.
Matrix reserves the right to waive off or make any changes in its warranty policy without giving any notice.
If Matrix is unable to repair or replace, as applicable, a defective product which is covered by Matrix warranty, Matrix
shall, within a reasonable time after being notified of the defect, refund the purchase price of the product provided the
consumer/purchaser returns the product to Matrix.
In no event will Matrix be liable for any damages including lost profits, lost business, lost savings, downtime or delay,
labor, repair or material cost, injury to person, property or other incidental or consequential damages arising out of use of
or inability to use such product, even if Matrix has been advised of the possibility of such damages or losses or for any
claim by any other party.
Except for the obligations specifically set forth in this Warranty Policy Statement, in no event shall Matrix be liable for any
direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract or any other legal theory and
where advised of the possibility of such damages.
Neither Matrix nor any of its distributors, dealers or sub-dealers makes any other warranty of any kind, whether
expressed or implied, with respect to Matrix products. Matrix and its distributors, dealers or sub-dealers specifically
disclaim the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
This warranty is not transferable and applies only to the original consumer purchaser of the Product. Warranty shall be
void if the warranty card is not completed and registered with Matrix within 30 days of installation.
All legal course of action subjected to Vadodara (Gujarat, India) Jurisdiction only.
Matrix
Matrix
Index
A
AC Impedance-See SLT Hardware Template on page 746.
Account Name-See Account Codes on page 243.
Acknowledge-See Station Message Detail Recording-Posting on page 782.
Advanced Configuration-See Backup-SMDR on page 271.
Advanced Time-See Daylight Saving Time (DST) on page 398.
AIP-See Music on Hold (MOH) on page 639.
Alternate Group Number-See Alternate Number Dialing on page 254.
Amount-See Call Budget on page 290.
ANI-See See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Anonymous Calls-See Trunk Feature Template on page 882.
Answer Duration-See Station Message Detail Recording on page 781.
Answer Function-See Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming on page 432.
Answer Tone-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
ANT Apply-See OG Trunk Bundle Group on page 653.
AOC-See QSIG on page 687.
AOCE-See QSIG on page 687.
AOP-See Paging on page 660.
Area Code Table-See Call Cost Calculation (CCC) on page 300.
Audio Signal-See Paging on page 660.
Auto Call Back Ring Timer-See Auto Call Back (ACB) on page 261.
Automatic Exit-See System Administrator (SA) Mode on page 834.
B
Back Light-See Digital Key Phone-Operation on page 420.
Basic Configuration-See Backup-SMDR on page 271.
BCC Signal-See Station Message Detail Recording-Posting on page 782.
Beeps Duration Conference-See Conference-3 Party on page 381.
Beeps During Conversation-See Conversation Recording on page 395.
Beep-See Barge-In on page 284.
Blind transfer to VMS-See Call Transfer on page 352.
Blue Alarm-See E1 Maintenance on page 526.
Brightness-See Digital Key Phone-Operation on page 420.
C
Call Back Timer-See Call Back on Mobile Port on page 287.
Call Block-See Internal Call Restriction on page 565.
Call Budget-See External List on page 534.
Call Completion-See QSIG on page 687.
Call Diversion-See QSIG on page 687.
Call Forward Ring Timer-See Call Forward on page 331.
Call Forward Type-See Call Forward-Remote on page 335.
Call-Inn-See Station Message Detail Recording-Posting on page 782.
Call Intrusion-See QSIG on page 687.
Call Offer-See QSIG on page 687.
Call Pickup Group-See Call Pick Up on page 341.
Caller Category-See Station Basic Feature Template on page 764.
Cancel Key-See Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming on page 432.
CDC-See External List on page 534.
Change SA Password-See System Security on page 850.
Change SE Password-See System Security on page 850.
Change the User Password-See User Password on page 902.
Channels Reserved-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Class of Service-See Station Basic Feature Template on page 764.
CLIP-See QSIG on page 687.
CLIR-See QSIG on page 687.
CLIR-Override-See Auto Call Back (ACB) on page 261.
Clock Source-See Clock Synchronization on page 368.
Cloning-MAC Address Cloning 619
CNIP-See QSIG on page 687.
Matrix
COLP-See QSIG on page 687.
COLR-See QSIG on page 687.
Comm One-See Station Message Detail Recording-Posting on page 782.
Communication Port-See Programming Using a Computer on page 685.
Compander Control Signal-See E&M Features on page 517.
Connection Type-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
Contrast-See Digital Key Phone-Operation on page 420.
Conversation-See Call Splitting on page 350.
Cranking the Ring-See Magneto Trunk Port on page 621.
Cost of Call-See Call Cost Calculation (CCC) on page 300.
Country Code-See Station Message Detail Recording-Posting on page 782.
CPTG Type Number-See Call Progress Tones on page 343.
CRC-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Create a Macro-See Key Board Macro on page 598.
Custom Pulse Width-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
D
Data Calls-See ISDN-PRI on page 586.
Data Transfer Retry-See Station Message Detail Recording-Posting on page 782.
Date Format-See Real Time Clock (RTC) on page 701.
DDI Routing Reference ID-See OG Reference Table on page 649.
Debug Level-See Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port on page 405.
Debug on Mobile-See Mobile Port on page 630.
Delay Dial Timer-See Security Dialing and Reporting on page 726.
Delay Time-See Daylight Saving Time (DST) on page 398.
Department Group and ISDN Terminal-See Department Call on page 412.
Destination Address-See Peer-to-Peer Calling on page 663.
Destination Station-See Live Call Supervision on page 615.
Dial Type-See TWT Hardware Template on page 889.
Dialed Number List-See Automatic Number Translation on page 267.
Dialed Property-See PLCC-An Introduction on page 668.
Diff Serve-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
Digit Pad Count-See SLT Hardware Template on page 746.
Disconnection Tone-See Disconnect Information on TWT on page 467.
DISA Variants-See Direct Inward System Access (DISA) on page 456.
DND Message-See Do Not Disturb (DND) on page 472.
DNS Connection Type-VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters 918
DNIS End Type-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
DTMF-See Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) on page 356.
DTMF Detection-See SLT Hardware Template on page 746. See TWT Hardware Template on page 889.
DTMF Digit Timer-See T1 RBS Parameters on page 858.
DTMF Out Dial-See TWT Hardware Template on page 889.
DTMF Volume-See Digital Key Phone-Operation on page 420.
Dual Ring-See Call Forward on page 331.
Dynamic Toll Control-See External List on page 534.
E
Emergency Reporting-See Emergency Detection and Reporting on page 530.
End of Dialing Digit-See System Parameters on page 843.
Enquire-See Station Message Detail Recording-Posting on page 782.
Enterprise Mode-See System Parameters on page 843.
Error Seconds-See E1 Maintenance on page 526.
Event Sense Timer-See Digital Input Port (DIP) on page 418.
Express Line Network-See PLCC-An Introduction on page 668.
External List-See Call Duration Control (CDC) on page 326.
External Music-See Music on Hold (MOH) on page 639.
External Number-See Call Duration Control (CDC) on page 326.
External VMS-See RTC Synchronization on page 725.
F
Far End Loopback-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
FAS-See E1 Maintenance on page 526.
Matrix
Fax Landing Group-See Trunk Feature Template on page 882.
Fax Option-See SIP Trunk Parameters on page 734.
Flash Timer-See SLT Hardware Template on page 746.
Forced Account Code-See Station Advanced Feature Template on page 759.
Forced Maturity Timer-See Answer Supervision on TWT on page 258.
Form Field-See System Parameters on page 843.
Framing-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Frequency Band-See Mobile Port on page 630.
FSK-See Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) on page 356.
Function Type-See Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming on page 432.
G
Gateway Address-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
General Orbit-See Call Park on page 339.
General Request Timer-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
Glare-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Global Abbreviated Dialing-See Abbreviated Dialing on page 221.
Global Directory-See Abbreviated Dialing on page 221.
Hotel/Motel Mode-See System Activity Log on page 829.
GPAX Change-See Station Advanced Feature Template on page 759.
Greeting Message-See Voice Message Applications on page 911.
H
Handset Volume-See Digital Key Phone-Operation on page 420.
Headset Connectivity-See Digital Key Phone-Operation on page 420.
Hot Outward Dialing-See Hotline on page 559.
Hotel Mode-See System Parameters on page 843.
I
IC Video Call-See ISDN-PRI on page 586.
ICMP-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
Idle Code-See ISDN-BRI on page 573.
IDP-See E&M Feature Template on page 523.
Immediate + Wink-See E&M Features on page 517.
Incoming Call Mode-See Mobile Port on page 630.
Increment Counter-See Station Message Detail Recording on page 781.
Internal Digit Wait Timer-See SLT Hardware Template on page 746.
Internal Music-See Music on Hold (MOH) on page 639.
IP Address-See Jeeves on page 589.
IP Dialing-See Peer-to-Peer Calling on page 663.
ISDN Number-See OG Reference Table on page 649.
ISDN Terminal-See Station Basic Feature Template on page 764.
J
K
Key Click Settings-See Digital Key Phone-Operation on page 420.
Key Location-See Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming on page 432.
L
LCD Timer-See Live Call Screening on page 614.
LCR Type-See Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based on page 605.
Line Buildout-See T1 RBS Parameters on page 858.
Line Loopback-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Line Type-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Listening Port of Web Server-See System Parameters on page 843.
Location Code-See Abbreviated Dialing on page 221.
Lock/Unlock DKP Keypad-See System Security on page 850.
Loop Count-See Digital Key Phone-Operation on page 420.
Loop Current-See SLT Hardware Template on page 746.
Matrix
M
MAC Cloning-MAC Address Cloning 619
Magneto Phone-See Magneto Trunk Port on page 621.
Mailbox-See Call Taping on page 351.
Manual Exit-See System Administrator (SA) Mode on page 834.
Maximum Complied Cycle Time-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Maximum Dialed Digits-See Closed User Group (CUG) on page 370.
MCC-MNC-See Network Selection for Mobile Port on page 646.
Message Group-See Message Wait on page 626.
Message Wait Indication-See QSIG on page 687.
Metering Bit-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Minimum Caller ID Digits-See System Parameters on page 843.
Monitor a Port-See System Parameters on page 843.
MTBF Data-See System Fault Log on page 839.
Multiple Alarms-See Alarms on page 245.
Multiple Gateway-See Static Routing Table on page 752.
N
Name Format-See Name Programming on page 642.
NAT-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
NAT Keep Alive Message-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
Near End Trunk-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Network Registration Retry Count-See Mobile Port on page 630.
Network Response Timer-See Mobile Port on page 630.
Networking of PBX-See ISDN-PRI on page 586.
NFAS-See E1 Maintenance on page 526.
Normally Open-See Digital Output Port (DOP) on page 447.
O
OG Reference Number-See OG Reference Table on page 649.
OG Trunk Bundle Group-See Station Basic Feature Template on page 764.
Open Loop Disconnect-See Disconnect Information on TWT on page 467.
Operator-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Orientation-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Originating Station-See Auto Call Back (ACB) on page 261.
Out Bound Proxy-See SIP Trunk Parameters on page 734.
Out of Frame-See E1 Maintenance on page 526.
P
PPPoE Server Name-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
Page Zone-See Meet Me Paging on page 625.
PAS-See Paging on page 660.
Payload Loopback-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
PBX Expansion-See E&M Connectivity on page 514.
Personal Abbreviated Dialing-See Abbreviated Dialing on page 221.
Personal Memory Group-See Abbreviated Dialing on page 221.
Personal Orbit-See Call Park on page 339.
Phone Book-See See Automatic Number Translation on page 267.
PISN-See System Parameters on page 843.
Polarity Reversal-See Answer Supervision on TWT on page 258.
Port Number-See CLI Based Routing on page 366.
Port Type-See CLI Based Routing on page 366.
PRACK-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
Precedence-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
Priority Level-See Priority on page 676.
Priority-In other Exchange-See PLCC-An Introduction on page 668.
Priority-Within the Exchange-See PLCC-An Introduction on page 668.
Privacy from DND-Override-See Auto Call Back (ACB) on page 261.
Program Weekly OFF-See Call Cost Calculation (CCC) on page 300.
Programmable Keys-See Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming on page 432.
Property Code-See Station Message Detail Recording on page 781.
PUK-See SIM PIN on page 733.
Matrix
Pulse Rate Type-See Call Cost Calculation (CCC) on page 300.
Q
QoS Type-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
R
RBT Wait Timer-See Auto Redial on page 262.
Recall-See QSIG on page 687.
Receive Gain-See Mobile Port on page 630.
Receive the Emergency Call-See Security Dialing and Reporting on page 726.
Receive the Security Reporting-See Security Dialing and Reporting on page 726.
Red Alarm-See E1 Maintenance on page 526.
Reference ID-See SIP Trunk Parameters on page 734.
Region Code-See Call Progress Tones on page 343.
Registration Retry Timer-See SIP Trunk Parameters on page 734.
Release Pulse-See E&M Features on page 517.
Reset for Serial Number-See Station Message Detail Recording on page 781.
Response to Data Time Out-See Station Message Detail Recording-Posting on page 782.
Restart (Reset)-See System Parameters on page 843.
Ring Cadence OFF Timer-See TWT Hardware Template on page 889.
Ring Timer-See Routing Group on page 721.
Ring Type-See Distinctive Rings on page 470.
Ringer Mode-See Digital Key Phone-Operation on page 420.
Rotation Flag-See OG Trunk Bundle Group on page 653.
Rotation Method-See Routing Group on page 721.
Routers Public IP Address-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
S
SA Commands-See Access Codes on page 225.
Scheduled ON Time-See Automated Control Applications on page 264.
Scheduled Reminder-See Reminder on page 709.
SEFS-See E1 Maintenance on page 526.
Seizure Types-See E&M Features on page 517.
Self Route Flag-See Closed User Group (CUG) on page 370.
Send CLI-See SIP Trunk Parameters on page 734.
Service Charge Type-See Call Cost Calculation (CCC) on page 300.
Service Duration-See Auto Call Back (ACB) on page 261.
Signal Strength-See Mobile Port on page 630.
SIP Invite Timer-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
SIP Over TCP-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
SIP Provisional Timer-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
Situation-See Distinctive Rings on page 470.
Software Version/Revision-See System Parameters on page 843.
Source NPI-See ISDN-BRI on page 573.
Source Port IP Address-See SIP Trunk Parameters on page 734.
Special Information Tone-See DS1 Trunks on page 475.
Special Keys-See Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming on page 432.
Speed-See Communication Ports on page 377.
Stand-by notification-See System Parameters on page 843.
Start DDI Number-See DDI Routing Table on page 403.
Start Delay Duration-See T1 RBS Parameters on page 858.
Start of Packet-See Station Message Detail Recording-Posting on page 782.
Static IP-See VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters on page 918.
Strip Digit Count-See Closed User Group (CUG) on page 370.
STUN-See SIP Trunk Parameters on page 734.
Substitute Number List-See Automatic Number Translation on page 267.
Syslog Client-See Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port on page 405.
Synchronization-See RTC Synchronization on page 725.
System Timers-See System Parameters on page 843.
Symmetric RTP-See SIP Trunk Parameters on page 734.
Matrix
T
T1 FDL-See T1 Maintenance on page 852.
TEI Negotiation-See ISDN-BRI on page 573.
Tie Line-See PLCC-An Introduction on page 668.
Time for schduled reminder-See Reminder on page 709.
Time Table for Emergency-See Security Dialing and Reporting on page 726.
Time Zone-See Time Tables on page 870.
Toll Control-See Dynamic Lock on page 512.
Tone Sensing-See Voice Mail Integration on page 908.
Total DDI Numbers-See DDI Routing Table on page 403.
Transmit Gain-See Mobile Port on page 630.
Trunk Access Code-See Auto Redial on page 262.
Trunk Bundle Number-See OG Trunk Bundle Group on page 653.
Trunk Count-See OG Trunk Bundle Group on page 653.
Trunk First Digit Wait Timer-See Trunk Feature Template on page 882.
Trunk Inactivity Timer-See E&M Features on page 517.
Trunk Number-See OG Trunk Bundle Group on page 653.
Trunk Type-See OG Trunk Bundle Group on page 653.
Trusted Caller List-See Call Back on Mobile Port on page 287.
TWT Start Type-See TWT Hardware Template on page 889.
TWT Type-See TWT Hardware Template on page 889.
U
Unavailable Seconds-See T1 Maintenance on page 852.
Unit Charge-See Call Cost Calculation (CCC) on page 300.
User ID-See SIP Trunk Parameters on page 734.
User Password-See Direct Inward System Access (DISA) on page 456.
V
Video Conferencing Equipment-See Video Call on page 903.
Video Phone-See ISDN-PRI on page 586.
VLAN ID-VLAN Tagging 905
VMS Groups-See Voice Mail Integration on page 908.
Vocoder-See SIP Trunk Parameters on page 734.
Voice Guided Remote Alarm-See Alarms on page 245.
Voice Module-See Voice Message Applications on page 911.
VoPP Fail-See System Fault Log on page 839.
W
Wait Wink Timer-See T1 RBS Parameters on page 858.
Walk-In Station-See Walk-In Class of Service on page 928.
Walkout Mode-See Station Advanced Feature Template on page 759.
Watchdog-See System Parameters on page 843.
Web Configuration-See Jeeves on page 589.
X
Y
Yellow Alarm-See E1 Maintenance on page 526.
Z
=X=X=
Matrix
V
e
r
s
i
o
n

8
,

D
e
c
e
m
b
e
r

2
0
0
9
MATRIX TELECOM PVT. LTD.
Corporate Office:
394-GIDC, Makarpura, Vadodara - 390010, India.
Tel.:+91 265 2630555, Fax: +91 265 2636598
E-mail: Info@MatrixTeleSol.com
Factory:
39-GIDC, Waghodia - 391760, Dist. Vadodara, India.
Tel.: +91 2668 262056/57
Technical Support:
Tel.: +91 2668 263172/73, Fax: +91 2668 262631
E-mail: Support@MatrixTeleSol.com
www.MatrixTeleSol.com

Eternity V8 System Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Eternity V8 System Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ETERNITY

Potrebbero piacerti anche